Health at Home 



A DIGEST OF 
MODERN MEDICAL SCIENCE 



COMPILED FROM STANDARD AUTHORITIES 



/ 



BY 



HOME REMEDY COMPANY, 

IOWA CITY, IOWA. 



1900. 

L 



33376 



jL.ibrary of Congress 
j 1*0 LORIES feUH ED 

AUG 11 1900 

Copyright entry 

SECOND COPY, 

Delivered to 

ORDER DIVISION, 

AUG 27 1900 



copyright, 1900 

By Home Remedy Company 

iowa city, iowa 



68740 



Iowa Citizen Publishing Company, 

printers and binders. 

iowa city, iowa. 



f\CS\ 
Wis 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 



Introduction. 

Hygiene — Health Rules. 

Soils. 

Water. 

Removal of Excreta. 

Air. 

Physiology of Digestion. 

Food. 

Discussion of Foods. 

Alcoholic Beverages. 

Non-alcoholic Beverages. 

Exercise. 

Clothing. 

Disinfection and Deodoriza- 
tion. 

General Remarks. 

Nursing. 

The Sick Room. 

The Bed. 

Bed Sores. 

Circulation of the Blood. 

Temperature. 

Clinical Thermometer. 

Respiration. 

Ventilation. 

Diet in Disease. 

Sick Room Dietary. 

Injections into the Bowel. 

Counter-irritants . 

Poultices. 

Baths. 

Massage. 

The Urine. 

The Observation of Symp- 
toms, 
General Diseases. 

Smallpox. 

Erysipelas — St. Anthony's 
Fire. 



Dysentery — Bloody Flux . 

Malarial Fever — Intermittent 
Fever— Fever and Ague — 
Swamp Fever. 

Hydrophobia. 

Glanders and Anthrax. 

Trichinosis. 

Bronchitis. 

Asthma. 

Hay Fever. 

Congestion of the Lungs. 

Pneumonia — Lung Fever. 

Tuberculosis — Consumption. 

Pleurisy. 

Diseases of the Heart. 

Acute Catarrh of the Stom- 
ach — Acute Indigestion. 

Diseases of the Stomach. 

Inflammation of the Bowels. 

Colic — Gripes. 

Cholera Morbus. 

Hemorrhoids — Piles. 

Diseases of the Intestines. 

Diseases of the Liver. 

Neuralgia. 

Habitual Headache — Sick 
Headache. 

Paralysis. 

Diseases of the Spinal Cord. 

Infantile Paralysis. 

Apoplexy. 

Delirium Tremens. 

Heat Stroke— Sun Stroke. 

Hysteria. 

Nervous Prostration. 

Bright's Disease. 

Catarrh of the Bladder 

Rheumatism. 

Diabetes. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



CONTINUED. 



Scrofula. 

Differences Noticed in Disea- 
ses. 
Children and Their Diseases, 

General Care of Infants and 
Children. 

Peculiarities of Disease in 
Children. 

The Administration of Reme- 
dies. 

Counter-irritants . 

Poultices. 

Doses of Medicine for Chil- 
dren. 

Diseases of the New-born 
Child. 

Infant Feeding and Nutrition. 

Diseases Dependent upon 
Food and Feeding. 

Diseases of the Digestive 
System. 

Diseases of the Stomach. 

Diseases of the Intestines. 

Worms. 

Diseases of the Liver. 

Diseases of the Respiratory- 
System. 

Diseases of the Genital Or- 
gans. 

Diseases of the Nervous Sys- 
tem. 

Bone, Joint and Skin Dis- 
eases. 



Specific Infectious Diseases. 

Scarlet Fever. 

Measles. 

German Measles. 

Chickenpox. 

Whooping Cough. 

Mumps. 

Diphtheria. 

Typhoid Fever. 

Influenza — La Grippe. 
Surgery. 

Inflammation. 

Antiseptics and Surgical 
Dressings. 

Hemorrhage. 

Wounds. 

Snake Bites. 

Lock Jaw — Tetanus. 

Burns and Scalds — Frostbite. 

Carbuncle. 
Obstetrics— Childbirth. 
Treatment of Poisoning. 
Treatment of Cases of Drown- 
ing. 
Diseases of the Eye and Ear. 
Diseases of the Nose and 

Throat. 
Index of Symptoms. 
General Index. 
Glossary. 
Appendix. 



PREFACE. 



The need of a comprehensive book upon the subject of Medi- 
cine, and a book which can be read and understood by all seems 
to exist. The book which is here offered to the reading public 
makes no claim to be in any sense an original work but is a 
compilation from the best writers of the day upon the subjects 
treated. Many practical points, learned by personal experience, 
will be found in the volume but all standard authorities have 
been consulted and freely used in the preparation of this work. 
The authors do not claim that the book is a complete store-house 
of medical knowledge but rather a collection of practical hints 
and methods which will be an ever present aid in the home and 
which will furnish the means for gaining some slight medical 
knowledge by the people at large. 

The diseases have been taken up under two heads general, and 
and children's, and in but few cases are the diseases described 
under both heads. Where a disease is a disease of children and 
also of adults it has, in most cases, been taken up under one head 
and reference made to the other form of the disease. 



INTRODUCTION 



There has been, for many years, much discussion among lead- 
ing physicians respecting the propriety of spreading knowledge 
of medical subjects among the common people. A certain gdass 
of the profession have bitterly opposed the idea of popularization 
of medical subjects, claiming that more harm than good would 
be done by so doing, since unqualified /persons would thereby 
be led to undertake the management of cases which require 
the educated judgment and skill possessed alone by the physician 
who has had a long course of training in schools, and an exten- 
sive bedside experience. 

We have long believed that this objection was based upon a 
partial and prejudiced view of the subject, and that a considera- 
tion of its various bearings from a more liberal standpoint would 
lead candid thinkers to a different conclusion. It would not be 
urged that because everyone cannot become learned in all the 
abstractions of modern theology, the masses should be kept in 
utter ignorance of religious theories, notwithstanding the possi- 
bility that such knowledge might be used in an unwise manner 
under some circumstances. Every man, who desires to do so, 
has as good a right to learn all he is capable of comprehending 
of the science of medicine, as he has of the science of mathemat- 
ics, astronomy, law, or any other department of human knowledge. 
We further hold that the best way to check the rapidly increas- 
ing consumption of " patent medicines" and the patronizing of 
the innumerable "quacks" who claim to perform miracles, is to 
educate the people out of the superstitions upon which alone the 
nostrum vendor and the brazen "quack" thrive and flourish. 
To this end the study of anatomy, physiology, hygiene, and 
particularly the laws of life, with the influence thereon of habits, 
conditions and surroundings, should enter largely into the educa- 
tion of the young and should be carried on through life. They 
should be taught that all unhealthy conditions are the result of 



10 HEAI/fH AT HOME. 

transgressions of nature's laws, that every effect has its ante- 
cedent cause and that these effects follow their causes as certainly 
as night follows day. They should be taught the difference 
between a healthy and an unhealthy environment. These sub- 
jects are fully treated in the chapter upon Hygiene and should 
be read and studied carefully by everyone. It has been the 
endeavor of the authors of this book to produce a comprehensive 
digest of the latest standard authorities known to the scientific 
profession of medicine, upon all the subjects treated, avoiding as 
far as possible the use of technical names, and where it is neces- 
sary to make use of technical terms, to fully explain their mean- 
ing in simple language. Our idea is not to place in the hands of 
the public a book, and it's accompanying cabinet of remedies and 
appliances, which will enable them to dispense with the physi- 
cian in all cases, but rather to provide a means by which the 
efforts of the physician may be supplemented and many visits 
rendered unnecessary. Long and extensive experience has con- 
vinced us that a large proportion of the visits made by physicians 
are unnecessary and could have been avoided had the proper 
remedies been at hand and the ordinary knowledge and common 
sense required for their use been exercised. Nature herself is a 
grand physician, and, given opportunity, performs wonderful 
cures. The most successful physicians are those who constantly 
recognize nature's power as a healer and who direct their efforts 
to the removal of the cause of sickness and to aiding nature to 
restore normal conditions. In the preparation of the cabinet of 
remedies which accompanies this work we have carefully selected 
only those remedies and combinations which have been thor- 
oughly tested and proved to be safe and reliable, and which are 
known to produce the result desired in the particular conditions 
for which they are prescribed. We have adopted the plan of 
preparing all of our remedies in tablet form and as far as possible 
making use of only the active principle of the drug in the tablet. 
By this plan we secure a form of drug which will not deteriorate 
by keeping, as the powders from which the tablets are made are 
thoroughly dried before being compressed. Our specially designed 
screw top bottles, by hermetically sealing the bottle when screwed 
down tightly, also affords additional means of preserving the 
purity of our preparations. A further reason for the use of the 



HEAI/1'H AT HOMK. 11 

use of the tablet form in our remedies is that it enables us to 
use the most accurate dose and . reduce to a minimum the 
quantity of drug necessary to produce the desired effect, thus 
avoiding overloading the stomach with irritating and nauseous 
drugs, which is unavoidable when the ordinary form of tinctures 
and fluid extracts is used. In the preparation of our tablets we 
have used the minimum single dose in each tablet, thus render- 
ing the taking of an overdose impossible except by the exercise 
of the most gross carelessness. Throughout this work we have, 
when recommending a drug or remedy, referred to such drug or 
remedy by number. Our reason for this is that many drugs bear 
similar names and to one unfamiliar with scientific and technical 
terms, great danger ol mixing drugs by confusion of names 
would exist; particularly would this be so when laboring under 
stress of excitement in case of sudden illness, or injury, or should 
the necessity of immediate use of a drug occur during the dark- 
ness of night. Again in making the selection of a remedy from 
the cabinet it is much more easy to find a certain number, when 
arranged in order, than it would be to find the same remedy if it 
were necessary to look for an unfamiliar name, and to avoid all 
possible error each individual tablet bears its proper number. 

In the further preparation of the Home Remedy Cabinet we have 
included such instruments and appliances as our experience has 
taught us can be used to great advantage in every home, and by 
their use much knowledge can be obtained which would other- 
wise be impossible. Kvery instrument and appliance is standard 
and thoroughly reliable and when used intelligently and care- 
fully add enormously to the value and usefulness of the cabinet. 
In the administration of remedies to obtain the best results it is 
essential that they be absolutely pure, and free from deleterious 
substances. The Home Remedy Company guarantee the absolute 
purity of all their preparations and advise that all remedies be 
procured from them. Bach cabinet contains a printed list, with 
prices attached, and we guarantee to supply the remedies at 
the prices there named which are lower than druggist's prices, 
and we guarantee absolute purity and reliability. The Home 
Remedy Company also carries a full line of drug supplies and 
appliances which will be found listed in the back of this book, 
and from which list the users of the book and remedy cabinet 



12 HKAI/TH AT HOME). 

can order, either by mail or express, whatever articles they may 
need, with absolute assurance of fair dealing and reliability. All 
of our goods are listed at the lowest price consistent with the best 
of material and reliability. 

As good health is man's best inheritance, every precaution 
should be taken to preserve and maintain the body in a healthy, 
and normal condition, and that this effort is constantly being 
made is proven by the wide spread use of innumerable " patent 
medicines," nostrums and so-called "panaceas." To such an 
extent has the use of nostrums spread, that it may almost be said 
to constitute a national habit, and it is to combat this use of 
"patent medicines" which have for their purpose merely the 
relief of certain symptoms, and not the cure of the disease, that 
the book, "Health at Home," and its accompanying Home 
Remedy Cabinet, is placed in the hands of the people, so that 
any one ot ordinary intelligence may be able to recognize the 
more common forms of ailments and apply the correct and scien- 
tific remedy demanded, thus preventing the saturation of the 
system with what are usually but combinations of alcoholics and 
opiates, which, if continued, result in poisoning the system, dis- 
arranging the digestive functions, and disturbing the nerve cen- 
tres, often leading to the formation of the drug habit, which pro- 
duces untold suffering and misery. No home should be without 
the simple remedies needed to relieve the ordinary forms of 
disease; and indeed such remedies as quinine, salts, sage tea and 
various salves are found in every home. But how much better 
it is to have at hand ready for instant use pure and safe remedies 
of known scientific value, with full directions for their use. What 
a comfort it is to parents to know that they have at hand means 
for treating any and all conditions which may arise in the lives 
of their children? With the book, " Health at Home, " and the 
Home Remedy Cabinet at hand, the strident, barking congh of 
croup looses its terrors, the cold in the chest may receive its 
proper remedy at the proper time, the delerium of high fever in 
a teething child may be checked and convulsions prevented, and 
the mother will time and again have the satisfaction of hearing 
the physician, when he arrives, say to her: "Your prompt treat- 
ment has prevented your baby from having lung fever. ' ' In this 
way the preparatory treatment will have begun and much time 



HBAIvTH AT HOME. 13 

and many visits by the doctor will have been saved, thus lessen- 
ing the expense, besides saving the patient much suffering. As 
a further means of economy may be mentioned the time lost to 
a wage earner by sickness, which may be greatly lessened by 
prompt application of the proper remedies before the disease has 
fastened itself upon the system, and also by careful observance of 
the rules of healthful living, which latter are fully and plainly 
brought out in the chapters on Hygiene and Diet, many of the 
common ailments may be entirely prevented ; and, after all, the 
tendency of modern scientific medicine is toward the prevention 
rather than the cure of disease, and the true physician endeavors 
by advice and teaching to so educate and train his patients that 
they may avoid disease. That this is true is shown by the great 
reduction in the frequency and virulence of epidemic diseases. In 
fact, epidemics have almost disappeared in most civilized coun- 
tries, and could the mass of people be brought to avoid errors of 
diet, excesses of passion and exposures to inclemencies of weather, 
as they avoid exposure to smallpox, diphtheria or scarlet fever, a 
vast amount of functional disease would disappear. 

With this object, of preventing disease as far a possible, we 
have devoted separate chapters to Hygiene and Diet and have 
endeavored to place before our readers in a condensed form all 
the essentials of right living, and to describe in as clear a manner 
as possible the environment best suited for normal and perfect 
development of the human organism. It will probably seem to 
our readers that such an environment borders upon the ideal ; 
this may be true, and is, in fact, what we have endeavored to 
depict, since, after all, the highest aim in life should be the attain- 
ment of the ideal, and happiest is he who most nearly approaches 
the goal. With this explanation let us urge upon you to care- 
fully read and study, at your leisure, the chapters upon Hygiene 
and Diet, confident that you will be amply repaid. 

In the preparation of this book we have found it necessary to 
combat in its teachings many ancient superstitions, and the use- 
fulness of many household remedies for ills and sickness will be 
denied ; but resting securely upon the solid foundation of scien- 
tific knowledge we do not hesitate to overthrow such household 
idols as the belief that if a running sore is checked it will break 
out elsewhere — a popular belief which has numbered its victims 



14 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

by the millions. Take the one instance of a discharging ear, 
where even the standard advice of the old fashioned physician 
was, ' ' Do not dry up the discharge or it will cause inflammation of 
the brain, ' ' an idea conceived in ignorance and nurtured in lack 
of ability to cure the disease, and because having seen certain 
cases in which a cessation of the discharge from the ear had been 
followed by inflammation of the brain, the conclusion came that 
the stopping of the discharge caused the more serious inflamma- 
tion of the brain, when the opposite condition in reality prevailed 
and the extension of the inflammation of the ear to the brain 
caused the stoppage of the discharge from the ear, and had the 
inflammation of the ear been properly treated and the discharge 
stopped, the inflammation of the brain would not have occurred. 
Again, many a cut or scratch has been prevented from healing 
by first intention and caused to suppurate by the application of a 
bread and milk poultice, which is allowed to remain until decom- 
position of the mass begins, in the vain hope that it will "draw 
out the fever. ' ' By this plan the conditions are such that the 
formation of pus is favored and the wound, instead of closing at 
once as it would do under antiseptic dressing, leaving but little, 
if any, scar, must heal by granulation and leave broad dense 
scars, significant of improper and uncleanly methods of treatment 
of wounds. 

From the preceding paragraph it will be seen how necessary 
it is that some means of scientific knowledge of wounds and 
injuries should be in every home, and for this reason the chapters 
upon Surgery, Surgical Dressings and Antiseptics are especially 
full and complete, and every parent should carefully study the 
principles and methods therein set forth. With the knowledge 
to be obtained from such perusal and the use of the dressings and 
appliances found in the cabinet, prompt and proper treatment 
may be given all the ordinary injuries likely to occur. 

To mothers, especially young mothers and those living far 
from drug stores and doctors, will the chapters devoted to the 
care and rearing of infants be interesting and helpful. Every 
rule, every statement, and all the advice contained in the chap- 
ters named has the highest authority and has been verified time 
and again in daily practice and observation. By careful atten- 
tion to the teachings given in the section devoted to the diseases 



HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 15 

and management of children, a vast amount of infantile suffering 
may be prevented and thousands of children reared to maturity and 
made useful members of society who would otherwise sicken and 
die solely from lack of care through ignorance on the part of the 
mother, of the proper manner of caring for her babe. The chil- 
dren of the household are God given treasures, and the most 
sacred obligations of motherhood enforce the duty of knowledge 
of the best and proper methods of caring for helpless infants, and 
failure to so instruct herself comes but little short of crime on 
the part of her to whom infant life is intrusted. The chapter 
upon Nursing is in some respects the most important of all. In 
it are given the essentials of good nursing as it is now taught in 
our modern training schools. There is no nobler occupation than 
that of ministering to the comfort of the sick and suffering, and 
nothing is more important in the treatment of disease than proper 
care and nursing. Thousands of desperate cases have been saved 
from death by a faithful and devoted nurse and in many dis- 
eases good nursing occupies an equal place with good medicine. 
What could be more grateful to the fever tormented sufferer than 
the refreshing sponge bath administered by a skillful nurse, or 
what is more important to the favorable termination of a case of 
typhoid fever than a constant care and regulation of the diet by a 
skilled and intelligent nurse? 

In the human system there is a constant change taking place 
in the tissues. This change is called waste and repair and to 
maintain the normal equilibrium of the body, the necessary 
material for repair must be constantly supplied. This material 
is furnished by the food taken into the body, and the perfection 
of repair depends upon the character and quantity of the mate- 
rial furnished. In the chapter on Food and Diet the subject is 
fully discussed and the advice there given is based upon the 
best physiological knowledge obtainable and should be carefully 
studied by everyone. 



u 



HYGIENE— Health Rules. 



According to Dr. Parkes, "Hygiene is the art of preserving 
health; that is, of obtaining the most perfect action of mind and 
body during as long a period as is consistent with the laws of life. 
In other words it aims at rendering growth more perfect, decay 
less rapid, life more vigorous, death more remote. Taking the 
word hygiene in the largest sense it signifies rules for perfect cul- 
ture of mind and body. It is impossible to dissociate the two. 
The body is affected by every mental and moral action ; the mind 
is profoundly influenced by bodily conditions. For a perfect 
system of hygiene we must train the body, the intellect, and the 
moral faculties in a perfect and balanced order. ' ' 

Whether the world will ever see such a system of hygiene no 
one can say, but as time passes, glimmerings of hope may be 
seen. While mankind still suffers from indulgence and weakness 
and many errors, it can be truly said that knowledge is increas- 
ing and that if mankind would but make use of the knowledge 
attainable he could to a large degree control his future physical 
being. 

Again quoting from Dr. Parkes : ' * It is undoubtedly true that 
we can, even now, literally choose between health and disease ; 
not, perhaps, always individually, for the sins of our fathers 
may be visited upon us, or the customs of our civilization and 
social customs may gall us, or even our fellow men may deny us 
health, or the knowledge which leads to health. But as a race 
man holds his destiny in his own hand and can choose between 
good and evil, and as time unrolls the scheme of the world it is 
not too much to hope that the choice will be for good. ' ' 

Considering only that part of hygiene which has to do with 
the subjects treated from a medical standpoint, we may arrange a 
system of rules governing the life of individuals and communities 
at different periods of their existence. We would commence with 



18 HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 

the mother and regulate her health before the birth of the child, 
thus securing the best development possible for the unborn babe. 

After a child is born, the life of the individual may be divided 
into three grand divisions or epochs : First, growth or develop- 
ment is the most important of all periods, since the growing or- 
ganism is much more profoundly influenced by environment than 
it is after the body has reached maturity and ceased to grow, and 
it is during this period that best results of hygienic living are to 
be attained ; second, maturity, during which epoch physical growth 
practically ceases, and the body remains seemingly stationary, 
surrounded by fixed habits, often so powerful in their influence 
as to negative, in large degree, the influences of environment; 
third, decay, the epoch during which man travels down the 
hill of life, and, losing the protecting power of fixed habits, 
gradually becomes more and more susceptible to the influences of 
environment. Decay progresses without actual disease, attacking 
first one portion of the body and then another, until general de- 
cay and death arrives. In these several epochs of his life 
the human being would have to be considered. First: In 
relation to the natural conditions which surround him and 
which he must have in order to live. These essential con- 
ditions of life are air, water, food, heat and light. Second: 
In his relation to his fellow men, as in the effect of such social 
and communal customs as trades, character of dwellings, clothing, 
political influences, and sexual relations, all of which have an 
influence upon his mental and moral being, and through these 
channels affect the physical being. Third : In relation to his 
personality, feelings, thoughts, desires, and all mental processes, 
which affect the health and require self -regulation and control. 
Such a plan of hygienic control, if followed out to its ultimate 
results, would revolutionize the world. 

There are, however, many reasons why such a comprehensive 
plan of hygienic control could not be carried out, no matter how 
honestly the individual might strive for the attainment of the 
ideal. One reason, for example, why perfection in hygienic 
rules cannot be attained is the fact that the carrying on of many 
of the trades and vocations demanded by civilization require not 
only that the individual engaged in conducting the work shall 
be surrounded by evil conditions, but the conditions of the work 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 19 

are such that whole communities in the vicinities of the works 
or factory are brought within its contaminating influences. Pure 
air is a necessity for health, but how much control can an indi- 
vidual exercise over the fouling of the atmosphere of a commun- 
ity by the smoke of a dozen tall factory chimneys ? An instance 
illustrating this point is afforded by the atmospheric conditions 
surrounding the large copper smelters at Butte, Montana. The 
ore which is smelted contains large amounts of arsenic and anti- 
mony, the fumes from which escape in considerable quantities, 
causing a large number of cases of sickness among those people 
living in the vicinity of the works. Foul streets, poor drainage, 
a contaminated water supply are all general unhygienic conditions 
over which the individual has but a limited control, and which 
properly belong to State Medicine, a branch of greatest impor- 
tance and one which, fortunately for all, is becoming more 
generally recognized each year as a public necessity and benefac- 
tion, and the scope of which is being constantly widened. There 
exist, however, conditions which at the present time are, and we 
fear will continue to be, beyond the reach of state control ; as for 
example the dwellings of a large number of the poorer classes, 
which are unfit for human habitation. This is true not only in 
our cities, but even to a greater extent in many rural districts. 
This lamentable condition can be changed only by educating the 
people and teaching them not only the evils of unhygienic living, 
but how to live properly. 



SOILS. 

Soils consist of mineral, vegetable and often animal substances ; 
in the spaces between each particle of soil are also air and often 
water. The conditions and constituents of soil have an impor- 
tant bearing upon health, and in this chapter will be given the 
important rules governing the selection of the best soil for a 
home, and that the subject may be made clear each constituent 
of the soil will be taken up and discussed separately. 

Air in the Soil — Only the hardest rocks are free from air; 
loose sand, gravel and dirt contain the greatest amount of air. It 



20 HEALTH AT HOME- 

is rnoist, very rich in carbon dioxide, and often contains organic 
substances and germs derived from decaying animal and vege- 
table material. The air in soils is in continual movement, especi- 
ally if the soil be dry. This point is important, as currents of 
air from the ground are frequently drawn into the dwelling, and 
should such air be drawn from the vicinity of a cesspool or 
broken drain, disease germs will be introduced and sickness 
result. The only certain manner of preventing ground air from 
entering the house is to thoroughly cement the floor of the cellar 
and plaster the foundation walls upon the inner surface with a 
good coat of hydraulic cement. All houses built upon " made 
soils, ' ' or upon ground which has been filled in, should be thor- 
oughly cemented before being occupied. A good substitute for 
the cement is asphalt. Where neither cement nor asphalt can be 
secured the house should be raised clear of the ground and free 
ventilation of the space between the surface of the ground and 
floor of the house provided by numerous openings in the founda- 
tion walls upon opposite sides of the house. As a rule loose, 
porous soil is considered the most healthy; this, however, is not 
so much on account of the character of the air which it contains 
as because of its better drainage and freedom from moisture. 
The diseases which have been attributed to ground air are: 
intermittent fever, typhoid fever, yellow fever, epidemic diar- 
rhea, cholera, dysentery and diphtheria. 

Water in the Soil — In soil we have moisture and ground 
water. When air as well as water is found in the soil it is merely 
moist. When ground water is spoken of, we mean the water 
that fills all the spaces between the solid particles of the soil. 
The amount of water in the soil depends upon the character of the 
soil, but water is found to a greater or less degree in all soils, 
from the loose porous sand to the hardest granite, which latter 
will contain from five to fifty pints of water per cubic yard of 
stone. The water in the soil is derived from two sources : that 
which falls as rain and is absorbed by the soil, and that ground 
water which comes up from below, chiefly by capillary attraction, 
the water following minute cracks and channels in the soil. 
These ground waters carry more or less minute mineral sub- 
stances, such as iron, lime, magnesium, sulphur and soda, and 



HEALTH AT HOME. 21 

should their channel carry them into the vicinity of any decaying 
animal or vegetable matter, contamination may and does occur. 

The Effect of Ground Water upon Health: Wet soil affects 
health in two ways : first, by the water itself causing a cold soil 
and a damp air, thus favoring the development of catarrh and 
rheumatism, and second, by aiding decomposition of organic 
substances, thus producing poisonous emanations. 

Decomposition of organic substances, animal or vegetable, is 
the result of three factors — heat, air and moisture. The most 
important of all is moisture. A substance perfectly dry cannot 
undergo decomposition, as decomposition is produced by low 
forms of life, classed under the general term of germs, which 
cannot exist without the presence of moisture. 

The diseases which are either the direct result of or are ren- 
dered more active by moist conditions of the soil are rheumatism, 
catarrh and neuralgia. They thrive and are more violent on 
moist, cold soil. Most people are more healthy on a dry soil. 

Consumption: Statistics show that thorough draining of the 
soil has greatly diminished the death rate from consumption in 
certain localities. 

Malarial Fever: All localities in which malarial fever flour- 
ishes are wet; but it seems necessary that a certain degree of heat 
must obtain in order that the germ of malarial fever may reach 
its fullest development. Thus we find that in the swampy low 
lands of warm countries malarial fever is ever present, while in 
the no less extensive swamps and marshes of the far north 
malarial fever is seldom or never encountered. When localities 
which have been noted for the violence of malarial fever have 
been thoroughly drained it is found that the malarial fever disap- 
pears or is greatly reduced in violence and frequency. In newly 
opened agricultural districts, where there is extensive upturning 
of the soil and imperfect drainage, malarial fever prevails, but as 
years pass and drainage systems become perfected, a gradual 
disappearance of malarial fever is noted. 

Typhoid Fever, Cholera, Epidemic Diarrhea a?id Dysentery: 
These are more virulent and fatal in wet, poorly drained local- 
ities, since the specific germs by which these diseases are caused 
find suitable conditions for development in the moist condition of 
the soil. 



22 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 



WATER. 



A sufficient supply of good water is an absolutely essential 
element of good sanitary surroundings and health. Without 
pure water or with an insufficient supply health always suffers. 
Impurities in drinking water are perhaps the most prolific causes 
of illness ; undoubted evidence has been furnished of late years 
pointing directly to the water supply as the means of introduction 
into the system of the germs of typhoid fever and dysentery par- 
ticularly, and probably also the germs of many other diseases of 
an epidemic character. 

Quantity of Water for Healthy Men — In all cases the 
supply should be plentiful. Cleanliness is essential to good health, 
and pure water in plenty is necessary in order to be cleanly. The 
essential quantity for each individual should include that for 
drinking, cooking, washing of person, clothes and utensils, for 
cleansing closets, sewers, streets, etc., and in cities an amount 
necessary for the use of animals, washing of carriages and 
stables, for manufacturing purposes, fire protection, etc. This 
has been found to be in large cities from twenty-three gallons per 
head of population per day in Liverpool, England, to eighty-three 
gallons in New York. 

An adult requires from three and one-half to five pints of water 
daily for proper nutrition, but about three-fourths to two pints of 
this amount is contained in the solid food taken and the remainder 
in some form of liquid. There are, however, wide ranges of 
variation from the average. Women drink less than men ; chil- 
dren, of course, drink absolutely less, but more, in proportion 
to their bulk, than adults. 

Sources of Water Supply — The sources of water supply are 
wells, cisterns, springs, rivers and lakes. 

Quality of Drinking Water — Rain Water — Rain falling 
through the air takes up large quantities of matter in the form of 
gases. These gases consist of oxygen, nitrogen, ammonical salts, 
(carbonate, nitrate, etc.) and various acids, such as nitric and 
sulphuric; these are especially present in the rain falling over 
towns where a large quantity of coal is burned. v 



HEALTH AT HOME. 23 

The rain also carries down large quantities of solid substances, 
such as salt (in sea air), calcium carbonate, sulphate and phos- 
phate, which are various forms of lime. Rain water also almost 
always contains more or less organic matter, and in towns the 
debris of street dust. Rain water, however, when properly col- 
lected and stored, is perhaps the purest and healthiest water for 
drinking purposes, and, owing to the small quantity or entire 
absence of lime, it is what is known as "soft," requiring a less 
amount of soap than the lime or "hard" water, and is most desir- 
able for washing. In collecting and storing rain water great care 
should be exercised ; the roof or surface upon which the water is 
caught should be kept clean and free from the contamination of 
birds, pigeons being especially liable to foul a roof from which 
water is drained into the cistern. The cistern should always be 
constructed with a filter wall, consisting of a single course of soft 
brick enclosing a small space into which the water flows from 
the downfall and frdm which it then percolates into the main 
body of the cistern. 

Well and Spring Water — Shallow wells, or those which do 
not penetrate into and derive their water from the solid rock, are 
perhaps the most dangerous sources from which water can be 
obtained. This is especially true when they are located in the 
thickly settled portions of cities and towns. The soil above bed 
rock is permeated by water channels, and the water on the sur- 
face, after absorbing all manner of impurities, carries them in 
solution into the ground, and it is from this source that shallow 
dug wells and driven wells derive their supply. Into them pass 
the drainage of filthy stable yards, cesspools and privy vaults, 
laden with disease germs. Many cases of typhoid fever can be 
directly traced to the use of water from a well so located that the 
seepage of a privy vault drains into it. Thousands of innocent 
children have sickened and died of bowel trouble caused by 
impure water drawn from a fifteen-foot driven well so located as 
to catch the drainage of the stable yard. In all cases where a 
well is sunk for supplying drinking water it should be put down 
deeply into the bedrock and then carefully curbed from bed rock 
to surface, so as to exclude all surface water. The water from 
deep wells and springs, as a rule, is free from organic impurities 



24 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

or the products of decay, but they always carry more or less inor- 
ganic or mineral substances, which as a rule are not injurious to 
health. Sulphur, lime and iron are the most common mineral 
ingredients. 

River Water — River water is, as a rule, more or less contam- 
inated by sewage and surface impurities, and should be used 
with great caution, especially at or near large cities or towns. 
As a general rule all river water should be passed through a 
good filter, or better, boiled before using for drinking purposes. 
Iyake water offers the same objections as river water, and to a 
greater degree, when taken from the radius of contamination 
of the sewage of a city upon its shores, on account of the absence 
of flow or current, which, in a river, exerts a powerful purifying 
influence. 

Distilled Water — Distilled water is to most people unpalat- 
able, being tasteless and flat, due to the absence of air; this may 
in a large measure be remedied by forcing the water through a 
spray apparatus, whereby the water is broken up into fine 
streams, thus allowing it to take up air. In distilling water care 
should be taken that no lead, zinc or copper finds its way into 
the water. The pipes in a water still should, if possible, be 
made of block tin. 

Artesian Well Water — The composition of artesian well 
water varies greatly. Nearly all artesian waters carry more or 
less mineral matter in solution, often to such an extent as to ren- 
der them undrinkable. The temperature is usually higher than 
surface water, and increases with the depth of the well; the 
contained air is diminished. Often air is entirely absent, as it 
is in distilled water. These two features at times render artesian 
water from very deep wells unfit for drinking. 

General Conclusions by Dr. Parkes — I. "An epidemic 
of diarrhea in a community is almost always owing either to 
impure air, impure water, or bad food. If it affects a number 
of persons suddenly it is probably owing to one of the two last 
causes, and if it extends over many families, almost certainly 
to water. But, as the cause of the impurity may be transient, it- 
is not easy to find experimental proof. ' ' 



HEALTH AT HOME. 25 

II. ''Diarrhea or dysentery constantly affecting a community 
or returning periodically at certain times of the year is far more 
likely to be produced by bad water than by any other cause. ' ' 

III. "A sudden and localized attack of either typhoid fever 
or cholera is almost certainly owing to the introduction of the 
poison by water. ' J 

IV. "The same fact holds good in cases of malarial fever 
and especially if the cases are very grave, a possible introduction 
by water should be carefully inquired into. ' ' 

V. "The introduction of the ova of certain entozoa by means 
of water is proved in some cases — is probable in others. ' ' 

VI. "Although it is not at present possible to assign to every 
impurity in water its exact share in the production of disease, or 
to prove the precise influence on the public health of water 
which is not extremely impure, it appears certain that the health 
of a community always improves when an abundant and pure 
water supply is given ; and apart from this actual evidence we are 
entitled to conclude from other considerations that abundant 
and good water is a primary sanitary necessity. ' ' 



REMOVAL OF EXCRETA. 

All excreta should be immediately removed from dwellings. 
This is best accomplished by means of water acting through a 
sewerage system, as the water supplied in pipes to houses is 
under pressure and the force thus developed can be utilized in 
carrying away not only the excreta, but also the slops and sink 
water from the dwelling. 

In order that this plan may be effective, however, it is neces- 
sary that there be a sufficient supply of water, and that the 
arrangement of pipes be such as to offer no obstruction to the free 
and rapid flow of the waste water, and that proper arrangements 
be made for the disposal of the sewage matter. All sewers should 
be strongly and tightly built, as they are often subjected to con- 
siderable pressure, and a leak or a bursted pipe constitutes a 
source of contamination for the soil surrounding the dwelling and 
possibly the water supply. Where the leak or break occurs with- 



26 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

in the house it permits the escape of sewer gas into the house, 
spreading disease germs and contagion and poisoning the air. 

Water Closets — In the construction of water closets the fol- 
lowing points should be observed : First, that the amount and 
force of the water be sufficient to thoroughly cleanse and sweep out 
everything in the bowl; second, that the soil pipe be ventilated 
beyond the bowl by a pipe of the same size, being carried up to 
the top of the house ; third, that the connections of the bowl pipes 
and soil pipes are perfect and allow of no leakage. The amount 
of water used to flush the bowl should be from two to five gallons, 
never less than two, and the fall from tank to bowl should not 
be less than three to four feet. The location of the closet in the 
house is of great importance. If possible it should be in an out- 
building or a projection, with thorough ventilation between it 
and the house. In a two-storied building in may be put in a small 
room in the attic, which can be thoroughly ventilated. When 
necessary to place the closet upon the same level as the living 
rooms it should, if possible, be located at a corner of the building, 
so that outside windows can be had on two sides of the room, per- 
mitting a current of air to pass through. The windows in a 
closet should always extend quite up to the ceiling, and a ven- 
tilator should be placed in the ceiling of the room, connected by 
a large pipe with the outer air through the roof. The plan of 
placing closets in the basement should be entirely abandoned, as 
closet air is certain to be drawn into the house. 

Outhouses, Privy Vaults and Cess Pools — When it is 
not possible to connect dwellings with a sewerage system the 
greatest care should be used in the location of the privy vault 
to avoid contamination of the dwelling and water supply. The 
location should be such that all drainage from the vault shall 
be away from the dwelling, wells and cistern. From what has 
been said in previous pages regarding the free passage of gases 
and water through ordinary soils, it can be readily seen how con- 
taminating material can be carried into a well or, by means of the 
air, into the dwelling should the location be such that the drain- 
age will be toward the dwelling. All vaults and cesspools should 
be on lower ground than the dwelling, and situated at least 150 
feet from the house or well. 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 27 

In the construction of privy vaults care should be taken that 
they be dug of^sufficient depth — not less than twelve feet; the 
vault should be walled up with brick or stone, and covered 
throughout, walls and floor, by a good coat of cement or asphalt ; 
the building over the vault should fit tightly over top of vault, 
and all openings should be covered by tightly fitting lids, which 
should be kept tightly shut when not in use ; the vault should be 
provided with a ventilator, connected with outer air by a pipe 
carried through the roof. The vault should be cleaned at least 
once a year, or oftener, depending upon the number of people 
using it; and should it become foul, the use of one-half bushel of 
slacked lime sprinkled over the surface of the contents of the 
vault will act as a deodorizer. 



AIR. 

The air which we breathe is the most important substance 
which we regularly take into our systems. It is the only element 
which enters directly into the blood, without alteration or modi- 
fication, and the only safeguard provided by nature against the 
entrance of impure air is the sense of smell, which, as a rule, 
enables the individual to detect most of the impurities of the air 
breathed. Constant exposure of the organ of smell to impur- 
ities, however, dulls its sensibility and diminishes its power to 
protect. The food and water taken into the system undergo 
complete changes in the stomach and bowels before being 
absorbed or taken up by the tissues, and the majority of harmful 
substances are thus neutralized or eliminated ; or, should they be 
of an irritating character, they are promptly rejected by the 
stomach, and vomiting is produced. But the air taken into the 
lungs passes directly from the air cells into the blood and thence 
into the tissues without alteration or purifying. 

Impurities in Air — These are found in three forms : gases, 
vapors and solid particles. The senses of taste and smell will 
detect many of them ; others, however, give no warning, or so 
slight a warning as to be disregarded. -I Nature has provided 
certain means of purifying the air by which many deleterious 



28 HEALTH AT HOME. 

substances lose their power for evil ; gases diffuse and expand 
and are carried away by air currents, which so reduces the quan- 
tity of poison present in the respired air as to greatly diminish 
its power for harm ; or these gases are washed down by rain and 
then return to the earth. Solid substances, lifted by the wind, 
fall by their own weight, or, if they are of animal or vegetable 
matter, are oxidized or burned by the oxygen present in air, and 
thus separated into their simple elements, which are not harm- 
ful in ordinary amounts. Diffusion, dilution by winds, oxi- 
dization and fall by rains are the great purifiers, and to these 
must be added the power of vegetation to extract from the air the 
carbon dioxide, which is necessary for its growth. 

Respiration or Breathing — The lungs take in the atmos- 
pheric air in regular quantities, and when the air reaches the air 
cells or the minute terminations of the bronchial tubes an inter- 
change of gases between the air in the lungs and the blood in the 
arteries and veins takes place, the air giving up to the blood that 
portion of oxygen which the body requires, while the blood, in 
turn, transfers to the air the carbon dioxide, or the product of 
tissue changes, which the blood has absorbed in its circuit of the 
body. This normal balance of gaseous composition between the 
air and blood must be constantly maintained. Should the air 
not contain a sufficient amount of oxygen to balance the amount 
of carbon dioxide which it is necessary to remove from the blood 
the unremoved portion constitutes an excess, and is again carried 
back to the tissues, where it acts as a poison and produces disease. 
Thus a person or a number of persons confined in an unventilated 
room soon exhaust the oxygen contained in the air of the room 
and, in the absence of a fresh supply, the foul and vitiated air 
is breathed over and over again until, unless fresh air containing 
oxygen is admitted, it will fail to support life. All movement or 
bodily functional activity results in tissue change, which is 
accompanied by the production of carbon dioxide, and the only 
means of removal of this gas from the system is through the 
blood and lungs. But there must be supplied at the same time a 
corresponding volume of pure oxygen to take its place and to 
maintain the normal gaseous balance in the tissues. Thus it may 
be seen how .necessary it is that a proper amount of pure air be 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 29 

supplied at all times, and it is especially necessary that the sleep- 
ing rooms be thoroughly ventilated. Do not be afraid of plenty 
of fresh air. The only danger in fresh air is when it strikes the 
surface of the body in the form of a draught ; then it is likely to 
produce chilling of the surface of the body and a cold will be 
taken, but if the body be protected from draughts the breathing 
of fresh air, no matter how cold, can do no injury, nor will one 
catch cold. 

Methods of Ventilation — In ventilation two considerations 
obtain : first, means for introduction of fresh air from the outside ; 
second, an outlet for the impure air. The air of a living room 
as it becomes impure and heated rises to the ceiling and occupies 
the upper portion of the room, while the colder, fresh air, being 
heavier, descends to the floor on entrance to the room, and as it 
becomes warmer gradually ascends, carrying the impurities with 
it. Such being the case, a plan of ventilation should consist of 
an opening or openings at or near the ceiling for the escape of the 
foul air, and another opening or set of openings near the floor 
to permit the entrance of fresh, pure air from the outside. These 
openings should be so arranged that a direct draught will not be 
formed. This can be provided for by constructing an elbow in 
the metal lining of the passage, directing the mouth downward 
and carrying it down, so that the opening shall be below the 
level of the passage through the walls. In rooms heated by stoves 
a considerable amount of foul air is carried out by the draught, 
and ordinarily the room is thus kept fairly well ventilated, 
especially if the precaution be taken of providing for an opening 
through which fresh air may enter from the outside. The best 
of all means of ventilation is the open hearth fire or a good grate, 
and no dwelling which is heated by hot air furnace or steam 
pipes, and especially the latter, should be without one or more 
fire places for ventilation. 

In the colder portions of our country it has been the extensive 
practice to provide our doors and windows with double doors 
and windows, thus rendering it much easier and cheaper to heat 
the house in severe weather. The saving, however, is obtained 
at the expense of good ventilation, unless arrangements are made 
whereby at least one of the storm windows in each room is 



30 HEALTH AT HOME. 

hinged, or provided with a hinged aperture, which may be opened 
for a portion of each day, in order that the room may be thor- 
oughly aired. In the case of a sleeping room the window should 
be left slightly open during the night, and provision made against 
the lowered temperature of the room by increasing the bed cloth- 
ing. The importance of plenty of fresh air in a sleeping room 
cannot be overestimated and no one in ordinarily good health 
should fear night air. 

The ventilation of a room in which a sick person is confined 
cannot be too carefully looked after. Special agents for contam- 
inating the air are present in most cases of illness, and this is 
especially true in all cases of acute infectious diseases, such as 
scarlet fever, measles, diphtheria and all forms of fevers. When- 
ever possible when a long or severe attack of illness is antici- 
pated the patient should have the use of two connecting rooms, 
so that while one is occupied by the patient the other may be 
thoroughly aired, and all poisonous emanations be completely 
removed before the patient is returned to the room. Where this 
can be done one room should be used for the day room and one 
for the night room, the sunniest and brightest room being chosen 
for the day room. Not only does this plan secure the greatest 
possible amount of fresh, pure air for the patient, but the chang- 
ing of rooms, by breaking the monotony of constant, unchanged 
surroundings, is of the greatest benefit to the sufferer. Where 
it is not possible or practicable to make use of the double rooms 
an open fire in a grate or upon the hearth, even in moderately 
warm weather, will insure constant change of air if used in con- 
nection with an open window or other means of entrance for 
fresh air, besides adding greatly to the cheerfulness of the room, 
and so brighten up the depressed, low-spirited patient. 

Gas from Sewers and House Drains — If in suflicient 
quantity this gas may produce rapid poisoning, asphyxia and 
death; but usually the gas is in such diluted condition as to con- 
stitute a slow poison, which, acting upon the system, produces 
disease, especially in children, and which is accompanied by 
languor, loss of appetite, attacks of vomiting, diarrhea, colic 
and prostration. There is a feverishness, and the blood, by being 
deprived of its proper amount of oxygen, loses a portion of its 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 31 

red blood corpuscles; headache is also a constant symptom. 
The diseases which seem especially liable to accompany foul air 
of sewers are diarrhea, typhoid fever, and diphtheria. Abun- 
dant evidence has been secured to prove their relationship. 

Warming of Houses — The heat of the human body may 
be preserved in two ways : First, the heat generated in the body, 
which is continually passing off and being carried away by the 
moving air, may be in a measure retained by the clothes ; and, 
given a sufficient amount of proper food, the clothing may be so 
regulated that normal health may be retained with but little 
application of external heat. In fact some of our most vigorous 
races inhabit the cold countries; and in temperate climates 
healthy adults are undoubtedly benefited by external cold, pro- 
vided food be sufficient, and the internal warmth of the body be 
retained by clothing. Second, external heat may be applied to 
the body, either by the heat of the sun or by artificial means. 

The points to determine in respect to warming of dwellings 
are : First, what degree of artificial warmth should be given ? 
Second, what are the different kinds of warmth, and how are 
they to be given ? 

Degree of Warmth — For Healthy Persons — Infants and old 
persons require much artificial heat, in addition to abundant food 
and clothes. The lowering of the temperature, especially when 
rapid, is very depressing to the very young and to the old; and 
when we remember the extraordinary reviving effects of warmth 
we cannot be surprised at this. For adult healthy men, who are 
properly clothed and fed, the degree of temperature of the house 
does not make any great difference, and perfect health and even 
comfort can be maintained with a wide variation of temperature ; 
but for healthy adults an average temperature in a dwelling of 
68° F. seems to afford the best condition. For children and old 
persons the temperature should be considerably higher, old 
people often requiring a temperature of even 72° or 75° F. 

In regulating the heat for children it should be remembered 
that small bodies have a much larger surface in proportion to 
bulk than larger bodies, so that the body of a child, producing 
a certain degree of heat, offers a much larger radiating surface in 
proportion to the bulk than a full grown adult. 



32 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

For Sick Persons — The degree of temperature for sick persons 
is a matter of great importance. There seems to be a general 
rule that the air of a sick room should be about 60° F., but this 
may be varied to advantage in many cases. There are many 
diseases which are greatly benefited by a low temperature, espe- 
cially all those in which there is a rise in the bodily heat. In all 
fevers, except those attended by great depression, as is often the 
case in scarlet fever, and during the stage of the fever when col- 
lapse is likely to occur, it is desirable to have the temperature of 
the room as low as 50° or even 40°. Cold air moving over the body 
is a cooling agent of great power, second only to the direct appli- 
cation of cold to the surface in the form of ice or the cold pack ; 
nor is there danger of bad results if the movement of the air is 
not too great. Even in acute lung diseases this is the case. 
Pneumonia cases do best in cold rooms, provided there is no 
great current of air over the patient. On the other hand chronic 
heart disease with lung congestion and diseases of this class 
require a warm air with considerable moisture. In inflammatory 
affections of the throat, larynx, trachia and bronchial tubes a 
warm air is best. 

In convalescence, or during the period of recovery from illness, 
cold is very badly borne; the bodily powers of resistance are 
much reduced and the air should be kept warm, and sudden 
changes of temperature especially avoided. 

Different Kinds of Warmth — Radiant heat is the best 
means of warming. This is the manner in which the heat of 
the sun reaches us. It heats the body without warming the air, 
and there is no possibility of adding impurity to the air. 
Radiant heat is obtained from grates and fireplaces, and in very 
cold climates it is so feeble in power and expensive in its pro- 
duction as to be impracticable. 

Convection and Conduction of Heat — This method of 
warming consists of heating air in a confined space surrounding 
a fire, or through which hot steam pipes pass. The heated air 
is then led to the different parts of the building by ducts or pipes. 
There are several points to be noted in this method of warming. 
The point of entrance into the room should be at or near the 
floor, so that the heated air shall properly mingle with the air 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 33 

already there. The air should not be too hot, not above 75° to 
80° F., and a large volume of gently heated air should be pre- 
ferred to a small volume of very hot air, as the former is more 
likely to mix thoroughly with the air of the room. The air after 
heating should be passed over the surface of a body of water in 
order that it may not be too dry when discharged into the room. 
In all cases a reliable thermometer should be employed to regulate 
the temperature. The thermometer should be so placed as to 
record as nearly as possible the average temperature of the room. 
If possible it should be suspended about the center of the room, 
as from a gas fixture, or it may be hung upon the inner partition 
wall. The thermometer should never be hung upon the outside 
wall of a room, or near a window, around which may enter cur- 
rents of cold air from the outside, thus causing great error in the 
reading of the thermometer ; nor should it be so placed that the 
currents of warm air from furnace pipe or stove or the radiant 
heat of a grate or fireplace shall strike upon it, and thus raise its 
reading far above the average temperature of the room. What- 
ever be the means of warming, the temperature should be kept at 
a regular, even degree, both as a matter of preserving health and 
for the sake of economy, for a heating apparatus if kept at an 
even heat requires far less fuel than if the fire is allowed to die 
out or become very low, necessitating the addition of large quan- 
tities of fuel and the reheating of a large volume of air in the 
rooms which has become chilled. 



PHYSIOLOGY OF DIGESTION. 

That portion of the body which has to do with the digestion 
and absorption of food is called the alimentary canal. It con- 
sists of the mouth, the oesophagus, the stomach, the small intes- 
tine and the large intestine. These various organs are lined 
throughout with mucous membrane, which has certain general 
characteristics in common, but which differs essentially in certain 
particulars in each portion of the digestive tract. This difference 
in mucous membrane lies chiefly in the character of the glandular 
structures which are found in the different locations. The 
food in passing along the alimentary canal is acted upon by cer- 



34 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

tain juices, which are the product of the glands belonging to the 
mucous membrane. These juices are saliva, gastric juice, bile, 
pancreatic juice and the juices secreted by the glands in the 
intestines. These juices are poured upon and mingled with the 
food, and produce in it such changes that, from being largely 
insoluble, it becomes largely soluble, or otherwise modified in 
such a manner that the larger part of what is eaten passes into 
the blood, while the smaller part is discharged as excrement. 

The digestive juices, coming from all of these glands which 
have been described, are derived from the blood and the process 
of their manufacture in the gland is under the direct control of 
the nervous system, as is also the circulation of the blood to and 
within the glands; hence we see the great importance of perfec- 
tion in the nervous mechanism governing these delicate struct- 
ures. Furthermore it can be readily seen how many and how 
varied may be the causes of imperfect digestion and dyspepsia. 

In order that we may have a clear understanding of digestion 
it will be necessary to study : First, the properties of the various 
juices and the changes which they bring about in the food eaten; 
second, the mechanisms, which are chiefly muscular, by which 
the food is passed along the canal, and most efficiently brought 
in contact with the successive juices; thiid, the means by which 
the nutritious digested material is separated from the undigested 
or excremental material and absorbed into the blood. 

Saliva — The saliva is a compound secretion, being the pro- 
duct of four distinct sets of glands. Three of these exist in 
pairs, and are named respectively the parotid, submaxillary and 
sublingual. The fourth set consists of simple mucous glands, 
which are very numerous in the mucous membrane of the mouth. 
Saliva, in a healthy subject and when secreted freely, is alkaline 
in its chemical reaction ; but when the amount is scanty or when 
the subject suffers from dyspepsia the reaction is or may be acid. 
The chief purpose of the saliva in digestion is to moisten the food 
and to assist in mastication and swallowing. In some animals 
this is its only function. In other animals and in man it has a 
specific, solvent action on some of the food stuffs. On fats it 
has no effect, and the same is true of proteids, or the nitrogenous 
elements of the food. Its characteristic property is that of con- 



HEALTH AT HOME. 35 

verting starch into sugar. The conversion of starch into sugar 
will go on at the ordinary temperature of the atmosphere, but 
excessive cold retards and finally stops the action ; increase of 
temperature, up to 90° or 100° F., favors the action of the saliva. 
In other words the saliva acts best at or near the normal body 
temperature. So also the action of the saliva is favored by a 
slight alkalinity of the medium in which it is contained, but the 
presence of an excess of acid checks or altogether stops its action. 
The action of the saliva is also hampered by an excess of its own 
product, that is, sugar. 

The action of saliva depends upon and is produced by one of 
a class of substances which are called ferments. The particular 
ferment found in saliva is called ptyalin. 

Gastric Juice — This juice is secreted by the glands which 
are distributed throughout the mucous membrane lining the 
stomach. The gastric juice is acid in reaction and contains a 
ferment called pepsin, which is the active agent in the changes 
produced by the gastric juice in the food. The gastric juice 
has no effect whatever upon starch ; fats also are not effected by 
gastric juice, but when fatty substances are eaten and reach the 
stomach the tissue envelopes of the fat cells are dissolved and the 
fats are set free ; the fat itself undergoes no change. 

The essential property of gastric juice is the power to dissolve 
proteid matters and convert them into a form in which they are 
readily taken up by the blood. * The action of the gastric juice 
depends not so much upon the quantity of the juice as it does 
upon the time in which the juice is given to act. In other words 
the gastric juice in the stomach will change a very large amount 



*Note — All substances which are suitable for food are found to 
contain substances which belong to three large classes of chem- 
ical materials, viz., proteids, carbohydrates and fats. By proteids 
are meant substances containing carbon, oxygen, hydrogen and 
nitrogen in a certain proportion, varying within narrow limits 
and having certain general features. They are frequently called 
albuminoids. Muscle tissue, lean meat, the albuminous portion 
of eggs, and the nitrogenous portion of cereals are all examples 
of proteids. By carbohydrates are meant starches and sugars and 
their allies. 



36 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

of proteids if they are slowly introduced into the stomach in a 
finely divided state, that is, well masticated. Furthermore, the 
proper action of the gastric juice depends largely upon there 
being the proper amount of hydrochloric acid present in the juice. 
The entire absence of acid or an excess both prevent absolutely 
the action of the juice, and a very slight variation either way 
from the normal results in imperfect digestion of proteids with 
all the distressing svmptoms of dyspepsia, which we see may be 
caused either by a deficiency or an excess of acid. Temperature, 
also, has^a marked effect on the action of the gastric juice, the 
normal bodily temperature being best adapted for its action, and 
any marked departure in either direction from about the normal 
bodily temperature interferes with perfect digestion. Drinking 
considerable quantities of ice water during or immediately after 
eating tends to check the action of the gastric juice upon pro- 
teids and causes indigestion and dyspepsia. 

Bile — The bile is the digestive juice which is secreted by the 
liver, the largest gland in the body. The quality of the bile 
varies much, not only in different persons, but in the same per- 
son at different times. It is, moreover, affected by the length of 
time it remains in the gall bladder. The color of bile in man 
and in carnivorous and omnivorous animals is a bright golden 
red ; in herbiverous animals a golden green or a bright green, or 
a dirty green, according to circumstances, being much affected 
by the length of time it remains in the gall bladder. The reac- 
tion is alkaline. Bile has but a slight soluble action upon the 
constituents of the food. In some animals the bile has a limited 
power of converting starch into sugar; on proteids it has no 
direct digestive power whatever, and on fats its solvent action 
is but slight, if any. The chief function of the bile is in its act- 
ion upon the absorbing functions of the digestive organs, to 
stimulate them to greater activity and to act upon the membra- 
nous walls of the blood vessels in such a manner that the digested 
portions of the food are taken up more rapidly. 

Pancreatic Juice — The pancreatic juice is secreted by the 
pancreas, a gland lying upon the left side of the abdomen below 
the stomach. Its action upon food is such that starch is rapidly 
converted into sugar. All that was said of gthe action of saliva 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 37 

may be repeated in the case of pancreatic juice, except that the 
activity of the latter is far greater than that of the former. The 
pancreatic juice also possesses the power of acting on all food 
stuffs, starch, fats and proteids, and is one of the most important 
of all the digestive juices. 

Muscular Mechanism of Digestion — From its entrance 
into the mouth until such remnant of it as is undigested leaves 
the body the food is continually subjected to movements, having 
for their object the trituration of the food as in mastication or its 
more complete mixture with the digestive juices or its forward 
progress through the alimentary canal. 

Mastication — This is the process of chewing or grinding the 
food between the teeth, the object being to divide the food into 
very small particles so that a larger surface may be exposed to the 
action of the digestive juices. The importance of thorough mas- 
tication cannot be overestimated, and sound teeth properly made 
use of have a much more important influence upon the health of 
the individual, than is generally supposed. Many cases of dys- 
pepsia are due to the lack of proper mastication of the food. The 
action of the jaws in mastication also stimulates the flow of saliva 
and that portion of the digestive function is thereby rendered 
more perfect. 

Deglutition or Swallowing — This is a muscular process which 
is partly voluntary and partly involuntary. When the food is 
masticated it is gathered into a ball by the tongue and carried 
back to the opening into the throat ; the soft palate rises and the 
epiglottis or cover of the windpipe automatically folds downward 
and shuts off the larynx. Then by a wave-like contraction of the 
muscles of the throat, passing from the upper portion downward, 
the ball of food is caught in the grip of the muscles and carried 
downward toward the stomach. This wave-like contraction con- 
tinues throughout the muscular fibers located in the walls of the 
oesophagus, until the food finally passes the oesophagus and is 
discharged into the stomach. 

Movements of the Stomach — The walls of the stomach are sup- 
plied with muscular layers so arranged that by their alternate 
relaxation and contraction a rolling motion is given to the con- 
tents of the stomach, and the particles of food and the gastric juice 



38 HEALTH AT HOME. 

are thus more thoroughly mixed together, and are finally forced 
out of the stomach into the small intestine. 

Movements of the Intestines — In the walls of the intestines we 
find a layer of muscle fibers arranged in a circular manner, so 
that their contraction narrows the opening of the intestine, and 
as these contractions begin at the upper portion of the intestine 
and pass downward in a wave-like manner the contents of the 
bowels are carried along and finally discharged from the body. 
This is called peristaltic action. The importance of perfect peri- 
staltic action in the bowels cannot be overestimated, for by this 
means only is the removal of undigested excreta effected. Most 
cases of chronic constipation are due to deficient peristaltic action 
of the bowels, and in their treatment call, not for cathartics, but 
for those remedies which have the property of stimulating the 
muscular fibers in the bowel wall to proper action. 

Vomiting — This act is preceded by a feeling of nausea ; this is 
followed by retching, in which a considerable quantity of air is 
swallowed, which assists in dilating the lower portion of the 
oesophagus. There is then a violent and sudden contraction of 
the abdominal walls, so that the stomach is compressed from 
without and the contents are expelled through the mouth. Dur- 
ing vomiting the opening of the stomach into the small intestine 
is generally closed so that but little material escapes into the 
bowels. When the gall bladder is full a large flow of bile passes 
into the bowels during the act of vomiting. Part of this may 
find its way into the stomach, as is seen in bilious vomiting. 

Absorption of the Products of Digestion — We have now 
traced the process of digestion through the various processes by 
which the food which is eaten is altered and made fit for absorp- 
tion and to be taken up by the blood and carried to the various 
parts of the body, where it is required for repair of the tissues 
which have been changed by the development of energy. 

The process by which the food, after preparation, passes from 
the alimentary canal into the circulation is called absorption, 
and in order that the process may be understood, it will be neces- 
sary to explain a principle in physics upon which absorption 
depends. If a vessel be divided into two compartments by stretch- 
ing across it a partition made from some thin animal membrane, 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 39 

such for instance as a section of a pig's stomach, and a solution 
of some inorganic material, such as salt, placed in one compart- 
ment and the other compartment filled with pure water, it will 
be found after a time that the pure water has become equally 
salty with the salty solution first placed in the vessel, and analy- 
sis will show that the salty solution has been diminished in 
strength. In other words the salt has passed through the mem- 
brane from one side to the other until the two solutions have 
become equalized. This process is called diffusion by dialysis, and 
the perfection of absorption of digested foods depends upon the 
perfect diffusibility of the material. Futhermore, in the body we 
find, in addition to the blood vessels, and intimately associated 
with them, a second set of vessels or channels for the passage of 
fluids. This second circulatory system is called the lymphatic 
system, and in these vessels circulates the lymph, which is the 
fluid of the blood, from which the red corpuscles and the fibrin 
have been removed. There is a constant and rapid interchange 
of fluid between the lymph channels and the blood vessels, and 
the lymph or fluid as it leaves the blood carries in it in solution 
the nourishment for the tissues, which is carried through the 
lymph vessels to the points where it is required and there 
deposited, the lymph then returning to the blood vessels for a 
fresh supply. 

The greater portion of the digested food, when taken up by the 
blood, is still in an unprepared condition and needs further 
change and modification before being taken to the tissues. This 
change is chiefly accomplished in the liver, which we may rightly 
consider the great chemical laboratory of the body. The fats 
which we eat almost all pass directly to the liver for their final 
preparation, and a diet containing an excess of fats is liable to 
throw more work upon the liver than it is capable of performing. 
Thus the liver becomes over worked, the changes are imperfectly 
performed, the organ becomes sluggish, and a bilious attack 
results. The proteids and starch arid sugar are much more 
soluble A and in more proper form for immediate use by the tissues 
than the fats, and but a small quantity of these materials pass 
to the liver, by far the greater quantity entering directly into the 
blood and the general circulation. 



40 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 



FOOD. 



In the widest, broadest sense of the term food, we mean every- 
thing taken into the body, which goes directly or indirectly to the 
growth or repair of the body or to the production of energy in any 
form. It is necessary, however, in this discussion, to exclude 
not only water and air, which have been considered under special 
heads, but also generally, medicines and poisons, which on the 
one hand either act, or are intended to act, upon the processes of 
unhealth}^ nutrition, or on the other hand prevent healthy nutri- 
tion, and so induce unhealthy nutrition and ultimate death. This 
line of distinction, however, cannot be drawn too strictly, for in 
many cases it is more a question of quantity than of kind that 
determines the method of action. 

As a basis of classification of foods necessary to maintain 
human life in its most perfect state, milk may be considered to 
contain all the necessary elements in the best form. The sub- 
stances in milk are, first, the nitrogenous matters, viz., the 
casein principally, also albumin, lacto-peptin and other proteids; 
second, fat and oil; third, sugar; fourth, water, and salts of 
various minerals. 

Careful analysis of all food substances shows that their value 
as a food depends upon the presence in their composition of one 
or more of these substances named above, and their relative food 
value depends upon both the percentage of the food elements 
present and the facility with which the digestive function is 
enabled to separate them from their compounds with other 
materials of non-food value. 

Digestibility of Food — In order that food may be digested 
and absorbed two conditions are necessary — the food must be in 
a fit state to be digested, and it must meet in the alimentary canal 
with such chemical and physical conditions as will permit of its 
digestion and absorption. Fitness for digestibility depends partly 
on the original nature of the substance, as to hardness and cohesion, 
or chemical nature, and partly in the manner in which it can be 
altered by cooking. At the end of this chapter will be found a 
table giving the degree of digestibility of the principal foods, 
together with the manner of cooking to secure the best results. 



HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 41 

Rice, tripe, whipped eggs, sago, tapioca, boiled milk, raw eggs, 
lamb, parsnips, roasted and baked potatoes and fricasseed chicken 
are the most easily digested substances in the order here given, 
the rice disappearing from the stomach in one hour and the fric- 
asseed chicken in two and three-fourths hours. Beef, pork, 
mutton, oysters, butter, bread, veal, boiled and roasted fowls are 
rather less digestible, roast beef disappearing from the stomach 
in three hours, and roast fowl in four hours. Salt beef and pork 
disappear in four and one-fourth hours. As a rule animal 
food is digested sooner than farinaceous, and in proportion to its 
minuteness of division and tenderness of fiber. The admixture 
of foods of different classes aids digestibility ; thus fat taken with 
meat aids the digestion of the meat. Some of the accessory foods 
probably increase the outpour of saliva, intestinal secretion and 
gastric juice. 

The degree of fineness and division of the food, the amount of 
solidity and of trituration, which should be left to the teeth, in 
order that the fluids of the mouth and salivary glands may flow 
out in due proportion, the bulk of the food which should be 
taken at once, are points seemingly slight, but of real import- 
ance. There is another matter which appears to affect digesti- 
bility, viz., variety of food. 

According to the best writers on diet it is not enough to give 
the dietic substances in proper amount. Variety must be intro- 
duced into the food, and different substances of the same class 
must be alternately employed. It may appear singular that this 
should be necessary, and certainly many men and most animals 
have perfect health on a very uniform diet. Yet there appears 
no doubt of the good effects of variety and its good effect on 
digestion. Sameness cloys, and with variety more food is taken 
and a larger amount of nourishment is introduced. Where 
variety of substances cannot be obtained much can be done to 
relieve the monotony by having a variety in the manner of cook- 
ing. In the case of children particularly a great improvement in 
health takes place when a variety in cooking is introduced. 

The abundance and condition of the digestive juices and 
action of the muscular fibers in moving the food, so that it shall 
be brought thoroughly in contact with them, depend upon the 
perfection of the nervous currents, the vigor of the circulation 



42 HEALTH AT HOME. 

and the composition of the blood. Many of the digestive diseases 
the physician has to treat depend on alterations in these condi- 
tions, so that the food is only imperfectly digested. In such cases 
benefit can often be obtained by artificial digestion of the food 
before it is taken into the alimentary canal, this process reliev- 
ing the diseased and disordered digestion of a larger part of its 
work. 

Diseases Connected with Food — No other single ele- 
ment in daily life has so great an influence upon health as the 
food taken into the body, and the diseases depending upon food 
form the largest number of any arising from a single class of causes. 
These diseases may be produced by alterations in quantity, 
either excess or deficiency, by imperfect conditions of digesti- 
bility and by special characters of quality. 

Excess of Food — Where food is taken in such quantities 
that it cannot be absorbed, it undergoes chemical changes, and 
at last putrifies and large quantities of gas are formed. Then 
dypespsia, constipation and a diarrhea which does not empty 
the bowels follow. Often some of the putrid substances are 
absorbed, and evidences of poisoning of the blood are seen, 
accompanied by fever, torpor and heaviness, foul breath, and 
even jaundice. It is this condition which has led to the almost 
universal giving of purgatives, which give relief, but a repeti- 
tion of the cause produces the same results. The relief, however, 
should not be obtained so much through the use of purgatives 
as by the regulation of the diet, and by avoiding overloading of 
the system with food. Temperance means not only moderation 
in drinking, but moderation in eating as well. 

Of the different classes of food the proteid class is the most 
easily digested and can be absorbed in the largest quantity, 
especially if it be taken into the system in small amounts, fre- 
quently repeated. Starch is much less capable of absorption by 
the system and after an excess of starchy foods much unchanged 
starch passes from the system. This is also true of fats. Habit, 
however, has much influence upon the digestion, and a certain 
diet long persisted in has the effect of producing an increased 
amount of the digestive juices, which act upon the food con- 
stituents which are in excess. Where an excess of proteids con- 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 43 

tinually pass into the system the liver is found to be congested 
and enlarged ; other organs are altered and a general state of 
plethora and sluggishness is induced. This condition is made 
worse if, at the same time, there is a lack of exercise, in which 
case less oxygen is taken into the system and the normal reduc- 
tion of these substances into waste material is not complete. 
Partially oxidized material is retained in the system or else it 
produces irritation in the organs of elimination, such as the 
kidneys, lungs and skin, through which it passes. For an 
example, a general rash or skin eruption follows an improper 
diet in nearly every case. Gout is also a disease which is depend- 
ent upon an excess of proteids in the form of meat or the use of 
certain liquids which, by their action, retard the digestion and 
absorption of the proteids and hence produce the same effect. 
The effects of excess of meat in a diet are largely influenced by 
the habits of the individual. One taking active outdoor exercise 
or performing manual labor in the open air can absorb without 
detriment a large excess of proteid foods, as may be seen in the 
case of the frontiersman, whose diet usually consists almost 
entirely of meat. The student or the indoor worker, sitting 
hour after hour in one position, should eat sparingly of meat. 

An excess of starches and fats delays the normal changes 
occurring in the tissues of the body and tends to produce an 
excess of fat. Sour stomach and flatulence or wind in the stom- 
ach and bowels are produced by the incomplete conversion of 
the starch into sugar, which is followed by fermentation and 
the production of gas. In excessive use of starch and fat in 
the diet we find a tendency to fatty degeneration of the muscu- 
lar tissue throughout the body. Where the muscles of the heart 
undergo this change enfeebled heart action follows, with a gen- 
eral lowering of the vital forces. Where an excess of starch is 
taken much of it passes from the bowels unchanged and the 
urine will also be found to contain sugar. 

There may also be an excess of food in a given time, that is, 
meals too frequently repeated, though the absolute quantity in 
twenty-four hours may not be too great. 

Deficiency of Food — It is not necessary here to speak of the long 
catalogue of diseases produced by famine. Disease, however, 
may be produced by a deficiency of one or more of the four great 



44 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

classes of food elements, when the other constituents are in a 
normal amount. This is a subject about which much has yet 
to be learned. The following general statements, however, have 
been thoroughly proved : 

Complete deprivation of proteids, without lessening of the 
other classes, produces marked effects only after some days — from 
five to seven. If the deprivation be continued there is eventually 
loss of mental and muscular strength, with some fever and symp- 
toms of dyspepsia. This condition is followed by anemia and 
great prostration. If starch be largely supplied the weight of the 
body does not lessen for seven or eight days. If the proteids be 
only partially removed from the diet the vital forces are slowly 
diminished, and the system becomes much more susceptible to 
the influences of disease, less able to adapt itself to circumstances, 
the influences of malaria, typhoid fever and pneumonia are more 
profound and more apt to attack the weakened vital forces. The 
removal of starch from the diet can be borne for a long time if 
fat be supplied, but if starch and fat both are excluded, though 
a normal amount of proteids be given, illness soon occurs. This 
is especially true unless very severe exercise is practiced, and 
even then the effects are only delayed. The removal of fat from 
the diet is not well borne even if starch be supplied. The exact 
manner in which fat acts upon the nutrition of the body is not 
known, but we do know that in many cases of faulty nutrition 
the greatest benefit is derived by the administration of fats in 
various forms, as for example the giving of cod liver oil in the 
case of chronic bronchitis or early consumption where there is 
a rapid loss of weight and strength. 

Bad effects are also produced by too long an interval between 
meals. There are great individual differences in this respect, 
however, and much depends upon habit. It may be said here 
that one of the most important points regarding diet is regularity 
in the time of taking food. Nothing will have greater influence 
upon the production of dyspepsia and disorders of the digestion, 
in both children and adults than the habit of irregular eating. 
Children should never be allowed to lunch between the regular 
hours for meals. 

Conditions of Digestibility and Assimilation. — A large number 
of diseases are produced not by alterations in the quantity or 



HEALTH AT HOME. 45 

defects in the quality of the food, but by reason of its indigesti- 
bility, caused either by its physical or chemical condition or by 
an altered state of the digestive juices. To some persons certain 
foods are indigestible at all times, or only at certain times, depend- 
ing upon the condition of the digestive juices at that particular 
time. Indigestibility leads to retention of the undigested mass in 
the stomach and bowels and is followed by chemical changes and 
putrifaction under the influence of warmth and moisture. Then 
irritation is produced and dyspepsia, diarrhea or dysentery is 
caused. Indigestibility goes further than this, however, for 
when the food is imperfectly prepared for absorption some, at 
least, of the proteids pass into the circulation unfit for assimila- 
tion and produce irritation in the liver, kidneys and skin. Some- 
times albumin appears in the urine, as if it were a foreign sub- 
stance in the blood circulating through the body. Such condi- 
tions are usually associated with some evident error in the diges- 
tion, but occasionally no evident gastric disorder can be found. 

Conditions of Quality of Food — Altered quality, of what is other- 
wise good food, produces a great number of diseases. The altera- 
tions occur either during storage, such as chemical changes and 
partial decomposition, an example of which is the souring of 
milk, or are produced during preparation or cooking of the food. 
This subject will be considered more at length under the discus- 
sion of individual articles of food. 

Discussion of Individual Articles of Food. 

Meat — The advantages of meat in a diet are that it contains 
a large amount of nitrogenous substances and important mineral 
substances, such as chlorides, phosphates and the salts of iron. 
Meat is also easily cooked and very digestible, and is more easily 
assimilated than any vegetable. 

How to Detect Bad Meat — There should be sufficient but not 
too much fat present. The fat should be firm, healthy looking, 
not like jelly, or too yellow, and there should be no sign of blood 
at any point in the fat. The color of fat varies from white to 
straw and yellow. Beef fat should be more yellow than pig fat, 
which latter should be almost pure white. The muscular tissue 
of the meat should be firm and yet elastic, not tough ; the pale 



46 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

moist muscle indicates a young animal, the dark colored muscle 
an old one. A dark purple tint is said to indicate that the animal 
has not been slaughtered, but that it died with blood in it. When 
good meat is placed upon a white plate a little reddish juice often 
flows from it for several hours. Meat should, however, become 
tolerably dry after being exposed to the atmosphere for some 
hours. It should have a pleasant sweet flavor, and when heated 
should give a savory odor. Good meat has a marbled appearance, 
caused by the distribution of thin layers of fat between the muscle 
layers. When cut across, the meat should present the same gen- 
eral condition throughout the mass. There should be no dis- 
colored areas nor softened spots. The muscular tissue becomes 
soft and tears easily when putrification is beginning. 

The degree of freshness of meat is judged of by the color, 
(when putrification is beginning the meat becomes paler) ; by 
the odor which early becomes different from the not unpleasant 
odor of fresh meat; and by the consistence of the meat, which 
soon begins to soften under putrifactive changes. As putrifac- 
tion advances these signs become more marked ; the disagreeable 
odor increases, and the meat begins to have a greenish color. 
The odor becomes more apparent when the meat is chopped up 
and drenched with warm water. Diseased conditions or putri- 
factive changes can often be detected in the central portions of a 
piece of meat by pushing a clean knife entirely through the mass. 
The knife should meet with the same resistance throughout and 
should have no smell of putrifaction on withdrawal. Salt meats 
are much harder to judge than fresh, and putrifactive changes 
are often undetected until the meat is cooked. 

Meat often produces disease by changes which occur after cook- 
ing. These changes are probably of the nature of fermentation, 
or the primary stage of putrifaction, in which certain chemical 
poisons are developed. The chemical poisons are called ptomaines 
They are especially liable to develop in meats which have been 
cooked and then allowed to stand one to three days before using. 
Warm or hot weather favor their development, but they also 
develop in sufiicient quantity to cause serious or even fatal illness 
in cold weather. In all cases where meat is in any way suspi- 
cious it should be at once destroyed, as while thorough cooking 
may render the poison innocuous, it is not certain that the chemi- 
cal poisons are entirely eliminated. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME- 47 

Methods of Cooking Meat — In all cases there is one grand rule 
— cook meat slowly, with little heat, and, as far as possible, let 
the loss in weight be water only. 

Boiling — In boiling, meat loses from twenty to thirty per cent 
of its weight. The meat should be in a large piece, and is first 
placed for five minutes in boiling water, after that the heat can 
be low, and should continue until the meat is tender throughout. 
If too great a heat is used the meat is hard and shrunken. If 
it is desired to make good broth the meat should be cut into small 
pieces and put into cold water and gradually warmed up to a 
little below the boiling point — about 150° to 175° F. Beef makes 
the weakest broth ; mutton is a little stronger, and chicken makes 
the strongest broth of all. Broth made without heat, by adding 
four drops of hydrochloric acid to a pint of water and half a 
pound of beef is very rich in soluble albumin. If a little more 
hydrochloric acid be added and the broth then gently warmed 
for an hour nearly one-half the meat can be obtained in the broth 

Roasting — The loss in roasting is from twenty to thirty-five 
per cent. This loss is chiefly water, the other constituents 
remaining the same. The roasting should be slowly done. To 
obtain the juices the meat must be first subjected to intense heat, 
and afterwards cooked very slowly. There are chemical changes 
induced by the heat which form aromatic products, to which 
the pleasant odor of roasting meat is due. The fat melts and 
flows out with the gelatin and extracts and forms the gravy. 
The melted fat and juices should be frequently dipped up and 
poured over the meat during the roasting process. 

Baking — The loss in baking is the same or a little less than in 
roasting. 

Stewing — Stewing is virtually the same as roasting, only the 
meat is cut up and placed in enough water to cover it. Iyike 
boiling and roasting it should be done slowly and at a low heat. 
The loss in weight is then about twenty per cent and is chiefly 
water evaporated. 

Fish — Fish as an article of diet is of great nutritive value. 
It is less satisfying and not so stimulating as the flesh of animals, 
but is easily digested, and in many parts of the world whole com- 
munities subsist on it. The lowered vitality, however, of these 



48 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

communities would seem to indicate that fish alone should not 
be the source from which nitrogenous food is drawn. Fish con- 
tains a large proportion of phosphorous, which makes it a suit- 
able diet for those who have to perform much brain work, and 
for this class, which generally takes but little exercise, it has 
the further advantage of being easily digested. 

The flavor and digestibility of fish depend upon the amount of 
fat it contains, which varies in different species, white fish hav- 
ing the least amount of oil, and salmon and the eel the largest. 
Fish are preserved for use by smoking, drying, salting and by 
the use of oil. When salted they should be thoroughly soaked 
in water before used, as this will render them more palatable. 
Codfish is not easy of digestion ; it is often hard and tough. 
When in season curdy matter is often found between the flakes 
after boiling. The roe of fish is a greatly esteemed delicacy. 
The hard roe is the ova of the female fish, the soft roe or milt 
is the spermatic organ of the male. Caviare is the salted hard 
roe of the sturgeon. Codfish is verv liable to be infested by 
parasites, no less than ten species being found in it. It is neces- 
sary, therefore, before eating this fish that it should be thoroughly 
cooked; boiling or baking will effectually kill any known para- 
site. The flesh of apparently healthy fish may produce poison- 
ous symptoms. This is especially true of certain kinds of fish 
from tropical waters. There is no indication that the fish is dis- 
eased or that its flesh has or is undergoing decomposition, yet it 
produces violent symptoms of two kinds — gastro-intestinal irrita- 
tion and severe nervous symptoms, with great depression. Fish 
are less liable to cause irritation when eaten fresh, and should be 
eaten the earliest moment possible after capture. 

Oysters and shellfish, even when in season, produce poisonous 
symptoms at times, especially in certain persons who suffer from 
peculiarities which render them more susceptible. When decom- 
posing, oysters and shellfish act as violent irritant poisons. 

Mussels, and especially those taken from stagnant water to 
which sewage gains access, at times are very violent poisons. 

Wheat — Wheat is poor in water and rich in solids, therefore 
very nutritious in small bulk, and when the two outer coats 
are removed the whole grain is digestible. The nitrogenous 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 49 

substances consist of soluble albumen one to two per cent and 
gluten eight to twelve per cent. The amount of starch is large, 
sixty to seventy per cent, and easily digested. Phosphates of 
potash and magnesia are also found. Wheat is, however, defi- 
cient in fat and vegetable salts, which are required in the sys- 
tem. As usually prepared the grain is separated into flour and 
bran ; about eighty parts flour, sixteen parts bran and four parts 
loss. The flour is divided in three classes : best, middlings and 
bran flour. The wheat of commerce is named from its color or 
consistence, hard or soft, white or red. The hard wheat con- 
tains less water, less starch and more gluten than the soft wheat. 
Flour — Almost all the bran is separated from the finest flour, 
but it is a question whether this is desirable, since the bran con- 
tains large amounts of nitrogenous matter, fats and salts of min - 
erals. Bran, however, is very indigestible, and if taken into the 
stomach in large amounts it loads that organ with indigestible 
material from which but little nourishment can be extracted . 
The undigested mass also acts as an irritant, and in weak and 
irritable digestive tracts frequently starts persistent diarrhea. 
The bran, however, consists of four or five layers, and in some 
milling processes the outer three or four layers are removed, leav- 
ing only the inner tender layer, which is fairly easy of digestion. 
Wheat flour made in this manner, constitutes the best flour for 
the making of bread. If the whole wheat is used it should be 
ground very fine, so that the harder envelopes shall offer the 
least possible resistance to the digestive juices, and produce the 
least possible irritation. Whole wheat flour should never be 
used for making bread for invalids or sick persons. Children 
with a tendency to bowel complaints should never be given the 
ordinary so-called "graham" bread in their diet. This is a verv 
important point, since it has become the fashion in some ' ' health 
rules' ' to recommend whole meal bread. It is true that well made 
whole meal bread contains more nourishment than that made 
from finely sifted flour, such as is now generally used. The 
bran carries most if not all of the fats and mineral salts in the 
wheat grain, and these constituents are lost in the removal of the 
bran, whole meal showing upon analysis a marked excess of 
these over the best white flour. There is also a certain loss in 
nitrogenous matter, which is believed to aid digestion. Were 



50 HEALTH AT HOME. 

it not for the irritation which the bran produces upon a tender 
and irritable digestive tract the whole meal would be much pre- 
ferred for its nutrient value. Modern improvements in milling 
processes have, however, done much and will do more to elim- 
inate this objection, and when this can be completely remedied 
whole wheat flour will constitute the best material from which 
bread will be made. 

Adulterations of Wheat Flour — As a rule there is but little 
adulteration of wheat flour, since the price of good wheat has 
reached a level at which adulterations are not particularly profit- 
able, but with rising prices the case might be different. The 
chief adulterations are by the admixture of other cheaper flours, 
such as that of barley, potato, beans, peas, corn, oats, rye, rice, 
buckwheat, millet and linseed. All of these are easily recog- 
nized under the microscope. Mineral substances such as alum, 
gypsum, clay, powdered flint and calcium and magnesium car- 
bonate may also sometimes be used for adulterations. These 
are best detected by a chemical examination. 

Cooking of Flour — The effect of heat is to coagulate the albu- 
men and to transform some of the starch into sugar. 

Cakes — Flour, water and salt made into paste or dough without 
fermentation and cooked with low heat form a palatable food and 
this method of preparing flour for digestion is an easy one. 

Macaroni — This is made from flour of a hard Italian wheat, 
rich in gluten. The flour is moistened with water and pressed 
through a number of small openings, while at the same time heat 
is applied. It is very nutritious in small bulk and keeps well. 

Crackers or Biscuit — Crackers are usually made from flour with 
little or no bran, and generally no salt is added. The simplest 
crackers are merely flour and water, but some are made with 
milk, eggs, etc. Crackers should be well baked but not burnt. 
Crackers contain little water, and bulk for bulk are more nutri- 
tious than bread. Three-fourths of a pound of crackers is equal 
to one pound of bread. Bread is deficient in fat, and in some 
instances is difficult of digestion. 

Bread — The process of baking renders bread more digestible 
than flour. It can be used regularly as an article of diet without 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 51 

the system becoming: tired of it, although it may be always made 
in the same way. This, probably, is due to the great variety of 
its components. Bread is, however, poor in fats and salts of min- 
erals, hence the common practice of using some form of fat with 
it, such as butter or bacon fat. 

There are several methods of making bread, differing in the 
manner in which carbon dioxide gas is introduced into the dough 
mass. The common household method is by fermentation, pro- 
duced by the addition of yeast to the dough. The gas is pro- 
duced by the fermentation and permeates the mass of dough, 
dividing it into a large number of little cavities, and whenever 
we have this divided condition of the dough we have bread. 
This method of fermentation by yeast is a very satisfactory 
method provided the yeast be good. When the yeast is bad the 
fermentation changes go on in the stomach after the bread is 
eaten, a large quantity of carbon dioxide gas is freed and dyspep- 
sia, flatulence and unpleasant sensations, such as heartburn, are 
produced. 

Mechanically aerated bread is made by forcing carbon dioxide 
gas through the dough by pressure. The gas is prepared by the 
addition of sulphuric acid to chalk. The bread made in this way 
does not undergo fermentation and it is impossible for the conver- 
sion of starch into sugar and lactic acid to go too far. 

Bread may be of bad color (rather yellowish) from old flour, 
from grown flour, in which case the changes in the starch have 
generally gone on to a considerable extent, and the bread con- 
tains more sugar than usual and does not rise well, and from bad 
yeast. Bread may be acid or sour, from bad flour giving rise to 
an excess of lactic acid or from bad yeast. Bread is heavy and 
sodden from bad yeast fermenting too rapidly, or when the fer- 
mentation has not taken place (cold weather, bad water or some 
other cause will sometimes hinder it) or when the wheat from 
which the flour is made is grown, or when too little or too much 
heat has been employed. Bread is bitter from bitter yeast. 
Bread becomes rapidly mouldy when it contains an excess of 
water. Alum added to the dough stops fermentation, and 
also whitens the bread, does not increase the water, and enables 
bread to be made from flour that could not be otherwise used. 
Sulphates of copper and zinc in very small quantities are some- 



52 HEALTH AT HOME. 

times employed for the same purpose. These are adulterations 
and their use is not recommended. 

Biscuit — The biscuit is made by the addition of baking powder 
to the dough mass, the carbon dioxide necessary to make the bis- 
cuit light being given off by the chemical decomposition of the 
baking powder, which is a compound of some acid, such as 
hydrochloric, tartaric, phosphoric or citric, with sodium or 
ammonium carbonate. This method of preparation furnishes a 
wholesome and palatable bread. 

Barley — As an article of diet barley has the same advantages 
and disadvantages as wheat. It is said to be rather laxative and 
should be avoided where the stomach and bowels are weak and 
irritable, or where there is a tendency to dysentery. Barley is 
particularly rich in phosphoric acid and iron. The diseases aris- 
ing from use of barley under conditions of altered quality are 
those of wheat under similar conditions, viz. , indigestion, flatu- 
lence and diarrhea. 

Oats — Oats are considered to be even more nutritious than 
wheat or barley and to contain larger proportions of both nitro- 
genous matters and fat. The nitrogenous matters, however, have 
no adhesive property, and bread cannot be made of it. The amount 
of indigestible cellulose is large. On the other hand oatmeal 
has the great advantage of being easily cooked — much more so 
than wheat or barley. In its nutrient properties oatmeal stands 
nearer to beans and peas than do other cereals. Oatmeal should 
be thoroughly cooked. It is best prepared by placing the meal in 
a small quantity of water and cooking by steaming. Made into 
thin gruel it forms an exceedingly nourishing and healthful 
drink. 

Corn and Rye — Both corn and rye are very nutritious grains. 
Corn contains a large amount of fat, 6 or 7 per cent. It requires 
very careful cooking, as otherwise much of it passes through the 
body undigested, and often causes diarrhea. Corn in the shape 
of hominy should be thoroughly soaked in water from two to four 
hours and then thoroughly boiled for from four to six hours at a 
rather low heat. Corn cakes are especially palatable and nutri- 
tious. Corn flour is prepared by treating the meal with a weak 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 53 

solution of caustic soda. This removes the greater part of the fat 
and nitrogenous matter, making it more palatable but less nutri- 
tious. 

Rye makes a very dark, acid bread which causes diarrhea in 
those not accustomed to its use. One soon becomes accustomed 
to the bread, however, and as far as nutritive value goes, rye 
appears to be about equal to wheat. 

Rice — Rice consists of the whole grain after the husk has been 
removed. As an article of diet it furnishes an extremely digest- 
ible form of starch, and there is a great admixture of different food 
stuffs in the grain. It is poorer in nitrogenous matters than wheat 
and contains much less fat. 

Cooking of Rice — Rice should be steamed, not boiled, and the 
steaming should be thoroughly done, in order that the rice grains 
shall be swollen and digestible. If boiled at all it should not be 
for too long a time, else the albuminous matters are extracted 
and the rice loses in nutritive power. 

Buckwheat — Buckwheat is poor in nitrogenous substances 
and fat and contains a large amount of indigestible cellulose. It 
makes fairly palatable cakes, but their long continued use results 
in indigestion, as shown by the frequent skin eruptions or rash 
which is seen in those people who consume large amounts of 
buckwheat. 

Peas and Beans — Peas and beans, as representatives of the 
class of foods known as leguminosae, differ from other vegetables 
in the very large amount of nitrogenous substance called legu- 
min or vegetable casein, which they contain. They also contain 
a small amount of albumin and other proteid bodies. The advan- 
tages of peas and beans as articles of diet are the great amount of 
legumin and the existence of much sulphur and phosphorus in 
combination with the legumin. The disadvantage of peas and 
beans is that they are to a considerable extent indigestible. 
Much hydrogen sulphide gas is formed by the chemical changes 
occurring in the legumin, producing flatulence or wind in the 
intestines. Peas and beans, on the whole, are very valuable 
articles of diet, especially when added to the meat and bread diet 
of persons taking much exercise. 



54 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

Cooking of Peas a?id Beans — They must be boiled slowly and 
for a long time, otherwise they are very indigestible. If old no 
amount of boiling will soften them properly. They should be 
soaked in cold water for twelve to twenty-four hours, then crushed 
and stewed. In this way they can be made both palatable and 
digestible. Peas and beans should not be boiled in hard water or 
water containing chalk, as the lime forms insoluble compounds 
with the legumin. This rule should be generally observed in the 
cooking of all vegetables. 

Starches — Under the class of foods called starches come those 
whose chief food value depends upon the large amount of starch 
which they contain. The chief representatives of this class are 
arrowroots of various kinds ; tapioca, obtained from the cassava 
plant; sago, which is obtained from the sago palm. All of the 
starch class form a valuable, light and easily digested food when 
not taken in excess. They should be thoroughly cooked ; the 
best method is by boiling at a low heat. 

Sugar — Sugar should be more or less white, crystalline, not feel 
moist to the touch, and should entirely dissolve in water. The 
whiter the sugar the less is the percentage of water which it 
contains. 

Succulent Vegetables — Almost all other vegetables (except 
potatoes) are used not so much on account of nutritive qualities 
as for the mineral salts which they contain. Some of them also 
contain peculiar oils, such as occur in the onion, which act as 
condiments. 

Potatoes — Potatoes contain only a small amount of nitroge- 
nous matter and but little fat and mineral salts, but they contain 
a large amount of very easily digested starch and a large quantity 
of vegetable acids and their salts. The juice of the potato is 
acid and there is no better vegetable for constant use than the 
potato. The sweet potato and the yam are similar to the ordinary 
potato and are much relished as a change. To some individuals, 
however, they are very indigestible. 

Cooking of Potatoes — Potatoes are best cooked in their skins, 
either boiled or baked, otherwise a large amount of the salts pass 
off. When boiled in salt water nearly all of the mineral and 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 55 

vegetable salts in the potato are retained. The boiling should be 
slow at low temperature. Steaming is a better method of cooking. 

Milk — Milk contains all of the different classes of food which 
are essential to health, being especially intended for feeding dur- 
ing growth. The proportions of nitrogenous substances and fat, 
as compared to sugar, are large. Milk varies greatly in its 
composition, not only in the different breeds of cows from which 
the milk is taken, but also according to the manner in which and 
the substances upon which the cow is fed. Some breeds of cows, 
such as the Alderny and Jersey, give milk which contains a very 
large percentage of fat, while the milk from other breeds, such as 
the Shorthorn, contains a large proportion of casein. Koumiss is 
mare's milk which has been subjected to partial fermentation. It 
is valuable as an easily digested nutrient and stimulant. 

Changes in Milk — The cream rises in from four to eight hours, 
and is hastened by slightly warming the milk, but the quantity 
is not increased. Milk changes on standing. It absorbs oxygen 
and gives off carbon dioxide. Later on lactic acid is formed in 
large quantities, the milk becomes turbid and changes into a 
form called curd or "clabber." The cream which had pre- 
viously risen to the surface disappears. 

In decomposing milk a chemical poison develops in the form 
of a ptomaine, which is called tyrotoxicon. It was originally dis- 
covered in cheese, but has since been found in milk, and is 
especially liable to occur in ice cream. In poisoning by tyrotox- 
icon the symptoms are similar to those produced by other irritant 
poisons, accompanied by violent vomiting and purging, and 
great depression. 

Milk from Diseased Cows — Milk from diseased animals soon 
decomposes. It sours very rapidly and generally an offensive 
odor develops. Pus can sometimes be found in the milk of cows 
suffering from certain diseases, and the milk sometimes coagu- 
lates on boiling. In cows suffering from tuberculosis during the 
early stages the quantity of milk is often increased, but it con- 
tains an excess of water and alkaline salts, and is deficient in 
fat, sugar and proteids. Tuberculosis is very prevalent among 
cows, and it is the same disease that is found among human beings, 
hence it follows that it is quite possible, and indeed it seems 



56 HEALTH AT HOMK. 

proven, that tuberculosis is transmitted from cows to man through 
the milk. Milk may also be the medium through which germs 
of disease may be transmitted, the germs gaining admission to 
the milk after leaving the cow. In this way, scarlet fever, diph- 
theria and typhoid fever have frequently been spread through 
communities, especially among children. The milk may be 
infected by watering it with impure water, or by putting the milk 
in unclean cans. 

Milk which is contaminated with pus from an inflamed udder, 
or an abscess on the udder, will produce sore mouth in children, 
accompanied by ulcers on the mucous membrane of the lips and 
gums. 

Butter — Butter, as an article of diet, supplies most people with 
the principal amount of fat which they take. Fresh butter is 
easily digested by most people, but, when it becomes rancid, it 
causes dyspepsia and diarrhea. This is true of all decomposing 
fats. 

Adulterations — Lard and beef fat are commonly used as adul- 
terations. There is nothing harmful in this form of adulteration 
and no objection to its use, provided, however, the fact of adul- 
teration be not concealed. In truth a good quality of adulterated 
butter, sold under the name of "oleomargarine," made of clean, 
wholesome, beef suet, under careful supervision as regards clean- 
liness and purity, may be preferred to a poor quality of so-called 
"country butter" made without due regard to cleanliness as 
regards the milk or utensils, or where the cream has been per- 
mitted to stand so long as to undergo a partial decomposition 
before churning. 

"Butterine, " which is made by the addition of hog's fat or 
lard to butter, a poor quality of which is often used, is less to be 
desired than the oleomargarine. The various forms of coloring 
matter introduced into butter to improve its appearance are, as 
a rule, harmless. 

Cheese — There are many varieties of cheese, some being made 
from skim milk, others from the whole milk. Cheese contains a 
large amount of nitrogenous matter and fat in a small bulk, and 
under some conditions affords an excellent form of nourishment. 
It is, however, somewhat difficult of digestion, especially to 



HEAI/fH AT HOMK. 57 

certain individuals, producing indigestion by its very richness. 
Strong odor in cheese is evidence of partial decomposition and 
consequently is in a measure an indication of the possibility of 
bad consequences arising from its use. Cheese having strong, 
offensive odor should be avoided. Those least likely to produce 
indigestion and dyspepsia are the fresh varieties made from whole 
milk. The possible presence of the poisonous ptomaine, tyrotox- 
icon, should always be remembered when serious symptoms arise 
after partaking of cheese. The treatment for tyrotoxicon poison- 
ing will be found in the chapter on poisons and antidotes else- 
where in this book. 

Eg"g"S — Eggs contain a large amount of nourishment in very 
small bulk. The food stuffs in the egg are chiefly albumin and 
fat with a large amount of water. Eggs should be used only 
when perfectly fresh. Hard boiled eggs are difficult of digestion, 
owing to the fact that the albumin is coagulated, hence the diges- 
tive juices have less opportunity to act upon the mass, it being very 
slowly dissolved by the fluids ; poached and soft boiled eggs are 
the easiest digested. Raw eggs whipped into a custard with 
milk and slightly cooked form one of the most digestible meth- 
ods of taking eggs. 



Ai/cohouc Bbvkragks. 

In considering alcoholic beverages it will be necessary to dis- 
cuss at some length the nature and effect of their principal con- 
stituent, alcohol, although different beverages may vary widely in 
their composition, effects, and the amount of alcohol which they 
contain. 

Alcohol — Alcohol is the product of fermentation, in which 
process sugar is converted into alcohol. Any substance which 
contains carbon, hydrogen and oxygen can, by fermentation and 
distillation, be made to produce alcohol. The chief sources for 
the production of alcohol are the cereal grains, potatoes and var- 
ious fruits. In the grains the starch is first converted into sugar 
and the sugar is then broken up into alcohol and a residue com- 
posed chiefly of water. 



58 HEALTH AT HOME. 

Physiological Action of Alcohol 071 the Stomach — In very small 
quantities it appears to aid digestion, in larger amounts it checks 
digestion, reddens the mucous membrane lining the stomach and 
produces a thickening of the membrane by increasing the amount 
of connective tissue between the glands. This is followed by 
fatty and cystic degeneration of the glands themselves and finally 
more or less atrophy and destruction of these parts ; hence the 
common expression in reference to chronic drunkards that they 
are ' ' burned out. ' ' Taken habitually in large quantities it lessens 
and finally destroys the appetite. 

Effect on the Liver — Taken in large quantities for a long time it 
produces enlargement of the organ by the deposit of fatty 
material. This is followed by an increase of the fibrous tissue and 
subsequent contraction and atrophy, so that the function of the 
liver is interfered with or abolished. 

Effect on the Lungs — It produces irritation and alters the tissues 
of the lungs. Chronic bronchitis and pneumonia are more fre- 
quent and serious in those who habitually take much alcohol. 

Effect on the Heart and Blood Vessels — Alcohol in healthy per- 
sons at first increases the force and quickness of the heart action. 
It causes evident dilation of the superficial blood vessels, as is 
shown by the redness and flushing of the skin. If it were not for 
this yielding of the vessels, alcohol would be a most dangerous 
agent, as either the strong wave of blood would break the vessel 
or the heart would not be properly emptied of blood during the 
contraction. There is danger, then, in the excessive use of alco- 
hol in advanced life when the arteries have become more rigid, of 
sudden death as a result of the rupture of some of the blood ves- 
sels about the brain. Eventually the vessels on the surface become 
permanently enlarged and turgid, so that their course in the skin 
can be easily traced. 

Effect 071 the Blood — The amount of fat is increased. The 
chemical changes in the blood are partially arrested. 

Effect on the Nervous System — In most cases it acts at once as 
an anaesthetic, and lessens the rapidity of impressions, the power 
of thought and the perfection of the senses. In some cases, 
however, it seems to increase the rapidity of thought and excites 
the imagination, but even here the power of control over a train 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 59 

of thought is lessened. The special senses of sight, taste, touch 
and hearing are dulled. In almost all cases moderate quantities 
cause a feeling of comfort and exhilaration, due probably at first 
to its anaesthetic effect upon the nerves of the stomach, but later 
to its action upon the heart, increasing the circulation and the 
amount of blood which is sent to the nerve centers in the brain. 

Effect on the Muscular System — Voluntary muscular power is 
lessened, especially when large amounts of alcohol are taken at 
once. The finer combined movements are less perfectly made. 
In very large amounts it paralyzes the respiratory centers in the 
brain, sometimes causing death. 

Effect o?i the Tissue Changes of the Body — Whether tissue 
changes in the body are materially interfered with or not is 
not definitely known, but probably they are to a certain extent. 

Effect on the Temperature of the Body — In full doses to a 
healthy man or animal alcohol causes a fall in temperature. This 
change, however, is not marked, and in most cases the change is 
slight. 

Effect on the Eliminating Organs — The amount of urine is 
slightly increased, also its acidity. The action of the skin is 
increased and larger amounts of insensible perspiration occur. 

Remote Effects of Alcohol — The degenerative changes which 
occur so frequently in the stomach and liver, by the constant 
introduction of improper amounts of alcohol into the system, 
follow also in almost all other parts of the body. The brain, its 
membranes and its vessels, suffer early and principally. Many 
cases of severe brain disease and insanity are unquestionably due 
to excessive use of alcohol. Degenerative changes in the stomach, 
liver, lungs and kidneys also follow its immoderate use. The 
nature of the change seems to be the same in all cases, that of a 
fibroid and fatty degeneration. What is moderate use of alcohol 
in one individual may be and often is an excess in another. 
People differ constitutionally, and an amount of alcohol which 
would be of no particular detriment to one person would be a 
poisonous dose to another. Alcohol, by its great effect in increas- 
ing the action of the heart, is undoubtedly the cause of many 
diseases of the circulatory system occurring in those addicted to 
its use. 



60 HEALTH AT HOME. 

Conclusions on the Use of Alcohol — The vast mass of facts, 
physiological and of personal experiences, leads to the conclusion 
that alcohol is unnecessary to the well being of the healthy 
organism. That a man can better withstand extreme heat or 
extreme cold, can better perform hard mental or physical labor, 
and in fact has greater powers of endurance without the addition 
of alcohol to his diet. In certain diseased conditions, where the 
heart needs a powerful and rapid stimulant, the use of alcohol 
is invaluable, but as an article of diet it is, to the healthy indi- 
vidual, not only unnecessary but actually harmful. 

Alcoholic Beverages — Alcoholic beverages vary much, not 
only in the proportion of alcohol which they contain, but in the 
chemical composition of the liquid. 

PER CENT OF ALCOHOL IN DIFFERENT BEVERAGES : 

Beverage. Per cent Alcohol. 

English ale 7.3 

London porter 5. 5 

Scotch ale 8.5 

Lager beer 4. to 8. 

Bavarian beer 4.5 

Vienna beer 3.5 

Port wine 16.62 to 23.2 

Sherry wine 16. to 25. 

Madiera wine 16.7 to 22. 

Bordeaux wines 6.85 to 13. 

Rhone wines 8.7 to 13.7 

Burgundy 8.9 to 12. 

Champagnes 5.8 to 13. 

Moselles 8. to 13. 

Rhine wines 6. 7 to 16. 

Hungarian wines 9.1 to 15. 

Italian wines 14. to 19. 

Brandy 45. to 55. 

Gin 49. to 57. 

Whiskey 50. to 55. 

Rum 50. to 60. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 61 

Beer — Beer is brewed from malt and hops. In inferior beers 
corn, wheat and sugar are often substituted for the barley malt 
and hops. The percentage of malt extract varies from 5 to 10.9 
per cent. It is least in the bitter and highest in the sweet ales 
and beers. There are present in beers and ales many acids, such 
as lactic, acetic, gallic, and malic acid ; also their salts in composi- 
tion with various chlorides and phosphates. Sugar, and a small 
quantity of albuminous matter, are also present. Dark colored 
beers such as porter and stout owe their dark color to the presence 
of roasted malt or caramel. Volatile and essential oils are also 
present. 

From the foregoing it will readily be seen, how complex a sub- 
stance beer is and what varied and complex actions it may have 
upon the system. 

Physiological Action — So far as known, beer seems to lessen 
the excretion from the system, of the products of tissue change, 
the amount of urea in the urine, and of carbon dioxide from the 
lungs, both being decreased. The action on the nervous system 
is the same as that of alcohol, the exhausting or depressing action 
of large quantities of beer, taken at one time, being probably due 
to the large amount of potash it contains and also to the action 
of the hops. When beer is taken daily in excess, it gradually 
produces a state of fullness and plethora of the system ; this is due 
to the continual interference with the elimination of the fat and 
nitrogenous substances from the tissues. When this reaches a 
certain point, the appetite is lessened and the bodily power is 
diminished. There is imperfect oxidation, and an excess of 
partially oxidized products, such as oxalic and uric acids which 
act as chemical poisons, producing gouty and bilious disorders. 

Wines — The composition of wines is even more varied and 
complex than of beers. It may be said, however, that they contain, 
in addition to the varying percentages of alcohol, varying quan- 
tities of many different ethers, some of which are volatile while 
others may be said to be fixed. There are also present varying 
amounts of albuminous matters, sugar, fat, free acids and salts. 
The champagnes also contain free carbon dioxide. 

Spirits — Brandy is distilled from wine or fermented grapes, 
and contains, besides the alcohol, many ethers, tannin and color- 



62 HEALTH AT HOME. 

ing matter made from the cask or from caramel. Inferior brandy 
made from potatoes or grain contains a deadly poison called fusel 
oil. Rum is distilled from fermented juice of the sugar cane, 
and derives its peculiar odor from the large amount of butyric 
ether present. Gin is made from grain, unmalted, and besides 
containing the oil of juniper is flavored with various aromatic 
substances. Whiskey is distilled from malted grain. 

Dietetic Use of Alcoholic Beverages — Some advantages 
may be obtained from moderate dietetic use of beer and wine on 
account of the presence of other substances than alcohol in their 
composition. Wines, on account of the large amounts of salts and 
sugar present in most wines, act, when taken in moderate quan- 
tities, favorably on digestion, and many people with weak diges- 
tive powers are much benefited by the addition of small amounts 
of wine to their diet. Port, sherry and champagne are the best 
forms in which wine can be taken. Beer does not so well agree 
with weakened digestion; its chief value is obtained when used 
in those cases in which there is a general impairment of the phy- 
sical system the digestive powers still remaining in good condi- 
tion, such as is the case with a nursing mother, or one recovering 
from any wasting diesase, where it is desired to rapidly put on 
flesh. Brandy, gin and whiskey should never be added to a diet 
and should only be used in those cases where profound and rapid 
stimulation are demanded. Here we find them of value and 
occupying a prominent position among the remedies at our com- 
mand with which to combat disease. But let them always be 
only considered as a medicine, and occupy a place in the medi- 
cine chest and not upon the table or sideboard. They are for the 
most part merely flavored and colored alcohol and they do not 
contain the ingredients which give a dietetic value to beer and 
wine ; morever they are more dangerous, since it is so easy to 
take them undiluted and thus introduce an amount of alcohol into 
the system which at once becomes harmful, and if persisted in is 
destructive. 



heai/th at home. 63 

Non-Aixohouc Beverages 

Coffee — Unroasted coffee contains much cellulose, sugar and 
vegetable acid. There is also a small quantity of aromatic oil 
and caffein. The total amount of caffein is small, but it is the 
active principle upon which coffee depends for its stimulating 
effect. The caffein is not appreciably affected by roasting. 
When coffee is roasted it swells considerably and becomes lighter, 
losing from 15 to 25 per cent in weight. The sugar is changed 
into caramel and the caffein is liberated from its chemical com- 
bination with other substances. Several gases are formed, but 
carbon dioxide is the principal product. It is owing to the forma- 
tion of these gases that the coffee swells so much. 

As an Article of Diet — Coffee stimulates the nervous system, 
and in large doses produces tremors. Pure caffein in large doses 
produces tetanus, or peculiar stiffness of the muscles. Coffee in 
moderate quantities increases the frequency of the pulse, but in 
large amounts diminishes the pulse rate. It removes the sensa- 
tion of commencing fatigue during exercise, but owing to its 
stimulating effect on the nervous system and circulation it pro- 
duces wakefulness. Coffee has but little effect on the salivary 
digestion, but it retards to a considerable extent the stomach 
digestion when taken in considerable quantities. It slightly 
increases the action of the kidneys, and in some cases acts as a 
mild cathartic upon the intestines. Coffee should not be kept 
long after roasting unless it is kept sealed tightly, as it rapidly 
loses its aroma. It should not be ground until time of using. 
Coffee should not be boiled in making, as the boiling liberates the 
tannin and other bitter principles in the coffee and dissipates the 
aroma or flavor. In making coffee the water should be brought 
to the boiling point and then the finely ground coffee should be 
added and the vessel then removed from the fire and allowed to 
stand for five minutes. The liquid is then poured off from the 
grounds and placed upon the fire again and brought to the boiling 
point, when the beverage is ready for use. The partially 
exhausted grounds can be again used by the addition of fresh 
coffee for a second infusion, but should be thrown away after the 
second using. . 



64 HEALTH AT HOME. 

Adulterations — The usual adulterations are chicory, grains and 
beans. The whole coffee grain is not often adulterated, but the 
adulterations are frequent in coffee which is ground before being 
put up in packages for the market. 

Tea — Teas are of two kinds, black tea, such as Souchong and 
Oolong", and green teas, such as Hyson and Gunpowder. Dry 
tea contains about 1.8 per cent of thein, which is the active prin- 
ciple of tea, and which corresponds to the caffein in coffee. Tea 
also contains albumin, sugar, cellulose, tannin and vegetable 
extracts, and small amounts of other matters, such as oil and 
resin. 

As an Article of Diet — Tea has a decided stimulating and 
restorative action on the nervous system. This effect is not 
followed by depression. The pulse is a little quickened. The 
action of the skin is increased, while that of the bowels is les- 
sened. The kidneys are but little if any affected. The salivary 
and stomach digestion are slightly retarded by teas. This is prob- 
ably due to the large amount of tannin contained in tea, and it is 
claimed that the addition of a small quantity of carbonate of soda 
to the tea entirely removes this effect upon the digestion. 

Making the Infusion of Tea — The water should be brought to 
the boiling point and the tea then added and the vessel removed 
from the fire and allowed to stand for five or six minutes. The 
liquid should then be poured off from the leaves and reheated 
over the fire. 

Cocoa — Cocoa contains an active principle called theobromin, 
which greatly resembles caffein and thein found in coffee and tea, 
but the composition of cocoa removes it widely from tea and 
coffee as an article of diet, as cocoa contains a large amount of fat, 
in some instances as much as 40 to 50 per cent. It also contains 
from 15 to 18 per cent of proteid matter, with some vegetable 
extractives and a large amount of phosphate of potash. 

As a?i Article of Diet — The large quantity of fat and proteid 
substance which it conains makes cocoa a very nourishing and 
valuable addition to the diet. It is very useful in weak states of 
the system, and in healthy men where great exertion is required. 

Adulterations — In commerce cereal grains, starches, arrowroot, 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 65 

sago, or potato starch and sugar, are very commonly mixed with 
cocoa, and some of the so-called homeopathic cocoas are rightly 
named, for the amount of cocoa is very small. 

Chocolate — This is a preparation of cocoa from which the 
greater part of the cocoa butter or fat has been removed. The 
paste is then mixed with sugar and various flavoring substances 
and pressed into moulds. 

Coca — The leaves of the erythroxylon coca, when chewed, are 
said to remove the feeling of fatigue, and the Indians of Peru 
make use of the plant for this purpose. The active principle is 
cocaine, which is so useful as a local anaesthetic. 

Kola — This is made from the seeds of the kola nut. It relieves 
fatigue to some extent when chewed. It increases the amount of 
urine, acts as a stimulant upon the nervous system, and increases 
arterial tension. 

Condiments — Under this head come vinegar, mustard, pep- 
per and salt. 

Vinegar — This is a useful addition to the diet, but should be 
pure and not contain sulphuric acid, as, when thus adulterated, 
it not only furnishes a strong acid, but one which forms an insol- 
uable compound with any lime salts with which it may come in 
contact in the body. 

Mustard — Mustard is made from the seed of the mustard plant, 
from which the outer coats have been removed and the residue of 
the seed ground into a fine powder. It is a mild irritant and 
stimulates the flow of saliva and gastric juice and adds flavor to 
the food when taken in moderate quantities. 

Pepper — Pepper is an irritant stimulant to the glands in the 
mucous membrane of the mouth and stomach and increases the 
flow of saliva and gastric juice. Ground pepper, as found in the 
shops, is almost always adulterated with linseed, mustard seed , 
husks, flour and ground rice. 

Salt — Salt is a necessary addition to the diet. The fluids of the 
body all contain more or less salt and all foods are made more or 
less palatable by the addition of salt. 



66 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 



EXERCISE. 

In order to have perfect health every organ must have its 
required amount of exercise. If exercise is deficient either in a 
general sense, or as regards any particular organ, nutrition suffers, 
and the organ is lessened in size and more or less degeneration 
occurs. If the exercise be excessive, nutrition, at first appar- 
ently vigorous, becomes at last abnormal, and often a degenera- 
tion occurs which is as complete as that which follows the disuse 
of the organ. Every organ has its special stimulus which excites 
it to action, and if this stimulus is perfectly normal in quality and 
quantity perfect health is necessarily the result. * The term 
exercise, however, is generally used to mean only the action of 
the voluntary muscles. This action is not absolutely essential to 
the exercise of the other organs, still it is really necessary, as the 
heart especially, and to a certain extent all of the other organs, 
except possibly the brain, are profoundly affected by the action of 
the voluntary muscles. Without this exercise of the voluntary 
muscles the health must inevitably be lost, and it becomes impor- 
tant, therefore, to determine the effects of exercise, and the amount 
which should be taken. 

The Effects of Exercise — On the Lungs — The most impor- 
tant effect of muscular exercise is produced on the lungs. The 
circulation of the blood through the lungs is much hurried, and 
the quantity of air taken in and of carbon dioxide thrown 
out is wonderfully increased by exercise. The amount of air 
taken into the lungs by a person when walking at the rate of six 
miles per hour is seven times as great as the amount taken in 
while lying quietly in one position. This is more clearly shown 
when it is stated in this way : Under ordinary circumstances a 
man draws in 480 cubic inches of air per minute ; if he walks 
four miles an hour he draws in five times 480, or 2400 cubic 
inches ; if six miles an hour seven times 480, or 3360 cubic inches. 
The amount of carbon dioxide or waste from the system in the 
expired air is correspondingly increased. The amount of water 
removed from the system, both by the lungs, in the form of 
watery vapor, and by the skin in the form of perspiration is 



HEALTH AT HOME. 67 

vastly increased by active exercise. Carbon dioxide is formed 
chiefly in the muscles, and is taken from them by the blood and 
carried to the lungs, where it is expelled from the body, and 
this process must be rapid so that there may be no accumu- 
lation of the carbon dioxide in the tissues, else their power of 
strong action is reduced or made impossible. That this is true is 
shown by the diminution in the power of bodily action which 
occurs when the circulation of the blood through the lungs is by 
any means interfered with. 

Muscular exercise is then clearly necessary for the sufficient 
elimination of carbon from the body, and in a state of prolonged 
rest either there must be a diminished amount of food containing 
carbon taken into the body or carbon will accumulate in the tis- 
sues with its resultant poisonous effects. Excessive or badly 
arranged exercise may lead to congestion of the lungs, and even 
to bleeding from the lungs. Deficient exercise, on the other 
hand, is one of the conditions which favor the development of 
those changes in the lungs which depend upon altered nutrition, 
such as consumption. Certain rules may be established from 
these facts. During exercise the action of the lungs should be 
perfectly free — no impediment must be allowed to the freest play 
of the chest and the action of the muscles of respiration — and as 
soon as the respiration becomes labored or sighing the lungs are 
becoming too congested and rest is necessary in order that the 
normal balance may be regained. Another point is that the great 
increase in the amount of carbon thrown out of the system during 
exercise demands a corresponding increase in the amount of car- 
bon taken into the system in the food. This increase in carbon 
is best supplied in the form of fat, and not in the form of starch. 
Again, as alcohol lessens the excretion of carbon dioxide through 
the lungs, it is hurtful during exercise, and for this reason, as 
well as because it lessens the power of voluntary action, those 
who use large amounts of alcohol are incapable of great exertion. 
This is well understood by trainers of athletes, who allow no 
spirits and but little if any wine or beer. Water alone is the best 
liquid to train on. Finally, since the amount of carbon dioxide 
removed through the lungs is so much increased, it follows that 
a much larger amount of pure air is necessary, and all enclosed 
buildings, such as gymnasia, where exercise is taken, should 
have every facility for thorough and complete ventilation. 



68 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

On the Heart and Blood Vessels — The action of the heart is 
greatly increased in force and frequency by exercise, and the 
flow of blood through all parts of the body as well as the heart 
itself, is augmented. The increase in heart beats is from ten to 
thirty beats per minute in ordinarily active exercise, but in severe 
exercise it may be much more. After exercise the rate of heart 
beats falls below the normal and may become irregular or inter- 
mittent. During exercise if the heart is not oppressed the action, 
though rapid and forcible, is regular and equable ; but when the 
heart becomes embarrassed, the pulse becomes quick, small, and 
then unequal and irregular. After resting for a time the healthy 
heart again regains its normal regular action. Excessive exer- 
cise when too prolonged leads to more or less permanent disturb- 
ance of the heart and vessels; in extreme cases even to rupture 
of the heart or some of the vessels. In other instances excessive 
exercise is followed by palpitation and hypertrophy of the heart, 
and rarely to valvular disease. These affections may be avoided 
by careful training and due proportion of rest during exercise. 
Deficient exercise leads to weakening of the heart's action and 
ultimately to dilation, and fatty degeneration. In commencing 
exercise to which one is not accustomed the heart must be closely 
watched. Excessive rapidity (one hundred and twenty to one 
hundred and forty beats per minute), inequality and irregularity 
will indicate that rest and more care in beginning the exercise are 
needed, in order that the heart may become accustomed to the 
additional work. 

On the Skin — The skin becomes red from dilation of the blood 
vessels, and perspiration is increased; water, chloride of sodium 
(salt) and acids (fatty) pass off in great abundance. This evapo- 
ration reduces and regulates the heat of the body, which would 
otherwise soon become excessive ; thus, even during violent exer- 
cise, if the perspiration be free, there is but little increase in the 
internal heat of the body, but if from any cause the perspiration 
be checked the bodily heat soon increases, languor follows and in 
extreme cases great prostration ensues. No amount of external 
cold seems to be able to check the passage of fluid through the 
skin, although it may check the rapidity of evaporation. Dur- 
ing exercise there is little danger of chill under almost any cir- 



HEALTH AT HOME. 69 

cumstances, but when exercise ceases there is then great danger, 
because the heat of the body rapidly falls and declines below the 
normal amount, while the evaporation from the surface still con- 
tinues, thus increasing the reduction of bodily heat. The lessons 
to be drawn from these facts are that the skin should be kept 
extremely clean and the pores thoroughly opened. During exer- 
cise the body may be thinly clad, but immediately afterward it 
should be covered sufficiently well to prevent the least feeling of 
coolness of the surface. Flannel is best for this purpose. 

On the Voluntary Muscles — The muscles grow, become harder 
and respond more readily to will power. Their growth, however, 
has a limit, and when any single muscle or group of muscles is 
exercised to too great an extent, they will, after growing to great 
size, commence to waste. This does not seem to be the case when 
all the muscles of the body are exercised, for then no single muscle 
or group of muscles can be over- exercised. Prolonged exertion 
without sufficient rest interferes to a certain extent with the 
nutrition of the muscles and they become soft. The rules to be 
drawn from these facts are that all muscles and not a single group 
should be brought into play, and that periods of exercise must be 
alternated with long periods of rest, especially during the early 
part of training, until the system becomes accustomed to the 
exercise. 

On the Nervous System — It is supposed that the intellect is less 
clear in those who take excessive exercise. But there is no 
doubt that great bodily activity is quite consistent with extreme 
mental activity and, indeed, considering that perfect nutrition is 
not possible, except with bodily activity, it may be inferred that 
sufficient exercise is necessary for perfect performance of mental 
work. The point to be made is that exercise should be in moder- 
ation and not pushed to excess. Deficient exercise causes a 
heightened sensitiveness of the nervous system, a sort of morbid 
excitability, and a greater susceptibility to the action of external 
agencies. 

On the Digestive System — The appetite is largely increased by 
exercise, the increased desire seeming to be mostly for meat and 
fat. Exercise makes digestion more perfect and absorption more 
rapid. The circulation through the liver and abdominal organs 



70 HEALTH AT HOME. 

is carried on with more vigor. The effects of exercise on diges- 
tion are greatly increased if it is taken in the open air, and it is 
then a most valuable remedy for some forms of dyspepsia. On 
the other hand lack of exercise lessens both the appetite and 
digestive power. 

General Effect of Exercise on the Body — The chief effect is to 
increase the oxidation of carbon. It also eliminates water 
from the body ; after exercise, therefore, the body, especially the 
blood, is poor in water. It increases in circulation everywhere, 
thus increasing the rapidity of tissue change and renewal. It 
increases the outflow of heat from the body by increasing the 
perspiration, which carries out with it large amounts of waste 
matters, thus cleansing the system. It strengthens all parts of the 
body. To obtain the best effects of exercise, it must be indulged 
in, carefully and in moderation. Sufficient intervals of rest must 
be allowed and care must be taken to avoid chilling after exer- 
cise. There must be supplied to the body a sufficient increase 
in the amount of food elements, which are demanded by the 
inci eased rapidity of tissue changes which occur during action. 
The lungs must be free to act to their full capacity, so that suffi- 
cient oxygen may be taken in to properly exchange for the 
increased amount of carbon dioxide in the blood. 

Clothing — The object of clothing is to protect the body 
against cold and heat. Materials for clothing are chiefly cotton, 
linen, wool, silk and leather. 

Cotton is a vegetable substance, the fiber being very hard, and 
it does not shrink in washing, does not rapidly absorb water, 
either into the fiber or between the fibers in the cloth. It con- 
ducts heat less rapidly than linen, but much more rapidly than 
wool. Its advantages as an article of dress are cheapness and 
durability. Its hard non-absorbing fibers place it far below wool 
as a warm clothing. 

Linen is also made from vegetable fibers. It conducts heat and 
absorbs water slightly better than cotton. It is smoother than 
cotton, but as an article of clothing belongs in the same class. 

Wool is an animal fiber ; is a bad conducter of heat, and great 
absorber of water, but is a poor absorber of odors. Water pene- 
trates into the fibers of the wool as well as between them. This 



I 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 71 

property of absorbing water is a very important one. During 
perspiration the evaporation from the surface of the body is 
necessary to reduce the heat which is generated by the exercise. 
When the exercise is finished the evaporation still goes on, and 
to such an extent as to chill the body. When dry woolen cloth- 
ing is put on after exercise the vapor from the surface of the body 
is condensed in the wool and gives out again the large amount of 
heat which had become latent when the water was vaporized. 
Therefore woolen clothing feels warm when used during sweat- 
ing. In the case of cotton and linen clothing the perspiration 
passes through them and evaporates from the surface, so the loss 
of heat continues and the body becomes chilled. In addition to 
this the texture of the wool is warmer, on account of its bad con- 
ducting power, and it is less easily penetrated by cold winds. 
The disadvantage of wool is that its soft fiber shrinks on washing 
and becomes smaller, harder and less absorbent. The admixture 
of certain proportions of cotton with wool forms a cloth which 
shrinks but little in washing and still retains a considerable por- 
tion of the qualities which make the pure woolen cloth desirable. 

General Conclusions on Clothing — Protection Against Cold — 
Wool is superior to either cotton or linen, and should be worn for 
underclothing in cold weather. Cotton and linen have about the 
same value for protection against cold. 

Protection Against Heat — Texture has nothing to do with pro- 
tection against direct rays of the sun ; this depends entirely upon 
color. White is the best color, then grey, yellow, pink, blue and 
black. In hot weather, therefore, white or grey should be chosen. 
In the shade, the effect of color on heat is not marked. The 
thickness and heat conducting power of the material are the con- 
ditions which influence heat. 

Protection Against Cold Winds — For equal thickness leather 
and rubber goods take first rank, wool the second, cotton and 
linen are about equal in the third place 

Absorption of Perspiration — Wool has about double the power 
of absorption of cotton and linen. 

Absorption of Odors — This partly depends upon color. Experi- 
ments show that the order of power of absorption of odors is 
greatest in black, then in blue, red, green, yellow and white. 
As far as texture is concerned the absorption is in proportion to 



72 HEALTH AT HOME- 

the power to absorb water, hence wool absorbs more odor than 
cotton or linen. 



DISINFECTION AND DEODORIZATION. 

The term, disinfectant, which has now come into popular use, 
unfortunately has been employed to mean several different things, 
but the sense in which it is used here is to designate those sub- 
stances which can prevent infectious diseases from spreading, by 
destroying their specific poisons. The mode in which the poisons 
are destroyed is a matter of indifference, provided the destruc- 
tion of the poison be accomplished. 

The general term, air purifier, is given to those agents which 
in any way cleanse the air; disinfectants then come under this 
classification. The term, deodorants, is given to those sub- 
stances which are used to prevent putrefaction in excreta or in 
waste animal or vegetable matters, or to remove the products of 
putrefaction. In a great many instances the substances which 
are recommended as disinfectants are little more than deodorants, 
and ought properly to be considered as such. 

The chief human diseases which are spread by means of special 
agencies (conveniently designated under the term, contagia) 
are : Infectious fevers, such as typhoid and typhus fevers, scar- 
let fever, various forms of malarial fever, yellow fever and chol- 
era, bubonic plague, influenza, whooping-cough, diphtheria, 
erysipelas, puerperal fever, syphilis, gonorrhea, glanders, tuber- 
cular phthisis and leprosy. 

It has long been the belief that the spread of infectious diseases 
might be prevented by destroying the agencies in some way, 
and various fumigations, fires and similar plans have been 
employed for centuries during great epidemics. In order to apply 
disinfection in the modern sense of the term we ought to know, 
first, the nature of these contagious agencies ; second, the media 
through which they spread ; third, the effect produced upon them 
by the substances with which we attempt to destroy them. 

Contagia — Contagia are those substances which, when devel- 
oped under diseased conditions in one organism or individual, 



1 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 73 

will, when transferred to some other organism or individual offer- 
ing a favorable or suitable soil or location for their development, 
produce the same or a similar disease in that organism or indi- 
vidual. The nature of contagia is at present the object of eager 
inquiry and study, and in some instances the specific substance 
which developes the disease has been isolated and studied but in 
the great majority of cases much is yet to be learned. Con- 
tagia are now considered to belong in the main, if not altogether, 
to a general class called bacteria and are considered as being 
closely allied to that form of growth known as fungi. Bacteria 
are given various names, according to certain peculiarities of 
shape, habit or development, such as baccilli, microbes, vibrios 
and monads. It is still an open question whether the bacteria 
themselves produce the disease, or whether the disease is produced 
by the products of tissue change within the bacteria themselves, 
and which are passed out in the form of excreta, thus infecting the 
soil in which the bacteria grows. Under this theory the disease 
is caused by the poison which the bacteria produce. Many forms 
of bacteria are not only harmless, but beneficent. In truth our 
digestive functions are dependent, for the most part, upon the 
action of bacteria for their completion. Fermentation is the result 
of the development of bacteria, and all decomposition is caused by 
some form of bacteria. 

As knowledge of disease increases, the belief is becoming more 
general that each of the specific diseases, which are capable of 
being transfered from one individual to another, and which are 
not dependent upon some organic function or functional derange- 
ment of the organism, is due to some special and distinctive germ 
or micro-organism. Many of these germs have been recognized 
under the microscope and have been isolated and their habits 
studied, and means found for their destruction. 

Media or Material in which Contagia are Spread — The 

special and distinctive symptoms of each disease are usually 
attended with special violence in some one or more parts of the 
body, and it is especially in these parts of the body that the con- 
tagia are formed. Rapid changes, either of growth or decay, are 
found in these parts. The skin and mouth and throat in scarlet 
fever, sore throat in diphtheria, skin and bronchial secretions in 



74 HEALTH AT HOME. 

measles, the stools containing the broken down tissue of the lin- 
ing mucous membrane and glands of the intestine in typhoid 
fever, the sputa of consumptives containing broken down lung 
tissue are all evidences of this. In fact those parts of the body 
which are the breeding place of the contagious particles give off 
the poison in greatest amount. The portions of the body thus 
thrown off, and containing the contagia, may then pass into the 
air or find their way into the drinking water or food, and in this 
way be introduced by breathing, drinking or eating, or through 
broken surfaces of the body. Any break of the skin may be the 
point of entrance for certain kinds of bacteria, which thus pro- 
duce the disease. The methods of disinfection ought then to 
deal with the poisons at their point of origin as far as they are 
accessible to us. Thus the way to prevent the spread of scarlet 
fever is to attack the poison in the skin from the very first and 
destroy it there if possible; failing in that, the effort to prevent 
the epidermis from breaking up and passing into the air should 
be made. Oily disinfectant inunctions of the skin and complete 
disinfection of all clothing which in any way touches or comes in 
contact with the skin of the patient are the two chief means of 
preventing the spread of scarlet fever. In typhoid fever and all 
diseases characterized by altered excreta the immediate destruc- 
tion of all particles of poison in the stools by strong chemical 
agents and the prevention of the poison getting into sewers, 
drinking water or food, are measures obviously demanded by the 
peculiarities of these special diseases. The more complete our 
knowledge of the breeding places of bacteria in the body the more 
perfect will be our means of disinfection. 

Agents for the Destruction of Bacteria — Heat is, when 
properly applied, absolutely destructive to germ life, and is, for 
the disinfection of clothing and other materials suitable for the 
application of heat, such as food, water, etc. , the best and surest 
method. Steam at high temperature is more rapid and certain 
than dry heat. 

A large number of chemical agents are employed. Some are 
true disinfectants; others are simply antiseptics, which have the 
power of suspending the vitality and power of propagation of 
the micro-organisms, thus reducing their effect; still others are 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 75 

but deodorants, which oxidize the products of decomposition, 
and thus destroy the offensive odors. These chemical agents are 
divided into gaseous, liquid and solid substances. 

Dried earth, quicklime, charcoal and a mixture of lime and tar 
are the most important of solid disinfectants. Charcoal is the 
best. Solutions of potassium permanganate, zinc chloride, car- 
bolic acid, corrosive sublimate, formaline, etc., are the liquid 
disinfectants commonly used, and the strength of the solutions 
should be regulated by the uses to which they are to be put, as 
they are all more or less active poisons, and when used about the 
human body should be in very dilute solutions. 

Purification of Rooms after Infectious Diseases — All 

woodwork should be scrubbed with a solution of corrosive sub- 
limate (1 in 5,000) and afterwards with soft soap and water. 
The walls should be well washed, and if papered the old paper 
should all be removed and the room repapered. All fabrics and 
furniture should be removed, and if facilities are not at hand for 
their thorough disinfection they should be burned. The room 
should be tightly closed and fumigated with the fumes of chlorine 
or burning sulphur for three to six hours. After that the win- 
dows should be opened and allowed to remain open for one to 
two days. 

Disinfection in Various Diseases — Scarlet Fever — The 
points of attack are the skin and throat. The skin should be 
rubbed from the very beginning of the rash until complete des- 
quamation is accomplished with camphorated oil or oil with a 
little weak carbolic acid. The throat should be washed with a 
weak solution of carbolic acid in water, of a strength sufficient to 
taste sweet and stillnot bite the tongue. Clothing and bedding 
should not be washed in the common laundry, but by themselves, 
and thoroughly boiled. There should be no attempt at disinfect- 
ing the air during the time the room is occupied, but as perfect 
ventilation as possible should be secured. 

Small Pox — The skin and the discharge from the nose, mouth 
and eyes are to be disinfected. The skin is the most difficult 
to manage, but keeping the surface well smeared with cam- 
phorated oil or carbolized vaseline will be of great service. A solu- 
tion of permanganate of potash and sulphurous acid should be 



76 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

used for the mouth, nose and eyes. The clothing should always 
be burned unless absolutely reliable means of disinfection by high 
temperature is at hand. The contagion of small pox passes into 
the air enclosed in small, dried pieces of pus and epithelial scales, 
and is very difficult to destroy. 

Measles — Oily applications to the skin, and carbolic acid in 
the vessels receiving the expectoration are the proper measures. 

Typhoid Fever — The bowel discharges are believed to be the 
chief, if not the only agents in spreading the disease. Kvery dis- 
charge should, at once, be mixed with some strong chemical 
agent; of these corrosive sublimate is the best. The following 
formula will give an efficient solution: Corrosive sublimate, one- 
half ounce; hydrochloric acid, one ounce; aniline blue, five 
grains; water, three gallons. Chloride of lime also acts well. 
Carbolic acid in a 5 per cent solution is effectual. The stools 
should be thoroughly mixed with the solution and then allowed 
to stand in a covered vessel for some hours before final disposal. 
In towns they should be finally disposed of in the sewers and in 
the country they should be buried at a point far removed from the 
water supply ; they should never be thrown into earth closets or 
upon manure heaps. Bed clothing should be washed separately 
from the common laundry and be thoroughly boiled. 

Diphtheria — The specific poison seems to reside chiefly in the 
false membrane and in the discharge from the mucous mem- 
brane of the mouth and throat. The application of strong 
caustics to the membrane has been recommended both as a cura- 
tive agent and as a disinfectant. Nitrate of silver, twenty 
grains to the ounce of water, or equal parts of hydrochloric acid 
and water may be applied with a swab. Various disinfectant 
gargles may be used and pulverized sulphur may be blown upon 
the surface of the membrane. Peroxide of hydrogen or pyrozone 
is an invaluable agent in the removal, and destruction, of this 
false membrane. The full strength solution can be applied to the 
membrane with a swab and after the application the surface 
thoroughly washed with a solution made by dissolving two tab- 
lets of No. 1 in a half tea cup of water which has been boiled. 
These measures should be begun as early as possible in the 
course of the disease. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME). 77 

Deodorants — Charcoal acts well as a deodorant, but soon 
becomes clogged and loses its power. The effect of dry earth, 
marly and clayey soil is similar to that of charcoal, but these 
are not so soon clogged. Quicklime may be spinkled over solid 
excreta or added to sewer water until a deposit occurs leaving a 
clear fluid above. This is a very imperfect way of deodorizing. 
Chloride of lime is a powerful deodorant and is also a sterilizer, 
especially at high temperatures, but even at ordinary temperatures 
it will almost completely destroy bacteria. Chloride of soda 
has a similar action but is more soluble and throws down a 
deposit. Corrosive sublimate is very powerful in one-tenth to 
one-half per cent solution, but its use is attended with some dan- 
ger, when used on a large scale, as it is an active poison. Car- 
bolic acid in 5 per cent solution in water is an active and reliable 
agent. The solution can be thrown down cesspools or sprinkled 
over manure heaps. 

GENERAL REMARKS ON INDIVIDUAL HYGIENE. 

It is impossi ble to make rules sufficiently elastic and yet precise 
enough to meet every possible case. While individual hygiene 
should be a matter of study to everyone, it is by no means desir- 
able that one should pay a constant or minute attention to one's 
health. Such care will defeat its object. One should only exer- 
cise such reasonable care, thought and prudence which, in a 
matter so important, everyone is bound to take. Every man, for 
instance, is the best judge of the exact diet which suits him. If 
he understands the principles of diet and remembers that the 
amount of food and exercise must be balanced and that evil 
results from an excess of either he is hardly likely to go wrong. 

"Temperance and exercise" was the rule laid down by the 
ancients, and if we understand by temperance ' ' sufficient food for 
wants, but not for luxuries, ' ' we shall express the present ideas 
of true hygiene. 

The nutrition of the body is so affected by individual peculiar- 
ities that what may be a satisfactory and proper diet for one per- 
son would be a very unwholesome and improper diet for another. 
Proper and slow mastication of the food is necessary, and it is 



78 HEALTH AT HOME. 

extraordinary how many affections of the stomach called dyspep- 
sia arise simply from faulty mastication, from deficient teeth or 
from swallowing the food too rapidly. Many persons are too 
thin simply from their own habits ; they eat chiefly meat and eat 
it too fast, when they should eat very slowly and eat more bread 
and starchy substances. Fat persons, on the other hand, by les- 
sening the amount of starch and taking more exercise can often 
lessen the amount of fat to almost any extent. These rules are, 
however, only general and there are many exceptions, for some 
persons are normally thin, or fat, as the case may be, and varia- 
tions in the diet have but little or no effect. The exact amount 
of exercise is a matter for individual decision, it being remem- 
bered that exercise in the free air is necessary for good health, 
and that the healthiest persons are those who have the most exer- 
cise. As a rule people, especially women who are not obliged to 
work, take too little exercise, and in them the muscles become 
flabby and poorly nourished. 

Attention to the skin is another matter of personal hygiene. 
The skin must be kept perfectly clean and well clothed. For 
cleanliness, cold bathing and friction are the best. The effect of 
cold water is to improve the nutrition of the skin so that it acts 
more readily and this is especially true when combined with fric- 
tion. The effect of heat on the skin, and especially the action 
of the Turkish bath, and its effect upon health, is somewhat unde- 
cided. To some people the use of the Turkish bath is harmful, 
acting as a depressant and leaving them weak and languid. The 
Turkish bath as a curative agent in certain diseases is extremely 
useful but it should not be daily used by anyone in good health 
except possibly in a very mild form, and always concluding the 
bath with the application of cold water to the surface of the body. 

The care of the bowels is another matter of personal hygiene, 
and is of much importance. Constipation is to be avoided, but 
on the other hand the constant use of purgatives is destructive 
to digestion and absorption, and the use of injections, though 
less hurtful to the stomach, is undesirable. On the whole it 
seems that relief for the bowels can usually be obtained by proper 
exercise, especially by exercise of the abdominal muscles and by 
the use of certain articles of diet, such as pure water in consider- 
able quantities at meals, the use of bran bread, honey, fruit and 



HEALTH AT HOME. 79 

such gently laxative foods. Many cases of chronic constipation 
are due to a lack of tone in the muscular fibers in the bowel 
walls, amounting in some cases to a partial paresis. Such cases do 
not require strong purgatives, as they are only made worse by 
their use. The treatment should consist of such remedies as have 
a direct action upon muscular tissue, stimulating it to a proper 
action and giving it tone. (See chapter on Constipation. ) 

The regulation of the passions must also be left to the individ- 
ual. The control of morals has baffled the exertions of the priest 
and the statesman, and can only be attained by the education of 
the individual so that he may see the evils of excess. The period 
of puberty corresponds with the period of most important growth, 
when the bones are consolidating and uniting and both muscles 
and nerves are largely absorbing nourishment and are developing 
their fullest power. Too early indulgence in sexual gratifica- 
tion or the greater drain of solitary vice arrest this development 
to a considerable extent, and prevent the development of powers 
of strength and endurance necessary to a healthful life. The 
baleful influences of venereal diseases, affecting not only the 
individual, but wives and children, and through the family 
influencing the state itself, can only be avoided by proper per- 
sonal hygiene. The amount of mental work and the practice of 
general good temper and cheerfulness and hope are other points 
which each man must control for himself. Great mental work 
can be borne well if hygienic principles of diet, exercise, etc. , 
be attended to. 

Hope and cheerfulness are great aids to health, no doubt from 
their effect upon digestion. Usually, too, they are combined 
with a quick and active temperament and with rapid bodily 
movements and a love of exercise. 

The individual application of hygienic rules will differ accord- 
ing to the sex and age and circumstances of the person. In the 
case of children we have to apply the general rules with as much 
caution and care as possible, as we must depend upon external 
evidence to prove their utility. In the case of adults individual 
experiences soon shows whether a certain rule is or is not benefi- 
cial and what modification must be made in it. Were the laws 
of health and physiology better understood, how great would be 
the effect! 



80 HEALTH AT HOMK. 

And a better understanding of the laws of health and physi- 
ology can only be obtained by educating the people. Teach 
them how to observe, how to reason from cause to effect and 
enable them to recognize that certain acts or conditions are harm- 
ful and have an effect upon their health and happiness. It is 
with this object in view that the author of this book has given so 
much space to hygiene and has gone into such detail, feeling 
that if anyone is stirred to a desire for knowledge upon such 
important subjects, and led to a deeper study in volumes devoted 
to the consideration of hygiene and physiology he will be amply 
repaid for his labor. 



NURSING. 



The Sick Room — The comfort and well being of an invalid 
depend to so great an extent upon his surroundings that in con- 
sideration of the universal liability to illness and accident there 
ought to be in every well regulated and properly arranged house 
an apartment chosen and especially fitted for the use of the sick. 
This matter, however, in spite of its importance, is very generally 
ignored, and in order that one may be able to do the best possible 
with the facilities at hand it is well to know what a sick room 
ought to be and how to make the best use of such a room as can be 
obtained. A model sick room is large, light, airy, clean and 
quiet. The larger the room the better it can be aired — the more 
airy, the cleaner it will be, and the cleaner it is the more favor- 
able it is for the recovery of the patient. Space is therefore 
important from a hygienic point of view. 

Location of Sick Rooms — The sick room should be located upon 
the sunny side of the house, having a south or west aspect. Only 
in exceptional cases, such as inflammation of the eye or brain, is it 
necessary to have the room darkened, and even then a south 
room, with the light carefully moderated with blinds and curtains, 
is to be preferred to a darker room on the north side. Iyight is a 
healthful stimulus, and in the majority of cases not only light but 
direct sunshine is beneficial, partly on account of the cheerful- 
ness which it imparts and partly because of its actual physical 
effects. The Italian proverb, " Where the sun does not enter the 
doctor does, ' ' well illustrates the healing power of sunlight. There 
should be as many windows as possible, and they should be on 
two sides of the room, so that circulation can be obtained for the 
air in the room. The windows should be such as can be opened 
both top and bottom, and should reach nearly to the floor so that 
the patient can see out of them. Bars and streaks of light are to 
be guarded against, as they may cause a great deal of annoyance. 
The sick room should be as far as possible removed from the 



82 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

noises and odors of the house and street; the walls should be thick 
enough to deaden external sounds and the floor should not be so 
unsubstantial as to vibrate under every tread. 

Where these conditions are not to be obtained try to have the 
room above unoccupied. There are numerous advantages to be 
gained, especially in cities, by having the sick room at the top 
of the house. It will be more quiet, in a stratum of purer air, 
and in case of contagious disease can be more completely isolated. 
Wherever possible there should be two connected rooms for the 
use of the sick, so that the patient can be moved to the adjoining 
room at least once daily. A good plan is to have one for night 
use and the other for use by day. This plan allows thorough 
ventilation of the unused room and facility for thorough cleansing, 
to say nothing of the benefit afforded the patient by the change 
from surroundings which soon become monotonous. It is a com- 
mon, but very reprehensible, practice to have food, medicine, 
and all sorts of paraphernalia lying about in a confusion that 
would be enough to make a well person sick. They should be 
kept out of sight except at the moment of actual use. Growing 
plants or freshly cut flowers may fill their place, much to the 
advantage of the patient. The flowers should be removed, how- 
ever, as soon as they begin to fade. Do everything to make the 
sick room the brightest and cheeriest room in the house. A cer- 
tain amount of depression is the inevitable accompaniment of 
sickness. It cannot be entirely dispelled, but all counteracting 
influences should be brought to bear. Dark, gloomy and 
unpleasantly suggestive surroundings do much to magnify and 
intensify it. 

The walls and ceiling are best of some soft, uniform, neutral 
tint, as pale green or gray. Avoid wall paper of conspicuous 
tone or colors, or regularly recurrent figures, as in some states of 
the mind in sick people, the constant study of an ever recurring 
figure in the wall paper or ceiling becomes a positive element of 
harm. Better than any paper is paint or a hard finished surface 
which can be scrubbed. The monotony may be relieved by pic- 
tures, but judgment must be exercised in their selection. The wood- 
work should be severely plain and flat. There should be no cornices 
or mouldings, and no woolen curtains, portieres or drapery of any 
kind. All woolen stuffs easily become infected and are extremely 



HEAIvTH AT HOME, 83 

difficult to disinfect. If any curtains are used they should be of 
light wash stuff and should be frequently laundered. Carpets 
even are much better dispensed with. Rugs may be used, as 
footsteps are noisy on the bare floor, but they must be small 
enough to be easily removed each day and thoroughly shaken and 
aired. If there is a carpet on the floor it can only be swept and 
cleaned when the patient can be taken out of the room ; here we 
see the advantage of the double rooms for the sick. The sur- 
face dust, however, can be quite effectually and noiselessly 
removed by means of a damp cloth wrapped around a broom. 

Furnishing of the Sick Room — The essential furnishings of the 
sick room are a bed, on easily and noiselessly running castors, a 
bedside table, an easy chair, a lounge and a large movable screen. 
The latter can be readily improvised by fastening a shawl or 
sheet over an ordinary clothes-horse. Convenient tables are 
made with the point of support very much to one side, so as to 
reach well over the bed ; they may be raised or lowered to any 
desired height. Bed trays, with a low rim around three sides, 
may be used by the patient for all purposes of a table. They are 
about thirty inches long by fourteen broad, and stand on legs 
high enough to keep the weight entirely off the body. A bed 
rest, a commode, and similar small conveniences may be desir- 
able, but the fewer superfluous things the better. All the furni- 
ture should be of the simplest possible style. Elaborate carvings 
only find lodging-places for dust, and whatever adds to the diffi- 
culty of maintaining absolute cleanliness is to be avoided. 

Noises in the Sick Room — Everything should be substantial and 
in good repair. Ill-fitting blinds, rattling windows, and creak- 
ing doors are nuisances demanding speedy remedy. Many slight 
and apparently unimportant noises, which are nevertheless pecul- 
iarly annoying to the sensitive nerves of the sick, may easily, 
with a little care and forethought be done away with. Keep 
rocking chairs out of the room. Avoid wearing clothes that 
rustle or shoes that squeak. If coal must be put on the fire bring 
it in wrapped in paper and lay paper and all on the fire. Use 
a wooden rather than a metallic poker to rake the fire. Noise 
which is understood and inevitable is far less trying than a much 
slighter noise, unexplained or unnecessary. Intermittent noise is 



84 HEALTH AT HOMK. 

more hurtful than a continuous noise. Sudden sharp or jarring 
sounds are especially bad. A good nurse never startles the 
patient. Even in such a small matter as the way of addressing 
the patient be considerate of his weakness. Do not speak abruptly 
from behind him, making him first jump, then turn around and 
ask what you said, but get his attention before speaking, and 
use a clear, distinct, though not necessarily loud voice. Whis- 
pering in the sick room, or just outside the door, is one of the 
many distressing forms in which the solicitude of the patient's 
friends will manifest itself. There are few things more torment- 
ing, though it is usually done with the very best of intention 
not to disturb him. A low distinct tone, when conversation is 
necessary, will seldom annoy. Whispering will annoy, as will 
any sound which strains the attention or creates a sense of 
expectation. It should be laid down as a rule that what the 
patient is not intended to hear should never be said in his pres- 
ence. 

These seem very small points to dwell upon, but good nursing 
depends largely upon attention to details so apparently trivial 
that a careless person would never think of them, but which 
make or mar the comfort of the invalid. Small things grow 
very large and important to the sensative patient in the limited 
interests of the sick room. Nothing is insignificant or beneath 
notice which has any bearing on the welfare of the patient. To 
keep the sick room in a proper condition is as important a part of 
the nurse's care of the patient as the more personal ministrations. 

The Bed — It is a common notion that anyone can make a 
bed, and possibly also that it is also of very little account how a 
bed is made. To a thoroughly healthy person who will sleep 
soundly all night and turn out of bed as soon as he awakens, it 
does not indeed matter much, although he spends a third of his 
life in it, whether his bed be well or illy made, so long as it is 
clean and warm. But the invalid whose confinement to the bed 
is more or less compulsory and permanent and whose acuteness of 
sensation is increased by disease, finds few things more seriously 
affecting his comfort than the condition of the bed. To know 
how best to arrange and take care of the bed is very important 
to the nurse. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 85 

The Bedstead — Wooden bedsteads for the sick should not be 
used, when anything else can be obtained. The best kind is 
made entirely of metal, iron or brass, with a woven wire mat- 
tress. The metal bedsteads can be more easily kept clean and 
wholesome than those ordinarily found in homes. They are 
non-absorbent, and afford no hiding places for vermin, which 
in spite of all precautions will sometimes appear even in well 
cared-for homes. The sign of a bug should be the signal for a 
most careful search and extermination, for, once having gained 
a foothold, they multiply with alarming rapidity. Corrosive sub- 
limate is the surest remedy but, being a violent poison, it must 
be used with great care. Another exterminator, recommended 
for all kinds of vermin, consists of the following formula : Aqua 
ammonia, two ounces; saltpeter, one ounce; soap scraped, one 
ounce ; soft water, one quart. 

Bedsteads should be on castors, and no heavier than is neces- 
sary for strength. The best dimensions for a bed in which a sick 
person is to be cared for, are six and a half feet long, three feet 
wide, and two or at most two and a half feet high. If it is too 
wide the nurse will be unable to reach the patient without getting 
on the bed herself, always an objectionable proceeding; if too 
high, it adds to the difficulty of raising the patient, and makes 
it harder for convalescents to get in and out. 

Mattresses — Some kind of a mattress should be placed over the 
wire springs. The mattress may be made of hair, straw, jute, 
excelsior, or some similar material. Straw has the advan- 
tage of cheapness, and the ticks can be frequently emptied, 
washed, and refilled, and the old straw burned ; but hair of good 
quality makes the most comfortable bed, being at once firm and 
elastic. It can be cleaned and subjected to disinfecting tempera- 
ture without damage. A feather bed is a thing which is never 
to be thought of in connection with the sick room, being a com- 
bination of all that is objectionable. Its use is merely equivalent 
to putting the patient into an immense poultice; it is warm, 
soft, absorbent, and consequently nearly always damp. Unless 
it is stuffed uncommonly full the patient sinks at once into a 
hole. It is impossible to keep it level, and if it once gets wet 
there is no way of drying it. Nothing is more conducive to the 
development of bed sores than a feather bed. 



86 HEAI/TH AT HOME). 

Fracture Board — In many surgical cases it is of great impor- 
tance that the bed be kept flat and level. Where this is required 
a board the size of the mattress is placed under it. This is 
known as a fracture board. It should have holes in it for ven- 
tilation. 

Sheets — For sheets cotton or linen may be used, though the 
preference is given to cotton, as it does not conduct away the heat 
quite as rapidly, consequently the patient is not so liable to chill. 
The sheet should be wide enough to extend at least one foot over 
each side of the bed. It should not have a seam in the middle. 

To Make the Bed — Spread the lower sheet smoothly and tightly 
over the mattress, tucking it in securely on all sides. It can be 
made still more firm by fastening it to the mattress with safety 
pins. Be careful that the sheet is put on straight, for if not it 
will draw into wrinkles, and if pinned is likely to tear. There 
should not be a blanket between the sheet and mattress. It may 
be necessary to protect the under sheet and mattress from dis- 
charges by a piece of rubber cloth, covered by a second folded 
sheet. The water proof and cover sheet should both be drawn 
as tightly as possible and well tucked in. Enameled cloth, 
oiled muslin, or even in an emergency heavy brown paper, may 
be substituted for the rubber cloth when that cannot be obtained. 
The rubber being only for the protection of the bed, should not 
be retained longer than is really necessary, as the patient will be 
more comfortable without it. 

Bed Covers — The bed covering should be enough for warmth, 
but no more; for too much warmth is enervating, and too much 
weight impedes respiration. There should be another sheet 
tucked in well at the foot, so as not to be pulled out, but left long 
enough so that the upper end may be turned down for some dis- 
tance over the blankets. A wooly surface coming directly in 
contact with the face is generally disagreeable, though in some 
cases, where warmth is desirable, as in acute rheumatism, the 
patient may be put directly between the blankets without inter- 
vening sheets. Blankets of good quality are the best bed cover- 
ing, being warm and not of great weight. They should come up 
high enough to tuck well in around the throat if desired, but 
the patient should not be allowed to sleep with his head under 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 87 

the bed clothing, breathing the noxious emanations of the 
body. Several thin coverings will be warmer than a single 
cover of equal weight, because of the non-conducting air enclosed 
between them. Heavy quilts and counterpanes will be found 
burdensome. If it is desired to avoid the weight of a counter- 
pane, a clean white sheet will take away the unfinished look of 
the blankets alone, and at the same time protect them from dust. 
Counterpanes being chiefly ornamental may be taken off at night 
and thus kept clean longer. An extra blanket will be needed 
toward morning, and should always be at hand. Blankets as 
well as sheets need washing whenever they become soiled or are 
taken from infected beds. Fresh blood stains can be removed 
from blankets or ticking by spreading over the spot a paste of fine 
starch or wheat flour and leaving it to dry there. 

The Positio?i of the Bed — The sick bed should stand far enough 
from the wall to be accessible on all sides. It should be in 
such a position that its occupant can see out of the window, 
but whatever artificial light is employed had best be behind the 
patient. Nothing should be allowed under the bed, nor should 
there be any drapery to prevent free circulation of air below it. 
Sitting on the bed, leaning on it, or in any way shaking it causes 
great discomfort to the patient. In some cases even the touch of 
the bedclothes cannot be endured. When this is the case they 
may be supported over the seat of pain by ''cradles, " frames of 
iron or wood made for the purpose. The two halves of a barrel 
hoop tied together in the middle so as to form four legs, make a 
very good one, or the clothes may be lifted on a strong cord run- 
ning diagonally from the head to foot of the bed. 

Method of Changing Sheets on the Sick Bed — When it is desired 
to change the sheet while the patient is in the bed, it can be 
easily done by rolling the soiled sheet lengthwise, beginning at 
the side farthest from him and rolling toward him until the roll 
lies closely alongside of him. The clean sheet previously rolled 
in the same way, is then unrolled toward the patient, over the 
space from which the soiled one was taken, until the two rolls lie 
side by side. The patient may then be lifted or turned over on 
to the clean sheet, and the soiled one taken entirely away, and the 
remainder of the clean one unrolled. The upper sheet can be 



88 HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 

changed with even less trouble, and no exposure. Pull the 
clothes free at the foot of the bed. Spread the clean sheet out- 
side of them all and then over it spread a blanket and tuck both 
in securely at the foot. The entire covering which it is desirable 
to remove can then be removed leaving the clean sheet and 
blanket behind. If the extra blanket is not at hand the clean 
sheet may be rolled across its width, and after being well tucked 
in at the foot, unrolled toward the head, under everything. The 
soiled sheet may then be rolled down toward the foot and re- 
moved. 

See that each blanket is made smooth and straight. If they are 
not wide enough to tuck in well at the sides, the upper one may 
be put on with its length across the others and well tucked in, 
otherwise they will all be dragged off on one side when the 
patient turns over. The custom of taking a crumpled upper 
sheet and putting it on in place of a soiled lower one is not good 
economy in sickness. If there can be only one clean sheet given, 
let it be the one on which the patient has to lie. The sheets 
ought to be changed frequently, at least once a day, if only to be 
aired and returned to the bed again. Dampness in bed or bed- 
ding is always dangerous. If the bed gets to feeling close or 
unpleasant, it may, to some extent, be aired by lifting the clothes 
at the edge of the bed and fanning them up and down a few times. 
This may be done without danger to the patient, and in warm 
weather especially will be found refreshing. If you cannot 
change the sheets pull them as tight as possible and straighten 
them out. This will give a fresh feeling to the bed. The best 
arrangement is to have two beds, each with its full complement 
of bed clothing, one set being aired while the other is in use. 
Even a very sick person can be easily moved by two persons. 

Moving the Patient from One Bed to Another — Bring the two beds 
closely together. Be sure that the sheet upon which the patient 
is lying is a sound strong one. Roll two poles or long brush 
handles in the sheet, one on either side, until they are close up 
to the patient. This forms an impromptu stretcher upon which 
he can be easily moved. The sheet can then be removed in the 
ordinary manner. If the two beds are of the same height one 
person can easily move the patient from one to the other. Hav- 



HEAI/fH AT HOMK. 89 

ing the two beds side by side, pull the mattress of the one on 
which he is lying a little way over the other. He may then be 
slid down upon the fresh bed and the other taken away. This is 
easy if the mattress is not too thick and heavy. Where the 
patient can help himself, even a little, the matter of moving him 
is not so difficult. To move him to another bed is really but 
little more difficult than to arrange his own under him, while the 
change makes him more comfortable and enables his own bed to 
be thoroughly aired and made up. In some surgical cases, such 
as a fracture of the thigh, the change of beds is impracticable. 
In such cases a wide bed should be used and some of the advan- 
tages of two beds may be obtained by using alternate sides of it. 
One half should be kept for day time and the other for night. 

Pillows and Pillow Cases — Be sure to have plenty of pillow 
cases, so that they may be changed often. Nothing more dis- 
gusts a sensitive person than to be compelled to lie with the head 
upon a grimy, dirty pillow case. The pillows should be changed 
frequently, as they become hot and hard. Shake the pillow up 
and turn it often. In doing this lift the patient's head carefully, 
and let it rest upon one arm, while with the other hand the pillow 
can be changed and arranged. Then lay him back gently; do 
not let his head drop with a jerk. 

To Prop a Patient up in Bed — When using pillows, first see 
that one is pushed well down against the small of the back, and 
then put each additional pillow against the last. This will keep 
them from slipping, and support the back without interfering 
with the play of the lungs. Wooden bed rests are made, and, for 
temporary use, a straight backed chair turned up side down is 
very good. 

Rubber Cushions, Air and Water Beds — Small pillows of vari- 
ous shapes and sizes are often useful about the sick bed, and rubber 
air cushions are especially comfortable. (See appendix) They 
should be smoothly covered, and the cover sewed — not pinned 
on. In some cases air or water beds will be called for. They are 
both made of rubber. The air mattress may be put on an ordin- 
ary bedstead, but the water bed lies in a wooden trough. The 
water with which it is filled should be at a temperature of about 
70° F. and should be renewed every two weeks. The water bed 



90 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

should be covered with a blanket before putting on the usual 
bedding. Care must be taken to avoid pricking water or air 
cushions or beds, causing them to leak. 

Bed Sores — Bed sores result from continued pressure upon 
prominent parts of the body and may vary from slight abrasions 
of the skin to deep wounds. They appear most frequently upon 
the lower part of the back, the hips, shoulders, elbows or heels, but 
may develop wherever conditions are favorable. There is liability 
to them in all cases of long confinement in a recumbent position, 
especially where there is much lowered vitality of the system, as 
in paralysis, fevers, and old age. Very heavy and very emacia- 
ted patients are alike predisposed to them, and they are among 
the most trying complications of surgical cases, where motion is 
restricted. Bed sores are frequently the result of bad nursing, 
and the cases are rare where a good nurse cannot avert their for- 
mation. They are more easily prevented than cured when once 
established. 

Preventive Measures — Preventive measures consist in keeping 
the parts thoroughly clean, and the surface under them dry and 
smooth; and in hardening the skin, and so far as is possible, 
removing local pressure. This precaution should be taken at the 
beginning of an)^ long sickness, without waiting for manifest signs 
of danger. The parts most subject to pressure must be frequently 
washed with soap and water and thoroughly dried. The sheet 
should be changed as often as it becomes damp from any cause, 
and the greatest pains be taken to keep it free from wrinkles, 
crumbs and inequalities of any kind. Crumbs in the bed consti- 
tute one of the minor ills of sickness and too much care cannot be 
exercised in keeping the bed free from crumbs. There should be 
a regular crumb hunt after each meal. The patient's clothes must 
not be permittted to get into folds or creases under him. The 
skin may be hardened by bathing several times daily with alco- 
hol, brandy or eau-de-cologne. Follow this by rubbing in well 
a small quantity of simple ointment like vaseline to keep the skin 
supple. Finally dust the surface of the parts with talcum pow- 
der. If lycopodium powder be used it must be remembered that 
it is highly inflammable, and must be kept away from a lighted 
lamp or candle. When the danger of the formation of bed sores 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 91 

is extreme or the skin already abraded it may be protected by a 
simple coat of flexible collodion or a solution of gutta percha. 
The pressure may be relieved by frequent changes of position, or 
when practicable by circular pads or air cushions, or in extreme 
cases by the use of the water bed. The latter equalizes the pres- 
sure and is,|in cases of paralysis or prolonged incontinence of urine, 
the only efficient safeguard. 

Bed Sores — The first symptom evident to the patient is a pricking 
sensation or a feeling as if he were lying on something rough, or 
there may be no subjective indication whatever. A patient may 
be delirious, paralyzed or too weak to complain, and a bed sore 
be far advanced before it is discovered unless constant care has 
been exercised in watching for indications of trouble of this kind. 
Daily and careful examination should be made of such parts as 
are especially subjected to pressure, and the first discovery of 
reddening or roughing of the skin, or of pain or pressure, be 
accepted as a serious warning of trouble. If these symptoms 
pass unnoticed or uncared for the discoloration will become deeper 
and the inflammation progress until sloughing results. 

Treatment of Bed Sores — After the skin has become broken the 
use of spirits should be discontinued, or else they should be 
diluted, for although still useful they cause much pain. The 
surface should be dressed with oxide of zinc ointment or with 
vaseline. Twenty grains each of tannic acid and oxide of zinc 
worked into an ointment with an ounce of vaseline makes an 
efficient dressing. When the slough has formed its separation is 
hastened by the use of a charcoal poultice. (See Poultices.) 
When the slough has become detached it almost invariably shows 
greater extent of injury than the surface indications would lead 
one to anticipate, often laying bare deeper tissues, even to the 
bone. Poulticing should not continue longer than necessary to 
remove the gangrenous portion, as it tends to soften and break 
down the^neighboring parts. Prof. Brown-Siquard advises t he 
alternate applications of heat and cold, an ice bag for ten min- 
utes, followed by a warm poultice for an hour. After the separa- 
tion of the slough the resulting ulcerated surface is treated with 
some stimulating disinfecting remedy, balsam of Peru or car- 
bolic acid one teaspoonful in a teacupful of water, applied on lint, 



92 HEAI/fH AT HOME. 

only within the limits of the sore. Iodoform finely powdered can 
be dusted over the surface, but best of all is No. 40 (Iodoform 
ointment) found in the Cabinet. Cover the lint with a piece of oiled 
muslin or rubber cloth of a little larger size than the sore and 
hold the dressing in place with strips of adhesive plaster — not by 
bandages. The dressings must be renewed at least once a day, 
and the surface of the sore thoroughly washed with a solution 
made by dissolving two tablets of No. 3 in a teacup of warm 
water ; using small pledgets of cotton to cleanse it ; then thoroughly 
dry the surface of the sore and surrounding parts before the oint- 
ment is again applied. Remove all pressure by circular pads. 
The general strength of the patient must be supported, and the 
circulation as far as possible promoted, as the immediate cause 
of bed sores is defective nutrition. If neglected they may result 
fatally, as the constant discharge may prove too great a drain 
upon the already debilitated patient, or blood poisoning may 
result from the absorption of the products of decomposition into 
the blood. 



CIRCULATION OF THE BLOOD. 

In order that we may know something of the nature of the 
blood and the manner in which it is carried through the body it 
becomes necessary to very briefly describe the character of the 
blood itself and the mechanism of circulation. 

The Blood — The blood is the most important as well as the 
most abundant fluid in the body, and it pervades nearly every 
part of the body, and upon its presence and its unceasing motion 
life as well as health depends. The blood to the naked eye 
appears as a simple red fluid, but examined under the micro- 
scope it is seen to be made up of a multitude of little solid bodies 
floating in a clear, colorless liquid. These little solid bodies are 
called corpuscles, and the liquid in which they float is known as 
plasma. The plasma is made up of serum and fibrin. The cor- 
puscles are mostly of a yellowish red hue, and it is from their 
vast numbers that the blood derives its red appearance. There 
are some white ones. They are larger than the red, and are of 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 93 

a different shape, but are comparatively few in number. The 
blood while it circulates through the body is perfectly 
fluid, but upon removal from its natural surroundings it exhibits 
a well known tendency to coagulate or solidify. The fibrin of 
the plasma separates itself from the serum, and entangles the float- 
ing corpuscles into a mass called a clot. This peculiarity affords 
protection against undue loss of blood, for dangerous hemorrhage 
would follow even a slight cut, did not the clots thus formed 
effectually close the injured blood vessels and prevent further 
escape of the vital fluid. Occasionally this coagulation of the 
fibrin takes place while the blood is still in motion in the blood 
vessels, obstructing the circulation seriously. This is called 
thrombosis. A clot so formed or any solid body, arrested in the 
arteries or capillaries, constitutes an embolus. 

Functions of the Blood — The office of the blood is to carry nutri- 
tion to all parts of the body, and to remove its waste material. 
The process is carried on by means of the heart and blood vessels 
of three distinct kinds : the arteries, which carry the blood away 
from the heart, veins, which bring the blood back to the heart 
and capillaries, which connect the arteries and veins. 

The Heart — The heart is a pyramidal shaped organ situated 
nearly in the center of the chest. The apex, pointing downward, 
forward and to the left, can be felt between the fifth and sixth 
ribs. The base is on a level with the upper border of the third 
rib. The base is fixed in one position, but the apex is freely 
movable. The heart is hollow and divided into four cavities or 
chambers of nearly equal capacity, two at the base, called auricles 
and two below called ventricles. A valve between the two aur- 
icles exists at birth, but at once closes, and gradually disappears, 
so that afterwards^there is no connection between the two sides 
of the heart. The left side always contains pure blood ; the right 
side impure blood. If the valve between the two auricles fails to 
close after independent .circulation is established, the impure 
blood mixes with the pure, and we get what is ^called a "blue 
baby, ' ' a condition which is soon fatal. Between each auricle 
and its corresponding ventricle there is an opening guarded by a 
valve, which permits the passage of fluid in but one direction — 
downward. Each ventricle has also another opening, provided 



94 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

with valves connecting it with a large artery, the aorta on the 
left and the pulmonary artery on the right. The auricles also 
have other openings through which the blood flows into them 
from the great veins. As the auricles fill with blood they con- 
tract, and the blood, following the line of least resistance, is 
forced into the ventricles. They in turn similarlv contract, forc- 
ing the blood on into the arteries, regurgitation being prevented 
by the valves guarding the openings between the auricles and 
ventricles. The sounds heard when the ear is placed over the 
heart are caused by the closing of these valves. 

Course of the Blood Through the Body— Let us now 

follow the blood which is forced out of the left ventricle. It 
passes first into the aorta, the main trunk of the arteries. The 
aorta ascends from the upper part of the left ventricle for a short 
distance, then forms an arch backward over the upper part of the 
left lung and passes downward into the abdomen, where it divides 
into two great branches. From every part of its length it sends 
out branches; these branches again divide and subdivide into 
numberless smaller vessels extending to all parts of the body, 
gradually diminishing in size as they become more and more 
remote from the heart. The blood is thus forced through the 
entire system of arteries by the contraction of the left ventricle of 
the heart. The minute branches of the arteries finally empty 
their contents into an even smaller set of vessels known as capil- 
laries. These vessels are so small as to be invisible to the naked 
eye, yet they serve for the transmission of the minute blood cor- 
puscles. They interlace in every direction, making an elaborate 
network, and finally unite to form blood vessels of the third class, 
the veins, which carry the blood back to the heart. These veins 
are extremely small at the extremities but as they approach the 
heart they increase in size because of their uniting until they 
finally all combine into two great trunks, the superior and inferior 
venae cavae, which emptv into the right auricle of the heart. 
The veins returning to the heart follow closely in the track of the 
arteries which lead away from it, but they lie nearer the surface. 
The velocity of the blood current decreases as it approaches the 
capillaries, its progerss being: delayed by the increasing narrow- 
ness of the vessels and the intricate path it has to travel. Time 



HEAI/fH AT HOME. 95 

is thus allowed for the assimilation of the nutrient portion of the 
blood by the living tissues with which it is here brought into 
intimate contact. Having once completed the circuit of the 
arteries, capillaries and veins the blood is restored to the heart, 
and its circuit of the system is complete. It has, however, under- 
gone a change in character and appearance during its stay in the 
capillaries; some of its elements have been appropriated and it 
has become charged with waste matter,- and lost its bright red 
color. Before it can be fit for further use it must be purified. 
To accomplish this and get back to that side of the heart from 
which it started it has another journey to take. This is called 
the pulmonary circulation. From the right auricle, into which 
the blood is poured by the veins, it flows into the right ventricle, 
and in the next contraction of the heart the blood is forced out 
into the pulmonary artery, which leads to the lungs. This, 
like all other arteries, is subdivided into small branches, and 
finally connects with a set of capillaries in the lungs. In this 
set of capillaries the blood is brought near the atmosphere and 
undergoes a process of renovation. The blood then passes from 
these capillaries into the pulmonary veins which carry it back to 
the left auricle, ready to start again upon its system of double 
circulation. It will be seen, therefore, that in the pulmonary 
system of circulation the general arrangement is so far reversed 
that the arteries become the bearers of impure blood and the veins 
carry pure blood. The blood vessels, branching in every direc- 
tion, communicate with each other in all parts of the body, so 
that if the main course of the blood be interrupted, it may still 
go on its way by making a detour through smaller branches. 
Such communication of vessels is called anastomosis. The col- 
lateral circulation which it allows is of great value in surgery, 
as it makes it possible to tie a large vessel without obstructing 
the general circulation. 

The Pulse — Each contraction of the heart sends out a wave 
which distends the blood vessels, and which they by their elasti- 
city carry through the entire arterial system. This periodical 
distention is called the pulse. Wherever an artery approaches 
the surface, the pulse beats can be felt and counted. The pulse is 
a valuable guide in disease, as it varies with the condition of the 



96 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

heart, and affords an accurate index of its action. It is usually- 
taken at the radial artery, just above the wrist; if it becomes imper- 
ceptible there it may still be felt at the temporal artery in the 
temple, the carotid artery in the neck, or at any other large artery, 
as the large arteries show the pulsation longest. In children the 
pulse is best felt in the temporal artery during sleep. It is often 
very difficult to get a child's pulse anywhere when it is awake. 

Taking the Pulse — To take the pulse accurately place two or 
three fingers along the course of the artery, making slight pres- 
sure, and count for a full minute. The rate varies with varying 
circumstances. Age, sex, food, temperature, position, exertion, 
mutual states and many other conditions modify it, even in 
health. It is usually more rapid in women than in men, in 
children than in adults. It is slow during sleep, quicker after 
taking food, more rapid standing than sitting, sitting than lying 
down. The average rate in a healthy adult is seventy-two beats 
per minute ; and in a child, one hundred and twenty. Nearly 
all abnormal conditions of the body have some effect upon the 
pulse. Increase in the rate is more common than decrease, and 
the character, as well as the rate of the pulse, are subjected to 
variations. In a quick pulse, each beat occupies less than the 
normal time. When the volume of the pulse is greater than 
usual, it is said to be large or full ; if less than usual, small. 
When the pulse can be easily stopped, it is said to be compres- 
sible ; when it can be arrested only with difficulty, it is said to be 
incompressible. In an irregular pulse, succeeding beats differ 
in length, force and character. In an intermittent pulse, a beat 
is now and then lost, the rhythm otherwise being regular. An 
intermittent pulse may sometimes be found in a person otherwise 
perfectly healthy. It is always a less serious symptom than an 
irregular pulse. Other departures from the normal standard are 
variously described as hard or soft, sharp, jerking, bounding, 
shotty, throbbing, thready, wiry, flickering, etc., the names of 
which sufficiently describe their effect to the touch. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 



97 



TEMPERATURE. 



The blood has another function, that of keeping the body 
warm. Animal heat is generated by continued chemical change 
in which the blood is an active agent. The bodily temperature 
in health, remains very nearly the same, about 98.4° E., in spite 
of the variations of the external temperature. The action of the 
skin keeps the heat from accumulating, and the arteries, under 
the influence of the nervous system, dilate or contract, and so 
assist in maintaining the equilibrium, by altering the rate of 
production to correspond with the loss of heat. L,ife is secure so 
long as the production and escape of heat are evenly balanced. 
A deviation of more than one degree from the normal standard, 
that is above 99.5° or below 97.5° may be regarded as evidence of 
disease. There is only a range of about 15° or 16° within which 
life can be sustained. A temperature above 108 c , or below 93°, 
will almost invariably prove fatal. The danger is in propor- 
tion to the amount of the departure from the normal and the 
length of time the condition continues. Temperature below the 
normal standard is far more dangerous than the same number of 
degrees above, as the following table shows : 

TABLE OP RANGE OF TEMPERATURE- 

Degrees. Degrees. 
Hyperpyrexia, .... 106 and over, extremely dangerous. 
High fever, . 
Moderate fever, 
Sub-febrile, 
Normal, . . 
Sub-normal, . 
Collapse, . . 
Algid collapse, 

Nearly, if not all, morbid states are accompanied by alterations 
in tempertaure, some of which are so typical as to be of great 
value in determining the nature of the disease. The pulse rate 
in fever is generally increased in proportion to the elevation of 
the temperature, though the proportion varies in some dis- 
eases. In scarlet fever, for instance, the pulse will be more 



103i 


106 


101 


103J 


99J 


101 


98 


99J 


97 


98 


95 


97 


95, 


extremely dangerous 



98 HEAI/fH AT HOME. 

rapid than in typhoid fever with the same degree of fever. If 
the pulse be more rapid than the degree of temperature should 
call for, it indicates weakness of the heart. 

Clinical Thermometer — One of the most important aids to 
diagnosis and also to the treatment of disease is the clinical ther- 
mometer, and no home should be without one. Every mother 
should have one at hand and know how to use it and read it. 
She can do no harm and may often do a great deal of good by 
using it on the first suspicion of departure from health. A 
change of temperature is often the first symptom of departure 
from the normal condition of health, occurring even before the 
individual feels any illness, and it is important to get this first 
variation from the normal temperature. 

Use of Clinical Thermometer — Any great variation in bodily 
temperature may usually be discovered by the touch and feel of 
the skin, it being hot and dry, but to measure the extent of the 
variation accurately one must use a clinical thermometer, and 
nothing in the Home Remedy Cabinet will be found of such 
frequent value as the standard clinical thermometer, and close 
observance of the following rules and hints upon its use will 
enable any one to apply it in all cases where it is demanded, with 
intelligence. Before use the top of the column of mercury in 
the stem should be shaken down at least two or three degrees 
below the normal degree. To do this properly grasp the top of 
the stem between the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, 
holding the bulb down ; then strike the left hand a smart blow 
with the closed palm of the right. The mercury will thus be 
jarred downward toward the bulb. 

Places Where Temperature May be Taken — The temperature 
may be taken in the mouth under the tongue, in the armpit, in 
the groin, in the rectum or in the vagina. The temperature of 
the interior of the body is more even and somewhat higher than 
that of the surafce, so that when it is taken in either of the 
natural cavities, the temperature will show at least one-half a 
degree higher than when taken in the armpit or groin. The 
mouth will be a little cooler than the cavities which are con- 
stantly closed, and the armpit a little cooler still, and it will take 
longer for the thermometer to rise in these places. Keep the 



HEALTH AT HOME. 99 

patient well covered for some little time before taking the tem- 
perature in the armpit. The parts should not have been exposed 
for washing or dressing for at least half an hour previously. The 
armpit must be dried from perspiration, care be taken that the 
clothing is not in the way, and the thermometer held firmly in 
place. This is best done by pressing the arm closely to the side 
and bending it at the elbow until the hand touches the opposite 
shoulder. Be sure to leave the thermometer in place long enough ; 
generally it should remain until the mercury has remained station- 
ary for severral minutes. In a very thin person it is impossible 
to get the correct temperature in the armpit. Taking the tem- 
perature in the mouth is not always a safe plan, as there is dan- 
ger that a child or an irresponsible patient may bite off the bulb. 
The bulb should be placed under the tongue and the lips kept 
closed during the time the instrument is in the mouth. The rec- 
tum gives, perhaps, the most reliable temperature, as there are 
fewer possible sources of error. This method should always be 
employed for infants. The tube should be oiled and inserted for 
nearly two inches. Remember that if the rectum contains fecal 
matter the mercury will not reach so high a point as if the bulb 
comes directly in contact with the mucous membrane. 

Time Required to Take Temperature — The length of time 
required depends largely upon the locality selected, and also 
to some extent upon the thermometer, some instruments requir- 
ing but three minutes to do the work for which others require 
eight or ten minutes. The thermometer found in the Home 
Cabinet is a standard three minute instrument, and under proper 
conditions need rarely be left in place over three minutes. Never 
leave a thermometer with a patient unwatched unless you are 
very sure he is to be trusted to take care of it. Temperatures 
must not only be accurately taken, but correctly recorded. Note 
the degree and hour of taking immediately without leaving time 
to forget. 

Fever — A. slight variation from the normal temperature is of 
less serious import in a child than in an adult, unless it is found 
to be increasing. An increase beginning each day a little earlier 
is a bad indication; a decrease from a high temperature begin- 
ning earlier each day is a sign of improvement. Fever usually 



*»c 



100 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

has a daily fluctuation, which is sometimes much exaggerated. 
Sometimes fever is continuously high with only the normal daily 
variation, or it may be remittent — that is with a wide range 
between its highest and lowest points, though never sinking to 
the normal temperature — or intermittent, in which the tempera- 
ture alternately rises to a febrile height and falls to or below the 
normal. In some diseases, as pneumonia or lung fever and 
others which begin with a chill, the rise in temperature will be 
rapid and sudden ; in others there will be but little rise at first, 
but a gradual increase will ensue. Typhoid is an example of 
the latter class. In fever a rise may be expected toward evening, 
but in rare cases the rule may be reversed, and there will be a 
rise in the morning and remission in the evening. In some 
cases of typhoid fever and in phthisis two increases, and two dis- 
tinct remissions of the fever may be noticed during the twenty- 
four hours. These variations in temperature can only be recog- 
nized by carefully testing with the thermometer, and in illness 
extending over any considerable period of time a regular series of 
tests of temperature should be made and a record of each reading 
of the thermometer be made, noting the time of taking. The tem- 
perature should be taken at the same hours each day to show 
accurately the cycle of fluctuations. An irregularity in tempera- 
ture in the course of a disease which usually has a regular type 
generally means some complication. Or it may depend upon 
some local cause, and disappear when the conditions are cor- 
rected. Thus constipation will often cause a rise in temperature, 
and this will fall again after the bowels are emptied. Bad air 
may have the same effect. The decline of temperature may, like 
the rise, be gradual from day to day, or there may be a sudden 
dropping to a steady normal temperature in from six to thirty -six 
hours. 

Varying the Temperature by Artificial Means — Tem- 
perature may be reduced by applications of cold or by the use of 
medicines ; it may be increased by external heat and by stim- 
ulants. The former act best when the temperature has a natural 
tendency to fall and the latter when the tendency is to rise, as 
the effort of nature is then assisted rather than opposed. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 101 



RESPIRATION. 



Anatomy and Physiology — The blood in the lungs under- 
goes a process of purification, rendering it fit for renewed use. 
To understand how this is accomplished, one must know some- 
thing of the construction and workings of the respiratory organs, 
the chief of which are the lungs, trachea and muscles of the 
chest. The lungs themselves are composed of a sponge-like sub- 
stance, made up of air-cells lined by a network of minute blood 
vessels. These blood vessels are subdivisions of the pulmonary 
veins and arteries. A series of bronchial tubes connect the air- 
cells with the external air, those of each lung uniting into a 
single bronchus, and the two finally with each other, to form the 
trachea or windpipe. Each lung is enveloped in a delicate mem- 
brane called the pleura. This is, at the root, or upper part of 
the lung, folded back so as to also form the lining of the chest. 
The pleura secretes a fluid which keeps it constantly moist, and 
enables the two surfaces to slide easily against each other. 

The chest is separated from the abdominal cavity by a muscu- 
lar partition — the diaphragm — which alternate^ rises and falls, 
as its fibers contract and relax. This motion is involuntary but 
partially under the control of the will. As the capacity of the 
chest is increased by the descent of the diaphragm, the additional 
space is filled by air, sucked in through the trachea and bronchi, 
thus expanding the elastic air-cells. As the diaphragm rises, 
this extra supply of air is forced out again. The size of the chest 
cavity is still further affected by the movements of the muscles 
moving the ribs, by elevating or depressing them. By these 
muscular actions, and the alternate expansions and contractions 
of the lungs, the alternate inspirations and expirations are pro- 
duced which we call breathing or respiration. 

The lungs are not completely filled and emptied by each respi- 
ration. A certain amount of air is stationary in them. The 
additional supply drawn in and out, sometimes called tidal air, 
is but a small proportion of the entire contents of the lungs, but 
it is diffused through and alters the character of the whole. At 
the end of each respiration occurs a period of repose, about equal 
to the entire period of action. A healthy adult ordinarily 



102 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

breathes about eighteen times a minute, taking in each time 
some twenty cubic inches of air. At this rate it requires sixteen 
respirations to completely change the air in the lungs. By this 
gradual introduction of the outer air, its temperature is rendered 
more fit for contact with the delicate capillaries, and there is a 
reserve supply in case of accidental embarassment of respiration. 
It is worth noticing that the habit of taking deep inspirations 
increases the strength and capacity of the lungs. 

How the Blood is Purified — The direct object of respira- 
tion is the purification of the blood. The air is a mechanical 
mixture of oxygen and nitrogen, with a small proportion of car- 
bonic acid gas and watery vapor. Its average composition is a 
little less than twenty-one parts of oxygen, to seventy-nine parts 
of nitrogen. The nitrogen in the air acts simply as a diluent. 
The oxygen is the universal supporter of life, the vitalizing 
force of all animal organisms. Carbonic acid, on the contrary, 
is so poisonous a gas that two or three parts of it in a thousand 
will produce sensibly bad effects, as headache, nausea and 
drowsiness. Five per cent of carbonic acid gas in air breathed 
may prove fatal. 

Air-cells. — The walls of the air-cells consist of a mere film of 
mucous membrane, thin enough to allow interchange of gases 
to take place through it, though impervious to liquids. Oxygen 
has a stronger affinity for blood than for nitrogen ; so, when it is 
brought near, it leaves the air inspired, to unite with the blood 
in the lungs. But carbonic acid and water — both of which are 
found in the blood — have greater affinity for air, and pass into 
it. So the air expired retains its nitrogen, and takes up carbonic 
acid gas and water, but loses a part of its oxygen. 

Rate of Respiration — The processes of circulation and res- 
piration are thus intimately connected, and whatever modifies 
the pulse affects also the breathing. There are usually four pulse 
beats to every respiration. The rate of respiration therefore 
varies as does that of the pulse, being more rapid in women than 
in men, in children than in adults, and modified by position, 
exertion, excitement and other conditions ; but unlike the pulse, 
it is partly under the control of the will. Respirations are best 
counted, when possible, without the knowledge of the patient, 



HEALTH AT HOME- 103 

as to be natural they must be unconscious. The respirations are 
somewhat slower during sleep. 

Counting the Respirations — One can usually see the 
accompanying rise and fall of the chest; but, to count accurately, 
the hand should be laid flatly, and lightly over the stomach, 
where the motion may be distinctly felt. Respirations below 
eight, or above forty, per minute, may be considered indicative 
of danger. 

Variations in Respiration — The character, as well as the 
frequency of respirations, is subject to variations. In man, 
breathing is abdominal ; in woman chiefly thoracic. It may be 
regular or irregular, easy or labored, quiet or noisy, deep or shal- 
low. Sometimes it presents very marked peculiarities. When 
each breath is accompanied by a deep snoring sound, it is said 
to be stertorous. Difficulty of breathing arising from any cause, 
is called dyspnea; total absence of breath is called apnea. 
Dyspnea arises when, from any cause, the quantity of air reach- 
ing the lungs is disproportionate to the amount of blood sent by 
the heart for purification. The blood may be in an unhealthy 
condition ; it may be congested in the pulmonary capillaries, or 
it may be sent too quickly. The air may be unfit to perform its 
work, or it may be shut out by disease of the lungs or air pas- 
sages. If the supply of pure air be in any way entirely cut off, 
asphyxia results, that is, the blood fails to be oxygenated, a con- 
dition necessarily fatal, if not soon relieved. 



VENTILATION. 

Nature of Impurities of Air — The whole animal kingdom 
is constantly engaged in abstracting oxygen from the atmosphere, 
and throwing off into the air a poisonous gas, carbon dioxide; 
hence some counteracting influence is necessary to prevent the 
entire atmosphere from becoming depleted and unfit to sustain 
life. This influence is found in the vegetable world, which 
under the stimulus of light, reverses the plan of the animal, and 
absorbs carbon dioxide gas, and gives off in its place oxygen, 
thus securing the continual purification of the air. The air 



104 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

during its stay in the lungs acquires not only a dangerous pro- 
portion of carbon dioxide gas, but also organic impurities, waste 
matter thrown off from the blood, and from the lung substance. 
All other excreta, especially that of the skin, lend their aid to the 
fouling of the atmosphere, and there are frequent sources exterior 
to the body from which deteriorating influences may arise. A 
single gas burner in a room consumes more oxygen than would 
be required for three additional persons. 

Where there is sickness the proper ventilation of the room 
becomes of vital importance, owing to the increased amount of 
organic matter of the most deleterious quality, and to the 
reduced powers of resistance of the system. A healthy adult 
requires one thousand cubic feet of air space, constantly renewed. 

A sick person should have two or three thousand cubic feet, as 
the air is more quickly contaminated and cannot be renewed so 
rapidly, owing to the susceptibility to draughts. It is impossible 
to get too much fresh air. 

In ventilation two constant currents are necessary — one out- 
ward, removing the impure, and one inward, supplying the pure 
air. 

Inlets and outlets should be of equal capacity, on different 
sides of the room and at different heights, to secure thorough 
distribution. It is best to have them small and numerous, giv- 
ing rise to many and moderate currents. They should be as far 
as possible from each other and from the patient. 

Methods of Securing Inflow of Pure Air — In ordinary 
cases windows may be kept open, more or less, day and night 
without danger. Ventilation during the night is not less impor- 
tant than during the day, though the air must be more cautiously 
admitted, as it is colder and more damp. Cold is greatest and the 
body least able to resist it in the early morning-, just before day- 
light, but more heat, and not less air, is called for. Instead of 
closing the windows and adding the benumbing effect of carbon 
dioxide poisoning to that of cold, stir up the fire and give the 
patient additional clothing and footwarmers. If there must be a 
choice of two evils air too cold will in most cases do less harm than 
foul air. It is a common eiror to confound cold air with pure air, 
and to suppose that ventilation can be measured by a thermometer. 
No greater error could be committed; the only test ordinarily 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 105 

practicable is by the sense of smell. A ''sick room odor," per- 
ceptible upon entering from the fresh air, is incontrovertible evi- 
dence of poor ventilation. It is obviously desirable that a 
nurse should have a good nose, but often after a short time spent 
in a vitiated atmosphere its sensitiveness will be lost, so that it 
ceases to be a reliable guide. Too great care in respect to venti- 
lation cannot be exercised. 

Method of Securing Outflow of Foul Air — The best 
means of securing the outflow of foul air is by an open fire. In 
a large room additional means of heating may be required. If it 
is too warm for a fire to be desirable a lamp burning on the hearth 
is good to create a draught. Stoves assist ventilation in the same 
way as grate fires, though not to the same extent, by drawing off 
the foul air. A pan of water should be kept on the stove to damp- 
en the air by its evaporation. Heat without moisture is injur- 
ious, a certain amount of watery vapor being essential to the 
wholesomeness of the air. Furnace heat is especially dry, and 
steam radiators are worse and give no aid to ventilation. 

Degree of Warmth — In all disorders of the respiratory sys- 
tem the room should be kept at a temperature of from 70° to 75° 
F. ; in purely febrile disease 65° is more suitable; in other cases 
68° is a good point. Whatever temperature is decided upon 
should be steadily maintained. It should be remembered that 
there is especial necessity for warmth in children, in the very 
aged and in cases of diarrhea. It is of far greater importance to 
keep the sick room warm when the patient is out of bed than 
when he is in it. People rarely take cold under the bedclothing. 

Remember that the lungs cannot, in any confined space, fulfill 
their office of purifying the blood and in removing its waste parti- 
cles, unless provision is made for the constant renewal of the air. 
This cannot be too much emphasized. There are three impor- 
tant rules in regard to ventilation : first, sufficient pure air must 
be introduced ; second, the foul air must be removed ; third, these 
ends must be achieved without injurious draughts. 



106 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 



DIET IN DISEASE. 



Composition of Food — All animal bodies are made up of 
four elements — oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen and carbon, together 
with a small quantity of mineral matter. Oxygen and hydrogen 
in combination form water, which enters into all constituent parts 
of the body, amounting to more than two-thirds of the entire 
weight. Life is sustained by a continual process of oxidation 
or combustion, producing heat and energy. To supply material 
for such production of vital force and also to build up and repair 
the waste of the tissues carrying on the work of the body, food is 
required. Our food, in whatever torm we take it, is composed 
of some or all of the four elements above named, in variously pro- 
portioned compounds. The hydrocarbon compounds, of which 
starch, sugar, fat and gum are the most familiar and most impor- 
tant, furnish the materials for oxidation, and whatever surplus 
that may be taken into the system is stored as fat. These foods 
may be called the heat producers. 

Nitrogenous compounds are more especially flesh formers, and 
go to repair the waste of the body. The most important of them 
is albumin, and the entire group of related compounds, including 
fibrin, casein, gluten, gelatine, etc., and from their resemblance 
to albumin are sometimes called albuminoids. Neither group has 
exclusively gthe one function, for in the transformation of albu- 
minoids into living tissue some heat is produced, and in all 
healthy tissue there must be present some hydrocarbons. The 
division into the two great classes, however, is useful, since it 
forms a basis for all scientific dietetics. 

In addition to these two great groups of food matter certain 
earthy salts are required ; phosphorus for the nervous system, iron 
for the blood, lime for the bones, potash and soda for the muscles, 
etc. These we take insensibly, they being present more or less 
in everything we eat and drink. Common salt — chloride of 
sodium — is the only one which we make a practice of adding to 
our food. 

Hydrogen and carbon unite very readily with oxygen ; it is a 
peculiarity of nitrogen, on the contrary, that it interferes with 
oxidation. Entering into the composition of the tissues of the 



I 



HKAI/fH AT HOME. 107 

body, nitrogen protects them, so that they are not rapidly con- 
sumed by the heat of the oxidizing hydrocarbons. The destruc- 
tion of the tissues is generally slow, and the amount of nitro- 
genous matter needed for repair is much less than the amount 
of hydrocarbons needed for fuel. In a healthy diet, that is one 
in which the supply corresponds to the demand, the heat pro- 
ducers should be more abundant than the albuminoids. In grow- 
ing children and in convalescents where disease has caused undue 
waste of substance, the demand for albuminoids is great. 

Even in health it is well to know something of the constituents 
of our food, and what purpose each serves in the economy of 
nature; and when sickness and its effects upon digestion and 
nutrition are to be taken into account it becomes worthy of the 
most careful study. The original meaning of the word nurse was 
to nourish, and in spite of all secondary meanings that it has 
acquired the question still remains one of greatest importance. 
What food to give and when and how to give it are constantly 
recurring problems of the sick room. In administering food to 
the sick everything should be the best of its kind, well cooked, 
palatably seasoned and attractively served. Consult as far as 
possible the known tastes of the patient, but do not each time ask 
him what he would like. Something unexpected will often be 
acceptable, when to have thought about it beforehand would have 
taken away all appetite for it. Food should never be prepared 
in the presence of the invalid, nor the smell of cooking food be 
allowed to reach him, if it is possible to avoid it. The nurse's 
own meals should never be served in the sick room. It is equally 
bad for both nurse and invalid. 

Rules for Serving — Serve everything as nicely as possible, 
always with a clean napkin, spotless china and bright silverware 
and glass. Nothing so easily dulls the appetite as lack of atten- 
tion to these details. Have the dishes dry on the outside, tak- 
ing particular care that nothing gets spilled from the cup into the 
saucer. Have everything intended to be hot, very hot, and those 
intended to be cold, really cold. More salt and less sugar will 
generally be wanted than in health. Highly seasoned food is not 
good or often wished for, but everything should be agreeably 
flavored and of good quality ; eggs above suspicion, milk always 
sweet and butter fresh. Milk and butter should always be kept 



108 HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 

cool and closely covered, for they rapidly absorb the odors of 
whatever is near them. Before taking food to a patient the nurse 
should always taste it to see that it is just right, but on no 
account taste it in his presence or with his spoon. Whatever is 
not eaten should be at once removed from the room, as to leave 
it in sight in the hope that a little more of it will be eaten is 
worse than useless. It is always better to bring too little food 
than too much. 

Quantity of Food — A weak digestion cannot manage a load, 
but must take a little at a time, correspondingly often. It is not 
wise to overburden your patient's stomach in your anxiety to 
make him take plenty of nourishment, for it is not what is 
swallowed, but what is digested that does him good. When only 
a small quantity can be retained in the stomach it should be in a 
highly concentrated form. Where there is nausea and diarrhea, 
give but little at a time and always cold. Determine how much 
nourishment the patient should have during twenty-four hours, 
and dividing it into suitable quantities give it at regular inter- 
vals. The importance of regularity in administering food can- 
not be too much emphasized. If given punctually at fixed hours 
a habit not only of taking, but digesting it, will soon be acquired, 
for our most automatic functions are influenced by custom. Only 
in exceptional cases should the patient be roused from sleep for 
food, but a supply should be provided lor use during the night, 
as it may be very important to have it at hand. It should be 
kept cool and covered. Some light nourishment the last thing 
at night will often help to send the patient to sleep. 

Feeding Helpless Patients — In feeding a helpless patient 
give the food slowly and in small quantities, letting each morsel 
be fairly swallowed before another is given. See that the head 
is not turned to either side — even a slight inclination of the head 
may cause the liquid to run out at the corner of the mouth instead 
of down his throat. Have his clothes well protected and take 
pains not to make an external application of the food. Fluid 
food can, in most cases, be best taken by suction through a bent 
glass tube, and patients will often take a larger quantity in this 
way, than they can be induced to take in any other. After feed- 
ing always dry the mouth, especially at the corners, if the patient 



HEALTH AT HOME. 109 

cannot well do it for himself. The lips often become sore for 
want of this little care. With fever the thirst is very great 
Usually it is quite safe to allow a patient all the water he wants. 
If not it is worthy of note that a small glass full will be much more 
satisfactory than the same quantity of water in a larger vessel; 
this is especially true in the case of children. Slightly bitter or 
acidulated drinks slake thirst better than water alone. Bits of 
ice are often very refreshing, and always harmless. They may 
be easily split off with a pin in the direction of the grain in the 
ice. Small bits of ice swallowed whole are excellent to control 
nausea. Ice, to keep well, should be so placed that the water 
may drain off as fast as it melts. Small pieces may be kept in 
a piece of flannel in a glass for some time. Fasten the edge of the 
flannel about the rim of the glass with a rubber band and snip 
two or three small holes in the flannel so that the water may drain 
off. A metal spoon in a glass causes the ice to melt rapidly by 
conducting the heat away from it. A newspaper wrapped around 
the ice pitcher delays the melting of the ice. Ice to be taken 
internally must be clean, and not only on the outside. It is a 
mistake to suppose that all impurities are removed from ice by 
freezing. It is as necessary to *have good ice as it is to have 
pure water. Pure water should be transparent, sparkling, color- 
less and odorless, though these characteristics do not prove it to 
be such. Thus we see that to provide suitable and acceptable 
food for the sick is a matter which requires care, judgment and 
ingenuity, but it is well worth the expenditure of them all. The 
aim should be to give what will be at once easy of digestion and 
of value after it is digested. 

Preparation of Foods — Liquid food is the most easily 
digested and in severe illness may be relied upon entirely. Meat 
contains a great deal of nutriment in a small bulk, but is a good 
deal of a tax upon the digestive organs. Vegetables contain all 
the food elements, but they include a large proportion of waste 
material in the shape of indigestible fibrous tissue. The legu- 
minous plants (beans and peas) are rich in albuminoids, the 
cereals and tubers (potatoes) in starch. Fruits consist largely 
of water and sugar, with some vegetable acid, and have very little 
nutritive value. Milk is the only article of diet which contains 



110 HEAI/fH AT HOME. 

within itself all the necessary elements of nutrition in their proper 
proportions. Tea and coffee are rather stimulants than nutrients. 
Cocoa and chocolate are quite nutritious, but unfortunately are 
rather difficult of digestion. Eggs are of high nutritive value, 
but in them and in most other animal foods the albuminoids pre- 
dominate. Beef ranks high among the animal foods, but the 
usefulness of beef tea is very generally overestimated, as the 
albuminous and most nutritious portion of the meat is left behind 
in its preparation. It has value, but it is as a stimulant rather 
than a food. Preparations of beef which have been peptonized, 
or partially digested outside of the body, are far superior to it. Beef 
tea is, however, much used, and it may be given either hot or 
ice cold. Frozen beef juice may sometimes be given when the 
fluid form is not acceptable to the patient. Animal broths are 
made from beef, chicken, mutton and ve al. The latter is of least 
value. Mutton makes a good broth, but there is frequent repug- 
nance to it. A meat tea, good by way of variety, is made by 
using equal quantities of beef, mutton and veal. Meat from which 
the juice is to be extracted must always be put into cold water 
first and then gradually heated. It may be allowed to simmer 
until the meat has quite lost its color, but should never be allowed 
to reach the boiling point. On the other hand, meat that is to 
be eaten should in the beginning be exposed to a high tempera- 
ture, which will coagulate the fibrin near the surface and so pre- 
vent the escape of the juices. 

Soups for the sick should be allowed to stand until cold, as the 
fat cannot be perfectly removed while hot, and greasy soup should 
never be given to a sick person. When required for use heat 
only to the point where they will be palatable ; do not boil them 
again. Any floating particles of fat remaining can be taken off 
by wiping over the surface of the soup with a piece of bread. 
A variety of gruels and porridges are made from oatmeal, Indian 
meal, arrowroot, rice flour, corn starch, etc. Different crushed 
cereals already steamcooked may be obtained, and will be found 
excellent and very convenient, as they take but little time for pre- 
paration. Directions for use are supplied with them. 

Both oatmeal and Indian meal have a loosening effect upon 
the bowels, and are consequently objectionable when there is any 
tendency to diarrhea. In such cases boiled milk is to be pre- 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. Ill 

ferred to raw milk. When there is nausea arising from over- 
acidity of the stomach, lime water may be added to the milk in 
any proportion up to one-half. If there is also constipation some 
form of aperient mineral water may be used. Milk may be kept from 
souring even in warm weather for some little time by adding to 
each quart of milk fifteen grains of bicarbonate of soda and a 
little sugar. Koumiss is a very nutritious and somewhat stim- 
ulant form of food. The original is prepared in Tartary from 
mare's or camel's milk, but an excellent imitation may be made by 
fermenting cow's milk. Directions for making are found on 
page 112. It is a very valuable food and will sometimes be 
assimilated when nothing else can be retained. Each quart is 
said to contain four ounces of solid food. 

Sick Room Dietary — Toast- Water — Toast three slices stale 
bread to dark brown, but do not burn. Put into pitcher; pour 
over them a quart of boiling water ; cover closely and let stand 
on ice until cold ; strain. May add wine and sugar. 

Rice- Water — Pick over and wash two teaspoons rice ; put into 
granite saucepan with quart of boiling water; simmer two 
hours, when rice should be softened and partially dissolved; 
strain, add saltspoon of salt; serve warm or cold. May add 
sherry or port, two tablespoons. 

Gum-Arabic Water — Dissolve ounce of gum-arabic in pint of 
boiling water ; add two tablespoons of sugar, wine-glass of sherry 
and juice of large lemon ; cool, add ice. 

Barley Water — Wash two ounces (wineglassful) pearl barley 
with cold water. Boil five minutes in fresh water; throw both 
waters away. Pour on two quarts boiling water ; boil down to a 
quart. Flavor with thinly-cut lemon-rind ; add sugar to taste ; 
do not strain unless at the patient's request. 

Egg- Water — Stir white of two eggs into a half pint ice water 
without beating ; add enough salt or sugar to make palatable. 

Flaxseed Tea — Flaxseed, whole, one ounce; white sugar, one 
ounce (heaping tablespoon); liquorice-root, half ounce (two 
small sticks); lemon juice, four tablespoons. Pour on these 
materials two pints boiling water ; let stand in hot place four 
hours ; strain off the liquor. 



112 HEALTH AT HOME. 

Sterilized Milk — Put the required amount of milk in clean 
bottles. (If for infants, each bottle holding enough for one feed- 
ing). Plug mouths lightly with rubber stoppers; immerse to 
shoulders in kettle of cold water ; boil twenty minutes ; or better, 
steam thirty minutes in ordinary steamer; push stoppers in 
firmly, cool bottles rapidly and put in refrigerator. Warm each 
bottle just before using. 

Pepto7iized Milk: Cold Process — In a clean quart bottle put one 
peptonizing powder (extract of pancreas five grains, bicarbonate 
of soda fifteen grains) or the contents of one peptonizing tube 
(Fairchild) ; add one teacup cold water, shake ; add pint of fresh 
cold milk ; shake the mixture again. Place on ice ; use when 
required without subjecting to heat. Warm Process — Mix pep- 
tonizing powder with water and milk as described above ; place 
bottle in water so hot that the whole hand can be held in it for 
a minute without discomfort; keep the bottle there ten minutes; 
then put on ice to check further digestion. Do not heat long 
enough to render milk bitter. 

Milk and Egg — Beat milk with salt to taste ; beat white of egg 
till stiff ; add egg to milk and stir. 

Peptoiiized Milk Toast — Over two slices of toast pour gill of 
peptonized milk (cold process) ; let stand on the hob for thirty 
minutes. Serve warm or strain and serve fluid portion alone. 
Plain light sponge-cake may be similarly digested. 

Baked Flour Porridge — Take one pint flour and pack tightly in 
small muslin bag ; throw into boiling water and boil five or six 
hours ; cut off the outer sodden portion, grate the hard core fine ; 
blend thoroughly with a little milk and stir into boiling milk to 
the desired thickness. 

Koumiss — Take ordinary beer-bottle with shifting cork; put in 
it one pint milk, one-sixth cake of Fleischmann's yeast, or one 
tablespoon of fresh lager-beer yeast (brewer's), one-half table- 
spoon white sugar reduced to syrup ; shake well and allow to 
stand in refrigerator two or three days, when it may be used. It 
will keep there indefinitely if laid on its side. Much waste can 
be saved by preparing the bottles with ordinary corks wired in 
position and drawing off the koumiss with a champagne tap. 



HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 113 

Wine Whey — Put two pints new milk in saucepan, and stir 
over clear fire until nearly boiling ; then add gill (two wineglass- 
ful) of sherry, and simmer a quarter of an hour, skimming off 
curd as it rises. Add a tablespoon more sherry, and skim again 
for few minutes ; strain through coarse muslin. May use two 
tablespoons lemon -juice instead of wine. 

Junket — Take half a pint fresh milk, heated lukewarm ; add 
one teaspoon essence of pepsin and stir just enough to mix. Pour 
into custard-cups, let stand till firmly curded ; serve plain or with 
sugar and grated nutmeg. May add sherry. 

Egg Lemonade — Beat one egg with one tablespoon sugar until 
very light; stir in three tablespoons cold water and juice of small 
lemon ; fill glass with pounded ice and drink through straw. 

Egg-Nog — Scald some new milk by putting it, contained in a 
jug, into saucepan of boiling water, but do not allow it to boil. When 
cold, beat up fresh egg with a fork in a tumbler with some sugar; 
beat to a froth, add a dessertspoon of brandy, and fill up tumbler 
with scalded milk. 

Nutritious Coffee — Dissolve a little isinglass or gelatin (Knox) 
in water, put half an ounce freshly-ground coffee into saucepan 
with one pint of new milk, which should be nearly boiling before 
the coffee is added ; boil both together for three minutes ; clear it 
by pouring some of it into a cup and dashing it back again ; add 
the isinglass, and leave it to settle on the hob for a few minutes. 
Beat up an egg in a breakfast-cup, and pour the coffee upon it ; 
if preferred, drink without the egg. 

Rum Punch — White sugar, two teaspoons ; one egg, stirred and 
beaten up; warm milk, large wineglass; Jamacia rum, two to four 
teaspoons; nutmeg. 

Champagne Whey — Boil half -pint milk ; strain through cheese- 
cloth ; add wineglass of champagne. 

Peptonized Oysters — Mince six large or twelve small oysters; 
add to them, in their own liquor, five grains of extract of pan- 
creas with fifteen grains of bicarbonate of soda (or one Fairchild 
peptonizing tube). The mixture is then brought to blood-heat, 
and maintained, with occasional stirring, at that temperature 
thirty minutes, when one pint milk is added and the temperature 



114 HKAI/TH AT HOMK. 

kept up ten to twenty minutes. Finally the mass is brought to 
boiling-point, strained, and served. Gelatin may be added, and 
the mixture served cold as a jelly. Cooked tomato, onion, celery, 
or other flavoring suited to individual taste may be added at 
beginning of the artificial digestion. 

Beef- Tea — Free a pound of lean beef from fat, tendon, cartilage, 
bone, and vessels ; chop up fine, put into a pint of cold water to 
digest two hours. Simmer on range or stove three hours, but do 
not boil. Make up for water lost, by adding cold water, so that a 
pint of beef tea represents one pound of beef. Press beef care- 
fully and strain. 

Beef f nice — Cut a thin, juicy steak into pieces one and one-half 
inches square ; brown separately one and one-half minutes on 
each side before a hot fire; squeeze in a hot lemon-squeezer; 
flavor with salt and pepper. May add to milk or pour on toast. 

Beef Tea with Acid — One and a half pounds beef (round) cut 
in small pieces; same quantity of ice, broken small. Let stand 
in deep vessel twelve hours. Strain thoroughly and forcibly 
through coarse towel. Boil quickly ten minutes in porcelain 
vessel. Let cool. Add half teaspoon of acid (or acid phosphate) 
to the pint. 

Mutton Broth — Lean loin of mutton, one and one-half pounds, 
including bone; water, three pints. Boil gently till tender, 
throwing in a little salt and onion, according to taste. Pour out 
broth into basin ; when cold skim off fat. Warm up as wanted. 

Chicken Broth — Skin, and chop up small, a small chicken or 
half a large fowl ; boil it, bones and all, with a blade of mace, a 
sprig of parsley, one tablespoon of rice, and a crust of bread, in a 
quart of water, for an hour, skimming it from time to time. 
Strain through course colander. 

Clam Broth — Wash thoroughly six large clams in shell ; put in 
kettle with one cup water; bring to boil and keep there one 
minute : the shells open, the water takes up the proper quantity 
of juice, and the broth is ready to pour off and serve hot. 

Cream Soup — Take one quart of good stock (mutton or veal), 
cut one onion into quarters, slice three potatoes very thin, and 
put them into the stock with a small piece of mace ; boil gently 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 115 

for an hour; then strain out the onion and mace; the potatoes 
should, by this time, have dissolved in the stock. Add one pint 
of milk, mix with a very little corn flour to make it about as thick 
as cream. A little butter improves it. This soup may be made 
with milk instead of stock, if a little cream is used. 

Apple Soup — Two cups of apple ; two cups of water ; two tea- 
spoons of corn-starch; one and one-half tablespoons of sugar; 
one saltspoon of cinnamon and a bit of salt. Stew the apple in 
the water until it is very soft, then mix together into a smooth 
paste the corn-starch, sugar, salt, and cinnamon with a little cold 
water; pour this into the apple and boil for five minutes; strain 
it and keep hot until ready to serve. May serve with hot but- 
tered sippets. 

Raw Meat Diet — Scrape pulp from a good steak, season to 
taste, smear on thin slices of bread ; sear bread slightly and serve 
as sandwich. 

Meat Cure — Procure slice of steak from top of round — fresh 
meat without fat ; cut meat into strips, removing all fat, gristle, 
etc. , with knife. Put meat through mincer at least twice. The 
pulp must then be well beaten up in roomy saucepan with cold 
water or skimmed beef tea to consistency of cream. The right 
proportion is one teaspoon of liquid to eight of pulp ; add black 
pepper and salt to taste ; stir mince briskly with wooden spoon 
the whole time it is cooking, over slow fire or on cool part of 
covered range till hot through and through and the red color dis- 
appears. This requires about one-half hour. When done it 
should be a soft, smooth, stiff puree of the consistency of a thick 
paste. Serve hot. Add for first few meals the softly poached 
white of an egg. 

White Celery Soup — To half a pint of strong beef tea add an 
equal quantity of boiled milk, slightly and evenly thickened with 
flour. Flavor with celery seeds or pieces of celery, which are to 
be strained out before serving. Salt to taste. 

Oyster Broth — Cut into small pieces a pint of oysters; put them 
into half a pint of cold water and let them simmer gently for ten 
minutes over a slow fire. Skim, strain, add salt and pepper. 

Rice Soup — Take half a pint of chicken stock and two table- 
spoonfuls of rice. Let them simmer together for two hours, then 



.116 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

strain and add half a pint of boiling cream and salt to taste. Boil 
up once and serve hot. 

Peptonized Milk — Stir up five grains of pancreatic extract and 
fifteen grains of bicarbonate of soda in a gill of water; mix 
thoroughly and add a pint of fresh milk. Put in a bottle or 
covered jug and let it stand where it will keep warm for an hour. 
Then put on ice until required for use, or boil it for two or three 
minutes to stop further digestive action. Milk so prepared will 
have a faintly bitter flavor or it may be sweetened to taste, or used 
in punch, gruels, etc., like ordinary milk. 

Flour Gruel — Mix a tablespoonful of flour with milk enough to 
make a smooth paste, and stir it into a quart of boiling milk. 
Boil it for half an hour, being careful not to let it burn. Salt 
and strain. This is useful in cases of diarrhea. 

Oatmeal Gruel — Boil a tablespoonful of oatmeal in a pint of 
water for three-quarters of an hour, then put through a strainer. 
Season with salt. If too thick reduce with boiling water. 

Cracker Gruel — Pour a pint of boiling milk over three table- 
spoonfuls of fine cracker crumbs. Butter crackers are the best 
to use. Add half a teaspoonful of salt, boil up once all together, 
and serve at once. Do not sweeten. 

India?i Meal Gruel — Mix a scant tablespoonful of Indian meal 
with a little cold water and stir into a pint of boiling water. Boil 
for half an hour. Strain and season with salt. Sugar and cream 
may be added if desired. 

Sago Milk — Wash .a tablespoonful of pearl sago and soak it 
over night in four tablespoonfuls of cold water. Put in a double 
kettle with a quart of milk, and boil till the sago is nearly dis- 
solved. Sweeten to taste and serve either hot or cold. 

Treacle Posset — Bring a cupful of milk to the boiling point and 
stir into it a tablespoonful of molasses. Let it boil up well, strain 
and serve. 

Milk and Albumen — Put into a clean quart bottle a pint of 
milk, the whites of two eggs and a pinch of salt. Cork and shake 
hard for five minutes. 

Mulled Wine — Into half a cup of boiling water put two tea- 
spoonfuls of broken stick cinnamon and half a dozen whole 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 117 

cloves. Let them steep for ten minutes and then strain. Beat 
together until very light two eggs and two tablespoonf uls of sugar 
and stir on it the spiced water. Pour into this from a height a 
cupful of sweet wine, boiling hot. Pouring it several times from 
one pitcher to another will make it light and foamy. Serve hot. 
The wine should not be boiled in a tin vessel. 

Milk Punch — To half a pint of fresh cold milk add two table- 
spoonfuls of sugar and an ounce of brandy or sherry wine. Stir 
until the sugar is dissolved. 

Syllabub — Dissolve two teaspoonfuls of sugar in a tablespoon- 
ful of wine, put it in a pint pitcher and take it to a cow. Milk 
until the foam reaches the top. 

Hot Milk and Water — Boiling water and fresh milk in equal 
parts compose a drink highly recommended in cases of exhaus- 
tion, as it is quickly absorbed into the system with very little 
digestive effort. 

Potus Imperialis — To a quart of boiling water add half an ounce 
of cream of tartar, the juice of one lemon and two tablepoonfuls 
of honey or sugar. Let it stand on ice until cold. 

Rice Coffee — Parch and grind like coffee a half cupful of rice. 
Pour over it a quart of boiling water and let stand where it will 
keep hot for a quarter of an hour, then strain and add boiled milk 
and sugar. This is nice for children. 

Tea — Tea should be made in an earthenware pot, first rinsed 
with boiling water. Allow a teaspoonful of tea to each half pint 
of water. Put in tea, and after letting it stand for a few minutes 
in the steaming pot add boiling water and let it stand where it 
will keep hot, but not boil, for from three to five minutes. 

Coffee — Stir together two tablespoonfuls of freshly ground 
coffee, four of cold water and half an egg. Pour upon the mix- 
ture a pint of boiling water and let it boil for five minutes. Stir 
down the grounds and let it stand where it will keep hot, but not 
boil, for five minutes longer. In serving put sugar and cream in 
the cup first, and pour the coffee upon them. 

Chocolate — Scrape fine an ounce of Baker's chocolate, add two 
tablespoonfuls of sugar and one tablespoonf ul of hot water; stir 
over a hot fire for a minute or two until it is smooth and per- 



118 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

fectly dissolved, then pour it into a pint of boiling milk, mix 
thoroughly and serve at once. If allowed to boil after the choco- 
late is added to the milk it becomes oily and loses flavor. 



ENEMATA OR INJECTIONS INTO THE BOWEL. 

The intestinal canal is formed by the folds of a single long tube 
some twenty-five or thirty feet in length. The part nearest the 
stomach is called the small intestine. The last five or six feet of 
the tube is much larger, and hence is called the large intestine. 
The last few inches of the large intestine is called the rectum, and 
it is here that the fecal matter collects before being discharged. 
Enema, or clyster, is a fluid preparation for injection into the 
rectum. The injection may be used to produce evacuation of the 
bowels, to administer medicine or as a means of supplying nourish- 
ment to the system when for any reason it cannot be given by the 
stomach. When given for purgative effect they produce the 
desired result not only by washing out the bowels but by stimulat- 
ing the contractions of the bowel walls. A small injection often 
fails where a large one is effective. To an adult should be 
given from one to four pints ; a child requires about half as much, 
and for an infant from one to two tablespoonfuls will be sufficient. 

To Give the Injection — First carefully protect the bed by 
cloths or rubber sheet, when the injection is to be given while 
patient is in bed; place the patient upon the left side with the 
knees drawn up toward the abdomen. Should the rectum be 
found to be packed with feces it may be necessary to remove a 
portion of the matter with the fingers before the tube of the 
syringe can be introduced. Ordinarily the rectum will be found 
nearly empty, the accumulation being higher up in the 
bowel. Oil the nozzle of the syringe and insert it very gently 
upward and slightly backward and toward the left. Under no 
circumstances use force. See that the end of the tube moves 
freely in the rectum and is not imbedded in a fecal mass. Give 
the injection very slowly, as rapid forcing of the fluid into the 
rectum produces rapid and uncontrollable desire to evacuate the 
fluid. It is a process about which it is impossible to hurry. If 



HEAI/fH AT HOMK. 119 

the patient complains greatly of pain rest a little while, when 
you can usually go on without trouble. A folded towel placed 
around the tube and pressed upon by two or three fingers will 
enable you to support the anus. After the desired amount of fluid 
has been injected the tube may be gently removed and gentle 
pressure continued on the rectum for some minutes. The patient 
should keep perfectly quiet for ten or fifteen minutes. Then the 
bowels can be allowed to move, usually with satisfactory results. 

Material to be Used for Purgative Bnetna — Water alone 
may be used, or something more stimulating may be called for. 
Various medicaments may be added, such as soap, salt, olive oil, 
castor oil, oxgall, etc. Soapsuds are excellent and convenient, 
or to the soapsuds a couple of ounces of sweet oil and half an 
ounce of of turpentine may be added. An injection of olive or 
sweet oil, four to six ounces, may be given half an hour before 
one of water and allowed to remain to soften the fecal mass. The 
oil should first be warmed so as to pass readily through the 
syringe. As to the best temperature for purgative enema authori- 
ties differ. Hot or cold water will naturally excite the intestines 
to more vigorous action than water at the same temperature of 
the body. Hither may be used without inconvenience to the 
patient. The daily injection of a pint of cold water is often 
beneficial in the case of bleeding piles, attended by constipation. 
The habitual use of large purgative injections is to be discouraged, 
as they cause undue distention of the bowel and lead to a somewhat 
torpid condition. 

Where there is an irritable condition of the mucous membrane 
of the bowel an injection of a more soothing nature may be used. 
Thin gruel is often used, or a decoction of flaxseed, starch, or 
barley water. Soothing injections should always be warm. A 
cold injection of clear water is sometimes given to reduce febrile 
temperature. Injections of ice water may be given to check 
hemorrhage from the bowels. An injection of water containing 
salt, two tablespoon fuls to the pint, or carbolic acid, two teaspoon- 
fuls to the pint, will destroy worms in the rectum. An injection 
of starch, thin enough to pass readily through the syringe, to 
which has been added from ten to twenty drops of laudanum to 
two fluid ounces of the starch is sometimes used to check excess- 



120 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

ive diarrhea. This may be used after each movement of the 
bowels, or it may be given at regular intervals. 

When medicines are given for the relief of pain in the region 
of the pelvis, it should be remembered that it takes as a rule one- 
third larger dose to produce the same effect as that produced by 
giving the medicine by the mouth. Any rectal injection which 
it is intended shall be retained must be given very slowly, not 
more than four tablespoonfuls at a time, and at a temperature not 
less than 100° F. The patient must be quiet for at least half an 
hour after the injection is administered. The best instrument for 
giving- such an injection is a large hard rubber piston syringe 
which holds about four ounces. 

Administering Nourishment by Injection — The above directions 
apply especially to nutrient injections, which are used when 
sufficient food cannot be taken or disposed of by the stomach. 
The possibility of supplying nourishment in this way is often the 
means of saving life. Any highly concentrated food in liquid 
form, such as milk, beef tea, whipped eggs, etc. , may be given. 
A variety will be better than the use of one kind of food exclus- 
ively. A useful mixture is three tablespoonfuls of beef tea, half 
a tablespoonful of brandy, and one tablespoonful of sweet cream. 
Brandy is a valuable stimulant given in this way, but as it is 
quite irritating it cannot be long continued unless it is mixed 
with some soothing material such as flaxseed tea. Since food 
given by the rectum does not go through the regular digestive 
process, it must, in order that it may be easily digested, be sub- 
jected to artificial digestion; hence pepsin or pancreatic extract is 
commonly added to it. The solutions to be injected should be 
slightly acid, as they are then absorbed more rapidly. These 
injections must not be given too frequently, or the rectum will 
refuse to retain them, as it is not very tolerant of foreign matter. 
Once in five hours is often enough, and four tablespoonfuls the 
maximum quantity at one time. If the rectum will not retain 
that much try one, two or three tablespoonfuls at a time. Before 
giving nourishing injections it is important to learn whether or 
not the rectum contains fecal matter. If it is not found empty 
it will be necessary to give a purgative injection first. After 
using a syringe, clean it by letting plenty of warm water run 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 121 

through it, wipe it dry on the outside and hang it up so that all 
water will drain out. Never put it away in the box wet. 

Bed pans are very important adjuncts to the sick room. They 
are made of crockeryware or enameled papier mache. 

Vaginal Douche — In the case of female patients this is often 
very necessary. When given for cleanliness alone it should be of 
simple tepid water or water in which two to four tablets of No. 
3 have been dissolved in each pint of the solution. The use of 
a very hot douche is very valuable in relieving pain and inflam- 
mation about the pelvic tissues. At first there is an increase in 
the congestion, but a continued application of the hot water 
causes a secondary and more or less lasting contraction of the 
blood vessels. The hot douche is also an excellent method of 
controlling capillary bleeding, where the blood oozes out from 
over a large surface. It also favors contraction of the uterus. In 
giving the vaginal douche the patient should lie on the back 
with the hips elevated. A douche taken in this position is much 
more beneficial than one taken in the sitting or standing position. 
The fountain syringe should be suspended or held at a consider- 
able height, so as to insure a good flow. The nozzle of the 
syringe should be carefully passed along the back wall of the 
vagina until it reaches a point behind the neck of the womb ; then 
the clamp on the tube may be released and the water be slowly 
injected. For hot douches, have the water at first at a tempera- 
ture of 100° F. ; after allowing it to run for a minute, rapidly 
increase the temperature by the addition of hot water up to 
110° or over. Should any medication be desired in the douche 
it should be added to the last quart of water. The hot douche 
may be continued for fifteen or twenty mimutes. In giving a 
douche in the prone position, a bed pan with an overflow pipe is 
needed. Should this not be obtainable the patient's position may 
be shifted so that the hips shall rest on several folds of a blanket 
placed on the edge of the bed, over which a rubber sheet has 
been placed, and so arranged that the flow of water shall be con- 
ducted into a vessel placed upon the floor. The patient's feet 
may be supported upon two chairs placed beside the bed two feet 
apart. Care must be taken in administering the hot douche 
that the mucous membrane of the vagina is not blistered by the 
hot tube. For this reason the hard rubber nozzle is preferable 



122 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

to the metal nozzle. Sometimes the hot douche may be admin- 
istered in the rectum, with the idea that the heat can be more 
directly applied to the diseased tissues than through the vagina. 
The water in this case must be allowed to escape from the anus 
by the side of the tube. 



COUNTER IRRITANTS. 

These remedies are used locally to relieve inflammation of the 
deeper parts by drawing the circulating fluid and nervous energy 
to the surface. There are two distinct classes of them; first, 
rubefacients, which produce merely local warmth and redness; 
and second, vesicants, or blistering agents. There is still a third 
class which produce a pustular eruption over the surface to which 
they are applied. Croton oil is the chief of this class. 

Counter irritants are usually applied over or near the seat of 
the disease, but occasionally they may be used at some remote 
part to obtain what is called revulsive action. In this way mus- 
tard poultices on the feet or a mustard footbath may be employed 
for the relief of the head. 

Rubefacients — Mild counter irritation results from hot fomen- 
tations and poultices and from the various ammonia and camphor 
liniments. One of the most commonly used rubefacients is mus- 
tard. 

The Mustard Plaster — To make a mustard plaster take one part 
of powdered mustard and from two to five times the quantity of 
flour, according to the strength desired. Mix into a paste with 
tepid water and spread it evenly between two pieces of muslin. 
The plaster should not be left on too long or it will cause painful 
blisters which are slow to heal. From twenty minutes to half an 
hour is generally long enough. With an insensible or delirious 
patient, they must be carefully watched, for if neglected, deep 
ulceration may ensue. For a child mix with glycerine and 
water, instead of pure water, as the action will be less severe and 
it can remain on longer. The plaster should be held in place 
with a bandage. The burning sensation which follows the use 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 123 

of a mustard plaster may be relieved, if severe, by dusting the 
part with talcum powder found in the Cabinet. The mustard 
leaves found in the Cabinet will be found exceedingly useful and 
reliable and may be used in all cases calling for a counter-irritant. 
Cayenne Pepper Plasters — The cayenne pepper plaster is made 
by mixing a tablespoonful of cayenne into a thin paste of flour 
and water. Or a quantity of red pepper may be stitched into a 
bag and wrung out in warm water and applied over the seat of 
pain. 

Vesicants — Some form of cantharides (Spanish fly) is most 
commonly used to produce blisters, either in the form of a plaster 
or, better still, the fluid form known as '- Acetic Cantharidal 
Blistering Fluid. ' ' Where a blister is desired a piece of cotton 
twisted on the end of a match or toothpick to form a brush is 
dipped in the fluid and, after squeezing out the excess of fluid 
against the mouth of the bottle, a surface about the size of a sil- 
ver quarter of a dollar is lightly painted over. The fluid rapidly 
evaporates, and after a few minutes the surface can be again 
painted. Generally two applications will be sufficient to produce 
a blister in from a half hour to two hours, depending upon the 
character of the skin. After the blister has formed it may either 
be allowed to break of its own accord or it may be pricked at its 
lowest point and the fluid drawn off. Where greater effect is 
desired the skin may be removed from the site of the blister and 
the surface left open, and as it heals reapply the blistering fluid. 
The stronger tincture of iodine is used for the same purpose as 
cantharides, but is much milder, and several coats are usually 
required tojproduce a blister. If the iodine burns too severely it 
may be washed off with ammonia or alcohol. 

When it is desired to produce a blister very quickly, stronger 
ammonia or chloroform is used. A small piece of cotton is sat- 
urated with it and placed upon the skin, its evaporation being 
prevented by covering tightly with a watch glass or a pill box. A 
blister may thus be raised in five or ten minutes. This method 
is always painful. 

Croton Oil — Croton oil is used by applying a very small quan- 
tity to the surface with a camel's hair pencil every four or five 
hours until eruption appears. 



124 HEALTH AT HOME. 



POULTICES. 

Poultices are a common method of applying warmth and mois- 
ture. Their effect is to soften the tissues and dilate the capil- 
laries, relaxing the tension of the inflamed parts and so reliev- 
ing pain. Applied early they may check the progress of the 
inflammation and prevent the formation of pus ; when suppura- 
tion has set in they facilitate the passage of the matter to the sur- 
face and limit the spread of the inflammation. They are useful 
not only when in direct contact with inflamed tissue, but will often 
relieve deep seated pain. A poultice applied for the relief of 
internal organs should be large enough to extend over a consider- 
able surrounding surface, but over a suppurating wound, should 
be but little larger than the opening. Apply as hot as can be 
comfortably borne, but do not burn the patient. After the poul- 
tice is in place cover with oiled muslin or rubber tissue to keep 
in the heat and change the poultice frequently, the length of 
time it should remain on depending upon the thickness of the 
poultice. One of ordinary size will keep warm for three or four 
hours. If the poultice be allowed to become cold and hard it will 
do more harm than good. When the poulticing is continued too 
long the skin may develop an eruption. 

Methods of Making Poultices — Poultices are made of var- 
ious materials. The simplest form consists of several thicknesses 
of soft cloth wrung out of hot water. 

Linseed Poultice — Linseed meal is very commonly used, and 
when of good quality is an excellent material. To make a lin- 
seed poultice bring a saucepan of water to the boiling point and 
then without removing from the stove stir into it the meal little 
by little until it has the proper consistency — just thick enough to 
be cut with a knife. It should be smooth and free from lumps. 
The poultice should be spread evenly about a quarter of an inch 
thick upon a piece of muslin previously cut to the desired size, 
leaving an inch and a half margin in each direction. The poul- 
tice should not be applied directly to the skin, as portions of it 
adhere, and it is difficult to remove. The poultice may be covered 
over with a large layer of cotton batting ; this will help retain the 



HEALTH AT HOME. 125 

heat, and the poultice need not be made so thick. The poultice 
jacket is described in the section on pneumonia or lung fever. 

Bread Poultices — Bread poultices are light and more bland than 
linseed, but cool quickly and hold less moisture. They do not 
have the tenacious quality of linseed, and they are likely to 
crumble and become rough when dry. Milk should never be 
used in the preparation of a poultice, as it has no advantage over 
water, and it very soon becomes sour and offensive. Pour boil- 
ing water over slices of bread without the crust. Let it simmer 
a few minutes until well soaked, then drain off the water, beat up 
the bread quickly with a fork and spread over the muslin in the 
same manner as in making a linseed poultice. 

Charcoal Poultice — As bread is more porous than linseed, it 
forms a better basis for the charcoal poultice. The formula is : 
Fresh wood charcoal powder, one-half ounce ; bread crumbs, two 
ounces ; linseed meal, one and a one-half ounces ; boiling water 
ten ounces. Mix half the charcoal into the poultice and sprinkle 
the rest over its surface. It is used for putrid sores. 

Yeast Poultice — The yeast poultice is used mainly to hasten the 
separation of gangrenous sloughs. Mix six ounces of yeast 
with the same quantity of water at blood heat. Stir in fourteen 
ounces of flour and let it stand near the fire until it rises. Apply 
while fermenting. 

Slippery Elm Poultice-^-The slippery elm poultice is made by 
using one part of powdered slippery elm to two parts of linseed 
meal. It is very light and soothing. 

Hop and Bran Poultices — A hop poultice is a thin bag loosely 
filled with hops and wrung out of hot water. Bran is treated in 
the same way. A bran jacket may be made in the same manner 
as the linseed jacket and has the advantage that it may be re- wet 
and used again and again. It needs to be stitched through and 
through, as well as around the edges, to keep the bran in place. 

Spice Poultice — The spice poultice is made by mixing ginger, 
cinnamon, cloves and cayenne pepper, a teaspoonful of each, with 
half a tablespoonf ul of flour, and brandy enough to make a paste. 
The same effect, that of a mild counter irritant, may be produced 
by sewing the spices into a flat bag to be dipped into whiskey or 
brandy when required for use. 



126 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

Mustard Poultice — The mustard poultice is made by the addi- 
tion of from one-eighth to one-fourth as much mustard as is used 
of linseed meal to make the ordinary linseed meal poultice. 

Hot Fomentations — Fomentations are poultices in a modi- 
fied form. They are made by the application of hot water, 
pure or medicated, by means of pieces of flannel or cloth. 
They have the advantage of being clean, light and quickly 
prepared; but they require constant attention, needing to be 
changed every few minutes. Two pieces of flannel should be at 
hand, each doubled to the required size. They are called stupes. 
They are to be saturated with boiling water and then wrung out 
as dry as possible. A stupe wringer, made from a piece of stout 
toweling with a stick run through the hem at either end is a 
very covenient appliance. Place the stupe in the middle of the 
towel, saturate with boiling water, and twist the sticks in the 
opposite direction until no more water can be squeezed out. A 
stupe cool enough to wring out by hand is too cool to be of much 
use. It should be dry enough not to wet the bed or clothing. 
Have another all readv to apply before removing the first. There 
should be two layers of flannel, shake these apart lightly to let 
the air in between them and they will keep hot longer. After the 
stupe is in place cover with oiled muslin and over that a layer of 
cotton or a piece of dry flannel. The stupe should never be 
allowed to become cold. After the fomentations have been stop- 
ped dry the part carefully and keep covered with a piece of dry 
flannel. The chief use of stupes is to relieve spasm of the inter- 
nal organs. They may be made irritant or sedative by the addi- 
tion of appropriate medicaments. Twenty or thirty drops of tur- 
pentine or laudanum may be sprinkled over each stupe or it may 
be steeped, instead of in pure water, in some decoction such as 
poppy heads, hops or chamomile flowers. A good stupe for 
children is Jamaica ginger one part, paregoric one part and hot 
water eight parts. In using turpentine there is some danger of 
blistering the skin, and any sore which may be present must first 
be covered by some impervious dressing, such as oiled muslin. 

Dry Fomentations — Dry fomentations are sometimes used when 
it is desirable to avoid relaxation of the superficial tissues. Dry 
heat is best applied by the hot water bottle. Dry flannels may 



HEALTH AT HOME. 127 

be placed in the oven until hot and then applied. Thin bags of 
heated sand, salt, bran or hops, hot bricks, etc. , all come under 
this head. Hot water bottles should always be wrapped in B flannel. 

Cold Applications — These are chiefly used to subdue inflam- 
mation. They are to be used only in the earliest and latest 
stages, never while pus is forming- or during sloughing, as they 
lower the vitality of the tissues and lessen their powers of resist- 
ance. To be of any use they must be kept cold, and confined to a 
limited space. If the cold applications are begun and then stop- 
ped the inflammation will be more severe than if they had never 
been started. The simplest method of applying cold is by pieces 
of muslin wet in ice water and changed tor fresh ones before they 
get warm. This calls for constant attention. A steady cold 
stream may be kept over the part by carrying across it long strips 
of lamp wicking, having one end in a pitcher of ice water stand- 
ing a little higher than the bed and the other end leading to a 
basin below it. The bed must be well protected and in all cases 
where applications of water are used care must be taken that 
neither the bed nor the patient's clothing get wet. Coils of 
rubber tubing through which cold water is made to flow, is the 
best means of applying cold. Ice is best applied in a rubber 
bag. These are made in different shapes to fit various parts of 
the body. The bag should not be more than half filled with bits 
of ice less than an inch square, which should be renewed before 
the last bit is melted. The ice will keep longer if mixed with 
one-third saw dust. A piece of muslin should be placed 
between the ice bag and the skin. 

I/Otions — Lotions which evaporate must be left uncovered. 
A single thickness of lint, or two or three thicknesses of muslin 
may be used and frequently wet with the lotion. Alcohol, vinegar 
or muriate of ammonia may be used for the lotion. Those 
which are not intended to evaporate are put on several thick- 
nesses of lint or muslin, laid over the affected parts, and closely 
covered with oiled muslin or rubber tissue. The lint can be 
re-wet without taking it off by pouring some of the lotion over it. 
Eye lotions should be introduced at the outer angle of the eye 
with a glass dropper, or a small camel's hair brush, that is used 
for nothing else. Draw down the lower lid, and instruct the 
patient to look up at the instant the drops are introduced. 



128 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

lyiniments — Liniments differ from lotions in their mode of 
application, being rubbed in until the part is dry. 

Ointments — Ointments are either spread upon cloth the exact 
size required, or are rubbed in like liniments. The rubbing 
in of ointments is called inunction. 

Gargles — The interior of the throat is often treated by gar- 
gles. In using a gargle the head is thrown back and the fluid 
comes in contact with the tonsils and soft palate, and is forcibly 
agitated by air from the larynx. About a tablespoonful at a time 
should be used, four or five times successively. After using a gar- 
gle containing an acid or tincture of iron the mouth should be 
well rinsed with some alkaline solution, as soda or lime water, 
to prevent injury to the teeth. 



BATHS. 

The Skin — The skin is not only a protective covering for the 
body, but also a complex excretory organ, doing as important a 
work in eliminating waste products as the lungs and kidneys. It 
consists of two distinct layers, the dermis or true skin underneath 
and the epidermis, cuticle, or scarf-skin on the outside. The 
true skin is filled with blood vessels and nerves; the cuticle con- 
tains none of these, but is connected with them by numbers of 
small tubes connected with the sweat glands and sebaceous 
glands. The surface of the body is covered over by the openings 
of these tubes, known as pores. From these pores water and 
excrementitious matters are constantly being thrown off in the 
form of vapor. By this steady evaporation the temperature of 
the body is regulated. If the body be covered by an impermeable 
coating so as to entirely obstruct this process death quickly ensues. 
The scarf-skin is continually scaling off and being renewed from 
underneath. At the same time solid matters are to some extent 
deposited, as the water evaporates from the sweat ducts. Besides 
the sweat glands there is another set of glands in the skin called 
the sebaceous glands, secreting a kind of oily matter, which serves 
to keep the skin soft and supple. The excess of this sebaceous 
matter, the cast-off scales of the cuticle and the solid deposit from 



HEALTH AT HOME. 129 

the perspiration remain on the surface, and unless removed fill 
the pores and prevent further evaporation. Thus even in a state 
of health frequent and thorough bathing is a matter of first import- 
ance. Dirt of any kind blocks the mouths of the sweat-bearing 
tubes and impedes their action. This throws more work on the 
excretory organs, disturbing the balance of their functions, so 
that disease may often be traced simply to a failure to keep the 
pores of the skin open. The bath in sickness is even more neces- 
sary than in health, for the exhalations of disease are morbid and 
dangerous. Notwithstanding this fact the bath is often neglected 
in sickness through fear that the patient will take cold. But 
cleanliness is a positive aid to recovery, and with proper precau- 
tions there are very few patients who cannot be washed with- 
out danger. In almost all cases at least a sponge bath can be 
given in bed, care being taken neither to chill nor fatigue the 
patient. 

Method of Giving the Bath — In giving a sponge bath in 
the bed the bedding must be protected by a rubber sheet and 
another sheet over that. The room should be warm and free from 
draughts, and everything likely to be needed at hand — plenty of 
hot and cold water, soap, sponges, towels, clean clothing, etc. 
Take plenty of time and expose only a part of the body at a time, 
and wash, dry and cover it before proceeding further. After the 
bath some light refreshment may be allowed, if the patient seems 
at all fatigued. A bath should never be given within two hours 
after a full meal. 

Changing the Clothing — The clothing should always be warmed 
before it is put on. To change a night dress or shirt slip off the 
sleeves of the soiled one, and pull it up toward the neck. Then 
put the arms in the clean sleeves, lift the patient's head and 
shoulders and the soiled garment can be pulled off wdth the same 
motion that puts the clean one on. Pull the clean one down 
under the back smoothly, but not too tight. In this way the 
patient has only been raised once. If the patient should not be 
raised at all the shirt or gown must be slit all the way down the 
front. In taking it off slip one arm out of the sleeve and put on 
the corresponding clean sleeve, work it under the shoulders, push- 
ing the soiled one before it, and change the other sleeve. If two 



130 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

garments are worn fit one inside the other before beginning and 
put them on as one 

Care of the Month — The mouth should be often washed and the 
teeth brushed or wiped with a bit of soft cloth. Water containing 
a few drops of tincture of myrrh or a solution made by dissolving 
two tablets of No. 3 in a teacup of water, may be used for rinsing 
the mouth. To remove the accumulated matter on the teeth a 
mixture of lemon juice, glycerine and ice water will be found 
very efficacious. 

Combing the Hair — In the case of female patients this is a very 
important matter. Begin at the ends, holding the hair firmly at 
the roots, to avoid pulling and to keep the head steady. Often, 
especially if the hair has become matted, it is best to cut it off 
short, though with time and patience very bad tangles can be 
straightened out. A good nurse will never allow the hair to get 
tangled. The hair should be tightly braided or else twisted on 
top of the head, so that the patient will not have to lie on the knot. 
The hair should be combed, the teeth cleaned and the hands and 
face washed at least once daily, the feet twice and the whole body 
every week. This applies to every patient. 

Remedial Baths — Baths are used for remedial purposes as 
well as for cleanliness. They may be general or local, simple 
or medicated, cold, tepid, or hot; in the form of liquid, vapor 
or air. Judiciously used, baths are valuable remedies, but their 
careless or inappropriate use, as is true of all powerful remedies, 
may be hurtful rather than helpful. The effect of the bath on 
the patient should always be carefully noted. Baths may be 
classified as follows : 

Degrees. Degrees. 

Cold, 33 65 Fahr. 

Cool, 65 75 

Temperate, .... 75 85 

Tepid, 85 92 

Warm, 92 98 

Hot, 98 112 

To put a feeble patient in a bath wrap him in a sheet and lower 
gently into the water. Have a warm dry sheet ready to wrap 
him in when he leaves the bath. After wrapping him in the 



HEALTH AT HOME. 131 

dry sheet fold a blanket around him, and putting him in bed 
allow him to be quiet for a few minutes. In this way he will be 
made dry without extra fatigue. A few long strokes with a soft 
towel will then dry him thoroughly, and the wrappings may then 
be removed. If the bath is to be soon repeated it is better not 
to put on the clothes, but to leave the patient folded in the dry 
sheet ready for the next plunge. 

Cold Baths — Cold baths are employed either to produce reac- 
tion, nervous shock or to reduce temperature. Cold water 
abstracts heat from the body and affects the internal organs 
through the nervous system. Upon first entering a cold bath 
there is experienced a sense of chilliness and depression. The 
pulse is quickened, but the temperature of the surface is lowered 
and the blood accumulates in the internal organs. A condition 
of reaction soon follows, with invigorated circulation, a feeling 
of warmth and exhilaration ; but if the bath be continued too long 
the coldness returns, with weakness of the pulse and general 
depression. A cold bath should not be given when the patient 
feels chilly, when there is free perspiration, when there is any 
inflammation or tendency to congestion of the internal organs, or 
during menstruation. If shivering comes on during a cold bath 
the patient should at once be taken out and put to bed, heat 
applied and stimulants given if the shivering continues. The 
cold bath is sometimes used as a tonic in cases of debility, but 
there must be a certain amount of vigor present to render it endur- 
able. For this purpose it is best taken in the morning, and should 
be at once followed by vigorous rubbing and gentle exercise. 
The head must be submerged first and the bath continued only 
long enough to produce reaction — not more than five minutes. 
The colder the water, the sooner the reaction takes place. After 
any soothing bath the patient should be kept quiet ; after a stim- 
ulating bath brisk friction and exercise are called for. 

Cold Bath for Relief of Temperature — The cold bath is a most 
speedy and effective way of bringing down high temperature. 
It may be lowered from one to five or six degrees. The shock of 
sudden immersion in cold water may be avoided by beginning 
with the tepid bath and gradually cooling as much as desired by 
adding cold water or ice. The temperature of the body must be 



132 HEALTH AT HOME. 

taken in the rectum and the patient removed from the bath before 
it has reached the desired point, for the temerature will continue 
to fall for some time afterward, until the heat of the interior and 
exterior of the body becomes equalized. 

The Wet Pack — Another method of applying cold for the 
reduction of temperature is the wet pack. To prepare for this, first 
put three or four blankets on the bed, over these a sheet wrung out 
in cold water. Let the patient lie on this and fold the sheet over 
him, tucking it in well on both sides from the neck to the ankles, 
but not around the feet. The blankets are then folded over him 
one by one, and the patient left in them from thirty minutes to 
two or three hours, as may be needed. Give plenty of water to 
drink, and keep the feet warm. This form of bath will usually 
be very comfortable to the patient and he will often fall asleep 
while in the pack. It will render the skin moist, subdue the rest- 
lessnesss and delirium and reduce the fever. When the pack is 
removed dry off the patient quickly and wrap him in warm, dry 
blankets for some hours. The same effect may be produced by 
applying towels wrung out in ice water, dry enough not to drip, 
one after another from the neck downward. When the feet are 
reached begin over again at the head and renew each in succes- 
sion continuing as long as is necessary. 

Sponge Bath — Cold or tepid sponging often gives relief to a 
feverish condition. Sponge downwards always, and wrap the 
patient still wet in a warm blanket and leave him undisturbed for 
an hour or two. Alcohol added to the water makes it more cool- 
ing by its rapid evaporation, or the alcohol alone may be used for 
sponging, after which do not dry the patient. 

The Hot Bath — A general warm or hot bath is used to produce 
perspiration, soothe pain and relax spasm. The effect of warm or 
hot water is at first agreeable. Elimination of waste matter from 
the lungs and through the skin is increased, and the circulation 
accelerated. A very hot bath excites and stimulates the nervous 
system, while a warm or tepid bath rather calms and soothes it. 
If the water is too hot or the bath too long continued languor, 
giddiness or f aintness may result. Keep the head cool and out of 
the hot water. An invalid should never be left alone in the water 
and must be taken out at once if any sign of faintness appears, 
art, and consists of all that pertains to the knowledge and preven- 



HEALTH AT HOME. 133 

A hot bath should not be given during the menstrual period nor 
during the last stage of pregnancy. Immersion in water as hot 
as can be borne is useful in sprains during their earliest stage. 

The Foot Bath — This is usually given to relieve the head and 
should be given as hot as possible. If the patient is able to sit up 
in a chair see that he is warmly wrapped up and a blanket should 
cover both the patient and the tub. L,et the water come nearly 
to the knees. Adding mustard to the water will increase the 
effect. The foot bath can be given in bed when necessary. Have 
the bed well protected, turn up the clothes from the foot of the 
bed, direct the patient to lie upon the back, and bend the knees, 
when the feet can be placed in a bowl of water. Have the bowl 
firmly balanced, cover with a blanket, and let the feet remain 
from a quarter to half an hour, keeping the water hot in the 
meantime. Then dry them well and either wrap in flannel or put 
on woolen stockings. 

The Sitz or Hip Bath — Immerse the patient in hot water from 
the waist to the knees and cover with blankets. The water 
should be kept hot and the bath continued for twenty minutes. 
The object of this form of bath is to excite the menstrual flow, 
and it should be given as nearly as can be calculated at the time 
when the flow would naturally appear. 

Hot Air and Vapor Baths — Where the patient is not able to 
leave the bed, this form of bath may be employed by using hot 
bricks wrapped in wet flannel. The bedclothes must be lifted 
above the patient and supported by a "cradle" or a stout string 
stretched from one corner of the bed diagonally across to the 
other corner. The patient is first sponged off with tepid water 
until there is free perspiration. The hot bricks are then intro- 
duced under the bedclothing, and the blankets are then tucked 
in so as to render the space as nearly air tight as possible. When 
the patient can leave the bed the best method of employing the 
hot air or vapor bath is by the use of the Bath Cabinet. When 
the bath cabinet cannot be obtained the following is a fair sub- 
stitute: let the patient, entirely without clothing, sit in a 
wicker chair, with the feet on a low stool. Cover him with 
several blankets, and under the chair place a spirit lamp, with a 
large wick, or a small oil stove. As the heat increases, let the 



134 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

patient drink freely of water until perspiration becomes profuse, 
then place him in a general bath at a temperature of 75° to 80°, 
and add cold water to the bath until it becomes cool. Remove 
patient and dry thoroughly ; keep him warm afterwards. 

Medicated Baths — Both liquid and vapor baths may be medica- 
ted. Remedial agents may be vaporized in the bath cabinet and 
will be readily taken up by the skin. An acid vapor may be pro- 
duced by evaporating vinegar. 

Acid Bath — Nitric acid, one and one-half fluid ounces ; hydro- 
chloric aid, one to three ounces; warm water, thirty quarts. This 
should be given in a wooden tub. 

Alkaline Bath — Add half a pound of carbonate of soda to fifteen 
gallons of hot water. 

Sulphur Bath — A sulphur bath is prepared by adding to each 
gallon of water twenty grains of sulphuret of potassium. This 
must be given in a wooden or porcelain lined vessel, as the sul- 
phur will discolor most metals. This form of bath may be bene- 
ficial in rheumatism and also some forms of skin disease, but in 
this case not usually until the acute stage has passed, as it tends to 
aggravate the rash. In all cases of skin disease rain water 
should be used ; or if this is not obtainable soften the hard water 
by the addition of soda, borax, bran, starch or gelatine. The 
skin should not be rubbed in skin disease, but dabbed dry with 
soft towels. 

Bran Bath — To make a bran bath boil a pound of bran for a 
quarter of an hour, strain off the fluid and add it to the bath water. 
Bran is sometimes added without boiling to the bath water, but 
this must not be done in a stationary tub, for the bran will clog up 
the drain pipes. 

Starch Bath — Take half a pound of starch and mix it with two 
quarts of water before adding it to the bath. 

Salt Bath — A salt bath is usually given cold for tonic effect. 
Kither sea salt may be used or a solution of rock salt in the pro- 
portion of one pound of salt to four gallons of water. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 135 



MASSAGE. 

Massage is, in the hands of a skilled operator, a valuable mode 
of treatment, though it has fallen into some disrepute by being 
allowed to pass largely into the hands of ' 'quacks," so-called 
"magnetic healers" and others of that class, whose pretensions 
have degraded everything connected with them. Massage, in its 
proper place, however, has so much of value that we here give a 
few of the scientific principles upon which it is based, and sug- 
gest certain conditions in which benefit may be obtained from its 
use. Massage will to a considerable extent take the place of 
active exercise, keeping the muscles strong and supple. It 
develops heat at the points of contact, elevating the general tem- 
perature and dilating the blood vessels. It furthers absorption, 
accelerating the motion of the blood currents, removing waste 
matters, and thereby promoting nutrition. It has a sedative 
effect upon the nerves, though in some instances it seems to 
excite rather than to soothe. Insomnia and neuralgia can often 
be relieved by it, and irritation of the spine to some extent con- 
trolled. In the treatment of nervous disorders it is often com- 
bined with rest, strict regulation of the diet and the application 
of electricity. The best results from its use are found in chronic 
joint affections, and thickenings from inflammatory deposits. 

Methods of Applying Massage — Massage consists of a 
peculiar kneading of the underlying muscles, and is entirely dis- 
tinct from friction, which touches only the external tissues, but 
it is often combined with friction ; also with the ' ' Swedish move- 
ments, ' ' active and passive. The word, then, as commonly used 
may be understood to embrace all forms of manipulation. The 
performance of massage requires the use of hands that are at once 
strong and soft, the motions smooth and even, never jerky. The 
work should be done from the wrists and not from the shoulders, 
and you want equal flexibility and freedom of action in both 
hands. All movements should begin slowly and gently, and their 
force and frequency gradually increased. A very tender spot 
can hardly be touched at first, but after a little skillful handling an 
amount of force can be employed which would have seemed 



136 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

incredible. The whole hand, and not merely the ends of the 
fingers should be used. In massage proper the work is chiefly 
performed by the ball of the thumb and the palm of the hand. 
Each muscle is kneaded and rolled with a carefully graded 
force. Begin at the extremities and work toward the trunk. If 
the feet are cold keep at them until they are quite warm before 
going on. Take up each group of muscles systematically, com- 
press, roll and relax, advancing by degrees, so that each handful 
of muscle may include part of what has been previously treated. 
Never stretch the tissues in the opposite directions at the same 
time. 

Skill in massage and manipulation can only be attained by 
long practice and careful observance of the rules and principles 
above mentioned, but that skill once gained will be found of great 
value in the treatment of many forms of disease. 

Friction — Friction should act only upon the skin. If counter- 
irritation is desired a coarse towel or a brush is better than the 
hand. Friction should be toward the center of circulation, to 
assist the venous currents. Thus on a limb the heaviest strokes 
should be upward and the returning ones much lighter. 

Passive Motions — Passive motions are made without any effort 
on the part of the patient. When there is partial control on the 
part of the patient of the muscular action the operator either 
helps or hinders the effort of the patient, being careful not to over- 
tax his little strength, and the exercises are then known as assis- 
tive or resistive. Such movements are applied together with 
massage to strengthen weakened muscles and break up adhesions 
in diseased or stiffened joints. Care must be taken, however, not 
to overdo this form of exercise. 



THE URINE. 

The kidneys form the chief channel for the elimination of the 
waste matters from the body. These are two bean-shaped bodies, 
each about four inches long, lying in the small of the back, one 
on either side of the spine. The urine as it is excreted by the 
kidneys passes through two connecting tubes, the ureters, into the 



HEALTH AT HOME. 137 

bladder, whence it is periodically discharged through another 
tube, the urethra. The capacity of the bladder when fully dis- 
tended is about three pints. The urethra in the adult female is 
an inch and a half or two inches in length. 

Urine, in a healthy condition, consists of some 960 parts water 
to 40 parts of solid matter, principally urea, the chief waste pro- 
duct of animal life. The average quantity of urine passed in 
twenty-four hours is two and a half pints, or forty fluid ounces. 
This will contain 450 to 600 grains of urea, besides a small propor- 
tion of uric acid, and various phosphates, urates and chlorides. 
The urine is transparent, of pale amber color, having a character- 
istic aroma, an acid reaction and a specific gravity of about 1.02. 

Variations of Urine in Health — There may be consider- 
able variation from the above description, even strictly within the 
limits of health. The quantity will vary in proportion to the 
amount of fluid taken into the system, and to the activity of the 
skin. Where there is free perspiration there is left less water to 
be carried off by the kidneys, and consequently, the urine is less 
abundant, darker in color, and of greater specific gravity, owing 
to the increased proportion of solid matters. The specific gravity 
may vary from 1.01 to 1.025 without indicating any departure 
from health. The reaction may for a time become neutral or 
even alkaline after a meal, owing to the character of the food 
taken. Cloudiness of the urine may be due to the presence of 
earthy phoshpates, or to mixed urates of sodium, potassium, cal- 
cium and magnesium, or to mucus from the bladder or urethra. 

Variations of Urine in Disease — The same causes of 
variation may exist to an extreme degree in sickness. The quan- 
tity passed in twenty-four hours may be diminished to two 
ounces or increased to 200 ounces. The color may be affected 
either by diminution of the normal coloring matters or by the addi- 
tion of abnormal ones. Opacity may be caused by the presence 
of pus. Blood gives a characteristic smoke hue to acid urine; 
when the urine is alkaline the color is more nearly red. Urine con- 
taining blood enough to be readily recognizable as such probably 
contains albumin also. Bile gives a greenish tinge that is often 
seen with jaundice. In some cases a sufficient amount of fat may 
be found to give the urine a distinctly viscid or glutinous consist- 



138 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

ency. In hysteria, alcoholism, anemia and convalescence from 
acute diseases, the urine may be expected to be pale and abun- 
dant. In the early stage of acute fever the specific gravity is 
likely to be high, as a large amount of solid matter is excreted. 
Lowered specific gravity is most significant when it is accompa- 
nied by diminished quantity of urine. In diabetes mellitus the 
specific gravity of the urine may be as high as 1.05, while at the 
same time the quantity passed may be largely increased; this is 
due to the presence of large quantities of sugar. In the disease 
known as diabetes insipidus, or polyuria, the urine is very abun- 
dant in quantity and of a pale color, but it contains no sugar or 
albumin, and is of low specific gravity. 

Effect of Drugs on the Urine — Certain drugs produce 
special effects upon the character of the urine. Turpentine taken 
internally gives to the urine an odor resembling that of violets. 
It may increase the flow or possibly cause retention. Spanish fly 
may also cause retention, or slow and painful passage of the urine. 
Dark smoky urine is one of the early symptoms of poisoning by 
carbolic acid or iodoform. Santonin gives a bright yellow color; 
rhubarb or senna a reddish yellow; cubebs, copaiba, and san- 
dalwood oil, each imparts its peculiar odor. Medicines which 
increase the quantity of urine are called diuretics. 

Value of Observations of Urine — From the foregoing 
remarks it will be seen that the character of the urine and its 
quantity may furnish invaluable information of the development 
and progress of disease, and it follows that those who have the 
care of the sick intrusted to them should have some knowledge 
of the methods of making the simpler observations and tests of 
the urine. 

Methods of Observing the Urine — The observers should 
note, first, the frequency of micturition, or passing of water; 
second, the quantity passed each time and the total amount in 
twenty-four hours ; and third, any evident peculiarity. If urine 
is passed frequently, but in small quantity each time, it indicates 
either an over-distended condition of the bladder or irritation of 
the bladder or urethra. The distinction between the two condi- 
tions can usually be made by carefully examining the urine to see 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 139 

whether it contains mucus or pus, or possibly blood. If so the 
bladder or urethra is the seat of inflammation. If the urine is 
clear, careful inspection of the lower portion of the abdomen and 
gentle tapping over the location of the bladder will indicate 
whether or not it is distended. The total amount of urine passed 
in twenty-four hours can be ascertained by saving the whole quan- 
tity and then measuring, or the amount passed each time may be 
noted and the sum of such amounts will give the total for the 
twenty- four hours. 

To note any peculiarities of the urine a small quantity should be 
placed in a tall narrow glass, or test tube, and by holding up to 
the light its appearance can be noted and any evident departure 
from the normal may be detected. After such examination the 
specimen should be allowed to stand for several hours and then 
re-examined for any subsequent deposit or sediment. Remember 
to have the glass perfectly clean before placing the urine in it. 
The chemical reaction of the urine may be tested with litmus 
paper; if acid the urine will turn the blue paper red; if alkaline it 
will turn the red to blue ; if neutral it will have no effect upon 
either the blue or red paper. 

Urine having an acid or neutral reaction may turn alkaline 
after standing, but that which is alkaline in the beginning never 
becomes acid. 

Foreign matters in the urine may be either sediment, or in solu- 
tion. The most common sediment is composed of urates and 
phosphates. They fall as a white or pink deposit at the bottom 
of the vessel after the urine has stood several hours. They may 
be distinguished from each other by boiling a little of the urine 
in a test tube over the flame of a lamp, the urates being dis- 
solved by the heat, while the phosphates are precipitated. The 
phosphates may in turn be dissolved by adding a few drops of 
nitric acid to the urine. Mucus in the urine is not affected by 
heat, acid or alkalies. Pus is deposited as an opaque white sedi- 
ment, sinking rapidly as long as there is an acid reaction to the 
urine, and no mucus present, in which it may be suspended. 
It resembles urates, but is not, like them, dissolved on the applica- 
tion of heat. In Bright's disease albumin in present, and often 
casts of the minute passages of the interior of the kidneys are 



140 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

found. These casts can only be seen by careful examination of 
the urine under the microscope. 

Test for Albumin — The presence of albumin in the urine can 
generally be detected by heating a small amount of urine in a test 
tube. If the urine becomes cloudy or a heavy deposit of whitish 
material occurs, albumin is probably present, but since phosphates 
are also precipitated by heat, a further test is needed. After 
heating, a few drops of nitric acid are added to the solution, and 
if there are phosphates present they will at once disappear, leav- 
ing the urine clear, while albumin will remain as a dense white 
precipitate. Remember that heat precipitates albumin and the 
phosphates, while the urates are dissolved by it; nitric acid pre- 
cipitates albumen and the urates, but dissolves the phosphates. 

Test for Sugar — Pale urine produced in large quantity and of a 
high specific gravity probably contains sugar. The tests com- 
monly employed for sugar are of too complicated a nature to be 
carried out in the home. The following simple test will, how- 
ever, enable you to determine whether or not sugar is present in a 
suspected specimen. To the specimen of urine, half filling a 
clean bottle, add a few crumbs of dry yeast and set in a warm 
place for twelve hours, corking tightly. At the end of that time, 
if sugar is present, fermentation will be found, together with the 
development of carbonic acid gas. 

Suppression of Urine — Suppression of urine is an absence 
of the flow of urine, due to a failure of the kidneys to act. It is 
a rather uncommon condition, and is found complicating some 
diseases, and also as a symptom of some forms of poisoning. 

Retention of the Urine — Retention of the urine is that con- 
dition in which the bladder fails to expel its contents. This may 
have various causes. The bladder may be paralyzed or the 
senses dulled, so that there is no desire to pass urine, even when 
the bladder is full, or there may be a nervous contraction of the 
urethra, resulting in an inability to do so, even when the incli- 
nation is felt. When no urine has been passed for some time, 
if there is pain on pressure over the bladder, a dull instead of a 
clear sound when you lightly tap the abdomen over the bladder, 
and if the outline of the bladder can be distinctly felt, it may 
safely be assumed that there is retention of the urine. Hot appli- 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 141 

cations over the bladder or sponging with hot water between the 
thighs will sometimes relieve it, especially in children. 

Incontinence of Urine — Incontinence of urine occurs when 
there is weakness of the neck of the bladder, so that it is unable 
to retain its contents. It is most frequent in children. Apparent 
incontinence may be really retention, with an overflow caused by 
the overdistention of the bladder and consequent muscular strain. 
In all cases of incontinence of urine special care is needed to keep 
the parts clean and prevent excoriation by frequent bathing and 
the application of soothing ointments. Rubber urinals are often 
of value. 

The Use of the Catheter — When it becomes necessary to 
use the catheter, proceed as follows : oil the instrument with the 
finger. Have the patient lie flat upon the back, with the thighs 
slightly separated. In the case of a male patient introduce the 
end of the catheter into the urethra and gradually push it along 
the canal until it enters the bladder. In introducing the catheter 
never use force. Take plenty of time and use gentle, firm pres- 
sure. In the case of the female patient, first introduce the finger 
into the vagina, and by gently pressing upwards the urethra may 
be felt between the finger and the bones forming the pubic arch. 
Then gently slide the point of the catheter along the finger, using 
it as a guide until it enters the urethra. Do not push it into the 
bladder far enough to strike the walls. 

As soon as the cavity of the bladder is reached the urine will 
begin to flow into the vessel provided for its reception. After 
the bladder is emptied withdraw the catheter as gently as it was 
introduced. A distended bladder should not be too rapidly 
emptied by the catheter, as inflammation may follow the sudden 
collapse of its walls. When the bladder is very full draw only a 
portion of the contents at the first introduction of the catheter, 
and repeat the operation soon after. After each use of the cath- 
eter it should be thoroughly cleaned and disinfected. Let a 
stream of water run through it, first from the eye of the instru- 
ment downward, that any sediment may not be driven down into 
the point. 



142 HEALTH AT HOME. 



THE OBSERVATION OF SYMPTOMS. 

The distinguishing characteristics of a good nurse are : ability 
to observe accurately and recognize the meaning of various con- 
ditions of, and changes of condition in, the person of whom she 
has the care. These conditions are called symptoms. Symp- 
toms may be classified as subjective, those which are evident to 
the patient only, objective, which may be seen and recognized by 
outside obesrvers, and simulated, those which are feigned for 
purposes of deceit, either to excite sympathy or from other motives. 
It is often very difficult to distinguish between false and true 
symptoms; often genuine suffering may be mistaken for fraud or 
hysteria, if the usual objective manifestations are absent. As a 
rule entirely subjective symptoms may be regarded with some 
degree of suspicion, as disease without some outward sign is com- 
paratively rare. 

The degree of intensity of all symptoms, the time and order of 
appearance and the combinations of symptoms are to be observed. 
Often a symptom which by itself would be insignificant, becomes 
in its relations to others of grave importance. Do not rely too 
much upon the memory, but keep a little memorandum book in 
which the facts may be noted. 

Points to be Observed — Attitude and expression are some- 
times very characteristic, giving valuable indications. A sufferer 
instinctively takes the position most calculated for ease. Thus, 
when one lung is affected the patient lies on that side, in order 
that the healthy one, which has to do most of the work, may have 
the greatest freedom of motion. Lying on the back, with the 
knees drawn up so as to relax the abdominal muscles, suggests 
peritonitis. With colic, on the contrary, you may find the 
patient lying on the abdomen, as pressure relieves pain of that 
character. When a patient who has lain persistently upon his 
back turns over to the side it may be looked upon as a sign of 
improvement. There is no surer sign that the distress of dyspnea 
is removed than for a patient who has been forced to sit, to lie 
down and compose for sleep. laying quietly is usually a favorable 
sign, but in acute rheumatism the patient is quiet because the 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 143 

least motion causes pain. Again, extreme weakness may make 
it too great an exertion to move. Restlessness is an unfavorable 
sign in organic disease. Slipping down towards trie foot of the 
bed is often a very bad sign. A pinched and anxious look on 
the face is often an indication of the advent of serious conditions, 
while a tranquil expression is usually a favorable symptom. 
Sudden lack of expression, apathy or immobility of the features 
is a bad symptom. In facial paralysis, expression will be totally 
absent from half the face, or the healthy side will be drawn and 
distorted. Some painful abdominal diseases are accompanied by 
a peculiar smile, risus sardonicus, caused by contraction of the 
muscles of the mouth. Any such change of the features is note- 
worthy, as is also extreme thinness or swelling of the lips and 
excessive action of the nares. The most important signs of dis- 
ease are the pulse, respiration and temperature ; these are some- 
times called the three vital signs. The three are intimately asso- 
ciated, and correspondingly affected. Note carefully the fre- 
quenc3% rhythm and force of the pulse, and its relation to the other 
symptoms. The rate and any peculiarity of the respiration is to 
be observed ; note whether it is most abdominal or thoracic, if reg- 
ular or irregular, easy or labored, and whether or not it is accom- 
panied by pain. There is no pain in disease of lung substance 
alone; when the pleura is involved, there is sharp pain. In 
bronchitis there is difficult breathing, with more or less muscular 
effort; in pneumonia it is rapid, but perfectly easy and quiet. 
Dyspnea is caused by various conditions. There is one very 
peculiar form of it known as Cheyne-Stokes respiration, in which 
the inspirations, at first short and shallow, become by degrees 
deep and difficult up to a certain point, and then more and more 
superficial until they entirely cease. After a pause of from a 
quarter to half a minute the same series of phenomena are 
repeated in the same order. This is a curious and generally fatal 
symptom. 

Cautious respiration indicates lung trouble of some kind. Oed- 
ema, or the presence of fluid in the air passages is show by rat- 
tling and shortness of breath. The sounds produced by the pass- 
age of air through the fluid in the air cells, bronchi, or cavities, 
are known as rales. 



144 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

Cough — Nearly all diseases of the respiratory organs are 
accompanied by cough. This is caused by irritation of the air 
passages. Matters coughed up are called sputa. Cough not 
accompanied by expectoration is said to be dry. The character 
of the expectoration varies with different diseases. In bronchitis 
it is first simply mucus, later it may become purulent, and in 
chronic cases it is thick and yellow. The sputum of consump- 
tion is at first tenacious and rope-like, sometimes frothy, and at an 
advanced stages becomes purulent and streaked with blood. With 
pneumonia the expectoration is for the most part scanty ; after a 
certain stage it has a characteristic rust color and a tenacious, 
tough quality. In children the sputum is often swallowed; if 
thrown up mixed with food it may be known to come from the 
stomach. Note the character of the cough, whether it is hard 
or loose, choking, short, incessant or paroxysmal. Note also the 
frequency, duration and intensity of paroxysms, and if followed 
by exhaustion or perspiration. The peculiar ring of whooping 
cough is well known and cannot be mistaken. In spasmodic 
contraction of the glottis there is a peculiar crowing sound. 
Hiccough is a spasmodic contraction of the diaphragm; ordi- 
narily it is of no importance, but an important and unfavorable 
symptom when it occurs toward the close of an acute disease. 

Chills — If a patient complains of cold without apparent reason, 
take his temperature at once. A sense of coldness along the 
spine is often the precursor of a chill, and the temperature will 
be found elevated rather than lowered. Chills or rigors are ner- 
vous phenomena ; although the patient is shivering the temperat- 
ure rises, because the capillaries are so much contracted that the 
blood cannot get to the surface to be cooled. High fever always 
follows a genuine chill. Chills may be the first symptom of 
acute disease; if they occur in the course of inflammation they 
probably indicate suppuration ; in malaria, chills are severe and 
prolonged, but not dangerous. The temperature should be taken 
both during and soon after the chill. When fever falls there is 
apt to be profuse perspiration. Extreme weakness and other causes 
often produce the same result. The degree of moisture or dryness 
of the skin is always an important point. A high temperature 
with a wet skin is much more dangerous than the same temper- 
ature with a dry skin. 



HKAI/TH AT HOMK. 145 

Change in the Skin — The skin affords many conspicuous 
signs of disease. Variations from a healthy color will at once 
attract attention. The yellow tinge of jaundice is well known, 
indicating disordered action of the liver. With anemia there is 
a peculiar paleness; in Bright's disease a waxy complexion. 
A red color indicates an excess or suffusion of blood in the skin. 
A cyanosed or bluish shade means imperfect purification of the 
blood. In disease of the lungs there is often high color of one 
cheek alone. Sudden change of color may give warning of syn- 
cope or fainting. Paleness about the mouth, with compressed or 
slightly parted lips, indicates nausea. Any eruption or rash 
occurring on the body is of special importance, and its character 
and location should be carefully noted. Scaling off of the cuticle 
is called desquamation. This takes place generally in the course 
of scarlet fever, and some other diseases. The patient will gen- 
erally call attention to any local irritation or unnatural sensation 
such as burning, tingling, itching, numbness or crawling. Early 
signs of bed sores cannot be too carefully watched for. The con- 
dition of wounds must be carefully watched; blushing or puffiness 
of the surrounding parts, sudden stops or alteration of any dis- 
charge from a wound must be noted and the cause sought for. 

Symptoms About the Eye — The eye often gives signs of gen- 
eial disease. It may appear unduly prominent or sunken; there 
may be altered color or inflammation of the mucous membrane, 
disturbances of or loss of vision. Observe the size of the pupils, 
whether one or both are contracted or dilated. A condition of 
cross-eyes, coming on during the course of brain disease is an 
unfavorable symptom. Note any swelling of the eyelids droop- 
ing or tremulous movement of them, fear of light, apparent 
weakness, and over secretion of tears. 

Symptoms About the Ear— -The sense of hearing may be unnat- 
urally acute or, more common and less significant, defective. 
The former condition sometimes precedes delirium. Noises and 
ringing in the ears may result from congestion of the cerebral 
blood vessels. Some drugs, notably quinine, produce this effect. 
Any discharge from the ear should be noted, and changes in the 
character and amount observed. 



146 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

Alterations in the Sense of Taste — Taste, like other special 
senses, may be impaired or altered. With a disordered liver, 
there is often a bitter taste; in pulmonary consumption, there may 
be a taste of salt; and when taking some medicines a decided 
metallic flavor. The sense of taste may be entirely destnryed for 
a time. It is rarely overacute. 

Symptoms about the Tongue — This organ offers many valuable 
indications, for it sympathizes not only with the digestive organs, 
but to some extent, with the whole system. Note if it is dry or 
moist, clean or coated, swollen, bitten or indented by the teeth. 
With fever the tongue is likely to be furred ; but this is not 
always a sign of disease, for some people in good health have a 
furred tongue constantly, or it may be produced by slight consti- 
pation. The fur may be white, yellow, or any shade of brown to 
nearly black. When fur begins to grow thin, and clean up from 
the edges of a fevered tongue, it is a better indication of improve- 
ment than when it clears off in patches or rapidly, leaving a raw 
or glossy surface. In scarlet fever there is often a characteristic 
appearance known as the "strawberry tongue," a bright red 
with the little swollen glands showing prominently through the 
fur. The swollen, livid tongue of typhoid and typhus fever is 
sometimes called the ' 'mulberry- ton gue. " 

Sympto?ns about the Mouth and Throat — Notice the odor of the 
breath and the state of the gums and teeth. Looseness of the 
teeth, and soreness of the gums are to be watched for when a 
patient is taking considerable quantities of mercury. Salivation, 
or overabundant secretion of saliva, is caused by a number of 
different drugs, and sometimes occurs spontaneously. At the 
beginning of acute disease the secretion of saliva is often dimin- 
ished in quantity and thickened. When there is high fever the 
teeth, unless well cared for, may become covered with accum- 
ulations of dark brown matter known as sordes. Inflammation 
of the mouth occurs mostly in the case of infants, but may be 
seen in adults in an advanced stage of disease. White patches 
in the throat are always ominous. Slight sore throat often accom- 
panies indigestion or a cold. 

The Appetite — This is always an important point. Nearly all 
acute diseases cause loss of appetite. An increased appetite may 



HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 147 

sometimes be found, even with an inability to retain the food 
taken into the stomach. The appetite may be perverted, with a 
desire for improper food, but as a rule a longing for particular 
things shows a need of them which ought to be gratified. Observe 
with special care how much food the patient takes, what kinds 
of food are most acceptable, and, as far as possible, the effects of 
each. 

Thirst — It may remain when the appetite is entirely lost. 
Thirst almost always exists in acute, but is seldom seen in chronic 
disease. 

Nausea and Vomiting — Nausea is a very common symptom. It 
is usually relieved by vomiting. Note whether the nausea is per- 
sistent, whether the vomiting is accompanied by straining or pain, 
the interval since taking food or medicine, and the amount and 
character of the vomited matter. This will generally be undi- 
gested food; it may contain bile, blood, or even fecal matter. 
The presence of the latter constitutes stercoraceous vomiting. An 
appearance like that of coffee grounds is sometimes caused by 
the admixture of a small quantity of blood in the vomited matter. 
The "black vomit" of yellow fever has something of this charac- 
ter. 

The Stools — When blood is present to any extent in vomited 
matter it is usually found also in the stools, giving them a dark 
color and a tarry consistency. Some drugs, as iron and bismuth, 
will blacken the stools. With jaundice, they will be very light, 
clay-colored. It is important to note the frequency and quantity 
of the evacuations, whether solid or liquid, any unnatural odor 
or appearance, and the presence of mucus, pus, blood or worms. 
Tenesmus, a constant desire to empty the bowels, with pain and 
inability to do so, is a distinguishing symptom of dysentery. 
Constipation is very common and is often produced by overuse 
of cathartics or injections. Diarrhea may exist even with impac- 
tion of the feces in the rectum, the patient having frequent small 
movements without unloading the bowels. What is passed under 
such circumstances will be either fluid or small, dark, hard 
masses, known as scybala. This is important to remember, for 
one is too apt to have the idea that the patient's bowels are all 
right if they move daily, without regard to the quantity passed. 



148 HEAI/fH AT HOME. 

Evacuations of gas, rumblings of the intestines and tympanites, 
distention of the abdomen by gas, are all points to be noted. 

Hcmorragc — Hemorrhage from any organ is always more or 
less important. Even a simple nose-bleed may be an initial symp- 
tom of typhoid fever. The color, quantity and general character 
of the blood should be carefully observed. 

Pain — Pain is always a subjective symptom, though most 
often accompanied by other symptoms which are objective. Pain 
implies life and reaction, and its absence is not always a favor- 
able symptom. With extreme degree of shock there is no pain. 
Sudden cessation of pain during the progress of severe organic 
disease generally means approaching death. Pain may be inflam- 
matory or neuralgic; the former is increased by pressure over the 
point of pain, the latter is relieved by it. Get the patient to 
describe the kind of pain he feels, as well as to locate it; to tell 
whether it is acute, dull, aching, stinging, burning, steady, 
spasmodic, etc. Exaggerated sensibility is called hyperesthesia ; 
diminished or lost sensibility, anaesthesia. Either may be gen- 
eral or local. Partial anaesthesia is often accompanied by loss of 
muscular power, paralysis. 

Nervous Syjnptoms — Incoherence of speech, muttering, slow- 
ness of comprehension, loss of interest in things about them, 
unusual irritability of temper, difficulty of swallowing, a 
tendency to spill food or drop things and picking at the bed- 
clothes are all symptoms of gravity Involuntary muscular con- 
tractions vary from slight spasms, such as cramps, to severe con- 
vulsions. Twitching of the muscles and many little nervous 
motions may be so classed. Note the frequency and persistency 
of the motions, whether the convulsions are general or confined 
to one part of the body, whether or not the patient is unconscious, 
whether the attack is sudden, and the mental state before and 
after it. 

Disorders of Consciousness — Under this head are included all 
sorts of delusions and hallucinations, delirium and stupor. 
Note the kind of delirium, whether quiet, busy or maniacal ; 
whether persistent or only occasional and when it is most violent. 
See if the patient can be roused from stupor. Complete insensi- 
bility, from which the patient cannot be awakened, is known as 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 149 

coma. Profound coma, which does not terminate within twenty- 
four hours, may be regarded as almost certainly fatal. Contin- 
uous sleeplessness, with partial consciousnes s, constitutes coma 
vigil — also an almost invariably fatal symptom. Sleeplessness 
is always a dangerous symptom, in proportion to its duration. 
It is important to note how much sleep a patient gets, at what 
time he sleeps, and whether it is quiet or disturbed, the occur- 
rence of dreams, talking in the sleep, etc. A patient will often 
think he has been awake all night when, in fact, he has had 
several hours of sleep without realzing it. 



GENERAL DISEASES. 



The principles of medicine constitute what may be called Med- 
ical Science. The practice of medicine is the use of the medical 
art, and consists of all that pertains to the knowledge of and pre- 
vention and cure of the diseases which may be met with. 

Disease may be defined as a deviation or alteration in the func- 
tions, properties or structure of some tissue or organ whereby its 
office is no longer performed in accordance with the natural stan- 
dard. 

Pathology is the study of disease and explains the origin, cause, 
nature and history of the various diseases to which man is liable. 

The causes of disease may be divided into internal, external, 
ordinary, specific, primary, secondary, predisposing and exciting. 
Examples of internal causes are : sickness caused from overwork 
of the brain, long continued emotional excitement or the concen- 
tration of the mind on one idea ; of external causes : poisons, 
wounds and injuries. An ordinary cause is one to which all are 
more or less exposed, as changes in the atmosphere. Specific 
causes are those producing special diseases, such as typhoid fever, 
yellow fever, smallpox and cholera. A primary cause is any 
blow or severe hurt. A secondary cause is such a one as blood 
poisoning resulting from a diseased kidney. The disease is in the 
kidney, but as a secondary result comes the blood poisoning. A 
predisposing cause is a special liability to disease, and this is 
usually inherited. Exciting causes are those giving rise to dis- 
ease in those already predisposed to certain diseases, as persons 
predisposed to rheumatism on being exposed to certain changes 
in the atmosphere have an attack of the disease. 

The history of disease includes all the symptoms and signs 
which may occur from the beginning to the end of the disease. 

Symptoms and signs are such alterations in the healthy func- 
tions as give evidence of the existence of a diseased condition or 
a function which is turned aside, and they may be either objec- 



HKAI/TH AT HOMK. 151 

tive or subjective. They are objective when noticed by an 
observer, such as redness or swelling; subjective when felt by the 
patient, such as pain or numbness. 

The ultimate and most important object of the study of medi- 
cine is to learn how to cure, relieve or prevent disease, and it 
must be borne in mind that this does not consist solely in the 
giving of drugs, but requires strict and faithful attention to nurs- 
ing, diet and hygiene. When the object is to prevent disease, 
such as smallpox, by vaccination, it is called preventive treat- 
ment. When disease is to be broken up, although already begun, 
such as aborting the chill of malaria, it is called abortive treat- 
ment. When the disease is allowed to run its natural course 
without attempting its removal, but being constantly on the alert 
for obstacles to its successful issue, such as the generally adopted 
plan of treating continued fevers, it is called expectant treatment. 
When the disease is incurable and the relief of suffering is the 
object it is called palliative treatment. When marked prostration 
and weakness are to be overcome it is called restorative treatment. 

Smallpox — Smallpox is an acute epidemic, contagious disease, 
known by severe pain in the back, vomiting and a fever lasting 
from three to four days, followed by an eruption, at first a simple 
pimple, then with a little blister on top of the pimple, and finally 
with matter or pus in the blister. When the matter or pus forms 
there is a second rise of fever, and complications are liable to 
occur at this time. A poison whose nature is unknown, but 
which maintains its power to give the disease for a long time, is 
the cause of the disease. The disease is contagious from the very 
first to the end of the sickness, although the stage when matter 
is forming in the pimples is the most dangerous time. One attack 
protects from another. Vaccination will absolutely prevent small- 
pox. 

Symptoms and Signs — The disease begins suddenly with a vio- 
lent chill, vomiting and agonizing pains in the back which shoot 
down the limbs. The fever will rise in a short time to 103° or 
104°. The pulse is full, strong and rapid, ranging from 100 to 
130 beats per minute. The face is red, the eyes bloodshot, the 
head aches and sleep is not possible. Delirium and convulsions 
occur at times. During the third day the eruption makes its 



152 HEAI/TH AT HOME). 

appearance, first upon the forehead and lips, and consisting of 
coarse red spots. With the appearance of the eruption the fever 
falls, all other symptoms are less severe and the patient feels quite 
comfortable. About the sixth day of the disease the little blisters 
form on the top of the pimples, and on the eighth day pus com- 
mences to form in the blisters. Each pimple is surrounded by a 
broad red baud, the face becomes swollen and the features dis- 
torted. As soon as the pus begins to form the fever rises again 
and the patient is even sicker than he was at first. A peculiar 
odor is noticed at this time. This is the most critical point of the 
disease, and is usually attended by severe delirium. This second 
fever subsides in three or four days in favorable cases. About 
the eleventh day pus runs from the blisters, and drying forms the 
scab or crust, which drops off about the twentieth day, leaving a 
red, glistening pit, which becomes white when the patient gets 
well. During the course of the second fever the patient may 
have inflammations of a serious character in any part of the body, 
such as inflammation of the covering of the lungs or of the lungs 
themselves, or d3^sentery may occur. As the patient gets nearly 
well boils and abscesses are very liable to form. Smallpox can- 
not be confounded with any other disease when the regular symp- 
toms occur — chill, vomiting, pain in the back and legs, high 
fever and rapid pulse, all growing better on the third day, when 
the eruption appears, first spots, then pimples, then blisters, then 
pus in the blisters, finally drying and forming crusts. 

Treatment — There is no medicine that will act on the disease 
itself, and therefore medicines must be given for the symptoms 
as they arise. The patient must be put to bed in a room entirely 
away from the rest of the family, and patient and nurse must be 
kept entirely to themselves. Allow no one else in the room for 
any purpose whatever. Should a person be taken sick with 
smallpox immediately have every other person who has been or 
will be near the sick one vaccinated ; this may not prevent the 
disease, but if not it will make it more mild. Do not allow 
strangers to even come near the house. During the first fever 
bathe the patient often in cool or cold water, relieve the headache 
by cold cloths or an ice bag placed on the head. The pain in 
the back will be severe, but do not try to relieve it by a mustard 
plaster or any counter-irritant, as the pocks come out much thicker 



HKAI/TH AT HOMK. 153 

where anything of the sort is used. As soon as any fever is 
noticed give to a child 12 years old and younger one tablet No. 
13 every three hours. To a person above the age of 12 give one 
tablet No. 13 every two hours. It the patient is very restless give 
one tablet No. 7 every two hours and one-half this dose to a child. 
For the second fever continue the use of No. 7 and drop No. 13 ; 
in its stead give to a child 12 years old or younger one tablet No. 
27 every three hours and to a person over 12 years of age give 
one tablet No. 27 every hour. 

The food during the entire course of the disease must be liquid 
and the patient must be carefully nursed. Read the chapters on 
hygiene and nursing on pp. 17 and 81 and follow the instruc- 
tions there given as carefully as you know how. After the scabs 
or crusts begin to form keep the patient well rubbed with No. 41. 
Should smallpox occur send for your physician and follow the 
instructions here given until he arrives ; then obey him to the very 
letter in everything. 

Erysipelas— St. Anthony's Fire— Erysipelas is an inflam- 
mation of the skin caused by a known germ and recognized by 
redness, swelling and pain. A person who has had one attack is 
liable to have the disease again. Erysipelas nearly always occurs 
upon the face and neck. 

Symptoms and Sig?is — The disease begins with a chill, followed 
by fever, which soon reaches 103° or 104° ; the pulse is from 100 
to 120, the tongue is coated, and sometimes there is vomiting. 
Some pain is present in the limbs, the nose bleeds, and very often 
diarrhea is noticed. The patient is often delirious, and if he is 
a person who has used alcoholic stimulants this delirium will very 
much resemble delirium tremens. Very soon after the chill red 
spots appear, which run together and spread. The skin is swol- 
len until it looks tight and shiny ; there is a sense of heat and 
tightness and a tingling sensation. The swelling is sometimes 
so great as to close the eyes. After four or five days the redness 
and swelling leave and the skin peels off somewhat. A symptom 
that is nearly always present is some disturbance of the stomach 
and digestion in general. The patient is nearly always quiet 
wakeful and restless. The patient will be a long time in recov- 
ering from this disease, for although the disease soon leaves he 



154 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

will not gain strength as rapidly as in recovery from many 
other diseases. 

Treatment — Put the patient to bed and open the bowels very 
thoroughly with No. 16. Feed entirely upon nourishing sick 
foods; for directions as to preparing see the chapter on Diet in 
Disease on p. 106. Wherever the redness and swelling occur rub 
carefully and thoroughly with No. 42. Give one tablet No. 27 
every hour; also give twenty drops fluid extract of pilocarpine 
every two hours. No other treatment will be needed. 

Dysentery — Bloody Flux — Dysentery is an acute inflam- 
mation of the mucous or lining membrane of the large intestine 
accompanied by fever and frequent small stringy and bloody 
stools. Dysentery is usually caused by the varying temperature of 
hot days and cool nights, by attacks of malaria and by the wrong 
sort of diet. It is always found in armies, jails and places where 
large bodies of men congregate and the hygienic surroundings 
are not of the best. 

Symptoms a?id Signs — Dysentery begins with some slight irreg- 
ularity of the bowels for a few days, and then appears a moderate 
diarrhea ; there is loss of appetite, some nausea, and very slight 
fever. This continues for two or three days, when the true symp- 
toms of dysentery begin. There is pain on pressure over the 
bowels, colicky'pains in the abdomen, burning pain in the rec- 
tum ; the desire to evacuate the bowels is almost constant ; the 
stools are scanty, stringy and bloody ; there is little or no odor to 
the stools ; the bowels move from five to twenty times in twenty- 
four hours; the urine is scanty and highly colored. The disease 
usually lasts about a week, and the patient becomes very thin and 
weak ; the pulse is somewhat feeble, and the face is drawn and 
peaked. The tongue is dry and very little coated. The skin 
becomes cool and rough ; the voice weak and hoarse. Then all 
these symptoms gradually become better and after a few weeks 
the patient is well again. 

Treatment — The diet must be carefully selected and should con- 
sist of broths, milk and soft foods. The patient should not leave 
the bed. Brandy or wine in moderate quantities will help. As 
soon as the patient leaves the stool it should be thoroughly disin- 
fected with carbolic acid and removed. Washing out the bowel with 



H3AI/TH AT HOME. 155 

injections of hot water will be a relief to the patient. As soon as 
yon are surejthat yonr patient has dysentery give three table- 
spooonfuls of castor oil. Two hours after the oil has been given 
give one^tablet No. 29, and give one tablet every two hours, day 
and night, ^until the disease is checked. After the dysentery is 
checked give one tablet No. 17 three times a day before meals 
and continue this until the patient has regained his normal 
strength. In this disease, as in all others, careful nursing will 
count^for much. 

Malarial Fever — Intermittent Fever — Fever and Ague 
— Swamp Fever — The poison which produces malarial fever 
is found^in certain places, and any person who remains for any 
length of time near such a place is liable to an attack of the fever. 
A person having malarial fever may come into a neighborhood 
or district where the disease is unknown and there will be no dan- 
ger of his giving the disease to others. Malarial fever is not con- 
tagious. The malarial poison grows in the soil and requires heat, 
moisture and air for its full development; hence we find the 
disease at its height in the swampy lands of the South. The 
poison seems to be stronger at night than during the day and is 
only found near the ground ; hence when in malaria infected dis- 
tricts it is safer to sleep in the second story of the house than on 
the ground floor. Attacks of malarial fever are more liable to 
occur in the spring and fall than at any other time. A patient 
who has had malaria once is liable to have it again, and there will 
be intervals during which there is little or no fever. The fever 
is known by a cold, a hot and a sweating stage, followed by an 
interval in which the patient is apparently well. There are a 
number of varieties; one has an attack of fever every day, one 
every other day, one the first and fourth days, one has weekly 
attacks and some attacks are irregular. 

Symptoms and Signs — Each attack has three stages — the cold, 
the hot and the sweating. 

The Cold Stage begins with lassitude, yawning, headache and 
some nausea, followed by a chill; the teeth chatter; the skin is 
pale ; the nails and lips are blue ; the skin has the so-called goose 
skin appearence; there is great thirst; and the fever rises to 
102° or 104°. These symptoms continue from a half hour to an 
hour. 



156 HKAI/TH AT HOMK. 

The Hot Stage begins gradually, the shivering ceasing and the 
skin becoming hot and flushed, the fever rising as high as 106° 
or more, the pulse is full and rapid; there is headache, nausea, 
intense thirst, drv, flushed, swollen skin and scanty urine. The 
hot stage lasts from one to eight or ten hours. 

The Sweati?ig Stage begins gradually, the sweat first appearing 
on the forehead, then spreading over the entire body ; the fever 
falls to almost normal, the pulse is less full, and not so rapid ; the 
headache is less, and a general feeling of comfort exists, the 
patient frequently falling asleep. The sweating lasts from one to 
four hours. After the sweating period there is a period when the 
patient is entirely well with the exception of a general feeling of 
weakness. After this comes another attack and the time between 
the attacks of fever is the same each instance. There is no diffi 
culty in naming the disease when the chill, fever and sweat 
occur. 

Treatment — When the cold stage begins give one teaspoonful 
of spirits of chloroform; this will make the other stages less 
severe. When the hot stage comes on give cool drinks and fre- 
quent cold sponge baths. When the sweating begins sponge- 
often with hot water, to which a small quantity of alum has been 
added. As soon as the sweating stops give to a child one tablet 
No. 9 every hour until a very free movement from the bowels 
occurs. To an adult give one tablet No. 16 every two hours until 
the bowels move freely. As soon as the bowels have moved give 
to a child 6 years old or younger one tablet No. 27 every three 
hours, and two hours before the next chill is expected give two 
tablets No. 27. To a child 6 to 12 years of age give one tablet 
No. 27 every two hours and two hours before the chill is expected 
give three tablets No. 27. To a person over the age of 12 years 
give one tablet No. 27 every hour and two hours before the next 
chill is expected give from five to ten tablets No. 27. As soon as 
the chill comes on stop the use of No. 27 and use the treatment 
given above for the cold, hot and sweating stages. After the 
chills and fever have been broken up give two tablets No. 24 every 
two hours. Keep this up for one month at least. After the chills 
and fever have been broken up No. 27 should be given from the 
fourth to the sixth day, from the twelfth to the fourteenth and 
from the nineteenth to the twenty-first day. After this No. 27 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 157 

need not be given any more. Careful attention to the treatment 
here outlined will enable anyone to treat malarial fever as well at 
home as with the attention of a physician, always remembering 
that diet, nursing and hygiene have much to do with the recovery 
of a patient from any sickness whatsoever. 

Hydrophobia — Hydrophobia is a peculiar infectious disease 
which sometimes occurs in dogs, and more rarely in other animals. 
In the dog it goes under the name of rabies or mad dog. Per- 
sons who are bitten by such animals may catch the disease and 
become the victims of terrible symptoms which originate in the 
central nervous system. Cases of hydrophobia are usually easy 
to distinguish as there is always a history of being bitten by a 
rabid animal. Treatment is not very effective, although the care 
received at the various sanitariums which treat "mad dog bite" 
has saved many lives. If a patient cannot be placed in an insti- 
tution of this sort there is but one relief for him, and that is death, 
hence the efforts in such a case must be to relieve the suffering, 
and this is best done by full doses of opium or chloral hydrate. 

Glanders and Anthrax — These are two diseases which occur 
in animals and are sometimes transferred to man. They rarely 
occur in man, but when either disease is found there is but little 
hope of recovery. Glanders is particularly a disease of the horse, 
and is characterized by peculiar new growths in the nose. These 
break down and discharge, and the discharge from these will 
convey the disease to man. Anthrax occurs in the cow, sheep 
and horse. The apparently healthy animal will suddenly fall, 
have a few convulsions and die. Death always occurs in the 
animal, and this is-equally true in man. Man acquires this disease 
by coming in contact with animals which have died from anthrax. 

Trichinosis — By this is meant a disease caused by taking into 
the system a peculiar class of round microscopic worms known as 
trichinae. Trichina occurs in animals; is found in the lean meat 
of pork, and through eating this meat when it is not properly 
cooked the trichina enters the human stomach. In the pork the 
trichina is in a capsule, and as soon as it enters the human 
stomach this capsule is dissolved and the worm is set free in the 
stomach and in two or three days the worm attains its full size. 
In about seven days after the trichinae are taken into the stomach 



158 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

they begin to reproduce, and a single female will often produce a 
thousand young. As soon as the young are born they bore their 
way through the walls of the intestines, and finally reach the 
muscles, being later found in all of the muscles of the body. 
When the trichinae reach the muscles they form capsules about 
themselves and remain there. Unless liberated in the manner 
already described the trichina ends its existence in the muscles. 
The only treatment for trichina is to prevent the disease by not 
eating pork unless it is thoroughly cooked. The cooking kills 
the trichinae. 

Acute Bronchitis — This is sometimes known as ' ' cold on the 
chest, ' ' and is an acute catarrhal inflammation of the bronchial 
tubes, accompanied by fever, pain about the breast bone, feeling 
of weight on the lungs and difficult breathing, followed by expec- 
toration. The disease many times starts with a cold. Breath- 
ing dust, smoke and air which is too hot or too cold may produce 
this disease ; it may be caused by sudden and marked changes in 
the weather. 

Symptoms and Signs — The disease usually begins with a cold in 
the nose or throat or both ; the patient feels chilly and then feels 
quite warm ; the whole body aches and the patient feels tired and 
has no energy ; the tongue is coated and the bowels are consti- 
pated. A cough is present from the very first and is dry and hard 
to begin with, but later on loosens up and considerable amounts 
are raised. The material raised at first is light and frothy, but 
later it becomes tough, yellow or greenish in color, and there is 
lots of it. A day or two after the disease begins pain is felt 
beneath the breast bone, especially toward the upper end ; this 
pain is a raw, burning or tearing pain, which is made worse by 
drawing in a deep breath or by coughing. There is slight fever, 
dry hot skin, rapid pulse, loss of appetite and moderate thirst. 
After the patient begins to expectorate somewhat, if the ear is 
placed over the chest moist, bubbling sounds will be heard. 

Treatment — When the disease starts and before the cough 
becomes loose give to adults one tablet No. 13 every three hours 
and also give one tablet No. 27 every two hours. Allow the 
patient to use No. 31, this last to be placed in the mouth and 
allowed to dissolve — the tablet should not be swallowed. To 



HEALTH AT HOME. 159 

children give one tablet No. 11 every two hours and one tablet 
No. 21 every four hours. Allow children to use No. 31 the same 
as adults. Give to both children and adults hot foot baths, tur- 
pentine stupes over the chest, and as the cough becomes a little 
loose, stop giving No. 31 and give in its stead No. 26. This 
tablet is to be used in the same manner as No. 31. The diet must 
be carefully looked after. Good nursing is an essential and the 
bowels should be kept regular by using No. 9 for children and 
No. 16 for adults. 

Chronic Bronchitis — This disease is a chronic inflammation 
of the mucous or lining membrane of the bronchial tubes. 
Chronic bronchitis is seen especially in adults and old people. The 
disease is caused by exposure to wet or cold, repeated breathing 
of dust, smoke, vapors or other irritating substances; it may also 
be due to rheumatism, heart disease, kidney disease, or the exces- 
sive use of alcohol. 

Symptoms and Signs — The most common symptom is cough 
and expectoration. The cough is always in paroxysms more or 
less severe and quantities of material are raised. This material is 
thick, stringy and yellowish. Occasionally the breath is very 
bad. The patient loses the appetite, or frequently will eat a meal 
and immediately afterwards a paroxysm of coughing will come 
on and the patient will vomit. Either this condition or the loss 
of appetite will cause the patient to lose flesh. In adults this loss 
of flesh amounts to about a half pound to one pound per week. 
There is a feeling of soreness about the lungs and very often a 
feeling of tightness. The patient will feel fairly well and will 
attend to his usual duties, but will be interrupted frequently by 
spells of coughing. If the patient who has chronic bronchitis be 
careless about exposing himself the disease is very apt to termi- 
nate in consumption. 

Treatment — A person who is suffering from chronic bronchi- 
tis must very carefully observe all the rules of health ; must dress, 
eat, sleep, bathe and exercise in the right manner and must not 
expose himself needlessly in any way. This is really the principal 
part of the treatment. For medical treatment spray the throat and 
nose every day with a solution made by dissolving three tablets 
No. 3 in a cup of warm water. Then use either No. 26 or No. 



160 HKAI/fH AT HOME. 

31, allowing the tablet to dissolve in the mouth, and use the one 
that gives the most relief. A change of climate to a warmer and 
dryer climate will cure the disease. Iyight mustard plasters or 
turpentine stupes over the chest will oftentimes give relief. 

Asthma — Asthma is a spasm of the muscles around the bron- 
chial tubes which occurs in paroxysms; the breathing becomes 
difficult and continues so for several hours. Asthma is more 
common in men than in women. 

Symptoms — The first attack of asthma begins very suddenly, 
but the attacks which occur later begin more slowly and with signs 
which the patient soon learns to recognize. There is running 
from the eyes and nose, irritation in the chest, a feeling as though 
there was not breathing space enough, and the digestive organs 
do not work well. The attack usually begins in the early morn- 
ing or late in the afternoon with a feeling of anguish and tight- 
ness in the chest and an intense desire for air. The breathing is 
accompanied by loud wheezing, the face is flushed and at times 
even blue and bathed in perspiration, the eyes stare and seem to 
be starting from their sockets, the muscles of the neck show 
clearly as they aid in the effort to get air. The difficulty in breath- 
ing soon becomes so marked that the breath is only a gasp, the 
lips are pale, the face blue or almost black, and the patient feels 
as if about to die. After some minutes or hours the breathing 
becomes easier, more air enters the lungs, the blueness disap- 
pears and gradually the paroxysm ceases, the patient feeling tired 
out and the chest sore. During the attack there is a short, dry 
cough, which becomes looser as the spell passes off and there is 
some expectoration toward its close. The attacks may last from 
three to ten hours, and nearly always prevent the patient from 
lying down or taking food. 

Treatment — Asthma is many times due to diseased conditions 
of the nose or throat and will stop when these defects have been 
rectified; hence when a patient is suffering with asthma always 
consult a specialist and if the nose or throat needs any attention 
have that attended to. Asthma itself is very hard to cure and 
the best we can do is to relieve the spasms and attend to the gen- 
eral health. Change of climate is necessary to effect a cure in 
many cases. For the relief of the spasms, soak some pieces of 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 161 

blotting paper in a solution of nitrate of potassium, dry them and 
when a paroxysm comes on take a small piece of this paper, burn 
it and inhale the fumes. 

Hay Fever — This is an acute catarrhal inflammation of the 
upper air passages and extends to the bronchial tubes. Hay 
fever is an affection of the nervous system said to be produced by 
the inhalation of the pollen of weeds or grain. 

Symptoms and Signs — The disease begins with a running from 
the nose, red watery eyes, sneezing, hoarse, croupy cough and 
difficult breathing. It begins about the same time each year and 
lasts for from six to ten weeks, and each year is worse than th e 
year before. 

Treatment — The only treatment that will do any good whatever 
is a change of climate. 

Congestion of the I^ungs — By congestion of the lungs is 
meant an increase in the amount of blood present in the smaller 
blood vessels of the lungs. Congestion of the lungs may be 
caused by increased heart action, overexertion, use of too much 
alcohol, great mental excitement, breathing of hot or cold air, 
obstruction to the return of the blood to the heart from the 
lungs, enlarged heart, disease of the valves of the heart, low 
fevers and Bright' s disease. 

Symptoms and Signs— There is distress in the lungs, which 
rapidly grows worse, difficulty in breathing, flushed face, full, 
strong rapid pulse, the large blood vessels in the neck throb, the 
heart palpitates and the eyes are congested. There is a short, 
dry, hacking cough, followed by scanty blood streaked expecto- 
ration. On thumping the lungs the sound is somewhat hollow. 
Very acute cases may cause death in a few hours, but under 
prompt treatment the end of the disease is ordinarily favorable. 

Treatment — Nothing succeeds so well as blood letting — the old 
fashioned "bleeding" will give relief in a [short time. Give 
enough No. 4 to move the bowels thoroughly. If the heart seems 
depressed or weak give one tablet No. 28 every three hours. If 
the heart is very weak give stimulants. 

Pneumonia — I/Ung Fever — There are two principal varities 
of this disease ; lobar pneumonia and broncho pneumonia. 



162 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

I/Obar Pneumonia — This is an acute croupous inflammation 
of the structure of the lungs, accompanied by a severe chill, fever, 
pain, difficult breathing, cough, rust-colored expectoration, and 
great prostration. Lobar pneumonia is caused by exposure of 
any kind, by injuries to the chest walls, by alcoholic excesses, and 
by rheumatism. The disease is divided into three stages by the 
changes which take place in the lungs. The first is the stage 
of congestion, or engorgement, and in this stage the vessels 
around the small air-cells in the lungs become so filled and dis- 
tended as to encroach upon the air space in the cell. The second 
is the stage of exudation, and in this stage the small blood ves- 
sels, which have already become distended, throw off the thick 
fluid which is mixed with white and red corpuscles. The exu- 
dation rapidly coagulates on the lung substance and soon com- 
pletely fills the small air-cells. This process is completed when 
the air-cells are filled. Could a lung in this condition be removed 
from the body and cut through with a knife the cut surf ace would 
resemble the cut surface of liver. The third stage is the stage 
of resolution, and in this stage the matter which has filled the air- 
cells becomes liquid and is taken up by the blood and carried 
away, some parts of this material, however, being raised by 
coughing and disposed of in this manner. The stage of conges- 
tion lasts from one to three days; the stage of exudation from 
three to seven days and the stage of resolution from one to three 
weeks. The most frequent place for lobar pneumonia to occur is 
the lower lobe of the right lung, the next most frequent place is 
the lower lobe of the left lung, then the upper right lobe. 

Symptoms and Signs — The disease begins with a severe and 
usually protracted chill, vomiting, and a rapid rise of fever to 
103° or 104, ° a full strong rapid pulse, pain near the nipple, 
made worse by pressure or by drawing in a long breath or by 
coughing. There is shortness of breath, and the breathing is 
rapid, the number of respirations being forty to fifty per minute 
often causing an interruption in the speech. There is a cough, 
at first short, ringing and harsh, soon followed by a scanty, frothy 
expectoration, which soon becomes very stringy and rust-colored. 
There is headache, sleeplessness, sometimes nose-bleed, flushed 
face, some trouble with digestion and scanty, high colored urine. 
From the very start of the disease the patient is very sick and 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 163 

much prostrated. He loses flesh rapidly and after he has been 
sick for a few days one who knows him very well will scarcely 
recognize him. The above symptoms last until the seventh, 
ninth or eleventh day, when the fever breaks suddenly, and with- 
in twenty-four hours the patient is on the road to recovery. In 
the first stage of the disease there is slight dullness upon sound- 
ing the chest and upon listening slight rattling or crackling sounds 
may be heard. The cough is dry and hacking. There is some 
difficulty in breathing and the fever rises rapidly. In the second 
stage there is marked dullness on sounding the chest and the 
breathing is very shallow. The expectoration is rust-colored; 
there is marked difficulty in breathing; the cough is still present ; 
the fever is still high, but is high in the evening and low in the 
morning. In the third stage the signs are much the same as in 
the second, with the exception that chills may occur now; the 
prostration and weakness is very great; the expectoration is 
yellowish or brownish in color and the fever is still high. Lobar 
pneumonia is always a grave disease, especially in old people, yet 
many cases recover. 

Treatment — At the very start of the disease give one tablet No. 
16 every hour until the bowels move very freely. Give one tab- 
let No. 13 every two hours and three tablets No. 27 every three 
hours. Also begin poulticing at the very start of the disease. 
Make two double jackets and spread flaxseed or mush poultice 
material thinly between the layers of each jacket. For directions 
as to making poultices see the chapter on Poultices, p. 124. Then 
keep the poultices hot by having them in a colander over a kettle 
of boiling water, where the steam from the boiling water will 
keep them hot. Place one jacket on the patient, having it well 
up on the neck and down to the lower end of the lungs ; it must 
also reach entirely around the patient. Allow the poultice to 
remain on until it begins to grow cool, then take the hot poultice 
and draw it up under the cold one. After the hot poultice is in 
place the cold one may be removed and reheated. It is impor- 
tant that no air should strike the patient while the poultices are 
being changed. The poulticing should be kept up day and night 
until the fever leaves the patient. The diet must be carefully 
looked after, and to this end read the chapter on Diet in Disease, 
p. 106. Heart failure is the cause of many deaths in pneumonia, 



164 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

and therefore the heart should be sustained throughout the disease. 
The best means of accomplishing this purpose is by the judicious 
use of alcohol. Begin by giving small doses of whiskey or brandy 
every three hours, and increase or diminish the amount as neces- 
sary. Always use stimulants in an old person or in a very feeble 
person; use it in those accustomed to its use, or when the pulse is 
feeble, rapid and irregular, or when the patient suddenly grows 
very weak and seems about to collapse. When the heart is 
weak it is also well to give one tablet No. 28 every four hours. 
The patient should be fed every three hours. As the patient 
becomes convalescent and progresses toward recovery give one 
tablet No. 17 three times a day before meals and keep this up for 
at least a month. 

Broncho -Pneumonia — Broncho-pneumonia is an acute 
catarrhal inflammation of the smaller bronchial tubes and the air- 
cells of the lungs, accompanied by fever, cough, difficult breath- 
ing, large amount of expectoration and great depression. This 
disease is caused by exposure, disease of the heart, and some 
other conditions. It is seen most frequently in young children 
and old people. 

Symptoms and Signs — This disease nearly always begins as 
bronchitis, and may be acute, sub-acute or chronic. The acute 
variety begins with a gradual rise of fever to 102° or 103° ; rapid, 
shallow breathing, as shown by the widely dilated nose. The 
lower part of the lungs and the spaces between the ribs are sunken 
in. When the patient draws in a breath the action is short and 
imperfect and when the breath is blown out, the action is noisy 
and longer than ordinary. The pulse is rapid, from 100 to 120 
beats per minute, and is somewhat compressible. The cough, 
which during the bronchitis was loose, now becomes tight, short 
hacking, dry and painful. After a short time the cough is accom- 
panied by the expectoration of more or less thick stringy mucus. 
The appetite is poor, the bowels are somewhat loose, the urine is 
scanty and highly colored and the body is covered part of the 
time with perspiration. 

The sub-acute and chronic varieties have the same symptoms, 
but the disease lasts longer and the patient becomes weaker. 

Recovery from any case of broncho-pneumonia requires many 



HEAI/fH AT HOME. 165 

weeks. In sounding the lungs dull sounds will be noticed in por- 
tions and hollow sounds in others. Placing the ear over the lungs 
small bubbling sounds, and later in the disease large bubbling 
sounds will be heard. 

Treatment — Confine the patient to bed. The diet should be 
liquid and very nutritious. See chapter on Diet in Disease, p. 
106. Brandy or whiskey should be used throughout the attack, 
regulating the dose to the age of the patient. Give one tablet No. 
13 every three hours and three tablets No. 27 every four hours. 
Allow the patient to use No. 26 by holding the tablet in the mouth 
until it dissolves. One tablet of this may be used every hour if 
it affords relief. As the patient gets well give one tablet No. 17 
three times a day before meals and continue this for from four to 
six weeks. 

Tuberculosis — Consumption — Consumption is a disease 
caused by the deposit of a germ in the lung tissue, and this in 
turn causes the lung tissue to break down or decay. The disease 
is accompanied by fever, cough, difficult breathing, sometimes 
hemorrhages from the lungs, loss of blood and great weakness. 
The majority of cases end in death, although some cases which 
receive early treatment and a complete change of climate, are 
cured. In the cases which are cured there is more or less loss of 
tissue in the lungs, and they are never perfect organs again. The 
germs which cause consumption are breathed in by almost every 
one, but the lungs must be in a particularly receptive condition 
in order to contract the disease. The lungs are in this condition 
in a patient recovering from any of the acute diseases, and are 
also many times in a condition to receive the germs when a per- 
son is suffering from a severe cold, slight bronchitis, or when the 
system is weakened from any cause whatsoever. Although a per- 
son cannot inherit consumption, yet he may inherit a tendency 
toward weakness of the lungs, and therefore will always be in a 
particularly receptive condition for this disease. We see many 
people who have apparently inherited this disease, and yet could 
the facts be investigated closely it would be found that these per- 
sons have not paid the proper attention to diet, exercise, hygiene 
and daily surroundings. We often see persons who are constantly 
exposed to consumption yet never contract the disease because of 



166 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

the judgment which they use in their everyday life. A patient 
who is ill with consumption should consult a physician as to the 
methods of caring for the excreta from his body, in order that he 
may not convey the contagion to others. A person in whose 
family consumption has occurred prior to his existence or in 
whose family the disease exists at the present time may in a large 
measure relieve himself of the liability to take the disease by 
alternately expanding and contracting his lungs to their fullest 
capacity. This exercise should be practiced a number of times 
each day, and in connection with this may be used any sort of 
mild exercise which has a tendency to develop the muscles of res- 
piration. 

Symptoms and Signs — This disease begins very slowly. The 
first thing noticed is usually some slight disturbance of the diges- 
tive system, or the heart may be slightly irritable. In the begin- 
ning there is a light, dry hacking cough which is usually thought 
to be from the throat or stomach ; there is some expectoration of 
a glairy mucus, a gradual loss in weight, the muscles lose their 
strength, the skin is pale, and often hemorrhages of greater or less 
severity occur. Sharp pain is often felt below the shoulder blades. 
A little later on the breaking down of the lung tissue begins, and 
this is announced by increased cough, very free expectoration, 
difficult breathing, which is much increased by exertion, chills 
in the morning, some fever in the evening, night sweats, increased 
loss of flesh and marked weakness. Even at this stage the patient 
will not give up, but will still insist that he is going to get well. 
This belief on the part of the patient is found in almost every 
case, and is a marked characteristic of the disease. From this 
point on the breaking down of lung tissue goes on quite rapidly, 
and the death of the patient is but a question of time. Toward 
the very end the feet and ankles will swell, and this denotes that 
the circulation is failing rapidly. 

Treatment — Although the treatment of consumption is unsatis- 
factory in many cases, yet the disease can be treated with some 
degree of satisfaction if painstaking care is exercised in the selec- 
tion of remedies and the treatment is begun early enough. 
Whenever a patient has a dry, hacking cough, and with it loss 
of flesh, a portion of the material which is expectorated should 



HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 167 

be sent to a physician who has a microscope. He can examine 
the material and tell certainly whether the patient has consump- 
tion or not. Should a person find that he has consumption he 
should at once move to a high, dry climate and stay there. Go 
to Colorado, New Mexico or Arizona and live outdoors — live 
entirely out of doors ; sleep on the ground and eat coarse food, 
take plenty of exercise, but do not overdo the matter at first. As 
to medicine, tonics are required all of the time, and the patient 
should place himself in the hands of the nearest physician that 
these tonics may be varied to suit the climate and to suit the indi- 
vidual case. 

Pleurisy — Pleurisy is a fibrinous inflammation of the cover- 
ing of the lungs, sometimes spoken of as a "stitch in the side." 
The disease is characterized by a sharp pain in the side, a dry 
cough, difficult breathing and fever. It may be limited to a part, 
or it may involve the whole of one or both lung coverings. Pleu- 
risy is due to cold, exposure, severe muscular exertion, injuries 
to the chest walls, or it may follow pneumonia, heart disease, 
rheumatism, smallpox, Bright's disease or puerperal fever. 

Symptoms and Signs — An acute attack begins with a chill, 
followed by a sharp pain in the side, which is made worse by 
coughing and breathing. There is some tenderness on pressure. 
The breathing is rapid and shallow, thirty to thirty-five respi- 
rations per minute, a short, dry, hacking cough, moderate fever 
and a rapid compressible pulse, ranging from ninety to one hun- 
dred and twenty beats per minute. Following- the inflamma- 
tion of the pleura a fluid is given off from the inflamed mem- 
brane, and this collects between the pleura covering the lungs 
and that lining the chest walls. As this fluid collects the cough 
becomes more distressing; the action of the heart is interfered 
with ; the difficulty in breathing is greater, and the patient wears 
an anxious look. After a while the fluid begins to absorb and 
these symptoms all gradually improve. A subacute attack is 
the same except that it does not begin so rapidly. I^ooking at 
the chest it will be noticed that the movements of the chest walls 
are decreased over the affected parts. Sounding gives dullness 
over the affected parts and hollowness over the sound portions of 
the lungs. Placing the ear over the chest, crackling or squeak- 



168 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

ing sounds will be heard over the affected parts. Acute pneu- 
monia might be mistaken for pleurisy, but in pneumonia there 
is a pronounced chill, high fever and rust-colored sputa. Pleurisy 
usually lasts three weeks. 

Treatment — Bleeding is very beneficial in pleurisy. Turpen- 
tine stupes over the chest are beneficial. Give one tablet No. 
15 every hour until the pain is relieved, and after that one tablet 
every three or four hours. Give one tablet No. 28 every four 
hours. Have the patient eat a very light evening meal, and take 
nothing more until morning, not even water being allowable. An 
hour or more before breakfast give eight or ten tablets No. 4. 
Keep him quiet during the day and allow the bowels to move as 
often as any inclination is felt. The above treatment will be all 
that is necessary in any ordinary case of pleurisy. 

Acute Endocarditis — This disease is an acute inflamma- 
tion of the membrane which lines the heart and forms its valves. 
It is characterized by cough, difficult breathing, nausea and vom- 
iting, disturbed heart action, resulting in changes in the valves 
or orifices of the heart. This form of heart disease is that which 
follows acute articular rheumatism, pneumonia, Bright's disease, 
and some other forms of heart disease ; it also occurs with diph- 
theria. 

Symptoms and Signs — Tt is usually covered up by some other 
disease until disturbances of the circulation attract attention to 
the heart. It usually begins with an increase of fever, distress 
about the heart, short cough, slight difficulty in breathing, vom- 
iting, more or less persistent, increased heart action, the heart 
often beating rapidly and hard, with throbbing of the large ves- 
sels in the neck and noises in the ears. As the disease prog- 
resses the heart beats more slowly, the lungs are congested and the 
veins stand out clearly in various parts of the body. The disease 
usually lasts from one to three weeks. 

Treatment — Let there be complete rest in bed. Give one tablet 
No. 28 every four hours. If the circulation becomes very weak 
give stimulants in small doses often repeated. The diet should be 
carefully looked after and only the most nutritious used. Endo- 
carditis may produce inflammation of the muscular tissue of the 
heart or disease of the valves in the heart. 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 169 

Inflammation of the muscular tissue of the heart may also be 
produced by typhoid fever or by a clogging of the large arteries. 

Diseases of the Valves in the Heart are alterations in the valves 
or in the openings of the heart whereby the valves are incapable 
of closing the openings or whereby they interrupt the blood cur- 
rent in its normal flow. There are two sorts of valve diseases : 
obstructive and regurgitant. 

An obstructive disease is a narrowing of an opening in the 
heart which obstructs the flow of the blood. 

A regurgitant disease, also called insufficiency, is such a change 
in the valves of the heart as prevents their complete closure, thus 
allowing a portion of the blood to flow backward instead of for- 
ward — the true direction of the blood current. A valve in this 
condition can well be compared to a poor or leaky valve in an 
ordinary water pump. It is very hard to distinguish between 
the different diseases of the heart, and not only knowledge of the 
subject is required, but a great deal of experience; therefore the 
suggestion is made that when heart trouble is suspected a spe- 
cialist be consulted unless the disease should be one of the two 
which follow. 

Neuralgia of the Heart or Angina Pectoris — This 
disease may be defined as paroxysms in which there occur sharp 
pains in the heart, extending usually into the left shoulder and 
down the left arm. These pains are usually accompanied by a 
feeling that the chest is too tight and also a feeling that death is 
near. This disease is often hereditary, or may be due to chronic 
heart disease, the excessive use of tobacco, or it may be found 
with hysteria or epilepsy. 

Symptoms and Signs — The attacks are in the form of parox- 
ysms, and occur very irregularly. During the intervals between 
two attacks the patient will be perfectly well. "The patient sud- 
denly sits up in his bed ; with a cry of horror indicates that the 
pain is in his heart. The pain is very severe, but is of a cold 
and sickening character; the chest is fixed, the breathing more 
rapid, and a hand placed over the heart finds that the heart's 
action is slight and feeble. The face wears a look of horror, pale 
and slightly greyish ; a cold sweat breaks out upon the forehead ; 
worse than the pain is the fearful feeling of sickness and depres- 



170 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

sion. The poor patient gasps, 'I shall die! I shall die!' and 
sometimes, though not often, his short but severe suffering in a 
few moments ends in death. ' ' This describes the symptoms, and 
sooner or later the majority of all patients suffering from this 
disease die; either directly from the disease or from the second- 
ary effects. 

Treatment — The best treatment is to give ten grains of iodide 
of potassium three times a day after meals and keep this up for a 
number of months. This treatment will occasionally entirely 
cure a case. The diet must be carefully regulated and all violent 
exercise and emotion must be avoided. A remedy of much value 
is No. 17; this should be given one tablet three times a day, 
before meals, and continued for a long time. It is often of more 
value than iodide of potassium. At the time of the attack mor- 
phine is the best remedy to employ for the relief of the pain. 
Morphine should never used except under the immediate direc- 
tion of a physician. 

Nervous Palpitation of the Heart — By palpitation we 
mean a fluttering of the heart, and a nervous palpitation is one 
in which an examination fails to discover any true heart disease. 
This sort of palpitation nearly always occurs in very nervous 
people, and is not present all of the time. The treatment must 
be directed toward improving the general health of the patient. 

Arterio -Sclerosis — This is a disease of the blood vessels, 
usually occurring in persons over 40 years of age. It is some- 
times not regarded as a disease, but as a result of the natural 
breaking down of old age. It may be produced by other things, 
than old age, and chief among these is the excessive use of alco- 
hol. It may also be caused by syphilis, gout, kidney disease, rheu- 
matism and chronic lead poisoning. This disease is found in the 
arteries, but very seldom in the veins. The disease is easy to be 
recognized, as instead of the skin being smooth about the ves- 
sels, it is irregular ; under the fingers the vessels feel rough, hard, 
tortuous and sometimes even bony. The symptoms of this 
disease are so varied that it is not possible to give them except in 
a general way. The pulse at the wrist is nearly always hard, 
tense and irregular, and the vessel feels irregular and rough 
under the fingers. During arterio-sclerosis changes occur in the 



HKAI/TH AT HOME- 171 

blood vessels in the brain and often rupture of the arteries in the 
brain occurs. Changes also occur in the kidneys. Gangrene of 
the feet and legs, which occurs in old people, is nearly always 
produced by arterio-sclerosis, by causing a plugging of some of 
the arteries which carry blood to the parts. This, of course, 
soon produces death of the part deprived of the blood. In con- 
clusion it may be said that all symptoms of this disease may be 
absent for a long time, or even entirely absent, or people who 
have had only a few very slight signs of the disease may sud- 
denly develop the very severest symptoms. There is no particu- 
lar remedy for this disease and all treatment must be directed to 
the symptoms as they arise. The treatment of arterio-sclerosis 
should always be under the personal direction of a physician. 

Acute Catarrah of the Stomach — Acute Indigestion — 

This disease is also known as mild gastritis and bilious fever. It 
is an acute inflammation of the lining membrane of the stomach, 
and with this occurs some fever, loss of appetite, nausea, occa- 
sional vomiting, pain after eating and irregular bowels. Acute 
indigestion may be caused by the quantity of gastric juice being 
too small or by it being of poor quality. Wrong diet, imperfect 
chewing of the food, swallowing liquids which are too hot or too 
cold and the improper use of alcoholic liquors may cause this 
disease. It may also follow such diseases as measles, scarlet 
fever, smallpox, diphtheria and the like. 

Symptoms and Signs — At first there is loss of appetite and at 
times a feeling of disgust for food, a heavily coated tongue, bad 
taste and a bad breath, a feeling of sickness in the stomach, 
sometimes vomiting, first of undigested food and then acid and 
bitter material and finally bilious vomiting may occur ; some fever 
is present, headache, considerable thirst, and sour drinks are 
eagerly sought for; the digestion is imperfect and this causes 
pain, tenderness over the stomach, feeling as though a heavy 
weight were in the stomach, and often gas will come up the throat 
from the stomach ; the bowels are irregular. Dizziness is found 
in some cases. The urine is scanty. Any error in diet will make 
the symptoms worse, and fat or sugar will often cause ' ' heart- 
burn. ' ' The active symptoms of this disease usually last about 
a week, but it requires a long time for the patient to regain nor- 
mal digestion. 



172 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

Treatment — Give the stomach as complete rest as possible. If 
the stomach should be overloaded when the disease first begins, 
empty by giving No. 32. Should the stomach seem irritable, 
give one tablet No. 2 every two hours. Give one tablet No. 8 
every four hours and give one tablet No. 6 before each meal. 
Give these last two remedies for at least a month. Feed the 
patient carefully and with the above treatment the recovery will 
be only a question of time. 

Acute Gastritis — This is an acute and violent inflammation 
of the mucous lining and of the muscular coats of the stomach, 
characterized by great pain, constant vomiting of blood-streaked 
matter and signs of collapse. This sort of stomach trouble is 
caused by taking poisons, such as mineral acids, arsenic, corro- 
sive sublimate and carbolic acid, into the stomach. 

Symptoms and Signs — Very soon after swallowing the poison 
there comes a terrible nausea, with rapid and constant vomiting ; 
first the contents of the stomach which have been acted upon by 
the poison are vomited, then shreds of the lining of the stomach 
and clots of blood. Accompanying this is great anxiety, much 
depression, a weak, rapid pulse, slow and shallow breathing, a 
cold skin which is covered with a cold sweat, intense burning 
heat in the stomach, much thirst; the throat is dry and burns; 
the bowels move so freely as to produce purging and the face 
looks peaked and sunken. These signs either end in death or 
very slow recovery, and when a patient recovers, the stomach will 
always be more or less crippled. The majority of persons who 
take such strong poisons into the stomach die, but some few 
recover. The treatment of acute gastritis depends entirely upon 
the poison which caused it. In the chapter on poisons the treat- 
ment of each poison is taken up. The treatment for the poison 
which produced the trouble is the treatment for the disease. 

Chronic Catarrh of the Stomach— Chronic Dyspep- 
sia — Drunkard's Dyspepsia — This is a chronic catarrhal 
inflammation of the stomach in which the membrane^lining the 
stomach and the muscular layers forming the stomach, ^become 
very much thickened and the glands, which secrete the gastric 
juice, become very much smaller. This disease may be^caused 
by repeated attacks of acute indigestion, habitual use of alcoholic 



HEAI/fH AT HOMK. 173 

liquors, malaria, disease of the heart, lungs, or liver, and by- 
cancer or ulcer of the stomach. 

Symptoms and Signs — There is loss of appetite, a feeling of 
gnawing and at times of fullness in the stomach, pain in the 
stomach and some tenderness about the stomach, the abdomen is 
distended, there is some nausea and vomiting, the latter often 
occurring in drunkards in the morning on arising — it is often 
termed ' ' morning vomiting, ' ' and the vomit consists of a thick, 
glairy substance which is raised only after much straining and 
retching ; there is constant thirst and stimulants are often craved. 
There is often intense burning in the pit of the stomach ; the 
bowels are constipated ; the urine highly colored ; the patient has 
trouble in sleeping and often has the "blues. " The imperfect 
digestion causes loss of flesh and the muscles become soft and 
the skin dry. Patients recover from this disease to a certain 
extent, but the stomach is always more or less damaged by the 
changes which occur in the glands which secrete the gastric juice. 
Treatment — The diet should be carefully regulated. Do not 
allow the patient to have any fat, sweet or starchy food ; he may 
have milk, small amounts of beef, eggs, oysters, and a few fresh 
green vegetables. Give one tablet No. 4 every two hours until 
the bowels move very freely. Have the patient drink a teacup- 
ful of hot water an hour before each meal. Give two tablets 
No. 33 after each meal — if two tablets do not seem to be enough 
give three tablets after each meal. 

Ulcer of the Stomach — Ulcers may form upon the lining 
of the stomach and very much resemble ulcers in any other part 
of the body. 

Symptoms and Signs — Signs of indigestion are present in all 
cases but they vary much in degree of severity. There is con- 
stant pain in the pit of the stomach ; this is made worse by tak- 
ing food, especially food that is rough or irritating ; the pain is 
often felt in the back and is of a burning, gnawing character. 
There is tenderness over some parts of the stomach. Vomiting is 
always present and usually occurs within an hour after the 
patient has taken a meal ; the vomited matter may be the food that 
has been taken, stringy mucus, or blood. If the blood is fresh it 
will be red and easily recognized, but if it has been in the stomach 



174 HEAI/fH AT HOME. 

for some time it will be dark colored and very much resemble 
coffee grounds. The patient may have frequent and severe 
attacks of ' ' stomach ache. ' ' 

Treatment — Give the stomach as complete rest as possible. Feed 
the patient entirely upon milk and add one teaspoonful of lime 
water to each pint of milk. When the pain is severe give one 
tablet No. 15 every hour until relieved. Give two tablets No. 
33 before each meal ; also give two tablets No. 24 every three 
hours. 

Cancer of the Stomach — Cancer of the stomach nearly 
always occurs in persons over 40 years of age, and the end of the 
disease is always death. 

Symptoms and Signs — All signs of indigestion may be present. 
The stomach is nearly always "sour;" there is much gas and the 
breath has a bad odor. Vomiting is present; there is a dull, 
heavy pain, made worse by pressure, but sharp shooting pains 
are rarely found. The skin is pale and the patient loses flesh. 
The ankles often swell. The disease usually lasts about one 
year, when the patient dies. 

Gastralgia — Stomach Ache — Stomach ache is a painful 
condition of the sensory nerves of the stomach, produced by 
irritations of various sorts. 

Symptoms and Signs — Dr. Romburg describes an attack thus : 
' ' Suddenly, or after a feeling of pressure about the abdomen, 
there is a severe griping pain in the stomach, usually extending 
to the back, with a feeling of faintness, a shrunken countenance, 
cold hands and feet and an irregular pulse. The pain becomes 
so great that the patient cries out. The stomach is either puffed 
out like a ball or drawn in, with the muscles of the abdomen 
tense and hard. Pressure is well borne and quite often the 
patient presses the pit of the stomach against some firm substance 
or holds it with both hands. The attack lasts from a few minutes 
to a half hour or longer; then the pain gradually subsides, leaving 
the patient much exhausted ; or else it ceases suddenly, with 
belching of gas, or with vomiting and with a gentle, soft perspira- 
tion, or with the passage of reddish urine. ' ' Besides such severe 
attacks milder forms are often met with. 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 175 

Treatment — Give one tablet No. 15 every half hour until the 
pain ceases. To a child give one tablet No. 19 every half hour 
until relieved. Carefully regulate the diet and bowels after the 
attack has occurred, that a recurrence may possibly be prevented. 

Dyspepsia— Indigestion — Heartburn — This is a derange- 
ment of the stomach in which the quantity of gastric juice is not 
sufficient, or the quality is such that it will not digest the food it 
comes in contact with. The disease is caused by imperfect chew- 
ing, of the food, bolting of food, eating overly large quantities 
of food, eating the same sort of food for a long time, disorders of 
the nervous system from worry and fatigue, and habits or occu- 
pation where little or no exercise is taken. 

Symptoms and Signs — The symptoms and signs are : an appe- 
tite which is capricious — the patient will call for certain foods, 
and when they are placed before him the desire for them will be 
gone or the appetite may be entirely lost. There is difficult diges- 
tion with a feeling of weight or fullness in the stomach ; heart- 
burn ; gas in the stomach ; belching and at times vomiting of sour 
material; pain in the pit of the stomach after eating; the bowels 
are constipated ; the urine is nearly always scanty and highly 
colored, although in very nervous persons it may be pale. There 
is drowsiness after eating and wakefulness at night; the patient 
forgets things easily ; there is often headache ; flashes of heat are 
common and the heart often nutters and palpitates. 

Treatment — Regulate the diet. Do not allow the patient to eat 
sweet, fat or starchy food. The diet should consist entirely of 
milk ; lean meat, eggs, oysters, and a few fresh green vegetables. 
The patient should eat small amounts at a time, chew the food 
thoroughly and rest for at least a half hour after eating. Use 
but small amount of liquids with the meals. No stimulant of any 
sort should be used with the meals. Give one tablet No. 6 before 
each meal and one tablet No. 33 one hour after each meal. 

Inflammation of the Bowels — This is a catarrhal inflam- 
mation of the mucous membrane lining the small intestine. The 
disease is caused by food that does not agree with the stomach 
and by exposure to cold and wet when quite warm. 

Symptoms and Signs — This disease begins with a general feel- 
ing of languor, followed by chilliness and fever, the fever being 



176 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

102° or 103°. This is followed by colli cky pain which is very 
severe, growing better and again worse, the pain being above the 
navel, and over the seat of pain will be noticeable tenderness. 
The bowels become quite loose ; the stools are yellow or greenish 
yellow in color and mixed with undigested food ; when the stools 
are very numerous, they become watery. Nausea and vomiting 
often occur. The appetite is poor and this, with the great waste 
resulting from the bowels running badly, soon produces extreme 
weakness, and the patient loses flesh rapidly. 

Treatment — Rest the bowels by a restricted diet. Feed the 
patient entirely upon milk and broths. Keep him quiet in bed. 
Give to adults one tablet No. 29 every three hours; to children one 
tablet No. 15 every four hours. Place cloths wrung out of hot 
water over the bowels or a weak turpentine stupe may be used ; 
either one will give relief. 

Colic — Gripes — This disease is a spasm of the muscles of the 
intestines. It may be caused by constipation, presence in the 
intestine of food which cannot be digested, gas collecting in the 
intestine, too much bile being discharged into the intestine from 
the liver, lead poisoning, and by malarial fever or rheumatism. 

Symptoms and Signs — " There are attacks of pain, spreading 
over the abdomen, and following this is a period of ease. The 
pain is spoken of as tearing, cutting, pressing, twitching and 
pinching. The patient is restless and seeks relief in changing 
his position and in pressing hard against the abdomen. The 
skin is liable to be cold and the face to look pinched. The pulse 
is small and hard. The abdomen is hard and tense, whether 
puffed up or drawn inward. There is often nausea and vomiting 
and a desire to go to stool. The bowels are usually constipated. 
The attack lasts from a few minutes to several hours. The attack 
ceases suddenly with a feeling of great relief, although some sore- 
ness may remain for several days. ' ' 

Treatment — Give one tablet No. 29 every fifteen minutes until 
pain is relieved. After the pain has stopped give one tablet No. 
9 every hour until ten tablets have been given and with the last 
tablet of No. 9 give two tablets No. 4. No other treatment will 
be needed. 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 177 

Cholera Morbus — This is an acute inflammation of the 
mucous membrane lining the stomach and intestines. It is a 
disease of summer and early autumn and is caused by eating 
unripe fruits and vegetables and by food fermenting in the 
stomach 

Symptoms and Signs — This disease begins very suddenly, usu- 
ally after midnight, with chilliness, an intense sick feeling in 
the stomach, followed by vomiting and purging. Accompanying 
these symptoms are distressing burning or tearing pains or colic 
in the abdomen. At first the vomit is the ordinary matter from 
the stomach, but this soon changes to a very liquid vomit, and 
the stools, which are normal at first, soon become liquid and 
whitish or greenish in color. The patient becomes weak very 
quickly ; the skin is cold and covered with a clammy sweat, and 
the pulse is quite feeble. There is intense thirst, but when a 
drink is given to the patient, it is at once vomited up. To add 
to the distress of the patient, severe cramps occur in the muscles, 
especially in the calves and the large muscles of the arms and 
thighs, and in the fingers and toes. 

Treatment— Give one tablet No. 29 every fifteen minutes until 
six doses have been given. If the patient is very weak a little 
brandy or whiskey may be given every two or three hours. The 
thirst is best satisfied by small pieces of ice, but do not allow the 
patient to have liquids in any form. After six doses of No. 29 
have been given, stop giving this remedy and give one tablet 
No. 34 every three hours. The patient should live entirely upon 
boiled milk and bread for a few days and for about ten days 
should take one tablet No. 8 after each meal. 

Hemorrhoids — Piles — Hemorrhoids or piles are enlarge- 
ments of the veins of the rectum. The veins which enlarge are 
covered with the mucous lining of the rectum; they enlarge in 
spots only, and in enlarging push the mucous layer out in the 
form of nodules or bunches. When these nodules or bunches are 
pushed out so far as to protrude from the anus they are known 
as external piles, and when they are not pushed down as far as 
the anus they are known as internal piles. A single pile will 
vary in size from that of a pea to that of a walnut. The piles 
vary in size according to the amount of blood that is in them, 



178 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

but they are not composed entirely of blood vessels, for the thin 
mucous layer which covers them thickens and swells and forms 
a part of the pile. Piles are nearly always bluish in color. They 
are often caused by constipation, by disease of the liver, by 
improper diet, but in many cases there seems to be no cause. 

Symptoms and Sig?is — Many people have piles who are not 
annoyed at all by the tumors, while other people suffer pain and 
discomfort all of the time. The chief symptom of piles is a con- 
stant burning pain at the anus which is worse immediately follow- 
ing a movement from the bowels. If the piles are severe at all 
they inflame and cause the near parts to inflame also and this 
gives rise to pain. The tumors may be in such a position as to be 
forced through the anus at every movement from the bowel. In 
such a case they are extremely painful until they can be pushed 
back far enough so that the muscle which closes the anus will 
not pinch them. Piles and the inflammation which accompanies 
them often produce little cracks in the skin about the anus, and 
these are extremely painful. The presence of the enlarged blood 
vessels, together with the swelling and inflammation, often cause 
bleeding, and blood will appear in the stools. When there is any 
considerable amount of blood the disease is spoken of as "bleed- 
ing piles. ' ' The symptoms of piles are varied, but are so well 
known by everyone that further remarks are unnecessary. 

Treatment — When piles are large and very troublesome the 
only cure which is practical is the removal of the tumors by a 
competent surgeon. In milder cases see that the bowels move 
freely and easily each day. One tablet of No. 16 taken each 
morning before breakfeast will produce the desired effect in most 
cases. Should this not do the work take one tablet No. 16 at 
night and one in the morning. The food should consist of 
fruits, vegetables and grain foods. 

For local use the following will be of benefit : Tannic acid, 30 
grains; tincture of opium, 10 drops; vaseline, 1 ounce. Mix 
thoroughly and apply to the piles every evening. See Appendix 
for special pile remedy. 

Habitual or Chronic Constipation — A persistent ten- 
dency to constipation is a frequent symptom in many different 
diseases, where it is almost always due to a lack of the 



HEALTH AT HOME. 179 

normal twisting movements of the intestine. In many instan- 
ces this diminished energy in the intestine is only one 
symptom of general weakness of the body. Thus in all pos- 
sible forms of chronic disease where we find loss of flesh and 
strength the movements of the intestines become sluggish and the 
movements from the bowels delayed. A small amount of food, 
especially when composed largely of fluids, and much rest in 
bed or a small amount of physical exercise, or all of these condi- 
tions often account for the constipation frequently seen in patients 
with chronic disease. In other cases the cause of habitual consti- 
pation is disease of the intestine itself. In all forms of catarrh of 
the intestines there is a tendency to constipation ; also in disease 
of the peritoneum and in disease of the liver. Diseases of the 
brain and spinal cord often produce chronic constipation. 

While constipation, in the diseases thus far described, is a 
symptom which depends upon the disease, there is a form of 
chronic constipation where the constipation is the chief symptom, 
and it must therefore be considered a disease by itself. Many 
people who look perfectly well and are entirely able to attend to 
their business, are constantly troubled because there is not a 
movement from the bowels every day, as there should be, but 
only once in three or four days or less often. Besides the trouble 
with the bowels such patients complain of dizziness, pressure, 
coldness, headache and disturbed sleep. Very often nervous 
symptoms are a prominent sign of chronic constipation. 

Treatment — The treatment of chronic constipation requires care 
and patience. The diet must first be regulated. A patient suffer- 
ing from chronic constipation should eat plenty of food — meat, 
vegetables and fruits should all be used, and three good meals 
should be disposed of each day. It is a good plan to drink a 
glass of cold water each morning before breakfast, and such foods 
as graham and rye bread, large amounts of butter, grapes, dates, 
figs, nuts and honey will be of much benefit. Having paid atten- 
tion to the diet, appoint a regular hour each day for a passage 
from the bowels, and at that time go to stool and remain until a 
movement is secured. As to remedies the one of most value is 
No. 16, and the patient should take one tablet at night and one 
in the morning before breakfast. Should this not be sufficient 
two tablets may be taken at a time ; then as the habit of daily 



180 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

movement asserts itself the remedy may be gradually dispensed 
with, and in time a complete cure will be produced. 

Obstruction of the Intestines — Closure or obstruction of 
the intestines occurs occasionally and may be due to tumors in 
the intestine, obstruction in the intestine from the impacting of 
excreta, from impacting of gallstones or from some foreign body 
which has been swallowed and has lodged in the intestine. It 
may also be due to the intestines twisting and forming kinks in 
the tube, or one portion of the intestine may slip inside of another 
portion, set up an inflammation, and close the tube in this way. 
The pressure of a tumor upon the outside of the intestine may 
also cause obstruction. The symptoms of intestinal obstruction 
are severe and varied and the treatment cannot possibly be carried 
out at home ; hence when such a thing is suspected send for a 
physician. 

Appendicitis — This disease is an inflammation of the small 
worm-like appendage which is situated at the junction of the 
small and large intestines. This appendage is known as the 
vermiform appendix. The disease is caused by particles of food 
or the seeds of berries or fruit lodging in the vermiform appen- 
dix; these set up a mild inflammation, and a certain amount of 
decay goes on in the contents of the appendix, swelling begins 
and soon pus begins to form and the passage from the appendix 
into the intestine becomes stopped and an abscess is formed. 

Symptoms and Signs — Appendicitis begins with a feeling of 
weight and soreness in the abdomen, on the right side and above 
the hip bone. Very soon sharp pain is felt and a swelling is 
noticed about the seat of pain. At times a hard lump may be 
felt, which is very tender. The disease comes on slowly and 
may not be noticed at ali until there is considerable swelling. 
Aside from the symptoms given, chills, slight fever, spells of 
sweating and a throbbing in and about the swelling may be 
present. 

Treatment — The best treatment for all cases in which an abscess 
is surely present is an operation. When the case is not severe 
enough for this apply cloths wrung out of ice water over the 
swelling and paint the parts well with tincture of iodine. If the 
pain is severe give one tablet No. 25 every two hours and two 



HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 181 

tablets of No. 4 every four hours. Should the case be severe call 
a physician. 

Peritonitis — This is an inflammation of the membrane which 
covers the intestines and which lines the abdominal cavity. 
The disease may be caused by intense cold, by the irritation of 
blisters, by blows upon the abdomen, by inflammation of the 
stomach or intestines, by rupture and by certain diseases. 

Symptoms and Signs — There are three forms of this disease and 
the signs in each variety differ somewhat. In the acute form 
the disease begins suddenly with a chill and fever ranging from 
102° to 103° ; the pulse is tense and wiry and from 100 to 140 
beats per minute; there is severe cutting or boring pain, a great 
amount of tenderness over the seat of the pain in the abdomen ; 
the patient lies on his back with the thighs drawn up ; the abdo- 
men is tense, hard and bloated; the appetite is poor; nausea and 
vomiting are found in many cases, and hiccough is not uncom- 
mon. Occasionally in cases of acute peritonitis the temperature 
will fall below the normal, usually not lower than 98°. The 
secondary form is caused by some other disease, as typhoid fever. 
It begins in one spot and gradually spreads ; thus typhoid fever 
may cause a small rupture in the intestine and this in turn will 
cause an inflammation of the peritoneum. This form is always 
accompanied by severe pain ; the fever rises, the pulse is hard and 
vomiting is present. The symptoms continue from six to eight 
days, when they begin to grow better, and a tedious convales- 
cence begins, or the pain and tenderness grow more severe, the 
strength fails, the skin is cold, the pulse rapid, the face has an 
anxious expression, with pinched features and sunken eyes, and 
death finally occurs. The chronic form begins with chills which 
occur very irregularly; there is fever and some sweating; the 
abdomen is distended ; there are periods of constipation, followed 
by like periods of diarrhea ; there is tenderness over the whole 
abdomen ; colicky pains occur during the digestion of a meal, 
and the patient loses flesh and strength rapidly. 

Treaimejit — Apply cloths wrung out of hot water over the 
abdomen. Feed the patient upon a light sick diet composed for 
the most part of liquids. Give one tablet No. 25 every hour the 
first day and one tablet No. 25 every three hours after that. Also 



182 HKAI/TH AT HOME- 

give one tablet No. 27 every four hours. If the patient is weak 
at all use stimulants, one teaspoonful of whiskey or brandy every 
three or four hours. If this is not sufficient a larger amount may 
be used. As the patient gets better and the pain ceases entirely 
give one tablet^No. 17 three times a day before meals and con- 
tinue this for from five to eight weeks. 

Dropsy — This disease is a collection of fluid in the abdomi- 
nal cavity. Dropsy is caused by disease of the heart, kidneys, 
liver or lungs. The amount of fluid in the abdominal cavity 
ranges from a few teaspoonfuls to many gallons. It is generally 
of a straw color or at times greenish. 

Symptoms and Signs — The disease comes on slowly and the 
abdomen is usually considerably swollen before the disease attracts 
any attention. Constipation is always present and is caused by 
pressure of the fluid upon the bowels ; the urine is also scanty 
from the same cause. The breathing and action of the heart are 
both interfered with from pressure of the fluid upward. The 
navel is forced outward by the same cause. Laying one hand on 
the side of the abdomen and gently tapping the opposite side 
with the other hand will give a wave-like feeling. 

Treatment — Medical treatment is of little value, and when 
dropsy is present call a physician and have him remove the fluid 
by operation. He can then suggest treatment for the disease 
which caused the dropsy. 

Jaundice — Jaundice is an acute inflammation of the mucous 
membrane which lines the bile ducts and that part of the intes- 
tine which is near the opening of the bile duct into the intestine. 
It is caused by excesses in eating and drinking, by debauches, 
by malaria and by warm days followed by cool nights. At the 
beginning of the disease the bile ducts become closed and the bile 
becomes dammed up in the gall bladder and is absorbed by the 
blood vessels in the liver and thus carried to various parts of the 
body, where it shows itself by a yellow color. 

Symptoms and Signs — The disease begins with distress in and 
about the stomach, a coated tongue, loss of appetite, nausea and 
sometimes vomiting, looseness of the bowels and a slight amount 
of fever. In from three to five days the white of the eyes becomes 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 183 

yellow and this yellow color gradually spreads over the entire 
body. The fever disappears, the skin becomes dry, harsh and 
itchy, the bowels become constipated, the stools whitish or clay 
colored, and accompanied by much gas and colicky pain. The 
urine is heavy and dark colored. When the whole surface is 
yellow the skin will be found to be cold, the heart action slow 
and much tenderness will be noticed over the liver. In from 
three to five days from the time the yellow appears, the symp- 
toms begin to improve and in from one to two weeks the skin will 
be of normal color and the bowels will move normally. 

Treatment — Have the patient take a warm bath, night and 
morning and add one ounce of carbonate of potassium to the water 
for each bath. Give two tablets No. 4 every two hours and one 
tablet No. 27 every three hours. The diet should consist almost 
entirely of milk and no fat, sweet or starchy food should be 
allowed at all. After the jaundice disappears give two tablets No. 
33 three times a day after meals and continue this for from two 
to four weeks. 

Gallstones — Biliary Calculi — These are hard, stone-like 
bodies which form in the gall bladder and give rise to severe pain 
on their passage from the gall bladder to the intestine. 

Symptoms and Signs — The presence of gallstones is not usually 
detected until one or more begin the passage from the gall bladder 
to the intestine, when they produce a very severe colic, known as 
gallstone colic. This colic begins very suddenly at the very 
instant that the gallstone passes into the duct leading from the 
gall bladder to the intestine ; the patient is seized with a piercing, 
agonizing pain in the region of the liver, and this pain rapidly 
spreads over the abdomen and right chest and many times extends 
to the right shoulder and arm. The muscles of the abdomen are 
cramped and tender. Nausea is always present, and many times 
there is vomiting. The pulse is small and feeble, the skin cool 
and the face shows pain and is somewhat anxious in expression. 
The pain lasts from an hour or two to several days, and stops as 
quickly as it began when the gallstone has passed from the gall 
duct into the intestine. Jaundice (yellow skin) usually follows 
the attack of pain, but this soon disappears. 

Treat?nent — The best treatment is a drug which will not keep 



184 HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 

and which therefore is not put in the Cabinet; it will be found in 
the Appendix and will certainly cure gallstones if used accord- 
ing to directions. Should an attack of this sort come on give one 
tablet No. 25 and repeat in a half hour if necessary. 

Congestion of the I/iver — Bilousness— This disease is 
caused by a fullness of the blood vessels of the liver and, as a 
result, the liver enlarges. It is caused by heat, constipation, 
malaria, excess in eating and drinking and excessive use of alco- 
holic liquor. 

Symptoms and Signs — The patient has a "tired feeling;" the 
limbs ache ; there is a slight amount of fever in the evening ; there 
is headache; the spirits are depressed; the tongue has a yellowish 
coating; there is no desire for food; some nausea is present; the 
bowels are constipated, the urine highly colored ; the whites of 
the eyes are yellow; the skin a muddy color, and there is a feel- 
ing of weight, fullness and soreness about the liver. The disease 
lasts about a week. 

Treatment — Give one tablet No. 9 every half hour until the 
bowels move freely. As soon as the bowels move give one tablet 
No. 4. Have the patient live entirely upon milk for a few days 
and give one tablet No. 33 before each meal. If there is some 
pain about the liver place cloths wrung out of hot water over the 
seat of pain. 

Hobnailed I4ver — Gin Drinker/ s I/iver — This is a form 
of disease of the liver which is quite common among those addic- 
ted to the use of alcohol. The disease is very slow in its progress 
and the symptoms are not well marked at first. The treatment is 
largely in the way of attention to diet, hygiene and correct, tem- 
perate living. 

Neuralgia — Although every pain is of course excited by irrita- 
tion of the nerves, still the name neuralgia is given to a certain 
special variety of pain. The characteristics of this particular 
nervous pain are as follows : First, it is felt along the exact 
course of some nerve or its branches ; second, it is usually a pain 
of some severity ; third, as a rule, the pain is not present all of 
the time, but grows better or worse at times. 

In many cases the cause of neuralgia cannot be discovered but 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 185 

in other cases facts may be known which either directly or indi- 
rectly cause the trouble. Neuralgia occurs most often in middle 
life, in nervous people and in people who are not strong physi- 
cally. Neuralgia may be caused by cold or wet, by wounds, 
bruises, surgical operations, diseases of the bones or of the mem- 
brane which covers the bones, and by tumors, ruptures and 
aneurisms. 

Symptoms and Signs — The neuralgic pain begins either quite 
suddenly, or more often after certain mild sensations, such as cold 
feelings, prickling, slight painful sensations, etc., have been 
noticed for some time. The pain during an attack is usually 
severe and is described as burning and boring, or shooting and 
tearing. The patient can usually trace the nerve by the pain. 
Cold air, mental excitement and movement of the part affected 
often produce an increase of the pain. The skin near the seat 
of pain is usually very sensitive and tender to slight pressure, 
but deep and continued pressure over the nerve relieves the pain 
during time of pressure. When the pain is severe enough to 
interfere with sleeping or eating, the whole system may be 
affected, otherwise the effects of neuralgia are entirely local. 

Treatment — It is important in people who have suffered from 
neuralgia to prevent the return of the disease if we can. For 
this object we must first consider the strengthening of the whole 
body in order to make it better able to resist the action of any 
causes of disease. The things to be chiefly looked after in this 
connection are proper food, good air, baths and general hygienic 
surroundings. In treating neuralgia look for a cause which may 
be treated. For example when neuralgia is caused by the pres- 
sure of a tumor upon a nerve the removal of the tumor will cure 
the neuralgia. The use of electricity in neuralgia is often of 
much value, and the best method of applying it is by an ordinary 
family battery. Place one sponge along the spine and pass the 
other over the seat of pain. A mustard plaster over the point of 
pain is sometimes of value. For the medical relief of the symp- 
toms give one tablet No. 35 evety four hours. 

Habitual Headache—Sick Headache— Chronic Head- 
ache — Very many people are subject to headache; in some cases 
it is spoken of as headache, in others as nervous or sick headache. 



186 HEAI/fH AT HOME. 

Headaches occur most often in nervous and in overworked people, 
but may occur in anyone. They are caused by disorders of 
digestion, by constipation, by catarrh of the nose, throat or ears 
by eye strain, and in some cases there seems to be no cause what- 
ever. One of the most frequent causes of headache is eye strain. 
This is especially true in young people, and is very often over- 
looked. When headache occurs in young or middle aged people 
it is always well to have the eyes examined by a competent 
specialist. In many cases the trouble will be removed by the use 
of a pair of perfectly fitted spectacles. 

Treatment — For the cure of headache keep the bowels and 
digestive apparatus in good working order, and for the relief of 
attacks take one tablet No. 30 every hour until the headache 
ceases. 

Paralysis — By paralysis is meant the loss of voluntary motion 
in the muscles of the body controlled by the will. A distinction 
is made between the complete loss of the power of active motion 
and the weakening of it. In complete paralysis of any part of 
the body or of a single muscle even the slightest voluntary motion 
cannot be produced in it; while in the weakening, or partial 
paralysis of a part certain movements are still possible, but they 
are more or less below the normal in strength, extent and dura- 
tion. Paraylsis or partial paralysis is due to disease or injury 
of portions of the brain, spinal cord or nerves. It may also be 
produced by pressure upon portions of the brain or spinal cord, 
as in the rupture of a blood vessel in the brain or the formation 
of a tumor about the brain, cord or nerves. Certain poisons, as 
lead, copper, arsenic, etc. , also cause paralysis at times. Paraly- 
sis often follows certain acute diseases. 

Symptoms and Signs — When a patient discovers that it is 
impossible to move certain members or muscles of the body we 
know that a paralysis exists. In some cases of paralysis the 
muscles retain their normal size for years, while in other cases 
they very soon shrink and become much smaller than normal. 
In some cases the paralyzed parts may be moved easily while in 
others the muscles contract and little or no motion can be pro- 
duced. In paralysis spasms of the muscles occur and these 
spasms are of many varieties and show themselves in many differ- 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 187 

ent degrees of severity. The symptoms of the various forms of 
paralysis would carry us into a long discussion of the brain and 
nerve centers, and even then we would be unable to give any 
clear-cut and definite instructions, hence we will not consider 
the subject further. 

Treatment — In general paralysis should be treated by the use 
of electricity, baths, rubbing, careful diet, hygienic surroundings 
and in the way of medicine No. 17 will be of most service, regu- 
lating the dose according to the severity of the case. 

Injuries of the Spinal Cord — In spite of the protected 
position of the spinal cord it is often severely injured. The most 
frequent causes of injury are fractures or dislocations of the spinal 
columnar " backbone." The spinal cord is often injured by 
gunshot wounds and by stabs. Injuries to the cord very often 
produce paralysis of some part of the body. In severe cases of 
injury to the spinal cord death occurs in a few hours or days or 
a permanent paralysis results. 

Treatment — The treatment should first be placed in the hands 
of a surgeon, as many cases can be relieved or cured by an opera- 
tion. If it is not a case for the surgeon put the patient to bed 
upon a soft bed, guard carefully against bed sores by bathing 
often with alcohol and by rubbing the parts with glycerine, to 
which add ten grains of tannic acid to the ounce of glycerine. 
Apply ice constantly to the injured part and later on use hot baths 
and electricity. For use in cases of this sort and in all cases of 
paralysis, the ordinary small, home battery will be of sufficient 
strength. 

locomotor Ataxia — Tabes Dorsalis — Consumption of 
the Spinal Cord — This is a chronic disease of the central ner- 
vous system and consists of the death of a portion of the spinal 
cord. Very little is known as to the actual cause of this disease, 
though many theories are advanced. This disease is found most 
often in persons of middle age, and more often in men than in 
women. 

Symptoms a?id Signs — The disease begins gradually with sharp, 
darting pains in the lower limbs, and with these occur distur- 
bances in digestion and some trouble with the kidneys or blad- 
der. Very soon the feet become numb and the patient is unable 



188 HEALTH AT HOME. 

to tell whether he is walking on hard or soft substances. If the 
upper part of the cord is affected the patient will be unable to 
button his clothing. Soon the patient becomes unable to walk 
in a staight line with the eyes closed, and can only do so with 
difficulty with the eyes open ; he is unable to stand erect with the 
feet close together, and as the disease progresses he throws his 
legs and feet about in a most grotesque manner. The power of 
the muscles is not lost, for with support the patient will kick or 
strike as hard as ever. Very early in the disease there is difficulty 
with the sight; the patient sees double or is unable to distinguish 
between colors. As the disease progresses, the sensation becomes 
much blunted, and it is several minutes before the prick of a pin 
will be felt. The patient will be unable to tell hot from cold. 
Flesh is lost rapidly. Some cases where treatment is commenced 
at the very start recover, but death is the end of the majority. 

Treatment — Rest, with absolutely nothing to do, is of first 
importance. Cold may be used along the spine. The diet should 
be wholesome and easily digested and cod liver oil is of value to 
keep up the strength. Give one tablet No. 17 three times a day 
after meals. If pain is present try to relieve it with No. 13 or 
No. 30. If these will not relieve the pain use No. 25 and give 
just enough to control the pain. 

Infantile Paralysis — This disease is a rapidly developing 
inflammation of a portion of the spinal cord, and it occurs sud- 
denly in children. 

Symptoms and Signs — The disease usually begins suddenly 
with a low fever which lasts a few days, and when the fever has 
left it is noticed that the child is paralyzed. The paralysis may 
affect both arms and both legs, the legs alone, or only one of the 
four extremities. The paralyzed part will not be as warm as the 
rest of the body and will be somewhat blue. After a few days 
the paralysis will improve somewhat, but the muscles will waste 
rapidly until nearly all of the muscular tissue is gone. 

Treatment — As soon as the paralysis appears complete rest must 
be insisted upon. Allow hot water to run from a fountain 
syringe along the spinal column — do this for fifteen minutes very 
hour. Give one-half tablet No. 27 every three hours and have 
a physician suggest further treatment. 



HEAI/fH AT HOME. 189 

Congestion of the Brain — This is due to an overfullness 
of the blood vessels of the brain. It may be produced by excesses 
in eating and drinking, excessive use of alcohol, sunstroke, pro- 
longed mental labor and by some other causes. 

Symptoms and Signs — Among the first signs is a ' ' rush of blood 
to the head, ' ' which is made worse by lying down. There is 
headache, with darting neuralgic pains, disturbance of sight and 
hearing, sparks before the eyes, buzzing in the ears, etc. The 
pupils of the eyes are small; there is dizziness; the mind is 
blunted ; the patient cannot concentrate the attention ; the temper 
is irritable and the patient may say an' 1 - do queer things. The 
face is red, the eyes bloodshot, the vessels in the neck throb and 
the sleep is disturbed by dreams and jerking of the limbs. If the 
attack is very sudden unconsciousness may occur. 

Treatment — Elevate the head and apply cold cloths or ice to 
the head and at the same time apply heat to the feet and legs. 
Give one tablet No. 4 every two hours until the bowels move 
freely and give two tablets No. 7 every two hours. 

Apoplexy — Hemorrhage of the Brain — This is the sud- 
den breaking of a blood vessel in the brain and the escape of the 
blood into the brain tissue, causing pressure and more or less 
destruction of brain tissue. 

Symptoms and Signs — Some cases begin with warnings and 
others without. There is headache, dizziness, spells of deafness 
or blindness, feelings of numbness in the arms or legs and a con- 
stant dread of an attack. The attack begins with vomiting, 
which is followed by partial or complete insensibility; the breath- 
ing is slow, irregular and noisy. When the breath is drawn in 
the paralyzed cheek will be drawn in, and will be puffed out 
when the breath is blown out. The pulse is slow and full, the 
face is flushed, the eyes bloodshot, the vessels in the neck throb 
and the temperature is below normal. If unconsciousness con- 
tinues longer than twenty-four hours death nearly always follows. 
When consciousness returns it usually does so in from two to 
three hours, and with it comes headache, confusion of the mind, 
more or less numbness and paralysis over one side of the body. 

Treatment — If the patient feels an attack coming on the best 
way to stop it is to bleed the patient at once and give four tablets 



190 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

No. 4. As soon as the bowels move give two tablets No. 7 every 
three hours and keep this up for from four to seven days. When 
the attack comes on loosen the clothing, elevate the head, 
remove everything that may be tight about the throat or chest, 
place the patient in a cool room, have no noise of any sort about, 
place the patient far enough over on one side as to permit what- 
ever secretion may be in the mouth to run out and not down the 
throat, place cold cloths or ice on the head and a mustard plaster 
on the feet and lower part of the legs. If the face is pale and the 
pulse irregular give stimulants. If the pulse is strong give one 
tablet No. 28 every three hours after consciousness is regained. 
For the headache and delirium give one tablet No. 30 every four 
hours. After the patient gets better use electricity for the para- 
lyzed muscles. 

Tumors of the Brain — A tumor of the brain is either a 
growth in the brain substance or in the membrane covering the 
brain or in the blood vessels of the brain. 

Symptoms and Signs — A sign always found in tumor of the 
brain is a headache which is constant and which gradually grows 
more severe. Other signs are: defects in vision, even blind- 
ness ; defects of hearing, taste and of speech, the latter due to 
paralysis of the vocal cords; dizziness, and associated with this is 
nausea and vomiting ; convulsions may occur ; the patient may 
become cross-eyed; sensations of numbness and coldness may 
occur in different parts of the body. 

Treatment — The treatment of tumors of the brain is very unsat- 
isfactory unless they can be treated by a surgeon, and even then 
the benefit is doubtful. Treat the various symptoms as they 
arise and take as good care of the patient as possible. There is no 
general treatment for this disease. 

Delirium Tremens — Alcoholism — These names are used 
to indicate the physical and mental conditions produced by the 
abusive use of alcoholic liquors. 

Symptoms and Signs — In the majority of cases delirium tremens 
results from a prolonged debauch in an old drinker. It begins 
with wakefulness, an irritable, excitable manner, followed by the 
characteristic illusions and hallucinations, during which snakes 
and all forms of reptiles are seen and these cause the most intense 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 191 

horror and fear in the victim. Defects in the senses of smell and 
hearing also occur; queer noises and horrid odors will be spoken 
of. This marked excitement is followed by great depression, dur- 
ing which the skin is cold and clammy, the pulse feeble, the 
muscles weak, the mind not at all clear, wakelulness is pro- 
nounced and some fever is present. An attack of delirium 
tremens usually lasts about two weeks, although death may occur 
at any time from heart failure, hemorrhage of the brain, or alco- 
holic pneumonia. As soon as the patient is able to sleep well he 
begins to get well. He will awake from natural sleep with a 
clear mind and a desire for food. 

Treatme?it — The patient should be placed in a room away from 
other people and should have a skillful nurse. Allow very small 
quantities of alcohol at first, and gradually cut the supply until 
none at all is given. Feed the patient upon milk, eggs, oysters, 
soups, etc. ; in fact upon an easily digested sick diet. Give five 
tablets No. 7 every three hours. Give five grains of chloral 
hydrate every two hours until the patient falls asleep, then do 
not give this remedy again. 

Heat Stroke — Sunstroke — This is a depression of the vital 
powers as a result of exposure to excessive heat. The affection 
may manifest itself as congestion of the brain, as heat exhaus- 
tion, and as true sunstroke. For the first mentioned see article 
on congestion of the brain. 

Symptoms and Signs — Heat exhaustion begins with a rapidly 
developed feeling of weakness and prostration; the skin is cool, 
the face pale, the voice weak; the pulse is rapid and feeble; the 
breathing is faster than normal ; the sight grows dim and indis- 
tinct, noises are heard in the ears and the person becomes 
partially or wholly unconscious. 

Sunstroke. The person suddenly becomes unconscious; the 
skin is red and hot; the whites of the eyes are bloodshot; the 
breathing may be rapid and shallow or slow and noisy ; the pulse 
is quick and may be either bounding or weak ; the temperature 
will be from 105° to 110° ; there will be no sweating, and death is 
liable to occur very soon. 

Treatment — Treatment for heat exhaustion is: Place the 
patient on his back with the head low down and give a good 



192 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

dose of whiskey or brandy at once. Then place in bed with cold 
cloths on the head and heat to the feet and legs. Cover the 
patient up well in bed and get the sweat started freely; allow 
him to sweat for two or three hours, then give a cool sponge 
bath and transfer him to a dry bed. Keep the cold cloths on the 
head and give one tablet No. 27 every two hours. Also give one 
tablet No. 17 every four hours. 

The treatment for sunstroke is : Place the patient in a cold 
bath at once and rub thoroughly with ice water; keep ice on the 
head constantly. Give one tablet No. 13 every two hours and 
one tablet No. 27 every three hours. Inject cold water into the 
rectum; keep the patient in cold water or wrapped in sheets 
wrung out of ice water. If the heart becomes very weak and 
the patient seems much depressed give stimulants, otherwise do 
not use stimulants in sunstroke. As the patient recovers some- 
what use the cold applications only just enough to keep down the 
fever and stop giving No. 13. Continue giving No. 27 every three 
hours, and give No. 17 three times a day before meals. In any 
case of overheat the patient will need to be very careful for a long 
time. Avoid excessive heat and all excesses of living of whatever 
sort. Live only on the plain foods, and use no coffee, tea, tobacco, 
nor alcoholic liquors of any sort. 

Hysteria — This is a disorder of the nervous system, of the 
nature of which it is impossible to speak definitely. In many 
cases hysteria comes on immediately after violent emotional agi- 
tation. Hysterical convulsions or paralysis may be caused by 
great terror, violent anger, or any unusual agitation. A single 
instance of mental excitement may produce hysteria, as in the 
case of a young girl who was awakened at night by the house 
being on fire and her room full of smoke. As a result of her 
breathing the smoke she had some severe throat trouble, and later 
on when the throat was entirely well developed hysteria to such 
an extent that she was unable to speak out loud. Many such 
instances occur in the practice of every physician. 

The cause of hysteria is in many instances entwined about the 
most private affairs — anxiety, sorrow, disappointed expectations, 
abandoned hopes, and in brief everything which can depress and 
overwhelm the mind, are the factors which may at last excite the 
nervous derangements of hysteria. Hysteria may develop with- 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 193 

out any specially noticeable cause. Among influences of the 
mind which favor the development of hysteria nothing aids more 
than a bad education. The whims of the child are not con- 
trolled, its will is not strengthened, nor its energy developed ; its 
imagination is unsuitably and excessively stimulated, or its intel- 
lectual power is overtaxed and prematurely ripened. 

Symptoms and Signs — In every case of known hysteria, or when 
the disease is suspected, we must examine the patient for certain 
symptoms and signs which are so common in hysteria, and in 
part so peculiar to it that they often enable us to certainly know 
that hysteria is present. The most important, because the com- 
monest, of these signs is some disturbance in sensibility. Very 
rare indeed is a case of hysteria met with in which there is not 
some change in sensibility. Therefore test the whole body care- 
fully for numb spots or spots where the ordinary sensitiveness of 
the skin is exaggerated ; also test the sight, smell, hearing and 
taste and ascertain if all are normal. In many cases a pin can be 
stuck through a fold of the skin and no pain be felt. This con- 
dition may be over the whole body or only in spots. A partial 
loss of sight or the inability to distinguish between colors may 
be present. The patient may not be able to detect sweet or sour 
by the taste, and odors may become confused. All these symp- 
toms are important, as they are rare indeed in actual disease. 
Sometimes exactly one-half of the body will be insensible to 
pain, while the other half will be normal. Again the patient 
may complain of certain spots where even the slightest pressure 
produces pain ; however, if the patient's mind can be fixed upon 
something else very firm pressure upon these same spots will pro- 
duce no pain whatever. Hysterical persons may become para- 
lyzed in various parts of the body very suddenly, as in hysteria 
from fright, or it may come on slowly. Hysterical paralysis is a 
paralysis of the will. The patient has lost the power to will a 
movement of the affected muscle. Very often the patient will 
move the legs about very well when lying down, but when urged 
to stand up or walk the knees double up, the patient begins to 
tremble, the breathing grows rapid and jerky, and there is not 
the slightest effort made to move the legs. If only one leg be 
paralyzed the gait is peculiar; the sound limb makes long strides, 
while the paralzyed one is held perfectly stiff and is often 



194 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

dragged along with a loud shuffling sound. In severe hysteria 
there may be high fever when the temperature is taken under the 
tongue, but when taken in the rectum the same case will show 
no fever whatever. Colicky pains, obstinate constipation, occa- 
sional diarrhea and similar symptoms are often met with. Hys- 
terical persons are irritable and emotional, easily depressed, sensi- 
tive, whimsical, and subject to violent extremes of feeling. They 
are inclined to exaggerate their sufferings, exact a great deal of 
attention, and are anxious to excite sympathy. They have little 
energy or force of will, but they are sly and obstinate in carrying 
out any pet desire. Again they can be very amiable and attrac- 
tive if they take the fancy. They are almost invariably clever. 
Hysteria is not often seen in dull or stupid persons. These symp- 
toms represent many cases, but not all. Hysterical patients very 
frequently present no very great disturbances, but complain 
merely of all sorts of derangements, sometimes of one kind and 
sometimes of another, and yet are able to perform their daily 
duties fairly well. 

In regard to the severity and variety of hysterical attacks, they 
are so manifold that an exhaustive account of all the possibilities 
cannot here be given, but certain features and details are so com- 
mon in them and recur so often that a consideration of them is 
often in itself sufficient to name the disease. The mildest form 
of hysterical attack consists of a feeling of distress, anxiety, diz- 
ziness and especially of a loss of voluntary control of the body. 
The patient sinks on a bed or chair, closes the eyes and becomes 
incapable of action or speech. Usually the breathing is more 
rapid, there is winking of the eyes, trembling, etc. Very often 
the heart palpitates quite rapidly during an attack. In such 
cases if water is thrown upon the patient without too great a 
regard for the feelings of the patient, recovery is very rapid. In 
some cases of hysteria the breathing becomes very rapid — as many 
as 200 respirations per minute have been noted. Hiccough, loud 
sobbing, grunting, etc., have been seen in hysteria. Patients 
will sometimes talk continually to themselves, usually very 
rapidly and with frequent repetitions of the same word or phrase. 
Sometimes patients will complain of a ball in the throat which 
changes its position somewhat. This is a sure indication of hys- 
teria, as it is found in no other disease. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 195 

The symptoms given have been confined to the most important 
and frequent signs and yet even this brief outline serves to show 
what an infinite variety of shapes the disease may assume. 

First : In one class of cases there are no nerve symptoms 
whatever, the patient merely displaying the general mental con- 
dition characteristic of hysteria: she is easily excited, prone 
to make much of her ills, has all sorts of symptoms, such as pain, 
palpitation, dyspepsia and difficult breathing, and these are 
aggravated by mental excitement, while at other times the symp- 
toms may so nearly vanish that the patient does not appear to 
be ill. 

Second : This class of cases has more severe disturbance, com- 
ing on after some unfavorable mind influence. The patient may 
have displayed a general hysterical tendency previously or may 
have seemed perfectly well. In this class we may see all of the 
symptoms above described. There may be paralysis, spasm, 
numbness or oversensitiveness. One or more of these symptoms 
may persist for weeks or months ; again they may vanish quickly 
and give place to other disturbances. Any aggravation of the 
symptoms is usually due to emotional excitement. This is parti- 
cularly true of hysterical convulsions. In many cases each attack 
is due to anger, fright or some similar cause. 

Third : The third class consists of the most severe forms of 
hysteria. They are as complicated as they are puzzling, and 
form all sorts of combinations with all of the hysterical symptoms. 

The entire duration of the disease varies greatly. The true 
root of the evil is the excessive excitability of the nervous sys- 
tem, and often it is not possible to cure this. If not, the trouble 
lasts almost indefinitely. The disease comes on afresh after 
periods of apparently perfect health. Usually the symptoms do 
not cease until quite late in life. There are, however, many 
cases of complete and permanent cure. 

Treatment — What has been said about the cause of hysteria at 
once suggests a possible method of preventing the disease. A 
watchful eye will often detect, even in childhood, the signs of 
abnormal nervous excitiability, and in such a case parents will 
make it their duty to carefully look after the physical and mental 
training of the child and thus avoid the greater disturbances that 
may lead to hysteria. If hysteria be already present the first and 



196 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

most important treatment is treatment of the mind. There could 
be no greater mistake than to ridicule the patient, for hysteria is 
a disease, and its symptoms are just as true as far as the patient 
is concerned as the symptoms of any other disease. It is impor- 
tant, however, to strengthen the will, and this can sometimes be 
best accomplished by removing the patient from friends and plac- 
ing in a hospital. A good treatment for hysteria is the use of an 
electric battery, cold bathing and rubbing. Very often the sud- 
den pain caused by the application of electricity will cause a 
patient to quickly move a paralyzed muscle. The milder vari- 
eties of hysterical convulsion, such as hiccough, are often con- 
trolled by stern reproof. The numbness is best treated with 
electricity. Medicines in hysteria do good just as long as the 
patient has faith in them. This explains the frequent cases ot 
rapid recovery after taking "Electro-homeopathic" remedies, and 
those still more marvelous cures affected by ' ' Faith cure, " ' ' Chris- 
tian Science, " ' ' Magnetic Healers, " ' ' Osteopaths, ' ' etc. This 
point, of the influence of the mind over the functions of the body, 
was very nicely illustrated in a French hospital some litttle time 
ago. One morning the physician in charge of the hospital ordered 
a certain dose of medicine to be given to every patient in one of 
the hospital wards. The nurse in charge gave the medicine as 
directed and in a half hour the physician came into the ward in 
a very excited manner and in a loud voice asked the nurse if any 
of the patients had vomited. She replied that they had not and 
asked why he suspected such a thing. He replied that he had 
made a mistake and that the medicine which he had ordered 
given was a violent emetic. The nurse seemed much excited by 
this information, and in less than five minutes over half of the 
patients in the ward were vomiting. The medicine given was 
bismuth, and this, in place of producing vomiting, tends to settle 
the stomach. Other trials of a similar nature have been made, 
and we can thus see the very powerful influence which the mind 
has over the functions of the body. Should a patient be suffering 
from an actually diseased organ no mind influence can cure the 
trouble, but if the disease is one which relates to the function of 
some organ it may be cured by mind influence. The marvelous 
cures so often heard of are invariably among the class of cases 
in which the disease is functional ; or in other words the disease 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 197 

has no actual existence and is in the mind of the patient alone. 
In medicine this condition is always spoken of as hysteria. 
Osteopathy may do a certain amount of good, as in many cases 
the rubbing and pounding practiced by these people will afford a 
certain amount of stimulation to weakened members. Eclectic or 
electro-homeopathic treatments do actual good in but a very 
small number of cases. The persons who experiment upon the 
people by holding out ' ' Faith Cure, " " Magnetic Healing, ' ' and 
" Christian Science" as a cure-all for any and all diseases have 
undoubtedly brought many hysterical people to their senses, and 
their wonderful cures are all among this class, but they have yet 
to cure the first patient who was suffering from organic or actual 
disease of an organ of the body. Hence we may say that in hys- 
teria, as a rule, treatment either produces a brilliant cure or it 
has no effect at all. 

The drugs that produce the best results in hysteria are tincture 
of asafetida, one-half teaspoonful every three hours, and valer- 
ianate of ammonia, one teaspoonful every three hours. 

Nervous Prostration — This is a debility of the nervous sys- 
tem, causing an inability or lessening the desire to perform or 
attend to the various duties or occupations of the individual. 
It may be caused by various chronic diseases, mental worry or 
strong emotion, overwork, nervous temperament, sexual excesses 
alcohol and tobacco. 

Symptoms and Signs — This disease is a condition of nerve tire 
or nerve exhaustion, and hence the nervous energy necessary for 
any particular organ to perform its function is wanting. One of 
the earliest signs of nervous prostration is an irritable or weak 
mind, as shown in the inability to concentrate the thoughts, and 
when the patient attempts to do so, headache, dizziness, restless- 
ness, fear, a feeling of weariness and depression, and a host of 
other symptoms are produced. There may be difficulty in seeing, 
the heart may palpitate, the hands and feet may be cold ; there 
may be chilliness, followed by flashes of heat, and this in turn 
followed by slight sweating. Patients are unable to sleep, or if 
they do sleep the sleep is tiring and accompanied by unpleasant 
dreams. 



198 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

Treatment — Rest is a first essential, and this is best accom- 
plished by removing the patient some distance from home. Send 
him on a visit where his entire surroundings will be new and 
where the everyday things which he has been accustomed to all 
his life will not worry and annoy ; he should have pleasant com- 
panionship and be relieved of all responsibility. Attend carefully 
to the diet and hygiene ; give daily baths with plenty of rubbing. 
Give one tablet No. 17 three times a day before meals. Keep the 
bowels well open by the use of No. 16. 

Acute Bright' S Disease — This is an acute inflammation of 
a portion of the kidney. It is caused by cold and exposure, by 
scarlet fever, by the continued use of irritating medicines, such 
as turpentine and cantharides, and by blows and injuries to the 
back. 

Symptoms and Signs — The disease usually begins suddenly 
with fever, nausea and persistent vomiting ; dull pain in the back 
over the kidneys, frequent desire to urinate, some diarrhea ; the 
skin is harsh and dry, the pulse quick, tense and full. Some 
dropsy appears ; at first a puffiness is noticed under the eyes, then 
the entire eyelids and face become puffy and swollen ; the ankles 
begin to swell, and this extends to the legs and the walls of the 
abdomen. If the attack follows scarlet fever there will be much 
greater paleness and weakness than if the disease is primary. 
The urine is heavy, scanty, smoky in color, and if a small portion 
of the urine be boiled and then a drop or two of nitric acid be 
added a sediment will be formed showing that albumen is present. 
The disease lasts from one to four weeks. 

Treatment — Absolute rest in bed is necessary. The diet 
should be entirely fluid, milk, broths, oysters, etc. See chapter 
on Diet in Disease, p. 106. Allow the patient to drink an abun- 
dance of water, but no tea, coffee nor stimulants. Apply a mus- 
tard plaster over the kidneys. Give five tablets No. 9 and two 
tablets No. 4 each morning before breakfast. Give a hot bath 
each day and immediately after the bath place the patient in bed ; 
cover him well and place hot water bottles and hot bricks or irons 
about him ; allow him to sweat freely for a half hour, then give a 
warm sponge bath and transfer to a dry bed. As soon as the 
dark color disappears from the urine give one tablet No. 17 three 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 199 

times a day after meals ; continue this remedy for at least four 
weeks. 

Chronic Bright's Disease — This is a chronic inflammation 
of the kidneys. It sometimes follows the acute form, or may be 
caused by syphilis, excessive use of alcohol, mercury or lead 
poisoning, and by some other conditions 

Symptoms and Signs — The disease begins very slowly ; some- 
times the first thing noticed will be dropsy, which, beginning 
under the eyes and in the face, gradually extends over the whole 
body. In other cases the dropsy does not come on until later, 
but the patient becomes pale, loses strength, suffers from palpita- 
tion of the heart and difficult breathing, has frequent attacks of 
vomiting, headache and dizziness, and the eye-sight becomes more 
or less impaired. All these things occur without any apparent 
cause. The urine is scanty and highly colored, and if a little of 
it be boiled and a few drops of nitric acid be added a sediment 
will be noticed which indicates the presence of albumen. As the 
disease progresses the urine will increase to more than the nor- 
mal amount and the bladder will be very irritable. The patient 
will be very pale and bloodless. Disturbances in digestion and 
neuralgic pains are common. 

Treatment — It must be remembered that the course of a case of 
chronic Bright's disease is not continuously downward ; periods 
will occur when the patient seems so much better that he and his 
friends are often led to believe that he will have an early and 
complete recovery, yet the symptoms may at any time grow worse 
and death occur quite suddenly. Two things are very important 
in the treatment of chronic Bright's disease — rest and diet. The 
patient should be relieved of all business cares and spend the 
greater portion of the time in bed. The diet should consist 
entirely of milk and no stimulants whatever should be used. Give 
one tablet No. 17 three times a day before meals. If drops}' is 
present use the hot bath treatment as recommended in acute 
Bright's disease. Recoveries from chronic Bright's disease are 
rare indeed, and death often occurs very suddenly. 

Movable Kidney — This disease is a condition of the kidney 
in which the tissues about the organ are so loose as to permit the 
kidney to be moved about in certain directions, causing a mov- 



200 HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 

able tumor in the abdomen. Very few if any symptoms accom- 
pany this trouble, and as no injurious results are to be feared the 
condition requires no treatment. If a tumor in the abdomen has 
been found to be a movable kidney no further anxiety need be 
felt. 

Cystitis — Catarrh of the Bladder — This is an inflamma- 
tion of the mucous membrane which lines the bladder and may 
be either acute or chronic. The acute variety may be caused by 
too long a retention of urine, by foreign bodies in the bladder, 
by inflammation of the urinary passage, by blows over the blad- 
der, and it may follow diphtheria or fevers. The chronic vari- 
ety follows the acute variety or is caused by stone in the bladder, 
stricture or chronic Bright's disease. 

Symptoms and Signs — The acute variety begins suddenly with 
slight fever, loss of appetite, sleeplessness, a feeling of depression 
frequent desire to pass water, but only a few drops at a time are 
passed, and immediately afterwards a severe pain is felt in the 
bladder; pain is often felt in this region and is usually dull, 
but at times becomes sharp and piercing ; the urine is cloudy and 
often has a strong odor. L,itmus paper placed in the urine will 
remain blue. 

The chronic variety begins slowly and is usually caused by 
stone in the bladder or some other obstruction to the free passage 
of the urine. Dull pain is present; the urine is passed often and 
but little at a time, and on standing for some time the urine 
leaves a considerable sediment. Patients with this disease usu- 
ally lose a considerable amount of strength. 

Treatment — Rest must be insisted upon. The diet should con- 
sist as nearly as possible of milk, and all highly seasoned foods 
are forbidden. Place hot cloths over the bladder or a very light 
mustard plaster may be used. Control the pain by the use of No 
25. Give one-half teaspoonful of sweet spirits of nitre every four 
hours. Have this well diluted with water. 

Inflammatory Rheumatism— Acute Articular Rheu- 
matism — This is a constitutional disease in which there is fever, 
and inflammation occurs about and in the joints. 

Symptoms and Signs — The disease begins suddenly, generally 
at night, with a chill or chilliness, pain and stiffness in the joints, 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 201 

loss of appetite, and fever, which soon rises to 102° or 104°, the 
pulse beats about 80 or 90 beats per minute ; there is great thirst, 
profuse sweat, scanty, highly colored urine ; the bowels are consti- 
pated. Sleep is prevented by the pain and the profuse sweating. 
There is pain, tenderness, increased heat, swelling and redness 
of one or more joints. The pain is made worse by motion or 
pressure. The inflammation may suddenly cease in one joint 
and as suddenly attack another. Inflammatory rheumatism 
sometimes affects the heart, and when this occurs the case becomes 
a serious one indeed, and skilled advice should be sought. 

Treatment — The patient should be kept warm at all times, wear 
woolen clothing and be covered in bed with blankets. Hot dry 
cloths may be placed on the swollen joints. The diet should be 
of easily digested foods, such as are recommended in the chapter 
on Diet in Diease, p. 106. Give one tablet No. 36 every three 
hours. Give one tablet No. 37 at night and one in the morning. 
As the patient grows better give one tablet No. 33 three times a 
day after meals. 

Muscular Rheumatism — This is an inflammatory affection 
of the voluntary muscles. It is a disease of adult life and is due 
to exposure to cold and damp. 

Symptoms and Signs — The disease begins somewhat suddenly 
with pain and tenderness in the affected muscles. Considerable 
stiffness and difficulty in movement are also experienced and any 
movement increases the pain. The pain may be very severe and 
constant or it may only be felt when the muscle is moved. Some- 
times an affected muscle will cramp. The pain may be severe 
enough to prevent sleep. The general symptoms of muscular 
rheumatism are so well known that a longer description will be 
unnecessary. 

Treatment — Rest the affected part ; wear flannel next to the skin ; 
use dry hot cloths over the affected parts. A light mustard plas- 
ter is often of service. Keep the bowels well open ; avoid expos- 
ure of any sort ; give one tablet No. 31 every four hours and one 
tablet No. 36 before each meal. Hot dry air baths or medical 
vapor baths do much good in all cases of muscular rheumatism. 
A very convenient mode of giving such treatment is b)' the use 
of a bath cabinet, and the description of such an appliance will 
be found in the Appendix. 



202 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

If the instructions here given are carefully carried out a major- 
ity of the cases of chronic rheumatism will be cured. 

Scurvy — This is a peculiar lack of nutrition which occurs 
when a sufficient supply of fresh vegetables are not included in 
the diet. 

Symptoms and Signs — General weakness and a decided indis- 
position to either mental or physical exertion is one of the symp- 
toms. The skin is dry, rough and muddy in color ; the face is 
pale and bloated. The gums swell and become spongy and bleed 
very easily ; the teeth become loose ; the lips are pale ; the breath 
is very offensive ; the eyes are sunken and surrounded by dark 
circles ; bleeding may occur from the stomach, mouth or intesti- 
nal canal, and the face and ankles may swell. The spirits are 
much depressed ; the heart palpitates on slight exertion ; the urine 
is highly colored, and the patient usually longs for vegetables and 
fruits. 

Treatment — Give the juice of lemons, oranges and other fruits. 
After a short time give raw cabbage and raw potatoes along with 
bread and milk. Give one tablet No. 33 after each meal. No 
other treatment will be needed. 

Diabetes Mellitus — This is a chronic disease in which sugar 
is found in the urine ; there is an excessive amount of urine 
passed and the patient gradually loses flesh and strength. 

Symptoms and Signs — The urine is passed more often and 
there is a greater amount than normal — sometimes as high as 
twenty or thirty pints will be passed in twenty-four hours ; it is 
pale, clear and watery and has a sweetish odor. Should these 
things be present take a sample of the urine to a physician and 
have him test it for sugar. This test is somewhat complicated 
and therefore it will not be given here. A simple test is given 
on p. 140 but is not an accurate test. There is pain over the kid- 
neys. The passage of this increased amount of urine which con- 
tains sugar will cause itching and burning of the external parts. 
A very constant symptom in this disease is thirst with a dry 
and parched condition of the mouth ; the appetite is uncertain. 
The bowels are constipated and the stools pale and dry. The 
patient complains of feeling very weak and languid and of sore- 



HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 203 

ness and pain in the limbs. There is more or less loss of flesh ; 
the skin is harsh and dry and the face has a worn expression. 
The spirits are depressed and the patient is usually very irritable. 
Death is the end in the majority of these cases and the younger 
the patient the more rapid the fatal termination. 

Treatment — The importance of a strictly regulated diet cannot 
be too firmly impressed upon the mind of the patient. The 
patient should eat no food whatever that contains starch or sugar. 
He should not eat bread or flour, honey, potatoes, peas, beans, 
rice, breakfast foods, oatmeal, turnips, beets, corn, carrots, prunes, 
grapes, and in fact all fruits should be avoided. No liquor of any 
sort should be allowed. The diet should consist of meat, poultry, 
game, fish and milk ; the milk should only be allowed in moderate 
quantity. Small amounts of tea, coffee and cocoa, without sugar, 
may also be allowed. The patient should wear flannel and have 
two or three warm baths a week and one good sweat in bed sur- 
rounded by hot water bottles each week. Give one tablet No. 25 
every three hours. Give one tablet No. 33 three times a day after 
meals. A change for the better is many times produced by a 
change of climate. The treatment of this disease, however, is 
unsatisfactory at best. 

Diabetes Insipidus — This is a disease in which a large 
quantity of pale, watery urine is discharged. It does not contain 
either albumen or sugar. 

Symptoms and Signs — There is great thirst, with an increased 
flow of pale, watery urine, the amount varying from five to six 
gallons in twenty-four hours. Sugar and albumen are absent. 
The appetite is good, the bowels are constipated and the skin is 
dry and harsh. There is nervousness, irritability, failure of 
memory, headache, vivid imagination and inability to concen- 
trate the mind. Unless the affection is soon arrested great loss 
of flesh and strength results. 

Treatment — Give one tablet No. 16 at night and one in the 
morning before breakfast. Give one tablet No. 33 after each 
meal. 

Obesity — The amount of adipose tissue in the body is subject 
to considerable variation, and it is not possible to state absolutely 



204 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

what should be considered as normal and what as abnormal. For 
practical purposes, however, we may draw the line where the 
increased size grows burdensome to the individual. After a cer- 
tain point any further addition to the amount of fatty tissue is 
almost sure to work serious injury, and is therefore to be regarded 
as an actual disease, and not merely an inconvenience. The most 
frequent and important cause of obesity is the habitual use of too 
large an amount of food. The constant use of alcoholic liquors 
tends to produce fat. Fat may be produced by a lack of suffici- 
ent exercise. The effects of obesity are first noticed in the breath- 
ing and in the circulation; the patient complains of shortness of 
breath and there may be some disturbance of the heart or the 
circulation, such as rapid pulse, palpitation, etc. ; the appetite 
and digestion are somewhat disturbed and there is a tendency to 
bronchitis and other catarrhal troubles. 

Treatment — To reduce fat two points must be borne in mind : 
first, lessen the amount of fat taken into the body ; second, destroy 
or reduce that already present. The first is accomplished by 
means of diet. The patient should live upon lean meat, fish, 
fresh vegetables, fruits, tea, coffee and water ; a very small amount 
of bread may be allowed, and rice, eggs and oysters may be used 
in moderation. No potatoes should be eaten, and aside from the 
articles mentioned no other food should be used. The patient 
should take frequent baths, plenty of exercise and obey the rules 
of hygiene. 

The second point, the reduction of the fat already in the body, 
requires a long course of treatment and special remedies are 
required. It is impossible to place a sufficient amount of such 
remedies in the Home Remedy Cabinet, but in the Appendix will 
be found an article that will be of interest to those who desire to 
take treatment for the reduction of obesity. 

Scrofula — A brief description of scrofula from a practical 
standpoint is here presented. From a scientific ponit of view 
scrofula is not to be regarded as any special variety of disease. 
The term is applied to a group of symptoms seen most frequently 
in childhood, the essential points of which consist in the appear- 
ance of chronic enlargements of the lymph glands, and in certain 
diseases of the skin and mucous membranes. Most scrofulous 



HEALTH AT HOME. 205 

children appear pale and have a flabby skin and soft muscles. 
The enlarged lymph glands will be felt in the throat under the 
chin. Chronic skin troubles are seen on various parts of the 
body. The most common of these is a scaly eczema which 
affects the face, scalp or extremities. Catarrh of the nose, ulcers 
on the eyes and discharge from the ears are some of the manifes- 
tations of the disease in mucous membranes. Many times the 
bones and joints are diseased. 

Treatment — The local signs of the disease, such as eczema, dis- 
charging ears, etc. , must first be treated, and then the general 
health of the patient built up. Cases of scrofula are best handled 
by physicians, as the treatment varies greatly and requires close 
watching. 

DIFFERENCES NOTICED IN DISEASES. 

Between Asiatic and Simple Cholera — Asiatic — 1. A 
painless diarrhea is noticed at the beginning. 

2. Is not caused directly from an error in diet. 

3. First pain is severe and shooting down thighs. 

4. Prostration is overwhelming and more rapid than would 
be expected from the number of evacuations. 

5. The skin is cool, but the thermometer placed in any of the 
cavities shows much fever. 

6. The evacuations are like rice water from the very start of 
the disease. 

7. Cramps commence in the extremities. 

8. The veins are congested ; the tongue, lips and extremities 
are a livid purple. 

9. The urine contains albumen. 
Simple — 1. Begins very suddenly. 

2. Is generally caused by an error in diet. 

3. The first pain is colic in the abdomen. 

4. Prostration is gradual and less than might be expected from 
the amount of vomiting and purging present. 

5. The skin is cool; a thermometer placed in any of the cavi- 
ties shows a normal temperature. 

6. The stools are bilious and cause burning and smarting pain. 



206 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

7. Cramps commence in the abdomen. 

8. The veins are not congested and the tongue, lips and 
extremities are of normal color. 

9. There is no albumen in the urine. 

Between Croup and Diphtheria — Croup — 1. Starts with- 
out illness with a hoarse, metallic cough. 

2. Is a disease of childhood. 

3. The tonsils and the mucous membrane of the throat are 
covered with mucus. 

4. Croup is a local disease. 

Diphtheria — 1. The disease is ushered in by illness, chills, 
fever and sore throat without a cough. 

2. Is a disease of adults as well as childern. 

3. The tonsils are covered with a tough whitish membrane 
which does not not come off easily. 

4. Diphtheria is a general disease and is a blood poison. 

Between Epilepsy and Hysteria — Epilepsy — 1. The 
patient loses consciousness suddenly and completely. 

2. The face is livid, frothty saliva runs from the mouth, the 
eyelids are half open, the eyeballs roll about, the teeth grind, the 
patient is liable to bite the tongue, and the pupil of the eye does 
not expand and contract readily under the influence of light. 

3. The features are distorted. 

4. The patient shows no feeling whatever. 

5. The paroxysm is short and liable to be followed by heavy 
comatose sleep and dull intellect. 

6. Attacks frequently occur at night. 

7. Not caused by uterine trouble, although a paroxysm may 
occur during thj menstrual period. 

Hysteria — 1. If the patient loses consciousness it is very grad- 
ual, and usually consciousness is only partially lost. 

2. The face is flushed or the complexion unaltered, no froth 
runs from the mouth, the eyelids are closed, the eyeballs are 
fixed, there is no grinding of the teeth, nor will the patient bite 
the tongue severely enough to produce bleeding, the pupil of the 
eye expands and contracts readily under the influence of light. 

3. The features are not distorted. 

4. The patient sighs, laughs or sobs. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 207 

5. The paroxysm is longer and followed by wakefulness and 
depression in spirits. 

6. Attacts very rarely occur at night. 

7. Very often caused by uterine or menstrual disorders. 

Between Pleurisy and Pneumonia — Pleurisy — 1. The 
pain is sharp, a rubbing, rasping sound is heard, the cough is 
dry, the movement of the chest is impaired. 

2. In second stage the spaces between the ribs are obliterated. 

3. Sputa is frothy. 

4. Patient is usually not very sick. 

5. The temperature is irregular, rarely high. 

Pneumonia — 1. The pain is dull, a crackling sound is heard, 
the cough is moist and followed by expectoration, the movement 
of the chest is not impaired. 

2. In second stage the spaces between the ribs are visible. 

3. The sputa is rust-colored. 

4. The patient is very sick. 

5. The temperature rises and falls suddenly and high temper- 
ature is the rule. 

Between Scarlet Fever, Measles, and Smallpox — 

Scarlet Fever — 1. Time from exposure until patient is taken 
sick is from one day to many weeks. 

2. Some fever, the skin is very hot, the pulse is frequent and 
continues during the eruption. 

3. The eruption appears on the second day and is not rough ; 
it appears first on the neck and chest and spreads rapidly ; pres- 
sure on the skin with finger nail will give a white streak which 
remains for some time. 

4. The rash is uniform or in large patches, scarlet in color 
and about the seventh day desquamation begins and is very com- 
plete and in large patches. 

5. The throat is sore. 

6. The tongue is red and from its appearance is often spoken 
of as "raspberry tongue." 

7. Symptoms of serious brain trouble are common. 

8. The fever may be as high as 105° from the first to the 
tenth day and falls gradually. 

9. No secondary fever. 



208 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

10. Pneumonia is a rare complication and pleurisy is a com- 
mon one. 

11. The disease may be followed by Bright's disease, dropsy, 
deafness, inflammation of the eyes, chornic diarrhea and enlarge- 
ments of the glands. 

Measles — 1. Time from exposure until patient is taken sick is 
from seven to fourteen days. 

2. Same fever as in scarlet fever with the exception that it is 
rather increased when the eruption appears. 

3. The eruption appears on the fourth day and is rough ; it 
appears first on the face and spreads slowly ; no white streak on 
pressure on skin with finger nail. 

4 The rash usually occurs in crescent shaped patches and lasts 
about five days and then desquamation begins with very fine 
scales. 

5. The throat is rarely sore, but the nose runs and bronchitis 
is constant. 

6. The tongue is coated and may be red at the edges. 

7. No brain symptoms occur. 

8. The fever is from 103° to 106° before eruption and remains 
high for one day after the eruption appears and then suddenly 
falls. 

9. There is no secondary fever. 

10. Pneumonia is a frequent complication. 

11. May be followed b}^ chronic bronchitis, inflammation of 
the eyes and whooping cough. 

Smallpox — 1. Time from exposure until patient is taken sick 
is from six to twenty days. The average is ten days. 

2. The fever is violent, the pulse bounding, there is pain fin 
the loins and these symptoms improve much with the appear- 
ance of the eruption. 

3. The eruption appears on the third day, at first on [the lips 
and forehead, and spreads rapidly. 

4. The^eruption is a tiny pimple at first, then fluid forms in 
the pimple, and finally on the eighth day of the eruption pus 
forms in the pimples. 

5. The throat is often sore, the cough dry. 

6. The tongue is coated and swollen and red at the edges. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 209 

7. Symptoms of brain trouble are frequent. 

8. The fever may be as high as 106° before the eruption, 
when the eruption appears the temperature falls to about 100° and 
rises again later. 

9. Secondary fever is always present. 

10. This disease is usually uncomplicated. 

11. May be followed by chronic diarrhea, various eye diseases 
and enlarged glands. 



CHILDREN AND THEIR DISEASES, 



GENERAL CARE OF INFANTS AND CHILDREN. 

The physical development of the child is the product of three 
factors: inheritance, surroundings and food. Over the first we 
have no control, but the matter of surroundings and food are 
entirely within our control, and the consideration of surround- 
ings and feeding are of the utmost importance to infant life. 

Care of the Newly Born Child — After the cord has been 
tied, the babe should be wrapped in a blanket and placed in a 
warm room. The eyes should then be carefully washed with a 
solution made by dissolving two tablets of No. 1 in a cup of 
warm water, using small pieces of absorbent cotton and allowing 
the solution to drop slowly from the wet cotton upon the eye 
between the separated eyelids. Next oil the child's body with 
sweet oil, or fresh sweet cream, then wash and dress. Dress the 
cord by covering thoroughly with starch or boric acid and keep 
dry and undisturbed until it falls off. The cord usually falls off 
about the fifth day and the stump should be dressed with the 
same dry dressing used for the cord and, in addition, a pad of 
muslin about two inches square and one-fourth inch thick placed 
over the stump and held there by a bandage passed snugly 
around the child's body. 

Food — The question of food for the newly born infant will be 
found in the chapter on Infant Feeding. 

Bathing" — For the first few months the child should be bathed 
every day in water at a temperature of 98°. Never bathe a baby 
in a cold room. The bath should be short and the little body 
carefully and quickly dried. The addition of a handful of salt 
in two gallons of water in the bath is often a benefit. After six 
months the temperature should be reduced to 95°, and by the end 
of the first year to 90*. Children over two years of age should be 
bathed in water at a temperature of 70°. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 211 

Clothing — The clothing of children should be light, warm, 
non-irritating to the skin, and loose enough to allow free motion 
of the extremities. The chest should be covered with a woolen 
shirt, high in the neck and long sleeved. All petticoats should 
be supported from the shoulders and not worn from the waist- 
bands. Canton flannel is probably the best material for diapers. 
Care must be taken to have the infant's feet warm at all times. 
Cold feet are responsible for many attacks of colic and indiges- 
tion. The night clothing of infants should be similar to that 
worn in the daytime, but more loose. Do not overload the babe 
with clothing at night, as much of the restless sleep seen in 
infants is due to this cause. 

Care of the 'Byes and Mouth — During the first few days, 
at the time of the bath, the eyes should be cleansed and the 
mouth carefully washed out with a solution made by dissolving 
two tablets of No. 1 in one-half cup of warm water. Cleanse tie 
eyes in the manner described on p. 210. Carefully protect the 
eyes of a young child from too strong a light. Should the babe's 
mouth become quite red and inflamed, wash very carefully after 
each feeding with a solution made by dissolving two tablets of 
No. 2 in one-half cup of warm water. Harm is often done by 
using too much force in cleansing the mouth of a young infant, 
so it should be done very gently. The first teeth, as well as those 
of the second set, should be cared for every day. Dirty teeth are 
likely sooner or later to decay, and beside causing a foul breath 
and much "toothache, ' ' are liable to produce troublesome diseases. 
Much suffering and many of the large dentist bills might be 
prevented by daily care of the teeth from early childhood. Hol- 
low teeth should always be either filled or removed. 

Care of the Skin — The skin of a young child is very deli- 
cate, and sore spots, itching and eczema frequently occur, which 
are much easier prevented than cured. Cleanliness is, of course, 
essential, and this must be brought about without the aid of strong 
soaps or violent rubbing. Diapers should be removed as soon as 
soiled or wet. It is recommended that all folds of skin, under 
the arms and about the buttocks and genital organs, be lightly 
dusted with talcum powder, which will prevent any irritation. 



212 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

Vaccination — As a matter of safety all children should be 
vaccinated before they reach the age of two years. This should 
be done by a competent physician. 

Training to proper Control of Bowels and Bladder 

— A little intelligent effort in this direction will bring about sur- 
prising results. An infant can often be trained at three months 
of age to have its movements from the bowels when placed upon 
a small chamber. This not only saves a great deal of washing 
of diapers, but establishes the habit of having movements from 
the bowels at regular intervals. Soon after feeding, the infant 
should be placed upon the chamber. The value of regular 
habits in this direction can hardly be overestimated. The same 
training may be applied to the bladder, and although it is not of 
so great importance, adds very much to the comfort of the child. 
Night feeding is responsible for much of the difficulty in training 
children in these two respects. 

General Care of the Nervous System — Children may 
be greatly injured by the influences by which they are surrounded 
during the first year of life. The child's brain grows more dur- 
ing the first two years than during all the rest of life, and it is 
therefore important that we surround the babe with those influ- 
ences which will tend to the very best development during this 
time. The healthful development requires quiet, rest, peaceful 
surroundings and freedom from undue excitement. Most par- 
ents err through ignorance. Playing with young children until 
they shriek with apparent delight may amuse fond parents but is 
almost sure to work a greater or less injury to the child. Such 
romping should never take place in the first. two years of a child's 
life, and in later ,years never in the evening, as it is especially 
harmful to a child about to retire. 

Sleep — For two or three days after birth, the new-born babe 
will sleep profoundly and almost continuously. The sleep of 
infancy is quiet and peaceful, but infants usually do not sleep 
soundly after the first month. After the third year the heavy 
sleep of childhood commences. A healthy infant sleeps about 
twenty hours out of twenty-four, a child at the age of one year 
from fourteen to fifteen hours, and gradually a less time until the 
sleep of the adult is reached. Training in the proper habits of 



HEALTH AT HOME. 213 

sleep should begin early. The infant should be placed in the 
crib awake and allowed to go to sleep of its own accord. An 
infant should not be allowed to go to sleep on the breast of the 
nurse or with the nipple of the bottle in its mouth, as it will soon 
acquire the habit of not sleeping without them. A quiet dark- 
ened room, a warm, comfortable bed, a satisfied appetite and dry 
diapers are all that are needed to induce sleep in a healthy child. 
Regular habits of feeding and sleeping go hand in hand and are 
easily formed if care is taken. By the fifth month all feeding 
between 10 o'clock p. m. and 7 o'clock a. m. should be discon- 
tinued. If this is done most infants can be trained at this time 
to sleep all night. Regular feeding and sleep not only make the 
babe much easier to care for, but they are also of much impor- 
tance to the health of the child. There are two main causes for 
disturbed and irregular sleep in infants — hunger and indigestion. 
In nursing infants it is usually hunger; in those artificially fed, 
usually indigestion. All small children, until the age of 3 years 
should have a nap during the day, and all children should have 
a regular and early bedtime hour. Children should also not be 
allowed to eat rich or heavy foods at night, as this not only pro- 
duces sleeplessness and nightmare, but also is much of the cause 
of more serious sickness. 

Exercise — Exercise is fully as important in infancy as in later 
child life. The infant gets its exercise by kicking its legs about, 
waving its arms, etc., and it is a good idea to allow the babe to 
lie in partial dress in a warm place for a little time immediately 
following the bath. An infant's clothing should be such as will 
not interfere with its exercise. Confinement of the legs should 
not be permitted. As the child grows old enough to creep and 
walk it should be allowed every facility for using its muscles. 
Up to the eleventh year no difference need be made in the exer- 
cise of the two sexes. There are two important points in regard 
to indoor exercise ; first, the playroom should be cool, never above 
65°; and second, the clothing should be loose and light, so as to 
allow a perfectly free motion to the body. 

Air — After the first week an infant cannot be out of doors too 
much in the day time, provided the weather is fair. The baby's 
first outing should not be longer than fifteen or twenty minutes, 



214 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

and after that the time may be gradually increased to two or 
three hours. The head should be protected from the wind and 
the eyes from 1 the sun. It is well to let the child sleep out of 
doors in a baby [carriage on pleasant days. And above all the 
house should be well aired at all times. 

Dentition or Teething — At birth the teeth are enclosed 
in dentaKsacs which are situated in the gums. The tooth begins 
to grow at birth and steadily continues until it pierces the gums. 
The first or milk teeth are twenty in number, and they appear in 
the following^order: Two lower middle or incisor teeth, six to 
nine months i^four upper middle or incisor teeth, eight to twelve 
months ; two lower teeth beside those already through, and four 
grinders or molars, twelve to twenty-four months; four back 
grinders or molars, twenty-four to thirty months. A child one 
year old should have six teeth ; a child one year and one-half old, 
twelve teeth; one two years old, sixteen teeth; one two and one- 
half years old, twenty teeth. From this there may occur a wide 
variation for which there seems to be no explanaton, but the teeth 
usually appear according to this rule. About the seventh month 
it will be noticed that the child becomes occasionally fretful; it is 
restless and easily irritated ; it will suddenly seize the nipple and 
as suddenly reject it, with evidences of pain; it will refuse at times 
the bottle, and then cry from hunger at sight of it ; its sleep will 
be disturbed; it will suddenly cry out in sleep; in fact it will show 
a marked degree of irritation which it had never shown before. 
The gums will be found, upon examination, to be red and angry, 
and the child, after seizing upon the fingers and finding the 
pressure painful, will refuse to allow its mouth examined. The 
secretion from the mouth will necessitate frequent changing of the 
bib. In a few days the tooth will appear. The bowels should be 
kept well open during teething. When a child is cutting teeth and 
has become irritable and sleepless and you have tried everything 
with patience and still have failed to give relief, and when you 
have daily taken it out into the fresh air and kept everything 
bright and cheerful during the day and still have failed to get the 
child to sleep ; when you have given a warm bath at night, rub- 
bed the child well and still it will not sleep, then you may give 
one tablet No. 7, and if the child does not go to sleep in an hour 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 215 

the dose may be repeated. If the child is very restless a half tea- 
spoonful of camphor water may be added to the above. Never 
give paregoric to a teething baby. Convulsions sometimes occur 
in a teething baby, and for directions as to the treatment of these 
see the chapter on Convulsions. After the teeth are through it 
is time to begin to change the food of the child, and this must be 
done very carefully at first. The best thing to start a child on is 
the wing bone of a chicken which has been well boiled ; it will 
amuse the child and at the same time give the stomach a small 
amount of a very different food from milk. This may be followed 
by small quantities of soft-boiled egg, soft milk toast, well roasted 
potato, beef juice gravy and well boiled rice. Do not allow the 
baby to have a taste of everything he may fancy, but use careful 
judgment and consider effects before you give the food. The 
child raised upon simple food thrives the best. The subject of 
difficult teething is taken up fully in the chapter on Diseases of 
the Mouth. 



PECULIARITIES OF DISEASE IN CHILDREN. 

Diseases in children differ in many respects from those in later 
life and these differences relate to the cause, symptoms, diagno- 
sis or naming of the disease, and prognosis or prediction of the 
course and end of the disease. 

Cause — Inheritance is a prominent factor, the disease most 
frequently transmitted being the dreadful disease, syphilis. 
However, other infectious diseases are frequently transmitted 
from mother to child. In cases where no direct disease is trans- 
mitted, children may inherit a tendency to disease which may 
manifest itself in infancy or may not appear until later childhood. 
Under this head we may place the influence of rheumatism, gout, 
nervous diseases, tendency to use strong drink and, possibly, 
insanity. In consequence of these diseases in parents, the child- 
ren may not inherit the disease but only a weak constitution. 
Imperfectly formed heart, brain or kidneys may be important 
causes from a medical standpoint. Other deformities belong to 
the practice of surgery and we need not consider them here. The 
conditions which interfere with the proper growth and develop- 



216 HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 

ment of the child are improper feeding, unhygienic surroundings 
and neglect. These may cause such diseases as rickets and scurvy 
or may lead to a condition of general malnutrition which in turn 
may, in later life, lead to the distressing acute diseases of the 
stomach and bowels. 

Symptoms and Diagnosis or Naming the Disease — 

In children over twelve years of age we find the symptoms of dis- 
ease very much the 'same as in adults, and similar methods of 
examination may be employed. What is really peculiar to child- 
ren belongs especially to the first three years of life, before speech 
has developed. During this period we must rely entirely upon 
signs of the disease which we can see. It is not so much that 
diseases of early life are peculiar as that the little patients cannot 
tell us any of the things that older ones do. Two facts must 
always be kept in mind : first, that the diseases common to early 
childhood are few, being chiefly located in the digestive appara- 
tus, the lungs or the brain ; second, that in infants we may have 
very grave symptoms which may prove fatal in twelve to twenty- 
four hours, or there may be speedy and complete recovery after 
very alarming symptoms. In determining the disease, if there is 
an epidemic in the country it may help you ; and a careful look 
for indigestion, colic, lung fever and croup will be an aid. In 
examining the little one first think over the whole sickness, from 
the first thing noticed down to the present time ; ask everyone 
who has had anything to do with the baby what he has noticed : 
''When was the baby first taken sick? What was the first 
thing you noticed ? Did it have fever ? (This may be certainly 
known by the use of the thermometer found in the Cabinet.) 
Has it taken its food properly and the usual amount? Is it 
hoarse or has it a cough ? Does it show any evidences of pain, 
such as restlessness or screaming? Does it sleep in its usual 
manner ? Are the bowels regular and is the stool of good charac- 
ter ? Does it pass water more often than usual, and is the amount 
of water more or less than usual ? Has the child been exposed 
to any contagious disease, such as smallpox or scarlet fever ?" 
Having thought of all these things, we must now look at the baby. 
If the child is asleep or quiet note the following points: 

1. Whether the child lies upon the back, the side or the face. 



HEAI/fH AT HOME. 217 

2. If asleep, whether it is quiet and peaceful or restless and 
disturbed; whether there is constant tossing about; whether the 
hands are quiet or tossing about the head; whether the jaws are 
set together and the teeth grind, etc. 

3. Whether the child's breathing is regular or irregular. 
Whether the breathing is rapid or slow, easy and natural or 
whether there is obstruction in the nose, with snoring and breath- 
ing through the mouth. These latter indicate enlarged tonsils 
and growths in the back of the nose, and the child should be 
taken to a nose and throat specialist at once. 

4. Whether the pulse is rapid or slow, full and strong, or soft 
and easily compressed. A slow, irregular pulse in a young child 
should always make one think of meningitis or brain fever. The 
same pulse when rapid means nothing in particular. 

5. Whether the skin is dry and hot or covered with perspira- 
tion. Is the child excessively pale or blue or is there blueness 
of the lips and finger nails ? Are the hands and feet warm or are 
they cold and clammy? 

6. Whether the expression on the face is peaceful, or drawn 
and anxious, intelligent or stupid, and are the features contracted 
from time to time as if from pain ? 

7. Is there a cough? Is it frequent? Is it difficult or severe > 

8. Does the child cry from pain or discomfort, or hunger, or 
temper or from habit ? In very many cases the cry is so charac- 
teristic that one who is familiar with the child's language can 
readily tell what is wrong. It is something which should never 
be disregarded. The cry of hunger is apt to be interrupted by 
vigorous sucking of the fingers, and ceases immediately when 
the hunger has been satisfied. The cry of indigestion is often 
mistaken for that of hunger, but in such a case although the cry 
may cease for a few minutes after taking food it is likely to soon 
return with the same vigor. Under such circumstances a fre- 
quent repetition of nursing should never be allowed. The cry of 
pain will depend somewhat upon the severity of the pain. When 
it is caused by colic or earache it may be sharp and piercing, 
with drawing up of the legs and other signs of distress. The 
child falls asleep only when exhausted, and frequently wakes up 
with a scream. In less severe pain there is usually moaning, but 
rarely a sharp scream. Infants cry from any sort of discomfort 



218 HEALTH AT HOME. 

as^well'as from pain. The cry of weakness and exhaustion is a 
low feeble whine or moan which is almost constant and is easily 
recognized. The cry of temper is loud, violent and often pro- 
longed. The cry of habit is one of the most difficult to recog- 
nize. The crying habit is formed by humoring babies in various 
ways. Some babies cry to be rocked, some to be carried, etc., 
and this crying habit explains much of the crying of early child- 
hood. 

9. The mental condition should be noted ; it may be one of 
undue excitement or, what is more alarming, one of dullness and 
general relaxation. This latter indicates either extreme prostra- 
tion or brain disease. Soreness of the legs only indicates scurvy, 
rheumatism or joint disease. 

10. The glands of the neck should be noted. When swollen 
they may indicate scarlet fever, diphtheria or a simple active 
inflammation. 

11. Iyook carefully after the discharge from the nose. If very 
active it may indicate diphtheria, scarlet fever or la grippe. 

12. Note whether the child's mouth is dry and whether there 
is any form of sores in or about the mouth. 

Very much can be learned by simply watching a sick child 
very carefully for a few minutes and remembering the foregoing 
points. 

The Physical Examination — The first step should be to 
find out whether there is fever, and this is done by inserting the 
fever thermometer under the tongue or in the rectum — the latter 
is preferable, as it gives the best results. Insert the thermometer 
in the rectum and allow it to remain from three to five minutes. 
Before using the thermometer see the paragraph of instruction on 
p. 98. The normal child's temperature is from 98° to 99.5°. We 
may, however, find a very high temperature in a well child. In 
such cases the temperature usually falls in a few hours. To 
make a careful examination of the child the clothing, with the 
exception of the diaper, should be removed and the child laid 
on a blanket. Inspect the skin for eruptions and carefully exam- 
ine the entire body. Note whether the child is well nourished. 
^Examine the hearing and sight of the child. 



HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 219 

Prognosis or Prediction of the Course and end of 
the Disease — The younger the child the less are its chances to 
get well in all the diseases of childhood, and it is also true that a 
child may entirely outgrow a serious chronic ailment. L,ung 
fever is very common to younger childhood, and is very fre- 
quently a cause of death. This subject, however, will be taken 
up later on, and the prognosis of each disease will be given under 
its own heading. 

Prophylaxis or Prevention of Disease — There is no 
more promising field in medicine than the prevention of disease 
in childhood. Instruction along this line and care in following 
the rules laid down in this book will prevent much sickness and 
remove the cause of much worry. It is in the power of man to 
prevent in a great measure the majority of ailments from which 
children die. In preventing disease we should look carefully at 
two things ; the removal ol the causes which interfere with the 
proper growth and development of children and the prevention of 
infection. If proper care is paid to these two points we can feel 
almost certain that the baby will pass through young childhood 
and emerge into mature age with the robust health all so much 
desire. 

Administration of Remedies — Never give a dose of medi- 
cine unless it is needed and never hesitate to give a dose of medi- 
cine when it is needed. Never give a nauseous dose when one 
that is palatable will answer equally well. In the great majority 
of acute ailments not acute in character the patient recovers quite 
as well without a doctor as with one. This does not mean that 
treatment is not needed, but that the least important part of the 
treatment is drug giving, while the most important part is atten- 
tion to hygienic matters. In young infants it is essential to avoid 
all unnecessary medication in order that the stomach may not be 
disturbed and vomiting started. It is one of the objects of the 
Home Remedy Cabinet to meet this very point. The medicines 
are put up in the smallest possible space, and being made from the 
perfectly dried powders they are entirely non-irritating to the 
stomach, with the exception of such as are intended to produce 
vomiting. As a rule infants revolt against taking large doses of 
highly seasoned syrups and elixirs, but it is indeed seldom that 



220 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

we find a child who objects to a nicely coated tablet. And in all 
cases give nature a chance and she will prove to be a thorough 
physician. 

Fever — If the fever is quite high, the head hot, the child rest- 
less and very nervous, an ice cap on the head or cloths wrung out 
of ice water and placed on the head and changed often will 
reduce the fever from one to two degrees and will quiet the child. 
With the same fever a sponge bath with water at 80° to 85° or 
with equal parts of water and alcohol or with equal parts of water 
and vinegar may be used with good results. 

In cases which are very serious the ice pack may be employed. 
Strip the child and lay it upon a blanket, then cover all over 
excepting the face with a sheet wrung out of water at a temper- 
ature of 100°. Upon the outside of this ice may now be rubbed 
over the entire body, first in front and then behind. By this 
method there is no shock and no fright and any ordinary temper- 
ature can usually be readily reduced. The rubbing with ice 
should be repeated in from five to thirty minutes. After the rub- 
bing roll the child up in the blanket upon which it is lying, but 
do not remove the wet sheet. The head should be sponged with 
cold water and it may be necessary to place a hot water bottle 
at the feet. The pack is to be continued from one to twenty-four 
hours, according to circumstances. This treatment had best not 
be used except under the direction of a physician. 

The cold bath is frequently employed in the case of infants. 
The child is put into the bath at a temperature of 100° and the 
temperature is then gradually lowered by the addition of ice or 
cold water to 85° or 80°. The child should be thoroughly rubbed 
while in the bath and water should be applied to the head. On 
removal from the bath the body should be quickly dried and rolled 
in a warm blanket. The bath should last from five to twenty 
minutes. 

Sometimes the temperature is reduced by injecting water into 
the rectum ; this, however, should never be done unless under the 
immediate direction of the family physician. 

Antipyretics, or Drugs Used to Reduce Fever — Qui- 
nine should never be used to reduce fever in children except in 
cases of malarial fever. Three drugs which are of value are 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 221 

acetanilide, antipyrine and antifebrine. These drugs are all coal 
tar products and are very sure in their action and of much value. 
They are also very powerful in their action and should 'never be 
used except under skilled advice. Other drugs are used in this 
connection, and are referred to in their proper places. 

Stimulants — Alcoholic stimulants are well tolerated even in 
very young infants, in spite of many statements to the contrary. 
Still the use of stimulants, and alcohol in particular, is no doubt 
very often abused. The indications for the use of stimulants in 
children are much the same as in adults. They aie to be used 
whenever the pulse is weak, soft and compressible, and when- 
ever there is great debility or weakness on the part of the patient. 
In most fevers ^stimulants are not to be given at all. For the first 
twenty-four hours after the crisis or breaking of the fever, it is fre- 
quently necessary to give stimulants very freely. In all poisonous 
diseases, such as diphtheria, stimulants should be given as soon 
as any depressing symptoms are noticed and continued through 
the course of the disease. In acute diseases of the digestive 
apparatus where food cannot be given it is frequently necessary 
to keep up the strength of the patient by the use of stimulants. 
The method of administering stimulants is of no little importance. 
When you find high fever, dry skin, flushed face and a full strong 
pulse, do not use stimulants. Brandy and whiskey are usually 
to be perferred to wines. However, when other stimulants are 
not well borne by the stomach champagne will be found inval- 
uable. 

For infants under one year of age stimulants of all sorts should 
be diluted with ten parts of water. Do not give too strong a 
stimulant to a baby — it is better to give the diluted form and give 
the dose oftener. If this plan is followed vomiting will be rarely 
produced. The quantity of course depends largely upon cir- 
cumstances, but for a general rule give an infant one year old 
from half an ounce to an ounce and a half of whiskey or brandy 
in twenty-four hours. It is rarely if ever advisable to give more 
than this. Double the amount for children four years of age and 
over. 

Tonics — Cod liver oil is probably the best tonic for young 
children, but it must never be given when the digestion is poor, 



222 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

the tongue coated, or the stomach easily upset. Cod liver oil 
should always be given in small doses, say ten to twenty drops 
three times a day, and the pure oil is better for small childern 
than any of the emulsions. Iron may be used, but it should 
never be used except under the personal direction of the family 
physician. For a general tonic for young children, No. 17 will 
meet all the requirements, and has been found to give most excel- 
lent results. 

Counter-irritants — Counter-irritants are of great value in a 
large variety of diseases. Blisters should never be employed on 
young children and only on older children by the direction of the 
family physician. A mustard plaster is one of the best means of 
producing quick counter- irritation over a large surface. To 
make a mustard plaster, take one part of powdered mustard, six 
parts of wheat flour and the whites of one or two eggs; mix to a 
thick paste with lukewarm water and spread between two layers 
of muslin. Allow this to remain on the child from five to eight 
minutes, when a thorough redness of the skin will be produced. 
This may be repeated every three or four hours and continued for 
four or five days without any injury to the skin. When using 
the mustard plaster for lung diseases it should reach entirely 
around the child's body. Next in value to the mustard plaster 
comes the turpentine stupe, and this is made by wringing a piece 
of flannel out of water as hot as can be borne by the hand ; then 
sprinkle a few drops of turpentine over the flannel ; place on the 
child's body and cover with a dry piece of flannel. This is very 
useful in pain in or about the child's abdomen. Do not allow the 
stupe to remain on long at a time or small and painful blisters 
will be formed. In lung fever turpentine is very useful, and to 
prepare for this use, melt some lard, then mix one part of turpen- 
tine to four parts of lard and rub the child's chest thoroughly both 
front and back with the mixture while it is warm ; cover with 
thick dry flannel and be careful not to allow the air to strike the 
bare skin after the first application is made. Another very nice 
and pleasing counter-irritant is camphorated oil. This is made 
by adding one part of spirits of camphor to four parts of olive 
oil. Camphorated oil is mild in its action and gives very excel- 
lent results in many cases, and rarely does one find a child who 
objects to being rubbed with it. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 223 

Poultices — Very much good may be done by the use of poul- 
tices, yet nothing requires more care, and in using them three 
things must be remembered : first, the poultice must be carefully 
and correctly made ; second, it must not be too heavy ; and third 
and most important, the air must never strike the bare skin while 
changing the poultice. This is accomplished by drawing the 
fresh poultice up under the one to be removed and then lifting off 
the cold poultice. 

Poultices are most useful in children in diseases of the lungs. 
Many little lives have been saved by the judicious use of poultices 
in lung fever and bronchitis. The best material for poultices 
is ground flaxseed, and the poultice is made by mixing the 
ground flaxseed with boiling water until a pasty batter is formed. 
Another good material for a poultice is ordinary corn meal made 
into a fairly stiff mush with boiling water. In making a poul- 
tice for the lungs of a young child cut out of muslin a little 
sleeveless jacket. Have it fit up well in the neck both front and 
back and open in the back and large enough to lap over two or 
three inches in the back. Cut notches for the arms in place of 
making arm holes. Having cut out one jacket, cut out another 
just like the first and sew the edges of the two jackets together, 
making a sack. Do not sew the bottom edges together, but leave 
an opening to put the poultice material in. Put the poultice 
material in and spread it about one-fourth to one-half an inch 
thick over the whole jacket, being careful to spread it evenly. 
The material must be put in the jacket hot, and there should be 
two jackets, so that in changing the poultice the fresh one may 
be drawn up under the cold one and the patient need not be 
exposed at all. The poultices are reheated by having a pot of 
water boiling on the stove and on top of this, above the water, a 
colander with a cover. Place the poultice to be heated in the 
colander ; put on the lid tightly. The steam rising from the boil- 
ing water will thoroughly heat the poultice. Poultices should 
be changed often and under no circumstances should a cool or 
cold poultice be allowed on a child. Poulticing should continue 
for from six to twenty-four hours without a break. When it is 
done for relief of pneumonia, lung fever or bronchitis, a poultice 
should always be covered with dry flannel or with oiled silk, and 
when the poulticing is stopped the patient should be wrapped in 



224 HEALTH AT HOME. 

several layers of dry flannel and these taken off gradually. This 
will prevent taking cold or the more serious result, a relapse. 
Never use a poultice of any sort about the eyes. In case of sore 
eyes or earache and in many other connections, what are known 
as hot fomentations are of great value. For the eyes or ears hot 
fomentations are applied by wringing pieces of surgeon's cotton 
or pieces of soft cotton cloth out of water as hot as can be borne 
and applying to the sore eye or the aching ear. To apply hot 
fomentations to other parts of the body wring pieces of flannel 
out of water as hot as can be borne and place the flannel upon 
the part you wish to foment, covering with a dry piece of flan- 
nel. Hot fomentations, to be of value, must be very hot and 
changed often. Hot, dry air is sometimes used to advantage in 
rheumatism and joint diseases. Cold water and ice are used in 
some cases of inflammation of the eyes and in all forms of inflam- 
mation of the brain. The cold is applied by laying pieces of 
cloth in water or on ice and applying to the patient very often. 
Baths of various sorts are used to advantage, and among them 
might be mentioned the bran bath, made by placing a small bag 
filled with bran in the bath tub. This bath is useful in a number 
of skin diseases, such as eczema. 

Injections — Injections will be found useful many times in 
emptying the bowels of sick infants and even older children. 
One of the best injections for an infant is glycerine, one part, 
and warm water, eight parts. Always be very careful in giving 
an injection to a young child. 

Doses of Medicine for Children — A child one year old or 
younger should be given one-thirteenth the dose which is given 
to an adult. 

A child two years old should be given one-seventh the dose 
which is given to an adult. 

A child three years old should be given one-fifth the dose 
which is given to an adult. 

A child four years old should be given one-fourth the dose 
which is given to an adult. 

A child five years old should be given five-sixteenths the dose 
which is given to an adult. 

A child six years old should be given one-third the dose which 
is given to an adult. 



HEAI/fH AT HOME. 225 

A child seven years old should be given five-twelfths the dose 
which is given to an adult. 

A child eight years old should be given two-fifths the dose 
which is given to an adult. 

A child nine years old should be given three-sevenths the dose 
which is given to an dault. 

A child ten years old should be given five-elevenths the dose 
which is given to an adult. 

A child eleven years old should be given eleven-twenty-thirds 
the dose which is given to an adult. 

A child thirteen years old should be given one-half the dose 
which is given to an adult. 

A child fourteen years old should be given one- half the dose 
which is given to an adult. 

A child fifteen years old should be given five- ninths the dose 
which is given to an adult. 

A child sixteen years old should be given four-sevenths the 
dose which is given to an adult. 

Above the age of sixteen years give the ordinary adult dose. 
In this book the dose for children has been given in most cases, 
but where it has not follow the foregoing table and get at the pro- 
per amount by dissolving a tablet in a certain number of tea- 
spoonfuls of water. For example, we wish to give a remedy in 
which the adult dose is one tablet to a child six years old. Look- 
ing at the table we find that a child six years old requires one- 
third the dose of an adult, therefore dissolve the tablet in three 
teaspoonfuls of water and give one teaspoonful of this mixture at 
a dose. In a child ten years old we find the dose five-elevenths 
of an adult dose, therefore dissolve one tablet in eleven teaspoon- 
fuls of water and give five teaspoonfuls at a dose. 



DISEASES OF THE NEW-BORN CHILD. 

A number of diseases may occur to the new-born babe, but the 
most of these require so much skill in treatment that we will only 
mention one or two and advise that the family physician be 
called in all other conditions that assume an alarming attitude. 
Jaundice occurs in a great number of babies of from a few days 



226 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

to a few weeks of age. It usually begins by the skin on the face 
and chest becoming a light yellow color. This color may increase 
until it is a bright yellow. The disease usually lasts from three 
or four days to two weeks. It very rarely affects the general 
health of the babe and should it do so a physician should be 
called at once. General good care of the infant is all that is 
necessary in the way of treatment for jaundice in a baby a few 
days old. 

Ophthalmia Neonatorium — This is the name given to the 
discharging sore eyes which occur in very young babies, and no 
more dangerous disease can possibly exist. Many of the blind 
people whom we meet have lost their eyesight by this disease |in 
babyhood. This disease is caused by some poisonous material 
getting in the eyes and starting a violent inflammation. The lids 
swell, the eye becomes red, and a thick creamy discharge begins 
to run from the eyes. This grows worse rapidly until within a 
few hours to a day from the time the eye first became sore the 
lids swell tightly shut and the discharge is very free. If this 
is allowed to continue it will completely destroy the sight in 
from three days to a week. The disease is so dangerous that 
no time should be lost in taking the little one to a physician, 
and it also needs the most careful home treatment until the physi- 
cian arrives. 

For home treatment the following will be found to be the best 
that can be used : Carefully wash the eyes with water that has 
been boiled, using small pieces of surgeon's cotton or a very soft 
cloth, then press the eyelids apart and with the medicine dropper 
found in the Cabinet thoroughly wash out the eye with a solution 
made by dissolving two tablets of No. 1 in one-fourth cup of 
warm water. Having cleansed the eyes and used the medicine 
in the manner directed place pieces of cotton wrung out of hot 
water over the eyes. Change these every half-minute and keep 
up^this bathing for fifteen minutes. Then again spread the eye- 
lids apart and wash out thoroughly with the solution as before ; 
allow the baby to rest quietly for fifteen minutes, and then again 
wash out the eyes with the solution, and for the next fifteen min- 
utes use the hot fomentations or bath as described above. Do 
this — first a bath and then a rest with a thorough cleansing with 
the solution of No. 1 — every fifteen minutes, and if you value 



HEALTH AT HOME. 227 

your baby's eyesight get a physician as quickly as possible. Be 
very carelul with all cloths and towels used about the sore eyes, 
as another child or grown person might dry on the same towel 
and contract the disease. It is very liable to spread, and all care 
possible should be taken to prevent such an accident. 



INFANT FEEDING AND NUTRITION. 

The question of infant feeding is one which should occupy a 
foremost place in the thoughts of all parents, and no more fertile 
field for improvement in the development of a child can be found 
than that of correct feeding. It is not only what to feed an 
infant or child but when to feed it, how to feed it and how much 
to feed it. A child who passes the first three years of life in 
robust health is almost sure to retain the same robust health until 
adult life is reached, and very much of the health of an infant up 
to three years of age depends upon the food. The child must be 
fed in such a manner as will prevent indigestion, diarrhea and 
constipation, and by so doing more serious ailments, such as 
rickets and scurvy, can be prevented. There is but one ideal 
food for infants, and that is the one provided by nature — the 
mother's milk — and it is upon the known knowledge of the exact 
composition and all variations of woman's milk that the rules for 
the preparation of foods used as substitutes should be founded. 

The best substitute for woman's milk is cow's milk, and by 
exercising a due amount of care very good results may be obtained 
in its use for infants. There are certain things which it is well 
to observe : first, the milk must be clean ; second, the milk must 
be from healthy animals ; third, the milk must be fresh ; fourth, 
it is better to use the milk from several cows and not from one 
animal alone ; fifth, the milk should be diluted to suit the age of 
the child. 

If at all possible an infant should be nursed by its own mother, 
but if for some good reason this is not possible there are two 
methods which may be used — mixed feeding, or a combination 
of nursing and artificial feeding, and artificial feeding. A mother 
may nurse her own babe excepting under the following condi- 
tions : Should the mother have consumption in any of its various 



228 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

forms she must not nurse her baby ; nor should she nurse the 
little one if at childbirth she had a severe hemorrhage, childbed 
fever or convulsions ; nor should she nurse the baby if she is sub- 
ject to epileptic fits; nor if the mother is so frail and delicate in 
health that nursing a baby might be of permanent injury to her 
own health ; nor should the mother attempt to nurse if previous 
trials have shown her inability to supply food enough for the 
little one. 

For the sake of good health and good hygiene the utmost care 
must be taken to keep the breasts and nipples of a nursing mother 
clean. The nipples at least should be washed after each nurs- 
ing, and once a day in a solution made by dissolving two tablets 
of No. 3 in a cupful of warm water. The habit of having regular 
nursing times should be established early in the child's life, 
and a very good nursing rule is : From the third to the thirtieth 
day, ten nursings, beginning at 7 o'clock in the morning, and 
nursing every two hours until 9 o'clock at night; then nurse 
between 12 and 1 o'clock and between 3 and 4 o'clock, making- 
eight nursings during the day and two at night. From the 
fourth week to the end of the third month nurse eight times in 
twenty-four hours, two and a half hours between nursings, with 
seven nursings during the day and one at night. From the third 
to the fifth month seven nursings in twenty-four hours, three 
hours between nursings, six nursings during the day and one at 
night. From the fifth month until the baby is weaned six nurs- 
ings in twenty-four hours, six during the day and none at night. 
Both for the sake of the mother and for that of the child weaning 
should be done gradually. Sudden weaning may bring on an 
attack of indigestion and is sure to produce more or less nervous- 
ness. A baby should not be weaned during the hot summer 
months. 

Artificial Feeding — In artificial feeding there are several 
things to be remembered : first, the food must contain the same 
things that are found in woman's milk; second, the proportions 
should be about the same as in woman's milk; third, the differ- 
ent parts of the artificial food should act upon and be acted upon 
by the digestive fluids as nearly as possible in the same manner 
as those which are found in woman's milk. 



HKAI/fH AT HOME. 229 

We find that in woman's milk we have fat, sugar, albumen, 
salts and water. And it is upon the exact knowledge of the pro- 
portion of these constituents in woman's milk that we base the 
rules for artificial infant feeding. 

It is important that an infant's clothing be not too tight over 
the abdomen, for no doubt many infants are forced to vomit their 
milk alter nursing from the pressure of tight bands and clothing. 
The giving of a little sugar and water or catnip tea to a new- 
born babe before the mother has rested sufficiently to nurse it 
should never be allowed. The infant should be taught from the 
hour of its birth to sleep until each nursing hour arrives, and do 
not under any circumstances allow it to expect a "little more" 
to keep it quiet if it has not taken its full supply at the time pre- 
scribed. A little firmness early in life will do much to establish 
a rule that should have no exceptions. Should the mother be 
unduly excited by sudden anger or grief the infant should not 
be allowed to nurse for some time, as the milk from a mother so 
excited often produces convulsions. 

As above stated, the best substitute for woman's milk in artifi- 
cial feeding is cow's milk, and it must be fresh. It is better to 
use the milk from several cows than that from one cow alone. 
Before feeding to the child each bottleful should be tested with 
blue litmus paper found in the Cabinet. If the blue paper retains 
its color the milk is all right for use, but should it turn red the 
milk is unfit for use. This test is the most important one in the 
testing of milk before feeding an infant. The milk for the child, 
when received, should be kept in a clean vessel and be away 
from everything that might in any way taint it. Milk taints 
very easily and very quickly, therefore special care is needed in 
this direction. Do all things gradually with infants; never make 
an abrupt change unless some urgent cause exists. If you wish 
to alter the diet or the character of the clothing, do so with as 
little shock as possible. It must be constantly borne in mind, 
especially by those persons who frequently overlook small details, 
that a single curd in the milk may give rise to inflammation of 
the lining membrane of the stomach and intestines that will cause 
death in a few hours, or in a teething child may produce a con- 
vulsion that will prove fatal. During the heat of summer the 
bottle-fed child will require the greatest care. Until the child 



230 HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 

reaches the fourth month the diet should consist entirely of milk. 
In an infant who is bottle-fed from the start, to a pint of milk 
add a pint of water which has previously been boiled, a very 
little white sugar and a tablespoonful of lime water. For a child 
three months old add three-fourths of a pint of water, previously 
boiled, to a pint of milk. Add a very little white sugar and a 
tablespoonful of lime water. For a child six months old and 
over add one-half pint of water, previously boiled, to a pint of 
milk and sugar and lime water as before. Having prepared the 
food in this way place in a clean pitcher and set in a cool place. 
About four ounces is the proper amount for a single feeding up 
to the time the child is six weeks old ; after this a larger quantity 
may be given. When it is time to feed the baby place the food 
in the nursing bottle and place the bottle in a basin of warm 
water until the milk becomes warm enough to feed to the child. 
Never heat the milk twice, but procure fresh milk each time. 
As the child becomes older and the quantity of milk is increased 
small amounts of barley, oatmeal and rice water may be added to 
the milk ; this will keep the bowels in good condition and also 
prevent, in a measure, the formation of large curds in the 
stomach. Milk must curdle in the child's stomach, as it is in this 
way that it is digested, and no alarm need be felt should the 
child occasionally vomit curds. When a child takes too much 
milk it is almost sure to vomit curds, and all that is necessary is 
to be careful and not feed quite so much the next time. Where 
fresh cow's milk cannot be obtained condensed milk may be used 
for infant feeding. One teaspoonful of condensed milk added 
to four ounces of water which has been boiled is enough for one 
feeding. When babies do not thrive well upon either of these 
foods or upon these foods with the addition of weak barley, 
wheat, oatmeal or rice water, it is best to depend upon the advice 
of a physician as to what is best to do next. 

The mother should not undertake further responsibility. It is 
important that a child be given water to drink. Babies fre- 
quently crave it and a teaspoonful of water will often quiet a 
fretful baby. Use as little sugar as possible in infant feeding, 
as it frequently causes colic. Season all food with salt ; it aids 
digestion. 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 231 



DISEASES DEPENDENT UPON FOOD AND FEEDING. 

During the first year of a child's life a majority of the ailments 
are directly traceable to some derangement in nutrition. The 
symptoms of deranged nutrition are so marked in infants as to 
divide the troubles into three distinct classes: First, cases of 
active starving, which are rapid and last from a few days to two or 
three weeks. Cases of this sort are rarely seen after the infant is 
three months old. Second, cases in which the food is not pro- 
perly taken up^by the body or, as it is called, imperfect nutrition. 
This may occur at any time during chilhood, but is most fre- 
quently found during the first two years. Third, cases of a 
slow wasting away, continuing over a period of several months. 
This is seen Hn infants of any age. Cases of active starvation 
are due to lack of proper assimilation of the food given. Many 
of the symptoms in diseases of the stomach and intestines are 
due to a lack of proper assimilation or taking up of the food by 
the body. It sometimes occurs that a child will refuse to take 
the breast, and even food from a spoon is taken in such small 
amounts as to be insufficient to support life. Dr. Holt, in his 
valuable book upon Children's Diseases, mentions a case of a 
baby five months old, previously healthy, who was suffering 
from whooping cough ; the baby utterly refused to take the breast 
or food from a spoon. At the end of four days its strength was 
almost gone, when food was put into the infant's stomach with a 
stomach pump and its life saved. Instances of this kind fre- 
quently occur. Again, starvation may occur when the mother 
has not a sufficient supply of milk for the little one or when the 
milk is not rich enough or when the stomach and intestines of 
the babe are so feeble that they do not digest enough of the food 
taken to preserve life and health, or when the food of the infant 
is for some reason suddenly changed, as from mother's milk to 
some prepared "baby food. " In such a case the baby is often 
unable to digest a sufficient quantity of the new food. Starva- 
tion may follow such diseases as la grippe, malaria, lung fever 
etc. 

Symptoms and Signs — It is very easy to detect this trouble, as 
the baby will become pale and thin very rapidly. The pulse will 



232 HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 

be weak and rapid, the hands and feet cold and the circulation 
poor, the baby very weak, and many times fretful. The skin is 
usually covered with clammy perspiration, breathing is very rapid 
and nearly always irregular. The bowels are rather loose and 
move frequently. The food appears in the stool undigested. It 
is very difficult to say whether the baby will get well or not. 
Children under one month of age are liable to die in from two to 
ten days, growing weaker each day until death arrives. How- 
ever, they may recover with proper and careful treatment. In 
older children the same thing occurs, but not so rapidly. When 
vomiting and diarrhea are present the chances for recovery are 
small indeed. High fever, cold hands and feet and free sweating 
are also serious signs. Cases of active starvation may be distin- 
guished from cases of imperfect nutrition by the severe symptoms. 
In imperfect nutrition we may have the same symptoms, but they 
are not nearly so severe, and in slow wasting the slowness of the 
disease serves to distinguish it. 

Treatment — When we have active starvation we can feel almost 
sure that the baby has very feeble digestive powers, and an 
endeavor should be made to supply a partly digested food or, if 
the starvation is due to the fact that the mother's milk is not 
sufficient or not rich enough the deficiency should be made up 
by artificial feeding. For instruction as to this see the section 
on Artificial Feeding. To prepare partly digested milk take one 
pint of fresh cow's milk and four tablespoonfuls of water and 
shake together in a bottle; then add five grains of extract of 
pancreas and three tablets of No. 2. Then place the bottle in 
water as warm as can be borne by the hand and keep it there for 
two hours, shaking the bottle occasionally. The extract of pan- 
creas can be procured from the Home Remedy company. The 
milk should now be diluted by adding eight parts of water to one 
of milk, and it is then ready for use. In addition to the feeding 
mentioned the baby should be carefully rubbed each day after the 
bath, care being taken to always rub towards the heart and never 
away from it. In cases of extreme weakness it is advisable to 
give stimulants — preferably brandy. To one tablespoonful of 
brandy add two tablespoonfuls of water, sweeten a very little and 
give a small teaspoonful every two hours. 



HEAI/fH AT HOME. 233 

Imperfect Nutrition — Cases of this sort are very common, 
but trie danger to the child's life is much less than in Active 
Starvation. The child does not seem to be ill, and yet it cannot 
be said to be well, and causes an endless amount of worrying on 
the part of the parents. A child may be born with feeble strength 
and a tendency to imperfect nutrition, or may be so nervous that 
its nutrition is interfered with. A child may be undersized at 
birth — possibly only weigh three or four pounds — and such a 
child is very liable to have trouble in digesting and absorbing its 
food. Very frequently keeping a child in a hot room and never 
allowing it any fresh air will cause trouble with the absorption of 
its food. Acute diseases, such as lung fever, malaria, la grippe, 
etc., may leave the little patient with the stomach and intestines 
in such a condition that the proper absorption of food is not pos- 
sible. 

Symptoms and Signs — In this disease the child's weight is an 
important factor. The child is nearly always below the average in 
weight, and the gain in weight is very slow, often being only two 
to four ounces when it should be a pound. The development of 
muscles is also very slow. Often such children are unable to sit up 
unaided until they are one year of age or over. The circulation 
is poor, the skin quite pale, and the hands and feet are inclined 
to be cold. These children are usually very restless and fretful 
and do not sleep at all well. Their digestion is very poor and 
easily upset and very little things will sometimes completely upset 
the stomach. A child suffering from imperfect nutrition is almost 
certain to take measles, mumps or anything it may be exposed 
to. Most children recover from imperfect nutrition if the proper 
care is taken. 

Treatment— The treatment is chiefly a question of feeding and 
the partly digested milk mentioned on pp. 112-232 should be 
used, and the rules as to bathing, sleeping and airing should be 
carefully observed. Rubbing or massage is of value, care being 
taken at all times to rub towards the heart. Cod liver oil in child- 
ren over five years of age is a benefit and should be given in ten 
drop doses three times a day. And in all cases No. 17 should be 
given. For a baby three months or younger, dissolve one tablet 
in thirteen teaspoonfuls of water and give one teaspoonful every 



234 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

three hours. For a child from three months to one year old, use 
the same mixture, but give one teaspoonful every two hours. 
For a child from one year to three years, dissolve one tablet in 
six teaspoonfuls of water and give one teaspoonful every three 
hours. For a child from three to five years of age, dissolve one 
tablet in four teaspoonfuls of water and give one teaspoonful every 
three hours. For a child five to seven years of age, dissolve 
one tablet in three teaspoonfuls of water and give one teaspoon- 
ful every three hours. To a child seven to fourteen years of age, 
give one-half tablet every four hours, and to a child above the 
age of fourteen, give one tablet every four hours. In all cases 
where tablets are to be dissolved, crush the tablet thoroughly 
before dissolving. 

All cases of slow wasting are very easy to recognize by their 
very slowness. The treatment of such cases is pure wholesome 
food, careful nursing, plenty of outdoor exercise and No. 17 as 
directed above for from one to three months. There are two well 
known diseases which are due to faulty nutrition or improper 
feeding and imperfect assimilation of food. These are scurvy 
and rickets. 

Scurvy — This is a disease due to continued improper feeding 
and some of its signs are spongy, bleeding gums, swellings about 
the joints, bleeding from the nose and general paleness of the 
skin. Scurvy occurs as frequently in the country as in the city, 
and the food used previous to the attack is usually found to have 
been some one of the "infant foods" or condensed milk. 

Symptoms and Signs — The symptoms are : swelling about the 
joints, especially the knees and ankles, with pain upon pressure 
or motion ; gums are swollen and bleed easily, bleeding from 
nose, mouth, stomach or bowels, flabby muscles, paleness of the 
skin and history of using for a long period a particular food. 
Patients nearly always recover if the disease is recognized early 
and the proper treatment employed. 

Treatment — Stop the use of the food suspected of having caused 
the trouble; give fresh cow's milk as directed in the chapter on 
Artificial Feeding; also give beef juice and the juice of any fresh 
fruit. In children over one year old, a small amount of potato 
may be added. Protect the child against cold and exposure and 



HKAI/fH AT HOME. 235 

give No. 8. For a child three months to one year take one tablet 
No. 8 ; thoroughly mash, dissolve in thirteen teaspoonf uls of water 
and give one teaspoonful every three to four hours. Keep this 
up for two to three weeks. To a child one year to three years, 
give of the above mixture one teaspoonful every two to three 
hours. For a child from three to ten years of age, dissolve one 
tablet in three teaspoonfuls of water and give one teaspoonful 
every three hours. To a child ten to fourteen years of age, give 
one-half tablet every four hours. To a child above the age of 
fourteen, give one tablet every four hours. Continue the medi- 
cine in all cases for from two to three weeks. 

Rickets — Rickets is a chronic disease due to improper food 
and imperfect assimilation. It is not really a bone disease, and 
yet the bones suffer most severely in the disease. Rickets occurs 
most frequently in the large cities, but is occasionally found in 
the country. Rickets is not a fatal disease, and patients recover 
nicely under proper feeding, hygiene and treatment. Rickets 
may be produced by improper diet alone, but most frequently we 
find the child not only improperly fed, but surrounded by con- 
ditions which are entirely unsanitary. Rickets produces changes 
in the bones, most marked in the bones of the arms and legs and 
in the ribs. The bones become soft and bend easily and the 
ends of the bones become larger than normal. 

Symptoms and Signs — Among the symptoms noticed early in 
the disease are constipation, extreme restlessness at night, with 
sweating about the head and little round hard spots forming along 
the rib bones. When the head sweats so profusely at night as to 
wet the pillow and the child tosses about and kicks a great deal 
rickets should be immeditely suspected. Carefully examine along 
all parts of the rib bones for a rough, beaded feeling. If this is 
found it is certain that the child has rickets. Rickets produces 
many deformities, and in very extreme cases nearly every bone 
in the body is affected. The head usually appears too large ; 
there are rough beads on the ribs ; portions of the chest may be 
sunken in. There may be and in about one-half of the cases 
there is a curvature of the spine, and this may be toward the back 
or toward either side. The bones of the arms and legs are usually 
deformed in a symetrical manner; that is, both arms will have 
the same curves and bumps and both legs will be twisted and 



236 HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 

knotted in the same manner. All sorts of deformities of the legs 
occur in rickets. The muscles will tell us of the disease as well as 
the bones. They become flabb} 7 and do not develop properly, and 
for this reason children with rickets are not usually able to sit up 
straight or to stand or walk at the age at which they should. 
Pot-belly is quite a prominent symptom in rickets, and is rarely 
ever absent. There is no fever connected with rickets. It takes 
months to recover from this disease. The earliest signs of im- 
provement are a less amount of restlessness, stopping of the head 
sweats; the patient is not so pale and may make attempts to walk. 
The deformities change very slowly indeed. Relapses are rare. 
From the description we have just given it will not be hard to 
name the disease. Rickets is never a fatal disease. 

Treatment — Two of the most important things to be considered 
in the treatment of rickets are diet or feeding and hygiene or 
good health rules. A patient suffering from rickets should be fed 
on milk, cream, eggs, fats, rare meat and fresh fruits, and in 
addition cod liver oil is of much value. The child should live 
out of doors and in the country, if possible ; should always have 
plenty of fresh air in the sleeping room and, in fact, make fresh 
air one of the principal medicines. A good bath every day with 
careful rubbing is a help, the bowels must be kept open. For 
this one or two tablets of No. 9 each morning before breakfast 
will be found to do the work nicely. In addition give No. 10 one- 
half tablet a day for a child up to one year of age ; one-half tablet 
at night and one-half tablet in the morning for a child from one 
to four 3^ears of age ; and one tablet before each meal for a child 
over four years of age. A tablespoonful of lime water with each 
meal is a benefit. Lime water is made by air slacking some 
lime thoroughly ; then place some of the lime in a bottle and 
pour water over it; shake thoroughly and allow it to settle. 
Pour off the clear water and use that. For the treatment of the 
deformities produced by rickets consult your family physician. 



DISEASES OF THE DIGESTIVE SYSTEM. 

In children we frequently see a number of deformities which 
are easily remedied, such as harelip, cleft-palate, tongue-tie, 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 237 

split hanging palate and occasionally split tongue. All such 
cases need the care of an expert surgeon, and as no treatment for 
such conditions can be given, the best advice is to take the little 
one to a surgeon of known ability. 

Fever Sores — Cold Sores — These are seen very often in 
all cases of fevers, and often alone. They are so common that 
everyone will recognize them without a special description. 
They start with little blisters which break and form crusts. The 
best treatment is to first wash thoroughly with a solution made 
by dissolving two tablets of No. 3 in one-half cup of warm w ater 
and then apply No. 40, rubbing it in gently but thoroughly. 

Eczema of the I4pS — This is quite common. The red 
part of the lips becomes dry and cracks occur in them. They 
are usually painful and bleed easily. Wash the cracks thor- 
oughly with a solution of No. 3 and rub on No. 40. If the cracks 
are very deep, touch lightly with burnt alum before applying No. 
40. 

Ulcers — These may occur on the tongue and are found many 
times in children suffering with whooping cough. They are 
easily recognized as they are simply a "sore spot" on the tongue. 
Touch lightly with burnt alum, wash with a solution of No. 3, 
and apply No. 41. 

Difficult Teething — Although not a serious ailment, diffi- 
cult teething causes more worry upon the part of anxious mothers 
than any other one thing which occurs during early child-life. 
About one-half of the infants cut their teeth without any diffi- 
culty, while in the other half a wide range of trouble is found. 
The nervousness, fretfulness, loss of appetite, loss of sleep, and 
general "sick" appearance of a teething child are well known to 
every mother. There may be constipation, or some vomiting, 
and the thermometer should always be used to look for fever. 
In treatment, first take the best possible care of the baby, supply 
good food, but do not force the little one to eat ; keep the bowels 
open with No. 9 ; give the child a daily bath. If there is tever 
present, give one tablet of No. 11 every three to four hours until 
the fever subsides. If the teeth are anywhere near through, take 
a sharp penknife and hold the blade in boiling water for a min- 



238 HEALTH AT HOME. 

ute, and then allow it to cool and carefully cut the gum just over 
the tooth. Cut pretty well as the bleeding will often reduce the 
swelling of the gums. If there is much pain and soreness about 
the gums, wring small pieces of cotton out of water as hot as can 
be borne and place inside the lips and over the sore gums, care 
being taken not to scald the little one's mouth. Give the baby 
plenty of fresh air. By following the above directions, all ordi- 
nary cases can be cared for at home. Should alarming symptoms 
arise and remain for any length of time, send for a physician. 

Inflammations of the Mouth — Simple or catarrhal inflam- 
mation of the mouth may result from an injury or may be due to 
taking some hot or irritating substance into the mouth. It may 
occur during teething, or may accompany measles, scarlet fever, 
diphtheria, etc. 

Symptoms and Signs — The whole of the lining of the mouth is 
very red and swollen, and small spots of bleeding are frequently 
seen. The mouth is hot and there is considerable pain. The 
child will show signs of hunger but will either refuse the breast 
or bottle altogether or will drop it after a moment or two. The 
child is very fretful and cross and often the saliva will run from 
the mouth very freely. The tongue is nearly always coated and 
the edges very red. There may be some derangement of diges- 
tion with vomiting or mild diarrhea. The disease lasts only a 
few days. 

Treatment — Thoroughly cleanse the mouth every thirty min- 
utes with a solution made by dissolving two tablets No. 3 in a 
cup of warm water. Do not give the child hot or even warm 
food — it is much better cold. Small sips of cold water or a 
small piece of ice to suck will be beneficial. Should ulcers 
appear dust lightly with burnt alum before using the solution as 
above. The second form of sore mouth differs from the first in 
having small, round, yellowish- white ulcers present in the mouth 
and on the tongue. To treat these ulcers first dust lightly with 
burnt alum and then wash the mouth thoroughly every thirty 
minutes with the solution of No. 3 as above. Do not apply 
burnt alum more than once a day. 

Another Form of the Disease — There is another form of 
inflammation of the mouth which is found only in children who 



HEALTH AT HOME. 239 

have teeth. This begins by ulcers forming at the point where 
the teeth and gums meet, the ulcers gradually extending over the 
mouth. This form of ulcerative sore mouth may be due to cer- 
tain poisons, such as mercury, lead, phosphorus, etc. It is a 
rare disease, however. 

Symptoms and Signs — The first things noticed are profuse spit- 
ting and a very bad breath. The gums are red, swollen and 
spongy and bleed very easily. Ulcers are seen near the teeth 
most marked in front. The tongue is swollen and is coated 
with a thick yellow coating. Unless treated this form of disease 
will last for months and very much affect the child's general 
health. 

Treatment — If due to poisoning try to discover where the 
poison is coming from and remove it. Next cleanse the mouth 
every hour or two with a solution of No. 3, as in the previous 
forms of inflammation of the mouth. Immediately after this swab 
the mouth with a solution made by dissolving two tablets of No. 
12 in a cup of water. To make a swab, twist a piece of absorb- 
ent cotton on a small stick or simply put a piece of absorbent 
cotton over the end of the first finger. This last treatment will 
cause some pain, but it will not be of long duration. In addition 
give one-half tablet of No. 12 every two hours the first day, every 
three hours the second day and every four hours for the remain- 
ing days you think it necessary to give medicine. Give plenty of 
fresh fruit, fresh vegetables, etc. 

Thrash — Thrush is a disease in which we find the lining of 
the mouth and the tongue covered or partially covered with 
small or large white patches. The disease is caused by a germ 
which forms a sort of mould or fungus which we see in the white 
patches. This disease is most common in thickly settled parts of 
cities where care as to cleanliness of children's mouths, bottles, 
etc. , is not of the best. 

Symptoms and Signs — The first thing noticed will be small 
white spots which resemble spots of coagulated milk, but which 
cannot be wiped off. If taken off by force a number of little 
bleeding points will be seen. There may be only a few patches 
or the whole mouth may be covered with them. The mouth is 
dry and the tongue coated and there is some difficulty in swallow- 
ing. Thrush is not a dangerous disease. 



240 HKAI/fH AT HOME. 

Treatment — By being careful to keep the mouth clean, nipples 
clean and bottles and rubber bottle nipples clean, thrush may be 
prevented. Rubber nipples and tubes for nursing bottles should 
be kept in a solution made by dissolving two or three tablets of 
No. 5 in a pint of warm water when not in use. The mouth 
should be thoroughly cleansed five or six times a day with a 
solution made by dissolving two tablets of No. 3 in a cup of 
warm water. Use a swab for this cleansing. Cases of severe 
inflammation of the mouth may follow measles and other diseases. 
If they do not yield readily to the treatments here given a physi- 
cian should be called. 

Diseases of the Upper Part of the Throat — Active 
inflammation of the upper part of the throat may be a disease by 
itself or it may occur with measles, scarlet fever, diphtheria or la 
grippe ; cold and exposure may produce it. The inflammation 
may involve the tonsils, the soft palate and the whole of the 
upper throat or any part of these. 

Symptoms and Sig?is — There is pain upon swallowing and in 
the angles of the jaws. The throat seems dry and rough and 
there is often an irritating cough. The disease quite often begins 
very suddenly with vomiting, and there is often fever as high as 
103° or 104°. In naming the disease one must be sure that it is 
not scarlet fever or measles. If there is scarlet fever in the 
neighborhood and the above symptoms are present, the patient 
should be treated as if scarlet fever were the disease, and two or 
three days will settle the question as to which it is. Carefully 
read over the section on Scarlet Fever. In measles there is not 
so much trouble as the "measles" appear on the skin very soon 
and settle all questions. 

Treatment — Give at once to a young child one tablet No. 4 ; 
to a child over seven years of age, two tablets No. 4; to a 
grown person give two tablets No. 16. Put the child to bed. 
If the patient is an infant do not feed as much as usual ; if an older 
person or a grown person, feed entirely on liquids and soft foods 
such as milk, beef tea, chicken broth, any sort of soup, thin oat- 
meal gruel, very soft boiled eggs, raw oysters, oyster soup, etc. 
Quench the thirst with small sips of cold water or small pieces of 
ice. To a child up to three years of age give one-half tablet No. 



HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 241 

13 every three hours ; to a child ten years old give one tablet No. 13 
every three hours ; to an adult, two tablets No. 13 every three 
hours. 

Inflammation of the Hanging Palate — Inflammation of 
the hanging palate or uvula sometimes occurs, and besides caus- 
ing some pain causes a very troublesome cough and considerable 
gagging. The very large hanging palate always tells you when 
this trouble is present, and it may be relieved by placing ice 
about the throat on the outside and upon the swollen uvula at the 
same time. Also take a needle and run it into the swollen uvula 
many times. This will cause no pain whatever and will reduce 
the swelling. Where ice cannot be had use hot water in the 
same manner. In all cases frequently swab the swollen palate 
with a solution made by dissolving four tablets of No. 3 in one- 
fourth cup of warm water. Should the hanging palate seem 
unusually long and not seem to be swelled and yet cause a cough 
by its laying on the back of the tongue, take the patient to a phy- 
sician and have the elongated portion cut off. 

Abscesses and Adenoids — Abscesses sometimes occur in the 
throats of children, and when such a condition is suspected see a 
physician at once, as you cannot care for this trouble at home. 
There is another condition known as adenoid vegetations, which 
occur very frequently in childhood, and which very seriously 
affect the child's health. This is another case for the surgeon's 
care, but the signs and symptoms are described here. It is advised, 
however, that a surgeon be called as soon as the trouble is noticed. 

Sympto?ns and Signs — Among the signs by which this condi- 
tion may be recognized are : discharge from the nose of rather 
thick and yellowish matter, sometimes constantly, at other times 
with intervals when the nose is comparatively free; signs of 
obstruction in the nose; a nasal voice; the child breathes with its 
mouth open and "wheezes" more or less, and is very liable to 
snore while sleeping and sometimes to have much trouble to 
breathe at all while asleep. The voice is liable to be hoarse and 
the child may have earache or be somewhat hard of hearing. 
The expression on the face is dull and stupid. The child is 
not strong and is rather pale, listless, has headache often and is 
frequently somewhat sick for no particular reason; usually 



242 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

breathes through the mouth both day and night; frequently 
cannot blow the nose at all. The condition is always better in 
summer and^worse in winter. A child suffering from adenoids 
will be pale^and seem bloodless. This paleness and also inability 
to sleep quietly is produced by the blood not receiving air 
enough. The growths prevent the child from breathing through 
the nose, and as a result of this the breathing is irregular and 
not enough air is carried to the lungs to properly aerate the blood 
and the child becomes poisoned by carbon dioxide gas. 

Inflammation of the Tonsils — Quinsy — The tonsils are 
the round or oblong bunches which lie on either side of the 
throat and which usually attract the attention first when looking 
into a child's throat. The tonsils are subject to a variety of 
inflammations and cause a great deal of trouble all through life, 
but especially in childhood. Inflammation of the tonsils, or 
quinsy, occurs most frequently in children, but is also seen in 
adults, and is a disease of some seriousness. 

Symptoms and Signs — Inflammation of the tonsils nearly always 
begins by symptoms of a general character. Usually there is a 
slight chill and decided sick feeling ; sometimes vomiting and 
occasionally diarrhea, pain in the back, the muscles and the 
head ache, the temperature rises rapidly to 102° or 104°. Then 
the tonsils become somewhat sore and begin to swell. Small 
yellow spots may appear on the tonsils, pain on swallowing, the 
patient frequently being able to swallow only after repeated efforts. 
The mouth does not open easily ; the swelling of the tonsils con- 
tinues until the whole throat is filled and the patient is frequently 
so sick as to be unable to sit up at all. At this time there is 
matter or pus in the tonsil, and unless lanced the tonsil will fre- 
quently break and discharge into the throat. All symptoms sub- 
side rapidly after the abscess is lanced or breaks. 

Treatment — If quinsy is recognized early it may be broken up by 
giving two tablets of No. 14 every two hours. This is the dose 
for all children over five years of age. For all children under 
five years, give one tablet of No. 14 every two hours, and for all 
adults, four tablets No. 14 every two hours. In many cases, how- 
ever, it cannot be broken up. In these cases give to a child less 
than five years old, one-half tablet No. 13 every four hours; 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 243 

to a child five years and over, one tablet No. 13 every three hours ; 
to an adult give one tablet No. 13 every two hours. Also give at 
the same time that the above is given to a child less than five 
years old one tablet No. 15; to a' child five years and over, two 
tablets No. 15; to an adult, four tablets No. 15. Cloths wrung 
out of hot water and placed on the neck will be a comfort, and 
gargling hot water is a benefit. In addition to the above, give a 
child younger than three years one tablet No. 9 at night and one 
tablet in the morning ; to a child over three years of age, give one 
tablet No. 4 at night and to an adult, give one tablet No. 16 at 
night and one tablet in the morning. 

Chronic Enlargement of the Tonsils — This trouble is 
easy to discover. Take the tongue depressor found in the Cab- 
inet and hold the child's tongue well down, having the mouth 
opened wide, then with a small hand mirror throw the light 
from a window or a lamp into the child's throat. If the child 
has chronic enlargement of the tonsils they will be noted on 
either side of the throat as large red bodies, sometimes as large 
as a small walnut, and in these will appear little holes. Other 
signs of chronic enlargement of the tonsils are: snoring at 
night, a foul breath, coughing up small hard yellowish-white 
pieces of matter of the consistence of cheese, pale skin, mouth 
breathing, thick voice ; the child may have earache or be hard 
of hearing, and this is due to the enlarged tonsils pressing on the 
small tube which leads from the throat to the ear. Frequent 
attacks of quinsy is also a sign. 

Treatment — There is only one real treatment for this trouble, 
and that is to take the child to a competent throat specialist and 
have the tonsils removed. They will always give more or less 
trouble until this is done. A treatment that will sometimes com- 
pletely cure a case in from one to six months is : Dissolve in a 
four ounce bottle of water ten tablets of No. 3 and use as a gargle 
three times a day. At the same time give one tablet No. 17 
before each meal. 



244 HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 



DISEASES OF THE STOMACH. 

In children it is very difficult to entirely separate the diseases 
of the stomach from those of the intestines. There are some con- 
ditions, however, which belong entirely to the stomach and these 
will be considered now and later will be taken up those diseases 
in which both the stomach and the intestines are involved. 

Vomiting" — Infants and young children vomit very easily 
and this due partially to the size and position of the stomach. 
An infant will frequently vomit from the overfilling of the 
stomach. The infant stomach is unable to hold and digest an 
overload, and nature steps in and causes vomiting, thereby throw- 
ing off the excess of food and fallowing the stomach free action 
to digest the remainder. In infants in whom vomiting frequently 
follows feeding the only treatment necessary is to diminish the 
amount of food given at any one feeding. Vomiting also occurs 
in cases of acute indigestion, though usually in these cases the 
vomiting does not take place until several hours after feeding. 
Fever may occur and the infant be very sick indeed, and the food 
which should have been digested conies up in an undigested 
state. Vomiting is always present when there is any obstruction 
in the intestinal tract. This vomiting is persistent and cannot 
be stopped by any of the ordinary measures. After a few attacks 
of vomiting it will be noticed that the vomit contains a greenish 
yellow material, which is bile from the liver; it may even con- 
tinue until matter which ordinarily passes through the bowels will 
be vomited. When this occurs it is a sure sign of an obstruction 
of some sort in the intestines. In this sort of vomiting the 
patient, whether a child or adult, soon becomes very sick. The 
treatment for this form of vomiting is an operation, and that 
alone will relieve the symptoms, hence the only advice to be given 
is : Call a surgeon. Certain nervous diseases, such as tumor of 
the brain and some forms of brain fever may cause vomiting 
and this will be taken up under the diseases mentioned. 

Vomiting very frequently occurs in children at the beginning 
of acute diseases such as whooping cough, scarlet fever, lung 
fever and malaria. Poisons will nearly always produce vomiting. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 245 

Gastralgia — Stomachache — By this we mean any sudden 
severe attack of pain in the stomach. One of the most frequent 
causes of this trouble is the overloading of the stomach or taking 
into the stomach of such things as green fruit or cabbage. A 
great many food stuffs will cause this trouble in children. Expos- 
ure to cold, wet feet, drinking ice water and many other causes 
will also produce it. 

Treatment — If there is any reason at all or even a faint suspi- 
cion that the child has taken anything into the stomach which 
might cause the pain the first thing is to empty the stomach. To 
do this give one tablet No. 18. If vomiting does not occur in 
from ten to fifteen minutes repeat the dose. Then put the child 
to bed and put a turpentine stupe over the stomach. For direc- 
tions as to making the turpentine stupe see the opening section on 
Children's diseases. In addition to this dissolve one or two tab- 
lets No. 19 in hot water and give this to the child. Repeat this 
dose every fifteen minutes until pain is stopped. A hot water 
bottle will sometimes answer as well as the turpentine stupe for 
the local applications over the stomach. 

Acute Indigestion in the Stomach — This occurs when- 
ever the stomach cannot digest the food placed in it. This may 
be due to the fact that the work of digesting may be too great or 
for some reason the stomach may not be capable of digesting as 
it should. Under the first condition the giving of improper food 
is one of the most frequent causes, as the giving of cow's milk to 
infants when it has not been sufficiently diluted. Any abrupt 
change in diet may produce the same thing. In older children 
the use of too much pastry or unripe fruit, swallowing food before 
chewing thoroughly and overloading the stomach may cause this 
disease. Reasons which may cause the stomach to be incapable 
of digesting as it should are: great fatigue, overheating, cold 
hands and feet, troubles in teething, and the beginning of acute 
diseases. 

Symptoms and Signs — One of the first symptoms is the fact 
that food will remain undigested in the stomach for five or six 
hours after eating instead of being digested in two or three hours, 
as it is normally. This produces a feeling of heaviness in the 
stomach and frequently vomiting follows, which ceases when the 



246 HEALTH AT HOME. 

stomach is empty. Just before vomiting commences there may- 
be pain in the stomach, general sick feeling and nausea. There 
may also be stupor, or even the reverse, excitement, restlessness, 
and sometimes convulsions. The temperature is from 99.5° to 
102°. The appetite is lost and the tongue coated. Diarrhea is 
generally present, and undigested food will be found in the stools. 
The stomach may seem bloated. Patients suffering from acute 
indigestion of the stomach nearly always get well. 

Treatment — One of the best methods of treating is washing 
out the stomach with warm water. This is done by having the 
patient "swallow" a stomach tube, then filling the stomach full 
of warm water. By quickly lowering the upper end of the 
stomach tube the contents of the stomach are siphoned out. 
When this is not possible it is well to produce vomiting by giv- 
ing a large amount of lukewarm water which will in most cases 
produce very free vomiting, and thus having emptied the stomach, 
give it absolute rest for three hours. Then give two teaspoonf uls 
of the following every hour : take the white of one fresh egg, 
add one-half pint of cold water, a little salt and one teaspoonful 
of brandy or whiskey. Stir thoroughly and serve cold. After 
from twenty-four to thirty-six hours, beef broth may be added, 
and alter three days milk may be used. If a nursing child, it 
should not be allowed at the breast at all for twenty-four hours. 
After that allow nursing for three minutes every three hours and 
after twenty-four hours gradually increase the time of nursing 
until the usual time is occupied. Keep the bowels working well 
by giving one tablet No. 9 at night and one in the morning. 
The dose in this case is the same for all ages. When there is 
persistent vomiting give one tablespoonful of lime water every 
two hours. Dissolve in this one tablet No. 2. Warm flannel or 
cloths wrung out of hot water over the stomach are of much 
benefit. In all /cases be careful not to overfeed the patient. 
Starve the patient for four or five days and then gradually increase 
the food until the usual amount is reached. 

Ulcer of the Stomach — The signs of this disease are pain 
in the stomach, tenderness over the stomach, vomiting of blood 
which will have something the appearance of coffee grounds, and 
sometimes blood is found in the stools, nearly always fever. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 247 

Ulcers of the stomach are very rare, but the few concise signs given 
will enable one to easily recognize the disease. 

Treatment — Insist upon absolute rest in bed. Allow the patient to 
swallow tiny pieces of ice ; give small doses of whiskey or brandy. 
Give one tablet No. 15 every two hours. The dose in this case is 
the same for all ages. This is all that will be needed in the way 
of medicine for four days. Then stop giving No. 15 and give 
instead one tablet No. 17 before each meal. The dose is the 
same for all ages. 



DISEASES OE THE INTESTINES. 

Diarrhea — This disease is very common to childhood and 
may occur at any age and at any season of the year, but is most 
frequent in the summer months. Diarrhea may be caused by an 
almost endless number of things. Among the usual causes, how- 
ever, are a general weak constitution, teething, overfeeding, 
underfeeding, the wrong sort of foods, taking cold, and wet feet. 
Diarrhea may be caused by partly cooked foods, such as oatmeal, 
rice, fresh fruits containing seeds, green corn, cabbage and a num- 
ber of vegetables. Sometimes severe cases of diarrhea are pro- 
duced in children by drugs which are given as laxatives. Again 
diarrhea may be produced by certain nervous influences, such as 
excessive fright, great exhaustion, nervous fretfulness in teething, 
etc. Indigestion will also produce this trouble. 

Treatment — First give from one to six tablets of No 4, accord- 
ing to age. This will cause a very free movement of the bowels 
and will remove the filthy and poisonous material from the sys- 
tem. After the bowels have moved freely give one tablet No. 20 
every two to three hours. The dose is the same for all children. 
In mild cases give one tablet every three hours and in more severe 
cases one tablet every two hours. In addition to this feed the 
child on boiled milk and bread, served hot, for two or three days. 
Do not give any other food and the recovery will be rapid. 

Cholera Infantum— Summer Diarrhea — This is a disease 
which is very common in young children in summer, and 
especially common in crowded cities. A great many of the babies 



248 HKAI/fH AT HOME. 

and young children who die do so from the effect of this disease. 
Cholera infantum is produced by a germ, and this germ requires 
much heat to grow properly, hence we find cholera infantum at 
its height in the hot summer months. Chronic indigestion or 
improper feeding frequently cause this disease. 

Symptoms and Signs — In mild cases of cholera infantum the 
disease usually begins with diarrheal discharges. The little one 
is fretful and peevish and does not rest well at night. The move- 
ments from the bowels gradually become more frequent and 
always contain undigested food ; they are thin and are usually 
green or yellow. Very soon a disagreeable odor is noticed and a 
thick stringy substance is noticed in the stools. The tongue is 
coated. The child becomes pale and its limbs are soft and flabby. 
It does not sleep well and has the appearance of a "sick" baby. 
The above we find only in mild cases. In severe cases we find 
that vomiting and diarrhea begin about the same time. The 
vomiting is quite frequent and continues until bile will be found 
in the vomit. Food or drink start the vomiting again after it 
has stopped. The stools are large, watery and frequent, often as 
many as ten or fifteen in a half day. At first they may be 
colored, but they soon become only a watery discharge. There 
is very little if any odor to the stools. There is a high temper- 
ature and the patient is very sick — becomes so very early in the 
disease. The little one loses weight very rapidly. The face has 
an anxious expression ; the eyes are sunken and the features 
sharpened and there is a peculiar pallor. Early in the disease 
the child cries or moans and throws itself about very actively in 
a sort of delirium. This is followed by dullness and ^stupor and 
sometimes unconsciousness or convulsions. The temperature is 
from 102° to 104.5° and in cases which die often, rises to 107° just 
before death. The skin is often clammy and the feet and hands 
cold. The pulse is rapid and very weak. The breathing is fre- 
quent and irregular. The tongue is coated and dry. The abdo- 
men is sunken. There is great thirst and the child will drink 
often, even though each drink may produce vomiting. Very 
little urine is passed. If these^severe symptoms continue more 
than one day death is almost sure to result. As the patient gets 
better the vomiting stops, the stools become less frequent, the 



HEALTH AT HOME. 249 

pulse becomes better, the temperature gradually becomes normal, 
the appetite returns and the nervous symptoms disappear. In 
naming this disease bear in mind the following points : vomit- 
ing, frequent large watery stools, great thirst, high tem- 
perature, restlessness, dry coated tongue, pinched anxious face, 
weak rapid pulse, rapid breathing, sometimes unconsciousness, 
cold hands and feet. This is a very dangerous disease, and every 
year many children die from its effects. Death occurs in fully one- 
half of the cases, and it is well to call a physician. His treat- 
ment, however, will not differ to any great extent from that given 
here, nor can he do more than can be done by the intelligent use 
of the treatment given below, but in view of the seriousness of 
the case and knowing that one-half or more of these cases ter- 
minate fatally it is well to call a physician that you may have the 
satisfaction of having had a skilled attendant should a fatal ter- 
mination occur. 

Treatment — In no disease is the proverb, " An ounce of preven- 
tion is worth a pound of cure, ' 'more applicable than in this disease, 
and should a child have any derangement of digestion whatever 
or any bowel trouble, attend to it at once ; do not give it a chance 
to go on and develop into this treacherous disease. Do not allow 
a diarrhea to run in summer because the child may be teething. 
In treatment first inject as much warm water as possible into the 
bowel and thus thoroughly wash it out; have the patient drink a 
large quantity of lukewarm water and thus wash out the stomach. 
Next give one tablet No. 15 every half hour for four hours, then 
one tablet of the same every three hours ; the dose is the same for 
all ages. Make a fairly strong solution of salt and water, heat it 
and wring cloths out of this. Do not wring them dry, however ; 
place over the abdomen for ten to fifteen minutes. Do this 
once every hour or two. Reduce the fever by giving sponge 
baths or, if this does not seem to be sufficient, give an entire 
bath, placing the child in lukewarm water and gradually adding 
cold water; keep the child in the bath about ten minutes and 
repeat the bath every hour. Put a tablepsoonful of whiskey or 
brandy in four tablespoonfuls of ice water and give one teaspoon- 
ful of this every two hours. For cold feet and hands use a hot 
water bag. After the patient becomes well enough to take nearly 



250 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

the usual amount of food give one tablet No. 17 before each meal 
and continue this for from two to four weeks. The dose is the 
same for all ages. 

Indigestion in the Intestines — The greater and the most 
complicated part of digestion takes place in the intestines, hence 
we find more cases of intestinal indigestion than we do of indi- 
gestion in the stomach. Sometimes the two may be associated, 
but more frequently the trouble is located entirely in the intes- 
tines. This disease differs much in infants and in older child- 
ren, therefore will be considered separately. 

In infants this disease may be caused by general weak condi- 
tion, unhygienic surroundings, improper feeding, etc. The 
most frequent cause, however, seems to be an excess of proteids 
in the infant's food (for full explanation of the term, proteids, see 
the chapter on Foods, pp. 40-43 and note on p. 35) or in other 
words the food is too rich. 

Symptoms and Signs — The signs of the disease are loss of 
weight, pale color, poor circulation, much fretfulness and crying 
and restless sleep. The tongue is nearly always coated and the 
appetite is good, the infant eating whenever food is offered. 
Vomiting occurs in all cases, but is not severe nor very frequent. 
The baby is either constipated or has diarrhea all of the time. 
When diarrhea occurs the stools are watery and contain curds 
either in lumps or flaky masses. The movement of the bowels is 
not attended by pain, but there is a noticeable amount of gas. The 
odor of the stool is not bad. When constipation is present the 
stools are whitish and are smooth and pasty or hard balls which 
pass after much straining and are sometimes streaked with blood. 
Frequently the bowels will not move for days unless an injection 
or cathartic is used. Constipated cases may have severe attacks 
of colic. These symptoms drag on for weeks at a time until the 
food is corrected. 

Treatment — Attention to the feeding is of first importance. If 
diarrhea is present give one tablet No. 20 every three hours until 
the diarrhea is checked. When constipation occurs give one 
tablet No. 9 every two hours until the bowels move freely; then 
give one tablet No. 9 every four to six hours until the trouble is 
entirely removed. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 251 

In older children the most common cause of this disease is an 
excess of carbohydrates (see the chapter on Foods, pp. 41-43 and 
Note on p. 35) in the food, and this is brought about by feeding 
too much potato, oatmeal, etc. Other things produce this trouble. 

Symptoms and Signs — Patients suffering from this disease are 
pale, thin, not strong, small limbed and often have distended abdo- 
mens. There is much gas in the intestines and bowels ; dark 
rings are seen under the eyes ; the complexion is muddy ; they 
are cross and irritable, hard to control, hard to amuse or interest 
and are hard to care for in every way. They are below the 
average in height and weight. They do not sleep well, often tos- 
sing about, waking, crying out, grinding their teeth, etc. They 
perspire very easily and are liable to have cold hands and feet. 
The bowels are constipated and the stools are of a whitish color, 
lumpy and have a foul odor. Large amounts of gas pass from 
the bowels. The appetite is changeable. The tongue is usually 
coated and the breath has a bad smell. 

Treatment — Stop giving starchy foods, such as potatoes and 
cereals, and feed the patient on rare beef, beef juice, broths, milk, 
etc. Malted milk may also be used to advantage. The child 
should be fed at regular intervals. Fresh fruits may be given in 
small quantities. Give one tablet No. 9 before each meal and 
one at bedtime ; the dose is the same for all ages. Give one tab- 
let No. 17 after each meal; the dose is the same for all ages. 
Continue this for from ten to twelve weeks. Give the child plenty 
of fresh air and a reasonable amount of exercise. 

Colic — By colic we mean the pain which occurs in the intes- 
tines and not that which occurs in the ^stomach. Colic may be 
due to swallowing certain things, such as fruit seeds. The special 
colic of infancy is associated with gas in the intestines or bowels, 
and is due to indigestion. Many babes have almost daily attacks 
of colic. Cold feet or chilling the body suddenly may produce 
colic. 

Symptoms and Signs — Colic is not hard to recognize, and every 
mother is more or less familiar with its signs. .The face con- 
tracts, the cry is sharp and piercing, subsiding and then recur- 
ring with renewed vigor; the legs are drawn up and the abdomen 
is hard and usually somewhat distended. As soon as the gas 



252 HEAI/fH AT HOME. 

passes the child becomes quiet and falls asleep. Sometimes there 
is only fretfulness and the child cannot sleep. 

Treat?nent — An injection of warm water will sometimes relieve 
colic in infants. The abdomen should be covered with hot flan- 
nels, and if the feet are cold place a hot water bag near them. 
Give one tablet No. 19 every fifteen to twenty minutes until the 
pain is relieved. In addition to this give one tablet No. 15 every 
two hours until three doses have been given. The dose of the 
two remedies above is the same for all ages. 

Chronic Constipation — Constipation may be said to be pres- 
ent wherever the stools are fewer and dryer than normal. Many 
things produce chronic constipation. It may be caused by the 
juices of the liver or intestines growing less in quantity than 
normal. Very often the twisting movement of the intestines is not 
strong enough or, in other words, the intestinal muscles lack the 
proper tone. In other cases constipation is due to the fact that too 
great a proportion of the food is absorbed by the body and not 
enough passes into the bowel to form a good stool. A sore spot 
about the anus or piles may cause constipation. Improper diet 
causes constipation, as does also the habit of not attending to the 
bowels when nature makes a call. Exercise also has a marked 
influence upon the bowels. 

Symptoms and Signs — In some cases the constipation is the 
only symptom present. In most cases other signs are present — 
gas in the bowels, colicky pains; blood ^may be passed in the 
stool ; piles may be produced ; sores may occur at the anus ; ner- 
vousness may develop; there is frequently headache present; the 
sleep is disturbed and signs of indigestion may occur. 

Treatment — Treatment must be continued for a long time to be 
of value, but careful attention to details will always effect a cure. 
The first thing is to set some certain hour each day, preferably 
just after breakfast and see that the child goes to stool at that 
time, as habit is a large factor in this disease. For very young 
infants the addition of a little cream to the milk used daily will 
be a benefit. In older children the use of fresh fruits, rare 
meats and eggs cooked soft will be a benefit. Rubbing is of bene- 
fit and the regular exercise of the muscles should be carefully 
looked after. Give to an infant one tablet No. 9 in the morning 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 253 

before feeding and one about noon and another just before going 
to bed at night. To a child from two to four years of age, give 
one tablet No. 4 in the morning before breakfast; to a child from 
four to ten, one tablet No. 4 before breakfast and one before going 
to bed at night. Older children may be given one tablet No. 16 
before each meal if it should be found necessary. At any time 
when for any reason it is desired to give a remedy which will 
thoroughly empty the bowels, use from one to five tablets of No. 
16. Sometimes the intestines will roll and twist upon each other 
in such a manner as to form a kink. This will entirely prevent 
the movement from the bowels and is a very serious condition, 
but as it is a condition which can only be attended to by a skilled 
physician it is only mentioned here. 

Appendicitis — At the end of the small intestine, just below 
the point where the small and large intestines join, there is a 
small, hollow, worm-like body which is known as the vermiform 
appendix. Sometimes fruit seeds or rough particles of food lodge 
in this worm-like sac instead of passing on into the large intes- 
tine. There is no way for the material to escape when once it 
gets into this sac, and as a result it stays there and sets up an 
inflammation, and this inflammation is known as appendicitis. 
There are many varieties of this disease. In the simple form, 
the appendix inflames, swells somewhat, and then in some 
manner the foreign substance is discharged into the intestine and 
speedy recovery follows. The ulcerative form occurs in typhoid 
fever and in consumption, and the outcome depends upon the out- 
come of the causative disease. The perforative form, in which 
the foreign substance lodged in the appendix starts an inflamma- 
tion, is followed by the forming of an abscess. This abscess 
grows until it reaches the point of bursting; if it bursts into the 
intestine the patient will usually recover, but if it breaks into 
the abdominal cavity the chances for the recovery of the patient 
are very slight. There is more or less fever connected with all 
cases of appendicitis. 

Symptoms and Signs — Appendicitis usually begins with severe 
pain on the right side just below the ribs, usually covering only 
a small area. There is also vomiting, constipation and fever. 
In the region where the pain first began will be found a bunch 



254 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

about the size of a hen's egg. It will require careful feeling to 
discover this. Sometimes, however, this bunch will be very 
noticeable and in such a case a physician is needed at once. 
About one-half of the cases of appendicitis die. The disease is 
one which cannot be treated at home at all and with even a faint 
suspicion of such trouble the family physician should be called. 
Appendicitis in children and in adults is very much the same. 

Tape-worms — Are taken intcrthe body by eating food which 
contains the tape worm eggs. Pork, beef or fish may contain the 
eggs of the tape-worm, and thus they may very easily be taken 
into the human system. Tape-worms are rare, however, and the 
danger of taking them into the stomach is slight indeed. The 
egg once taken into the stomach passes into the intestine and 
remains there for its growth, which usually takes from three to 
four months. After this time the head coutinues to grow and 
for every new joint at the head an old one is thrown off at the 
tail. A tape- worm lives from ten to thirty years. Each piece 
cast off from the tail is full of eggs and this passing from the body 
may be eaten by animals. From the animal's stomach, the yonng 
works its way into the muscles and must again be taken into a 
stomach before a full fledged tape-worm can develop. 

Symptoms and Signs — There is only one sign which can be 
certainly relied upon and that is the finding of the castoff pieces 
of the worm in the stool. There are other symptoms but they 
are very indistinct and do not mean much. These are bad 
breath, attacts of colic, an appetite which cannot be satisfied, and 
diarrhea. 

Treatment — To children, give two tablets of No. 4 at night. 
Do not allow the child to eat any breakfast and two hours after 
the child rises give one capsule containg five drops of the oil of 
male fern. Repeat this dose every hour until four doses have 
been given. Immediately after giving the last capsule, give the 
child four tablets No. 9, and one-half tablespoonf ul of castor oil. 
Allow the child to take small quantities of milk during the day 
but no other food. Watch the stools carefully, and be sure that 
the head of the worm is passed. 

To adults give three tablets of No. 16, and four tablets of No. 
4 at night and no breakfast in the morning, and after the bowels 



HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 25 S 

have moved give five drops of the oil of male fern in capsule 
every hour until six doses have been given; immediately after 
the last dose has been taken, give one tablespoon ful of castor oil 
and five tablets No. 4. Use small quantities of milk but no other 
food for from ten to twelve hours after the last medicine has been 
taken. Watch carefully for the head of the worm. 

Round- worm — This worm is found in the small intestine. 
It is from five to ten inches long and light grey in color. These 
woims occasionally pass into the stomach and are vomited. The 
presence of round-worms is surely indicated by finding them in 
the stools and this is really the only sure indication. There is, 
however, colic, gas, indigestion, loss of appetite, restlessness, 
disturbed sleep, and among the surer signs are grinding of the 
teeth at night while asleep, picking at the nose, and a very pale 
upper lip. There may also be chills, headache, dizziness and 
many other symptoms. Round-worms are usually found in great 
numbers if found at all. 

Treatment — At night give two tablets of No. 9 and one tablet 
of No. 4. Do not give any breakfast and commencing one hour 
after rising, give one tablet No. 21 every hour until the bowels 
move very freely. 

Thread- worms — Pin- worms — These worms are found in 
the lower bowel and are very small, about one-half inch long. 
These worms when found are usually in great numbers. The 
presence of these worms produces intense itching about the anus. 
There is frequent desire to pass urine. The stools have a slimy 
appearance. 

Treatment — Inject into the rectum one or two pints of warm 
water in which has been dissolved two tablets No. 2. After this 
has passed inject a pint of strong warm salt water and retain as 
long as possible. After this has passed wash the anus thoroughly 
and rub well with No. 40. Repeat this treatment every other 
night for two weeks. Then miss one week and treat again for 
two weeks. In addition to this give one tablet No. 16 in the morn- 
ing and one at night. Keep this up during the entire treatment. 

Diseases of the Rectum — During the act of emptying the 
bowels the rectum may protrude to a greater or less extent, and 
this is known as prolapse. The bowel will come down during 



256 HEALTH AT HOMK. 

defecation from a tiny ring of mucous membrane to a bunch as 
large as a good-sized pigeon's egg. This bunch is of a deep pur- 
plish-red color and bleeds easily. The treatment consists in 
gently pushing the protruding part back with the fingers and 
applying cold cloths to the part after the gut has been placed in 
proper position. Watch carefully after each stool for a week or 
two and repeat the treatment when necessary and the trouble will 
be removed with but little difficulty. Inflammation of the rec- 
tum sometimes occurs, and may be due to irritating injections, 
to pin- worms, or may follow the use of suppositories. The treat- 
ment is : Cleanse the parts carefully and apply No. 40 every 
night until relieved. 

Diseases of the I/iver — Disease of the liver is rare in child- 
hood, yet does sometimes occur. Jaundice is sometimes seen, and 
is due to some obstruction to the flow of bile from the liver into 
the intestine. The treatment is one tablet No. 16 at night 
and one in the morning until the bowels move freely and the 
yellow appearance disappears from the skin. Congestion of the 
liver occurs from malarial fever and from certain of the poisons ; 
it is cured when the conditions which produce the congestion 
are cured. Abscess of the liver is sometimes seen in children. 
Its cure must be effected by the surgeon, and it requires an 
expert physician to discover this disease when present in child- 
ren. When a child has chronic bone or joint disease the liver is 
at times diseased and becomes very large, and between the cells 
of the liver substance occur particles of wax-like fat. Cases of 
this sort require the care of an expert physician. Sometimes in 
children suffering from consumption or from active starvation 
the liver will take on an excessive amount of fat and this disease 
is known as fatty liver. The treatment of the disease which pro- 
duces the trouble is the only treatment for this condition. Gall- 
stones are recorded as having been found in children, but the 
truth of this is doubtful. 

Peritonitis— Inflammation of the Bowels— The intes- 
tines are covered by a membrane which is known as the periton- 
aeum, and this sometimes inflames and causes much trouble. 

Symptoms and Signs — The symptoms or signs of this disease 
are quite plain. The disease begins with high fever — from 



HEALTH AT HOME. 257 

103° to 105° — vomiting, and pain in the abdomen. The child is 
restless and fretful and the abdomen soon swells, and if gently 
thumped, will sound hollow. This swelling and hollowness is 
always present in this disease. The breathing is shallow and 
rapid. The patient usually lies on the back with the legs drawn 
up. The pulse is small and rapid and the patient is very sick 
from the beginning. The hands and feet are frequently cold. The 
face has a pinched look and the features indicate pain. Most 
cases are constipated although diarrhea sometimes occurs. The 
abdomen is always tender. The appetite disappears. Inflamma- 
tion ol the bowels may be found with consumption but in such a 
case it it cannot be treated alone, and therefore need not be con- 
sidered here. 

Treatment — Wring cloths out of cold water and lay over the 
abdomen. If the child rebels against the cold, hot cloths may be 
substituted, but they must be hot. A very little turpentine 
sprinkled over the hot cloth will be a benefit. The feeding 
must be conducted with care, as the tendency to vomit is always 
present. Milk and soft or raw eggs should be the only food. 
Also give as a stimulant one tablespoonful of brandy or whiskey 
in four tablespoonfuls of water; stir, add a piece of ice and give 
one teaspoonful every two to three hours. If the patient is con- 
stipated when first taken sick, give one tablet No. 16 at night 
and one in the morning, but under no circumstances attempt to 
move the bowels later on in the disease. During the entire 
course of the disease give to a child from two to six years of age 
one tablet No. 15 every three hours; to a child six to ten years of 
age, one tablet No. 15 every two and one-half hours. To a child 
over ten years of age, one tablet No. 15 every two hours. Take 
the best possible care of the child and above all keep the patient 
perfectly quiet. 



DISEASES OF THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM. 

Nasal Catarrh — Nasal catarrh is very common to child- 
hood and if carefully treated is comparatively easy to overcome. 
In certain children nasal catarrh appears from no special 
cause while in others it follows continued colds. Deformities of 



258 HEALTH AT HOME. 

the throat partial and stoppage of the air passages very frequently 
cause catarrh. 

Symptoms a?id Signs — A continued discharge from the nose, 
snuffling, nasal voice, sores about the end of the nose and on 
the upper lip, headache, sometimes earache, or the patient may 
be hard of hearing, the nose stopping up, sometimes on both sides, 
but more frequently first one side and then the other, are symp- 
toms. There is more or less sneezing. The patient breathes 
through the mouth and when arising in the morning the mouth 
and throat are dry and parched. The sleep is disturbed. The eyes 
frequently water and are somewhat red. There may or may not 
be a cough. The digestion is somewhat disturbed and occasion- 
ally vomiting is present. 

Treatment — The first thing in treatment is cleanliness. Keep 
the child's nose clean and use a spray made by dissolving three 
tablets No. 3 in one-fourth cup of warm water. Place some of 
this solution in the atomizer found in the Cabinet and thoroughly 
spray the nose and throat four or five times a day. Keep the 
bowels well open by using No. 9 for young children and No. 
16 for older ones. Start with one tablet at night and increase the 
dose if necessary. The patient should have one or two free easy 
movements each day. Do not let the child get wet feet or expose 
itself in any unnecessary way. In the summer have the child take 
as much outdoor exercise as possible and instruct in lung exer- 
cise, that is, have the child stand erect, shoulders well back and 
slowly fill the lungs to their utmost capacity with air, then form- 
ing the mouth as in making the letter, O, slowly blow out the 
breath. Repeat this ten or twelve times and repeat the whole 
thing two or three times a day. This a good exercise for any 
child and will very materially increase the lung capacity and is a 
safeguard to good health. 

Epistaxis — Nose Bleed — Children frequently bleed from 
the nose and those who are kept indoors more frequently than 
those who have plenty of outdoor exercise. The bleeding may be 
started from a fall or blows, from picking the nose, or it may 
occur with nasal catarrh. 

Bleeding from the nose is usually preceded by a sense of full- 
ness in the head and the blood comes drop by drop from one nos- 
tril. The amount of blood lost is usually small. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 259 

Treatment — The child should have a general tonic treatment. 
A cold bath should be given every day, followed by brisk rubbing, 
and good nourishing food should be provided and plenty of outdoor 
exercise. Give one tablet No. 17 before each meal. The bleed- 
ing may be stopped by pressing the nose between the thumb and 
finger ; by applying cold to the base of the nose and to the back 
of the neck; by snuffing lemon juice or strong alum or salt water 
up the nose. Any of these will usually stop the bleeding. 

Spasmodic Croup — This disease is very frequent in child- 
hood, but is rarely seen after the fourteenth year. Certain child- 
ren have it more frequently than others, and well nourished 
children have it as often as those not so well nourished. Spas- 
modic croup may be due to taking cold, exposure, wet feet, 
attacks of indigestion, constipation and a number of other causes. 
The part affected is chiefly that part of the throat above the vocal 
cords ; there is inflammation, dryness and the secretion of much 
mucus. To this is added a spasm of the muscles of the throat. 

Symptoms and Signs — Some time before the attack begins there 
may be a discharge from the nose and a peculiar hoarse cough 
known to many mothers as a "croupy" cough. The child is 
nearly always perfectly well during the day, and when evening 
comes the hollow barking cough appears, at first quite infre- 
quent and not at all severe. In the night, usually about mid- 
night, the cough becomes more hoarse and severe and more 
frequent and breathing becomes difficult. This soon becomes 
more marked and the child wakens with the full force of the 
attack. The difficulty in breathing is very marked and there is 
a peculiar noise, especially on drawing in the breath. This noise 
is frequently so loud as to be easily heard in an adjoining room. 
When the child draws in the breath the abdomen will be sunken 
and the spaces between the ribs will appear to be drawn in. 
The fright of the child very frequently increases the spasm and 
makes breathing more difficult. There is very great distress; the 
voice is very hoarse, but is rarely lost altogether, and the breath- 
ing is slow and hard. The cough is strident, metallic and 
hoarse. The pulse is rapid, but there is seldom any fever. The 
lips and finger tips are often bluish, and the child sits up and 
struggles for breath while beads of sweat appear on the forehead. 



260 HEALTH AT HOME. 

The attack will last for three or four hours when it will gradually 
wear away and the child fall asleep. The next day the child 
will seem as well as ever. There may be another attack the 
second night and sometimes a third on the third night, but there 
are usually but one or two attacks. After a child has had one 
attack of croup it seems to be more liable to a second one, and 
children will often have attacks every week or every two weeks 
during the cold weather. 

Treatment — The first thing to do is to relieve the spasm, in 
order that the child may breathe freely. To do this give at 
once three or four tablets No. 22. This will cause the child to 
vomit and relieve the spasm at once. Next place flannel wrung 
out of either very hot or very cold water over the throat. After 
the child has vomited give one-half tablet No. 13 every hour 
until two whole tablets have been given. If the child is consti- 
pated give an injection of warm water in which has been placed 
one-half teaspoonful of glycerine. During the day following the 
attack give one-half tablet No. 13 every three to four hours. To 
prevent a recurrence of croup give the child plenty of fresh air 
each day and give a cold sponge bath followed by a good rubbing 
with a moderately rough towel. The throat should be carefully 
looked after by a throat and nose specialist in order that anything 
in the way of adenoid growths, enlarged tonsils or a too long 
hanging palate may be removed, and if the child's general con- 
dition is poor give one tablet No. 17 before each meal and con- 
tinue this for from three to six weeks. 

Membranous Croup — Membranous croup is sometimes 
called laryngeal diphtheria, and it is many times very difficult to 
distinguish between membranous croup and true diphtheria. 

Symptoms a?id Signs — Membranous croup begins very much 
the same as spasmodic croup, yet has not quite the abruptness nor 
is the progress of the disease so rapid. There is a hoarse, stri- 
dent, metallic cough and hoarse voice, which gradually increases. 
There is a slight temperature, ranging from 99° to 101°. The 
pulse is rapid, but strong, and not weak as in spasmodic 
croup. It usually requires twenty-four hours to certainly name 
membranous croup. In this disease the child is usually taken 
sick in the morning and gradually grows worse all day. By 



HEALTH AT HOME. 261 

night the voice which was hoarse in the morning may be entirely- 
lost. The breathing is quite easy at first, but becomes more and 
more difiicult; spasms occur in the throat which make breathing 
very shallow and extremely difiicult, but as the spasm passes off 
the breathing again becomes easier. During the second day the 
disease becomes well developed. The face wears an anxious look 
and is pale. The breathing is loud and rasping; the nose dilates 
with each breath. Each time the patient draws a breath the 
abdomen draws in, the spaces between the ribs appear sunken 
and hollows appear about the collar bones. The patient is very 
restless and at times struggles for air. The pulse is weaker than 
on the first day of the disease. The lips and finger ends are some- 
what blue. The skin is clammy. By placing the ear over the 
lungs, rough rasping sounds can be heard when the child 
breathes. Without treatment death will occur in from a day and 
a half to two days in young children and in older ones it is some- 
times delayed as long as a week. Patients nearly always have 
convulsions just before death and the temperature rises to 104° or 
106°. Lung fever is very liable to complicate this disease. About 
one-half of the patients sick with membranous croup die. 

Treatment — When a case of membranous croup is even sus- 
pected the patient should be put in a room away from the chil- 
dren and the patient and nurse should stay there alone until 
the disease is over. The risk to other children is too great to 
allow the sick one to even be near the well ones. When mem- 
branous croup is suspected a physician should be called at once 
and the patient should receive an injection of antitoxine. This 
remedy acts as magic in cases of membranous croup but must 
be fresh and cannot be administered except by a physician. For 
the throat spasms, use three or four tablets of No. 22 as an emetic 
or allow the patient to inhale steam. The fumes of calomel are 
sometimes used with benefit but this must also be done under the 
direction of a physician. Hence the best advice in cases of mem- 
branous croup is to send for a doctor as soon as such a thing is 
even suspected and use the No. 22 and steam until he arrives. 

Foreign Bodies — Should a child get a foreign substance in 
the "wind pipe," the first thing to be done is to turn the child 
head downward and then a stinging spat will start the child to 



262 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

crying lustily and frequently expel the substance. It this does 
not succeed, try a succession of short jerks while the child's head 
is down. Should this fail send for a physician and instruct him 
to come prepared to operate if necessay. 

The I^ungs — The part of the body which contains the lungs 
is known as the thorax and is shaped like a cylinder during the 
childhood and in adult life is dome shaped. The walls of the 
thorax are very yielding and elastic, owing to the cartilage or 
partly formed bone which is found at the ends of the ribs and in 
parts of the breast bone. The real thickness of the walls of the 
thorax in infancy is relatively small, the greater part of the 
apparent thickness being made up of fat. At birth a child 
breathes about thirty-five times per minute ; at one year of age, 
twenty-seven times per minute; at two years, twenty-five times 
per minute; at six years of age, twenty- two times per minute; at 
twelve years of age, twenty times per minute. 

The breathing may be more rapid than this at almost any time 
and from no especial reason. In examining the lungs of a child, 
have the child in a warm room, then strip the child and look 
at its chest. Note the shape of the chest — whether it has the same 
look as in other babies; whether it has the natural cylindrical 
shape ; whether the chest is deformed in any way ; whether the two 
sides are exactly alike; whether the space between the ribs bulges 
out; whether the two sides expend and contract just alike during 
the act of breathing; whether there are any depressions about 
the walls of the thorax anywhere. Next sound the chest, and 
this is done by placing one finger flat on the baby's chest and 
gently tapping with a finger of the other hand. The normal 
sound is somewhat hollow, and one soon learns to notice the 
slightest variation from the normal. The sound over the heart 
is dull at all times, and it is easy to outline the size of the heart 
by sounding. Next, ' by placing the ear on the chest, both front 
and back, listen to the sounds. The sound of normal breathing 
may soon be learned by listening to the breathing of healthy 
children or grown persons. Compare the sounds on both sides 
and the sounds of different parts of the same side. The sounds 
heard in disease of the lungs will be taken up in the proper place. 
A few points to remember in the lung diseases of children are : 



HKAI/TH AT HOMK. 263 

The muscular walls of the thorax are very thin in childhood, the 
bones are soft and pliable ; the tendency of inflammation to spread 
is greater than in adults. Children breathe much faster than 
adults, and this is especially true in disease of the lungs. Fluid 
is often present about the lungs in lung diseases of children. 

Acute Bronchitis — Acute catarrhal bronchitis is very com- 
mon in childhood, and is more common in children who are not 
well nourished. It starts from a cold, from exposure, insufficient 
clothing in severe weather, wet feet, and other causes. Bron- 
chitis is usually present with la grippe, measles, whooping cough, 
scarlet fever, typhoid fever and diphtheria. It may also be pres- 
ent in lung fever or pleurisy. This disease is an inflammation 
of the membrane which lines the bronchial tubes, and usually 
occurs in both lungs and only the larger bronchial tubes are 
affected. 

Symptoms and Signs — In young children the mild form usually 
begins gradually with cold in the nose, some discharge from 
the nose and a light cough. The severe form begins in the same 
manner except that all symptoms are more severe. There is 
some fever. The child ' 'raises" some material but does not often 
expectorate. Vomiting is occasionally found and this is usually 
caused by swallowing the mucus which is coughed up. The 
child breathes from thirty-five to fifty times a minute, and there 
is frequently a rattling sound caused by the discharge in the 
bronchial tubes and in the windpipe. The child is ordinarily 
not very sick, but is somewhat restless and may have diarrhea. 
On listening early in the disease, a dry sonorous rattle will be 
heard in the lungs; later the rattle sounds moist. The sickness 
lasts from five to seven days. Children frequently take relapses. 
Sometimes in the severe form the child is very ill, the breathing 
rapid and the cough persistent and very tight. The fever runs 
from 100° to as high as 104° in very severe cases. The child 
may wheeze when the breath is blown out. The result in most 
cases of catarrhal bronchitis is good and the patients recover in 
from one to two weeks. This disease might be mistaken for lung 
fever and the differences will be considered under lung fever. 
Acute catarrhal bronchitis in older children is not nearly so 
severe as that found in infants. In the mild form the patient is 



264 HEALTH AT HOME. 

never sick enough to go to bed. There is a cough which is 
worse at night and there is a sense of pressure about the breast 
bone. The cough is tight at first, but soon loosens up and the 
child raises a considerable amount of mucus. If the case is a 
severe one it may begin with chills, fever, headache, pains in 
the back and chest, and cough. The fever runs from 100° to 
103°, and is usually the highest the first day. Occasionally a 
little blood is spit up. The patient will be sick in bed for from 
two to four days. 

Treatment — Bronchitis is much more easily prevented than 
cured. The cough which troubles a child for the whole winter 
is nearly always from bronchitis. The measures which will pre- 
vent the child from taking cold are the best to follow in prevent- 
ing bronchitis. Plenty of good warm clothing, wholesome food, 
frequent bathing, dry feet and avoiding exposure are important 
points to remember. A child suffering from bronchitis should 
be kept indoors, and if there is fever keep the child in bed while 
that lasts. To break up the fever give one tablet No. 11 every 
three hours to a child up to three years of age; from three to six 
years of age give one tablet No. 11 every two hours, and to all 
children over six years of age give one tablet No. 11 every 
hour. Continue this treatment until the fever is gone. At the 
very start of the disease give to a child up to six years of age 
one tablet No. 9 every hour until the bowels move freely ; to a 
child six years of age and over give two tablets No. 4, and if the 
bowels do not move freely in four hours repeat the dose. Over 
the chest put either a mustard plaster or a turpentine stupe. 
(For directions for making these see the chapter on Counter-irri- 
tants, pp. 122-124. ) Remove the plaster or stupe as soon as the 
skin is thoroughly reddened and cover the skin with dry flannel. 
Repeat the process three times a day. Thoroughly spray the 
nose and throat every two hours with the atomizer, using three tab- 
lets No. 3 dissolved in one-fourth cup of warm water. For the 
cough give one tablet No. 23 every three hours to a child five 
years of age and younger and one tablet No. 23 every two hours 
to a child over five years of age. Continue the use of this tablet 
until the cough entirely disappears. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 265 

Chronic Bronchitis — This is not common in children, but 
may follow an attack of acute bronchitis or may follow measles or 
whooping cough. The only symptom which is always present 
is the cough, and this many times very much resembles the 
cough of whooping cough. The cough is always worse at night 
and in the early morning, and the child raises a great deal of 
matter. The patient is thin, but is fairly healthy. There is no 
fever. 

Treatment — Give one tablet No. 17 before each meal. The 
dose is the same for all ages. Give one tablet No. 23 every 
three hours to a child five years of age and younger and one tab- 
let No. 23 every two hours to a child over five years of age. 
Keep the bowels well open by using No. 9 for children under six 
years of age and by using No. 16 for children over six years of 
age. Take good care of the child in every way and the recovery 
is only a matter of time. 

Sometimes a cough occurs during childhood for which there 
seems to be no especial cause, it is usually worse at night and is 
not severe. This cough is called nervous cough and it is treated 
by keeping the bowels will open as directed above, and by giving 
one tablet No. 13 at bedtime. The dose is the same for all ages. 

Pneumonia — I^ung Fever — No disease which occurs dur- 
ing childhood is fraught with more danger to life, if neglected, 
than lung fever. The disease is frequently seen in children, and 
is also found in connection with other diseases. There are two 
general forms of lung fever, one in which the disease is confined 
to the lung proper and the other in which the bronchial tubes are 
also involved. In lung fever the lungs become filled with a dis- 
charge which many times contains one or more of the component 
parts of the blood. When lung fever is present a germ known as 
the pneumococcus, is found. There may also be other germs 
present, hence it may be said that lung fever is a germ disease 
and the germs find their way into the lungs from the mouth, 
the nose or the throat. Lung fever is more common in winter 
than in summer. It attacks weak children quicker than those 
of robust health. Exposure of any sort may produce lung fever. 
The disease may be only in the larger bronchial tubes or it may 
involve all of the bronchial tubes and the lung tissue itself. 



266 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

Iytmg fever nearly always occurs in both lungs, although it is 
sometimes found in one alone. In lung fever death may occur 
at any stage of the disease or the fever may be broken up and 
the patient recover. Pleurisy, or an inflammation of the cover- 
ing of the lungs, is found in nearly every severe case of lung 
fever. 

Symptoms and Signs — Cases of lung fever present a very great 
variety of symptoms and signs, and it will be the endeavor to 
give them in a way that will be the most comprehensive and the 
most easy to grasp. A symptom that is always present is high 
fever, and this may vary from 102° to as high as 107° in very 
serious cases. The patient is quite sick from the very start; 
vomiting is often present; the child is dull, complains of head- 
ache, does not eat, seems weak, and frequently goes to bed of its 
own accord. The pulse is rapid and the breathing quick. There 
is a cough which varies very widely in its character. Moist 
rattling sounds are heard in the lungs and later in the disease 
small spots where no breathing sound at all is heard can be found. 
Sounding the chest gives a very hollow sound, which later may 
become dull and dead, much as the normal sound over the heart. 
The cough is in some cases severe and constant, and in most 
cases there is a disposition to suppress the cough on account of 
pain. In small children there is no expectoration ; in older ones 
the material expectorated is brownish-red at first and toward the 
close of the disease is more yellow and very abundant. Pain is 
frequently complained of in all parts of the body. In a healthy 
child the pulse beats four times to one breath while in lung fever 
there will frequently be a breath to every two heart beats. The 
breathing is short and jerky. Many times there is a slight moan 
when the breath is blown out. At the beginning of the disease 
the pulse is full and strong and very rapid ; later, although just 
as rapid, it becomes weak and small. The fever rises rapidly at 
the beginning of the disease and varies from one to two degrees 
each day until the end of the disease, when it falls rapidly to 
normal, nearly always falling in from twelve t to eighteen hours. 
When the breath is drawn in all the soft parts of the chest seem 
to be sunken and the nose dilates. The lips and finger tips may 
become blue, but when this occurs the case '\§ one of severity 
and heroic measures should be taken at once. Nervous symp- 



HEAI/fH AT home:. 267 

toms, such as twitching of the limbs, and tossing the arms are 
common. In severe cases the child often becomes so near uncon- 
scious as to be unable to recognize its nurse or parents. The 
urine is scanty, has an odor and is highly colored. Patients 
should be watched most carefully from the fifth to the eighth day, 
as that time is the most critical. When the fever is high the 
child is often delirious or ''out of its head;" this is especially 
so during the night. The face is flushed and the lips often 
crack and get quite sore. The appetite is lost and it is difficult 
to get the child to take any nourishment. If much food is taken 
the stools show undigested material. The skin is dry and hot. 

A child taken suddenly sick with high fever, rapid pulse and 
breathing, and a cough, should always make one think of lung 
fever. If in addition to these the patient is found to be very weak 
and sick, with blue lips and finger nails and a general blue tinge to 
the skin, it is almost certain that the disease is lung fever. At 
first it is very difficult to tell lung fever from severe bronchitis, 
yet there is not the continued fever in bronchitis, hence after 
twenty-four hours of sickness it is easy to distinguish between 
the diseases. Lung fever may be sometimes confounded with 
malarial fever. Two points of difference are to be noted. In 
malaria there is high fever one day and the next day there ma}' 
be no fever at all, while in lung fever the high fever of one day 
may be less on the second, but is never entirely absent. The 
second point is, the fever of lung fever is not affected by quinine, 
while in malarial fever quinine acts as a specific. Do not forget 
the low moan which is often heard upon blowing out the breath 
in patients sick with lung fever. The mistake is more often 
made of confounding lung fever with some other disease than 
that of mistaking some other disease for lung fever. 

In the beginning, scarlet fever, quinsy and cholera infantum 
may all somewhat resemble lung fever. In scarlet fever, how- 
ever, is found the sore throat, and on the second day the charac- 
teristic eruption of the skin. In quinsy the signs are all located 
in the throat, while in cholera infantum there is not the high 
fever and severe illness which is found in lung fever. Lung 
fever is always a dangerous disease, and at any point during the 
course of the disease the patient may take a sudden turn for the 
worse and die, or on the other hand the fever may be broken at 



268 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

any point during the disease and the patient make a compara- 
tively rapid recovery. I^ung fever is especially dangerous when 
it occurs in connection with measles, diphtheria, or whooping 
cough. No case is hopeless as long as food is taken and retained 
well and the stools show that it is being taken up by the body, no 
matter how grave other signs may be, but persistent vomiting, 
diarrhea, or severe indigestion make the chance for life very 
doubtful, even when other symptoms are favorable. 

Treatment — Every case of bronchitis in childhood should 
receive prompt and careful treatment as such a case is very liable 
to run into lung fever. A child suffering from lung fever has a 
part of the breathing space of the lungs cut off, hence one of the 
first things to do is to place the patient in a large airy room where 
there is plenty of fresh air. The child must be kept in bed. 
The child may have all the water it wants and must be fed on 
soft foods, toast, oatmeal, gruel, broths, cornstarch, soft eggs, 
oyster and various other soups, milk and some small amounts of 
fresh fruits ; but do not give preserves, jellies, etc. Careful nursing is 
one-half the battle in lung fever and one of the most important 
things the nurse will have to do is to attend to poulticing the 
sick child. As soon as you have fully decided that the patient 
has lung fever and the high fever and rapid shallow breathing 
commence, begin poulticing. Make a jacket out of muslin that 
will fit the child front and back and lap over in either front or 
back and with notches in place of arm holes. Have it fit up 
well in the neck and down on the abdomen as far as the ribs go. 
Make another exactly like this and sew the edges together, mak- 
ing a sack. Then make another sack exactly like the first one. 
Next make a mush out of ground flaxseed or, if flaxseed cannot 
be had, use corn meal in which a number of slices of onion have 
been placed. Have this mush fairly thin and as hot as the child 
can bear; spread a thin layer in each jacket and place one jacket 
on the child and the other one where it may be kept hot by steam 
from boiling water. Allow the poultice to remain on the child 
until it begins to cool and be very careful never to allow it to 
grow cold; then take the fresh hot poultice jacket and place on 
the child below the poultice already on and draw the warm poul- 
tice up under the cool one, thus avoiding exposure to the air for 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 269 

even one second. Place the cold poultice in the steaming appar- 
atus and change as often as one grows cold. Keep the poultic- 
ing up day and night until the fever is entirely gone. When it 
is desired to stop poulticing, first carefully dry the skin, then 
cover with a layer of cotton and several layers of flannel. These 
may be gradually removed until but a single layer of flannel 
remains. This poulticing, if properly attended to, is one of the 
most effective treatments for lung fever, but to be of service the 
directions above given must be followed to the very letter. Give 
the patient a sponge bath with warm water twice a day, being 
careful not to get too near the poultice. After each bath rub the 
arms and legs with alcohol. To a child less than five years of 
age give one-half tablet No. 11 every two hours, and to a child 
over five years of age give one tablet No. 11 every two hours. Also 
give one tablet No. 13 every four hours. The dose is the same 
for all ages. Use the fever thermometer and keep a close record 
of the temperature night and morning, also a record of the pulse 
beats per minute taken twice a day. After the first day or two 
of the disease it is well to give something in the way of a stimu- 
lant, in order to keep up the strength of the heart and nerve cen- 
ters. Whiskey and brandy are to be preferred, although wines 
may be given. When the heart seems to be weak or is the least 
bit irregular in its beats give one teaspoonful of whiskey or 
brandy, well diluted with water or milk, every two hours day and 
night. Should the patient sink very rapidly at any time during 
the disease give two or three times this amount for a few doses 
and do not dilute it at all. Allowing the patient to breathe the 
steam from boiling water in which a few drops of pure beechwood 
creosote has been placed will often loosen the cough and ease the 
heavy sensation felt in the chest. The feet should be kept warm, 
using a hot water bag for this purpose when necessary and the 
bowels kept open by using No. 9 for young children and by 
using No. 4 for older children. Finally, give the patient the 
best nursing possible, keep up the strength by careful feeding, 
do not be afraid to give stimulants if needed and do carefully and 
well all that may be done for the sick one and in the great 
majority of cases the outcome will be all that can be hoped for. 



270 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

Pleurisy — Inflammation of the covering of the lungs — 

This disease is found many times in childhood but usually occurs 
with or following other diseases of the lungs. With the inflam- 
mation of the covering of the lungs may occur a discharge of a 
watery substance or of pus. When this discharge occurs it 
accumulates between the lung covering and the walls of the chest. 
Pus is found more often than the watery fluid. Pleurisy very 
often follows such diseases as scarlet fever, measles, typhoid fever 
and la grippe. It also comes from exposure to cold, wet feet, etc., 
and more frequenty follows lung fever than any other disease. 
There are three principal forms of pleurisy, the dry pleurisy, 
pleurisy with the watery fluid, and pleurisy with the formation 
of pus. 

Symptoms and Signs of Dry Pleurisy — The symptoms and signs 
of dry pleurisy are sharp pain in one particular spot in the lungs 
which is made worse by drawing in a full breath, soreness upon 
pressure and troublesome hacking cough. On placing the ear 
on the spot where the pain is felt, a moist, crackling sound is 
heard — coughing does not change this sound. Dry pleurisy lasts 
from a few days to a week, and there are no signs except those 
given. 

Treatment — Apply a mustard plaster (For directions as to mak- 
ing see Counter-irritants, on pp. 122 and 222) over the sore place 
until a thorough redness of the skin is produced ; then remove 
and cover with dry flannel. Repeat this one or twice every 
day. Give to a child five years old and younger one tablet No. 
15 every three hours during the daytime; to a child over five 
3^ears of age give one tablet No. 15 every two hours during the 
daytime. After the child has recovered from the disease the 
bowels will need some attention. Open them up freely by using 
one tablet No. 9 every two hours until a free movement takes 
place. 

Symptoms and Signs of Water Pleurisy — In the pleurisy with a 
watery discharge ; the signs are more those of a serious disease. 
There is some fever, headache, general sick feeling, and in fact 
all the signs of lung fever, but they are not nearly so severe with 
the exception of the pain, and that is more severe. The patient 
is not often sick enough to go to bed. In cases where fluid is 



HEAI/TH AT HOME- 271 

found in the chest it is the rule for the fluid to absorb slowly but 
completely and leave no marks behind. Looking at the patient it 
is noticed that on the side where fluid is suspected the move- 
ment of the chest walls is less than on the opposite side and the 
spaces between the ribs bulge out. On sounding the chest a 
remarkably dull sound is noticed ; upon changing the position of 
the patient the position of this dull sound may also be changed. 
Treatment — Keep the patient in bed and apply the mustard 
poultice as directed in dry pleurisy. Give to a child five years 
old and younger, one tablet No. 15 every three hours and to a 
child over five years of age, one tablet No. 15 every two hours. 
It is very important that the patient be kept quiet, as death some- 
times occurs very suddenly from over exertion. It will be several 
months before the child will be entirely well again, and care 
must be taken during this entire period. 

Symptoms and Signs of Purulent Pleurisy — The great major- 
ity of cases in which pus is found in the chest occur with or fol- 
lowing lung fever, although this condition maybe found following 
measles, scarlet fever and other diseases of this sort. A wound 
about the chest which cuts through into the lung covering will 
produce this disease at times, as will a broken rib. When the 
pus first commences to form it does so in the little pockets caused 
by the pleurisy adhesions, but as the pus continues to form these 
adhesions are broken down until in many cases the whole space 
between the lung covering and the ribs becomes filled with pus. 
When this trouble follows lung fever it may be that the tempera- 
ture has been normal for a day when it will gradually rise 
again until a considerable amount of fever is present. There is 
also present very rapid breathing and a cough. After the pus 
has been in the chest for a day or two, the signs are : loss of 
flesh and a general ill-nourished look about the body ; very pale 
skin ; lack of blood in the vessels, shown by the pale lips and 
white clear skin, and the child is ill enough to stay in bed of its 
own free will. The breathing is rapid — from forty to seventy-five 
respirations per minute — and very often difficult. The fever 
ranges from 100° to 103". The pulse is quite rapid but strong. 
In some of the chronic cases, the signs very much resemble those 
of consumption. Occasionally the feet swell. On looking at the 



272 HEAI/fH AT HOME. 

child the same things that are noted in cases in which other 
fluid is found in the chest are seen. When fluid of any sort is 
suspected call a physician, and he can with a hollow needle 
syringe explore and certainly detect the presence of fluid or pus. 
In fact, a case of this sort must be treated by a surgeon, and the 
sooner one is called the better. Pus in the chest can only be 
removed properly by an operation, and the best advice that can 
be given is to have the operation performed early in the disease- 

The Heart and Blood Vessels in Infancy— Before a 

child is born circulation of the blood goes on after this manner: 
there is a vein which runs from the mother to the child through 
the "cord" and the pure blood from the mother passes through 
this vein to the child, passes through the liver and through the 
various parts of the body and into the right side of the heart. In 
the adult the blood passes from the right side of the heart to the 
lungs and thence back to the left side to be pumped to the var- 
ious parts of the body. In the infant before birth, however, but 
very little blood is sent to the lungs, the most of it passing from 
the right to the left side ot the heart through an opening known 
as the foramen ovale. At birth breathing commences and the 
blood passes from the right side of the heart to the lungs and back 
to the left side, the foramen ovale very soon closing entirely and 
the circulation being the same as that in the adult. In infancy 
the heart beats more rapidly than in adult life. The pulse rate 
is as follows: In a child six to twelve months, 100 to 115 per 
minute; in a child two to six years, 90 to 110 per minute; in a 
child seven to ten years, 75 to 95 per minute; in a child eleven 
to fourteen years, 72 to 90 per minute. Violent exercise will 
increase the heart beats from twenty-five to fifty beats per minute. 
The heart beats more frequently in females than in males and 
more frequently when standing up than when lying down quietly. 
A very rapid pulse in an infant may also be irregular and not 
mean anything. In an infant just born it requires twelve seconds 
for the blood to make the round of the circulation; in a child 
three years old fifteen seconds ; in an adult twenty-two seconds. 
Very frequently children are born in which some part of the heart 
is not perfectly formed ; the most common of these is the failure 
to close on the part of the opening between the right and left 



HEAI/fH AT HOME. 273 

heart, which has been spoken of as the foramen ovale. This 
sometimes closes with the exception of a very small opening, and 
in such a case no serious results need be anticipated. Other 
trouble may occur in the heart and in the blood vessels, but as 
the symptoms and signs of all such trouble are very much alike 
they will be given here, but the advice of a physician should be 
asked for in any such trouble. In all cases where the heart or 
circulation is affected before birth the baby will be blue — the lips, 
finger tips and the whole surface of the skin. The intensity of 
such blueness is a good index as to the gravity of the case. A 
symptom often noticed is the enlargement of the ends of the 
fingers and toes ; the members will be of natural size to the end, 
and there will be noticed a decided enlargement. Other signs 
are bleeding from the nose, spitting of blood, difficult breathing 
dropsy and swelling of the lower limbs. 



DISEASES OF THE GENITAL ORGANS. 

Very often in the penis of the male child a very tight foreskin 
is found. When this condition is present the foreskin should be 
forcibly pushed back and the parts carefully washed. Then apply 
a drop of oil and draw the skin forward. Repeat this daily until 
the foreskin is thoroughly loosened up. Sometimes the opening 
in the forsekin is so small that it cannot be forced back. This 
condition is known as phimosis. Such a condition makes clean- 
liness impossible and may produce very serious trouble. The 
cure of this trouble is surgical and a physician should be called 
to attend to the little one. Occasionally a case is met with in 
which the opening of the urethra is not in its proper place, but 
as this is also a case for the surgeon it is only mentioned here. 
Sometimes the testicles do not descend into the scrotum properly, 
but in all cases of this sort allow nature to care for the trouble 
and do not interfere in any way. An inflammation of the fore- 
skin sometimes occurs, and may be the result of uncleanliness or 
of phimosis, previously mentioned. When this trouble occurs 
cleanse the parts thoroughly and bathe three or four times a day 
in a solution made by dissolving three tablets No. 3 in a half pint 
of water. A few days of this treatment will effect a cure. An 



274 HEALTH AT HOME. 

inflammation of the urethra is sometimes seen. This is a rather 
serious condition and must be treated by a physician. Sometimes 
fluid will accumulate in the scrotum, but this will usually disap- 
pear in a few weeks or months; if not the use of iodide of potash, 
three grain doses three times a day will help the absorption. 

In the female an inflammation of the private parts may occur. 
Careful cleansing and the use of a solution made by dissolving 
three tablets No. 3 in a half pint of water will be the only treat- 
ment necessary. Should this not effect a cure in a few days it is 
best to call the attention of a physician to the matter. When 
small sores or blisters occur about the parts cleanse thoroughly 
and dust twice a day with talcum powder. 

Enuresis — Bed-wetting — Bed-wetting may be due to some 
malformation of the urinary apparatus, or it may occur in disease 
of the central nervous system, such as idiocy, meningitis, injuries 
to the spinal cord, and tumors of the brain. In cases produced 
in this manner there may also be lack of control of the bowel. 
The real bed- wetting of childhood, however, is not caused by any 
of the above. In early infancy the passage of urine is purely a 
reflex act. If a child is unable to control the discharge of urine 
after the third year treatment is necessary. An irritation of the 
nerves may cause bed-wetting, and this irritation may be in the 
nerve centers, in the bladder or in the urethra. Bed- wetting 
may occur in a very nervous child, or in one who is not well 
nourished, or it may be associated with epilepsy, headache, neu- 
ralgia and other nervous symptoms. A highly acid u rine may 
also produce this trouble. Inflammation of the bladder or of the 
external organs may also produce this trouble. It is sometimes 
caused by pin-worms in the rectum. And in many cases habit 
seems to be the only reason we can find for the trouble. It occurs 
in both sexes and at all ages up to manhood and womanhood. 
Bed-wetting occurs in many cases every night, or it may occur 
only under some especial exciting cause. There is usually a 
complete emptying of the bladder and no dribbling. 

Treatment — In the treatment s of this disease first think of 
changes in the urinary organs which might cause the trouble, 
such as stone in the bladder, a narrow or adherent foreskin, 
inflammation of any part of the urinary tract and any spinal 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 275 

affection. If these do not occur the case is an ordinary case of 
bed- wetting. In treatment do not allow the child to use much 
fluid in the evening; require the bladder to be emptied just before 
going to bed and have the child get up at least once during the 
night for the same purpose. Do not cover the child up too 
warmly, and try to keep it from sleeping on the back. The use 
of an electric battery is often of value. The child should have a 
thorough cold bath just before going to sleep. Be careful not 
to overtax the child's nervous system, either at home or at school, 
and early hours and plenty of sleep must be the rule. Punish- 
ment with the rod will not do any good and may be really harmful. 
Endeavor to strengthen the child's will power and call his pride 
to assist him. The medical treatment of these cases is, on the 
whole, very successful, but all remedies which can be used with 
any hope of effecting a cure are very active poisons and should 
be given only under the personal direction of the family physi- 
cian. 

Spasm of the Bladder — This sometimes occurs, and may 
be recognized by the frequent passing of water and pain upon 
passing water. The treatment consists in giving an abundance 
of water and two grains of citrate of potash in water every two 
hours. 

Stone in the Bladder — This occurs in children quite as 
often as in adults, and the signs are : pain upon passing water, 
especially at the end of the act; there may be a sudden stoppage 
of the flow ; straining is frequent ; inability to hold the urine is 
often present, more marked during the daytime. The treatment 
of stone in the bladder is entirely surgical. 



DISEASES OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 

Convulsions — Convulsions may be caused by some condition 
which affects the nutrition of the brain, or the lack of develop- 
ment of some of the nerve centers. Convulsions may be brought 
about from exhaustion, lack of the proper amount of blood, poor 
nourishment, any disturbance of digestion, any of the acute 
diseases, or worms. Children who inherit a nervous disposition 



276 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

from their parents are more liable to convulsions than others. 
All sorts of brain diseases are liable to produce convulsions. 
They may also be produced by severe injuries. Difficult teeth- 
ing will also sometimes produce convulsions. The presence of 
undigested food in the stomach is often the exciting cause. 
Very frequently convulsions are associated with whooping cough, 
and more rarely with lung fever, malaria, scarlet fever and indi- 
gestion. Sometimes the attack is preceded by restlessness and 
slight twitching ol the muscles, but more often the attack comes 
on very suddenly and without warning. The first thing noticed 
will be the pale face and fixed eyes; in a moment convulsive 
twitchings begin in the face and rapidly extend to all parts of 
the body. The head is thrown back, the hands are clenched and 
the baby becomes unconscious. The breathing is very feeble, 
the lips become blue, the forehead is clammy, rattling sounds 
are heard in the throat and the bladder or bowels may empty them- 
selves. The attack lasts from a few minutes to nearly an hour, 
and the patient is left very weak and in a sort of stupor. Once 
in a great many times death occurs from one attack. One 
attack is very apt to be followed by others. 

Treatment — When it is noticed that a young child is about to 
have a convulsion or is having a convulsion, plunge the child, 
with the exception of the head, into hot water; have the water so 
hot as to almost parboil the skin ; place cloths wrung out of cool 
water on the head; allow the child to remain in the bath from 
one-half minute to two minutes. Remove from the bath, dry 
thoroughly and apply mustard plasters on the feet and legs and 
give one tablet No. 7 every two hours until four doses have been 
given. This treatment will, in all ordinary cases, stop the con- 
vulsions and prevent a recurrence, but should the attack persist 
and return often, seek the advice of a physician. 

Epilepsy — Epilepsy is a disease in which convulsions of a 
peculiar sort occur at fairly regular intervals and in which there 
is complete loss of consciousness. In many of the cases of epilepsy 
there is a family history of epilepsy or insanity running through 
several generations. Epilepsy does not usually come on until 
the age of ten or twelve years has been reached, and frequently 
occurs in those who have had convulsions in infancy. The first 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 277 

attack can many times be traced to such things as fright, great 
excitement, sunstroke or blows or falls upon the head. It also 
sometimes follows scarlet fever, typhoid fever or measles. Chronic 
constipation may also produce this disease. Some attacks of 
epilepsy are very light, and in these the unconsciousness is only 
momentary and they many times pass under the names of/ ' spells, ' ' 
"dizziness," and "faint spells." The unconsciousness, how- 
ever, and the return of the "spells" mark them as epilepsy. 

Symptoms and Signs — There may be only a slight dropping 
of the head and a fixed stare for a moment. The mind is usually 
somewhat confused for a moment or two after such an attack^and 
the person may say or do strange things. Acts of violence, how- 
ever, do not occur during such times. In the more severe peases 
the patient usually has an instant's warning, and then the attack 
comes on very suddenly. Persons so afflicted ^describe an [end- 
less number of sensations. The face is pale, the eyes rolled up 
and fixed and a spasm of the muscles immediately follows. There 
is a peculiar cry. The attack lasts from a few minutes to a^ half 
hour and the patient is somewhat dazed upon coming to and fre- 
quently complains of severe headache. When the disease first 
begins the attacks are a long distance apart but they become 
more frequent until the interval between the attacks will be from 
two to four weeks. Sometimes a number of attacks will follow 
each other closely and then will follow quite a length of time in 
which no attack will occur. The general health of persons suffer- 
ing from epilepsy is usually normal. 

Treaiinerit — If a cause can be found remove it. Pay particular 
attention to the digestion, as the most favorable cases for recovery 
are those which are due to disordered digestion. Allow the patient 
a little meat once a day, but no potatoes or oatmeal, nor should tea, 
coffee or alcohol in any form be allowed. Milk may be given, 
and green vegetables with the exception of beans and peas ; also 
all sorts of fresh fruits. The bowels should be carefully looked 
after. The patient must lead a regular, simple life, be out of 
doors as much as possible, and the nervous system should be 
kept as quiet as possible. Children suffering from epilepsy should 
not be allowed to attend school. The drugs which are of most 
value are the bromides of sodium and ammonium. To a child of 



278 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

five years give five grains of sodium bromide every two hours 
and increase the dose one-half grain for every year of age until 
a dose of ten grains is reached. To stop the attack when it comes 
on, nothing is of more value than nitrate of amyl. This remedy 
comes in small glass beads, and one of these broken in a hand- 
kerchief and held to the nose of a patient just taken with a fit of 
epilepsy will often check or entirely stop the attack. 

Chorea — Saint Vitus Dance — This is a nervous disease 
which is recognized by irregular, aimless movements of any or 
all of the voluntary muscles. These movements are somewhat 
spasmodic in character, and there is notable loss of power in the 
muscles affected. Along with this is noticed a very irritable 
mind. Saint Vitus Dance is most frequent between the ages of 
six and fifteen years. This disease is found more often in females 
than in males and is more frequent in the spring months than at 
any other season of the year. Rheumatism is very often found 
closely associated with Saint Vitus Dance. The disease may 
follow scarlet fever and other diseases of this sort. Saint Vitus 
Dance may also be caused by pin- worms, phimosis, delayed men- 
struation, and defects of the eyes. Many childern inherit a ten- 
dency to have Saint Vitus Dance ; fright may also cause the 
disease and some authors claim that it may be caused by lack of 
blood, nervous constitution or a severe disturbance of the nutri- 
tion of the child. 

Symptoms and Signs — An attack of this sort comes on grad- 
ually ; the child is usually thought to be nervous and it is noticed 
that he has difficulty in using the hands for close work, such as 
writing. He is continually dropping things and has much diffi- 
culty in feeding himself and in buttoning his clothes. Next will 
be noticed a stumbling gait and the child frequently falls and has 
difficulty in stepping up. Then commences the irregular, jerking 
spasmodic movements of the disease, which vary from the 
slightest twitching to almost constant motion. These movements 
are always increased by excitement or fatigue. In the more 
severe cases, the patient may be unable to help himself or even 
to walk. Patients suffering from Saint Vitus Dance are always 
fretful, irritable, easy to make laugh or cry and often very diffi- 
cult to control. Sometimes the mind is so active and irritable as 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 279 

to border on insanity. Stammering or stuttering is frequently- 
seen. Heart trouble sometimes manifests itself, the appetite is 
poor, the sleep disturbed, headaches are frequent and all the 
symptoms of poor nutrition are present. 

The disease usually lasts from one month to two and one-half 
months. Second attacks are very liable to occur and even third 
and fourth ones, usually just one year apart. 

Treatment — A child suffering with Saint Vitus Dance should 
be taken out of school and should never be laughed at or pun- 
ished on account of the peculiar movements. The diet should 
be carefully looked after. The patient should have a warm bath 
daily, followed by a brisk rubbing. Give two tablets of No. 24 
every hour and every other day add one tablet to each dose until 
twelve tablets are given at each dose. Continue this until the 
stomach or bowels rebel, then stop for a few days and start again 
with two tablets every hour and work up in the same manner to 
twelve tablet doses. As soon as the movements stop discontinue 
the use of the medicine. 

Headaches — Headaches occur in childhood from poorly venti- 
lated rooms, from malaria, from constipation, from lack of proper 
nutrition, from various nervous disorders, from various eye 
diseases and from eye strain, from rheumatism, and from some 
other causes. The removal of the cause will effect a cure. 

Stuttering and Stammering — In childhood a number of 
disorders of speech sometimes occur, such as stuttering, stammer- 
ing and lisping. Careful training and insisting that the child 
speak slowly and pronounce but one syllable at a time and draw 
a breath before attempting to pronounce a second syllable will in 
time correct these defects. 

Restless Sleep — Restless sleep is often seen in childhood, 
and is ordinarily due to hunger, indigestion resulting from over- 
feeding or improper feeding, trouble in teething, colic, earache, 
extreme nervousness, enlarged tonsils or growths in the back of 
the throat, lack of fresh air in the sleeping room, cold feet, vio- 
lent or exciting play just before going to sleep, or to the bad hab- 
its of rocking or night feeding. The cause of disturbed sleep in 
childhood is usually easily discovered, and a removal of this 
cause is all that is necessary to produce natural sleep. Soothing 



280 HSAI/TH AT HOMK. 

syrups should never be given to restless children, not even in bad 
cases of teething. Medicines are to be used only in cases of 
serious disease or in cases in which the child has frequent attacks 
of nightmare. In such cases the child awakes in a state of fright 
and says he has had a bad dream, or it may be he is found sit- 
ting up in bed in a state of terror and is afraid of some animal or 
monster which seems very near. In cases of this sort give five 
tablets No. 7 at bedtime. Have the child eat a very light supper 
and avoid all nervous strain of any and all sorts. 

Cerebro-spinal Meningitis — Spotted Fever — This dis- 
ease occurs many times as an epidemic, especially in winter 
and spring, and affects persons of all ages. In the great majority 
of cases no cause for the disease can be discovered. It some- 
times follows or occurs with lung fever, scarlet fever, typhoid 
fever, la grippe, inflammation of the middle ear and abscess of 
the brain. Death may occur very early in this disease. Very few 
diseases are so irregular in their course as spotted fever. 

Symptoms a?id Sig?is — Some cases begin with a day or two of 
general weakness and "dumpy" feeling, but in the majority of 
cases the disease begins suddenly with vomiting, convulsions, 
headache and high fever. The fever at the very start is from 
102° to 105°. Severe headache is always present, the patient is 
very sick, there is pain in the back of the neck and along the 
spine; the patient is abnormally sensitive to pain; there is consti- 
pation, and the muscles of the neck are stiff. Later on nervous 
symptoms develop. The patient is delirious, throws the hands 
and arms about the head; frequently there is a low distressed 
moan; the muscles twitch, and sometimes convulsions occur. 
Sometimes the patient is very dull and does not seem to notice 
anything and this passes on until the person is unconscious. The 
breathing is slow and often irregular. The pulse is weak. After 
about two days, the pupils of the eyes become very large. The 
disease lasts from one to two weeks. In over half ot the cases, 
red spots from an inch to two inches in diameter will be found, 
after the second day of the disease, upon the back, along the 
spine and it is from this fact that the name, "spotted fever, " is 
given to the disease. When the patient gets well, there is 
often dealness or paralysis. The paralysis is usually of one side 



HEALTH AT HOME. 281 

of the body or of one arm or one leg. This paralysis will disap- 
pear in time ; recovery is aided by the use of an electric battery. 
The mind may not be very clear for some time after recovering 
from the disease. Sometimes attacks of spotted fever are very 
severe and the patient will die in two or three days, and again 
the patient may be taken very severely ill and at the end of three or 
four days begin to improve and go on steadily to recovery. 
Between these two extremes are found all grades of severity. In 
nearly all severe cases the speech of the patient is interfered with 
in some manner. The skin is more or less blue in all cases. The 
tongue is coated. The large joints, and particularly the knees, 
often swell and are tender and painful. When death occurs it 
usually does so in less than a week. In the cases which recover 
it requires many weeks before the full health and strength is 
regained. All grades of mental disturbance are seen after an 
attack of spotted fever. In infants the disease is usually fatal, 
and when epidemics of the disease occur, from 30 to 75 per cent 
of the cases die. 

Treatment — The patient should be fed upon milk, eggs, broths, 
soups and meat juices, and the food should be given every two 
to three hours day and night. The nape of the neck and along 
the spinal column should be sponged with hot water every 
hour or two and an ice cap or cold water should be applied to the 
head. Bach day paint the nape of the neck and along the spinal 
column lightly with tincture of iodine. Keep the bowels well 
open by using, for children, No. 9, and for adults, No. 16, suffi- 
cient to produce a free movement from the bowels each day- 
Give one tablet No. 15 every three hours to a child five years of 
age and younger, one tablet No. 15 every two hours to a child 
over five years of age, and two tablets No. 25 every hour, to an 
adult. Place a tablespoonful of whiskey or brandy and a table- 
spoonful of water in a glass and give one teaspoonful of this every 
three hours. To an adult give one tablespoon ful of whiskey or 
brandy, somewhat diluted, every three hours. If the patient will 
not eat, inject milk into the rectum every two or three hours. 

Deafness — Children born deaf are often met with. Deafness 
may be produced by inflammation of the bones of the ear or 
inflammation of the covering of the bones about the side of the 



282 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

head and ear ; by the absence of all or any part of the middle ear ; 
by the death of the nerve of hearing; by a diseased condition of 
the brain; by scarlet fever; by spotted fever, or it may follow any 
of the serious diseases of childhood. 

Bone, Joint and Skin Diseases — A number of diseases of 
the bones, of the joints and of the skin occur in childhood. 
These conditions are hard to name and equally hard to treat, and 
many times the treatment requires frequent changing. It would 
be a practical impossibility to describe the various conditions 
which might arise in connection with diseases of this sort, and as 
it is the object of this book to give advice which may safely be 
followed in all cases, it is advised that in cases of bone, joint or 
skin diseases, excepting those described, the family physician 
be called. 

Sweat Rash — This is a disease of the skin, seen in young 
infants, due to too much clothing. It is usually seen on the face 
and meek, often upon the side of the face upon which the infant 
sleeps or the side held against the mother while nursing. The 
disease is really an inflammation of the sweat glands, and shows 
as a red eruption of small pimples. Lessen the amount of cloth- 
ing and dust often with talcum powder and the trouble will be 
cured in a short time. 

Prickly Heat — In this disease the skin is covered with r tiny 
bright red pimples, very close together, and on the top of the 
pimples will be a tiny sac of watery fluid. Scratching causes the 
pimples to rupture, and a large crusty sore is soon formed. The 
disease comes on very quickly, with intense itching and sting- 
ing. Very hot weather and too much clothing produce this 
disease. On those parts of the body where the rash does not 
appear there is much sweating. Prickly heat may be prevented 
by light clothing, frequent bathing and by dusting the body 
freely with talcum powder. During an attack open the bowels 
by using one tablet No. 9 every hour until they move freely. 
Give one teaspoonful sweet spirits of nitre to start a free action of 
the kidneys. Bathe the body and dust well with talcum powder. 
If the itching is intense, spirits of camphor will much relieve 
the irritation. The diet should be light and as nearly fluid as 
possible. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 283 

Seborrhea — This is a disease in which dirty, yellow, greasy 
crusts form upon the scalp. These crusts are easily recognized 
and should be first softened with oil and then removed by 
thoroughly washing the head with soap and water. Having 
removed the crusts, apply a salve made by taking one part of 
flowers of sulphur and eight parts of vaseline ; mix thoroughly 
and rub in well. Repeat this treatment every few days until the 
disease is cured. 

Eczema — Eczema is an inflammation of the skin and is the 
skin disease which is found most often in children, and in fact is 
the most frequent skin disease in all ages. A thin, delicate-skin- 
ned child or one in whom the glands of the skin are very active 
is more liable to be affected by eczema than a more hardy child. 
Children of rheumatic parents are very liable to have eczema. 
Heat, cold dry air, winds, the use of hard water or strong soaps 
in bathing, irritation of clothing, want of cleanliness and irritat- 
ing discharges from the mucous surfaces may cause eczema. It 
many times accompanies the skin diseases which are caused by 
parasites, such as ring-worm. Eczema is also caused by the 
kidneys or bowels not being in proper working order, and may 
be caused by disturbances of digestion, especially intestinal indi- 
gestion. 

The form of eczema which usually affects children is seen most 
often upon the face, usually upon the cheeks, forehead and scalp. 
It may occur upon any part of the body, and when found upon 
the trunk and extremities is usually in patches. When the 
disease begins small red pimples form, which run together, and 
there is then a moist red surface which is covered with a thick 
watery fluid. This fluid soon dries up and forms thick gummy 
crusts. There is intolerable itching, and from the scratching 
the surface becomes very tender and bleeds freely. The skin is 
often swollen. When the crusts are removed the flesh looks red 
and granular and the watery fluid spoken of appears. The 
intense itching causes loss of sleep and restlessness, and in this 
way affects the general health of the patient. It is easy to get 
some improvement in eczema, but it is difficult to bring about a 
complete cure. In more than half of the cases of eczema it is 
found either on the face or the scalp. 



284 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

Treatment — In nearly all cases the treatment of eczema must 
be carried on for several months and to have the best results the 
nursing must be carefully looked after. It is important to dis- 
cover the cause of eczema, as the cure of the disease may be much 
hastened by its removal. The patient should have a very plain 
diet and little or no fat, only a small amount of meat and in fact the 
food had best be milk, eggs, vegetables and fresh fruits. The 
kidneys should be kept working well by allowing the child to 
drink large amounts of water. Keep the bowels well open by 
giving No. 9. Give the tablets one hour apart and give enough 
to have a free movement from the bowels every day. If eczema 
occurs in a child who is thin and pale and not well nourished 
give one tablet No. 6 three times a day before meals. In wash- 
ing the skin always wash with bran water or with milk and 
water. Loosen all crusts by soaking in sweet oil and then care- 
fully remove them. After the crusts have been removed apply this 
ointment: Tincture of opium, one dram; salycilic acid, two 
drams; subnitrate of bismuth, three drams; common starch, three 
drams; vaseline sufficient to make a thick paste. Apply this to 
the raw surfaces and every other day thoroughly cleanse the parts 
and apply fresh ointment. If this does not produce an improve- 
ment in a few days, consult your family physician. 

Boils — A boil is a circumscribed inflammation beginning in a 
hair follicle or sweat gland and extending to the surrounding 
tissues, ending usually in breaking and discharging pus. In 
infants small boils sometimes occur in great numbers, usu- 
ally upon the scalp, face or shoulders ; they are about the size 
of a pea or a little larger. In all cases where boils occur 
thoroughly cleanse the skin and with a sharp knife thoroughly 
cut open the boil, and any ordinary dressing will be all that is 
required to complete the cure. 

Earache — Earache frequently occurs in children and is a very 
painful and annoying disorder. It is easily recognized and in 
most cases the child himself will tell you where the trouble is. 
The pain is very severe and the child will drop asleep only when 
completely exhausted from the crying. Treatment of these cases 
is comparatively easy. Lay the child down so that the ear which 
aches is uppermost, then, with the small ear syringe, fill the ear 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 285 

with water as hot as the child will bear; allow the water to remai n 
in the ear for a few seconds, then turn the child over and allow 
the water to run out ; turn the child back and refill the ear with 
hot water. By beginning with water which is moderately warm 
and having it a little hotter each time, very hot water may be 
finally used. Continue this treatment until the pain ceases; 
then allow the ear to drain, thoroughly cover it and the side of the 
head with dry flannel which has been heated. Do not use sweet 
oil or laudanum in a child's ear. 

SPECIFIC INFECTIOUS DISEASES. 

In childhood a number of diseases occur which are known as 
infectious diseases, or diseases which may be taken from exposure 
to another person who is suffering from one of the diseases or 
exposure to the same conditions which produced the disease in 
another person. These diseases are placed in two groups. In 
the first group are scarlet fever, measles, German measles, 
chickenpox, whooping cough and mumps. 

In the second group are diphtheria, typhoid fever and con- 
sumption. 

All of the first group are contagious, but the exact poison occur - 
ing in these diseases is as yet unknown. In the second group 
the exact poison is well known and the manner in which this 
poison is given off from the body is well understood. The first 
group may be contracted by simply being near a person suffer- 
ing from one of the diseases mentioned, while in the second group, 
the actual germ of the disease must be received into the body or 
in other words, strictly speaking, the second group are not con- 
tagious. 

Scarlet Fever — This is an acute, self -limited contagious dis- 
ease, and one attack usually protects the individual from another. 
From the time of exposure until the first sickness is felt is from two 
to six days; it requires from twelve to twenty-four hours ^for the 
disease to come on ; the eruption lasts from four to six days, and 
then the skin "peels'' off, requiring from three to six weeks for 
this process. This disease may be given to another at any time 
from the time the patient is taken sick to the end of the "peel- 



286 HEALTH AT HOME. 

ing off" stage, but the time when the disease is most liable to 
be given is during the time when the skin is scaling off. Deaf- 
ness and kidney disease often follow scarlet fever. About one- 
half of the children who are exposed to this disease contract it, 
while the other halt do not seem to be affected at all. Epidemics 
of scarlet fever are common, and are more frequent in tall and win- 
rer than in summer. If a child has been exposed to scarlet fever and 
a week passes without its taking the disease you may feel quite cer- 
tain that it will not take the fever. It is doubtful whether the 
poison of scarlet fever can be carried by the breath, but it can 
surely be carried by the skin which peels off and by the urine, 
the matter from the bowels and the perspiration. The disease 
may be carried by anything from the room in which a patient 
has been lying sick with scarlet fever. Milk which has been in 
the sick room is a fine conveyor for the disease. Physicians may 
carry seal let fever from one house to another, or in other words 
the disease may be carried by a third party. The discharge 
from the nose, ears, and throat carry the disease and must be 
looked upon as sources of contagion. 

Symptoms and Signs — Scariet fever usually begins abruptly 
with vomiting, sore throat and high fever. The vomiting is fre- 
quent and hard. The fever at the onset is from 102° to 105°. 
The child complains of sore throat, and on looking into the throat 
it is seen to be evenly red all over with the exception of the hard 
palate, and this is covered with little red points. If ^the disease 
occurs in summer, diarrhea is nearly always present at the begin- 
ning. The child is sick in proportion to the height of the fever. 
In from twelve to thirty hours after the child is first taken sick 
the eruption appears. It requires from twelve to twenty-four 
hours for the rash to fully develop and the rash then lasts from 
three to six or seven days. The rash first appears upon the neck 
and chest and soon covers the entire body. The rash is of a 
bright scarlet color and upon close examination is seen to be made 
up of very tiny points. Very often there is a peculiar whiteness 
about the mouth, and this makes a striking contrast to the rest of 
the face. In mild cases the rash may not appear upon the face 
at all, and may be faint upon the body. Should the rash be out 
well and suddenly disappear it means nothing except that the 
heart, which was very strong, has suddenly become weaker. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 287 

When the rash is faint a hot mustard bath will often bring it out 
clear. Shortly after the rash has faded the skin begins to peel 
off, and this peeling off of the skin is not found in any other 
infectious disease. The neck and chest show the first signs and 
the skin comes off in fine scales. From the neck and chest the 
scaling continues over the entire body, the hands and feet being 
the last to scale. The appearance of the fingers during this time 
is very characteristic. The finger tips peel first, and the new 
skin is pink and fresh looking, while that which has not yet 
scaled is dull gray and rough. Sometimes cases occur which are 
so mild that nothing is noticed until the peeling begins. Usually, 
however, even in mild cases, the child vomits and has sore throat 
at the beginning of the disease. It is very difficult to keep child- 
ren with mild attacks in bed. The highest fever is when the 
eruption or rash is most prominent. The severe cases of scar- 
let fever begin with repeated vomiting or with convulsions and 
the rash very soon appears. By the third or fourth dav, white 
patches appear on the tonsils and may appear on other parts of 
the throat; the lining of the mouth is very red, and little ulcers 
may be present which bleed easily; the glands in the neck swell; 
there is a discharge from the nose and mouth and the breath is 
bad. The fever is from 103° to 105° and continues steady for 
about a week. The fever lasts from three to four weeks. The 
pulse is rapid, weak and irregular. The appetite is gone and 
it is with difficulty that the child can be coaxed to take food. 
Relapses may occur in scarlet fever. Whenever the throat symp- 
toms are severe swelling may occur in the neck. This may be 
so severe as to interfere with the breathing. This swelling of 
the neck, however, is rare. An inflammation of the ears is very 
frequent in connection with scarlet fever, and the younger the 
child the greater is the liability to ear trouble. Ear trouble 
occurs most often early in the second week of the disease, but 
may occur at any time. Usually but one ear is affected at a time. 
There may be only pain and a certain amount of deafness, but 
usually the ears discharge quite freely and the deafness is marked. 
Should ear trouble develop keep the throat and ears as clean as 
possible by swabbing the throat and by syringing the ears with 
warm water in which one or two tablets of No. 1 have been dis- 
solved and as soon as the child is well enough it should be taken 



288 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

to an ear specialist for treatment. Some trouble with the kidne}^ 
accompanies nearly every case of scarlet fever ; this is very ligh t 
in most cases, but may be very severe indeed. In the milder 
forms nothing is noticed with the exception of a small amount of 
albumen in the urine and the kidney trouble will correct itself as 
the patient recovers from the fever. The only treatment needed 
is a fluid diet. The most severe cases of kidney trouble develop 
about the third week ol the fever, and in this case the urine is 
scanty and filled with small particles. This condition is really 
an acute form of Bright's disease, and may permanently damage 
the kidney. In nearly all cases in which this form of kidney 
disease occurs with or following scarlet fever there is swelling of 
the feet and ankles and puffiness under the eyes; there will be 
pain in the back and there may be vomiting. After this disease 
develops the patient usually becomes very pale. Upon boiling a 
small amount of the urine a portion of it will become solid after 
the same manner that boiling an egg will cause the white portion 
to become solid. In all cases which recover, the grave signs last 
from one to three weeks. There are two dangers when kidney 
disease occurs with scarlet fever; first, the danger of death dur- 
ing the active stage of the disease, and second, the danger of 
chronic Bright's disease developing. For treatment of this 
trouble keep the patient quiet, give an entirely fluid diet, allow 
large quantities of water, keep the bowels well open and give fre- 
quent baths in warm water. Test the urine often by boiling a 
small quantity and then adding a few drops of nitric acid. As 
long as any solid matter remains in the urine after testing in 
this manner, the treatment should be kept up. In scarlet fever 
the tongue is coated at first, then clears off and little red 
bunches are seen, giving an appearance known as strawberry 
tongue. 

The signs by which we may recognize scarlet fever are: 
the patient is taken very suddenly sick with a chill, 
vomiting, high fever, a red and inflamed throat. Within 
twenty-four hours following this the rash appears. This rash 
may be separated from other rashes by a simple experiment. 
On any place on the body where the rash occurs draw the finger 
nail along the skin with moderate pressure ; if the rash is that of 
sacrlet fever a white line will be seen where the finger nail 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 289 

touched the skin and this will not disappear for a few seconds. 
This white line is a thing peculiar to scarlet fever alone. Know- 
ing that the child has been exposed to scarlet fever is a help in 
determining the disease. Even the mildest cases of scarlet fever 
should be kept entirely by themselves and away from other peo- 
ple for at least six weeks. Other children should be kept in a 
part of the house away from the sick one or, better still, be kept 
away from the house entirely, and after the sick one gets well 
it should not be allowed to sleep with other children for at least 
a month. The nurse and all others about the sick room should 
gargle the throat three times a day with a solution made by dis- 
solving four tablets No. 3 in a cup of warm water. After the 
child is well enough to leave the sick room, the room and every- 
thing in it should be thoroughly disinfected. This is best done 
by closing the room tightly and burning a pound of sulphur in 
the room ; allow the room to remain tightly closed for a day and 
then open all doors and windows for two days longer before any- 
one tries to live in the room. For more complete directions as 
to disinfecting, see the chapter on Disinfectants. There are three 
dangers of spreading the disease which we must guard against : 
first the patient, second the sick room and third the nurse. 

Treatment — Put the child to bed and keep him there for at least 
a week after the fever has disappeared. Begin at once to feed 
upon a liquid diet entirely. This is important, as it may prevent 
serious kidney disease. During the eruption keep the body well 
oiled with camphorated oil; this will keep the skin soft and pre- 
vent itching. Give a sponge bath once a day after the rash has 
disappeared, using warm water. Keep the air in the sick room 
fresh. The food should be given at regular intervals and should 
consist of soups, broths, milk and beef juice. Do not give any 
solid food. To a child up to the age of five years give one tablet 
No. 13 every four hours ; to a child between five and twelve years 
give one tablet No. 13 every three hours and above the age of 
twelve give one tablet No. 13 every two hours. Should the 
fever remain above 104° after giving this remedy for a day, give 
cold sponge baths every hour until the fever is reduced to 103° or 
104°. Note the pulse — when it becomes rapid and feeble give 
one teaspoonful of whiskey or brandy well diluted with water 



290 HEALTH AT HOME. 

every two to three hours, but do not give stimulants of any sort 
unless the heart is rapid and weak. For the sore throat use four 
tablets No. 3 dissolved in a cup of warm water as a gargle. If 
the nose discharges freely this same solution may be used in the 
atomizer and the nose sprayed two or three times a day, and if 
there is difficulty in gargling, the throat may also be sprayed. 
When discharge from the ears occurs carefully syringe the ears 
two or three times a day with warm water in which one or two 
tablets of No. 1 have been dissolved. When the fever leaves and 
the patient begins to get better, gradually and carefully add solid 
foods to the diet and give one tablet No. 17 three times a day 
before meals. Finally, have the sick room as cheerful as pos- 
sible; have everything about the patient clean and fresh and exer- 
cise careful judgment in the small details of nursing. 

Measles — Measles is an epidemic contagious disease which 
occurs more frequently than any of the other fevers which are 
characterized by an eruption or rash. Very few people reach 
adult life without having had measles and one attack prevents 
another in nearly all cases. The disease is very highly conta- 
gious and very quickly spreads from the sick patient to all suscep- 
tible persons. From the time of exposure until the first sickness is 
felt is from ten to fourteen days ; it requires from three to four days 
from the time the patient is first taken sick until the disease begins 
in earnest, and during this time the patient has an inflammation 
in the nose resembling that ol a bad cold. The eruption closely 
follows and lasts from four to seven days. After this the skin 
scales off in little thin scales, and this process lasts from six to 
eight days. Only a short exposure is necessary to take measles, 
and close contact with a person affected with measles does not 
seem necessary. All children take measles very easily. Measles 
may be carried by clothing and by a third party. 

Symptoms and Signs — Measles begins gradually. The child 
will seem to have a bad cold ; the nose will run and there will 
be a slight amount of fever. These conditions will grow slowly 
worse until the eruption appears. Tears run from the eyes and 
bright light hurts the eyes; there is sneezing and a discharge 
from the nose. Quite often the patient complains of a moder- 
ately sore throat and the throat will be noticed to be ^somewhat 



HEALTH AT HOME. 291 

congested. On the third day small red spots about the size of a 
pinhead are often seen on the hard palate. There is always dull- 
ness, headache, pain in the back and drowsiness, but all of these, 
with the possible exception of drowsiness, may be found in other 
diseases. In from two to four days from the time the patient is 
taken sick the eruption appears. It first appears behind the ears, 
on the neck or on the forehead. The eruption appears as small, 
dark red spots, which are at first few, scattered and not elevated, 
very much resembling insect bites. In twenty-four hours the 
spots are more numerous and many of them are pointed and con- 
tain a little watery fluid in the top. In from one to three days 
the rash is fully out. When the eruption is fully out the face 
swells somewhat and it is sometimes difficult to recognize a well 
known face. The rash appears last upon the lower extremities, 
and by the time it is fully out on them it has usually begun to 
fade from the face. The rash lasts about four days. During the 
first two days of the eruption all symptoms are more severe and 
are at their worst when the rash is out best on the face. The 
skin burns and itches. The eyes are red, light hurts them and 
there is some discharge from the eyes, giving them a gummy feel- 
ing. There is some pain on swallowing. There is a cough 
which occurs often and is quite annoying. There is a varying 
amount of fever, ranging from 101° to 104°. As the rash fades 
the fever falls and very soon both rash and fever are gone. 
Almost at once the skin begins to come off in tiny scales. This 
lasts for from one to two weeks. Lung fever may occur with 
measles, and this makes a very serious case. Trouble with the 
ears occurs in some cases of measles, and when there is any run- 
ning from the ears they should be thoroughly and carefully 
syringed every few hours with warm water in which two or three 
tablets of No. 1 have been dissolved. The eyes are somewhat 
sore in almost every case of measles, and sometimes very severe 
eye trouble is met with. When the eyes give any trouble what- 
ever bathe them frequently in hot water in which four or five 
tablets of No. 1 have been dissolved. If either eye or ear trouble 
develops during measles the child should be taken to an eye and 
ear specialist as soon as well enough to leave home. There is 
cold in the head, at first slight, but steadily growing worse, and 
watery eyes; gradual rise of fever; the pinhead-like rash, appear- 



292 HEALTH AT HOME. 

ing first upon the neck and face, and slowly extending over the 
body. The red throat with pinhead spots on the hard palate 
should make the naming of the disease comparatively easy. 
When the rash is of a doubtful character a hot mustard bath will 
often bring the rash out clear and distinct. Deaths from measles 
are very few indeed. Never expose a delicate child to measles. 
Treatment — Even in mild cases keep the child in bed and keep 
him fairly warm — warmer than in scarlet fever. The sick room 
should be a trifle darkened if the light hurts the patient's eyes at 
all. The food should be light, almost all fluid, and given at 
regular intervals. The itching and burning of the skin may be 
relieved by rubbing the skin thoroughly with No. 42. The cough 
may be controlled by giving one tablet of No. 26 every two to 
three hours. Give one tablet No. 13 every three hours, the dose 
is the same for all ages. As soon as the rash has left, the 
patient should have a bath every day and immediately after the 
bath be rubbed with No. 41. As the patient gets well, carefully 
look after the eyes. If there is a cough continue the use of No. 
26. If the patient seems weak, give one tablet No. 17 before 
each meal and continue this for from three to six weeks. 
Finally, do not imagine that measles do not need any care; put 
the patient to bed and keep him there until well, and remember 
that, although the patient may not seem to be very sick, serious 
complications might arise. 

German Measles — German measles is rarely seen unless an 
epidemic occurs. The disease is contagious. Having had ordi- 
nary measles will not prevent one from having German measles, 
nor will German measles prevent an attack of measles. German 
measles occurs but once in the same person. It is not so conta- 
gious as measles or scarlet fever. It requires from one to three 
weeks from the time a person is exposed until the first sickness is 
felt. The rash appears almost as soon as the patient is taken sick, 
and is, in fact, the first thing noticed in many cases. Frequently 
a child goes to bed well and awakes in the morning - covered with a 
rash. The rash generally appears first on the face and rapidly 
spreads to the rest of the body. The rash fully develops in less 
than one day. On the face the rash appears as large irregular 
blotches of red color ; on the body the spots vary from the size of 



HEALTH AT HOME. 293 

a pinhead to that of a pea. Sometimes the rash is elevated 
enough to give the skin a "shotty" feeling. It lasts from one 
to three days, and then fades. The fever is low, from 100° to 
102°. The patient does not usually seem to be very sick, and 
were it not for the eruption the child would not be thought of as 
sick. There is very little itching of the skin. One of the things 
noticed in German measles is the fact that no after-troubles arise, 
the patient recovers easily and quickly. It is difficult to dis- 
tinguish German measles from light attacks of measles or scarlet 
fever, yet in measles there is always found the running from the 
nose and eyes, and this is absent in German measles. Low fever 
with an abundant rash should make the difference between scar- 
let fever and German measles noticeable. 

Treatment — Take good care of the patient; give one tablet No. 
11 every two hours as long as any fever is present; keep the 
bowels open by using No. 9 for small children and No. 16 for 
larger ones. Feed the patient carefully and no other treatment 
is needed. 

Chickenpox — Chickenpox is an acute contagious disease in 
which there is an eruption on the skin of little bunches which 
very much resemble tiny boils, with the exception that there is no 
matter in the bunches, although a small amount of watery fluid 
may occur in some of them. The general symptoms are quite 
mild, and the child is usually not very sick. It is from fourteen 
to sixteen days from the time the person is exposed to the disease 
until he is taken sick. 

Sy?npioms and Signs — In most cases the eruption is the first 
sign of the disease, although there may be slight fever and a sick 
feeling for a day before the attack begins. The eruption appears 
first upon the scalp, face or shoulders, as tiny, red, scattered pim- 
ples, and slowly spreads over the body. The first pimples have 
usually begin to dry up by the time the last ones appear, so that 
pimples of all stages may be noticed quite close together, and 
this is one of the characteristic signs of the disease. The pim- 
ples are very small at first, but gradually increase in size and the 
skin surrounding them for a quarter- or half-inch is quite red. 
Most of the pimples have little blisters on the top. When the 
drying up process begins it usually begins in the center, or where 



294 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

the little blister is, and this makes a little depression in the center 
of the pimple. The red ring around the pimple fades as the 
pimple dries up. As soon as the pimples dry up crusts form and 
these fall off in from one to three weeks. In most cases no mark 
is left, but after very severe cases, where the whole thickness of 
the skin has been involved, scars are left and the skin is some- 
times pitted. Such marks are most likely to appear on the face. 
The fever is from 100° to 102° ; the pulse is a very little faster 
than usual and the child is somewhat sick. 

Treatment — Keep the child out of school and in the house; do 
not needlessly expose other children. The itching may be 
relieved by a sponge bath with a solution of four or five tablets 
of No. 3. Prevent scratching as much as possible. Keep the 
bowels open by using No. 9 for young children and No. 16 for 
older ones. Should the fever reach 102° or above, give one tab- 
let No. 11 every two hours until the fever drops to 101°. The dose 
is the same for all ages. 

Whooping" Cough — This is an epidemic contagious disease 
and usually occurs but once in an individual. Whooping cough 
very often proves fatal in very young children. Lung fever and 
convulsions are often found associated with whooping cough. 
In whooping cough the symptoms are of two kinds — catarrhal 
and nervous. The catarrhal affects the mucous membrane of the 
mouth, throat and lungs. The most prominent nervous sign is a 
peculiar spasmodic cough, from which the disease takes its name. 
Convulsions are frequent. It is very easy to catch whooping 
cough. In from one to two weeks from the time a person has 
been exposed the disease will begin to manifest itself. 

Symptoms and Signs — For convenience the symptoms of 
whooping cough are divided into three stages — the catarrhal 
stage, the spasmodic stage and the stage of decline. 

The Catarrhal Stage lasts about ten days. The symptoms at 
first are those of a moderately severe cold. After about a week 
the cough, instead of getting better, as in an ordinary cold, grad- 
ually grows worse and occurs in paroxysms. At first these are 
quite mild and only two or three occur in a day, but they grad- 
ually increase in frequency and severity until the typical whoop 
of the disease is heard, and this takes us to the second stage. 
During the first stage there may be some slight fever. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 295 

The Spasmodic Stage is the stage of paroxysms, and f requentty 
at the beginning of a paroxysm the child will run to some con- 
venient place for support during the attack. The paroxysm 
begins with a number of explosive coughs, so near together that 
the child cannot draw a breath between them ; the face becomes 
red or purple and sometimes almost black ; the blood vessels stand 
out on the face and forehead ; tears run from the eyes and they 
seem almost to start from their sockets ; then follows a long drawn 
in breath which produces the crow-like sound called a whoop; 
then follows another succession of coughs and another whoop. 
The paroxysm lasts from one to three minutes, and the child may 
whoop a half dozen times during this time. The last cough usu- 
ally brings up an amount of stringy mucus. With the parox- 
ysms vomiting and nose bleed often occur, and if food has been 
taken just before the paroxysm came on, vomiting is sure to 
follow. After the paroxysm has passed, the child is often almost 
too weak to stand alone ; there is much perspiration. Some par- 
oxysms are not so severe as that described, but usually from 
five to forty severe ones occur during twenty-four hours. Ordi- 
narily the spasmodic stage lasts about four weeks, but it may be 
much longer than this. 

The Stage of Decline — Gradually the severity of the paroxysm 
ceases and the whoop stops. The cough resembles more and 
more the cough of an ordinary cold, then stops altogether. The 
third stage may last from a few weeks to all winter. 

Treatment — The child should have plenty of fresh air during 
the entire attack, and it is a fact worth noting that there are 
fewer paroxysms when a child is out of doors. Vomiting and 
indigestion are so frequent that feeding is difficult. When a 
meal is vomited up shortly after it has been given another meal 
should be supplied. The diet should be as nearly fluid as pos- 
sible. The nose and throat should be sprayed often with a solu- 
tion made by dissolving four tablets of No. 3 in a cup of warm 
water. Use the atomizer found in the Cabinet for spraying. A 
few drops of pure creosote placed in a quart of water and the 
whole placed in a tea kettle and boiled, allowing the child to 
inhale the steam, will be of much benefit. 

Give to a^child five years old or younger one tablet No. 13 
every three hours, and to a person over five years of age, one tab- 



296 HEALTH AT HOME. 

let No. 13 every two hours. Continue this during the whole 
course of the disease. Also give one tablet No. 27 three times a 
day before meals. 

Mumps — Mumps is a contagious disease, the principal sign 
of which is the swelling of the glands which produce saliva. The 
average time from time of expsoure to the first sick feeling is 
twenty days, but this may vary. 

Symptoms arid Sig?is — In mild cases the swelling of the jaw is 
the first thing that is noticed. In more severe cases the disease 
begins with headache, vomiting, pains in the back and limbs 
and fever. The fever is from 101° to 103°. There is usually 
pain in the jaws, which is worse when the jaw is moved or when 
acid substances are taken into the mouth, hence the home test for 
mumps is to give the suspected child a pickle, and if it causes 
sharp pain in the jaw the case is at once named mumps. The 
swelling begins just below the ear and usually on one side at a 
time, but frequently there is no swelling on the other side at all. 
The swelling is at its height on the second or third day, remains 
stationary for two or three days and then gradually goes away. 
The mouth is often very dry, and the child will complain of this. 
The patient is not usually very sick, and yet there is usually but 
little difficulty in keeping the child quiet. 

In children complications are rare, but it is no uncommon thing 
for men to have a swollen testicle, which may be quite painful, 
but usually subsides in a few days; with this there is usually more 
fever. In females swelling of the breasts may occur. 

Treatment — Keep the patient in the house; give a light diet; 
keep the mouth clean by rinsing often with a solution made by 
dissolving three tablets No. 3 in a cup of warm water. Keep the 
bowels well open by using No. 9 for young children and No. 16 
for older persons. Be careful with your patient and no further 
treatment is necessary. 

Diphtheria — Diphtheria is an acute, contagious disease 
caused by a known germ. Its charcateristic is the formation of 
false membrane over the mucous membrane of the throat and 
nose. In very mild cases the patient is not very sick, while in 
more severe cases he is very sick ; the heart is weak and the skin 
pale and bloodless. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 297 

In most large cities diphtheria may be found at almost any- 
time. Catching the disease from exposure to another person is 
the most common method of taking diphtheria ; a person may- 
take diphtheria from anything which has been near a person who 
has suffered with the disease. A person with a weak throat will 
take diphtheria sooner than another. It only requires from one 
to two days after a person has been exposed for the disease to 
come upon him. Diphtheria may attack a second time, but such 
cases are rare. 

Symptoms and Signs — Diphtheria is divided into three groups, 
according to the severity of the disease : First, the mild cases, 
in which there is little or no membrane, and in these cases the 
patients soon recover; second, the severe cases, in which there 
is "a marked membrane and in which there are evidences of 
poisoning from the diphtheria germs; third, the mixed cases, 
where there is marked poisoning from the germs of the disease. 

In the first group when there is an epidemic of diphtheria 
cases are frequently seen which are so mild that they seem only 
to have a bad cold, and yet could a microcsope be used numbers 
of germs of diphtheria could be found in the discharge from the 
nose or throat. In these cases there is usually a free irritating 
discharge from the nose ; this is occasionally streaked with blood 
and may continue for weeks. There is a slight amount of fever, 
but the patient is not very sick as a rule. 

In the second group the membrane is usually found only in 
the throat, and often only upon the tonsils. There is sore throat 
at the beginning and fever from 101° to 103°. The patient may 
or may not be sick enough to go to bed. The throat first shows 
red, and later a gray film forms, then a small spot of white deposit 
appears on the tonsils, and this rapidly spreads and covers the 
whole tonsil. This membrane is tough and sticks quite tight, 
being removed with difficulty with a swab, and when removed 
leaves a bleeding surface. 

In the third group the disease begins gradually; there is 
a slight indisposition for a day or two and some soreness 
of the throat. The symptoms increase for four or five days, 
with headache, vomiting, chills, and a fever from 102° to 104°. 
The membrane is the same as that already described except 
it may now cover the whole throat and even extend into the nose. 



298 HKALTH AT HOME. 

In very severe cases this membrane grows very rapidly. There 
is a free discharge from both the nose and the mouth, and the 
breathing through the nose is interfered with. The breathing is 
noisy, the tongue dry and the lips are cracked and bleed easily. 
Bleeding from the nose is frequent and both nostrils are plugged 
up by the swelling and the membrane. There is an odor to the 
discharge. About the second week, when fluids are given to the 
patient, they will run out of the nose again. The condition of the 
nose and throat gives the patient much annoyance. The patient 
becomes very ill and weak and shows evidence of being poisoned 
by the disease; the pulse is feeble and rapid and a sort of stupor 
comes over him, and when this is present he is very restless. 
Vomiting and diarrhea are liable to be present, and delirium is 
frequent. Sometimes the disease extends down to the vocal cords, 
and in such a case there is at first hoarseness, and later there may 
be complete loss of the voice. By the sixth or seventh day the 
disease has usually reached its height, and it then remains sta- 
tionary for two or three days, the membrane then comes away 
gradually, leaving behind a bright red surface which bleeds 
easily. As soon as the membrane disappears the patient begins 
to improve, but it requires a long time to regain health. The 
heart is slow to regain its normal strength, and the muscles 
remain weak for a long time. Once in a long time the mem- 
brane may remain for two or three weeks. When death occurs 
it usually does so when the membrane is the worst in the throat, 
and it may be due to the general weakness of the patient or to 
heart failure. Sudden failure of the heart may cause death even 
after the patient is nearly well. In diphtheria of any severity 
the pulse is always weak and rapid and the extremities are often 
cold. All cases of diphtheria must be regarded as serious and 
carefully watched, as it is impossible to tell when unfavorable 
signs may arise. A great many persons, both children and adults, 
die from diphtheria, but the cases vary so much that it is impos- 
sible to give an accurate percentage of deaths. Diphtheria is so 
serious a disease that every precaution should be taken to pre- 
vent its spread. Whenever an epidemic of diphtheria occurs in 
a neighborhood all schools should be closed and public funerals 
of persons who have died from the disease should never be 
allowed. When a case of diphtheria occurs the patient should 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 299 

at once be placed in a room entirely away from the rest of the 
family; a room in the top of the house is the best, as it can be 
aired easily and is usually more quiet. The nurse should have 
a room next to that occupied by the patient and should remain 
away from the rest of the family. Use every precaution possible 
to prevent the spread of this dreadful disease, and every case of 
even suspected diphtheria should be isolated at once. No per- 
son except the nurse and the physician should be allowed in the 
room with the patient. The meals and everything else required 
by the patient and nurse should be left outside the door. This 
quarantine of the patient should continue for ten days after the 
membrane has entirely disappeared. Strangers should be kept 
entirely away from the house as long as the quarantine is kept 
up. The nurse should never eat food that has been in the sick 
room and should not sleep in the same room with the patient and 
should spray her throat and nose frequently with a solution made 
by dissolving six or eight tablets of No. 3 in a cup of warm water. 
The nurse should also take exercise out of doors every day. 
When a patient is sick with diphtheria everything should be 
removed from the room except actual necessities; all pictures, 
books, toys, cushions, etc., should be removed. All laundry 
from the sick room should be removed in a closed package and 
immediately boiled for at least one hour. All dishes should be 
boiled for fifteen or twenty minutes after taking them from the 
room. After the patient gets well and is removed, the room 
should be thoroughly disinfected ; for directions as to this see 
the chapter on Disinfectants. 

Treatment — Have plenty of fresh air in the sick room, and 
where possible have two rooms for the use of the patient — one for 
day use and one for night use. The room not in use can then 
be thoroughly aired. The patient must be kept in bed during 
the entire attack and for some time after he is really well enough 
to sit up ; this is done that no sudden heart failure may occur 
from overexertion. The feeding should be carried out in accord- 
ance with the rules in the chapter on Diet in Disease. Some- 
times the food comes back through the nose, and in such a case 
liquid food must be given through a tube which is passed well 
down the throat. 

As soon as any depression is noticed or the heart's action is 



300 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

weak, as shown by a rapid, weak pulse, begin the use of stimulants. 
Give to a child four years old and younger one teaspoonf ul of whis- 
key or brandy, well diluted with water, every three hours day and 
night; to a child from four to ten years of age give one teaspoon- 
f ul as above every two hours ; and to one above the age of ten 
years give from two to six teaspoonfuls at a dose and give the 
stimulant every two to three hours. Also for a child five years 
old and younger dissolve one tablet No. 28 in four teaspoonfuls of 
water, stir thoroughly and give one teaspoonful of the mixture 
every four hours ; to a child from five to ten years of age give one 
teaspoonful of the above every three hours ; to a child from ten to 
sixteen years of age give one-half tablet No. 28 every three 
hours ; and to those above the age of sixteen give one tablet No. 
28 every three hours. Every hour the nose and throat should be 
thoroughly sprayed with a solution made by dissolving four to 
eight tablets No. 3 in a cupful of water. Vary the strength 
according to the age of the patient. It is important that the 
nose and throat be kept clean in this manner. As the patient 
recovers, great care must be taken until both heart and muscles 
regain their normal strength, and during the convalescence give 
one tablet No. 17 three times a day before meals. The dose is 
the same for all ages. 

The antitoxine treatment is used with very excellent results in 
cases of diphtheria, but should only be used by a physician ; in 
fact, when diphtheria is suspected, send for a physician at once 
and carry out the treatment here outlined until he arrives. Then 
place the matter fully in his hands. 

Typhoid Fever — Typhoid fever is an acute, infectious, con- 
tagious disease which is produced by a known germ. It is rare 
in infancy and frequent in childhood and adult life. The typhoid 
fever of childhood does not last so long as that in adults, nor does 
death occur so often. Typhoid fever is almost always caused by 
drinking water or milk which contains the germs of the disease. 
From the time a person receives the infection until the first ill- 
ness is felt is from one to three weeks. Typhoid fever in young 
children is very rarely fatal. The disease is one which attacks 
both the large and small intestines and certain parts of the intes- 
tines are very liable to ulcerate badly during the course of the 



HEALTH AT HOME. 301 

disease. The spleen is also always affected. It may be said of 
typhoid fever that the disease comes on slowly, with nose bleed, 
dull headache, followed later on by stupor ; red tongue, becom- 
ing dry, brown and cracked; tenderness over the abdomen, with 
diarrhea and gas in the intestines; a peculiar eruption upon the 
abdomen ; the patient grows sick very rapidly after the disease is 
once fully established, and recovers very slowly. 

Symptoms and Signs — The beginning of the disease may be 
very sudden, but the rule is that it comes on slowly with a feeling 
of slight illness, dizziness, headache, disordered digestion, dis- 
turbed sleep, nose bleed, depressed spirits and weakness of the 
muscles, followed by a chill. Sometimes, and particularly where 
malaria is common, the chill is followed at once by high fever. 
During the first week of typhoid fever there is present a fever 
which rises slowly each da}^ ; the pulse is frequent, but not rapid ; 
the tongue is coated ; there is some sickness felt in the stomach ; 
diarrhea is noticed ; there is headache, and about the seventh day 
a few reddish spots resembling flea bites may be found upon the 
abdomen, chest or back. 

During the second week the symptoms noticed the first week 
grow worse; the fever is constant; the pulse is rapid and com- 
pressible; gas is noticed in the intestines; the abdomen is tender; 
gurgling is sometimes heard in the intestines; there is often 
delirium at night; the headache is constant and severe; there is 
a short cough ; a substance gathers upon the teeth and lips and 
the diarrhea continues. During this week deafness may develop 
or there may be some trouble in seeing properly. 

During the third week the character of the fever changes and 
instead of being constant it is now low in the morning and high 
at night. With this exception the symptoms remain about the 
same for the third week. 

During the fourth week the fever is lower in the morning and 
does not rise at night, as during the third week ; the pulse is less 
rapid and more compressible ; the tongue gradually becomes clean ; 
the size of the abdomen is less; the diarrhea ceases; and the 
patient becomes a convalescent, but very much reduced in flesh 
and will require careful nursing and feeding for several weeks. 

The fever record of typhoid fever is very characteristic. On 



302 HEALTH AT HOME. 

the morning of the first day the fever will be very little above 
normal, and at night will be, say 100.5°; the second morning 
99.5°, evening 101.5°; third morning 100.5°, evening 102.5°; 
fourth morning 101.5°, evening 103.5°; fifth morning 102. 5°, 
evening 104.5°. From this time on to the end of the second 
week the evening temperature ranges from 103° to 105°, while 
the morning temperature is a degree or more lower. These 
figures are not exact but they are typical of the fluctuations of the 
fever. The principal intestinal symptom is diarrhea; if absent, 
the disease is very light. The stools are dark at first, but early 
in the second week they become fluid, ochre-yellow in color, may 
be streaked with blood, and have a very offensive odor. They 
number from three to fifteen in twenty-four hours. The eruption 
is nearly always found and consists of from five to twenty rose 
colored spots on the abdomen, chest or back — sometimes on the 
limbs — appearing in crops, lasting about five days and they dis- 
appear if the finger is pressed firmly against them. The ner- 
vous symptoms are very severe; headache early in the disease, 
dullness of the intellect soon following, passing into drowsiness 
and stupor, with very great illness and weakness; pronounced 
deafness; disturbance of sight; low, muttering delirium, always 
present in very severe cases. During convalescence the patients 
are very weak; the skin is pale and bloodless, and there is great 
nervousness; the heart is often easily excited; profuse night 
sweats occur, and in women the hair falls out. 

There are complications with typhoid fever. Bleeding from 
the intestines is the most frequent, this blood, of course, showing 
in the stools. During bleeding the temperature usually falls con- 
siderably. The ulcers which occur in the intestines may eat 
through the intestine walls, and this makes an almost hopeless 
case. Pneumonia and bronchitis often occur with typhoid fever. 
Death occurs in about one case in twenty sick with typhoid fever. 

Treament — Put the patient to bed and keep him quiet. The 
room must be thoroughly ventilated. The diet should consist 
entirely of fluids and under no circumstances allow even a bite of 
solid food. For full list of fluid foods see the chapter on Diet in 
Disease. The discharges from the body should be immediately 
disinfected with carbolic acid and should be kept in a closed 
vessel for several hours before final disposal. If there are more 



H3AI/TH AT HOME. 303 

than three stools in twenty-four hours give one tablet No. 29 
every four hours. The dose is the same for all ages. To reduce 
the fever give cold baths every two hours until the temperature 
is lowered and do not be afraid to have the bath cold — ice water 
is none too cold, and will do the patient good. Put the patient 
in a bath of lukewarm water and add ice or cold water until the 
temperature of the water is as low as can be had ; allow the 
patient to remain in the bath for ten or fifteen minutes, then 
place in bed again. Give to a child of four years one tablet No. 
13 every three hours; also give one tablet No. 21 every four hours. 
To a child four to twelve years, give one tablet No. 13 every two 
hours and one tablet No. 21 every four hours. To a person 
above the age of twelve, give one tablet No. 13 every two hours 
and one tablet No. 27 every two hours. When the gas in the 
intestines is troublesome, place a turpentine stupe over the abdo- 
men — it is well to apply one a part of the time at any rate. 
For directions as to making, see Counter-irritants, p. 122. To 
quench thirst give any cooling drink in moderation or allow the 
patient to hold small pieces of ice in the mouth. When the head- 
ache is severe apply cold to the head and a small mustard plaster 
to the back of the neck, and if this does not relieve, give one tab- 
let No. 30 every hour until three or four tablets have been given. 
If the heart's action is feeble give stimulants as directed in the 
treatment of diphtheria. Finally, rely on cold sponge baths, 
cold baths, and cold packs for the principal reduction of fever. 
Remember that under no circumstances is solid food to be given 
until two weeks after the fever in gone. Give the meals of 
liquid food at regular intervals, take good care of the patient, 
follow directions carefully as to giving drugs and your patient 
will progress as rapidly as can be expected in this disease. 

Syphilis — Syphilis is a disease which is often inherited, and no 
disease produces a greater variety of symptoms or more suffering. 
It is a disease which manifests itself in so many ways that it is 
not within the scope of this work to take up the subject fully. 
It is a disease in which the treatment must be varied so much 
that a physician is the only competent person to handle it. There- 
fore the disease is only mentioned, and the suggestion made that 
when any skin disease arises which cannot be understood or when 



304 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

bone or blood disease occurs which cannot be named, consult a 
physician and the case will be safe in his hands. 

Influenza or I,a Grippe — This is an infectious, contagious 
disease, due to a known germ, and occurs in epidemics. One 
attack does not protect from another, but rather seems to make 
the person more liable to a second attack. 

Symptoms and Signs — The mild cases last from two days to a 
week. The disease comes on quickly with chills, pains in var- 
ious parts of the body and sometimes vomiting. The fever is 
from 100° to 103° and the patient is usually sick enough to stay 
in bed. The tongue is coated and the appetite lost. The eyes 
water, the nose runs and there is a light persistent cough. It 
takes from three to four weeks to recover from an attack of this 
sort. 

In the severe cases the fever is from 102° to 105°. The disease 
begins with severe headache, chill and vomiting, and the patient 
is decidedly sick. These cases much resemble lung fever, except 
that the signs in the lungs are not present. The fever remains 
high for about a week or ten days. Marked nervous symptoms 
are present, such as headache, pain in the eyes from light, stupor 
and sometimes even delirium. The tongue has a brown coating, 
the lips are dry and parched, the pulse is rapid and compressible. 
It requires many weeks for the full effects of such an attack to 
wear off. Sometimes there is quite a serious inflammation in the 
throat or the disease may go down to the lungs, in which case 
it will resemble lung fever more than ever, and in fact this latter 
disease may develop in connection with la grippe. Many of the 
signs of la grippe are very indefinite, and it is hard to make 
much out of them. Iya grippe often runs into other diseases, and 
the tendency is for it to hang on, and the patient will often be 
more or less ill tor months ; the cough especially is hard to get 
rid of. 

Treatment — This consists in keeping the patient as comfortable 
as possible. Keep the bowels open by using No. 9 for children 
and No. 16 for adults. Keep the fever down by using one tab- 
let No. 11 every two hours for children and by using one tablet 
No. 13 every two hours for adults. When the pulse is weak and 
rapid, give stimulants freely — one teaspoonful of whiskey or 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 305 

brandy well diluted every three hours for children and one table- 
spoonful whiskey or brandy every two hours for adults. Give 
to children one tablet No. 27 three times a day before meals and 
to adults two tablets No. 27 three times a day before meals. At 
the very beginning of the disease put the patient to bed between 
blankets, place hot irons and hot water bottles about him and 
have him take a good sweat. Keep the headache down by the 
use of cold cloths on the head. Feed the patient on soft foods, 
give him plenty of good nursing and the recovery is only a ques- 
tion of time. 



SURGERY. 



It is not within the scope of this work to enter into the exhaus- 
tive details of general surgery nor to even mention surgical opera- 
tions in general. There are, however, certain principles under- 
lying the science and art of surgery, and rules and methods 
applicable in the management of many surgical conditions, which 
should be familiar subjects in every home. It is with these that 
we shall deal, and they may be conveniently classified under the 
subjects of Inflammation; Antiseptics and Surgical Dressings; 
Hemorrhage; Wounds; Burns, Scalds and Frostbite; and Car- 
buncles. 



INFLAMMATION. 

Inflammation may be defined as that succession of changes 
occurring in living animal tissues, produced by injuries or 
changes in conditions and surroundings, not sufficiently severe 
to cause loss of vitality, and which changes are accompanied 
by pain, redness, heat, swelling and disturbance of function. 
Taken singly none of these features of the inflammatory process 
can be said to express the morbid condition ; they must all be 
present. Irritation is a primary necessity for inflammation. 
Under the stimulation of irritation the vital forces are quickened, 
the circulation increases, tissue change becomes more rapid. The 
blood vessels dilate and more blood is brought to the inflamed 
part. The fluid portion of the blood escapes, in part, into the 
surrounding tissues, and with it passes out many of the white 
blood corpuscles, and generally a few of the red ones. This pas- 
sage of the fluids and white blood corpuscles from the blood ves- 
sels into the tissues produces the swelling, which is called oedema, 
or soft swelling, and which pits when pressed upon. In those 
cases of inflammation in which the swelling is hard and pits but 
little, if any, on pressure, there is an increase in the substance of 



HEALTH AT HOME. 307 

the tissues, produced by the augmented vital activity, and more 
rapid cell proliferation. Thus in some inflammatory processes 
in the glands of the neck we find a great increase in the amount 
of tissue which makes up the gland. In many instances this 
increase in tissue remains as a permanent new growth after the 
inflammation has subsided ; more frequently the new growth dis- 
appears, either by resolution and absorption or the new tissue 
breaks down and, undergoing degenerative changes, forms pus. 
Where we find this latter process to be local and confined to a cir- 
cumscribed area, it constitutes an abscess or boil. The pain 
which accompanies inflammation is caused by the irritation of 
the nerves about the seat of the disturbance. The irritation is 
chiefly produced by the pressure of the swelling, and hence the 
location of the inflammation has much to do with the degree of 
pain. Thus a swelling occurring in a confined space permits of 
a much greater degree of pressure, hence more intense pain. 
One of the most painful of all acute inflammations is a boil or 
abscess located in the external canal leading to the ear. Owing 
to the confinement of rigid bony walls the swelling soon fills the 
entire canal, and the highly sensitive nerves are subjected to 
great pressure. The rapid diminution of pain when an abscess 
has been opened, and the tension relieved, further points to the 
pressure of the swelling upon the nerves as the cause of the pain. 
The pain may, however, be of a reflex character, and the seat 
of pain located at some point distant from the injury or place of 
inflammation; thus in the case of hip joint disease the pain is 
felt about the knee, particularly back of the knee, and is gen- 
erally absent from the hip joint. Tenderness, however, is always 
present at the seat of all inflammations, and is a much more reli- 
able symptom than pain. The inflamed part is reddened and the 
temperature is elevated. These changes are produced by the 
greater flow of blood through the part. The excess of blood is 
most marked during the early stage of the process, when the 
locality will be bright red and hot. As the resistance to the 
flow of the blood becomes greater from the increased swelling, 
the amount of blood passing through the part is diminished and 
the temperature falls even to or below the normal. The color 
changes from red to pale or even a bluish tinge, or it may be mot- 
tled. 



308 HEALTH AT HOME. 

Varieties of Inflammation — These may be considered as 
simply steps in the process of inflammation due to variation in 
the resisting power of the tissues, the intensity of the cause and 
the duration of its action. 

Inflammation may be divided into two general classes : First, 
non-suppurative, in which there are all the characteristics of 
inflammation, but without the breaking down of tissue and the 
formation of pus; second, suppurative, in which the process of 
inflammation passes through all the steps of the first class, but 
goes further, and the tissues break down, decomposition sets in, 
and pus is formed. 

Included under the non-suppurative inflammations are serous 
inflammation, fibrinous inflammation and productive inflamma- 
tion. 

Serous hiflammation — Under slight cause the normal passage 
of fluid from the blood vessels into the tissues is increased in 
quantity and contains an excess of albumen, but very few of 
the white blood corpuscles or leucocytes escape. The best exam- 
ples of this form of inflammation are chronic effusions into the 
cavities of the body — the pleura or joints. In more intense inflam- 
mations also, where the passage of the blood corpuscles has not 
been fully established, as in the early stages of the process, and 
when the cause, although severe, is rapid and transient in its 
action, as that caused by heat and blistering agents, the effusion 
is a clear transparent fluid containing but little albumen, and few 
if any blood corpuscles. With more severe and prolonged cause 
the percentage of albumen and white blood corpuscles increases, 
and there is a greater tendency [to coagulation. These inflam- 
mations are called sero-fibrinous and lead up to the next class. 

Fibrinous Inflammation — In this class we find still more albu- 
men, fibrin and white blood corpuscles present in the exudate, 
and there is a much greater tendency to coagulate, and lymph 
forms on the inflamed surface or in the substance of the tissue. 
In an inflammation of the pleura or enveloping membrane of the 
lungs this lymph may form upon the opposing surfaces, and, 
blending together, constitute an adhesion or band of union 
between the two surfaces, which often becomes permanent, 
through the organization of the lymph into scar tissue. L,ymph 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 309 

formed in exactly the same way, is the temporary uniting medium, 
which seals the lips of a cut or wound when healing occurs, by 
first intention, and it is a similar lymph which " glazes" the sur- 
face of an open wound a few hours after it occurs. In these 
cases the fluid escapes from the open surface. A similar exuda- 
tion occurs into the tissues as a result of chronic slight irritation, 
the fluid is apparently absorbed as fast as it escapes; the white 
blood corpusles crowd the tissue and replace the parts which may 
have been destroyed. The white blood corpuscles are the repair 
forces which rebuild tissues which have been destroyed either 
by injury or disease, and all repair of tissue is accompanied by 
more or less inflammation. This function of building tissue 
brings us to the next class. 

Productive Inflammation — In many cases of inflammatory pro- 
cess the white blood corpuscles crowd into the lymph exudate 
and convert it into a tissue of closely packed leucocytes. To 
supply this with nourishment small loops of blood vessels spring 
from the capillaries of the inflamed tissue and penetrate into the 
lymph in all directions; this is the process by which granulation 
tissue is formed. When this granulation tissue has a plentiful 
supply of blood for its nourishment, it then undergoes further 
development, and is finally changed into what is called connec- 
tive tissue. This new connective tissue is called scar tissue. At 
first it is highly vascular —a recent scar is always redder than the 
surrounding parts ; but the tendency to contract is characteristic 
of this new fibrous tissue, and as this contraction proceeds the 
vessels disappear, and the scar in the course of some weeks or 
months becomes white as compared with the surrounding parts. 
This contraction of scar tissue may produce the most serious 
results, such as the gravest deformities, so frequently seen after 
extensive burns. The tendency is most marked where the tis- 
sues are loose, as about the mouth or eyelid. A scar is always a 
weak point in the system, and a tight scar is always irritable and 
very liable to break down. Granulation tissue frequently fails 
to develop into scar tissue. Continuance of excessive irritation 
or insufficient development of blood vessels or too close packing 
of the leucocytes in the tissues, thus preventing the entrance 
of the newly formed blood vessels into the mass, result in degen- 



310 HEALTH AT HOME. 

eration of the granulations. These broken down granulations 
form pus, and in such a case we are led to the second grand divi- 
sion of inflammations. 

Suppurative Inflammation — This is a very common form. In 
it the exudate is the same as in the non-suppurative form, but no 
coagulation occurs and no lymph forms and vascularizes; even 
lymph which may have formed at earlier stages of the inflamma- 
tion is destroyed when suppuration sets in. The various forms 
of non-suppurative inflammation often precede the suppurative, 
showing they are minor grades of the same process. Suppura- 
tion may be either acute or chronic. Either of these forms may 
appear in a circumscribed locality, forming an abscess, or its 
seat may be a free surface, such as the skin or some mucous 
membrane. In the latter case the process is called ulceration. 

Acute suppuration is always due to the action upon the tissues 
affected of some forms of micro-organisms or bacteria. Some of 
these organisms become lodged at some point, and if the condi- 
tions are favorable for their growth they proceed to multiply and 
to give off the products of their growth. The secretions of these 
bacteria are poisonous to the tissues of the body and destroy all 
with which they come in contact. As soon as this process of 
destruction on the part of the bacteria begins, however, nature at 
once marshals her forces, the blood and its white blood corpu- 
scles, to repel the invaders and repair damage. In a few hours 
a ring of leucocytes appears around the invaded area and becomes 
more and more dense; they infiltrate and displace the tissue which 
has become poisoned by the bacteria, and everywhere oppose the 
invasion of new tissue by the foreign organisms. Thus we see 
that the extent of tissue invaded by the suppuration is measured 
by the ability of the leucocytes to check and prevent the ravages 
of the bacteria. Usually they soon succeed in forming a dense 
wall of granulation tissue, everywhere intervening between them 
and the healthy tissue. 

Taking for examination an acute abscess as it runs its course 
we can trace out the various steps described above as they occur, 
and finally when the leucocytes have gained the victory we find 
a central yellowish mass of dead tissue through which are scat- 
tered great numbers of both bacteria and leucocytes; surrounding 



HEALTH AT HOME. 311 

this will be a layer of tissue of a granular character which the 
leucocytes have built up. Gradually the central mass softens, 
and the covering tissues become thinner and finally "point" at 
the top of the elevation or in the line of the greatest pressure. 
If allowed to run the course without interference rupture of the 
surface tissues follows, and the softened contents of the central 
space are discharged. Upon the removal of the pressure upon 
the wall of granulation tissue new blood vessels at once begin to 
form and the process of converting granulation tissue into con- 
nective tissue suitable for repair or the formation of a scar begins. 

ANTISEPTICS AND SURGICAL DRESSINGS. 

Asepsis means cleanliness, not only freedom from visible 
uncleanliness, but absolute freedom from any and all impurities, 
whether visible or invisible, poisonous chemical material or micro- 
organisms. 

Antiseptics — This is a term applied to those agents which 
are used to bring about an aseptic condition ; either preventing 
the entrance of septic material or organisms into the wound or 
destroying those already present, or producing a condition which 
is unfavorable to their development, and limiting their action. 

Heat is the most certain in action of all antiseptics and applic- 
able in most cases^where its action does not implicate living tis- 
sues. Thus for sterilizing dressings, instruments or solutions which 
are to be used about a wound, heat, either dry or moist, is most 
efficient Instruments and solutions should be boiled for several 
minutes before use. Dressings, such as absorbent cotton, and 
other materials which are to come in contact with a wound, should 
be thoroughly sterilized by baking in a hot oven. Antiseptic 
solutions are used to cleanse a wound or the parts about a wound. 
They are made by the addition of certain chemical substances to 
water in varying proportions. In the absence of chemical Sub- 
stances thorough washing of the wound with pure water, which 
has been boiled, will be very efficient as a cleansing agent. The 
more common solutions used for disinfecting, are those of corro- 
sive sublimate, carbolic acid, boric and salicylic acid, and alco- 
hol. Corrosive sublimate is the most powerfuLof all, but is an 



312 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

active poison and must be used with "great caution. The usual 
strength is one to five thousand ; that is, one part of corrosive 
sublimate to five thousand of water. In the Cabinet will be 
found tablets of corrosive sublimate, No. 38. Two tablets dis- 
solved in one quart of water makes a safe solution for general use 
about wounds, and for cleansing surfaces which are to be opera- 
ted upon. 

Another safe and non-irritating disinfectant solution is made 
by dissolving two tablets of No. 1 in one tablespoonful of water. 
This is especially useful about the eye, or as a wash for sore 
mouth. One part of carbolic acid added to ten parts of water 
makes a very efficient disinfectant, which is especially valuable 
in cleansing ulcers and open sores, as it has a stimulating effect 
upon the development of granulations. Alcohol is too irritating 
to be used on wounds unless diluted to a point where its efficiency 
as a germicide is so much reduced as to make it of little account. 
It is, however, a valuable fluid in which to immerse instruments 
to disinfect them before use. 

For cleansing a wound or the parts about a wound pledgets of 
absorbent cotton should be used as they can be immediately 
thrown away when soiled. Sponges are liable to become foul, 
and be the conveyers of septic poison. 

Surgical Dressings — The substances which come in contact 
with the wound must be absolutely free from any septic poison. 
The two substances most commonly used are gauze and absorbent 
cotton. The gauze consists of ordinary cheesecloth which has 
been thoroughly impregnated with some antiseptic material, as 
corrosive sublimate or iodoform. This dressing can be procured 
from the Home Remedy company. Absorbent cotton is a fine 
fibre cotton which has been subjected to chemical treatment which 
thoroughly removes all oil and foreign matter, and at the same 
time bleaches it pure white. Bandages are employed in surgery for 
the purpose of keeping the dressings in place and to compress 
and support portions of the body. The bandages supplied in the 
Cabinet are suitable for all ordinary dressings. Where the band- 
ages are to be applied around the body, much wider ones may be 
made in the home from any light, strong muslin. The very 
narrow bandage will be found easier of application when used 
to dress wounds of the fingers or toes. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 313 



HEMORRHAGE. 



Hemorrhage or bleeeding is of three kinds, arterial, venous 
and capillary. Arterial hemorrhage occurs when an artery is 
opened ; the blood, as it escapes, is bright red in color, and flows 
in jets corresponding to the beats of the heart. In venous' hem- 
orrhage the blood escapes from a vein, is dark in color and flows 
in a steady stream without acceleration caused by the heart beat. 
When only capillary vessels are opened, the blood has no dis- 
tinct flow but is^rather a general oozing over the entire surface of 
the wound. This is called capillary hemorrhage. Blood when 
removed from the vessels and exposed to the air, undergoes a 
peculiar change, known as coagulation or the formation of a blood 
clot. It is to this property of the blood that man is enabled to 
exist, and were it not present the slightest wound to a blood ves* 
sel would endanger life by the continual leakage of the blood. 

All wounds are attended by more or less bleeding. Besides 
such, which may be decsribed as traumatic, there may be hem- 
orrhage caused by the rupture of blood vessels, either from disease 
of the vessel walls or of the surrounding parts. The amount of 
bleeding from a wound depends not only upon the kind and size 
of the cut vessels, but upon the manner in which they are divided. 
A wound cutting across an artery will occasion more severe hem- 
orrhage than one cutting the artery lengthwise ; an incised or 
clean cut wound more than a contused or lacerated, and a mere 
puncture than a completely severed artery. The arteries are 
always in a state of tension and when cut, the edges retract from 
each other and contract upon themselves, so lessening the cali- 
ber. The outlets are choked by the coagulating blood, and when 
there is much loss of blood fainting ensues, the action of the 
heart becomes slower, and there is less blood sent to the wounded 
part. In these three ways nature tries to arrest hemorrhage 
and moderate bleeding will soon be checked spontaneously when 
the blood is in normal condition. The application of heat or 
cold favors the formation of clots, and the arterial contraction and 
elevation of the injured part reduces the force of the blood sent to 
it; this will often be the only treatment required, but in severe 
cases, when blood is spurting from an artery, further measures 



314 HEALTH AT HOME. 

become necessary. The most important of these, and usually call- 
ing for no further apparatus than one's fingers, is pressure upon 
the bleeding point. There is no danger of serious hemorrhage 
from a wound to which a forcible digital pressure can be applied. 
If the vessel is too deep to be reached by the finger, the wound 
can be plugged up by a compress of absorbent cotton or gauze. 
To do this effectively, begin first with small pads of the material, 
having each one a little larger than the preceding, and pack the 
wound until the pile of compresses rises well above the surround- 
ing tissues; then they should be secured by a tight bandage. 
This form of pressure is effective only when there is an underly- 
ing bony surface. If the artery is imbedded in a large fleshy 
muscle it becomes difficult if not impossible to control it. Wounds 
of the head and face, although they may bleed profusely, can 
almost always be controlled by direct pressure, as the skull forms 
a firm base upon which the pressure can be exerted. 

Bending of a limb will sometimes be of aid in arresting hem- 
orrhage. Put in the joint a firm roll of cotton or a small roll of 
bandage against which pressure will come when the limb is bent. 
In the case of bleeding from the palm of the hand, which will 
sometimes be profuse, have the patient clasp firmly a wad of cot- 
ton, and at the same time hold the hand high above the head. 
Another method of arresting hemorrhage, especially capillary or 
venous hemorrhage, is the application to the bleeding surface 
of astringents. These are called styptics. The most useful are 
the subsulphate or the perchloride of iron, alum and gallic acid. 
In case none of these are to be had the bleeding may often be 
stopped by covering the surface with wheat flour. 

The most dangerous form of venous hemorrhage is that from 
rupture of large varicose veins. Pressure should be applied 
below the bleeding point, cold or heat applied and the limb ele- 
vated. When pressure is applied for the arrest of hemorrhage 
from an artery it should be placed on the side of the wound next 
to the heart, but in the case of venous hemorrhage always on the 
side away from the heart. 

Where there is internal hemorrhage much benefit may often be 
derived by applying bandages around the limbs — on the arms 
just below the shoulder and on the limbs just below the groin. 
These bandages should be applied firmly enough to check the 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 315 

return flow of venous blood, but not so tightly as to retard the 
arterial flow. By this means a very considerable quantity of 
blood may be retained in the extremities, and the blood pressure 
in the vessels of the trunk much lowered, thus giving the rup- 
tured vessels a better chance to contract, and a clot to form. 

There are some persons who are called ' ' bleeders, ' ' who show 
an excessive tendency to hemorrhage, so that even a slight cut or 
scratch may be followed by severe hemorrhage which is difficult 
to control. The constitutional effects of severe hemorrhage are 
pallor, coldness of the extremities, clammy sweat, feeble or sigh- 
ing respiration, small rapid pulse, restlessness and thirst, vertigo, 
dimness of vision, ringing in the ears, difficulty in articulation, 
followed by unconsciousness, slight convulsive movements and 
death, if the bleeding is not stopped before this. 

The same effects follow internal hemorrhage, and may be the 
only evidence of its existence, though usually the blood will find 
an outlet somewhere. 

Hemoptysis— Bleeding from the X,nngs— In hemoptysis 
or bleeding from the lungs the blood is usually coughed up; 
it is bright red, and more or less frothy from admixture with 
air. It is always a serious symptom, though the quantity of blood 
lost in this way is rarely great. Blood supposed to be from the 
lungs may often come from ruptured vessels in the mouth or 
throat. 

Hematemesis — Vomiting of Blood — The vomiting of 
blood is called hematemesis. This is not so serious as hemor- 
rhage from the lungs. The patient is likely to have a sense of 
fullness and oppression in the pit of the stomach, and then to 
throw up, without much nausea, a large quantity of dark blood, 
mixed with food, but containing no air, acid in reaction and not 
coagulable. 

Treatment for Hemoptysis and Hematemesis — In either case 
keep the patient quiet and cool and the head elevated. Give bits 
of ice, having them swallowed whole, if possible, and if the 
bleeding is repeated apply ice cold cloths externally. Give only 
fluid food, cold, and in small quantities. For hemorrhage from 
the bowels ice cold injections may be given, and in the same way 
solutions of oak bark or tannic acid may be used for their astrin- 



316 HEALTH AT HOME. 

gent effect. Make cold applications over the abdomen. One 
tablet of No. 25 may be given and, if necessary, repeated in four 
hours. This form of hemorrhage may occur in typhoid fever, 
but is more common from internal hemorrhoids than any other 
cause. 

Hematuria Blood in the Urine — The blood may come 
either from the kidneys, bladder or urethra. If it appears at 
the beginning of the act of passing water it is probably from the 
urethra, if at the end more likely from bladder or kidney. 

Uterine Hemorrhage — In the case of uterine hemorrhage a 
vaginal douche of hot water or a hot solution of alum is espec- 
ially called for. A half teaspoonful dose of fluid extract of ergot 
may be given, and repeated in half an hour. It may be neces- 
sary to plug the vagina. One way of doing this is to introduce 
as far as the mouth of the uterus a soft handkerchief, leaving the 
ends projecting. Then pack this with small pieces of dry sponge 
or absorbent cotton and tie the ends of the handkerchief together. 
The sponge is best, as it swells somewhat when saturated, mak- 
ing considerable pressure. After a sufficient time the plugs can 
be removed, on at a time, and finally the handkerchief . Another 
way is by means of the kite-tail tampon — a series of bunches of 
absorbent cotton tied at intervals of a couple of inches along one 
string. These are introduced, one at a time, till the vagina is 
distended, and the end of the string is left hanging externally. 
Upon pulling this, the plugs easily come out in succession. 

Epistaxis — Nose Bleed — Bleeding from the nose demands 
some special attention. This may be either the result of an acci- 
dent or a spontaneous outbreak. In the latter case it may be 
regarded as an effort of nature to relieve the congestion of the 
head, and need seldom cause any uneasiness. To check it, apply 
pressure upon the facial artery at the root of the nose, and apply 
cold to the forehead and back of the neck. The ordinary posi- 
tion taken, that of leaning over a basin, is the worst possible. 
Make the patient stand erect, throw back the head, and elevate 
the arms, while cold applications are being made to the nostrils. 
If the bleeding persists beyond a reasonable time, the nose may 
be syringed with a solution of salt one ounce, water one pint, ice 
cold. Avoid blowing the nose, and so disturbing the forming 



HEALTH AT HOME. 317 

clots. If all other means fail, it may be necessary to plug the 
nose ; this proceeding, however, should only be attempted by a 
competent physician. 



WOUNDS. 

A wound is a sudden breach in one or more of the tissues of the 
body. Where the breach occurs in bone or cartilage, it is called 
a fracture. Wounds are accidental and operative. They may 
be classified under four leading heads as follows : incised, punc- 
tured, lacerated and contused. Any wound may become inoccu- 
lated with a virus or venom ; it is then a poisoned wound. An 
incised wound is made by a clean cut with a sharp instrument. 
A punctured wound is caused by a narrow instrument, which 
penetrates the tissues, but does not cut laterally. A lacerated 
wound is made by a dull instrument which tears the tissues. A 
contused wound is one in which the tissues are more bruised than 
separated. When a wound has occurred, the first effect is the 
separation of the tissues, and then follows hemorrhage. The 
wound fills with blood, and, if no large vessels are divided, the 
hemorrhage may cease spontaneously by coagulation ; this occurs 
as a rule except in severe wounds, in which large vessels are 
severed. Very soon other changes follow ; they are hyperaemia, 
or increase in the flow of blood to the injured part, redness, swell- 
ing, heat and pain, in the edges of the wound — all the phe- 
nomena of inflammation. No repair of tissue is possible without 
this inflammation. It may be mild, but it must of necessity 
exist. Inflammation produces cell-multiplication or proliferation, 
and a reunion of atom to atom, capillary to capillary, and the 
resumption of function cannot occur without cell proliferation. 

If the edges of the wound are brought close together and no 
suppuration or poisoning of the wound occur, then we get heal- 
ing or closure of the wound by first intention ; but if the wound is 
left to gape open the space between the edges begins to be filled 
in a few days by granulation or newly formed tissue, and this 
granulation tissue continues to grow until it fills the wound to the 
level or above the level of the surrounding tissues. In some 
cases this granulation process becomes excessive, and the new 



318 HEALTH AT HOME. 

cells are formed more rapidly than they can become organized 
into permanent tissue, and this excess of newly formed cells con- 
stitutes "proud flesh" which unless removed prevents the closure 
of the wound and favors ulceration and sloughing. Often this 
excess of granulation tissue will, of itself, break down and slough ; 
where it does not it should be removed either by the application 
of caustics, such as the solid stick of lunar caustic, or nitrate of 
silver or by the application of powdered burnt alum over its sur- 
face. 

From what has been said, it can be readily seen that it is most 
desirable to procure union by first intention, and the two chief 
factors in bringing about this result are perfect cleanliness in and 
about the wound and perfect co-aptation or closure of the edges 
of the wound. 

Treatment of Wounds — The first step in the treatment of 
wounds is to arrest the hemorrhage. Incised wounds bleed most 
freely, and are more dangerous in this particular than lacerated and 
contused wounds. In one the vessels are smoothly severed, in 
the other the ends are torn in shreds. Punctured wounds do not 
bleed seriously, unless some of the larger vessels are opened. 
The general rules for arrest of hemorrhage were given in the pre- 
vious section and need not be repeated here. 

After hemorrhage has ceased, the next step is the careful cleans- 
ing of the wound. In many cases dirt is obviously present and 
should be carefully removed, but often some form of septic 
material or poison, which cannot be seen, may gain entrance, 
and to provide against such a contingency antiseptics should be 
thoroughly used. A solution made by dissolving two tablets of 
No. 38 in a quart of water should be used to wash the wound. 
Use small pledgets of absorbent cotton dipped in the solution and 
after thoroughly wiping out the wound and washing the sur- 
rounding tissues, the saturated cotton should be held over the 
wound and squeezed out, allowing the solution to flow over the 
wound, and thoroughly flush it. After thoroughly cleansing the 
wound, and arresting the hemorrhage the question of how to 
close the wound so as to get the best adaptation of the edges of 
the wound, must be considered. In an incised wound of any 
considerable depth or extent, especially if in a location where the 
natural position and tension of the tissues will tend to make the 



HEALTH AT HOMB. 319 

wound gape open, the only certain way of maintaining the edges 
of the wound in accurate apposition is by the proper insertion of 
sutures or stitches. In the case of superficial wounds, so located 
that there is but little tendency for the edges to gape, properly 
applied straps of adhesive or surgeon's plaster will often answer 
the purpose and give good results. The same is true in the case 
of wounds in which there is more or less laceration, and hregu- 
larity in the wound. In such cases much benefit may be obtained 
by the application of the straps of plaster in such a manner that 
it tends to draw the surrounding tissues towards the wound, and 
thus relieve the tension upon the wounded parts. In using 
stitches to close a wound, the curved needle will generally be 
found the most useful. The point of the needle should be 
inserted through the skin a quarter or half an inch from the edge 
of the wound, and carried down through the tissues towards the 
bottom of the wound and following this curve the point of the 
needle will be carried across the wound into the tissues of the 
opposite side, and finally out through the skin at a point corres- 
ponding to the point of the entrance upon the opposite side. 
The thread should then be drawn through, and tied. In tying 
the suture the friction knot should be used, that is, the threads 
are twice wrapped around each other before the second part of 
the knot is tied and the thread cut. This process is then repeated 
until a sufficient number of stitches have been placed to thor- 
oughly close the wound and bring the edges smoothly into apposi- 
tion. Care must be taken that the edges of the wound do not 
''pucker," and any shreds of tissue which are hanging partially 
loose in the wound should be cut away before the wound is closed, 
as they are very liable to slough if left in place. Care must also 
be taken not to draw the suture too tight or it will cause the edges 
of the wound to turn in upon themselves, and interfere with heal- 
ing. The knot should be tied on one side of the wound, not 
directly over it. The tissues may often be advantageously sup- 
ported, and tension upon the sutures relieved by the proper appli- 
cation of strips of adhesive plaster; or the same result may be 
obtained in the application of the bandage. 

After the wound has been cleansed and closed the next step is 
the placing of protective dressing upon it. In most cases it will 
be sufficient to cover the wound fully with a thick layer of No. 



320 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

40, and then apply a layer of absorbent cotton ; and finally cover 
the whole with a bandage. In other cases where septic poison- 
ing is suspected, medicated gauze should be employed in place of 
the ointment and absorbent cotton. Where the wound is clean 
cut, and free from poison, the primary dressing may often 
remain for three or four days before renewal, especially if the 
hemorrhage has been thoroughly arrested before the dressings 
are applied. The indications for changing the dressings are, 
undue heat and pain in the part, and the presence of any con- 
siderable swelling. Blood oozing slightly from the wound into 
the dressings will become hard and dry and thus make the dress- 
ings uncomfortable, and also tends to make them foul. Any dress- 
ing which shows evidence of soiling by seeping of the discharges 
from the wound should at once be removed and fresh dressings 
applied. In ordinary cuts, the stitches should remain in place 
for five or six days. They should not be left too long, for ulcera- 
tion around the thread may occur or the stitches may cut through 
the tissues and leave a scar. In removing the stitches, a fine 
pointed pair of scissors should be used and the thread cut between 
the knot and the skin, when it may be easily withdrawn. It is 
often advisable to continue the support to the tissues by the adhe- 
sive straps for several days after the stitches have been removed, 
in order that the wound may not be again torn open. 

If pus forms after a wound has been dressed in the manner 
above described, the dressings must be removed and all pus 
thoroughly removed, and the wound washed out with the anti- 
septic solution made by dissolving two tablets No. 38 in a quart 
of water and fresh dressings applied. If much pus forms, the 
cleansing should be repeated two or three times daily, care being 
taken each time to thoroughly irrigate the entire wound with the 
antiseptic solution. In many cases of suppuration of a wound 

he pus will have a tendency to burrow under the edges of the 
wound, and to form pockets. These should be carefully sought 
after, and when found thoroughly washed out. For this purpose, 
the medicine dropper found in the Cabinet may often be employed 

to advantage, or in the case of extensive wounds, the fountain 
syringe may be used to irrigate the wound. Place the antiseptic 
solution in the syringe and hang it at a sufficient elevation to 
insure considerable force to the stream, and allow it to play over 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 321 

the surface of the wound. The rubber nipple may be removed 
from the glass tube of the medicine dropper, and the glass tube 
inserted into the rubber tubing of the fountain syringe, thus 
forming a very efficient irrigator for suppurating wounds ; it will 
also be useful for cleansing a wound before dressing. 

In dressing lacerated wounds all shreds of skin or tissue which 
have no extensive attachment to the surrounding tisuses, or 
which have been so badly torn and injured as to destroy their 
vitality, should be removed at once, otherwise they will die and 
slough, thus endangering the safety of the whole wound by infec- 
tion from the dead tissue. Never, under any circumstances, 
poultice a wound, since a poultice offers an ideal breeding place 
for bacteria, as it furnishes the two conditions essential for their 
rapid growth — heat and moisture. In the case of wounds 
which are very painful and attended by much swelling, a great 
deal of relief may be obtained by the use of hot applications, but 
they should be used very hot, and removed as soon as they begin 
to cool. A stream of hot antiseptic solution may be allowed to 
flow continuously over the wounded part, where there has been 
much laceration and bruising of the tissues ; this will often stim- 
ulate the circulation, and help keep up their vitality until repair 
has begun. 

Poisoned Wounds — When venom or virus is introduced 
into the tissues through a wound it is said to be poisoned. 

Snake Bites — The venom of certain reptiles, when carried 
into the circulation through a wound, often produces alarming 
and sometimes fatal results. The intensity of its action is in pro- 
portion to the quantity and quality of the poison absorbed, and 
to the rapidity of its introduction into the system. If the venom 
be introduced directly into a vein it is tar more rapid and power- 
ful in its action than though it were lodged in the skin or fatty 
tissues, where its absorption would be slow. The most poisonous 
serpent is the Indian cobra ; then comes the rattlesnake of the 
South ; the rattlesnake of the North ; the American copperhead ; 
the American moccasin ; and the spreading adder. The venom of 
snakes is excreted by a gland situated near the eye. In the act 
of striking or biting it is forced by a compressor muscle along a 
groove, or channel in the fang. When the snake is quiet the 



322 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

fangs (one on either side) are folded backward, and are buried in 
grooves in the mucous membrane in the roof of the mouth. 
When ready for use they are drawn forward by certain muscles. 
The venom seems to be as potent in cold weather as in warm. 
The symptoms following snake bite will vary according to cir- 
cumstances as above mentioned, but usually are as follows: pain of 
a sharp stinging character usually felt in the wound. Fright or 
shock may mask this symptom. Swelling rapidly follows, and 
in rattle-snake bite, spotted discoloration often occurs. The 
swelling extends in all directions, but is most marked along the 
line of the large veins and lymphatic vessels toward the heart. 
Headache, fever, chills, irregular breathing, a slow feeble pulse, 
and nausea may be present. Inflammation of the tissues 
with abscesses, and sloughing usually occur. If death does not 
occur, the case may terminate favorably in two or three days, or 
it may last for weeks or months. 

Treatme?it — The first indication is for the immediate removal 
of the venom. Suction by the lips is an efficient method and may 
be safely practiced provided there is no abrasion on the lips or 
about the mouth. A bite about the mouth or neck is more dan- 
gerous than elsewhere since the great swelling which occurs may 
close the larynx and trachea, and thus smother the patient. 
Next in order of usfulness is free and immediate cutting out of 
all tissues within a half an inch of the bite, or free and numerous 
cuts be made in the tissues, so that the blood may flow freely and 
wash out the poison. 

Permanganate of potassium is the best chemical, and whiskey 
the best physiological antidote. A solution containing five grains 
of the permanganate of potassium to one ounce of water should 
be injected into the tissues about the bite, using from one 
to three teaspoonf uls of the solution. Whiskey or alcohol in any 
form should be given freely to keep up the heart's action; large 
quantities of it can be taken under the circumstances without 
intoxication. Care must be used, however, in giving alcohol to 
children, as it has occasionally proved fatal. Where great swell- 
ing occurs, and gangrene is threatened on account of the great 
tension, free incisions or punctures should be made in the swollen 
tissues. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 323 

Bee, Wasp and Hornet Stings — These are very rarely 
fatal, but are painful and annoying. The application of an alka- 
line solution, if immediately used, will neutralize the pain and 
the tendency to swelling. A half teacupful of ordinary baking 
soda in a quart of water makes a solution of the proper strength 
to apply to the part. If the sting remains in the wound, it should 
be removed. Clay moistened into paste with saliva is an effective 
remedy. 

Hydrophobia — The bite of certain animals, as the wolf, dog, 
fox, and cat is at times followed by alarming, and often fatal 
symptoms, due to the absorption of a specific virus. 

The symptoms may follow the bite of an animal seemingly in 
perfect health, as well as from one noticeably affected with rabies. 
It may occur at any season of the year and in all climates. The 
wound always heals slowly, even where there is no specific virus 
present, for it is always lacerated and contused, and in addition 
it is infected by the contact with the saliva. The saliva of man 
at times will produce fatal septic poisoning when injected into 
the tissues. The period of development of rabies varies in man, 
from five days to as many months; and in exceptional cases to 
as long as one or two years. The symptoms of its approach are 
often vague. Pain along the nerves leading to the wound, and 
in and about the scar is considered as being among the earlier 
symptoms. Irregular heart action occurs, together with respira- 
tory disturbance of a convulsive character. The face expresses 
a sense of actual suffering, or anxiety. Nausea, increased flow 
of saliva, and vomiting occur, and are often followed by general 
or partial convulsions. Death usually ensues between the second 
and fifth days. Professor Flint is of the opinion that no well 
authenticated case has ended ia recovery. 

Treatment — Preventive measures are of first importance. If 
Pasteur is correct in his deductions — and there is little doubt of 
his success with animals — enforced inocculation (vaccination) 
of all cats and dogs should be practiced. The wound inflicted 
by any animal, especially one known or suspected to be suffering 
from rabies, should be immediately and freely removed with a 
knife, or the parts around the wound destroyed by the actual 
cautery. When possible the mouth should be applied to the 



324 HEAI/fH AT HOME. 

wound and strong suction employed. After the poison has been 
absorbed, and with the appearance of the convulsive stage, the 
case should be placed in the hands of a skilled physician for the 
administration of medicinal remedies. 

I/Ock Jaw — Tetanus — This is caused by infection of a 
specific baccillus or germ. Any wound, however small or seem- 
ingly insignificant, and upon any part of the body, may serve as 
the starting point of this affection. Wounds of the exposed parts 
of the body, as of the hands, feet and face, are especially liable 
to become infected. The time which may elapse between the 
receipt of the injury and the appearance of the muscular spasms is 
from a few hours to several weeks, but usually within the first 
three weeks after the injury. The earlier symptoms are a greater 
degree of pain and irritation about the wound than would be 
caused by the inflammation present. The pain is often felt at 
points along the nerves at some distance from the seat of injury. 
Irritability, a sense of muscular excitability and a feeling of 
apprehension are among the symptoms which precede the con- 
vulsive attacks. The muscles about the jaw are the first to be 
thrown into spasms, hence the term, lockjaw. In mild cases the 
spasms may be confined to these muscles. In severe cases the 
sense of distress is first in the pit of the stomach, this is followed 
by spasms of the muscles, beginning with the diaphragm, and 
involving in quick succession the muscles of the jaws, larynx, 
back of the neck, and upper part of the back. Respiration 
becomes interrupted, the expression of distress is intense, the 
face becomes blue, and death may occur from paralysis of the 
respiratory muscles. The spasms continue until the muscles are 
exhausted and can no longer contract. Successive attacks fol- 
low rapidly, being started by the slightest cause, as the jar occa- 
sioned by walking upon the floor, or the contact of the clothing 
against the oversensative skin. The mind remains clear until 
carbonic acid poisoning occurs from interference with respira- 
tion. The pulse and temperature vary between great extremes — 
records of the pulse show as high as 160 beats per minute, while 
the temperature has been found as high as 112° F. Such a tem- 
perature indicates the near approach of death, which may occur in 
a single spasm, or the patient may survive a number of attacks. 
The danger of death diminishes if the patient survives the fifth 



HEALTH AT HOME. 325 

day, although the vast majority of cases end fatally before this. 
High temperature, and violent and frequent spasms are gave 
symptoms. 

Hysteria is more apt to be mistaken for tetanus than any other 
disease. In hysteria there is usually no elevation of temperature 
and the symptoms of great and acute distress are absent. Hys- 
teria occurs chiefly in females; tetanus, in a large majority of 
cases, in males. The spasms of strychnia poisoning are quite 
similar to those of true tetanus, but in strychnia poisoning the 
spasms come on within a few minutes after the poison has been 
taken; the muscles of the jaw are not the first affected as in true 
tetanus, and are not always rigid during the attack. The 
convulsive movements of strychnia poisoning are of short dura- 
tion, and complete relaxation occurs, while in tetanus the muscu- 
lar rigidity continues. 

Treatment — The essential feature of the treatment is preven- 
tion, by thorough cleansing of all wounds with the antiseptic 
solution made by dissolving two tablets of No. 38 in a quart of 
water, and washing the wound in the manner advised when 
directing the dressing of wounds. When tetanus is impending, 
the most perfect quiet must be maintained about the patient, and 
the administration of concentrated nourishment continued to keep 
up the patient's strength. The medicinal treatment is similar to 
that of hydrophobia in the main and should be in the hands of a 
skillful physician. 



BURNS AND SCALDS— FROSTBITE. 

The degree of danger from burns and scalds depends more upon 
the extent of surface of the skin destroyed than upon the depth 
of the burn. Burns of the head and face are most dangerous ; 
those of the extremities least grave. Recovery is rare after des- 
truction of one-third of the skin surface of the body. Death may 
result from shock, or exhaustion, from prolonged suppuration 
and septic poisoning. In the case of a slight burn or scald 
involving only a small area of the surface of the body and not 
extending beneath the skin there is simply local disturbance. 
When, however, a considerable area of tissue is burned or scalded, 



326 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

symptoms of , profound constitutional disturbance rapidly come 
on. The patient will have chills or rigors, suffer excruciating 
pain, and show in his epxression extreme anxiety as to his con- 
dition, andjsinks into a condition of collapse, which is often the 
beginning^of a fatal ending. When death does not occur at once, 
the duration of this stage is from six to thirty-six hours. It is 
then followed by the stage of reaction and inflammation. The 
character of fever, which is found in this stage, depends upon the 
extent of tissue destroyed, and upon the occurrence of certain 
complications in the upper portion of the intestines, and about 
the lungs. Inflammation of the glands in the upper part of the 
small intestine, and the formation of an ulcer and subsequent 
perforation ending in death, is not of infrequent occurrence dur- 
ing the second week after the accident. Peritonitis, pleurisy or 
pneumonia may occur in any case at about the same time and 
add much to the gravity 7 of the case. Inflammation of the larynx 
and bronchial tubes is apt to follow where scalding steam has 
been inhaled. 

Treatment — The first thing in severe cases is to relieve the 
pain. Give one tablet of No. 25 every twenty minutes until 
patient is easy, but do not give more than six doses within 
twelve hours. Stimulation with whiskey or brandy, either by 
mouth or by injection into the rectum, is also indicated to pre- 
vent collapse, or to modify the intensity of the shock. The cloth- 
ing should be carefully removed, and the burned surafce at once 
covered with some protective material so that it may be kept from 
contact with the air. No. 42 is the best covering of this sort, as 
it not only protects from the air, but is a healing agent. A mix- 
ture of equal parts of linseed oil and lime water is a good cover- 
ing. If these are not at hand, the part may be covered with a 
layer of ordinary white lead as mixed for use in painting 
dwellings. Flour sprinkled over until all the burned surface is 
entirely covered is a good method of treatment and may be 
carried out in almost any emergency. Lint, or thin layers of 
absorbent cotton, dipped in a solution of carbolic acid, one tea- 
spoonful, in one-third of a pint of sweet oil, may be laid directly 
upon the wound, so as to entirely cover it. No pressure should 
be permitted on the burned surface. In case the burn is upon 
the back or posterior surfaces of the extremities, the patient 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 327 

should be placed in a prone position, and be kept lying upon 
the face. When sloughing and suppuration commence, great 
care as to cleanliness should be observed, to prevent absorption 
of septic poison. The dressing should be changed frequently, 
especially when the temperature, as shown by the thermometer, 
which should be used at least three times a day, shows any 
considerable elevation. The entire surface of the wound should 
be thoroughly washed with an antiseptic solution, made by 
dissolving two tablets of No. 38 in a quart of water. The 
surface may be gently wiped off with absorbent cotton pled- 
gets dipped in this solution, and then the entire surface should 
be flushed with the solution. When granulation tissue has 
begun to form, No. 40 should be thickly spread upon pieces of 
muslin, and then placed upon the wound. This should then be 
covered with a piece of rubber tissue or a greased cloth. Proud 
flesh will often occur during the stage of granulation, and this 
must be destroyed by the application of lunar caustic, or the 
masses of proud flesh may be compressed by binding them down 
with strips of adhesive plaster. Where there has been exten- 
sive destruction of skin, so that the scar cannot form, the trans- 
plantation of skin should be practiced, but this procedure must 
be left in the hands of a physician. 

Burns from acids and alkalies require no different treatment 
from other burns, except to at once neutralize the acid or alkali 
which has caused the burn. 

Frostbite — The effect of prolonged and extreme cold upon the 
tissues is to cause the capillary blood vessels to close, followed by 
loss of sensation and death of the tissues by gangrene. 

Treatment — There should be an effort to gradually restore the 
circulation by friction in a low temperature. A part of the body 
benumbed by cold should never be suddenly exposed to a high 
temperature, but should be bathed and rubbed in snow or cold 
water, the temperature of which is slowly elevated. When gan- 
grene results, amputation is demanded after the line of demarka- 
tion between living and dead tissue has been established. 



328 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 



CARBUNCLE. 



This disease is characterized by an inflammation of a low order 
involving chiefly the skin and the connective tissue immediately 
beneath it. It is a disease of faulty nutrition. The cause is a 
stoppage of the circulation through the capillaries of a certain 
part, and this is followed by localized gangrene; the inflamed 
area breaks down in several places, giving discharge to parts of 
dead tissue and pus, usually small in quantity. Carbuncles are 
apt to occur in connection with certain general diseases which 
are attended with considerable disturbance of nutrition, such as 
diabetes mellitus, consumption, scrofula, etc. They are apt to 
occur in parts of the body subjected to more than ordinary irrita- 
tion, as the back of the neck, where the collar presses, or the 
region of the buttocks. 

Symptoms and Signs — Loss of appetite, headache, fever, vary- 
ing in intensity, which are followed by or accompanied with deep- 
seated pain in and about the point of inflammation. The skin 
at this point becomes tense, inflamed, throbbing and painful; the 
epidermis blisters in spots, and the dead tissues slough away. 
Often the gangrene will extend rapidly through the underlying 
fatty tissues before the skin breaks down. Blood poisoning may 
occur from absorption of septic matter from the dead tissue. The 
result of carbuncle depends upon the condition of the patient, the 
age, the location and the amount of tissue involved, and whether 
or no blood poisoning occurs. When it occurs in diabetes or any 
dangerous disease, it hastens the fatal result. When situated 
upon the face it is always a grave condition. This is in part due 
to the great pain which follows in the parts in which the trifacial 
nerve is distributed. When located upon the thorax, the pleura 
may be involved, and thus cause a grave complication. 

Treatment — This should at once be directed toward the im- 
provement of the patient's vitality by all possible means. Tonics 
and stimulants should be freely used and food in concentrated 
form should be given. The local application of heat will give 
some relief, but the chief consideration is to get free drainage of 
all fluid and septic material from the diseased area. This is 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 329 

obtained by making free incisions into the diseased tissues, usu- 
ally in the form of a cross or ^several lines of Hncision radiating 
from a common center. This can be done with satisfaction only 
under an anaesthetic, and should be performed by a physician. 
Usually consideralbe hemorrhage will follow the incision which 
may be controlled by packing the wound with antiseptic gauze. 
The after treatment should behot or warm antiseptic gauze dress- 
ings, applied loosely, and covered with a layer of absorbent cot- 
ton or oiled silk. Poultices, if used at all, should be antiseptic in 
their preparation. 



OBSTETRICS— CHILDBIRTH 



Very often it will be found impossible to get a physician soon 
enough to care for a case of childbirth, and it is therefore import- 
ant that the one who assumes the responsibility may know how 
to conduct a normal case of labor without the personal direction 
of a physician. Oftentimes the lives of both mother and child 
will depend upon the skill and promptness of the nurse. 

A woman who is carrying a child is said to be pregnant, and 
the usual duration of pregnancy is reckoned as about 280 days 
from the first day of the last menstruation. During this condition 
the uterus or womb becomes enlarged, rises up out of the pelvis 
and occupies the abdominal cavity. Other signs of this condi- 
tion are suppression of the menses or monthly flow, enlargement 
ot the breasts and presence of milk in them, and movements of 
the baby. Milk is sometimes lound in the breasts as early as 
the second month and this is pretty reliable evidence that preg- 
nancy exists. During pregnancy the breasts enlarge and are 
tender, the veins show plainer, and the pink color about the 
nipple becomes darker. The veins of the legs often enlarge and 
sometimes the feet swell. Trouble with the bladder is quite com- 
mon. Constipation, diarrhea, and other disturbances of diges- 
tion may be looked for. Nausea or morning sickness is common 
early in pregnancy. The appetite is capricious and there may 
be great hunger or foods which the patient is usually very fond 
of may be disliked. During the 'fourth month movements are 
usually felt by the mother and about this time the morning sick- 
ness usually stops. Many nervous symptoms may be present 
with pregnancy, such as headache, neuralgia, irritability, sleep- 
lessness, etc. The only certain sign of pregnancy, however, is 
the hearing of the heart beats of the infant when the ear is placed 
upon the abdomen of the mother. The heart of a child in the 
uterus beats very much faster than the pulse of the mother, so 
there is no danger in confounding the two. The child in the 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 331 

uterus is connected therewith by the placenta, more commonly 
known as afterbirth, and the cord, and through the cord the child 
receives nourishment from the mother. At the end of nine 
months the child is fully developed and is expelled from the 
uterus by the process known as labor. 

Miscarriage — If such an expulsion occurs before the seventh 
month it is known as an abortion or miscarriage. Should this 
occur at any time after the seventh month, it is called premature 
labor. The first indication of an approaching abortion is usually 
hemorrhage or bleeding from the uterus, generally accompanied 
by pain. The patient should at once be put to bed, as the threat- 
ened miscarriage may in some cases be avoided by rest and quiet. 
Should the miscarriage take place, care must be taken that the 
placenta or afterbirth is all expelled, as the retention of even a 
part of this might bring on dangerous bleeding or produce blood 
poisoning. The patient should be kept in bed after a miscar- 
riage and receive the same care she would have had, had she 
gone on to full term ; she must not be allowed to exert herself 
in any way for at least two weeks. It is important that this be- 
done in order that the organs may regain their ^proper places be 
fore the usual duties are taken up. Miscarriage is more com- 
mon in women who have borne children, than among those who 
are carrying the first child. After it has occurred a few times, 
it becomes very difficult to carry a child to full term. 

I<abor — Certain signs indicate the approach of labor. Dur- 
ing the last two weeks the abdomen grows smaller and the uterus 
sinks down between the hip bones. The pressure on the bladder 
and rectum is increased and these organs require more attention. 
Contractions may be felt and finally these are accompanied by 
pain. True labor pains come on at regular intervals, each one 
being a little harder than the one before and are felt in 
the back. False pains are chiefly in front and are short and 
irregular. They do not aid at all in the labor and many times 
result from indigestion or an overloaded bowel. When indi- 
cations show that labor is coming on, both the bowels and 
bladder should be emptied. As the true pains begin there is 
often a discharge of blood. This is sometimes called the ' 'show. ' ' 

There are three distinct stages to labor. The first is the stage 



332 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

when the mouth of the uterus dilates or opens and ends with the 
breaking of the ' ' bag of waters. ' ' The second stage is while the 
child passes from the uterus along the canal of the pelvis, and 
ends when the child is born. After the waters have escaped, 
the uterus contracts upon the child and forces it toward the out- 
let of the pelvis. Each pain is now accompanied by an impulse 
to bear down and this aids in delivering the child. During the 
third stage, the uterus contracts on the afterbirth and forces it out 
also. The uterus now contracts into a firm hard ball and some 
pains, known as after pains, are still felt. These gradually dis- 
appear. Very soon a discharge begins which lasts for three or 
four weeks. It requires six weeks for the organs to regain their 
normal size and condition. During the two weeks immediately 
following the birth of a child the mother very easily takes any 
disease and care should be taken that she be not exposed in any 
way. The average time of labor is from ten to eighteen hours. 

Preparation for I^abor — When it is determined that labor 
has actually begun, the patient and the room should be put in 
readiness. Unless there is a history of other labors being very 
rapid, the patient need not be put to bed at once; it is better, in 
fact, that she should stand or walk about, resting occasionally on 
a chair, but staying in an upright position, as this position favors 
the descent of the head into the pelvis. The bed should be pre- 
pared for her, and well protected. The under sheet should be 
put on tightly, as it may not be changed again for some days; 
over this place an oilcloth or rubber blanket and over this another 
sheet. An oilcloth or rubber blanket should always be used, as 
it is much easier to clean the bed, and after labor is over pull out 
the sheet just next the oilcloth, wipe off the oilcloth and place a 
clean sheet under the patient. She will then have a dry clean 
bed to lie on. The patient should have on a clean night dress 
and over it a loose wrapper, which can be slipped off when she 
is ready to go to bed. Brush the hair and braid it tightly. See 
that the bowels and bladder are empty and to make certain that 
the bowels are empty it is well to give an injection of warm water. 
Have at hand plenty ot clean towels, hot and cold water, some 
finely cracked ice if it is to be had, soap, scissors, strong cord, 
safety pins, napkins for mother and child, a binder or T bandage 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 333 

for the mother, a small blanket to receive the baby, a small bath 
tub or large wash bowl, plenty of soft rags, band and clothing 
for the child, two or three chamber vessels, a fountain syringe, 
ointment No. 41, carbolic acid, sweet oil or sweet cream, fluid 
extract of ergot and chloroform. 

The patient may be allowed plenty of food that is easy to 
digest, but no stimulants, as they increase the danger of hemor- 
rhage after the child is born. The first stage of labor lasts from 
three to six hours. An examination should be made early to 
see that everything is normal. Oil the examining finger well 
and introduce, between pains, until it reaches the open mouth 
of the uterus. The head can then usually be felt. Efforts at 
bearing down should not be encouraged during this stage, as it 
is only a waste of energy and exhausts the patient. No one 
should be allowed in the room but the necessary assistants. The 
patient may lie in bed in any position she chooses. Very little 
exposure is necessary; the clothing can be so arranged as to 
cover the patient, and yet be protected from discharges. After 
the waters have broken and several severe pains have passed, 
another examination should be made. Carefully feel around 
the head and see if anything except the head is ^presented. 
Sometimes the cord comes down ahead of the head, in such a 
case place the patient upon her elbows and knees and work the 
cord back, then be careful that the cord does not catch about the 
neck of the baby and strangle it. The pains now become more 
severe and the inclination to bear down is felt — at this time it 
is of benefit. During this stage, after the breaking of the bag of 
waters, the pains are severe and the back of the patient should 
be supported. She should also have something to pull upon if 
she so wishes. A sheet fastened to the foot of the bed is useful 
for this purpose. As the head approaches the external opening, 
it should be thoroughly plastered with No. 41 ; this will many 
times prevent the external parts from being torn; and as an addi- 
tional precaution, discourage the bearing down and remove any- 
thing that may have been used to jpull upon. As ^soon as the 
head begins to show, gently push it back when the pains occur, 
as a too rapid expulsion is sure to rupture the eternal parts. 
As soon as the head is born, look and see if the cord is about the 
neck ; if so draw it down gently and slip it over the head. If 



334 HEALTH AT HOME- 

you cannot do this or if the cord is two or three times about the 
neck, tie the cord firmly in two places and then cut it between 
the points that are tied. The cord can then be easily unwound. 
There is plenty of time to do this, as it is usually several minutes 
before the shoulders follow the head. It is seldom necessary to 
tie the cord in this manner. As soon as the child is born, lay 
it down at right angles to the mother and at such a distance that 
the cord is not tight. If breathing does not start at once, wipe 
out the nose and mouth with a soft cloth and sprinkle a little cold 
water over the babe. Do not cut the cord until the child has 
cried or until no pulse beat can be felt in the cord. Tie the cord 
about two inches from the child's abdomen and tie again about 
two inches from this tie, using broad strong cord or narrow 
tape. Then cut the cord between the two tied places. Examine 
the cord after an hour or so and if there is any bleeding, tie it 
again. In the opening chapter on Children's Diseases will be 
found full directions for the care of the baby. Should the above 
course not succeed in starting the breathing in the baby, dip the 
baby in cold water and then in hot. This must be done quickly 
and repeatedly. Rubbing the surface of the body with brandy 
or whiskey is sometimes of benefit. Immediately after the child 
has been born, an assistant should place one hand on the abdo- 
men of the mother and hold it firmly over the uterus until the 
afterbirth has been expelled and contraction of the uterus has 
taken place. The afterbirth may be expelled immediately after 
the birth ot the child or after an interval of half an hour or more. 
Immediately after the child has been born give to the mother 
one-half teaspoonful of fluid extract of ergot. This will in many 
cases prevent a serious hemorrhage. As soon as the afterbirth 
has come away carefully examine it to see if it is entire. If 
any portion is missing it must be looked out for until it has 
passed and if it does not pass during the first day a physician 
should be called. The parts may now be bathed with warm water, 
all soiled clothing and cloths removed, a clean napkin placed 
over the part and the T bandage put in place. The part which 
passes around the abdomen should be drawn snug and fastened 
while the portion which holds the napkin in place need not 
be so tight. As soon as the mother has been made clean and 
comfortable, she should be allowed to rest and sleep if she will. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 335 

All persons with the exception of one attendant should be sent 
from the room and no talking should be allowed. While the 
mother rests the child may be cared for as instructed in the chap- 
ter on Care of Young Children. After the mother has rested for 
a few hours, and the child has been washed and dressed, it is 
well to allow the child to nurse. There will not be an abund- 
ance of milk until the third day, but the amount present will be 
quite sufficient for the needs of the child. If the child cannot 
empty the breasts, the milk should be drawn off by a breast pump. 
Never allow a child to nurse from one breast alone, but alternate 
in the use of the breasts. If the nipples are tender, bathe them 
daily in alcohol and cleanse carefully before allowing the child 
to nurse. If the child, for any reason, is not to nurse, the secre- 
tion of the milk must be checked. This is usually done by band- 
aging the breasts closely, supporting them by pads of cotton on 
each side, so that the pressure will be applied evenly. When it 
is desired to stop the secretion of milk the bowels must kept open 
and as little fluid as possible taken into the stomach. 

The mother should be kept in bed for ten days or two weeks 
after the birth of a child and should not be allowed to sit up for 
any purpose ; a bed pan may be used to attend to the calls of the 
bowels or bladder. It is of the greatest importance that she and 
everything about her be kept clean. She should have a care- 
fully given sponge bath all over each day, and the private parts 
should be washed two or three times each day. If the discharge 
has a bad odor, a vaginal douche should be given morning and 
night. Use a fountain syringe full of warm water first, and then 
dissolve six tablets of No. 3 in a quart of warm water and douche 
with this. Have plenty of fresh air but do not chill the patient. 
The diet should be fluid for the first day or two and light for a 
week ; after that time allow the patient to eat whatever she pleases. 

Hemorrhage — Bleeding after delivery is known as post- 
partum hemorrhage or secondary hemorrhage. It sometimes fol- 
lows a perfectly natural labor and may be so severe as to endan- 
ger life. There is little fear of bleeding so long as the uterus is 
firmly contracted. If it is felt to be swelling, it is a sign of dan- 
ger, and every effort must be made to cause the uterus to con- 
tract; contraction will make the vessels smaller and prevent the 



336 HEALTH AT HOME. 

bleeding. Swelling of the uterus, pale skin, cold hands and feet, 
feeble pulse and slow feeble breathing are signs which indicate 
bleeding and must be watched for. If hemorrhage occurs, lower 
the head, raise the hips, apply pressure with the hands upon the 
upper end of the uterus, place ice or cold cloths all about the 
uterus and external parts, inject water as hot as can be borne 
into the vagina and give one teaspoonful of fluid extract of ergot. 
If the bleediing should come with a gush, do not stop to do any 
of these things, but at once roll up the sleeve on one arm and 
place the hand and arm in water as hot as can be borne for a 
second, then with the other hand upon the abdomen of the mother, 
insert the hand into the vagina and go on rapidly until the 
hand is in the uterus then double up the fist and rub the uterus 
roughly with the knuckles and keep the hand in the uterus until 
it thoroughly contracts. If you do not wish to employ this 
method, break some ice up into very small pieces and push these 
up into the uterus. The first method is to be preferred as it is 
quicker and in a case of this sort speed is everything. 

Childbed Fever — Another peculiar danger to which a mother 
is liable at the time of childbirth is a form of blood poisoning 
known as puerperal fever, or childbed fever. When this occurs, 
it usually does so within three or four days after labor. The 
disease is caused in two ways, either by the absorption of decom- 
posing matter produced by the woman herself, or from infection 
brought to her by means of dirty hands, cloths, instruments, etc. 
The greatest care should be taken that everything about a lying- 
in woman be perfectly clean and free from infection of any and 
all sorts. The disease begins by chills, followed by high fever; 
the pulse is rapid, the countenance sunken and anxious; there is 
a sickly odor to the breath ; and diarrhea and vomiting are us u- 
aliy present; the^secretion of milk ceases and the discharge from 
the parts either stops or is changed. The disease is dangerous 
to life and should be treated by a physician. 

During the pains of labor, the pain may be somewhat relieved 
by allowing the patient to have a few breaths of chloroform. 
This is best given by placing a handkerchief in an ordinary tum- 
bler and allowing a few drops of chloroform to fall upon the hand- 
kerchief. The patient can then place the tumbler over the 



HEALTH AT HOMK. 337 

nostrils and breath the chloroform. If the patient can be allowed 
to hold the tumbler herself it will be impossible for her to get an 
overdose, as the moment the patient begins to loose conscious- 
ness the hand and tumbler will fall away from the face. The 
patient will soon reach for the tumbler. A few more drops of 
chloroform may be placed on the handkerchief and the patient 
allowed to inhale again. This may be done an endless number 
of times without danger to the patient. 



TREATMENT OF POISONING 



Castile soap dissolved in four times its bulk of hot water and 
drunk by the cupful is one of the the best remedies in many 
cases, especially in poisoning by metals or acids. It should never 
be used when the poison is an alkali. The white of egg dis- 
solved in water is useful in poisoning by metals. Vinegar is use- 
ful in cases of poisoning by alkalies. Strong black coffee is used 
in cases of poisoning by opium, morphine, chloral and atropine. 
Camphor is the principal remedy to be used for all vegetable poi- 
sons. Milk, oil and mucilage are used for all acids and alkalies 
which destroy tissue. Charcoal is a remedy for arsenic, corro- 
sive sublimate and poisons of this sort. The remedies which are 
used to produce vomiting in a patient who has been poisoned are 
zinc sulphate, the dose of which is twenty grains, and for child- 
ren tartar emetic is the best remedy, one-half grain usually being 
a sufficiently large dose. 

In poisoning from acids, give chalk or magnesia, plaster from 
the wall mixed with water, slaked lime mixed with water; give 
any of these things and at the same time give milk and oil or 
the white of an egg. 

Carbolic Acid — In poisoning by carbolic acid the membrane 
lining the mouth and throat will be very white and will look 
burned or seared; there will be dizziness and headache; the 
pupils will be very small, vomiting will be present; the pulse is 
slow at first, then rapid ; the urine has a dark olive green color. 

Treatment — Empty the stomach by means of a stomach pump, 
if one can be obtained very soon, give slacked lime and water 
and a good remedy is sulphate of magesnium or sulphate of 
sodium given in one ounce doses. 

Sulphuric Acid — In poisoning by this acid the mucous mem- 
brane of the mouth and throat will be burned quite deeply. 
Death occurs very soon and with convulsions, in severe cases. 
The mouth and throat are whitened, swallowing is very painful 



HEALTH AT HOME. 339 

and there is much distressing choking and retching. The vom- 
ited matter will contain black lumps. The saliva will run freely. 
The abdomen is usually distended and very tender when pressed 
upon. The pulse is small and rapid. In mild cases the recovery 
is very slow ; severe cases terminate fatally. 

Treatment — Give chalk, plaster, slacked lime, milk, white of 
egg, etc. Should the patient not die, the above treatment may 
be followed by giving small bits of ice ; the mouth should be gar- 
gled by a solution made by dossolving two tablets No. 3 in a cup 
half full of warm water. The patient should live entirely upon 
milk, eggs and soup for a long time. 

Hydrochloric and Nitric Acids — The symptoms are sim- 
ilar to those of sulphuric acid poisoning. Nitric acid sometimes 
stains the parts touched yellowish, and the vomit may be yellow- 
ish. 

Treatment — The treatment is the same as for sulphuric acid. 

Oxalic Acid — This acid acts much as the acids mentioned 
above excepting that the burning from oxalic acid is less severe 
andcertain nervous symptoms are noticed; the finger tips be- 
come numb ; convulsion occurs and paralysis may occur. 

Treatment — Give lime water and finely powdered egg shells. 

Ammonia — The fumes of ammonia affect the air passages; 
the solution affects the mouth, throat and stomach. When 
ammonia comes in contact with the mucous membrane of the 
mouth, throat or in fact any mucous membrane, an intense 
inflammation is produced. In the mouth this inflammation 
causes an increase in the flow of saliva; in the stomach it pro- 
duces vomiting and if a piece of litmus paper be placed in this 
vomited matter it will remain blue, whereas the normal secretion 
from the stomach causes litmus paper to turn red. Ammonia 
poisoning also produces diarrhea, cough, difficult breathing, and 
in severe cases rapid pulse, great weakness, pain, dizziness and 
convulsions. 

Treatment — Empty the stomach by the use of the stomach 
pump ; if one is not to be had, give to child one tablet No. 18 
every ten minutes until vomiting is produced ; to an adult give 
one tablet No. 32 every ten minutes untiLthe same effect is pro- 



340 HKAI/TH AT HOME. 

duced. After free vomiting has been produced, give the juice 
of a lemon ; one dose of this will be sufficient. Give bits of ice 
quite often and give one tablet No. 15 every hour. 

Caustic Soda — Caustic Potash — Treat cases of poisoning 
from these substances in exactly the same manner that cases 
poisoned with ammonia are treated. 

Saltpeter — When this is taken in an amount sufficient to 
produce poisoning, vomiting and diarrhea are the first signs and 
very soon severe pains in the abdomen follow with great weak- 
ness, cold skin and rapid but very tiny pulse. 

Treatment — Give one tablet No. 15 every hour to a child and 
one tablet No. 25 every hour to an adult. Discontinue the medi- 
cine after six doses have been given. Also give one-fourth to 
one-half teaspoonful spirits of camphor every two hours. Allow 
the patient to hold small bits of ice in the mouth as much as he 
desires. 

Iodine — Iodine poisoning is usually produced by injecting the 
tincture of iodine into the body as in the case of a tumor, or by 
the long continued use of some drug which contains iodine, as 
the iodide of potash. The symptoms of iodine poisoning are, in 
the case of poisoning by an injection of the tincture, small rapid 
pulse, blue skin, vomiting, difficult breathing. The urine does 
not flow freely and later the skin becomes very red, the throat 
is sore, the nose "runs," albumen may be found in the urine, 
there is severe headache, especially in front, the eyes are red and 
inflamed and eruptions occur on the skin. In poisoning from 
the long continued use of a drug containing iodine, there is a 
free discharge from the nose, the eyes are red and inflamed, the 
throat is sore, the digestive system is deranged ; there is head- 
ache, dizziness, and a number of mild nervous symptoms. 

Treatment — When the poisoning has just occurred, give the 
white of an egg and ^whiskey, brandy or spirits of camphor. 
Give the stimulants in small doses and repeat them often. 

I^ead — Lead poisoning is often met with and acute cases pro- 
duce severe symptoms in the stomach and intestines ; the colic is 
very severe. 

Treatment — In acute lead poisoning give one tablet No. 4 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 341 

every two hours and give the white of an egg in milk every 
hour. If the case comes under observation soon after the poison 
is taken, as the taking of white lead or drinking paint, give to a 
child one tablet No. 18 every ten minutes until free vomiting is 
produced and give to an adult one tablet No. 32 every ten minutes 
until the same result is produced. Chronic lead poisoning is seen 
in type-setters, type-founders, painters, potters, and any class of 
persons whose work keeps them near lead and breathing lead 
dust most of the time. Some of the symptoms in chronic poison- 
ing are violent colicky pains radiating from the navel ; the bowels 
are constipated ; the abdomen is sunken and hard ; there is vomit- 
ing; the pulse is slow and hard; and occasionally the brain is 
affected. 

Treatment — Apply cloths wrung out of hot water over the seat 
of pain and give one tablet No. 25 every three hours ; give fre- 
quent warm baths and keep the bowels well open by the use of 
No. 4. 

Copper — Blue Vitrol — Verdigris — In poisoning from any 
of these there will be a copper taste in the mouth, vomiting of 
greenish matter, severe colic, bloody stools with much pain about 
the rectum, headache, dizziness, loss of feeling, and there may 
be paralysis or delirium. 

Treatment — If vomiting has not already taken place, produce 
it by giving No. 18 to children and No. 32 to adults. Give as 
directed under lead poisoning. Having produced free vomiting, 
give the white of an egg in milk every hour and give one tablet 
No. 4 every three hours. 

Mercury — Corrosive Sublimate — The mucous membrane 
of the mouth, throat, gullet, stomach and intestines is seared or 
burned quite deeply ; there is a taste of metal in the mouth ; vom- 
iting is present; there is diarrhea with much pain about the 
anus. Poisoning from corrosive sublimate usually ends in death 
very soon. A mild form of mercury poisoning is that known as 
salivation and usually occurs from an overdose of calomel. 

Treatment — Give the white of an egg in milk every hour; give 
one tablet No. 15 every two hours; and give dialyzed iron at fre- 
quent intervals. 



342 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

Phosphorus — The most common form of phosphorus poison- 
ing is from eating matches. The symptoms are violent pain in 
the stomach, vomiting — the vomited matter smells of phosphorus. 
These symptoms will last an hour or two and then will follow two 
or there days of comparative comfort. Then very grave symp- 
toms appear : the skin and whites of the eyes become yellow ; there 
is severe pain about the liver and this extends over the entire 
abdomen ; the liver is somewhat enlarged ; there is some fever ; the 
pulse is feeble and rapid; sometimes there is bleeding from the 
stomach ; nose bleed is common ; the mind remains clear, the urine 
contains albumen. Death usually occurs at the end of one or 
two weeks although in mild cases recovery may occur. 

Treatment — In cases in which the poison has just been taken, 
wash out the stomach with the stomach tube, or if this is not to 
be had, give one tablet No. 32 every ten minutes until vo miting 
is produced. Give one tablet No. 4 every three hours. Give 
thirty drops of the oil of turpentine in mucilage or milk — give 
but one dose of this remedy. 

Arsenic — Arsenic poisoning occurs from taking arsenic, from 
green wall paper, and from Scheele's green. The symptoms of 
arsenic poisoning are violent vomiting, watery stools, severe 
pain in the abdomen, headache, dizziness, faintness, twitching 
of the muscles, a weak heart; the skin is blue and the patient 
very weak. Severe cases end in death in from one to two days. 

Treatment — Empty the stomach with a stomach tube or by 
giving one tablet No. 32 every ten minutes until vomiting is pro- 
duced. Give two tablespoonfuls of dialyzed iron every thirty 
minutes. Give one tablet No. 4 every hour. 

Illuminating Gas — Coal Stove Gas — Poisoning from this 
source is usually due to long continued breathing of gas. This 
usually takes place at night when the gas enters the sleeping apart- 
ment by means of a leaky stove or an open gas jet. The symptoms 
are, at first dizziness, headache, throbbing in the temples, ringing 
in the ears and floating spots before the eyes. The patient gradually 
becomes unconscious. The skin is blue and the breathing irreg- 
ular ; the temperature is lower than normal. 

Treatment — At once give the patient plenty of fresh air, per- 
form artificial respiration in the manner described in the chapter 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 343 

on Drowning on p. 346 and give small doses of brandy or whiskey. 

Belladonna — Atropine — Nightshade — One of the most 
marked symptoms in belladonna poisoning is the dryness of the 
throat. Patients poisoned with any of the above always complain 
of an excessively dry mouth and throat and of great thirst. 
There is headache and dizziness, the pupils are widely opened, 
the skin has a peculiar red rash which resembles that of scarlet 
fever, the mind is disturbed and peculiar fancies appear to the 
patient. 

Treatment — The remedies used to counteract the effects of bel- 
ladonna are poisons and it is best to have a physician give them. 
The following is the treatment used : Give to an adult one- 
fourth grain of morphine and repeat the dose in four hours. 

Nicotine — Tobacco Poisoning — This form of poisoning 
occurs sometimes from the excessive use of tobacco. The symp- 
toms are slow small pulse, a sense of oppression, some vomiting, 
irregular action of the heart and attacks of pain in the heart, 
loss of sleep, disturbances in digestion and loss of vision. 

Treatment — Give up the use of tobacco entirely and take one 
tablet No. 17 three times a day after meals. Continue the use 
of this for at least a month. 

Strychnine — The symptoms of strychnine poisoning are 
violent convulsions, lockjaw, spasm in which the head is thrown 
back and the head and feet nearly drawn together; the pulse is 
small and rapid; the convulsions occur with intervals of rest 
between them; the intellect is usually perfectly clear and recov- 
ery takes place only in the mildest cases. 

Treatment — Empty the stomach by the use of the stomach 
pump or by giving to a child one tablet No. 18 every ten minutes 
and to an adult one tablet No. 32 every ten minutes. Stop the 
use of the remedies as soon as vomiting begins. Then give one 
tablet No. 7 every hour until twelve doses have been given and 
then one tablet every three hours. Also give one tablet No. 25 
every two hours. 

Morphine — Opium — Poisoning from morphine or opium 
begins with fatigue, headache, drowsiness, darkening of the vis- 
ion, nausea and vomiting, although many times the vomiting is 



344 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

absent. Then the patient slowly looses consciousness and the 
breathing becomes irregular and noisy, the muscles completely 
relax, the pupils of the eyes are very small, the pulse is rapid 
and small. 

Treatment — Empty the stomach by giving to a child one tablet 
No. 18 every ten minutes and to an adult one tablet No. 32 every 
ten minutes until vomiting is produced. Give large quantities 
of strong black coffee; give cold baths and slap the patient's body 
smartly with a wet towel ; give a teaspoonf ul of spirits of cam- 
phor every two hours. Do not allow the patient to go to sleep 
and to prevent this it is often necessary to keep the patient walk- 
ing all of the time with an attendant on either side slapping the 
body with a wet towel. 

Poisonous Mushrooms — A number of mushrooms are poi- 
sonous and cases of poisoning from this source are quite common. 
The symptoms of mushroom poisoning are nausea, vomiting, 
diarrhea, headache, general sick feeling and the most characteris- 
tic, the presence of blood in the urine. In severe cases death 
occurs and is preceded by convulsions. Other symptoms occur 
and the treatment of such cases is very unsatisfactory, hence the 
best advice that can be given is, do not eat mushrooms unless 
they are purchased from a hot house. 

Treatment — Empty the stomach in the manner already de- 
scribed in this chapter. Give one tablet No. 16 every two hours 
until the bowels move very freely. Give one teaspoonful of 
whiskey or brandy every hour. 

Tainted Sausages — Poisoning from this source sometimes 
occurs as a result of eating partially decayed sausages. The symp- 
toms are pain in the stomach, nausea, vomiting, colic and diarrhea. 
There is also marked feebleness, difficult breathing, dizziness, 
headache, drowsiness, some disturbance of vision and often the 
eyelids grow very thick and heavy. The mouth is dry, the pulse 
feeble. The cases are usually prolonged but rarely prove fatal. 

Treatment — Empty the stomach by giving No. 18 every ten 
minutes to a child, and No. 32 every ten minutes to an adult until 
vomiting is produced. Give two tablets of No. 9 every half hour 
and give one-half teaspoonful of brandy or whiskey every half 
hour. 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 345 

Tainted Meat — The special poison in tainted meat is not yet 
fully known. The usual symptoms are vomiting and diarrhea 
and the case may closely resemble cholera. In most cases wake- 
fulness, delirium and headache occur; often there is high fever 
and the skin may be covered with red spots ; the pulse is small 
and a little faster than normal and there is a sense of oppression 
about the lungs. 

Treatment — Empty the stomach as directed under Tainted 
Sausages and give two tablets No. 9 every hour ; give one-half 
teaspoonful whiskey or brandy every half hour and give the 
patient a bath in lukewarm water every three hours. 

Fish, Mussels, Cheese and Milk — Poisoning from these 
substances occur at times. The symptoms are much the same as 
in the preceding section and the treatment should be carried out 
in the same manner. 

Poison Ivy — The effects of poison ivy are somewhat familiar 
to everyone. Some persons are so susceptible to the poison 
that if they go anywhere near the plant they will be poi- 
soned. Others can even rub the leaves on the bare skin without 
any effect being noticed. The action ot the plant is that of an 
irritant to the skin, causing redness and swelling of the parts 
affected, with a tiny eruption and intolerable itching. The trouble 
will spread rapidly over the surface of the body, and will even 
extend to the cavities and affect the mucous membranes lining 
them, causing redness and swelling and a feeling of thirst in the 
mouth and throat, cough, nausea and vomiting, dizziness, etc. 
The effects of this poison usually last for ten or fifteen days, after 
which time the skin will scale off. 

Treatment — One of the drugs used for the treatment of poison- 
ing by this plant is fluid extract of Grindelia Robusta. Rub the 
affected parts thoroughly every three hours, but do not use force; 
be careful not to get any of the remedy in the mouth. 

Other remedies which are used to apply upon the "parts where 
the poison has taken effect are a solution of corrosive sublimate, 
lime-water, linseed oil and alum curd. The best remedy is a com- 
pound which does not keep at all well, and for this reason it is 
not put in the Cabinet, but a description of it will be found in 
the Appendix. 



TREATMENT OF 
CASES OF DROWNING 



Remove the person from trie water as quickly and as gently as 
possible ; turn the face downward for a moment, and push the 
tongue down in order that water, mucus, etc. , may be removed 
from immediately over the windpipe. Give the patient plenty 
of fresh air ; fully expose the neck and chest to the breeze unless 
the weather should be very severe. Next, the patient lying upon 
the face, place one forearm under the forehead, and raise the 
body up so that the water may run freely from the mouth. Place 
the patient upon one side and start the breathing again by slap- 
ping the body with a cold cloth or by placing ammonia or alco- 
hol under the nostrils. 

Very often the above measures will fail to accomplish the desired 
result and in such a case carry the body to the nearest convenient 
spot, remove the clothing and dry the body carefully; (if possible 
place it on a warm bed) and with the head and shoulders slightly 
raised, at once proceed according to the following instructions: 
Pull the tongue forward, to prevent obstruction to the entrance 
of the air into the windpipe; produce expansion of the chest 
by placing the arms of the patient close to his side and then draw 
them out and up until they almost meet over the head. Then 
bring the arms down to the sides again until the elbows meet 
over the pit of the stomach. This produces contraction of the 
chest. This imitation of the act of respiration should be kept up 
at the rate of fifteen to sixteen per minute. This method of 
treating cases of drowning is known as Silvester's method. The 
efforts to bring the patient to consciousness should be continued 
for several hours, if necessary, and constant effort must be made 
to keep up the temperature of the body by rubbing the body with 
warm flannels, with alcohol, and with the bare hand. Always rub 
up, that is, toward the heart and apply hot water bottles, hot 
bricks, etc. , to the stomach, the arm pits, the feet and legs and 



HKAI/TH AT HOMK. 347 

in fact to as many parts of the body as possible. As soon as the 
patient begins to revive somewhat, carefully administer small 
amounts of stimulants, hot soup, beef juice, etc. Harley says : 
' ' If the eyes are open, the pupils dilated, the white of the eye 
insensible to pain, the face pale, the skin cold, frothy mucus 
around the nose and mouth, no attempt at breathing, and the 
heart's action not to be heard when the ear is applied to the chest, 
the case is hopeless. ' ' 

Signs of Death — Tie a string firmly about the finger. If 
the end of the finger becomes swollen and red, life is still present. 

Insert a bright needle into the flesh. If it tarnishes in the 
course of half an hour, life is still present. 

Moisten the eye with atropine. If life is present the pupil 
will dilate. 

Hold the fingers closely side by side, and look through them 
at a bright light as at the sun. During life the color is pink ; 
after death it is a dead white. 

Putrefaction is an absolute sign of death. Better delay for it 
than run any risk of burying alive. 



THE EYE AND ITS DISEASES 



Anatomy and Physiology — The eye as an organ of vision 
consists of the globe, or eyeball, the protecting membrane and 
structuies around it, the muscles which move it, and the optic 
nerve which connects the eyeball with the nerve centers in the 
brain. 

The Byeball — The eyeball is globe-shaped, the outer tunic 
or covering being made up of the sclerotic, or white membrane, 
and the cornea, or clear membrane, which is situated on the front 
of the eye, and is naturally a transparent substance. In many 
diseases, and in most cases of injury to the cornea, it loses more 
or less of its transparency. The sclerotic is a dense, tough, 
inelastic membrane, and is rarely affected by disease. Lying 
back of the cornea is a membrane, varying in color in different 
eyes, called the iris. This membrane is constructed of muscu- 
lar tissue, freely supplied with blood vessels and nerves, and has 
an opening in the center, called the pupil. This opening varies 
in size under different conditions and degrees of light falling 
upon the eye. Still further back in the eyeball, just behind the 
pupil, is the crystalline lens, which performs the focusing of the 
rays of light in such a manner that an image of the object looked 
at is formed upon the retina at the extreme posterior portion of 
the eye. The retina is formed by the fibers of the optic nerve, 
which, where it enters the eye, is spread out in the form of a thin, 
delicate membrane lining the entire posterior, internal surface of 
the globe. The eye, as an optical instrument may well be com- 
pared with the photographic camera. Thus, in the eye, we have 
the interior of the eye lined by the pigment or choroid coat, 
corresponding to the interior or box of the camera, to which light 
can gain admission only through the diaphragm in the front 
portion ; this portion in turn is represented in the eye by the 
pupil, which has the power of automatically regulating the amount 
of light which enters the eye. In both the eye and the camera 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 349 

there is a focusing lens, and in both a mechanism for receiving 
and recording the impressions produced by the image formed. 
In the camera, this function is produced by the sensitized plate 
which receives and fixes permanently the impression of the image ; 
in the eye the same function is performed by the retina, which 
receives the impression of the image focused upon it, but instead 
of retaining it permanently, transmits it as a sensation to the pro- 
per nerve cells in the brain for recognition and retention. Here 
the analogy between eye and camera ceases. In the manner of 
regulating the focus there is a marked difference in the two 
instruments. In the camera the focusing is accomplished by 
altering the distance between the focusing lens and the sensitized 
plate to accommodate for variations in distance between the 
object and the camera; but in the eye such a process is mani- 
festly impossible, and the same result is brought about by a varia- 
tion in the curvature of the lens itself, thus altering its refracting 
power. This process is called accommodation, and is accom- 
plished by the action of a small specially arranged muscle within 
the eye. The arrangement of this muscle is such that when it is 
contracted the refracting power of the lens is increased, and when 
the muscle is allowed to relax the power of the lens is diminished. 
Thus it may readily be seen that the muscle of accommodation 
in the eye has a vast amount of work to perform, and in fact no 
muscles in the body except the muscles of the heart and respira- 
tion, are more constantly in action than the focusing muscle of 
the eye. With this explanation, it may be seen how any depart- 
ure from the normal construction of the eye will have its effect 
upon the ease with which this muscle will perform its work. 
These variations in construction are called, errors of refraction, 
and may be divided into there general classes: First, hypero- 
pia or far-sight; second, myopia or near-sight; third, astigmatism. 
These errors are all produced by alterations in some portion of 
the coverings of the eyeball which change its contour. 

Hyperopia — Far-sightedness — In this condition the eye- 
ball is shortened from before backward, so that the rays of light 
entering the eye reach the retina before coming to a focus. This 
condition calls for a greater amount of effort than normal on the part 
of the focusing muscle, hence the muscle sooner tires, and if the 



350 HEALTH AT HOMK. 

effort of seeing is persisted in, especially if the eye be used for 
prolonged near work, the focusing muscle becomes irritable and 
even exhausted. There is a sensation of effort in looking; the 
eyes blur, and smart; pain is experienced in and around the eye, 
and headache follows, usually occurring over the eye or in the 
temples, although it may be located an}' where about the head or 
neck ; this is called a reflex headache. A large proportion of 
chronic, persistent headaches are the result of eye strain, and in 
any case where headache is of a recurrent character, and where 
the cause is not apparent, the patient should have the eyes care- 
fully examined by a competent oculist, and if found necessary, 
correcting glasses should be worn. 

Myopia— Near-sightedness — This condition is exactly 
the opposite of far-sight, in that the eyeball is too long from before 
backward, and the distance between the lens and the retina is 
too great, so that the rays of light meet at their focus before com- 
ing to the retina, and crossing each other, fall upon the retina 
in circles of diffusion, producing blurred images. This condi- 
tion is an evidence of a weakened state of the coverings of the 
eye, and generally indicates a diseased condition. Near-sighted- 
ness may be stationary in degree but the tendency is toward an 
increase in amount. This tendency is the result of the constant 
pressure of the fluids of the eye exerting its force outwardly upon 
the coats of the eyeball ; and since the posterior portion of the 
coats about the entrance of the optic nerve is the weakest, the 
effect is to produce a bulging of the eyeball backward in that loca- 
tion. Headache and reflex pains are not common with near-sight- 
edness, but all cases should, if possible, be corrected early, as often 
the tendency to increase in amount may be checked by wearing 
proper correcting glasses. Whenever a child does not see objects 
distinctly at a distance of twenty feet, and especially if when 
reading it holds the book very close to the eyes, the oculist should 
be called upon to make the proper examination and if necessary 
prescribe correcting glasses. 

Astigmatism — This form of refraction is confined almost 
exclusively to the cornea, and consists of a difference in the 
degree of curvature of different parts of the cornea. That meri- 
dian of the cornea which has the greatest degree of curvature, 



HEALTH AT HOME. 351 

as a rule, lies at right angles to the meridian which has the least 
degree of curvature. These meridians may lie in any angle, so 
long as they maintain their relative position to each other. A 
good example of an astigmatic surface is the bowl of a spoon ; 
in it is a long curve, lying in the direction of the length of the 
spoon, while the short curve lies across the spoon at right angles 
to its length. The effect of an astigmatic curve is to distort the 
image formed, as can be readily demonstrated by looking at one's 
reflection in a highly polished spoon. This form of error of 
refraction is very productive of eye strain and nervous irritability, 
and is one of the most prolific causes of headache. A skillful 
oculist can, however, fully correct the defect and give complete 
relief by properly adjusted lenses. 

Conjunctiva — This is a term used to designate the mucous 
membrane which lines the inner surface of the eyelids and fold- 
ing back from the lids upon the eyeball covers its anterior half. 
The membrane is divided into three parts, that lining the lids, 
called the palpebral portion ; that covering the eyeball, called the 
ocular portion ; and that portion lying between the two just named 
called the transitional fold. This membrane is very freely sup- 
plied with glands, blood vessels and nerves, and because of its 
exposed condition is very prone to disease. These diseases may 
be divided into non-suppurative, and suppurative. 

Non-Suppurative Diseases of Conjunctiva— These 

diseases are very numerous but differ from each other chiefly in 
degree rather than in character. In the simpler forms, the mem- 
brane is reddened ; there is an increase in the flow of tears, and 
a sensation of burning or smarting about the eyes, feeling as 
though a foreign body were present, or the eye had sand in it. 
These symptoms either disappear in a few days or pass into more 
severe forms, in which the existing symptoms are intensified, and 
in addition mucus is formed and there is a swelling of the mem- 
brane^as a whole, but particularly in the glandular structures, which 
are enlarged until they stand out above the surrounding struct- 
ures. The vision is not usually disturbed but the eyes are weak 
and any attempt to use them for close work aggravates the symp- 
toms. This form of trouble is called follicular conjunctivitis or 
"pink eye" and usually follows exposure to irritating substances, 
dust or cold. 



352 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

Treatme?it — Avoid use of the eyes for close work; bathe them 
frequently in hot water, for five minutes at a time. Dissolve two 
tablets No. 1 in one tablespoonf ul of clean water, and drop two or 
three drops into the eyes every hour. This treatment will generally 
relieve the inflammation in a few days. If, after the inflamma- 
tion has disappeared, the surface of the lids still appears rough, 
they may be lightly touched with a bit of alum which has been 
whittled to a smooth surface; after touching with the alum the 
surfaces of the lids should be washed off with warm water. 

Trachoma — Granulated I/ids — This is a disease of the 
mucous membrane lining the lids, and is caused by a specific 
germ which finds lodgment in the membrane. It is a very con- 
tagious disease, and any secretion or discharge from an eye suffer- 
ing fom granulated lids introduced into a well eye sets up the 
same disease. The disease is often epidemic and very frequently 
it will be transferred from one member of a family to all the others. 
In military camps or barracks, in boarding schools or in any 
locality where large numbers of people are closely associated 
together the disease is likely to spread very rapidly. Such being 
the case, it is essential that a person suffering from granulated 
lids should be provided with a separate wash basin and towel, 
and the greatest care taken to avoid spreading the contagion to 
unaffected eyes. The disease, however, is contagious only by 
direct transference of the discharge from one eye to another. 

Symptoms a?id Signs — Granulated lids first begin as a simple 
irritiation. The eyes feel hot and the tears flow freely. Soon 
the eyes feel as though full of sand ; they become red and a con- 
siderable swelling of the lids ensues. The inflammation rapidly 
increases and the discharge becomes more profuse and contains 
considerable mucus ; this soon changes to a muco-purulent char- 
acter. When the mucus membrane is examined, it is found to 
be much swollen and thickened, and apparently covered with 
small lumps often arranged in ridges and folds. The eyeball 
soon becomes affected by the constant rubbing over its surface of 
the roughened mucous membrane of the lids, and the delicate 
outer covering of the cornea or clear part is rubbed off in spots 
causing superficial ulceration. These ulcerated portions fre- 
quently become infected by the poisonous discharges and exten- 



HEALTH AT HOME. 353 

sive destruction of corneal tissue follows, so that the eyesight is 
permanently damaged by the resulting scars or the eye may 
even be lost from perforation of the ulcer through the cornea fol- 
lowed by escape of more or less of the contents of the eyeball. 
The active stage of the inflammation usually lasts from two to 
six weeks and is then followed by the stage of contraction in 
which the swelling disappears and leaves extensive scars in the 
mucous membrane. This scar tissue continues to contract and 
produces a deformity of the lid known as entropion, in which 
the free margin of the lid is drawn in towards the eyeball so that 
the eyelashes rub against the cornea causing great irritation and 
much discomfort. This is the condition commonly known as 
"wild hairs," and is curable only by a properly performed sur- 
gical operation. When this operation is performed by a skillful 
surgeon the results are highly satisfactory, and it should always 
be performed providing a skillful operator can be secured. 

Treatment — Little of curative value can be done by home treat- 
ment in this condition and a skillful oculist should at once be 
consulted and the case placed in his hands. Until such skilled 
attendance can be obtained, the eyes should be kept as clean as 
possible and frequent applications of hot water made. The eyes 
should be thoroughly washed out with water that has been boiled 
and then three or four drops of a solution made by dissolving 
four tablets No. 1 in two tablespoonfuls of boiled rain water, 
should be dropped into the eyes. Do this every half hour. Be 
careful to have separate towels, wash basin and handkerchiefs for 
the patient and to take every possible precaution to prevent the 
spread of contagion. The disease is essentially chronic in its nature 
and requires a long period of careful and persistent treatment for 
its cure. If proper treatment is begun early and continued the 
results are as a rule very satisfactory and but little if any perma- 
nent damage to the eyes should result. 

Purulent Inflammation of the Byes — In this inflammation 
the destructive symptom is the formation of true pus. It is a 
disease which is exceedingly destructive to the tissues of the eye 
and but few eyes which suffer from this disease escape without 
more or less permanent damage. The disease is due to a specific 
pus germ and hence is highly contagious, and the same remarks 



354 HEALTH AT HOME. 

given in connection with granulation of the lids, as regards care 
in preventing the spread of contagion, apply with added emphasis 
to this disease. Generally but one eye is infected at first and 
wherever posssible the eye first infected should be kept carefully 
cleansed and especial care taken to prevent any of the discharge 
from entering the unaffected eye. A special form of this disease 
is that which is found in new-born infants and which is known 
as ophthalmia neonatorum. This disease is responsible for many 
cases of blindness and the results are all the more deplorable, 
since we know that it is a preventable disease, and furthermore 
that even after the eyes have become inoculated with the virus, 
that proper and timely treatment will prevent any permanent 
damage being done. The cause of the disease in infants is the 
entrance of poisonous material into the eyes either during or 
immediately after birth, the source of the poisonous material 
being the discharges from the genitals of the mother. These 
discharges are as a rule the result of specific disease in the 
mother, gonorrhea being by far the most frequent cause. The 
disease may be produced, however, by the acrid discharges of a 
chronic leucorrhea. 

Symptoms and Sig?is — As a rule the disease is first noticed the 
second or third day after birth. The eyes will be reddened and 
the lids somewhat swollen; soon a discharge is noticed, which at 
first is watery, but rapidly changes into pus, becoming very pro- 
fuse during the second and third days. The swelling increases 
until it is often very difficult if not impossible to open the lids 
sufficiently to examine the eyeballs. It is during this stage that 
the greatest danger obtains, for the swelling and pressure is so 
great that the circulation of the blood to the cornea is interfered 
with and its nourishment cut off. The vitality of the cornea is 
thus lowered and ulceration and sloughing follow with resulting 
damage or complete loss of the eye. 

Treatment — The treatment of this disease is divided into first, 
prevention, which begins with the mother before the birth of 
the babe; and second, curative, which is to be applied after 
the disease has made its appearance in the eyes of the new-born 
infant. 

In any case in which there is or has been a discharge of any 
character from the vagina of the mother before confinement, the 



HKAI/TH AT HOME. 355 

vagina should be thoroughly irrigated with the fountain syringe 
twice a day for two weeks before confinement. For an irrigating 
solution dissolve three tablets No. 38 in three pints of warm rain 
water and pass it through the vagina, elevating the syringe suffi- 
ciently to secure considerable force to the flow. 

When the child is born, the nurse must first cleanse the eyes 
with a solution made by dissolving four tablets No. 1 in half a 
teacupful of warm water. Use small pledgets of absorbent cotton 
and take especial care in wiping the eyes to wipe away from the 
opening between the lids so that none of the matter on the face 
shall enter the eye. After the eyes have been thoroughly washed, 
the lids should be held widely open, and, with the medicine 
dropper, a stream of the disinfecting solution thrown into the eye. 
The eyes should then be closed and covered with a thin pad of 
absorbent cotton which has been wet in the solution and then 
squeezed out flat. Never re-wet a piece of cotton in the solution 
after it has touched the parts to be cleansed. 

The above precautions are ample in all ordinary cases, but 
should it be known that the mother has at any time suffered from 
specific disease, or where there is a profuse discharge present 
from the maternal parts, it is well to employ as an additional pre- 
caution a solution made by dissolving two grains of nitrate of 
silver in one ounce of water; this solution may be used twice a 
day, dropping in three or four drops each time. The curative 
treatment consists of as perfect cleanliness as it is possible to 
obtain. The eyes should be washed out every few minutes with 
a solution made by dissolving six tablets of No. 1 in two table- 
spoonfuls of water. Any discharges around the eyes should be 
carefully washed away with cotton pledgets dipped in the above 
solution ; then the lids should be opened as widely as possible and 
a stream of the solution from the medicine dropper thrown well 
under the lids so as to wash away any discharge which may be 
there. Sometimes the discharge is thick and ropy and cannot be 
easily washed away; it may then be removed by wiping with a 
wisp of cotton twisted upon the end of the cotton carrier found in 
the Cabinet. In case the patient cannot be under the care of a 
competent physician, the further treatment consists of the use of 
a solution made by dissolving ten grains of nitrate of silver in one 
ounce of water ; this solution should be applied to the under sur- 



356 HEAl/fH AT HOME. 

face of the eyelid, after everting or turning the lids inside out 
and holding them in that position until the solution is applied 
with a small cotton brush on the cotton carrier, and then washed 
off with a stream of water or disinfectant solution from the medi- 
cine dropper. The nitrate of silver solution should be applied 
twice a day. The greatest care should be taken by those having 
the care of such a case to carefully wash their hands after touch- 
ing the sore eyes, before touching anything else, as the smallest 
particle of pus or matter from the sore eye is sufficient to infect a 
healthy eye. The active stage of this inflammation is from ten 
days to three weeks; the discharge gradually ceases and the 
swelling subsides ; the eyes remain red and the mucous mem- 
brane lining the lids will be thickened and rough for several 
weeks or even months. After the purulent discharge has ceased, 
the nitrate of silver solution should be discontinued and in its 
place may be used the alum stick as recommended on page 352. 

Iritis — This is an inflammation of the iris and is usually found 
in connection with rheumatism or some debilitating general 
disease, although it may be seen in cases where no cause can be 
traced. Exposure to inclement weather may be the cause in 
some instances. It is also seen as a complication in wounds of 
and injuries to the eyeball and accompanying deep corneal ulcers. 
These forms are called secondary, in contradistinction to the 
forms in which no specific cause can be traced, where the disease 
is known as primary. 

Symptoms and Sig?is — The first symptom generally noticed is 
more or less intolerance of light with an increase in the flow of 
tears. Very soon the eyeball becomes reddened, the congestion 
being greater in that portion of the eyeball lying immediately 
around the cornea or clear part ; here the redness is seen to be 
deep-seated and of a darker color than that in the surround- 
ing parts. Where the redness becomes pronounced the patient 
experiences much pain; at first the pain is of a sudden shooting 
character, but this quickly changes to a deep-seated throbbing 
ache, felt chiefly in the region just above the eyebrow, but often 
radiating over the whole side of the head. In addition to the 
redness and the pain, there is more or less disturbance of the 
vision, beginning at first as a slight cloudiness or haziness as 
though one were looking through smoke or fog ; this increases 



HEALTH AT HOME. 357 

until in many cases the vision may be reduced to mere perception 
of light. The cause of this decrease in vision is an exudate of a 
cloudy material which is thrown out into the aqueous humor of 
the eye. One of the chief diagnostic symptoms as well as one of 
the greatest dangers of iritis is the contraction or narrowing of 
the pupil. In iritis the pupil is always smaller in diameter than 
normal, and is immovable, that is, it does not dilate and con- 
tract under varying degrees of light, and there is a tendency to 
the formation of adhesions between the margin of the pupil and 
the lens which lies just behind it. The formation of these adhe- 
sions which bind down the iris and prevent the pupil from dilat- 
ing is the condition which makes iritis so dangerous and which 
causes blindness in those cases which are not properly treated. 

Treatment — Wherever possible, any case of eye disease in 
which iritis is suspected should be immediately placed in the 
hands of a competent oculist. Should such an oculist be not avail- 
able, the treatment should be directed along two lines : first, the 
reduction of the inflammation and the relief of the pain, and 
second, the dilation of the pupil and the prevention of adhesions. 
For the reduction of the inflammation nothing is so beneficial as 
the application ot hot water. Two or three thicknesses of flannel 
or a layer of absorbent cotton should be squeezed out of water as 
hot as can be borne and applied directly over the eye ; this should 
be repeated as often as the compress becomes cooled. As the 
pain in iritis is generally worse at night it may be necessary in 
extreme cases to give a general sedative — one tablet No. 25 
repeated every half hour until the patient rests or until four tablets 
have been given. This should be done when application of hot 
water does not relieve the pain sufficiently to enable the patient 
to sleep and obtain the necessary rest. 

To dilate the pupil and prevent the formation of adhesions the 
only reliable remedy is the following receipt which can be 
obtained from any first-class druggist: Atropia sulphate (Merck's) 
5 grains; acid boric, 10 grains; aqua distilled, 1 ounce. Mix 
thoroughly and drop one or two drops in the eye every two hours. 
If this treatment is begun sufficiently early, before the ^adhesions 
have become firm, they will be broken up, the pupil dilated and 
the danger removed. The eye will make comparatively rapid 
recovery and no permanent bad results remain. 



358 HEALTH AT HOME. 

The drops recommended above contain atropine or belladonna 
and are poisonous, hence care should be exercised in handling 
them and they should be kept out of the reach of children. 
When the necessity for their use has passed, they should be thrown 
away. Used for such cases and in the manner directed above 
they are perfectly safe. 

When the patient is known to have a rheumatic tendency, give 
one tablet No. 37 every three hours during the daytime until all 
inflammation of the eye has subsided. 

Cataract — Cataract is that condition in which the crystalline 
lens of the eye loses its natural transparency and becomes clouded 
and of a milky- white color. The normal crystalline lens lies imme- 
diately back of the pupil, and owing to its perfect transparency, is 
invisible and the pupil looks perfectly black. When cataract 
develops, however, the pupil changes color and looks perfectly 
white. Cataracts are of two kinds: primary and secondary. The 
primary are those which develop from natural causes, generally 
the result of disturbance in the nutrition of the lens, causing a 
loss of its vitality and consequently the development of opacity. 
This form is by far the most common and is called senile cataract 
since it is, as a rule, confined to old people or those past middle 
life in whom senile changes are more liable to occur in the vari- 
ous tissues of the body. The senile form comes on very gradu- 
ally, without any pain or inflammation and usually develops more 
rapidly in one eye than in the other, often one eye becoming 
blind while useful vision will still be retained in the other. 
The patient first notices that objects look dim or hazy, especially 
when looked at through the eye earliest affected. This condi- 
tion gradually increases until only perception of light remains, 
when the cataract is said to be ripe or mature. 

Secondary cataracts are those which result either from external 
violence, such as blows upon the eye, or operations or wounds, in 
which the lens is injured. Here as a rule but one eye is affected, 
the other remaining normal unless the violence or injury extends 
to both eyes. The development of secondary cataract is much 
more rapid than that of the senile form, often but a few days or 
weeks being required for the complete formation of the opacity 
in the lens, while in the case of the senile cataract the develop- 



HEALTH AT HOME. 359 

nient is always slow, many cases requiring years for their full 
development. 

Treatment — The only cure for cataract is the removal of the 
opaque crystalline lens by means of a surgical operation; the 
so-called absorption methods are entirely worthless in producing 
a cure in a case of true cataract. The operation for the removal 
of a cataract is an exceedingly delicate one and should only be 
performed by a surgeon of skill and experience. When proper 
skill and care are employed, the results are eminently satisfactory 
and a large proportion of the operations performed are success- 
ful. 

Pterygium — This is a condition or alteration in the mucous 
membrane, covering the eyeball, in which it becomes folded upon 
itself in such a manner as to form a triangular growth, the apex 
of the triangle pointing toward the pupil and firmly attached to 
the cornea or clear part of the eyeball. As a rule the growth is 
found springing from the inner angle, next to the nose, although 
it may grow from any point, but always extends toward the pupil, 
and if left without interference eventually covers enough of the 
pupilary space to greatly interfere with the sight. The growth 
is of slow development, as a rule, often reaching a certain stage 
when growth seems to be arrested and the condition may remain 
stationary for many years, only to take on, at last, new activity 
and finally permanently damage the eye. 

Treatment — This condition can only be removed by surgical 
means and none but skilled surgeons should attempt the operation. 
When properly done the operation is free from danger and is gen- 
erally very successful. The growths, however, show a marked 
tendency to recur and often require a second or even a third 
operation before the recurrence can be checked. 

Diseases of the Tear Ducts— The tears flow out from the 
eye through two small ducts or canals at the inner angle of the 
lids, one opening being in the upper and one in the lower lid; as 
these two minute canals pass in toward the nose they unite to 
form one larger channel which empties into a small cavity lying 
against the side of the nose called the lachrymal sac; this in turn 
discharges through a canal or tube extending through the bone 
down into the nose. Any obstruction or closure of this drainage 



360 HKALTH AT HOME. 

channel interferes with the proper removal of the tears from the 
eye and we have the condition commonly known as "watering" 
of the eyes. The tears accumulate until they overflow upon the 
cheek and cause more or less inflammation both of the eye and 
the skin of the lids. The obstruction may occur at two different 
points, either in the small canals leading from the outer openings 
in the lids into the lachrymal sac, or else the obstruction may be 
located in that portion of the drainage system lying below the sac 
and between it and the nose. The latter position is the more 
frequent one and is productive of the greatest disturbance. When 
this portion of the channel is closed the tears accumulate in the 
lachrymal sac and cause its distention until it shows as a dis- 
tinct swelling ; in severe cases this swelling may be very great 
and be attended by much inflammation of the surrounding tis- 
sues. The mucous membrane lining the sac becomes inflamed, 
pus forms in the sac and unless the distention is relieved 
rupture takes place externally upon the cheek alongside of the 
nose and an opening remains through which the pus and tears 
are discharged. The constant presence of pus in the sac and eye 
results in more or less serious inflammation of the eye itself; 
often corneal ulcers form and not infrequently the eye is lost from 
sloughing of the cornea. In most cases, especially during the 
early stages of the diseases the sac can be erupted by applying 
pressure upon the outside ; when the closure below is not com- 
plete the contents of the sac can be forced down into the nose ; in 
other cases it will flow back into the eye and be discharged 
externally by this route. 

Treatment — This is always a serious condition and should be 
placed in the hands of a reliable oculist as early as possible. 
The treatment is surgical and consists of opening the canals and 
dilating the passages with suitable probes until perfect drainage 
is established. 

In some cases, in which there are deformities in the bony canal 
below leading into the nose, perfect drainage may be difficult or 
even impossible to obtain, and often after it is obtained relapses 
occur and the case may become incurable. When proper atten- 
tion is given early in the course of the disease, however, good 
and permanent results are the rule, and it is in the old neglected 
or chronic cases that the surgeon finds the greatest difficulty. 



THE EAR AND ITS DISEASES 



The structure of the ear may be divided into three portions, 
first, the sound receiving portion, consisting of the external or 
visible portion of the ear and the external auditory canal extend- 
ing down to the drum membrane ; second, the sound conducting 
portion made up of the drum membrane the middle ear cavity, 
with the chain of three bones articulated together and lying 
within the cavity and connecting the drum membrane with the 
inner ear, the hollow space or cavity in the bony process lying 
back of the ear, called the mastoid process, and finally the 
eustachian tube which connects the middle ear cavity with the 
throat; third, the inner or true ear, lying deeply within the dense 
hard portion of the temporal bone, and consisting of the various 
cavities throughout which the auditory nerve or nerve of hearing 
is distributed. In the outer ear or aurical and auditory canal, 
disease of any gravity is seldom found. 

The inner or true ear is very rarely the seat of disease. When 
disease does occur it is the result of extension of the disease 
from some surrounding tissue as, for instance, the extension of 
the inflammation to the inner ear in the case of meningitis or 
inflammation of the membranes covering the base of the brain. 
These cases are almost always fatal and treatment is of little or 
no value. The majority of cases in which total deafness exists 
at birth are caused by a low grade of inflammation of the base of 
the brain and its membranes which damages or destroys the 
auditory nerves before birth. 

Boils — These sometimes occur in the skin lining the canal 
and call for the same treatment as that given to boils in other 
localities, namely, hot applications until the boil shows signs of 
having come to a head, then free incision and removal of the 
pus. This procedure had best be done by a skillful surgeon as 
undue violence or awkwardness may injure the drum mem- 
brane. In many cases there is a tendency to recurrence of boils 



362 HEALTH AT HOME. 

and should they persist, the following preparation should be 
given internally: Calcium sulphide, 15 grains; sulpho-carbolate 
of soda, 1J drams. Mix thoroughly and make into thirty cap- 
sules. Take one capsule after each meal. This treatment should 
be continued for three or four weeks. 

Wax in the Bars — In elderly or middle-aged people there 
is frequently a tendency to hardening of the ear wax, so that it 
becomes impacted and acts as a plug in the canal causing ringing 
noises in the ear and a sense of pressure, and in some cases very 
greatly diminished hearing. The presence of this hardened mass 
of ear wax can usually be detected by inserting- the ear speculum 
carefully into the canal and holding the patient's head in such a 
position that the light will fall into the canal. To insert the 
speculum, grasp the external ear by the upper portion and draw 
it slightly upward and backward, when it will be seen that the 
canal becomes straightened and a clear view can be obtained. In 
a case of impacted ear wax, its removal may be attempted by 
syringing the ear with warm water. Should the mass not come 
away when the syringe has been thoroughly used, drop three or 
four drops of warm olive or sweet oil into the ear and let it remain 
until the following day when the syringing may be repeated. 
As a rule the oil will soften the mass so that it may be easily 
removed by a stream of warm water. In some cases, however, 
where the mass is very hard it may be necessary to repeat the 
application of oil several times, using the syringe and warm 
water between each application of the oil. After the wax has 
all been removed, the canal should be thoroughly dried and 
wiped out with a wisp of cotton twisted upon the end of the cot- 
ton carrier and then another cotton swab should be dipped in 
ointment No. 40 and the entire canal thoroughly swabbed out. 
This application of the ointment to the canal should be repeated 
every other day for two or three weeks. 

THE MIDDLE EAR. 

The middle ear is the location in which by far the largest num- 
ber of ear diseases find their origin and development. The mid- 
dle ear is directly connected with the posterior portion of the nose 



HEALTH AT HOME. 363 

and throat through the eustachian tube. This tube, as well as 
the middle ear cavity, is lined by mucous membrane which is 
similar to and continuous with the membrane lining the nose and 
throat, and any inflammatory process affecting this membrane in 
the throat may extend to the eustachian tube and through it to the 
cavity of the middle ear. In fact, nearly all the more common 
diseases of the middle ear are catarrhal in character and have 
their origin in a cold affecting, first the nose and throat and 
then extending to the eustachian tube and middle ear. The 
mucous membrane lining the middle ear cavity is constantly 
secreting fluid and mucus and the natural and only means of 
drainage from the cavity is through the eustachian tube into the 
throat. Where inflammation of the membrane lining this tube 
occurs, the accompanying swelling causes more or less closure 
of the tube and interference with the proper drainage of the cav- 
ity, hence, retention of the secretions occurs, and should the 
obstruction become sufficiently great, the cavity soon fills and 
then there occurs pressure upon the drum membrane. As soon as 
pressure occurs there is pain which continues until the pressure 
is relieved either by the reopening of the eustachian tube and 
the re-establishment of drainage through the natural channel or 
else the drum membrane ruptures under the pressure of the en- 
closed fluid and the discharge occurs externally through the aud- 
itory canal. It will be seen that an earache is caused by swell- 
ing and inflammation of the eustachian tube and interference 
with the natural drainage of the middle ear cavity. As soon as 
the pressure is removed, the pain subsides, but should the drum 
membrane be ruptured, the discharge may continue for some 
time, and if neglected may become chronic. The discharge 
is at first thin and watery containing much mucus and often in 
severe inflammations it will be bloody. Where exposed to air, 
however, the discharge rapidly undergoes decomposition and 
becomes very foul smelling and irritating. In those cases which 
receive proper attention as regards cleansing the ear, and where 
the catarrhal condition which causes the trouble is treated, the 
discharge soon stops and the opening in the drum membrane 
closes, and recovery with normal hearing results. In other cases 
which are neglected, the membrane lining the cavity undergoes 
ulceration, as does the drum membrane, resulting in more or less 



364 HEALTH AT HOME. 

destruction of tissue and permanent damage to the ear. There 
are certain complications, some of them of grave import, which 
may occur in the course of a suppurative inflammation of the 
middle ear. The principal one and by far the most dangerous is 
the development of an abscess in the cavity of the mastoid pro- 
cess of the temporal bone lying just back of the ear. This cavity 
is lined by mucous membrane which is similar to and connected 
with that lining the middle ear and should the swelling of the 
membrane close the small passage connecting the two cavities, 
suppurative and extensive inflammation of a destructive charac- 
ter is likely to occur in the bone and unless the retained pus and 
secretions are removed and free drainage established, disease of 
the bone itself occurs and the inflammation will extend to the 
brain and its membranes causing meningitis or abscess of the 
brain frequently resulting in death. The treatment of this con- 
dition calls for the most skillful surgery and none but surgeons 
of experience should attempt the operation for the operation itself 
is attended with considerable danger; nevertheless where a mas- 
toid abscess develops, an operation should always be performed, 
as fatality is almost certain to occur without it. Whenever any 
tenderness or swelling is found over the mastoid process during 
an inflammation of the middle ear, the best possible surgical 
advice should at once be sought. In the meantime, the inflam- 
mation may best be treated by constant applications of flannels 
wet in hot water and applied over the parts. 

Discharging Ear — First of all cleanliness is of greatest 
importance and no secretions should be allowed to remain any 
length of time in the ear. To wash out the ear dissolve one tab- 
let No 3. in a teacupful of warm water and thoroughly wash out 
the canal using the ear syringe. After thoroughly washing 
away all matter or pus, twist a bit of cotton on the cotton carrier 
and wipe the canal dry. Then take two tablets No. 1 and crush 
them into a fine powder and place the powder in the canal, tak- 
ing care that it goes well down to the drum membrane. This 
should be repeated two or three times a day, as long as the dis- 
charge continues. In addition Jx> the treatment of the ear itself, 
the nose and throat should receive attention. The patient 
should thoroughly wash out the nose by snuffing up considerable 
quantities of the same fluid which is used to wash out the ear; 



HKAI/fH AT HOME. 365 

he may also gargle the throat with the fluid. This should be 
followed by thorough use of the spray with the following solu- 
tion: Oil of cinnamon, 2 drops; carbolic acid, 10 drops; lavo- 
line, 2 ounces. Mix thoroughly and use as spray. 

Earache — Earache is very common in children and as before 
mentioned is caused by interruption of the normal drainage fol- 
lowing the swollen condition of the mucous membrane in the 
nose and eustachian tubes, so generally found in the case of 
ordinary colds. The presence of enlarged tonsils or swollen 
glands in the space behind the palate predisposes to this trouble 4 
and where these conditions exist, they should receive proper 
attention. When earache begins in a child or adult the direct 
application of heat, in the form of hot water to the ear, will often 
relieve the pain and congestion. The best manner of applying 
hot water is to have the patient lie down on the sidejjwith the 
aching ear uppermost and then fill the auditory canal with water 
as hot as it can be borne ; as soon as the water cools it should be 
poured out and more hot water introduced, and the process con- 
tinued. Should the drum membrane rupture and a discharge 
from the ear occur, the cleansing methods recommended in the 
case of discharge from the ear should be pursued until all dis- 
charge stops. 

Progressive Deafness — This condition occurs in many 
cases as a result of chronic catarrhal trouble involving the eus- 
tachian tube and middle ear. The cases occur usually in adults 
and those past middle life are more liable to be afflicted. The 
catarrhal trouble is a low, mild form of inflammation, attended by 
little swelling or increase in secretions, but owing to its pro- 
longed course, the mucous membrane becomes permanently thick- 
ened. This thickening process extends into the middle ear and 
involves the articulations or joints between the chain of small 
bones lying in the middle ear, resulting in stiffening of the joints. 
The drum membrane itself becomes thickened and less elastic. 
The result of the whole process is a condition of the sound con- 
ducting structures within the middle ear making them much less 
sensitive to the delicate sounds which ordinarily produce the 
sensation of hearing. In other words, the sound conducting 
mechanism is so altered that it requires a more forcible sound 



366 HEALTH AT HOME. 

stimulus than normal to produce the sensation of hearing. The 
onset of this condition is exceedingly slow and often much per- 
manent damage is done before the sufferer really becomes con- 
scious that his hearing is disturbed. The symptoms noted are 
those of diminished hearing and noises of various kinds in the 
ears. Sometimes but one ear is involved, but often both, gene- 
rally, however, to a different degree. The condition is often 
affected by changes in the weather, wet damp weather increasing 
the difficulty of hearing while in warm dry weather the patient 
may notice but little if any trouble. The hearing is always poorer 
when the patient has a cold in the head and the noises then 
become very troublesome. The progress is always slow, so that 
the patient may from month to month not be able to really note 
any material change in his condition, but gradually the changes 
in the tissues become more and more pronounced and the deaf- 
ness and head noises increase. 

Treatment — After this condition has become thoroughly estab- 
lished, especially in middle-aged people, the results of treatment 
are very unsatisfactory. The best results are obtained in young 
people when the disease is recognized early in its course and 
prompt and proper treatment instituted and carried out. When 
these conditions are noted the case should at once be placed 
under the care of a skillful specialist in ear diseases and his 
instructions faithfully carried out. But little can be done in this 
condition in the way of home treatment. 



THE NOSE AND THROAT. 



In the part of this book devoted to the general diseases of the 
body, all diseases of the nose and thioat which in any way 
cause general systemic disturbances, have been fully discussed 
and it remains to take up those things which belong entirely to 
the organs named. 

The Nose — The nose performs a threefold duty in the human 
organism. It is the organ of the sense of smell, it gives a cer- 
tain character and resonance to the voice, and it is the natural 
passageway through which the external air reaches the lungs. 
Any one or all of these functions may be interfered with and any 
interference is usually in the form of some inflammation of the 
membranes which line the nose. Speaking of the nose as the 
organ of the special sense of smell, any inflammation which 
occurs about the tiny endings of the nerves of smell will materi- 
ally interfere with the function of these nerve filaments. Should 
an inflammation occur which causes any considerable amount of 
swelling, or should new or foreign growths occur in the nose, the 
other functions will be interfered with from the fact that the 
nasal passage is not free enough to act as a sounding board for 
the voice nor large enough to admit a sufficient amount of air to 
the lungs. 

Catarrh — There are so many things which are misunderstood 
in regard to what is ordinarily called ''nasal catarrh" that a some- 
what general discussion upon certain questions connected with 
this subject is given here. One of the mistakes is that it is gen- 
erally believed that catarrh is a special disease of the nasal cavity 
which leads finally to the ulceration of the soft parts and to the 
death of the bone. This idea is very largely encouraged by all 
advertisements of patent medicines which are said to cure 
catarrh. A simple catarrhal inflammation is always a catarrhal 
inflammation from the start and never results in anything more 
than a simple swelling of the parts. Ulceration and the death 



368 HEALTH AT HOME. 

of bone are never found in simple catarrh and when these things 
occur it may be certain that some serious general disease is pres- 
ent, such as syphilis. Another mistaken idea which is very 
common is that when a person has a catarrhal inflammation in 
one part of the body, the mucous surfaces in other parts are liable 
to become affected also. Doctors very often have patients who 
are suffering from nasal catarrh and these people frequently make 
the statement that they are suffering from catarrh of the stomach 
as a result of the catarrh of the nose. There is no ground what- 
ever for such an assertion and in the vast majority of cases the 
stomach trouble is due to some excess as to manner of living, and 
it is never due to nasal catarrh. Another very common mistake 
is to believe that catarrh will eventually develop into consump- 
tion ; this is entirely untrue and there is no tendency whatever 
for consumption to follow cases of catarrh. The natural ten- 
dency of catarrh is to go downward but the inflammation will 
always remain catarrhal. The worst thing that could happen 
would be the development of a chronic case of bronchitis with 
asthma. A very common idea in regard to catarrh is that its 
most prominent symptom is the excessive secretion of mucus or 
muco-pus. This is not at all true as in many cases the actual 
amount of secretion is less, and in those cases where the secretion 
is apparently more than normal the character of the secretion has 
been changed so that instead of being taken up by the air and 
carried off in this manner it discharges from the nostrils, falls 
back into the throat or forms solid hard scabs in the nostril. In 
a healthy nose the secretion is never noticed and yet the amount 
secreted b}*- a healthy nose is about a pint in every twenty-four 
hours. 

The three most prominent symptoms which give rise to the 
ordinary catarrh are : swelling and inflammation in the mucous 
membrane of the nostril, swelling and inflammation of the mucous 
membrane of the upper part of the throat and a bony growth upon 
the septum of bone which divides the two nostrils. These three 
conditions are closely associated in most cases and it is some- 
what difficult to tell which one is the real cause of the trouble. 
The character of the discharge is always something of an indica- 
tion of the disease with which we have to deal. A purely watery 
discharge usually indicates a common cold or hay fever; a pro- 



HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 369 

fuse discharge in which the discharge resembles the white of an 
egg but not quite so thick and in which there appears numbers 
of grayish flakes, indicates nasal polypi. This same discharge 
is also seen in the second stage of a severe cold. A very thick 
mucus discharge indicates disease of the upper part of the throat 
just back of the nostrils; a thick whitish discharge which is 
raised from the throat with much hawking indicates disease of 
both the throat and nose; a purulent discharge composed of mod- 
erately thick yellow pus, accompanied by an odor, usually indi- 
cates disease of some one of the bony cavities near the nose; a 
purulent discharge in which blood and shreds of dead tsisue are 
mixed indicates syphilis; the discharge of greenish crusts in con- 
nection with somewhat healthy looking pus, or thick mucus in 
connection with a mild offensive odor, the crusts being bright 
yellow or greenish in color, and containing neither blood nor 
dead tissue, indicates dry catarrh. 

Acute Catarrh — Taking Cold — Although this is one of 
the most common and familiar of the slight illnesses, yet what 
especial influences produce the changes which are called taking 
cold, or what is the true relation between the recognized cause 
and the effect, it is somewhat difficult to determine. The view 
of Dr. Seitz is the one most generally accepted and that is, that 
the disorders resulting from catching cold are due to the removal 
of heat to an unusual extent from the external or internal surface 
of the body; that this causes some functional disturbance, which 
in turn gives rise to certain processes in some portion of the body, 
far removed from the part immediately affected by the cold. That 
the changes are not due to the immediate or direct effect of the 
exposure, is evident from the fact, that as a rule, a certain length 
of time elapses before these changes set in. This theory is far 
from complete and leaves the matter still somewhat in the dark. 
As a matter of observation we know that colds occur during the 
spring and fall months, seasons which have moderately low tem- 
perature, notable dampness of the atmosphere, together with a 
considerable amount of wind. Hence we recognize that there 
are three factors necessary for the production of a cold — low tem- 
perature, air in motion and moisture. It is also necessary, as a 
rule, that one or more of these factors should act for a consider- 
able length of time. In our ordinary life there are few of us but 



370 HEAI/fH AT HOME. 

that may subject ourselves to slight temporary exposure without 
danger, as, for instance, rising in the morning in a cold room. 
On the other hand, sitting in a draught for a prolonged period 
with even^only a small portion of the body exposed is almost 
sure to result in the taking of cold. 

Among the well known things which may produce a cold are 
sitting in a draught, wearing insufficient clothing, wearing thin 
soled shoes, going from a warm room to a cold one, sitting in a 
cool place when warm, slight exposure while perspiring, etc. 
There is generally aj slight amount of fever present with every 
cold. The cold manifests itself in various parts of the body and 
is spoken of as a cold in the head, or it may assume the form 
of muscular rheumatism, or it may " settle" in the bladder and 
cause some trouble there. Nearly always, however, the upper 
air passages are affected and repeated attacks of cold in these 
parts eventually produce a condition which is to a certain extent 
permanent, and we speak of the trouble as catarrh. Some people 
state that they take cold very easily and very often. Were they 
to be carefully examined it would be found that they have a 
mild form of chronic catarrh and the slightest exposure brings 
on an acute attack. 

Prevention of a Cold — From what has already been said it is 
easy to see that a cold may be prevented by avoiding those things 
which'produce it and the best methods of avoiding those things 
will be considered. The most care is required in the spring and 
fall of the year. One of the most important directions that can 
be given in regard to preventing colds is as to the proper regu- 
lation of the clothing. The body should have sufficient clothing 
for warmth and comfort, no more and no less. A frequent and 
common error in the use of clothing is of crowding on too much 
clothing upon those portions of the body which are supposed to 
be subject to some special weakness; as for instance, many peo- 
ple, supposing themsleves to have weak lungs and throats, fall 
into the error of piling wrap after wrap around their necks and 
upon their chests, thereby encouraging the very condition which 
they fear, and incurring the risk they desire to avoid, for the 
excessive muffling of the parts necessarily leads to perspiration 
and consequently the danger of its being suddenly checked upon 
the removal of the wraps. The habit of muffling up the neck 



HEALTH AT HOME. 371 

is the source of much mischief and much harm is done by this 
procedure. Especially is this the case when the cold which is 
contr actedMevelops into sore throat. As a rule when a sore 
throat^comes on, the first thing that is done is to tie a piece of 
flanneljabout the throat; the only advantage of this is a certain 
amount of fcounter-irritation due to the flannel rubbing against 
the skim It is put on for a protection ; it simply renders the 
throat more sensitive, and more liable to take another cold. What 
has just been said about the neck may be said about any other 
portion of the fbody. There could be no greater error than to 
suppose that mufflers about the neck protect the throat, or that 
the chest is protected in any way by extra thickness of covering 
about it. In fact the contrary is quite true. The worst place in 
the world in which to wear the so-called chest protectors, sold in 
the drug stores, is on the chest. It would be much better to wear 
them on the feet as the chest is much better protected, in one 
liable to colds, by an extra sole worn on the boot than by a felt 
pad worn across the chest. The clothing should be uniformly 
distributed over the body, with simply enough of it for comfort 
and no more. Wool is the best materal for underclothing and 
silk should never be worn. Many people change the thickness 
of the underclothing twice or even three times a year but this 
plan is not a wise one as the houses in which we live are at prac- 
tically the same temperature the entire year. A much better 
plan is to^wear the same thickness of underwear throughout the 
year, and supply protection from the extreme cold of winter by 
a change in the outer garments. The body is protected from 
absolute cold by wearing clothing, but not from taking cold. The 
protection from taking cold is, by so regulating the habits of life 
as regards clothing, etc., that exposure to the changes of the 
weather can be made without fear. In other words, compel your- 
self to become thoroughly accustomed to a climate and to its 
changes; perhaps no better aid to this is afforded than the use of 
the bath. A cold bath or a cold sponge bath is a great aid in 
the prevention of taking cold if the bath is taken regularly every 
day. 

Treatment — Ordinary colds are commonly allowed to take their 
course without treatment, and this very thing of allowing a cold 
to take its own course produces a weakening of the parts affected 



372 HEALTH AT HOME. 

by the cold and they are less able to withstand the next attack. 
The ordinary treatment of a cold is so simple and requires so little 
time that a cold, no matter how slight, should always be treated. 
At bedtime take a hot footbath and at the same time drink a 
large quantity of some sort of hot drink, as a bowlful of hot lem- 
onade; then take four tablets of No. 39, go to bed and cover up 
warmly. If a free perspiration is induced it is so much the better. 
On arising in the morning take three tablets of No. 16 and after 
breakfast begin and take two tablets of No. 39 every three hours 
until the cold is cured. The points to remember in the cure of 
a cold are: Bring the natural body warmth back by hot drinks, 
by hot baths, or by placing the patient in bed with hot water 
bottles or hot bricks about him; open the bowels thoroughly by 
the use of No. 16 for adults and by the use of No. 4 for children ; 
and overcome the cold by giving to children one tablet of No. 39 
every three hours, and to adults two tablets No. 39 every two to 
three hours. In addition to this treatment, spray the nose sev- 
eral times each day with a solution made by dissolving from one 
to five tablets of No. 3 in one-half a cupful of warm water. 

Chronic Catarrh — This is a somewhat general term and 
includes a number of diseases which are entirely separate and 
distinct from each other. 

Hypertrophic Rhinitis — Moist Catarrh — This is the 
name given to that form of chronic catarrh which is the result 
of frequent attacks of acute catarrh, or, in other words, it is 
that form of catarrh which follows the repeated taking of cold. 
It is defined as a chronic inflammation of the mucous membrane 
lining the nasal cavities, which inflammation produces enlarge- 
ment enough of the parts to interfere to a considerable extent with 
the free passage of air through the nostrils. One reason why 
this enlargement takes place with but a moderate amount of irri- 
tation is the fact that more blood passes through the mucous 
membrane of the nose in twenty-four hours than through any 
other mucous membrane of the body during the same length of 
time. 

Sympto?ns and Signs — In this form of catarrh the discharge 
becomes less in amount and somewhat thick. It has a tendency 
to fall back into the throat and will be raised by a considerable 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 373 

amount of hawking. There is no tendency for the discharge to 
form crusts and there is no odor to the discharge. It is a popu- 
lar delusion that the secretions in this form of catarrh have an 
odor and are irritating and this belief is based partly on the 
teachings of some who claim that catarrh leads to ulceration and 
death of the bone. These beliefs are entirely wrong and death 
of bone is never found in any sort of catarrh, and the bad odor 
is found in dry catarrh alone, where there is no discharge. Mouth 
breathing is always a prominent sign of this disease and this is 
produced by the closure of the nostrils by the enlargements 
which accompany the disease. This inability to breathe through 
the nose allows the secretions of the upper part of the throat to 
accumulate, and these form into hard masses, especially at night, 
and in the morning require considerable hawking and retching 
to raise or loosen the plugs; sometimes this retching will produce 
vomiting. This difficulty, while not a disease in itself and while 
produced entirely by the nasal catarrh, will in time produce disease 
of the upper part or vault of the throat. Ear trouble is very often 
met with in this form of catarrh, and this trouble may be only a 
ringing in the ears or there may be considerable difficulty in 
hearing. The hawking which is practiced in order to raise the 
mucus which accumulates in the upper part of the throat will 
many times produce a lengthening of the hanging palate and this 
falling on the base of the tongue will cause an irritation which 
will produce much coughing. This form of catarrh is very often 
the starting point of hay fever and asthma. Other troubles which 
may be caused by this form of catarrh are headaches, eye troubles 
of various kinds, and a large number of nervous diseases. 

Treat7nent — This disease has been described as a thickening o 
the nasal mucous membrane and as a thickening of the secretions 
of j this membrane, therefore, in treatment of the disease three 
things should be accomplished : the surface [of the membrane 
should be kept^clean, the membrane should be*stimulated to more 
natural action, and astringents should be used to bring the mem- 
brane back to its natural state. The membrane is kept clean by 
spraying several times a day with a solution made by dissolving 
three tablets of No. 3 in^a pint of warm water. The stimulant 
and astringent action is produced Iby the use of the following : 
Tannic acid, 10 grains; tincture of iodine, 10 drops; glycerine, 



374 HEALTH AT HOME. 

1 ounce. Mix thoroughly, and allow to stand twenty-four hours. 
To use this, twist a small piece of cotton about a cotton 
carrier or a long splinter, then saturate the cotton with the 
mixture and pass the swab well back in each nostril. Always 
spray the nose after making this application ; use the medicine 
once or twice every day and use the spray four or five times a 
day. Continue the whole treatment from two to six months. 
By being faithful and persistent in this treatment all ordinary 
cases of catarrh of this sort can be cured in time. 

Purulent Catarrh of Childhood — This is a form of catarrh 
which occurs in childhood alone and which is accompanied by a 
profuse discharge of a yellowish, pus-like material. The disease 
does not manifest itself in any other way. The nose keeps up a 
continual discharge and unless carefully looked after the child 
becomes what is known as a "dirty-nosed" child. The matter 
interferes with the child's breathing somewhat and may cause 
mouth breathing especially at night. There is no obstruction of 
the nasal passage except as a result of the accumulation and dry- 
ing of the secretion. 

Treatme?it — Treat this disease by the same method as that 
given for the treatment of hypertrophic rhinitis, 

Atrophic Rhinitis — Dry Catarrh — This is that form of 
chronic catarrh in which the membranes of the nose shrink up and 
in this way lose the power of performing their function in the 
proper manner. This shrinkage of the membrane ^lessens the 
amount of liquid secretion, and, as a result, crusts form upon the 
membrane and these in turn interfere with the flow of the blood 
in the veins and also prevent the escape of the discharge. As a 
result of holding the discharges in check, they accumulate back 
of the hard crusts and decay to a certain extent and thus produce 
an odor so that one of the prominent symptoms in this form of 
catarrh is a very free breathing space and a decided odor to all of 
the discharge from the nose. Nosebleed sometimes occurs in 
this form of catarrh as a result of picking the crusts off with the 
finger nail. Sometimes this is kept up for so long a time that 
a small hole is made in the bone which divides the nostrils. As 
a result of the air not being moistened to any extent on its pas- 
sage through the nose it takes up a great amount of moisture from 



HEALTH AT HOME. 375 

the throat and one of the prominent signs of dry catarrh is a very 
dry throat. 

Treatment — Three times each day spray the nose and throat 
with the following: oil of cinnamon, 2 drops; carbolic acid, 
10 drops; lavoline, 2 ounces; also twice a day with a solution 
made by dissolving six tablets of No. 3 in a cup of warm water. 
Dissolve two tablespoonfuls of salt in two quarts of hot water and 
place the solution in the fountain syringe. Take the nozzle off 
of the syringe and hang the syringe a very little higher than the 
head ; place the end of the rubber tubing in one nostril, open the 
mouth slightly, tip the head a little bit forward and allow the 
solution to run through the nose. Have the water as hot as can 
be borne. Do this once each day. In addition to this treatment, 
have the following made up and use it three times a day by 
snuffing a small portion up the nose : Salicylic acid, 5 grains ; 
calcined magnesia, 1 dram ; mix thoroughly and use as directed. 

Deformities of the Nasal Septum — The septum is the 
bone which divides the two nostrils from each other. In infancy 
this bone many times receives severe blows, and, as a result of 
such blows, various deformities develop later on in life, the most 
common of these being a growth upon one side of the partition. 
This growth may be but a small bulging of a portion of the sep- 
tum or it may be so extensive as to entirely close the nostril and 
thus prevent the air from passing to the lungs through^that nos- 
tril. At other times a growth occurs on both sides and it is then 
not possible for the air to reach the lungs by way of the nostrils 
at all, and the person so afflicted is a confirmed mouth breather. 
Whenever a deformity of the nasal septum is found there is sure 
to be more or less swelling of the mucous membrane upon the 
outer side of the nostril and a chronic catarrh is the result. 
Deflections or growths upon the septum can be treated in but one 
way with any degree of success and that is by having a compe- 
tent surgeon operate upon the nose and remove all bunches and 
enlargements of whatever sort which occur upon this bone. 
Such operations are very successful, can be performed with little 
or no pain and give a great amount of relief. In fact many 
severe cases of catarrh may be cured by an operation of this sort 
and by using a solution of No. 3. in the spray for a short time 
afterwards. 



376 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

Foreign Bodies in the Nose — Foreign bodies are many 
times found in the nostrils; sometimes they get there by accident 
and many times they are put there by mischievous children. A 
child will frequently be playing with some small article and will 
stuff the article up one nostril or some article will be swallowed, 
and in the act of vomiting, instead of being thrown out the mouth, 
the article will be thrown up into the back part of the nose where 
it will lodge. As soon as a foreign body is placed in the nostril 
it sets up a certain amount of irritation and this in turn produces 
swelling and a very free discharge. This discharge soon be- 
comes thick and it will not be long until it becomes quite offen- 
sive, so that one of the early signs of a foreign body in the nos- 
tril will be a free and offensive discharge. There will also be a 
certain amount of sneezing and it will be difficult to breathe 
through the side which contains the foreign body. The sense of 
smell is not affected by the presence of a foreign body in the nos- 
tril. A neuralgia of some part of the face is many times present 
and this is many times a very distressing symptom. The dis- 
charge from the nose may cause the upper lip and a portion of 
the nose to become quite sore. This is especially true in children. 

Treatment — The only treatment is the removal of the foreign 
body and this had best be undertaken by a competent physician. 

Tumors of the Nose — A number of growths may occur in 
the nose. In fact, any tumor which may occur in any other part 
of the body may occur in the nose. The tumor most often met 
with is the soft tumor which is known as nasal polypi. This 
tumor looks very much like a grape from which the skin has 
been removed. It is soft, has a watery look, is somewhat greyish 
in color, the covering shines or glistens and the tumor is fastened 
to the nose by a small neck or pedicle. A single nostril may 
contain one or a dozen of these tumors. They interfere with the 
breathing and also with the free discharge of the secretions of 
the mucous membrane of the nose. There is only one treatment 
for this trouble and that is to remove the tumors. This is best 
done with a wire snare and as the treatment is in the line of an 
operation the best advice that can be given is to take the sufferer 
to a specialist and have the matter attended to. This may be 
said of any tumor which may occur in the nose. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 377 



THE THROAT. 

Perhaps no part of the body is the seat of more small troubles 
than the throat. From earliest infancy the throat is a source of 
care and oftentimes of very serious worry. The years of child- 
hood are filled with times when the throat gives more or less 
trouble and although in the majority of cases this trouble is in no 
wise serious yet the fact remains that a little carelessness as to 
the care of the throat at this period of life is almost sure to result 
in a weak throat. The most common trouble is, of course, 
catarrh, and the various forms of throat catarrh are much the 
same as those forms found in the nose. Aside from catarrh of 
the throat, many diseases occur which affect the throat in some 
way and tumors of the throat occur much the same as in other 
parts of the body. 

Acute Catarrh of the Throat — Acute Pharyngitis — 

In taking cold it is sometimes said that the cold settles in the 
head or nose, and this is the acute catarrh which has already been 
described under the head of nasal catarrh, but if the cold should 
settle in the throat, the disease would be acute catarrh of the 
throat. The symptoms are those of a severe cold ; the throat is 
very red and inflamed, feels sore; there is profuse discharge of 
saliva ; there may some difficulty in swallowing and there is often 
a general sick feeling. The trouble is not hard to recognize 
and every mother of any experience is quite familiar with this 
form of throat trouble. 

Treatmerit — This form of sore throat is more common in child- 
ren but may occur in adults. The person takes a cold and it 
is noticed that the throat is somewhat sore. Upon examining 
the throat, it is seen to be red and the blood vessels stand out 
clear and distinct. The throat is much congested and the first 
thing to be thought of is the removal of the congestion. To do 
this, dissolve three or four tablets of No. 12 in a teacupful of hot 
water and gargle the thoat with this every hour ; in addition spray 
the throat every three hours with a solution made by dissolving 
four tablets of No. 3 in a teacupful of hot water. No other treat- 
ment will be necessary. 



378 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

Chronic Catarrh of the Throat — Chronic Pharyn- 
gitis — The same thing that is true in nasal catarrh is equally 
true in catarrh of the throat — if the acute catarrh is not treated 
but is allowed to get well without treatment, and this occurs time 
after time, it will not be a great while until the inflammation 
will not leave during the intervals between the attacks, and the 
disease is then chronic, or, in other words, the patient now has 
chronic catarrh of the throat. Some signs which will aid in 
recognizing the chronic disease are here given. The throat is 
raw most of the time and feels sore and disagreeable; the mucous 
membrane is covered most of the time with a thick mucus ; much 
time is spent in the morning in clearing the throat; the matter 
raised in the morning is thick and stringy or in hard, scab-like 
pieces; a cough is very often present; the breath is very offensive 
at times, and the patient is in rather poor health most of the 
time. The conditions are very common, and although they may 
vary somewhat from this description, the trouble is not hard to 
recognize as it is a disease which is present all of the time and 
differs from the acute form only in the fact that it is more severe. 

Treatment — In the treatment of this form of catarrh, the first 
thing to be looked after is that the parts be kept clean and free 
from irritating discharges at all times. To accomplish this, gar- 
gle the throat three times each day with a solution made by dis- 
solving three tablets of No. 3 in a teacupful of water. Having 
thoroughly cleansed the parts, stimulate the weak glands to nor- 
mal action, strengthen the tissues in general and use a remedy 
which will cause 2My parts which are swelled to shrink up; in 
other words, use a stimulating astringent and such a remedy is 
here given: Tincture of iodine, 10 drops; tannic acid, 15 grains; 
pure glycerine, 1 ounce. Mix thoroughly, allow to stand for 
twenty-four hours, apply to the throat twice a day with a swab, 
and rub gently, but for a considerable time. In this treatment 
the rubbing will count for much and should be done carefully, 
regularly, and without using too much force. 

Follicular Pharyngitis — There is a form of chronic throat 
trouble which is known by this name. This form is not pro- 
duced by the continued taking of cold, but is a disease in 
itself. In this disease the throat has the appearance of a piece of 



HEALTH AT HOME. 379 

raw beef with the exception that all along the back of throat may- 
be seen little bunches from the size of a pinhead to that of the 
half of a pea. These little bunches will be seen to be composed 
of mucous membrane and are quite firm and solid. They bleed 
quite easily, are covered with a thick glairy mucus, cause much 
irritation in the throat, and cause the spitting of small amounts of 
blood. The secretions of the throat are made less moist by them 
and as a result the throat will be filled with scabs of dry mucus 
in the morning when the patient awakens. During his waking 
hours the patient will be hawking and trying to raise the tena- 
cious mucus much of the time. The conditions here described 
are often met with and if on looking into the throat the little 
bunches which have been described are found, there need be no 
doubt as to the disease. 

Treatment — Cleanse the throat many times each day by spray- 
ing with a solution made by dissolving three tablets of No. 3 in a 
half teacupful of water. Immediately after each cleansing, spray 
the throat with some mild oil such as liquid vaseline or lavoline. 
Once each day carefully swab the throat with the following: 
Argentum nitrate, 10 grains; aqua distilled, 1 ounce. Mix thor- 
oughly, shake the bottle each time before using, keep the bottle 
in the dark when not in use and be careful not to touch the skin 
with any of the solution. It will not do any particular damage 
but will turn the skin so touched black, and this color will remain 
for some time. 

Inflammation of the Uvula or Hanging Palate — 

This affection of the uvula and diseases of the tonsils in general 
have already been described in this book and may be found un- 
der their respective heads. 

Acute I/aryngitis — The large cartilage which may be seen 
and felt in the throat just Under the chin and which is often 
spoken of as "Adam's apple" is kown to medical men as the 
larynx. The larynx acts as a passageway for the air and is also 
the place where the voice originates. Inclosed within its walls 
are some very delicate structures and diseases of these structures 
sometimes occur, the most common of these being acute laryngitis. 
By acute laryngitis is meant an inflammation of the mucous mem- 
brane which lines the larynx, which inflammation is acute and 



380 HEAI/TH AT HOME. 

is accompanied by an extra supply of blood to the part, a moder- 
ate amount of swelling and a very slight increase in the secre- 
tions. This disease is not a serious one and the patient will 
always recover, but it is a very disagreeable affair, as the voice 
is always affected and many times is lost entirely. This loss of 
the voice need not mean any serious trouble, however, and m 
acute laryngitis is "only a temporary , loss, the voice eventually 
returning with its full vigor. It is nearly always true that when 
acute laryngitis is found there is some trouble with the balance 
ot the throat or with the nose, and it is rare indeed that a laryn- 
gitis occurs alone. Hence, recurring attacks of hoarseness, with 
loss of the voice, should alwa3^s call attention to the probable 
existence of some diseased condition of the throat above. This 
disease is sometimes caused by inhaling irritating vapors such as 
chlorine, iodine, ammonia, sulphur, etc., or from breathing 
tobacco smoke or dense smoke of any kind. Overuse of the 
voice in public speaking, singing or shouting may also bring on 
an attack of acute la^ngitis. Men are more liable to attacks than 
women, simply from the fact that they are more exposed to colds 
and more often are sufferers from some form of chronic catarrh. 

Symptoms and Signs — The most common sign is the hoarse- 
ness of the voice, which may later on be lost entirely. The com- 
plete loss of the voice is rare, however, and cases are seldom met 
with where some sort of sound cannot be made if sufficient effort 
be made. Where loss of the voice does occur :it is due to the 
swelling of the vocal cords; they become so thick as to be unable 
to produce sound w T hen the air is forced against them. Patients 
with this trouble usually speak in a w r hisper, as speaking out loud 
requires quite an effort. There is nearly always a cough present 
and this is such a cough as is seen when an effort is made to throw 
some foreign substance from the throat. The cough is ; not very 
troublesome, however. There is usually some soreness about the 
throat, but actual and severe pain is rarely present. Occasionally 
there is some loss of appetite and some headache but these things 
are rare. 

Treatment — First carefully spray the throat with a solution 
made by dissolving three tablets of No. 3 in a half teacupful of 
water. While using the spray, draw the breath in that the spray 
mixture may reach the diseased parts ; follow this with the follow- 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 381 

ing : Chloride*of zinc, 5 grains ; distilled water, 1 ounce. Mix 
thoroughly and use as a spray in the same manner that No. 3 was 
used. Once every two hours inhale the steam from a teakettle of 
boiling water; place a few drops of any one of the following in 
the water before beginning to inhale : Compound tincture of ben- 
zoin, camphor, oil of tar, creosote, oil of eucalyptus, oil of turpen- 
tine, or oil of peppermint. The use of No. 31 will give a certain 
amount of relief in cases of this sort. To use the remedy place 
one tablet on the tongue and allow it to remain there until it dis- 
solves. This may be repeated every half hour or every hour. 

Chronic I/aryngitis — By this is meant a chronic inflamma- 
tion of the mucous membrane lining the cavity of the larnyx and 
which is catarrhal in character. A very great many people suf- 
fer from this affection and are not caused any inconvenience 
whatever by its presence. In fact, when this trouble is chronic, 
it is quite mild and gives rise to but a small amount of discom- 
fort. To the public speaker or the professional singer such an 
affection is a source of constant annoyance and trouble. Chronic 
laryngitis is many times caused by chronic diseased conditions of 
the passages above the larynx. The disease is also produced by 
the constant breathing of irritating dusts and such persons as 
millers, workers in tobacco factories, and those engaged in like 
industries are liable to have this trouble. 

Symptoms and Signs — The most prominent symptom is some 
trouble with the voice. This is not usually noticeable in the 
ordinary use of the voice but should the patient attempt to use 
the voice for a short time under a strain, a very pronounced 
hoarseness will be noticed. The voice will be quiet clear in the 
morning and will gradually grow more hoarse until at evening a 
very considerable hoarseness will be noticed. 

Treatment — First see that all of the passages above the larynx 
are in a healthy condition, as this disease in many cases depends 
upon some diseased condition of the upper air passages. Use the 
spray with No. 3 as directed in acute laryngitis; once each day 
spray the throat with a solution made by dissolving five grains of 
sulphate of zinc in one ounce of distilled water, and several 
times each day spray the throat with the following : Beechwood 



382 HEALTH AT HOME. 

creosote, 15 drops; oleate of strychnia, 5 drops; eucalyptol, 120 
drops ; lavoline, 2 ounces. Mix thoroughly and use as spray. 

Foreign Bodies in the Air Passages — The entrance of 
a foreign body into the lower air passages may give rise to more 
or less grave symptoms, according to the size, character and loca- 
tion of the foreign body. A great many articles, such as pins, 
coins, particles of food, peas, beans, and, in fact, an almost end- 
less number of things, may make their way into the breathing 
tract during the act of breathing, chewing or swallowing. These 
articles find their way into the passages in a great many ways, 
but once being lodged it is no trouble to recognize the diffi- 
culty. 

Treatment — If a foreign body should become lodged in the air 
passages of a child, immediately turn the child head downward 
and by spanking cause the child to cry lustily. This will many 
times dislodge the object. If it does not, try jerking the child 
while the head is down. This, however, must be done with 
some care that the child be not injured in any way. These 
means failing, an attempt may be made to reach the object 
with the finger. Grasp the tongue with a towel and pull it well 
out, then insert a finger which has been previously well oiled and 
endeavor to loosen the object; it is well to do this while the 
child has the head lowered. Should these methods fail, a 
physician had best be called, or a physician may be sent for 
while these things are being tried and when he comes he can 
operate if necessary. In the treatment of adults the same pro- 
cess is tollowed as nearly as can be. Vomiting will often dis- 
lodge a foreign body. 

Spray Mixtures — Below are given a few spray mixtures and 
some of the uses to which they may be put. 

Beech wood creosote, 15 drops; oleate of strychnia, 5 drops; 
eucalyptol, 120 drops; lavoline, 2 ounces. 

Mix thoroughly and use as a spray in all cases of severe bron- 
chitis or in any case where consumption of the lungs may be 
feared. 

Eucalyptol, 3 parts ; oil of tar, 3 parts ; lavoline, 96 parts. Mix 
thoroughly and use as spray in any sort of purulent discharge 
from the nose. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 383 

Camphenate of cocaine, 10 parts ; oil of gaultheria, 2 parts ; 
lavoline, 98 parts. Mix thoroughly and use as a spray in irri- 
tated conditions of the nose such as hay fever. 

Eucalyptol, 10 parts; guaiacol, 10 parts; menthol, 4 parts; thy- 
mol, 2 parts; oil of caryophylli, 1 part; lavoline, 973 parts. Mix 
thoroughly and use as a spray in any sort of nose or throat catarrh. 

Salol, 30 parts ; menthol, 4 parts ; lavoline, 966 parts. Mix 
thoroughly and use as a spray in acute inflammations of the 
throat. 

These receipts together with the solution of No. 3 as directed 
will be all that will be required in any case of nose or throat 
trouble. 



THE REMEDIES AND THEIR 
CONTENTS. 



Note — In each case following, the average adult dose of 
the remedy is given unless otherwise noted. The dose for child- 
ren of various ages may be determined by the use of the 
dosage table found on page 224. 

No. I. Boracic Acid. This remedy is used principally ex- 
ternally as a wash. The adult dose is one tablet. Is used 
internally as an antiseptic for the intestinal and urinary tracts. 

No. 2. Sodium Bicarbonate. The adult dose is one tablet 
every four to six hours. Is used in indigestion whenever the 
stomach is acid. 

No. 3. Sodium Bicarbonate, Sodium Borate, Sodium Ben- 
zoate, Sodium Salicylate, Sodium Chloride, Kucalyptol, Thymol, 
Menthol, Oil of Gaultheria. This is not used internally, but is 
used externally as an antiseptic cleansing wash ; is used in catarrh 
of the nose and throat, and as an injection in female diseases. 

No. 4. Magnesium Sulphate. The adult dose is from one to 
ten tablets. Is used as a saline cathartic and is given in diarrhea 
to cleanse the bowels. 

No. 5. Sodium Biborate. The adult dose is one tablet. Is 
used for indigestion and diarrhea in infants and is also used to 
correct acidity of the stomach. 

No. 6. Ferrous Carbonate, Extract Nux Vomica. The adult 
dose is one tablet before each meal. Is used as a general tonic. 

No. 7. Potassium Bromide. The adult dose is one to ten tab- 
lets. Is used to quiet nervousness and to combat sleeplessness. 

No. 8. Powdered Nux Vomica, Pure Pepsin. The adult 
dose is one tablet after each meal. Is used as a digestive and as 
a tonic. 



HEALTH AT HOME- 385 

No. 9. Hydrargium Chloride Mite, Sodium Bicarbonate. 
This remedy is used most often for children ; the dose, however, 
is the same for all ages. It is one tablet every hour until the 
bowels move freely. Is used as a purgative. 

No. 10. Zinc Phosphide, Extract Nux Vomica, Extract Can- 
nabis Indica. The adult dose is one tablet three times a day 
before meals. Is used as a nerve tonic and to produce sleep. 

No. II. Tincture Aconite, Tartar Emetic, Powdered Ipecac, 
Codeine Sulphate. The adult dose is one tablet every one, two 
or three hours as required. The dose for children above the age 
of ten is the same. For children younger than ten use the regu- 
lar child's dosage table on p. 224. 

No. 12. Potassium Chlorate. The dose of this drug for 
adults and children is the same — one tablet dissolved in the mouth 
every two or three hours. Is used for sore throat. 

No. 13. Acetanilid. The adult dose is one tablet every two 
to four hours. Is used for fever, headache, neuralgia, etc. 

No. 14. Salol. The adult dose is one tablet every two to 
three hours. Is used to reduce fever, as an intestinal antiseptic 
in acute diarrhea, dysentery and cholera ; is ^used in diseases of 
the bladder, in acute rheumatism, etc. 

No. 15. Powdeied Ipecac, Powdered Opium, Camphor Gum. 
The adult dose is one to three tablets every three or four hours. 
Is used to produce quiet, stop pain, and to start the kidneys. 

No. 16. Aloin, Belladonna Podophyllin, Extract Nux Vomica. 
The adult dose is from one to four tablets. Use 'enough to pro- 
duce the desired effect. Is used as a cathartic and bowel tonic ; 
is especially useful in chronic constipation. 

No. 17. Reduced Iron, Arenous Acid, Extract Nux Vomica. 
The adult dose is one tablet after each meal. Is used to aid 
digestion and as a general tonic. 

No. 18. Tartar Emetic. The dose for children is one tablet 
every ten to fifteen minutes until vomiting is produced. Is used 
to produce vomiting in children whenever such a thing is desired. 



386 HKAI/fH AT HOME. 

No. 19. Nickel Bromide, Codeine Sulphate, lithium Carbon- 
ate, Powdered Ipecac, Oil of Anise. The adult dose is one or 
two tablets every fifteen minutes until the patient is quiet. The 
same dose may be given to children eight years old and over; 
for younger children use the dosage table on p. 224. Is used for 
colic, stomachache, restlessness, etc. 

No. 20. Bismuth Subnitrate, Powdered Ipecac, Powdered 
Opium. This remedy is for infants and young children. The 
dose is one tablet every two to three hours until the bowels are 
checked. Is used to check and control diarrhea in children. 

No. 21 Santonin, Podophyllin. This remedy is for children. 
The dose is one tablet every hour until the bowels move. Should 
tne child be very young, give one tablet every two hours. Is 
used to remove round worms from the intestinal tract. 

No. 2,2,. Antimony Sulphuret, Powdered Ipecac. The dose 
for both children and adults is one tablet every ten to fifteen 
minutes until vomiting is produced. Is used in cases of spas- 
modic croup. 

No. 23. Ammonium Chloride, Extract Hyoscyamus, Tartar 
Emetic. The dose for adults and children above the age of twelve 
is one tablet every three to four hours ; for younger children use 
the dosage table on p. 224. Is used for the relief of cough. 

No. 24. Arsenous Acid, Potassium Bicarbonate, Tincture of 
Lavender. The adult dose is : begin with one tablet three times 
a day before meals and add one tablet to each dose each day until 
ten tablets are being taken. Should ^the use of the remedy be 
stopped, and it is desired to start it again, start with one tablet 
three times a day and work up again. Is useful in some forms 
of skin diseases, is very useful in patients just recovering from 
attacks of la grippe, and is used as a nerve tonic. 

No. 25. Powdered Opium. The adult dose is one tablet 
every hour, if necessary. Is used to stop pain, to produce rest 
and to check diarrhea. 

No. 2,6. Extract Licorice, Camphor, Benzoic Acid, Oil of 
Ainse, Powdered Opium, Tartar Emetic. The adult dose is one 
tablet dissolved in the mouth every hour or two. The dose for 



HEALTH AT HOME. 387 

children is from one-fourth to one-half tablet used in the same 
manner. Is used for cough and is especially good for a cough 
which is not severe but rather irritating, or, as it is commonly 
called, a "tickling" cough. 

No. 27. Quinine Sulphate. The dose of this remedy varies 
from one tablet every hour to one tablet three times a day before 
meals. The dosage is given in the body of the book and the use 
of the drug is so well understood by every one that there is no 
danger but that it will be used correctly. The average adult dose 
is one tablet every two hours. Is used in malarial and other 
fevers, and also as a general tonic. 

No. 28. Tincture Digitalis, Tincture Strophanthus, Tincture 
Belladona, Nitroglycerine. The adult dose is one or two tablets 
every two hours. Is used as a stimulant for the heart. 

No. 29. Powdered Opium, Camphor Gum. The adult dose 
is one tablet and this remedy is not used for children. Is used 
to check diarrhea and tablets are given one or two hours apart. 

No. 30. Acetanilid, Camphor Monobromate, Citrate of 
Caffeine. The adult dose is one tablet every hour until relieved. 
Is used for headache and neuralgia. 

No. 31. Benzoic Acid, Camphorated Tincture of Opium, 
Tincture Belladonna, Extract Licorice. The dose for all persons 
above the age of twelve years is one tablet dissolved on the 
tongue every three to four hours. For younger persons use the 
dosage table on p. 224. Is used in all form of sore throat. 

No. 33. Emetine. This remedy is not to be used for child- 
ren. The adult dose is one tablet every ten to fifteen minutes 
until vomiting is produced. Is used when it is desired to pro- 
duce vomiting in an adult for any reason whatever. 

No. 33, Pure Pepsin, Diasase, Extract Nux Vomica, Pow- 
dered Ipecac. The adult dose is one tablet three times a day 
after meals. Is used to aid digestion and to stimulate the natural 
secretions. 

No. 34. Powdered Opium, Camphor, Powdered Ipecac, Lead 
Acetate. The adult dose is one tablet every hour until five doses 
have been given, then one tablet after each loose movement from 
the bowels. Is used to check and control diarrhea. 



388 HEALTH AT HOME. 

No. 35. Zinc Phosphide, Strychnia Sulphate, Extract Can- 
nabis Indica, Sodium Arsenate, Aconitine. The adult dose is 
one tablet every one to four hours. Is used in neuralgia of any 
sort. 

No. 36. Salycilic Acid. The adult dose is one or two^tablets 
every two hours. Is used in muscular and inflammatory rheu- 
matism. 

No. 37. Resin Guaiac, Extract Poke Root, Potassium Iodide, 
Colchicine, Digitalin. The adult dose is one or two tablets three 
times a day after meals. Is used for muscular and inflammatory 
rheumatism. 

No. 38. Corrosive Sublimate. This is a violent POISON 
and is not to be taken internally at all. Is used to make antisep- 
tic solutions for the cleansing of wounds, etc. 

No. 39. Quinine Sulphate, Dover's Powder, Powdered Cap- 
sicum, Tincture Aconite. The adult dose is one to three tablets 
at night and one tablet every three hours during the day. Is 
used to break up a cold and will be found to be a very valuable 
remedy if used as directed. 

No. 40. Iodoform, Vaseline. An ointment used for all cuts, 
burns, scalds, bruises, and wherever a healing ointment is desired. 

No. 41. Vaseline. Used as No. 40. 

No. 42, Carbolic Acid, Vaseline. Used as No. 40. 



INDEX OF SYMPTOMS. 



As an aid in diagnosing disease, the following short index of symptoms is 
presented. It is very easy to recognize one sign or symptom, but it is often 
quite difficult to place the various symptoms in the order in which they may 
be used to determine the disease. 

Before attempting to use the index of symptoms, caref uly read the chapter on 
"Observation of Symptoms" on page 142, and the section on "Symptoms and 
Diagnosis or Naming the Disease, ' ' on page 216 These will call your attention 
to the points to be observed. Having by careful observation determined the 
symptoms present, you are ready to proceed. In the Index, turn to the most 
prominent symptom discovered, and note the various pages referred to under 
this symptom. By turning to the pages referred to it will be easy to determine 
upon which page most of the symptoms are found. 

The same result may be obtained bv noting all the symptoms present, and by 
turning to the index, making a list of all the pages given under each symptom. 
Turn to those pages first which are found the greatest number of times in the 
lists, and caiefully read the description of the disease and all the symptoms 
there given. If this does not discover the disease, select other pages in the 
same manner until the desired result is obtained. For example, a person is 
suddenly taken sick and vomits violently, has a chill followed by a high fever, 
the throat is sore and inflamed. Turn to the headings, chill, followed by high 
fever, high fever, throat, sore and inflamed, and vomiting, and it is discovered 
that page 286 occurs under each. Looking on page 286, these symptoms are 
all discovered there, and in addition other symptoms. Among the distinctive 
symptoms there given is a rash or eruption upon which, when the finger nail 
is drawn across it, a white line or mark is left. If this rash appears on the 
patient and most of the other symptoms agree, then it may safely be assumed 
that the patient has scarlet fever, but if the symptoms do not agree, and the 
rash is not present, then other diseases must be looked for in which the symp- 
toms do agree. 



Abscess, see Boils. 
Abdomen, see Stomach. 
Distended, 173. 
Distended and tender when pressed 

upon, 339. 
Feeling of weight and soreness in 

abdomen on right side above hip 

bone, 180. 
Hard and tense, 176. 
Hard and somewhat distended, 251. 



Pain in abdomen, 183, 341, 342; burn- 
ing and tearing, 177; severe cut- 
ting and boring, and abdomen is 
tense, hard and bloated, 181. 

Puffed out or drawn in, 174. 

Sunken, 248. 

Swells considerably, 182. 

Swells and sounds hollow when 
thumped upon, 257. 

Tender, 301. 



390 



HEALTH AT HOME. 



Ache, see Pain. 

Appetite, capricious, 175, 202. 

Loss of, 154, 158, 159, 164, 171, 173, 
176, 181, 182, 184, 200, 201, 246, 
255, 266, 287, 304. 
Belching, 175. 
Bladder, see Kidneys. 
Bleeding, see Hemorrhage. 
Blood vessels, hard, tortuous and some- 
times bony, 170. 
Stand out on face and forehead while 
coughing, 295. 
Boils and Abscesses, 152, 284. 
Bowels, see Constipation and Diarrhea. 
Desire to evacuate almost constant, 

154. 
Desire to move but usually consti- 
pated, 176. 
Irregularity in movements from, 154. 
Gas in, 251. 
Brain, rupture of vessels in, 171. 
Breath, bad, 159, 171, 202, 243, 

251, 378. 
Breathing, difficult, 161, 168, 182, 199, 
339, 340. 
Difficult and wheezing, 160. 
Difficult and noisy, 259, 297. 
Difficult while coughing, 295. 
Irregular and rapid, 193, 232, 248, 

344. 
Irregular and slow, 189, 280. 
Mouth breathing, 241, 242, 243. 
Rapid, 162, 169, 191, 263, 266. 
Rapid and shallow, 164, 167, 257. 
Slow and shallow, 172, 276. 
Chest, see Lungs. 
Distress in, 161. 
Fixed and immovable, 169. 
Fluid between lungs and chest walls, 

167. 
Irritation in, 160. 
Lower part sunken in, 164. 
Movements decreased over affected 

parts, 167. 
Pain in, 264, 265; sharp in one par- 
ticular spot, 270. 



Sounds in, crackling or squeaking, 
167; crackling which cough does 
not change, 270; dull, which 
changes when position changes, 
271; moist and bubbling, 158; 
slight rattling or crackling, 162; 
small and large bubbling sounds, 
164; rattling, 263, 266; rough, 
rasping, 261. 

Soreness in, 159. 

Tenderness to pressure, 167. 
Chill, 153, 155, 166, 167, 175, 177, 180, 
242, 285, 288, 297, 304. 

Followed by fever, 181, 200, 301. 

Slight, 175, 177. 

Violent, 151, 162. 
Circulation, of the blood, poor, 232, 

233, 250. 
Cold, bad, 290; moderately severe, 294. 

In nose and head, 263. 

In nose and throat, 158. 
Colic, 30, 177, 183, 229, 251, 252, 255, 
340, 341, 344. 

During digestion of a meal, 181. 

Gallstone colic, 183. 
Cough, see Expectoration, 161, 240, 241, 
266, 301, 339, 377, 380. 

Dry and hard, 158, 159. 

Explosive, 295. 

Hacking, 161, 166, 167, 270. 

Hoarse and croupy, 161, 259, 260. 

Paroxysmal, 294, 295. 

Short, 168. 

Tight, 264, 265. 

With rust colored expectoration, 162. 
Constipation, 154, 158, 173, 175, 176, 
179, 182, 184, 201, 202, 203, 235, 
251, 252, 253, 280. 
Convulsions, 190, 277, 280, 294, 339. 

Slight twitching or sudden convul- 
sion, 276. 

Violent, 343. 
Cramps, in muscles and especially in 
calves, thighs, fingers and toes, 
177; in muscles, 201. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 



391 



Cry, low distressed moan, 280. 
Sharp and piercing, 251. 
Single peculiar, 277. 
Deafness, 189, 301. 

Defect in hearing, 190. 
Delirium, 151, 152, 267, 298, 341, 345. 
With snakes, horrors, etc., 153, 190. 
With throwing hands and arms about 
head, 280, 301, 304. 
Depression, 169, 172, 173, 200, 202, 301. 
Easily depressed, emotional and 
whimsical, 194. 
Diarrhea, 153, 176, 242, 247, 248, 286, 
301, 341, 344, 345. 
Bowels move so freely as to produce 

purging, 172, 177. 
Moderate, 154, 164, 182, 198, 232, 238. 
Severe, 154. 
Digestion, disturbed, 153, 160, 162, 166, 
173, 187, 233. 
Indigestion, 174, 175, 195, 301. 
Dizziness, see Faintness. 
Dropsy, 182, 198, 199. 
Drowsiness, 175, 291, 304, 343. 
Dyspepsia, see Digestion. 
Ears, ache, 284. 

Inflammation in, 287. 
Noises in, 189, 191, 342. 
Running from, 291. 
Eruption, blisters form on pimples and 
pus in blisters about the eighth 
day, 152. 
Bright scarlet, tiny points; passing 
finger nail over rash leaves white 
line, 286. 
Coarse red spots appearing on third 
day, first upon forehead and lips, 
151. 
Dark red spots first appearing behind 
ears and gradually speading over 
body, 291. 
Eczema, 283. 

Large irregular patches on face, and 
of size of pinhead to that of a pea 
on body, giving skin shotty feel- 
ing, 292. 



Pimples upon face or scalp which 

slowly spread and increase in size 

and which have little blisters on 

them ; the blisters dry and form 

pits, 293. 
Pus forms in pimples and fever rises, 

152. 
Red spots which run together and 

spread, appear after chill, 153. 
Red spots along spine, 280. 
Resembling flee bites upon back, 

chest and abdomen, 301. 
Rose colored eruption on skin, 340. 
Sweat rash, 282; prickly heat, 282. 
Tiny eruption with much itching, 345. 
Expectoration, bloody, 378. 
Brownish red and yellow, 266. 
Consistence of cheese, 243. 
Of glairy mucus, 166. 
Rust colored, 162. 
Scanty blood streaked, 161, 
Thick stringy and yellowish, 159. 
Eyes, see Sight. 

Bloodshot, 151, 161, 189, 191, 226, 

258, 290, 340, 351, 352. 
Fixed stare for a moment, 276, 277. 
Lids swell, 352. 
Light is painful, 290, 304. 
Pain in and about, 330, 351, 352. 
Pupils small, 189, 338, 344. 
Pupils large, 280, 343. 
Sunken, 202, 248. 
Thick creamy discharge and lids 

swell, 226. 
Watery eyes, 160, 161, 252. 
Whites of eyes yellow, 182, 184, 342. 
Face, anxious look, 167. 

Breaking out or rash on, 283, 291. 
Dark circles under eyes, 202, 251. 
Dull and stupid expression, 241. 
Flushed and bathed in perspiration, 

160. 
Light yellow color, 226. 
Pale, 191, 199, 202, 261, 276, 277. 
Pinched features and sunken eyes, 

181; and shows pain, 183. 



392 



HEALTH AT HOME. 



Pinched look, 154, 172, 174, 176, 
203, 248, 251, 257. 
Puffiness under eyes, 198. 
Puffy and swollen, 198, 202. 
Red and purple while coughing, 295. 
Red, 151, 162, 189, 267. 
Faintness, feeling of, 174, 189, 190, 194, 

197, 199, 301, 338, 341, 342. 
Feet and Legs, ankles swollen, 174, 234. 
Cold, 174, 197, 232. 233, 248, 249, 

251, 257, 289. 
Gangrene of, 171. 
Legs and arms deformed, 235. 
Limbs jerk, 189. 
Numbness in feet, 187, 189. 
Pain and soreness in, 184, 187, 203. 
Fever, slight, 154, 155, 158, 164, 166, 
167, 171, 175, 180, 181, 182, 184, 
188, 198, 200, 270, 290, 293, 296, 
297, 298, 301. 
High, 151, 153, 156, 162, 240, 242, 

248, 256, 266, 280, 286, 290, 301, 
304. 

Secondary fever, 152. 
Fretful, see Restlessness. 
Gas in intestines and bowels. 251, 255, 

301. 
Gums, swollen and bleed easily, 202, 

234, 239. 
Hands, cold, 174, 197, 232, 233, 248, 

249, 251, 257, 298. 

Hands and arms deformed, 235. 
Hands difficult to use, 278. 
Hands and arms thrown about head, 
280. 
Hard palate, covered with red spots, 

286, 291. 
Head, rush of blood to, 189. 
Headache, 151, 155, 156, 162, 171, 175, 
184, 185, 189, 197, 199, 203, 266, 
270, 279,280, 291, 296, 297,300,304, 
338, 340, 341, 342, 343, 344, 350. 
Constant and gradually growing 
worse, 190. 
Heart, action interfered with, 166, 167, 
182, 343. 



Distress about, 168. 

Palpitates, 161, 175, 194, 197, 199, 
202. 

Severe, sickening pain in, 169. 

Weak, 342. 
Heartburn, 171, 175. 
Heat flashes, 171, 179. 
Hemorrhage, from bowels, 178, 202,234, 
252. 

From lungs, 166, 315. 

From nose, 258, 295, 298, 301, 316, 
374. 

From mouth, 202, 234. 

From stomach, 202, 234, 315. 

From uterus, 316; during labor, 335. 

In general, 313. 
Hiccough, 181, 194. 
Hoarseness. See Voice. 
Inflammation, about anus, 178. 

Of bowels, 256. 

Of covering of lungs, 270. 

Of ears, 287. 

Of mouth and throat, 304, 339. 

Of tonsils, 242. 

In general, 206. 
Joints, pain and stiffness in, 200. 

Swelling about, 234, 281. 
Kidneys and bladder, pain about, 187, 

198, 202, 275, 288. 
Lassitude, 30, 155, 158, 175, 184, 197, 

202, 291. 
Lips, blue, 155, 259, 276. 

Pale, 202, 255. 

Dry, 237, 267, 304. 

Sore and cracked, 267, 298. 
Liver, pain about, 183, 184, 342. 
Lungs, see Chest. 

Bleeding from, 315. 

Congested, 168. 
Memory, confused, 277. 

Poor, 175, 189, 197, 203. 
Mind, confused somewhat, 277. 

Disturbed by peculiar fancies, 343. 

Irritable and weak, 197. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 



393 



Mouth, bad taste in, 171. 

Breathing through, 242, 243. 

Try, 296, 344. 

Free discharge from, 298. 

Inflamed, 238, 239, 339, 341. 

Taste of copper or metal in, 341. 

White and looks burned, 338. 
Muscles, shrink, 186. 

Flabby, 234, 240. 

Pain in, 201. 

Twitching of, 276, 278. 

Weak, 298, 301. 
Nails, blue, 155. 

Nausea, slight, 154, 155, 156, 176, 181, 
182, 184, 190, 198, 301, 344. 

Very severe, 172, 173. 
Nervousness, 194, 197, 203, 237, 251, 

302. 
Night sweats, 166, 302. 
Nose, discharge from, 160, 161, 241, 
258, 259, 290, 297, 298, 304, 372, 
376. 

Bleeds, 153, 162, 295, 298, 301, 316, 
374. 

Nasal voice, 241. 

Plugged, 258. 
Numbness, 193, 341. 
Feet numb, 187. 

Finger tips numb, 339. 
Odor to breath, 171, 174, 202, 251. 

To stools disagreeable, 248, 251, 302. 

To urine, sweetish, 202. 

Peculiar about sick person, 152. 
Pain, about bladder, 200. 

About joints, 200, 201. 

About nerves, 185. 

Burning in rectum, 154, 178. 

Constant in pit of stomach, 173. 

Cutting, tearing, pinching, and 
twitsing over abdomen, 176. 

Colicky, 154, 174, 176. 

Dull in back and over kidneys, 198. 

In abdomen, 182, 183, 257, 341, 342, 
344. 

In back, 151, 173, 202, 242, 264, 265, 
280, 291, 296. 



In bowels, 154. 

In entire body, 158, 266, 304. 

In chest, 158. 

In ears, 284. 

In and about the eyes, 350. 

In limbs, 187, 203, 296. 

In heart, intense sickening, 169. 

In lungs, 162, 253, 264, 265, 270. 

In muscles, 201, 242. 

In side, 164, 167, 180. 

Neuralgic, 199, 

Sudden piercing in region of liver, 
183, 184. 

Upon swallowing, 240. 
Paralvsis, 186, 188, 189, 341. 

Of vocal cords, 190. 

Sudden of any part of the body, 193. 

Sensations blunted, 188. 
Perspiration, clammy, 172, 177, 232. 

Gentle soft, 174. 

On head, 156, 169, 235. 

Profuse at night, 302. 
Pits, 152, 294. 
Potbelly, 236. 

Prostration, marked, 162, 166, 191. 
Pulse, strong and rapid, 151, 156, 158, 
161, 162, 198, 201, 260, 266, 301. 

Weak and rapid, 153, 154, 164, 167, 
172, 177, 183, 191, 232, 248, 257, 
259, 287, 298, 301, 304, 338, 339, 
340, 342, 343. 

Slow, 189, 280, 338, 343, 344. 

Hard and tense, 170, 176, 181. 

Irregular, 170, 174, 338. 
Purging, 177. 
Rash, see Eruption. 
Restlessness, 153, 174, 237, 255, 279, 
280. 

At night, 235, 279. 

Fretfulness, 248, 250, 257. 
Scabs and crusts, 151, 283, 294. 
Sight, interfered with, 188, 189, 190, 

191, 199, 301, 304, 343. 

Flashes of light, 189. 

Floating spots before eyes, 342. 



394 



HEALTH AT HOME. 



Skin, blue, 188, 340, 342. 

Cold and clammy, 172, 176, 177, 191, 

232, 248, 261. 

Cold, 176, 181, 183, 191, 340. 

Cool and rough, 154. 

Covered with rash, 287, 291, 293, 
343, 345. 

Dry, harsh and itchy, 183, 291. 

Goose-flesh appearance, 155. 

Hot and dry, 156, 158, 191, 198, 203, 
267. 

Irregular about blood vessels, 170. 

Muddy color, 184, 202, 251. 

Pale, 155, 166, 174, 231, 233, 234, 
242, 243, 248, 250, 302. 

Red, irritated and swollen, 345. 

Scales off, 153, 291. 

Sensitive, 185. 

Yellow color, 226, 342. 
Sleeplessness, 151, 153, 162, 173, 175, 
189, 190, 197, 200, 201, 233, 237, 
248, 250, 251, 252, 301, 343. 
Smell, see Odor. 
Sneezing, 160, 161, 258, 290. 
Snoring, 243. 
Spasm, see Convulsions. 
Stomach, see Abdomen. 

Bleeding from, 315. 

Bloated, 174, 246. 

Burning feeling in, 172, 173. 

Distress in and about, 153, 171, 173, 
174, 175, 177, 182, 245, 246, 342, 
344. 

Gas in, 171, 175. 

Heaviness, 171, 173, 174, 175, 245. 

Sour, 174. 
Stools, bloody, 154, 178, 252, 341. 

Dry, 202. 

Disagreeable odor, 248, 251, 302. 

Frequent, 248, 302. 

Pale, 202, 251, 302. 

Undigested food in stools, 232, 246. 

Watery, 176, 177, 248, 342. 
Swallowing, difficulty in, 239, 240, 242, 
291. 



Swelling, of ankles, legs or abdomen, 
166, 174, 182, 198. 

Of eyelids, 352. 

Of face, 152, 198, 296, 352. 

Of jaw, 296. 

Of joints, 180, 201, 234, 281. 

Of skin, 153, 345. 
Sweating, see Perspiring. 
Temperature, see Fever. 
Teeth, become loose, 202. 

Chatter, 155. 

Grind, 251, 255. 
Thirst, intense, 153, 173, 177, 201, 202, 
248, 343. 

Moderate, 155, 158, 171, 172. 
Throat, dryness of, 172, 240, 343, 374. 

Deposit in, 297, 378. 

Foreign bodies in, 382. 

Feeling, as of ball in, 194. 

Hoarseness, 380, 381. 

Inflamed, 286, 297, 304, 339, 341, 377, 
378. 

Raw, 378, 380, 381. 

Rattling in, 276. 

Spasms, in 261. 

Sore, 286, 290, 297, 340, 377. 

Tonsils swollen, 240, 243. 

White and looks burned, 338. 
Tired feeling, see Lassitude. 
Tonsils, see Throat. 
Tongue, coated, 153, 154, 171, 182, 184, 
238, 239, 246, 248, 250, 251, 281, 
301, 304. 

Covered with small white spots, 239. 

Dry, 297. 

Bdges red, 238. 

Swollen, 239. 
Tumors, of brain, 190. 

In abdomen on right side over hip, 
180. 

Protruding from anus, 178. 
Veins, stand out clearly, 168. 
Voice, affected, 191, 243, 381. 

Hoarse, 154, 260, 380, 381. 

Loss of, 298, 380. 

Nasal, 241, 258. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 



395 



Vomiting, 151, 159, 162, 167, 173, 174, 
176, 177, 181, 182, 183, 189, 190, 
198, 199, 240, 244, 245, 250, 253, 
257, 280, 286, 296, 297, 304, 338, 
340, 341, 344, 345. 

Acid and bitter, 171. 

After coughing, 295. 

Black lumps in vomit, 339. 

"Coffee ground" vomit, 174. 

Greenish matter, 248, 341. 

Of blood, 172, 174, 246. 

Of curds, 230. 

Vomiting caused by any sort of 
liquid, 177. 

Vomit smells of phosphorus, 342. 



Ulcers, 237, 239. 

In stomach, 246. 
Unconsciousness, 191, 276, 342. 
Urine, blood in, 316, 344. 

Frequent desire, 198, 200, 202, 203. 
Heavy and dark color, 183, 198, 200, 

338. 
Large amount of, 202, 203. 
Lack of control, 274. 
Pale and watery, 175, 202, 203. 
Scanty, 156, 171, 182. 
Scanty and highly colored, 154, 162, 
164, 173, 175, 184, 199, 201, 202, 
267. 



GLOSSARY. 



Abortion — Premature expulsion of the 
foetus. 

Abscess — A limited cavity containing 
pus. 

Absorptio?i — The taking up of fluids. 

Acute — In medicine the term is applied 
to diseases attended with danger and 
which terminate in a few days- 

Anemia — Deficiency in quantity and 
quality of blood. 

Anesthesia — Lack of sense of feeling. 

Aneurism — A dilation of a blood ves- 
sel. 

Anus — The lower extremity of the 
bowel. 

Antidote — A remedy against poison. 

Antiseptics — Drugs which counteract 
putrefaction. 

Asphyxia — Apparent death or sus- 
pended life, particularly from suffo- 
cation. 

Atrophy — Wasting or emaciation with- 
out fever. 

Bacteria — Microscopic organisms found 
in decomposing matter, and believed 
to be the cause of many diseases. 

Bile — The secretion of the liver. 

Bronchial Tubes — The air tubes of the 
lungs. 

Carbon Dioxide Gas — The gas thrown 
off by the lungs and also produced 
by the burning of wood and coal. 

Capillary — Blood vessels, hairlike in 
size. 

Casein — The curd of milk separated by 

acids or rennet. 
Catarrh — Increased secretion from, and 

inflammation of, a mucous membrane. 
Cathartic— A remedy which produces a 

free movement from the bowels. 



Cellulose — The substance of which the 
cell walls of vegetable tissue are 
made. 

Cerebellum — The little brain. 

Cerebrum — The large brain. 

Chronic — Of long duration. 

Clinical — Pertaining to the sick bed. 

Coagulation — Curdling of a fluid. 

Congestion — Overnlling or overfilled. 

Contagious — A disease which may be 
contracted from a person who is suf- 
fering from the disease. 

Coma — Complete insensibility pro- 
duced by disease. 

Convalesce?ice — The period of recovery 
from disease. 

Convulsions — Involuntary contractions 
of the muscles. 

Cou n ter- irritation — Irr i tati on produced 
in one part of the body to relieve 
another part. 

Delirum — Wandering of the mind. 

Derma — The skin. 

Desquammation — Scaling off of the 
skin. 

Diagnosis — Distinguishing one disease 
from another. 

Dietetic — Belonging to the taking of 
proper food. 

Digestion — The change which fluid 
undergoes in the alimentary canal. 

Douche — A column or shower of fluid. 

Duct — Any tube or canal. 

Effusion — The act of pouring out. 
Elimination — To expel, to put out, to 

throw off. 
Emanation— That which issues from 

the body. 
Emesis — The act of vomiting. 
Emulsion — A mixture of oil and water. 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 



397 



Engorgement — Overfullness. 

Enuresis — Inability to hold the urine. 

Epistaxis — Nose bleed. 

Excreta — Waste material from the body. 

Expectorant — A remedy which aids in 

expelling sputa. 
Exudation — To pass outward, as through 

the pores. 

Farinaceous — Belonging to grain. 

Fauces — The throat. 

Febrile — Pertaining to or indicating 
fever. 

Feces — Evacuations from the bowel. 

Flatulence — Gas in the stomach or the 
intestines. 

Foetus — The young of any animal be- 
fore birth. 

Fomentation — The application of hot 
cloths. 

Gastric — Pertaining to the stomach. 

Germs — Independent living organisms. 

Gestation — Pregnancy. 

Gland — An organ having the function 
of secretion. 

Granulations — Small red bunches form- 
ing on the surface of wounds. 

Hematemesis — Vomiting of blood. 
Hematuria — Blood in the urine. 
Hemoptysis — Spitting of blood. ' 
Hemorrhage — The escape of blood from 

the vessels. 
Hemostatic — Anything which will stop 

bleeding. 
Hernia— Rupture. 
Hygiene — Health rules. 

Incontinence — Inability to restrain. 
Infectious — A disease which results from 

the same cause but not from contact 

with a person who is suffering from 

the disease. 
Innocuous — Harmless ; safe. 
Inorganic — Substances which do not 

belong to the animal or vegetable 

kingdoms. 
Intermittent — Ceasing at intervals. 



Irrigation — Regular and continuous 
washing of a part. 

Jaundice — Yellowness resulting from 
some obstruction to the flow of bile. 

Larynx — The windpipe. 

Legumin — Vegetable proteid. 

Litmus — A blue vegetable pigment 
which turns red when acid is applied 
to it. 

Local — Limited to one place. 

Lock Jaw — A spasm with rigidity. 

Malignant — Very serious in character. 
Mammary — Relating to the breasts. 
Manipulation — Handling. 
Massage — Rubbing and handling the 

muscles. 
Mastication — Chewing. 
Miscarriage — Premature expulsion of a 

foetus. 

Nares — The wings of the nose. 

Nausea — Squeamishness and sickness 
at the stomach. 

Nitrogen — The principal constituent of 
air but not life supporting. 

Nutrition — The process by which food 
is digested, assimilated and made 
nourishing. 

Oesophagus — The gullet. 

Organic — Any animal or vegetable sub- 
stance. 

Oxygen — One of the principal constitu- 
ents of air 

Palate — The roof of the mouth. 

Panacea — A universal remedy. 

Paroxysm — Any sudden or violent ac- 
tion. 

Paresis — Paralysis. 

Paralysis — Loss of voluntary motion. 

Periosteum — The membrane covering 
the bones. 

Plethora — An excess of blood. 

Pleura — The membrane which covers 
the lungs. 

Polypus — A kind of tumor which oc- 
curs in mucous membranes. 



398 



HEALTH AT HOME. 



Post Mortem — After death. 

Prognosis — A prediction of the course 
of a disease. 

Propagation — The producing of young. 

Prophylax is — Pre v e n t i on . 

Ptomaine — Poison produced by putre- 
faction. 

Purgative — To produce movement from 
the bowel. 

Putrefy — To rot. 

Puerperal — Relating to childbirth. 

Pulmonary — Relating to the lungs. 

Purulent — Having the character of pus. 

Quickening — The first movement of the 
foetus felt in the uterus. 

Rales — Sounds in the air passages pro- 
duced by air passing through fluid. 

Recurrent — Tending to return. 

Regurgitation — The flowing backward 
of the contents of an organ. 

Resolution — Separating into parts. 

Relapse — A return of disease. 

Rigor — A chill. 

Rigor Mortis — A stiffening of the mus- 
cles occurring after death. 

Salivation— Excessive secretion of 
saliva. 

Septic— Poisonous. 

Serum— The watery portion 
blood. 

Sedative— A remedy which relieves irri- 
tation and pain. 

Show— A discharge which occurs just 
before labor. 

Slough— To come away, as the dead 
matter from a sore. 

Sordes—A gathering of the secretion of 
the mouth upon the teeth. 



of the 



Spasm — An involuntary muscular con- 
traction. 

Sprain— A violent stretching of the 
parts about a joint. 

Sputum — Matter spit out. 

Suppurative — The formation of matter 
or pus. 

Sutures — Stitches f~r holding the edges 
of a wound together. 

Tampon — A plug. 

Tetanus — Lock j aw. 

Thoracic — Relating to the chest. 

Thrombosis — The obstruction of a blood 

vessel by a clot. 
Traumatic — Resulting from a ^wound. 
Trituration — Thorough mixing, 
7 u torulosis — Consumption. 
Tu m e fact ion — S welling. 
Tumor — A diseased growth. 

Ulcer — A running sore. 
Umbilicus — The navel. 
Ureters — Tubes connecting the kidneys 

with the bladder. 
Urethra — The tube through which the 

bladder is emptied. 
Uterine — Relating to the womb. 
Uterus — The womb. 

Varicose — Enlarged or twisted condition 

of a vein. 
Vascular — Full of blood vessels. 
Vertigo — Dizziness. 
Vesicle — A very small blister. 
Virulent — Very active in doing injury. 
Vitiate — To make imperfect ; to impair ; 

to spoil. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Abscess, 241. 

Absorption, of products of digestion, 

38. 
Adam's apple, 379. 
Adenoids, 241. 

Administration of remedies, 219. 
Ague, 155. 
Air, 27; for children, 213; impurities 

in, 27; nature of impurities, 103; 

ground air, 20; effect of ground air 

on health, 19; methods of securing 

inflow of pure air, 104; methods of 

securing outflow of foul air, 105. 
Air cells, 102. 
Air passages, foreign bodies in, 261, 

382. 
Albumen, test for in urine, 140, 288. 
Alcohol, 56; conclusions on use of, 60; 

effect of use on human system, 58. 
Alcoholic beverages, list of, 60; use, 

62. 
Alcoholism, 190. 
Ammonia, poisoning, 339. 
Anatomy, of ear, 361 ; of eye, 348 ; of 

respiratory organs, 101. 
Angina pectoris, 169. 
Anthrax, 157. 
Antipyretics, 220. 
Antiseptics, 311. 
Antitoxine, 300. 
Apnea, 103. 
Apoplexy, 189. 
Appendicitis, 180, 253. 
Appendix, vermiform, 180. 
Appetite, observation of, 146. 
Arsenic, poisoning, 342. 
Arterio sclerosis, 170. 
Artificial feeding, 228. 
Assimilation of food, 44. 
Asthma, 160. 



Astigmatism, 350. 
Ataxia, locomotor, 187. 
Atropine, poisoning, 343. 

Backbone, injuries to, 187. 

Bacteria, agents for destruction, 74. 

Barley, as food, 52. 

Barley water, 111. 

Baths, 128; acid, 134; alkaline, 134; 
bran, 134; cold, 131; foot, 133; hot, 
132; hot air and vapor, 133; medi- 
cated, 134; remedial, 130; salt, 134; 
sitz or hip, 133 ; sponge, 132 ; starch, 
134; sulphur, 134; Turkish, 78. 

Bathing of sick, 129; of child, 210. 

Beans, 53; cooking, 54. 

Bed, air, 89; water, 89; sick, 84; to 
make, 86; position, 87; moving pa- 
tient from one bed to another, 88 ; to 
prop patient up in, 89. 

Bedwetting, 274. 

Bedstead, 85. 

Bed covers, 86. 

Bed sores, 90, 91 ; means of preventing, 
90; treament, 91. 

Bee stings, 323. 

Beef, juice, 114; beef tea, 114; beef tea 
with acid, 114. 

Beer, physiological action, 61 ; dietetic 
use, 62. 

Belladonna, poisoning, 343. 

Beverages, alcoholic, discussion, 57; 
list, 60; dietetic use, 62. 

Beverages, non-alcoholic, 63. 

Bile, 36. 

Biliary calculi, 183. 

Biliousness, 184. 

Biscuit, 52. 

Bite of snake, 321. 

Black vomit, 147. 



400 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 



Bladder, training to proper use, 212; 
catarrh, 200; spasm, 275; stone in, 
275. 

Bleeding, see Hemorrhage. 

Bleeding, methods of stopping, 313; 
from lungs, 315 ; from nose, 258, 316. 

Bleeding piles, 178. 

Blisters, 123. 

Blood, 92; how purified, 102; circula- 
tion, 92, 94; functions, 93; effect of 
alcohol, 58 ; in the urine, 316. 

Blood letting, 161; in pleurisy, 168. 

Blood vessels, in infancy, 272; effect 
of alcohol, 58; of exercise, 68. 

Bloody flux, 154. 

Blue babies, 93. 

Blue vitriol, poisoning, 341. 

Body, temperature, 97; effect of exer- 
cise, 70. 

Boils, 284; in ear, 361. 

Bone, diseases, 282. 

Bowels, see Intestines. 

Bowels, inflammation, 157, 256; injec- 
tions into, 118; materials for injec- 
tion, 119; method of giving injec- 
tions, 118; training to proper use, 212. 

Brain, congestion, 189; hemorrhage, 
189; tumors, 190. 

Brandy, 61. 

Bread, 50. 

Breathing, see Respiration. 

Breathing, 28, 101; rate, 262. 

Bright' s disease, acute, 198; chronic, 
199. 

Bronchitis, acute, 158, 263; chronic, 
159, 265. 

Bronchial pneumonia, 164. 

Broth, chicken, 114; clam, 114; mut- 
ton, 114; oyster, 115. 

Buckwheat, 53. 

Burns, 325. 

Butter, 56; adulterations, 56. 

Butterine, 56. 

Caffein, 63. 

Cakes, 50. 

Calculi, biliary, 183. 



Camphorated oil, 222. 

Cancer of the stomach, 174. 

Carbohydrates, 35. 

Carbolic acid, poisoning, 338. 

Carbuncle, 328. 

Care, general of infants and young 
children, 210 ; of eyes and mouth in 
children, 211; of nervous system of 
children, 212; of skin of children, 
211 ; of bowels and bladder, 212. 

Cataract, 358. 

Catarrh, effect of ground water, 21, 24; 
of bladder, 200 ; acute of throat, 377 ; 
chronic of nose, 372; chronic of 
throat, 378; dry, 374; prescription for, 
dry, 375 ; moist, 372 ; nasal, 257, 367 ; 
purulent, 374; acute of stomach, 171 < 
chronic of stomach, 172. 

Catheter, use of, 141. 

Caustic soda, poisoning, 340. 

Caustic potash, poisoning, 340. 

Cerebro-spinal meningitis, 280. 

Cess pools, 26. 

Champagne, dietetic use of, 62; whey, 
113. 

Cheese, 56; poisoning, 345. 

Chest, inflammation, 32. 

Chickenpox, 293. 

Chills, observation of, 144. 

Childbirth, 330. 

Child-bed fever, 336. 

Children, bathing, 210; care of eyes 
and mouth, 211; general care, 210; 
care of nervous system, 212; care of 
skin, 211 ; diseases, 210, 215 ; diseases 
of new-born child, 225; dosage of 
medicine for, 224 ; food and feeding, 
215; peculiarities of diseases, 215; 
physical examination, 215 ; pulse 
rate, 272 ; scurvy, 234 ; sore eyes, 226 ; 
starvation, 231 ; observation of symp- 
toms, 216. 

Chocolate, 65, 117. 

Cholera, Asiatic, 205; simple, 20, 205; 
infantum, 247. 

Cholera morbus, 177. 

Circulation, of blood, 92, 94. 



HEAI/FH AT HOME. 



401 



Cistern, away from vaults, 26. 
Clothing, 70 ; changing that of patients, 

129; for children, 211. 
Clinical thermometer, use, 98. 
Coca, 65. 

Cocoa, 64; adulterations, 64. 
Coffee, 63, 117 ; adulterations, 64 ; as an 

article of diet, 63 ; nutritious, 113. 
Colic, 176. 
Cold applications, 127; in the chest, 

158, 263; sores, 273. 
Composition of remedies, 384. 
Condiments, 65. 
Congestion, of brain, 189 ; of liver, 184 ; 

of lungs, 32, 161. 
Conjunctiva, diseases, 351. 
Contagia, 72 ; material in which con- 

tagia are spread, 73. 
Constipation, chronic, 178, 252. 
Consumption, 21, 24, 165; of spinal 

cord, 187. 
Convulsions, 275. 
Copper, poisoning, 341. 
Corea, 278. 
Corn, 52. 

Corrosive sublimate, poisoning, 341. 
Cough, observation of, 144; whooping, 

294. 
Counter-irritants, 122, 222. 
Crackers, 50. 

Croup, 206; membranous, 260; spasm- 
odic, 259. 
Crusts on scalps, 283. 
Cushions, rubber, 89. 
Cystitis, 200. 

Deafness, 281; progressive, 365. 
Death, signs of, 347. 
Deformities of nasal septum 375. 
Deglutition, 37. 
Delirium tremens, 190. 
Dentition, 214. 
Deodorization, 72. 
Deodorants, 77. 

Diabetes insipidus, 203 ; mellitus, 202. 
Diarrhea, 247; epidemic, 20, 21, 24; 
summer, 247. 



Diet in disease, 106. 

Dietary, sick room, 111. 

Dietetic use of alcoholic beverages, 62. 

Differences noted in diseases, 205. 

Difficult teething, 237. 

Digestion, mechanism, 37; physiology, 
33 ; conditions, 44 ; effects of exercise, 
69. 

Diphtheria, 206, 296; disinfection, 76; 
carried by milk, 56. 

Disease, 150; general, 150; differences 
noted, 205; diet in, 106; of new-born 
child, 225; of children, 210; peculi- 
arities in children, 215; causes in 
adults, 150; in children, 215. 

Diseases, specific infecious, 285 ; disin- 
fection, 75 ; connected with food and 
feeding, 42, 231; history, 150; pre- 
vention, 219; prognosis, 219; symp- 
toms in children, 216; in adults, 150. 

Disease, bone, joint and skin, 282; 
conjunctiva, 351; digestive system, 
236; ear, 361; eye, 348; genital or- 
gans, 273 ; heart, 168, 169 ; intestines, 
247 ; liver, 256 ; rectum, 255 ; respira- 
tory system, 257; stomach, 244; tear 
ducts, 359; upper throat, 240. 

Disinfection, 72, 75. 

Disinfecting solution for diphtheria, 76. 

Dosage for children, 224. 

Douche, vaginal, 121. 

Dressings, antiseptic and surgical, 311, 
312. 

Dropsy, 182. 

Drowning, treatment, 346; signs of 
death, 347. 

Drugs, effect on urine, 138. 

Drunkard's dyspepsia, 172. 

Dry fomentations, 126. 

Dysentery, 20, 21, 154. 

Dyspepsia, 35, 36, 37, 44, 45, 175; 
chronic, 172; drunkard's, 172. 

Dyspnea, 103. 

Bar, 362; boils, 361; discharge, 364; 
diseases, 361 ; observation, 145 ; wax, 
362. 



402 



HEAI/TH AT HOMK. 



Earache, 284, 365. 

Eczema, 283; of lips, 237; prescription 
for, 284. 

Eggs, 57. 

Egg lemonade, 113; eggnog, 113; egg 
water, 111. 

Eliminating organs, effects of alcohol, 
58. 

Embolus, 93. 

Endocarditis, acute, 168. 

Enemata, 118; material for, 119. 

Enlargement, chronic, of tonsils, 243. 

Enuresis, 274. 

Epilepsy, 206, 276. 

Epistaxis, 258, 316. 

Erysipelas, 153. 

Examination, physical, of children, 
215. 

Excreta, removal, 25. 

Exercise, 213; effects, 66, 68, 69, 70. 

Eye, anatomy and physiology, 348; cat- 
aract, 358; pterygium, 359; iritis, 
356 ; observation of, 145 ; purulent 
inflammation, 353; purulent of in- 
fants, 226; granulated lids, 352. 

Eyeball, 348. 

Far sight, 349. 

Feeding, diseases dependent upon, 

231; artificial, 228; children, 215; 

helpless patients, 108; infant, 227. 
Fever, see Temperature. 
Fever, temperature, 99; how reduced, 

220; antipyretics, 220; sponge bath, 

132 ; wet pack, 132. 
Fever, childbed, 336; fever and ague, 

155; hay, 161; intermittent, 155; 

lung, 161, 265 ; malarial, 155 ; scarlet, 

285, and temperature of room, 32; 

sores, 237 ; spotted, 280 ; swamp, 155 ; 

typhoid, 300. 
Fibrinous inflammations, 308. 
Fish, as food, 47; poisoning, 345. 
Flour, 49; adulterations, 50; cooking, 

50. 
Follicular pharyngitis, 378. 
Fomentations, dry, 126; hot, 126, 224. 



Food, 40; composition, 106; deficiency, 
43; digestibility, 40; merits of dif- 
ferent articles, 45 ; diseases connected 
with, 42, 231; excess, 42; for infants, 
210; preparation, 109; quality, 45, 
108. 

Foramen ovale, 272. 

Foreign bodies in air passages, 261, 
382; in nose, 376. 

Fracture board, 86. 

Friction in massage, 136. 

Frost bite, 325, 327. 

Gallstones 183. 

Gangrene, 171. 

Gargles, 128. 

Gas, poisoning, 342 ; sewer gas, 30. 

Gastralgia, 245, 174. 

Gastric juice, 35. 

Gastritis, acute, 172. 

General diseases, 150. 

Genital organs, diseases, 273. 

Gin, 61; dietetic value, 62. 

Gin drinker's liver, 184. 

Glanders, 157. 

Glands, sweat and sebacious, 128. 

Glossary, 396. 

Granulated lids, 352. 

Grip, 304. 

Gripes, 176. 

Ground water and air, effect on health, 
20, 21, 24. 

Gruel, cracker, 116; flour, 116; Indian 
meal, 116; oatmeal, 116. 

Gum Arabic water, 111. 

Hair, combing, 130. 

Hay fever, 161. 

Headache, 279; habitual and chronic, 

185; sick, 185. 
Heart, 93; in infancy, 272; effects of 

exercise, 68; disease, 32, 168, 169; 

neuralgia, 169; nervous palpitation, 

170. 
Heartburn, 175. 
Heat, conduction and convection, 32; 

prickly, 282; stroke, 191. 
Heating, see Warming. 



HEALTH AT HOME. 



403 



Health rules, 17. 

Hematemesis, 315. 

Hematuria, 316. 

Hemorrhage, see Bleeding. 

Hemorrhage 313 ; as a symptom, 148 ; 
in brain, 189; in labor, 335; from 
uterus, 316; method of stopping, 313. 

Hemorrhoids, 177. 

Hemoptysis, 315. 

Hobnailed liver, 184. 

Hornet sting, 323. 

Hot fomentations, 126, 224. 

Hydrochloric acid, poisoning, 339. 

Hydrophobia, 157, 323. 

Hygiene, definition and opening chap- 
ter, 17; general remarks on individ- 
ual hygiene, 77. 

Hyperopia, 349. 

Hysteria, 192, 206. 

Impurities in air, 27. 

Incontinence of urine, 141. 

Index of symptoms, 389. 

Indigestion, 36, 37, 44, 45; acute, 171; 
in stomach, 245; in intestines, 250. 

Infants, food tor, 210. 

Infantile paralysis, 188. 

Infectious diseases, 285 ; purification of 
rooms after, 75. 

Inflammation, 206; varieties, 308; ser- 
ous, 308; fibrinous, 308; productive, 
309; suppurative, 310. 

Inflammation, bowels, 175, 256; puru- 
lent of eye, 353 ; covering of lungs, 
167, 270; mouth, 238; hanging pal- 
ate, 241,, 379; tonsils, 242; reduction, 
126, 127. 

Influenza, 304. 

Insomnia, massage as a cure, 135. 

Intermittent fever, 155. 

Intestines, diseases, 247 ; indigestion, 
250; movements, 38; obstructions, 
180. 

Injections, prescription for, 224; into 
bowel, 118 ; to produce purging, 119 ; 
method of giving, 118 ; administering 
nourishment by, 120. 



Iodine, poisoning, 240. 
Iritis, 356. 

Jaundice, 182, 256. 
Joint diseases, 282. 
Junket, 113. 

Kidney, 199. 
Kola, 65. 
Koumiss, 55, 112. 

Labor, 331 ; preparations for, 332 ; hem- 
orrhage, 335. 

La grippe, 304. 

Laryngitis, acute, 379; chronic, 381. 

Liniments, 128. 

Lips, eczema, 237. 

Liver, congestion, 184; diseases, 256; 
hobnailed and gin drinker's, 184; 
effect of alcohol, 58. 

Lead, poisoning, 240. 

Lockjaw, 324. 

Lotions, 127. 

Lungs, 262; congestion, 32, 161; effeGt 
of alcohol, 58; of exercise, 66; bleed- 
ing from, 315 ; inflammation of cover- 
ing, 167, 270; fever, 161, 265. 

Lymph vessels, 39. 

Macaroni, 50. 

Mad dog bite, 157. 

Malarial fever, 155; effect of ground air 
and water, 21, 24. 

Mastication, 37. 

Massage, friction, 136; as a cure tor 
insomnia and neuralgia, 135; meth- 
ods of applying, 135 ; passive mo- 
tions, 130. 

Mattresses for patient, 85. 

Measles, 76, 207, 290; German, 292. 

Meat, 45; cooking, 47; raw meat diet, 
115; how to detect bad meat, 45; 
tainted meat poisoning, 345. 

Meat cure, 115. 

Medicine, doses for children, 224. 

Membranous croup, 260. 

Meningitis, cerebro-spinal, 280. 

Menstrual flow, benefitted by sitz bath, 
133. 



404 



HEALTH AT HOME. 



Milk, 55 ; changes in, 55 ; from diseased 
cows, 55 ; diseases carried by, 56. 

Milk, and albumen, 116; and egg, 112; 
hot milk and water, 112 ; peptonized, 
112, 116; with toast, 112; punch, 
117; sago, 116; sterilized, 112; pois- 
oning, 345. 

Miscarriage, 331. 

Mixtures for spraying nose and throat, 
382. 

Morphine, poisoning, 343. 

Mouth, care of, 130; inflammation, 238; 
observing symptoms in, 146. 

Mumps, 296. 

Muscles, effect of alcohol, 58 ; of exer- 
cise, 69- 

Mushrooms, poisoning, 344. 

Mussels, poisoning, 345. 

Mustard, 65. 

Mustard plasters, how made and uses, 
122, 222. 

Myopia, 350. 

Nasal catarrh, 257. 

Nasal septum, deformities, 375. 

Near-sightedness, 350. 

Nervous system, general care of in 

children, 212; effects of alcohol upon, 

58 ; effects of exercise, 69. 
Nervous prostration, 197. 
Neuralgia, 184; massage for cure, 135; 

of heart, 169. 
Nicotine, poisoning, 343. 
Nightshade, poisoning, 343. 
Nitric acid, poisoning, 339. 
Nose, 367; bleed, 258, 316; catarrh, 367; 

foreign bodies, 376; tumors, 376. 
Nourishment, given by injection, 120. 
Nursing, 81; rules, 228, 229. 
Nutrition, imperfect, 233. 

Oats, as food, 52. 

Obesity, 203. 

Observation of symptoms, 142, 144. 

Obstetrics, 330. 

Obstruction of the intestines, 180. 

Oil, camphorated, 222. 

Ointments, 128, 388. 



Oleomargarine, 56. 
Ophthalmia neonatorium, 226. 
Opium, poisoning, 343. 
Outhouses, 26. 
Oysters, peptonized, 113. 

Palate, inflammation, 241. 

Palpitation, nervous, of heart, 170. 

Pancreatic juice, 36. 

Paralysis, 186; infantile, 188. 

Pathology, 150. 

Patients, feeding helpless, 108; mov- 
ing from one bed to another, 88; to 
prop up in bed, 89. 

Peas, 53 ; method of cooking, 54. 

Pepper, 65. 

Pepsin, 35. 

Peritonitis, 181, 256. 

Pharyngitis, acute, 377; chronic, 378; 
follicular, 378. 

Phimosis, 273. 

Physiology, of the eye, 348 ; of respira- 
tion, 101. 

Phosphorus, poisoning, 342. 

Piles, 177; bleeding, 178; prescription 
for, 178. 

Pink eye, 351. 

Pinworms, 255. 

Plaster, cayenne pepper, 123; mustard, 
122, 222. 

Pleura, 101. 

Pleurisy, 167, 207; dry, 270; purulent, 
271 ; watery, 270. 

Pneumococcus, 265. 

Pneumonia, 161, 207, 265; bronchial, 
164; lobar, 162; temperature of sick 
room, 32. 

Poisoning, ammonia, 339; arsenic, 
342; atropine, 343; belladonna, 343; 
blue vitriol, 341; carbolic acid, 338; 
caustic soda, 340; caustic potash, 
340; cheese, 345; copper, 341; corro- 
sive sublimate, 341 ; fish, 345 ; illum- 
inating or coal stove gas, 342; hydro- 
chloric acid, 339; iodine, 340; mer- 
cury, 341; milk, 345 ; morphine, 343; 
mushrooms, 344; mussels, 345; nico- 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 



405 



tine, 343; nightshade, 343; nitric 
acid, 339; opium, 343; oxalic acid, 
339; phosphorus, 342; poison ivy, 
345; saltpeter, 340; strychnine, 343; 
sulphuric acid, 338; tainted meat, 
345; tainted sausage, 344; tobacco, 
343; verdigris, 341. 

Poisoning, treatment, 338. 

Porridge, baked flour, 112. 

Potatoes, 54; cooking, 54. 

Pot-belly, 236. 

Potus imperialis, 117. 

Poultices, 124, 223; bread, 125; char- 
coal, 125 ; hop and bran, 125 ; linseed, 
124; mustard, 126; slippery elm, 
125 ; spice, 125 ; yeast, 125 ; how made 
and applied, 124, 223. 

Pregnancy, signs 330; duration, 330. 

Prickly heat 282 

Privy vaults, 26. 

Prognosis, 219. 

Prophylaxis, 219. 

Prevention of disease, 219. 

Prostration, nervous, 197. 

Proteids, 35. 

Pterygium, on eye, 359. 

Ptomaine, 46, 55. 

Ptyalin, 35. 

Pulse, 95 ; rate of in children, 272 ; tak- 
ing, 96. 

Punch, milk, 117. 

Purification of sick room, 75. 

Quinsy, 242. 

Rash, sweat, 282. 

Rate of respirations, 102, 262. 

Rectum, diseases, 255. 

Remedies and their contents, 384; ad- 
ministration, 219. 

Respiration, see Breathing. 

Respiration, 28, 101 ; anatomy and phy- 
siology, 101 ; rate, 102 ; counting, 103 ; 
variations, 103; diseases of respira- 
tory system, 257. 

Retention of urine, 140. 

Rheumatism, acute articular, 200; in- 
flammatory, 200; muscular, 201; 



treatment of by sulphur baths, 134. 
Rhinitis, atrophic, 374; hypertophic, 

372. 
Rice, 53; cooking, 53; rice coffee, 117; 

rice water, 111. 
Rickets, 235. 
Roe, 18. 

Round worms, 255. 
Rubber cushions, 89. 
Rubefacients, 122. 
Rules for nursing, 228, 229 ; for serving 

meals, 107. 
Rum, 61, 113; dietetic use, 62. 
Rye, 52. 

St. Anthony's fire, 153. 

St. Vitus' dance, 278. 

Saliva, 34. 

Salt, 65. 

Saltpeter, poisoning, 340. 

Sausages, poisoning, 344. 

Scalds, 325. 

Scalp, crusts on, 283. 

Scarlet fever, 207, 285; carried by milk, 

56; disinfection, 75; temperature 

of sickroom, 32. 
Scrofula, 204. 

Scurvy, 202 ; in children, 234. 
Sebaceous, glands, 128. 
Seborrhea, 283. 
Sewer gas, 30. 

Sheets, 86; method of changing, 87. 
Sickroom dietary, 111. 
Sickroom, location of, 81; furnishing, 

83; noises in, 83; degree of warmth, 

105. 
Sitz bath, 133. 
Skin, 128 ; care of in children, 211 ; 

diseases, 282; effects of exercise, 68; 

observation of changes in, 145. 
Sleep, 212; restless, 279. 
Smallpox, 151 ; disinfection, 75. 
Snake bites, 321. 
Spasm ol bladder, 275. 
Spasmodic croup, 259. 
Spinal cord, injuries, 187. 
Spotted fever, 280. 



406 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 



Spray mixtures, 382. 

Soil, air in, 19; consistence, 20; water 

in, 20. 
Sores, bed, 90; means of preventing, 

90; symptoms, 91; treatment, 91. 
Sores, fever, 237; cold, 237. 
Soup, apple, 115; cream, 114; white 

celery, 115; rice, 115. 
Stammering, 279; stuttering, 279. 
Starches, 54. 

Starvation in children, 231. 
Stimulants, 221. 
Stings, bee, wasp, hornet, 323. 
Stitch in the side, 167, 270. « 
Stomach, diseases, 244; cancer, 174; 

catarrh, 171, 172; acute indigestion, 

245; ulcer, 173, 246; movements, 37; 

effect of alcohol, 58. 
Stomachache, 245. 
Stone in bladder, 275. 
Stools, condition of, as symptom, 147. 
Strawberry tongue, 146. 
Strychnine, poisoning, 343. 
Stupes, 126; turpentine, 222. 
Sugar, 54; test for sugar in urine, 140. 
Sulphur baths, 134. 
Sulphuric acid, poisoning, 338. 
Summer diarrhea, 247. 
Sunstroke, 191. 
Suppression of urine, 140. 
Surgery, 306. 

Surgical dressings, 311, 312. 
Swallowing, 37. 
Swamp fever, 155. 
Sweat glands, 128. 
Sweat rash, 282. 
Syllabub, 117. 
Symptoms, index, 389; of disease, 150, 

216; observation of, 142, 144. 
Syphilis, 303. 

Tabes dorsalis, 187. 

Tainted meat, poisoning, 345. 

Tainted sausages, poisoning, 344. 

Tapeworms, 254. 

Taste, observation, 146. 



Tea, 64, 117; as an article of diet, 64; 
flaxseed, 111. 

Tear ducts, diseases, 359. 

Teething, 214; difficult, 2 37. 

Temperature, see Fever, Warmth. 

Temperature, of body, 97; for bath, 
131, 132; in fever, 99; effects of alco- 
hol, 58; of sickroom, 32; table, 97; 
places where taken, 98 ; time required 
to take, 99; varying by artificial 
means, 100. 

Test for albumen in urine, 140, 288. 

Tetanus, 324. 

Thein, 64. 

Theobromiu, 64. 

Thermometer, clinical, uses, 98. 

Thirst, observation of, 147. 

Threadworms, 255. 

Throat, 367, 377; diseases of upper part, 
240; acute catarrh, 377; chronic ca- 
tarrh, 378 ; sore, prescriptions for, 
381 ; observation of, 146. 

Thrombosis, 93. 

Thrush, 239. 

Toast water, 111. 

Tongue, observation of, 146 ; strawberry, 
146. 

Tonics, 221. 

Tonsils, chronic enlargement, 242; in- 
flammation, 243. 

Trachoma, 352. 

Treacle posset, 116. 

Treatment, varieties of, 151. 

Trichinae, 157. 

Tuberculosis, 165. 

Tumors of brain, 190; of nose, 376. 

Turkish bath, 78. 

Turpentine stupe, 222. 

Typhoid fever, 300; carried by milk, 
56; disinfection in, 76. 

Tyrotoxicon, 55, 57. 

Ulcers, 237; of stomach, 173, 246. 

Urine, 136; blood in, 316; effect of 
drugs, 138; incontinence, 141; reten- 
tion, 140; suppression, 140; observ- 
ance of, 138 ; test for albumen, 140, 



HEAI/TH AT HOME. 



407 



288 ; test for sugar, 140 ; variations in 

urine, 157. 
Uvula, inflammation, 379. 
Uterine hemorrhage, 316. 

Vaccination, 212. 
Vaginal douche, 121. 
Vegetables, 54. 

Ventilation, 103; methods, 29. 
Verdigris, poisoning, 341. 
Vermiform appendix, 180. 
Vesicants, 123. 
Vessels, lymphatic, 39. 
Vinegar, 65. 

Vomiting, 38, 244; of blood, 315; black 
vomit, 147. 

Warming of houses, 31. 
Warmth, degree of for healthy person, 
31; for sick persons, 32; kinds, 32. 



Water, 22; artesian, 24; distilled, 24; 
drinking, 22; ground, 21; rain, 22; 
river and lake, 24 ; well and spring, 
23; quantity of for healthy men, 22; 
sources of supply, 22. 

Water closets, 26. 

Wells, away from vaults, 26. 

Wet pack, 132. 

Wheat, 48. 

Whiskey, 61 ; dietetic use, 62. 

Whooping cough, 294. 

Wild hairs, 353. 

Wines, 61; dietetic use, 62; whey, 113; 
mulled, 116. 

Worms, pin, 255 ; round, 255 ; tape, 254 ; 
thread, 255. 

Wounds, 317; treatment of, 318; poi- 
soned, 321. 



APPENDIX. 



In addition to the book and cabinet which is furnished by the Home 
Remedy Company, the company also furnish at wholesale rates all drugs 
and drug supplies which may be ordered from them. A list of drugs and 
appliances is placed in this Appendix with prices attached. Everything 
that is offered in this part of the book is guaranteed to be first-class in 
every particular and just as represented. Should any article prove defec- 
tive or not as here represented the purchase price will be gladly refunded. 
The Home Remedy Company will furnish anything in the drug line 
whether it is listed here or not and will be glad to quote prices at any 
time. The prices which are here given are net prices and the rule of the 
Company is that the cash must accompany the order. By doing this and 
not carrying any accounts the Company is able to make better prices to 
its patrons. 

In ordering goods address all orders or communications of any sort 
to the 

HOME REMEDY COMPANY. 



410 



APPENDIX. 



DRUGS. 

The prices which are given in the following list do not include the car- 
rying charges. On all dry drugs add two cents per ounce to the prices 
given; on quantities of one pound or more, add fifteen cents per pound. 
All liquid drugs must be put into glass bottles and require a special mail- 
ing box to meet the requirements of the postoffice authorities. Add four 
cents per ounce for postage and packing, to the prices given on all 
liquid drugs which are to be sent by mail. Quantities of one-half pint or 
more will be sent by express or freight and no charge will be made for 
packing. 

DRY DRUGS. 



Pi-ice 
Per Ounce 

Acid, oxalic $ , 

Acid, tannic 

Acid, tartaric 

Allspice 

Allspice, powdered. 

Alum 

Arrowroot 

Arsenic 

Cubeb berries 

Blue vitriol 

Borax, refined 

Buchu leaves 

Camphor gum 

Caraway seed 

Celery seed 

Chalk, powdered. . . 

Charcoal (animal). 

Cinnamon bark 

Cloves 

Cocoa butter 

Copperas 

Cream tartar 

Cuttle fish bone 

Epsom salts 

Flaxseed, ground.. 

Gelatine sheet 

Ginger 



Price 
Per Pound 



.04 

15 

.06 

.04 

■05 
.02 
03 
•03 
.04 
•03 
•03 
.06 
.08 

■03 
.04 
.02 
.02 

•05 
.04 
.08 
.02 

.05 
•05 
•03 
•03 
.07 
.04 



.20 
1.40 
.56 
.26 
.28 
.12 

•15 
.16 

.24 

•15 

.16 

•54 
.87 
.16 
.20 
.12 

•13 
.48 
.20 
.72 
.08 

•43 
.40 
.08 
.09 
.67 
.20 



Price 
Per Ounce. 



Glue 

Indigo 

Insect powder 

Mustard seed, white 
Mustard seed, 

ground pure 04 

Nutmegs 08 

Orange peel, sweet. .04 

Parafnne 04 

Pepper, black 04 

Pepper, black, 

ground 05 

Pepper, white 05 

Pepper, white, 

ground 06 

Plaster Paris, extra 

fine 02 

Rock candy, pure.. .03 

Sassafras bark 03 

Strychnine, 

one-eighth ounce .2/ 

Sulphur 02 

Tapioca 03 

Tar, pure pine, one 

pint can 10 

dozen cans 



Price 
Per Pound 

.04 $ .24 

.09 1. 00 

.06 .54 

.03 .15 



•34 
.72 
.28 
.20 
.28 

•30 
.36 

■44 

.06 
.16 
.16 



.07 
.11 



1.00 



APPENDIX. 



411 



LIQUID DRUGS. 



Price 




Price 




Price Price 


Per Ounce. Per Pound 


Per Ounce. Per Pound 


Acid, carbolic, pure $ 


.14 


$ 1.60 





l1, olive 


.04 .28 


Acid, carbolic, com- 






O 


1, olive (for salads) 


.06 .60 


mon 


.04 


.20 





il, peppermint. . . . 
il, pennyroyal.. . . 


.24 
.27 


Acid, muriatic (hy- 




O 


drochloric) pure. . 


.05 


.38 


O 


1, sandalwood . . . 


•34 


Acid, muriatic, (hy- 






O 


1, whale (sperm). 


.04 .28 


drochloric) com- 









1, tansy 


.24 


mon 


.04 


.28 


Oi 


1. tar 


.03 .20 


Acid, nitric, pure, . . 


.06 


.40 


Oil, wintergreen . . . 


•31 


Acid, sulphuric, pure 


.05 


.36 


Turpentine, per pint, 


15; pergal- 


Acid, sulphuric, 






Ion 94. 




common 


.04 


.28 


Fluid Malt, per pint, 


60; per five 


Ammonia water, 






pints, $2.50; per gs 


illon, $4.00. 


strong 


•03 


.24 


Fluid malt and iron, 


per pint, 63; 


Ammonia water, 






per five pints, $2.7= 


; per gallon 


household 




.07 


$4.5o. 




Bay Rum 


.06 


•54 


Beef Iron and Wine, 


per pint, 60; 




.04 


.28 


per five pints, $2.50 


; per gallon 


Glycerine, pure 


.05 


•47 


$4.00. 




Oil, castor 


.04 


•34 


Vanilla flavoring < 


extract, per 


Oil, cloves 


.16 


1.92 


ounce, 20c; per two 


ounces, 35c. 


Oil, cocoanut 


•05 


.40 


Lemon flavoring extract, per 


Oil, cod liver (Nor- 






ounce, 10c; per two 


ounces, 20c. 


wegian) 


.05 


.40 









This is an incomplete drug list but it serves to show the prices of the 
Home Remedy Company. They carry a full line and will be glad to 
furnish prices at any time. 



APPLIANCES. 



Should any article which is purchased from the Home Remedy Com- 
pany prove defective in any way it will gladly replace the article 
with a new one or will refund the purchase price. In ordering, order by 
number only. 



412 



APPENDIX. 




No. 101. Square Invalid Cushion. 



No. 101. An air cushion is a great source of comfort to an invalid 
and is a very convenient and useful article at any time. These cushions 
will stand a great amount of wear. Price of square cushion, $5.00. 
This must be sent by express or freight, carrying charges to be paid by 
purchaser. 




No. 102. Invalid Cushion, 

No. 102. The cushion, which has long been called the invalid cush- 
ion, is the round one which is shown here. This cushion is a conven- 
ient one and is made in a number of different sizes, with prices as fol- 
lows: 10 inch, $1.75; 12 inch, $2.00; 14 inch, $2.15. This must be 
sent by express or freight, carrying charges to be paid by purchaser. 




No. 103. chair Cushion. 

No. 103. This is a chair cushion which may be used for invalids, 
but is intended for general use. Price, $4.25. This must sent by ex- 
press or freight, carrying charges to be paid by purchaser. 



APPENDIX. 



413 




No. 104. White Enamkl Bed Pan. 
A bed pan is an article that is very useful in the sick room, and no 
family should be without one. The one illustrated is of metal, with a 
glazed white finish. Others which we carry are as follows : 

No. 104. White enamel Bed Pan, Price $5.00 

No. 105. White earthenware bed pan similar to cut 1.25 

No. 106. Rubber bed pan, oblong shape, no outlet 3.00 

No. 107. Same as No. 106 but with outlet tube 3. 50 

No. 108. Plain round rubber bed pan, no outlet pipe 2. 75 

These must be sent by express or freight, carrying charges to be paid 
by purchaser. 




No. 109. 





no. No. in. 

Rubber Gloves or Mittens. 




For persons who have to keep the hands much in water or who suffer 
from eczema of the hands, rubber gloves or mittens are a great aid. 
They are also useful when it is desired to have a glove to do dirty work 
with. The rubber glove is easily washed after the task is completed. 
The line of gloves which is here offered is complete and the quality is 
of the best. In ordering state the size of glove ordinarily worn, or if 
it is not possible to do this, place a string around the hand just back 
of the knuckles and tie a knot in the string where the string meets on 
the back of the hand ; send this string for size. 

No. 109, price per pair, $1.45. No. 110, price per pair, men's, 
$1.95; ladies', per pair, $1.60. No. Ill, price per pair, $2.50. No. 112, 
price, $1.25. No. 113, not illustrated, thin, pure gum, skin tight glove, 
price per pair, $1.85. No. 114, ordinary rubber finger cots, not illus- 
trated, price per dozen, 50 cents. Postage and packing, gloves per pair, 
14 cents; cots, per dozen, 9 cents. 



414 



APPENDIX. 



No 




Vegetable Fibre Hand-Brush 



No. 115. This is a vegetable fiber hand-brush ; it is a good one and 
will wear a long time. Price, 10 cents, or 85 cents per dozen. Postage 
and packing, 3 cents each. 




No. n6. Chemically Puke Soap. 



No. 116. Very often it is desired to use soap that is known to be per- 
fectly pure and free from all sorts of foreign material ; such a soap is 
the chemically pure soap which is here offered and that it may remain 
pure it is put up in tubes. Price, 30 cents per tube, or $2. 50 per dozen 
tubes. Postage and packing per tube, 3 cents. 




No. 117. Ice Bag. 

No. 117. This is a very compact and convenient ice bag ; the body is 
made from good rubber cloth and yet it is pliable enough to fit almost 
any part of the body. The bag will hold quite a supply of ice and is a 
serviceable bag in every wav. Price, fl.00. Postage and packing, 12 
cents. 



APPENDIX. 



415 





No. 118. 



Hot Water Bottles. 



No. 119. 



A hot water bottle of some sort is used many times a year in every 
family. The general usefulness of these appliances is so apparent that 
it will not be necessary to describe the uses to which they may be put. 
No 118. illustrates the plain water bottle while No. 119 shows the flannel 
covered bottle. The prices are here given : 

Ordinary quality rubber, 1 quart bottle $1.15 

" " 2 " " 1.25 

3 " " 1.45 

4 " " 1. 60 

Best quality rubber, 1 quart bottle .$1. 25 



« « < 


< < < 




2 


< t- 


J ) > 


> > > 




3 


> » 


< ( ( 


< < < 




4 


« « 


Flannel 


covered, 


1 


quart 


bottle 


< < 


< < 


2 


« < 


< « 


< < 


< « 


3 


< < 


< < 


« « 


< < 


4 


< < 


< < 



1.45 
1.60 
1.75 
$1.60 
1.75 
1.95 
2.10 



Postage and packing, 1 quart, 13 cents; 2 quart, 15 cents; 3 quart/ 19 
cents; 4 quart, 22 cents. 




No. 120. Bath Thermometer. 

No. 120. Something which is needed in every family and which is 
seldom found is a reliable bath thermometer. Such an instrumeent is 
here offered. Price, 35 cents. Bxtra fine quality, $1.25. Postage and 
packing 8 cents in each case. 



416 



APPENDIX. 





NO. X22. 



Vapor Bath Apparatus. 



During the past few years great strides have been made in medicine, 
and in no department has a greater amount of good resulted from the 
experiments than in the use of hot and medicated air for the cure of 
disease. A great deal has been written on this subject and nearly 
everyone understands the use and management of the bath cabinet. The 
cabinet is used to good advantage in all cases of muscular rheumatism ; 
in cases of stiffness of the joints, soreness of the muscles, swelling of 
the limbs or of any part of the body; in a great many skin diseases; as 
a method of thoroughly opening up the pores of the skin when it is 
desired to do this for any reason whatever. Many other uses for the 
bath cabinet arise which are not even thought of until the cabinet is at 
hand. Be it sufficient to say that it will be a much used appliance if 
placed in the home. 



No. 121 illustrates a cheap vapor bath apparatus with heater and vapor- 
izing pan complete. It is well made, but is not so complete as a more 
expensive apparatus ; it is so arranged that it attaches to a chair. 
Price, complete, $3. 50. This must be sent by express or freight, carry- 
ing charges to be paid by purchaser. 

No. 122 illustrates a more complete apparatus and in fact this appa- 
ratus is just as complete and just as serviceable as the very expensive 
cabinets. This cabinet is really a very fine apparatus. 

Price, complete with heater and vaporizing pan, $6.75. This must 
be sent by express or freight, carrying charges to be paid by purchaser. 



APPENDIX. 



417 




No. 123. Small Family Battery. 



No. 123. Many times the need of a small battery is felt, and yet 
the ordinary price asked for batteries makes the purchase of one entirely 
out of the question. Batteries are useful in any form of paralysis; are 
used to strengthen weakened muscles, to tone up the nervous system and 
as a curative agent in many forms of rheumatism. The battery illus- 
trated above is a small compact family battery with a dry cell ; there is no 
fluid to spill or to be changed; the battery is renewed by placing a new 
dry cell in the place of the old one. The battery has three currents; 
has a foot plate, one sponge disc, one pair metal and wood handles, 
one pair conducting cords, and is put up in a finely finished hardwood 
walnut stained case, with strap for carrying. The dimensions of the 
case are 4£x5x7f inches. Price complete, $6.00. This must be sent by 
express or freight, carrying charges to be paid by purchaser. 



418 



APPENDIX. 




No. 124. Higher Priced Battery. 



I No. 124. This is a higher priced battery and is one that is intended 
especially for the use of physicians. It is put up in hardwood, walnut 
stained box and has strap for carrying. It is furnished with foot piece, 
metal handles, sponge discs and conducting cords. It has a double 
switch by means of which five different currents may be obtained. The 
size of the battery is 6x8x10 inches. Price complete, $9.50. 



APPENDIX. 



419 




Plain Shears. 



No. 125. This cut shows a pair of plain shears. They are of extra 
good quality and are not a cheap shears. To one wanting something 
that is really good these shears will fill all requirements. Price, $1.25. 
Postage and packing, 16 cents. 




No. i;:6. Operating Scissors. 

No. 126. This is a pair of regular operating scissors ; the material is 
of the best, the edges are sharp and will cut at the very point of the 
scissors. For a superior pair of scissors they are hard to equal. Price, 
4£ inches long, 80 cents; 5 inches, 85 cents; 5£ inches, $1.00; 6 inches, 
$1.10; 6£ inches, $1.25. Postage and packing 16 cents. 




No. 127. Needle Holder. 

No. 127. In surgical sewing a needle holder is used in the place of 
a thimble ; this illustration shows such a needle holder. Price, $2. 50. 
Postage and packing, 16 cents. 



420 



APPENDIX. 



IStcrilized Gauze. 
[ChaslruaxGreene&G 

75 tm Wabash Ave 



No. 128. Sterilized Gauze. 

No. 128. In a number of places in the book sterilized gauze is men- 
tioned. Sterilized and medicated gauzes are used for dressings for 
wounds and as dressings in any place where a thoioughly pure and clean 
dressing is required. The gauze is made from a thin cotton gauze and 
is either plain or medicated. Gauze is considered by all medical men 
to be the best dressing that can be used. Prices are as follows : Half 
yard plain bleached and sterilized gauze, as shown in cut, 9 cents; 
dozen half yards, each one put up in a roll by itself, 80 cents. Postage 
and packing, single roll, 2 cents; dozen rolls, 16 cents. 

Same gauze in one yard roll, 20 cents. One yard roll medicated with 
carbolic acid, 25 cents. One yard roll medicated with iodoform, 40 
cents. One yard roll medicated with boracic acid, 25 cents. One yard 
roll medicated with corrosive sublimate, 25 cents. Postage and pack- 
ing, each, 6 cents. 




No. 129. Rubber Bandage. 

No. 129. In strains of the muscles, weak limbs, varicose veins, weak 
joints, etc., some support is needed, and the support usually recom- 
mended by the family physician is the rubber bandage. The bandages 
which are here offered are manufactured from pure gum and are strictly 
first class in every particular. Prices are as follows: 

2 inches wide by 6 feet long $ .60 



2 " 


<< << Q 


" ' 


2 " 


" " 12 


" * 


2£ " 
Zh " 


« << 9 

<< << Yl 


< < « 

< < < 


3 " 


'« " 9 


« < « 


3 " 


" " 12 


« « < 



.90 
1.15 
1.10 
1.40 
1.30 
1.75 



Postage and packing, each, 8 cents. 



APPENDIX. 



421 




No. 130. Poison Chest. 



It is seldom indeed that the remedies which are required in a case of 
poisoning are at hand, and it is to supply the remedies in a form which 
may be easily and quickly got that this chest is prepared. One such 
chest among a number of families should be sufficient and should a 
case of poisoning occur the chest can be easily and quickly got and the 
remedies and instructions as to their use can be had before it is too 
late. The quickness with which treatment is given is everything in a 
case of poisoning. The chest is intended for emergency cases, and con- 
tains twenty-five well selected antidotes to poisons, a stomach pump, and 
a little book (edited by Dr. Webster), containing a list of the remedies 
in the chest, their doses and how to give them, and a list of all poisons, 
their symptoms and signs and the treatment of each one. The chest is 
well put up and is cloth covered. Price, $6. 50 ; without stomach pump, 
$5.00. This chest must be sent by express or freight, carrying charges 
toTbe paid by purchaser. 



422 



APPENDIX. 




No. 131. Atomizer. 



No. 131. It is very often desired to have an atomizer which will 
throw an oil spray m such a manner that it will reach the smallest cavi- 
ties of the nose, throat or lungs; such an atomizer is the one illustrated. 
This is not a good atomizer for a watery solution, but it will throw an 
oil spray better than any other atomizer made. It will throw a spray 
in each direction that is indicated in the cut and the spray will 
be so fine that it will float in the air no matther how heavy the oil used 
may be. This is a first class instrument in every respect and is one that 
is a great favorite among the doctors. Price, $1.60. Postage and pack- 
ing, 12 cents. 




No. 132. Stomach Pump. 



No. 132. This illustration shows a stomach pump. To operate a 
stomach pump, oil the tube well and carefully insert in the throat. 
With a little practice a patient will learn to swallow tne tube with as 
much ease as a piece of food is swallowed. The pump is made from 
soft rubber. Price, $1.25. Postage and packing, 28 cents. 



APPKNdlX. 



423 







Hearing Hokn. 



No. 133. A great many people and old persons especially are hard of 
hearing, and in many instances this difficulty is incurable. Nothing 
adds more to the comfort of the person than a hearing horn of some sort; 
it not only assists the person to hear but also lets strangers know that 
the person has some trouble with the hearing and they can then take 
more care in speaking and not cause so much general annoyance. 
Very grave mistakes are sometimes made by persons who have deficient 
hearing, and it is a duty they owe to their fellow men that they should 
use every means in their power to better their condition. A hearing 
horn is a very efficient method of bettering this annoying condition. 
No. 132 is a horn that is very largely used and is a thoroughly good in- 
strument. Price, in black japanned tin, $5.00. This must be sent by 
express or freight, carrying charges to be paid by purchaser. 




No. 134. small Hearing Horn. 



No. 134. This illustrates a small hearing horn which may be carried 
in the hand and which is not very noticeable. It is a serviceable horn 
and is either black or nickel plated. It is also made in three sizes. In 
ordering state whether you want small, medium or large and whether 
black or nickel-plated. Price, $3. 75 each. Postage and packing, 26 
cents. 



424 



APPENDIX. 




No. 135. Conversation Tube. 

No. 135. Where persons are so hard of hearing that even loud con- 
versation is not fully understood the conversation tube here illustrated 
is a"very convenient appliance. The patient places one end in the ear 
and the person speaking to him places the mouth very near to the fun- 
nel end and talks directly into the tube. For the purpose for which 
this tube is intended it is all that could be asked. Price, conical tube 
of mohair 3 feet long, $3.75; same tube, but 5 feet long, $4.40; conical 
tube of silk 3 feet long, $4.40; same tube, but 5 feet long, $5.00; straight 
tube of mohair 3 feet long, $2.25; same tube but of silk, $2.75. Pos- 
tage and packing, 28 cents. 




No. 137. 
Sharp Corn Knives. 



A sharp corn knife is something that is very often wanted and is sel- 
dom at hand. The cuts illustrate two forms. Prices, No. 136, 75 cents ; 
No. 137, $1.75. Postage and packing, 6 cents each. 



APPENDIX. 



425 




Pair of Nail Cutters. 



138. 



"No. 

be used in 



This is an illustration of a pair of nail cutters. They can 
either hand and are much more convenient than a knife. 
Price, $1.50. Postage and packing, 8 cents. 





NO. 139. 



No. 140. 




No. 141. 
Feeding Dishes. 



In the care of very sick persons it is oftentimes difficult'to feed them, 
as they are frequently not able to sit up or to even raise the head. For 
the purpose of feeding and of giving drinks to sick persons, feeding 
dishes have been devised, and three such dishes are shown in the illus- 
trations. The prices are: No. 139, plain white feeding dish with side 
spout, 45 cents each ; No. 140, feeding dish with side spout, blue dec- 
oration and gold lines, 70 cents each ; No. 141, long straight spout feed- 
ing dish, plain white, 45 cents each ; same dish, but flowered and witii 
gold lines, 70 cents each. Postage and packing, 16 cents. 



426 



APPENDIX. 





No. 142. 



NO. 143. 



Nursing Nipples. 



In nursing mothers the nipples are sometimes in such a condition that 
they need some sort of protection. The nipple shields shown are for the 
purpose of furnishing this sort of protection. Prices, No. 142, 15 cents 
each ; No. 143, 13 cents each. Postage and packing, 3 cents. 




No. 144. Plain Nursing Bottle. 

No. 144. Plain nursing bottle without fitting. 
Postage and packing, 9 cents. 



Price, 9 cents each. 




No. 145. Flint Glass Nursing Bottle. 

No. 145. Flint glass nursing bottle with fitting complete. 
18 cents each. Postage and packing, 11 cents. 



Price, 




No. 146. Best Nursing Bottle Fitting. 
No. 146. Best nursing bottle fitting. Price, 16 cents each. Post- 
age and packing, 6 cents. 



APPENDIX. 



427 




No. 147. Plain Nursing Bottle Fitting. 

No. 147. Plain nursing bottle fitting. Price, 8 cents each. Post- 
age and packing, 6 cents. 




No. 148. English Breast Pump. 

No 148. English breast pump, a good article, heavy glass. Price, 
27 cents each. Postage and packing, 9 cents. 




No. J49. Economic Breast Pump. 



No. 149. Economic breast pump. A very satisfactory pump. Price, 
18 cents each. Postage and packing, 9 cents. 



428 



APPENDIX. 




No. i 54 . 
















No. 155. 
Syring.es. 



APPENDIX. 



429 



TRIM GREENES COSiSYRiNGE N97 ) 




No. 156. 



The Home Remedy Co. carries a full line of syringes of all sorts and 
illustrates a few here. If you do not see the style that you want write 
to the company and prices will be sent. The goods are all first class 
and as good as can be had in the various grades of rubber. The price 
of course is regulated by the grade of rubber. The prices are asjfol- 
lows : g0 B 

No. 150. Small hard rubber syringe, 65 cents each. Postage/and 
packing, 6 cents. 

No. 151. Two ounce female, hard rubber, 70 cents each. Postage 
and packing, 12 cents. 

No. 152. Two ounce rectal, extra quality, $1.00 each. Postage and 
packing, 17 cents. 

No. 153. Fluted female syringe, six ounce, $1.00 each. Postage and 
packing, 17 cents, 

No. 154. Ladies' perfect syringe, $2.00. Postage and packing, 17 
cents. 

No. 155. Family syringe, good quality rubber, with slip fpipes and 
hard rubber valve chambers. Put up in pasteboard box with hinged 
cover. Every syringe warranted. Price, 75 cents. Postage and pack- 
ing, 16 cents. 

No. 156. Family syringe cheap quality, a fair grade of rubber, but 
cannot be warranted. A very good syringe for the money. Put up 
in plain pasteboard box. Price, 50 cents. Postage and packing, 16 
cents. 



430 



APPENDIX. 




No. 157. Alcohol Stovk. 

No. 157. i-Many times in the sick room it is necessary to keep a 
small amount of water hot for the purpose of making hot applications or 
for other purposes, or it may be necessary to heat food often as in the 
case of a sick infant who is bottle fed. To meet such requirements an 
alcohol stove is a great convenience. Such a stove is illustrated. 
Price, 25 cents. — '" Postage and packing, 11 cents. 




No. 158. Medicine Glass. 



No. 158.' '"Ordinary medicine glass. Price, 6 cents each. Postage 
and packing, 6 cents. 




No. 159. Fine French Truss. 



. No. 159. Fine French truss, either right or left. Give waist mea- 
sure. Price, $3.00 each. This must be sent by express or freight, 
carrying charges to be paid by purchaser. 



APPENDIX. 



431 




No. 160. Elastic Truss. 

No. 160. Klastic truss, right or left. Give waist measure. Price, 
$2.00. This must be sent by express or freight, carrying charges to be 
paid by purchaser. 




Fine German Truss. 



No. ,.161. Fine German truss with under strap, right or left. Price, 
$1. 75. >: This must be sent by express or freight, carrying charges to be 
paid by purchaser. 




Double: Elastic Truss. 



No. 162. Double elastic truss. Price, $4.00. This must be sent by 
express^or freight, charges to be paid by purchaser. 



432 



APPENDIX. 




No. 163. Silk Abdominal Supporter. 

No. 163. All silk abdominal supporter, to lace. Will lace in either 
side or back. Price, $10.00 to $15.00, according to size. Made from 
cotton, price, $8.00 to $10.00, according to size. This must be sent by 
express or freight, carrying charges to be paid by purchaser. 




Standard Abdominal Supporter. 



No. 164. Standard abdominal supporter made from moleskin. Price, 
$4.00. This must be sent by express or freight, carrying charges to 
be paid by purchaser. 




No. 165. Abdominal Supporter with Silk Elastic Front. 

with silk., elastic front. Price, 



No. 165. Abdominal supporter 
$8.00 to $12.00, according to size, 
freight, carrying charges to be paid by purchaser 



silki elastic 
This must be sent by express or 



APPENDIX. 



433 




No. 165. Corset Shoulder Brace. 

No. 165. Corset shoulder brace. Price, $1. 50. This must be sent 
by express or freight, carrying charges to be paid by purchaser. 




No. 166. Suspender Shoulder Brace. 



No. 166. Suspender shoulder brace. Price, $1.50. Postage and 
packing, 12 cents. 



434 



APPENDIX. 




No. 167. 1,inen and Elastic Menstrual Belt. 

No. 167. Linen and elastic menstrual belt. Price, 75 cents. Postage 
and packing, 12 cents. 




No. 168. Sanitary Pads. 



No. 168. Sanitary pads for menstrual periods. Price, 60 cents per 
dozen. Postage and packing, 16 cents. 



APPENDIX. 



435 





No. 169. No. 169%. 

Elastic Stockings, Belts and Supporters. 



Elastic stockings, belts and supporters are made for the relief and sup- 
port of varicose veins, weak, swollen or ulcerated limbs, corpulency, 
abdominal weakness and tumors. These goods are of great value in the 
treatment of varicose veins, as they give a firmness and a support to the 
veins which is impossible to get in any other way. In any case where 
the limbs are swollen or ulcerated from any cause whatever the elastic 
goods will be of immense value. As a support to the abdomen in very 
fleshy persons the elastic supporter is a source of much comfort. For 
the support of old dislocations there is nothing that anywhere near 
equals these goods, and even in recent dislocations they are a means of 
safety and will very often prevent a second dislocation. As a support 



436 appendix. 

to weak joints when it is desired to tax them somewhat heavily the 
elastic goods are the only ones that are of real benefit. 

Directions for applying elastic stockings : 

Turn the stocking inside out down to the part which covers the foot. 
Take hold with the thumbs inside this folded part, stretching and draw- 
ing it on to the foot. Take hold with the thumb of one hand (inside 
the fold) and with the other thumb (inside the fold) at the heel, then 
stretch and roll it over the heel. Take hold at the top of the stocking 
and turn it over the foot as far up the limb as it can be drawn without 
forcing it. Turn down the top of the ankle and insert the thumbs on 
either side between the limb and the fold in the stocking; stretch and 
gradually roll it (repeating the process as often as is necessary) until it 
reaches the proper position without a wrinkle. It should always be 
worn over a thin stocking. 

All goods are manufactured to order and the best of material is used. 

An extra charge will be made for extra large sizes. 

DIRECTIONS FOR MEASUREMENT. 

The measurements should always be taken in the morning when the 
parts are smaller. 

Give exact measurments. We allow for pressure. 

Be sure and indicate whether you want silk or cotton goods. 

For a thigh stocking — Circumference at A, B, C, D, B, F, G, H, I. 
Length from floor to F, and from F to I. 

For a thigh legging — Circumference at C, D, B, F, G, H, I. Length 
from C to F and from F to I. 

For a thigh knee cap — Circumference at E, F, G, H, I. Length from 
F to I. 

For a thigh piece — Circumference at G, H, I. Length from G to I. 

For a knee stocking — Circumference at A, B, C, D, B, F, G. Length 
from floor to F and from F to G. 

For a knee legging— Circumference at C, D, E, F, G. Length from 
C to F and from F to G. 

For a knee cap — Circumference at B, F, G. 

For a garter stocking— Circumference at A, B, C, D, B. Length from 
floor to B. 

For a garter legging — Circumference at C, D, B. Length from C to B. 

For an anklet — Circumference at A, B, C. 

For a wristlet— Circumference at N, O, P. Length from from N to P. 

For an abdominal belt — Circumference at K, L, M, and width in 
front. 

For a shoulder cap— Circumference of chest at T; circumference 
from armpit at S, and from armpit to R ; circumference of arm three 
inches below armpit. State whether for right or left shoulder. 



appendix. 437 



PRICKS FOR SINGLE STOCKINGS OR PIECES. 

Postage and 
Packing. 

Thigh stocking, extra heavy silk $9-oo .36 

Thigh stocking, fine silk 7 50 .36 

Thigh stocking, cotton 5.75 .36 

Thigh legging, extra heavy silk 7.50 .32 

Thigh legging, fine silk 6.00 .32 

Thigh legging, cotton 5.25 .32 

Thigh knee cap, extra heavy silk 5.00 .26 

Thigh knee cap, fine silk 4.00 .26 

Thigh knee cap, cotton 3.50 .26 

Thigh piece, extra heavy silk 3.00 .22 

Thigh piece, fine silk 2.50 .22 

Thigh piece, cotton 2.25 .22 

Knee stocking, extra heavy silk 6.50 .26 

Knee stocking, fine silk 5.00 .26 

Knee stocking, cotton 3.75 .26 

Knee legging, extra heavy silk 5.00 .26 

Knee legging, fine silk 4.00 .26 

Knee legging, cotton 3.50 .26 

Knee cap, extra heavy silk 2 50 .16 

Knee cap, fine silk 2.00 .16 

Knee cap, cotton 1.75 .16 

Garter stocking, extra heavy silk 4.00 .26 

Garter stocking, fine silk 3.00 .26 

Garter stocking, cotton 2.50 .26 

Garter legging, extra heavy silk 2.50 .22 

Garter legging, fine silk 2.00 .22 

Garter legging, cotton 1.75 .22 

Anklet, extra heavy silk 2.50 . 13 

Anklet, fine silk 2.00 .13 

Anklet, cotton 1.75 .13 

Wristlets, silk $ 1 .00 to 2.00 .13 

Shoulder cap, heavy silk 8.00 .28 

Shoulder cap, fine silk 7.00 .28 

Shoulder cap, cotton 6.00 . 28 

Abdominal supporters, silk $10.00 to 15.00 .36 

Abdominal supporters, cotton 8.00 to 10.00 .36 



438 APPENDIX. 




No. 170. Reclining Rolling Chair. 

This cut represents a new style of reclining rolling chair. It is so 
balanced that the occupant can assume any desired position by raising 
or lowering a ratchet. The frame is made of oak with perforated veneer 
seat, back and leg rest. The chair is made in two sizes. 

Child's chair, seat 16x15 inches, back 19 inches high, front wheels 
24 inches, rear wheel 12 inches, will pass through a 26-inch doorway. 

Price, with steel suspension wheels, $21.00; with steel suspension 
wheels, cushion tires, $32. 50. 

Adult's chair. Seat 18x17 inches, back 29 inches high, front wheels 
28 inch, rear wheel 14 inch ; will pass through a 29-inch doorway. 

Price, with steel suspension wheels, $26.00; with steel suspension 
wheels, cushion tires, $39. 75 ; ball bearing wheels, wood rim, cushion 
tires, $46. 50 ; ball bearing wheels, wood rims, pneumatic tires $57. 50. 
Loose cushions for back, seat and leg rest, in raw silk, $13. 50. Loose 
cushions for back seat and leg rest in morocco leather or mohair plush, 
$19. 50. There is no pneumatic tire on the rear wheel. This must be 
sent by express or freight, carrying charges to be paid by purchaser. 



APPENDIX. 



439 




World's Fair Rolling Chair. 



This cut represents the well known World's Fair rolling chair. This 
chair was one of the greatest conveniences at the Columbian Exposition. 
This is the same style chair, new, fitted with ball bearings, cushion tire 
wheels, and is exactly the same construction throughout. This chair is 
well adapted for both indoor and outdoor use, and for comfort and dur- 
ability it cannot be excelled. 

Price, complete, with ball bearings, cushion or pneumatic tires, on 
large wheels, push handle and fenders, $62.00. This must be sent by 
express or freight, carrying charges to be paid by purchaser. 



440 appendix. 



THE MODERN CURE FOR OVERFATNESS. 

A well known author upon this subject says: 

That you may have a clearer conception of what is to follow, I shall 
first remind you that, by the natural law of proportion, fat should 
constitute about the one-fifteenth or one-twentieth of one's weight, and 
that a person's heft may vary ten or fifteen pounds either way from the 
standard of weight to height without its being significant of either dis- 
comfort or disease ; also that a certain quantity of fat is a blessing, as 
it not only improves personal appearance, but is necessary to protect the 
various organs and to maintain their temperature, and also to serve as 
nutrition in time of need. For these purposes it is stored in cells in 
various parts of the body, but more plentifully in some regions than in 
others. 

If any one has a much less proportion than one-twentieth, leanness, 
lankiness or emaciation is observable ; a very much greater proportion 
than say one-ninth or one sixth constitutes corpulence, obesity or over- 
fatness, and although stoutness to a moderate degree is considered an 
element of good health and indicative of the successful working of one's 
physiology, yet fatness alone is a very poor criterion of health ; but, on 
the contrary, it is an element that possesses the power for serious mis- 
chief, because a very great amount of fat necessarily creates heaviness, 
impedes respiration, circulation, locomotion, digestion and other vital 
functions to such a degree that the person who carries such a load of 
bulky ballast is more burdened than blessed. 

In very fat persons all the cellulo-adipose structures are filled to dis- 
tention, more noticeably about the subcutaneous tissues, the breast and 
the abdominal walls; also the abdomen about the intestines, on the sur- 
face of the heart and about the kidneys; and if this morbid accumula- 
tion grows to be excessive these all become buried in fat, which mech- 
anically interferes with both function and nutrition. 

According to my observations there are four common causes of overfat- 
ness: 

Congenitally small lungs with defective oxygenating capacity. 

Eating excessively of all kinds of food. 

Want of lung expending exercise. 

Alcoholics to excess. 

There are numerous well known agents that more or less effectually 
reduce surplus fat, and also counteract its return. Among these, iodine, 
bromine, mercury, lead, arsenic, liquor potassium, lemon juice, sour 
wines, vinegar, purgatives, sweating, semi-starving, baths of various 
kinds, smoking and chewing, fish diet, bladder wrack, phytonllacca, 
gulf weed, and various quack nostrums, each have more or less reputa- 
tion for diminishing weight. 

Some of these when taken sparingly or for a brief while, have proper 



APPENDIX. 441 

place and useful power, but unfortunately, when used in quantities suffi- 
ciently strong, and long enough continued, to destroy any considerable 
amount of fatty tissue, they likewise injure other structures ; therefore, are 
necessarily dangerous to health. Besides, they all act either by saponifying 
the fat or by producing numerical cell -atrophy, either of which exerts 
powerful influence on the lympathic and absorbent systems, not only 
cause re-absorption and destruction of olein, stearin, margrin, proto 
plasm, nuclei, and other physiological constituents of the fat cells, but 
go further, and annihilate myriads of cell membranes, red blood glob- 
ules and other normal and essential elements of the economy ; and as these 
perish, all histologists know, vitality is reduced and health is impaired. 

It is also well known that while, affecting the fat, many of these 
articles also act as slow poisons, and damage or ruin the alimentary 
mucous membranes and the functions of digestion, and thus cause mal- 
assimilation and mal-nutrition, with repugnance to food. These, there- 
fore, are all doubly injurious; and if used in too large quantities or con- 
tinued beyond a certain period, anemia, general debiiity, consumption, 
or other fatal affections may be induced. 

None but an idiot, however fat, wishes to endanger his health by 
unwise efforts to reduce it, and many overweighted persons, anxious 
to throw off their fleshy burden, and aware of the danger of using anti- 
fat drugs, determinedly avoid them, and resort to walking, bicycling, 
gymnastics, rowing, massage, electricity, restricted sleep, thyroid extract, 
skimmed milk and other popular means; while a few begin a regular 
dietary system, Banting's, Ortel's, Kbstein's, Bruen's, or others, which 
all aim to limit the supply of elements that form fat and to increase its 
re-absorption ; and I am glad to say, to the honor of their founders, 
that every dietary system, with which I am acquainted, seems to be based 
on rational principles. 

But ball-and-chain rules, and iron-clad regulations requiring daily 
discomfort, long suffering, semi-starvation, strict dieting, etc., no differ- 
ence by whom recommended, are rarely persevered with to a successful 
degree by persons with simple overfatness, and we rarely meet anyone 
wreathed in fat who has not begun on one or another or several differ- 
ent plans, and after awhile become either careless or disgusted and quit. 

Neither with cases of enormous obesity nor with celebrities of fabu- 
lous proportions nor with overfat invalids or semi-invalids have we had 
any special experience, but if any healthy person, whether male or 
female, weighing less than 300 pounds, with simple uncomplicated over- 
fatness, wishing to make a fair, honest and faithful trial of our plan to 
diminish overtatness, will begin and drink a large glass of water in 
which one heaping teaspoonful of Obesity No. 1 has been dissolved 
twenty or thirty minutes after each of the three daily meals, one day and a 
similar glass of Obesity No. 2 after each of the three daily meals the 
next day, and persistently continue to take them thus, week after week, 
he will begin and gradually lose fat until he comes down to medium 



442 appendix. 

weight and stoutness, and be correspondingly relieved of the discom- 
forts and the dangers of obesity ; after which their use should be discon- 
tinued. 

It is useless to take either of the obesity salts alone, as they act only 
when both are taken, and taken alternately. The temperature at which 
they are used is immaterial. 

While using the obesity salts the person should, as a necessary guide, 
keep tally on his girth and weight by taking his measures and by care- 
fully weighing his body in the same clothes and on the same accurate 
scales every two or three weeks, and if he has lost more than a couple 
of pounds for each week, take less than a teaspoonful of each at every 
drink, and if he has lost less than a couple of pounds for each week, 
squeeze a few teaspoonfuls of lemon juice into each glass of Obesity JNo. 
1, and also add one teaspoonful of aromatic spirits of ammonia to each 
glass of Obesity No. 2. 

He should also lend assistance to the action of the medicine by a not 
too restricted diet, which is not good even for the obese, but by us- 
ing starches, sugars, fats, alcoholics and all other fat forming food but 
sparingly; avoid overeating, and use neither food nor alcoholics except 
the regular meals; also take early and light suppers, so that from that 
time until breakfast, the longest of the three intervals between meals, 
there may be but little material for fattening and favorable conditions for 
reduction ; and especially that there may be complete emptiness of the 
stomach during sleep, so that nature may then utilize some of his sur- 
plus fat as fuel for the ceaseless wear and tear. He should also take 
moderate outdoor exercise, on foot or wheel, or in any other way that 
will increase and deepen his respiration and promote tissue oxidation. 

After taking these salts and following these rules for a while, he 
will find that he is losing part of his girth and a couple pounds of avor- 
dupois every week, and that the loss consists entirely of useless fat; and 
that his appearance, activity and feelings will all be improved — just 
as if there exists some natural antagonism between these salts, taken 
thus, and adipose tissue ; more especially that located in the great fat- 
centers already mentioned. 

The more firm and solid the flesh, and the longer one has been fat, 
the more slowly it yields. Such a one, if quite fat and belonging to a 
constitutionally fat family, with proportionately small lungs, might 
require a persistence with the salts methodically for six months or even 
longer, unless the ammonia and lemon juice are added regularly. 
Ungovernable appetite, failure to exercise, tippling, etc., may also 
retard or prevent success. 

In some of these "stubborn" cases, a considerable decrease of size 
with but little lessening of weight has been observed. 

In addition the salts not only reduce overfatnesss but also tend to 
permanently correct the irregular and excessive fat-making activity on 
which it depends, without injury to health. The person gradually 



appendix. 443 

becomes thinner, looks healthier and feels younger and more active 
as his or her superabundance disappears. At the same time, the skin 
being an elastic and active tissue, contracts correspondingly, leaving 
neither flabbiness nor wrinkles, bagginess nor crow's feet, while brain, 
muscle, nerve, blood and glandular nutrition and strength, all remain 
normal, proving that this method does not cause either pathological 
diminution or shriveling from reducing the flesh or loss of strength ; or 
constipation from impaired digestion, as the various "anti-fat" blood 
depuratives and glandular eliminatives are notoriously apt to do. 

To properly appreciate this fact it must be remembered that a person 
in normal flesh has as much blood, and usually better blood, than a 
similar person whose weight has been ever so much increased by fat, 
and that the salt acts on the fat and not on either the blood, the glands 
or the bowels. 

When the excess is chiefly below the waist, causing what is called 
"large stomach," wearing a snug abdominal supporter or a moderately 
tight abominal binder while pursuing the method, makes the fat dis- 
appear much more promptly from this locality, and also braces up the 
reduced form as absorption progresses. 

The records of eleven cases, seven males and four females, who have 
used the salts show the following positive results : A fat grocer, reduced 
from 310£ pounds to 289 pounds in eleven weeks; barkeeper, reduced 
from 223 to 180 pounds in nineteen weeks; a lawyer, reduced from 191 
to 173 pounds in fourteen weeks; young real estate agent, from 173 to 
151 pounds in twelve weeks; clergyman reduced 16 pounds in nine 
weeks; lady, aged 28 years, from 286£ to 264 pounds in thirteen weeks; 
stout actress, from 173 to 166 pounds in seven weeks; young English 
lady, from 149 to 142 pounds in five weeks; conductor on steam cars, 
from 183 to 174 pounds in six weeks; lady, aged 41, from 173£ to 160£ 
pounds in eleven weeks, and that of a physician, who was reduced from 
211 to 196£ pounds in nine weeks. 

Full directions sent with each bottle of the salts. One pound of each 
contains salt enough for two months' treatment. Price per pound, $1.75. 
Price per half pound, $1.00. 



CURB FOR POISONING BY POISON IVY OR FOR 
POISONING BY ANY OTHER PLANT. 

This is a safe and sure cure for the poisons named above and will 
effect a speedy cure in each instance if used according to directions. 
It has been in use for a number of years and has yet to fail to cure a 
case. It is used extensively by physicians and is recommended by 
them in every instance where they have tried the remedy. 

Directions — First bathe the poisoned surface with water as hot as can 
be endured; continue this for five or ten minutes and immediately on 



444 appendix. 

stopping the bathing apply the powder to the surface while it is yet 
moist. Repeat the application every two or three hours. Four or five 
applications will be sufficient to effect a cure in most cases. Price, 
$1.00 per box. 



SPRING BLOOD MEDICINE. 

In the spring after having passed through a season of sudden changes, 
one often feels the need of something to tone up the system and get 
everything in good working order before the heat of summer comes on. 
Many people supply such a remedy by purchasing a patent medicine of 
some sort. The blood purifier which is here offered for sale is a com- 
bination of those elements which have an alterative effect on the 
human body, and in combination with these are the drugs which tend 
to act as tonics. Among other things, this medicine contains fluid 
extract of Sarsaparilla, Yellow Dock, Gentian, Iodide of Potassium 
and Iron. The medicine is put up in large eight ounce bottles and full 
directions are sent with each bottle. Price $1.00 per bottle. 



EYE WATER. 

The Home Remedy Company is in possession of the formula for Eye 
Water which has long been used by one of the foremost eye specialists 
in this country, in his private practice. It is a very superior Eye Water 
and is used for any of the milder forms of eye trouble which occur. It 
is used when the eyes burn, smart, water, feel as though there were 
sand in them, are red, inflamed, and in fact it may be used with safety 
in any case of sore eyes. Full instructions for its use sent with each 
bottle. Price 50 cents. 



CURE FOR GALLSTONE COLIC. 

No more distressing colic occurs than that produced by gallstones. 
It has been the practice, even among physicians, to give morphine in 
each and every case of gallstone colic. This is not only an unneces- 
sary procedure, but really hurtful to the patient. The remedy which 
is here presented contains no morphine nor any opiate of any kind. 
It is a specific for this form of colic and if used according to directions 
will cure the most severe case of gallstone colic in from ten to twenty 
minutes. 

It will not only cure the colic for the time being, but if taken accord- 
ing to directions will prevent the return of the trouble after a few weeks 
treatment. Full directions sent with each bottle. Price, $1.00. 



appendix. 445 



CHAPPED HANDS. 

Although the chapping of hands may not be called a disease, yet the 
frequency with which it occurs will be excuse enough for giving a treat- 
ment for the trrouble here. To care for chapped hands, take one part 
of glycerine and two parts of alcohol and mix thoroughly ; wash the 
hands carefully and apply the lotion while the hands are moist. This 
will very soon cure the worst form of chapped hands. 



PERSPIRING FEET. 

To check this, bathe the feet each day in cold water and immediately 
rub with the following: Tannic acid, one and one-half drams, alcohol 
four ounces, mix thoroughly. In addition to this, dust the feet freely 
each day with Talcum powder. 



TO REMOVE CORNS. 

A corn is a very troublesome thing and various means have been 
devised for the cure of the callous growths. The removal of the corn 
will not effect a permanent cure, however, as the same thing which 
caused the corn in the first place may cause it again ; therefore in the 
treatment of corns they must first be removed and then the prsseure 
which caused the corn in the first place must be permanently removed. 
Never wear a shoe that even borders on tightness on a foot from which 
a corn has been removed. The removal of a corn is not a difficult mat- 
ter and if care is used and directions followed there is but little need 
of suffering with painful corns. The remedy which is here offered will 
do the work thoroughly, and full directions are sent with each package. 
The application of the remedy causes no pain and from two days to 
two weeks is required to remove a corn. Price, 25 cents per package. 



PILE CURE. 

In the body of the book the subject of piles was taken up and dis- 
cussed and treatment was recommended. In the majority of cases the 
treatment there given will effect a cure, yet some stubborn cases will 
occur, and for such cases the Home Remedy Company has a special 
medicine which has given the highest satisfaction in many cases. It 
will gladly answer any questions as to the treatment and care of this 
disease, and can fully recommend the remedy which is here offered. 
Full instructions sent with each package. This is not a patent medi- 



446 APPKNDIX. 

cine in any sense of the term, but is a remedy compounded on scientific 
principles, and the full formula will be furnished with a package of the 
treatment if it is desired. Price, 50 cents per package. 

TOILET ARTICLES. 

The Home Remedy Company does not attempt to carry a line of 
either toilet articles or toilet supplies. It is, however in such 
close touch with the wholesalers of such articles that it can furnish 
anything which can be bought in a drug store at a very much reduced 
rate. Should any article be wanted, write to the company for prices 
and they will be forwarded promptly. 



AUb 11 1900 



5v ^5l%^4^c^l^ V 



•ears* 



^^r. 



sP&gligra 



a* 



■ISl^MlS&sata 







^sbsssks™ 



Ws$Sft23t& 



A 



MM 






